Model DI-C1.

5
Machine Code: D104/D106
Field Service Manual

17 December, 2010

Important Safety Notices

Responsibilities of the Customer Engineer
Customer Engineer
Maintenance shall be done only by trained customer engineers who have completed service training for
the machine and all optional devices designed for use with the machine.

Reference Material for Maintenance

Maintenance shall be done using the special tools and procedures prescribed for maintenance of the
machine described in the reference materials (service manuals, technical bulletins, operating
instructions, and safety guidelines for customer engineers).
In regard to other safety issues not described in this document, all customer engineers shall strictly
obey procedures and recommendations described the "CE Safety Guide".
Use only consumable supplies and replacement parts designed for use of the machine.

Before Installation, Maintenance

Shipping and Moving the Machine

Work carefully when lifting or moving the machine. If the machine is heavy, two or more customer
engineers may be required to prevent injuries (muscle strains, spinal injuries, etc.) or damage to the
machine if it is dropped or tipped over.
Personnel moving or working around the machine should always wear proper clothing and footwear.
Never wear loose fitting clothing or accessories (neckties, loose sweaters, bracelets, etc.) or casual
footwear (slippers, sandals, etc.) when lifting or moving the machine.
Always unplug the power cord from the power source before you move the product. Before you move
the product, arrange the power cord so it will not fall under the product.

Power

Always disconnect the power plug before doing any maintenance procedure. After switching off the
machine, power is still supplied to the main machine and other devices. To prevent electrical shock,
switch the machine off, wait for a few seconds, then unplug the machine from the power source.
Before you do any checks or adjustments after turning the machine off, work carefully to avoid injury.
After removing covers or opening the machine to do checks or adjustments, never touch electrical
components or moving parts (gears, timing belts, etc.).
After turning the machine on with any cover removed, keep your hands away from electrical
components and moving parts. Never touch the cover of the fusing unit, gears, timing belts, etc.

Installation, Disassembly, and Adjustments

After installation, maintenance, or adjustment, always check the operation of the machine to make
sure that it is operating normally. This ensures that all shipping materials, protective materials, wires
and tags, metal brackets, etc., removed for installation, have been removed and that no tools remain
inside the machine. This also ensures that all release interlock switches have been restored to normal
operation.
Never use your fingers to check moving parts causing spurious noise. Never use your fingers to
lubricate moving parts while the machine is operating.

Special Tools

Use only standard tools approved for machine maintenance.

For special adjustments, use only the special tools and lubricants described in the service manual.
Using tools incorrectly, or using tools that could damage parts, could damage the machine or cause
injuries.

During Maintenance
General

Before you begin a maintenance procedure: 1) Switch the machine off, 2) Disconnect the power plug
from the power source, 3) Allow the machine to cool for at least 10 minutes.

 Avoid touching the components inside the machine that are labeled as hot surfaces.

Safety Devices

Never remove any safety device unless it requires replacement. Always replace safety devices
immediately.
Never do any procedure that defeats the function of any safety device. Modification or removal of a
safety device (fuse, switch, etc.) could lead to a fire and personal injury. Always test the operation of
the machine to ensure that it is operating normally and safely after removal and replacement of any
safety device.
For replacements use only the correct fuses or circuit breakers rated for use with the machine. Using
replacement devices not designed for use with the machine could lead to a fire and personal injuries.

Organic Cleaners

During preventive maintenance, never use any organic cleaners (alcohol, etc.) other than those
described in the service manual.
Make sure the room is well ventilated before using any organic cleaner. Use organic solvents in small
amounts to avoid breathing the fumes and becoming nauseous.
Switch the machine off, unplug it, and allow it to cool before doing preventive maintenance. To avoid
fire or explosion, never use an organic cleaner near any part that generates heat.
Wash your hands thoroughly after cleaning parts with an organic cleaner to contamination of food,
drinks, etc. which could cause illness.
Clean the floor completely after accidental spillage of silicone oil or other materials to prevent slippery
surfaces that could cause accidents leading to hand or leg injuries. Use "My Ace" Silicone Oil Remover
(or dry rags) to soak up spills. For more details, please refer to Technical Bulletin "Silicone Oil
Removal" (A024-50).

Lithium Batteries

Always replace a lithium battery on a PCB with the same type of battery prescribed for use on that
board. Replacing a lithium battery with any type other than the one prescribed for use on the board
could lead to an explosion or damage to the PCB.
Never discard used batteries by mixing them with other trash. Remove them from the work site and
dispose of them in accordance with local laws and regulations regarding the disposal of such items.

Ozone Filters

Always replace ozone filters as soon as their service life expires (as described in the service manual).
An excessive amount of ozone can build up around machines that use ozone filters if they are not
replaced at the prescribed time. Excessive ozone could cause personnel working around the machine
to feel unwell.

Power Plug and Power Cord

Before serving the machine (especially when responding to a service call), always make sure that the
power plug has been inserted completely into the power source. A partially inserted plug could lead
to heat generation (due to a power surge caused by high resistance) and cause a fire or other
problems.
Always check the power plug and make sure that it is free of dust and lint. Clean it if necessary. A
dirty plug can generate heat which could cause a fire.
Inspect the length of the power cord for cuts or other damage. Replace the power cord if necessary.
A frayed or otherwise damaged power cord can cause a short circuit which could lead to a fire or
personal injury from electrical shock.
Check the length of the power cord between the machine and power supply. Make sure the power
cord is not coiled or wrapped around any object such as a table leg. Coiling the power cord can
cause excessive heat to build up and could cause a fire.
Make sure that the area around the power source is free of obstacles so the power cord can be
removed quickly in case of an emergency.
Make sure that the power cord is grounded (earthed) at the power source with the ground wire on
the plug.
Connect the power cord directly into the power source. Never use an extension cord.
When you disconnect the power plug from the power source, always pull on the plug, not the cable.

After Installation, Servicing

Disposal of Used Items

Never incinerate used toner or toner cartridges.

 Toner or toner cartridges thrown into a fire can ignite or explode and cause serious injury. At the work
site always carefully wrap used toner and toner cartridges with plastic bags to avoid spillage before
disposal or removal.

Always dispose of used items (developer, toner, toner cartridges, OPC drums, etc.) in accordance
with the local laws and regulations regarding the disposal of such items.
To protect the environment, never dispose of this product or any kind of waste from consumables at
a household waste collection point. Dispose of these items at one of our dealers or at an authorized
collection site.
Return used selenium drums to the service center for handling in accordance with company policy
regarding the recycling or disposal of such items.

Points to Confirm with Operators

At the end of installation or a service call, instruct the user about use of the machine. Emphasize the following
points.
Show operators how to remove jammed paper and troubleshoot other minor problems by following
the procedures described in the operating instructions.
Point out the parts inside the machine that they should never touch or attempt to remove.
Confirm that operators know how to store and dispose of consumables.
Make sure that all operators have access to an operating instruction manual for the machine.
Confirm that operators have read and understand all the safety instructions described in the operating
instructions.
Demonstrate how to turn off the power and disconnect the power plug (by pulling the plug, not the
cord) if any of the following events occur: 1) something has spilled into the product, 2) service or
repair of the product is necessary, 3) the product cover has been damaged.
Caution operators about removing paper fasteners around the machine. They should never allow
paper clips, staples, or any other small metallic objects to fall into the machine.

Special Safety Instructions for Toner

Accidental Physical Exposure

Work carefully when removing paper jams or replacing toner bottles or cartridges to avoid spilling
toner on clothing or the hands.

 If toner is inhaled, immediately gargle with large amounts of cold water and move to a well ventilated
location. If there are signs of irritation or other problems, seek medical attention.
If toner gets on the skin, wash immediately with soap and cold running water.
If toner gets into the eyes, flush the eyes with cold running water or eye wash. If there are signs of
irritation or other problems, seek medical attention.
If toner is swallowed, drink a large amount of cold water to dilute the ingested toner. If there are signs
of any problem, seek medical attention.
If toner spills on clothing, wash the affected area immediately with soap and cold water. Never use
hot water! Hot water can cause toner to set and permanently stain fabric.

Handling and Storing Toner

Toner, used toner, and developer are extremely flammable.

Never store toner, developer, toner cartridges, or toner bottles (including empty toner bottles or
cartridges) in a location where they will be exposed to high temperature or an open flame.

Always store toner and developer supplies such as toner and developer packages, cartridges, and
bottles (including used toner and empty bottles and cartridges) out of the reach of children.
Always store fresh toner supplies or empty bottles or cartridges in a cool, dry location that is not
exposed to direct sunlight.

Toner Disposal

Never attempt to incinerate toner, used toner, or empty toner containers (bottles or cartridges). Burning
toner can explode and scatter, causing serious burns.
Always wrap used toner and empty toner bottles and cartridges in plastic bags to avoid spillage.
Follow the local laws and regulations regarding the disposal of such items.
Dispose of used toner and toner cartridges at one of our dealers or at an authorized collection site.
Always dispose of used toner cartridges and toner bottles in accordance with the local laws and
regulations regarding the disposal of such items.

Safety Instructions for this Machine

Prevention of Physical Injury
1. Before disassembling or assembling parts of the machine and peripherals, make sure that the machine
and peripheral power cords are unplugged.
2. The plug should be near the machine and easily accessible.
3. Note that some components of the machine and the paper tray unit are supplied with electrical voltage
even if the main power switch is turned off.
4. If any adjustment or operation check has to be made with exterior covers off or open while the main
switch is turned on, keep hands away from electrified or mechanically driven components.
5. If the [Start] key is pressed before the machine completes the warm-up period (the [Start] key starts
blinking red and green ), keep hands away from the mechanical and the electrical components as
the machine starts making copies as soon as the warm-up period is completed.
6. The inside and the metal parts of the fusing unit become extremely hot while the machine is operating.
Be careful to avoid touching those components with your bare hands.
7. To prevent a fire or explosion, keep the machine away from flammable liquids, gases, and aerosols.

Health Safety Conditions

1. Never operate the machine without the ozone filters installed.
2. Always replace the ozone filters with the specified types at the proper intervals.
3. Toner and developer are non-toxic, but if you get either of them in your eyes by accident, it may cause
temporary eye discomfort. Try to remove with eye drops or flush with water as first aid. If unsuccessful,
get medical attention.

Observance of Electrical Safety Standards

1. The machine and its peripherals must be installed and maintained by a customer service representative
who has completed the training course on those models.
2. The NVRAM on the system control board has a lithium battery which can explode if replaced
incorrectly. Replace the NVRAM only with an identical one. The manufacturer recommends replacing
the entire NVRAM. Do not recharge or burn this battery. Used NVRAM must be handled in accordance
with local regulations.

Safety and Ecological Notes for Disposal

1. Do not incinerate toner bottles or used toner. Toner dust may ignite suddenly when exposed to an
open flame.
7

2. Dispose of used toner, developer, and organic photoconductors in accordance with local regulations.
(These are non-toxic supplies.)
3. Dispose of replaced parts in accordance with local regulations.
4. When keeping used lithium batteries in order to dispose of them later, do not put more than 100
batteries per sealed box. Storing larger numbers or not sealing them apart may lead to chemical
reactions and heat build-up.
The danger of explosion exists if a battery of this type is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or an equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Discard used
batteries in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

Laser Safety
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) prohibits the repair of laser-based optical units
in the field. The optical housing unit can only be repaired in a factory or at a location with the requisite
equipment. The laser subsystem is replaceable in the field by a qualified Customer Engineer. The laser
chassis is not repairable in the field. Customer engineers are therefore directed to return all chassis and
laser subsystems to the factory or service depot when replacement of the optical subsystem is required.
Use of controls, or adjustment, or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual
may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

WARNING: Turn off the main switch before attempting any of the procedures in the Laser Optics
Housing Unit section. Laser beams can seriously damage your eyes.
CAUTION MARKING:

Symbols, Abbreviations and Trademarks

This manual uses several symbols and abbreviations. The meaning of those symbols and abbreviations are
as follows:
See or Refer to
Clip ring
Screw
Connector
Clamp
E-ring
SEF

Short Edge Feed

LEF

Long Edge Feed

Trademarks
Microsoft, Windows, and MS-DOS are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and /or other countries.
PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.
PCL is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
PowerPC is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and may be trademarks of their
respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights involved with those marks.

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Important Safety Notices...................................................................................................................................1
Responsibilities of the Customer Engineer....................................................................................................1
Before Installation, Maintenance..................................................................................................................1
During Maintenance......................................................................................................................................2
After Installation, Servicing............................................................................................................................4
Special Safety Instructions for Toner.............................................................................................................5
Safety Instructions for this Machine...............................................................................................................7
Laser Safety.....................................................................................................................................................8
Symbols, Abbreviations and Trademarks.........................................................................................................9
Trademarks.....................................................................................................................................................9

1. Product Information
Specifications....................................................................................................................................................21
Machine Configuration....................................................................................................................................22
Machine D104/D106...............................................................................................................................22
Overview..........................................................................................................................................................25
Mechanical Component Layout.................................................................................................................25
Paper Path....................................................................................................................................................27
Drive Layout..................................................................................................................................................29
Guidance for Those Who are Familiar with Predecessor Products..............................................................30

2. Installation
Installation Requirements.................................................................................................................................31
Environment..................................................................................................................................................31
Machine Level..............................................................................................................................................32
Machine Space Requirements....................................................................................................................32
Power Requirements....................................................................................................................................33
Optional Unit Combinations............................................................................................................................34
Machine Options.........................................................................................................................................34
Controller Options.......................................................................................................................................35
Copier Installation............................................................................................................................................36
Power Sockets for Peripherals....................................................................................................................36
Installation Flow Chart.................................................................................................................................36
Accessory Check..........................................................................................................................................37
Installation Procedure..................................................................................................................................39
10

Moving the Machine...................................................................................................................................54

Transporting the Machine...........................................................................................................................54
Paper Feed Unit (D331)..................................................................................................................................56
Accessory Check..........................................................................................................................................56
Installation Procedure..................................................................................................................................56
Paper Feed Unit (D425)..................................................................................................................................59
Component Check.......................................................................................................................................59
Installation Procedure..................................................................................................................................59
Caster Table (D488)........................................................................................................................................62
Component Check.......................................................................................................................................62
Installation Procedure..................................................................................................................................62
ARDF (D366)....................................................................................................................................................65
Component Check.......................................................................................................................................65
Installation Procedure..................................................................................................................................65
Platen Cover Installation (G329)....................................................................................................................69
Side Tray (D427).............................................................................................................................................70
Component Check.......................................................................................................................................70
Installation Procedure..................................................................................................................................71
1-Bin Tray Unit (D426)....................................................................................................................................74
Component Check.......................................................................................................................................74
Installation Procedure..................................................................................................................................74
Shift Tray Unit (D428)......................................................................................................................................78
Component Check.......................................................................................................................................78
Installation Procedure..................................................................................................................................78
Internal Finisher (D429)...................................................................................................................................81
Component Check.......................................................................................................................................81
Installation Procedure..................................................................................................................................82
Punch Unit (D390)...........................................................................................................................................88
Component Check.......................................................................................................................................88
Installation Procedure..................................................................................................................................89
Envelope Feeder EF3010 (D559)...............................................................................................................101
Component Check....................................................................................................................................101
Installation Procedure................................................................................................................................101

11

Card Reader Bracket Type C5501 (D547)................................................................................................103

Component Check....................................................................................................................................103
Installation Procedure................................................................................................................................104
USB2.0/SD Slot Type G (D556).................................................................................................................106
Accessory Check.......................................................................................................................................106
Installation Procedure................................................................................................................................106
Testing the SD Card/USB Slot.................................................................................................................110
Mechanical Counter (NA Only)..................................................................................................................112
Installation Procedure................................................................................................................................112
Key Counter Bracket......................................................................................................................................114
Installation Procedure................................................................................................................................114
Key Counter Interface Unit............................................................................................................................116
Installation Procedure................................................................................................................................116
Anti-Condensation Heater............................................................................................................................118
Installation Procedure................................................................................................................................118
Tray Heater....................................................................................................................................................122
Installation Procedure................................................................................................................................122
Controller Options.........................................................................................................................................131
Overview....................................................................................................................................................131
SD Card Appli Move................................................................................................................................132
PostScript 3................................................................................................................................................134
File Format Converter................................................................................................................................136
IEEE1284...................................................................................................................................................137
IEEE 802.11 a/g, g (Wireless LAN).......................................................................................................138
Bluetooth....................................................................................................................................................142
PictBridge...................................................................................................................................................143
Browser Unit Type E..................................................................................................................................144
Gigabit Ethernet.........................................................................................................................................146
Check All Connections..............................................................................................................................148

3. Preventive Maintenance
Maintenance Tables......................................................................................................................................149
PM Parts Settings............................................................................................................................................150
Before Removing the Old PM Parts.........................................................................................................150

12

After Installing the New PM parts............................................................................................................151

Preparation before Operation Check......................................................................................................151
Operation Check.......................................................................................................................................151

4. Replacement and Adjustment

Beforehand.....................................................................................................................................................153
Special Tools..................................................................................................................................................154
Image Adjustment..........................................................................................................................................155
Scanning....................................................................................................................................................155
ARDF...........................................................................................................................................................156
Registration................................................................................................................................................158
Erase Margin Adjustment..........................................................................................................................159
Color Registration......................................................................................................................................160
Printer Gamma Correction........................................................................................................................161
Exterior Covers...............................................................................................................................................165
PCDU Toner Collection Bottle..................................................................................................................165
Front Door..................................................................................................................................................165
ITB Cleaning Unit Cover...........................................................................................................................166
Left Cover...................................................................................................................................................167
Rear Cover.................................................................................................................................................168
Rear Lower Cover......................................................................................................................................168
Dust Filter....................................................................................................................................................169
Right Rear Cover.......................................................................................................................................169
Operation Panel........................................................................................................................................170
Touch Panel Position Adjustment..............................................................................................................170
Inner Right Cover.......................................................................................................................................171
Inner Cover................................................................................................................................................172
Front Right Cover.......................................................................................................................................172
Right Upper Cover ...................................................................................................................................173
Left Frame and Left Frame Rear Cover....................................................................................................173
Paper Exit Cover........................................................................................................................................174
Inverter Tray...............................................................................................................................................174
Inner Tray...................................................................................................................................................175
Inner Rear Cover.......................................................................................................................................175

13

Scanner Unit...................................................................................................................................................176
Exposure Glass..........................................................................................................................................176
Original Length Sensors............................................................................................................................178
Exposure Lamp..........................................................................................................................................179
Scanner Motor...........................................................................................................................................182
Sensor Board Unit (SBU)..........................................................................................................................183
Exposure Lamp Stabilizer.........................................................................................................................184
Scanner HP Sensor....................................................................................................................................184
Platen Cover Sensor..................................................................................................................................185
Front Scanner Wire...................................................................................................................................185
Rear Scanner Wire....................................................................................................................................191
Laser Optics....................................................................................................................................................194
Caution Decal Location............................................................................................................................194
Laser Unit....................................................................................................................................................194
Polygon Mirror Motor...............................................................................................................................199
Image Creation..............................................................................................................................................201
PCDU (Photo Conductor and Development Unit)...................................................................................201
Drum Unit and Development Unit............................................................................................................202
Toner Hopper Unit.....................................................................................................................................205
Toner Supply Motor..................................................................................................................................208
Toner Collection Motor.............................................................................................................................210
PCDU Toner Collection Bottle Full Sensor...............................................................................................212
PCDU Toner Collection Bottle Set Switch................................................................................................212
RFID Board.................................................................................................................................................213
Image Transfer...............................................................................................................................................215
ITB Cleaning Unit.......................................................................................................................................215
ITB Toner Collection Bottle Full Sensor....................................................................................................216
ITB (Image Transfer Belt) Unit...................................................................................................................216
ITB Unit Motor............................................................................................................................................217
Image Transfer Belt....................................................................................................................................218
ITB Contact Motor.....................................................................................................................................222
ITB Contact Sensor....................................................................................................................................224
Paper Transfer................................................................................................................................................225

14

PTR (Paper Transfer Roller) Unit...............................................................................................................225

Paper Transfer Unit Full-Open..................................................................................................................226
ID Sensor Board........................................................................................................................................227
PTR Contact Motor....................................................................................................................................229
PTR Contact Sensor...................................................................................................................................231
Temperature and Humidity Sensor..........................................................................................................232
Drive Unit........................................................................................................................................................233
Gear Unit...................................................................................................................................................233
Registration Motor.....................................................................................................................................235
Paper Feed Motor: T1...............................................................................................................................236
Paper Feed Motor: T2...............................................................................................................................237
Drum Motor: CMY....................................................................................................................................237
Development Motor: CMY.......................................................................................................................238
Drum/Development Motor: K..................................................................................................................238
Development Clutch: K.............................................................................................................................239
Fusing/Paper Exit Motor..........................................................................................................................239
Fusing..............................................................................................................................................................242
Fusing Unit..................................................................................................................................................242
Entrance Guide Plate................................................................................................................................243
Stripper Plate.............................................................................................................................................244
Exit Guide Plate Cleaning Procedure......................................................................................................246
Fusing Gear Shafts Lubrication Procedure..............................................................................................247
Heating Roller Fusing Lamp......................................................................................................................248
Heating Roller Unit....................................................................................................................................249
Pressure Roller............................................................................................................................................252
Heating Roller Thermostats.......................................................................................................................254
Heating Roller Thermistor..........................................................................................................................255
Pressure Roller Thermistor ........................................................................................................................256
Thermopile.................................................................................................................................................258
Cleaning Unit (Option) Installation Procedure........................................................................................260
Paper Feed.....................................................................................................................................................262
Paper Tray..................................................................................................................................................262
Feed Roller.................................................................................................................................................262

15

Friction Pad................................................................................................................................................263
Paper Size Switch......................................................................................................................................264
Paper End Sensor......................................................................................................................................265
Registration Sensor....................................................................................................................................266
Vertical Transport Sensor .........................................................................................................................268
Paper Exit........................................................................................................................................................272
Junction Gate Solenoid Fan.....................................................................................................................272
Paper Exit Unit...........................................................................................................................................272
Fusing Exit Sensor......................................................................................................................................274
Paper Exit Sensor.......................................................................................................................................275
Inverter Sensor...........................................................................................................................................276
Inverter Motor............................................................................................................................................277
Fusing Front Fan.........................................................................................................................................278
Duplex Unit.....................................................................................................................................................280
Duplex Unit................................................................................................................................................280
Duplex Entrance Sensor............................................................................................................................281
Duplex Exit Sensor....................................................................................................................................283
Duplex Entrance Motor.............................................................................................................................284
Duplex Exit Motor.....................................................................................................................................285
By-pass Motor...........................................................................................................................................285
By-pass Tray Unit.......................................................................................................................................286
By-pass Paper Length Sensor ..................................................................................................................287
By-Pass Paper Size Sensor.......................................................................................................................288
By-pass Paper End Sensor........................................................................................................................290
By-pass Feed Roller...................................................................................................................................290
By-pass Tray HP Sensor............................................................................................................................291
Electrical Components...................................................................................................................................292
Boards........................................................................................................................................................292
Controller Box Cover ...............................................................................................................................293
Controller Box............................................................................................................................................294
BCU............................................................................................................................................................294
HDD............................................................................................................................................................296
IPU Board...................................................................................................................................................297

16

Controller Box Fan....................................................................................................................................298

Fusing Rear Fan.........................................................................................................................................299
DRB.............................................................................................................................................................300
SDVDB........................................................................................................................................................300
PSU.............................................................................................................................................................301
HVPS: TTS Board.......................................................................................................................................302
HVPS: CB Board........................................................................................................................................302
Controller Board........................................................................................................................................303
NVRAM Replacement Procedure............................................................................................................307

5. System Maintenance
Service Program Mode.................................................................................................................................311
SP Tables....................................................................................................................................................311
Types of SP Modes....................................................................................................................................311
Remarks......................................................................................................................................................315
Main SP Tables-1..........................................................................................................................................317
SP1-XXX (Feed).........................................................................................................................................317
Main SP Tables-2..........................................................................................................................................338
SP2-XXX (Drum).........................................................................................................................................338
Main SP Tables-3..........................................................................................................................................365
SP3-XXX (Process).....................................................................................................................................365
Main SP Tables-4..........................................................................................................................................400
SP4-XXX (Scanner)....................................................................................................................................400
Main SP Tables-5..........................................................................................................................................412
SP5-XXX (Mode).......................................................................................................................................412
Main SP Tables-6..........................................................................................................................................469
SP6-XXX (Peripherals)...............................................................................................................................469
Main SP Tables-7..........................................................................................................................................472
SP7-XXX (Data Log)..................................................................................................................................472
Main SP Tables-8..........................................................................................................................................504
Input and Output Check Tables...............................................................................................................504
Main SP Tables-9..........................................................................................................................................520
Printer Service Mode.................................................................................................................................520
Scanner SP Mode.....................................................................................................................................528

17

Firmware Update...........................................................................................................................................530
Type of Firmware.......................................................................................................................................530
Before You Begin.......................................................................................................................................531
Updating Firmware ..................................................................................................................................532
Updating the LCDC for the Operation Panel..........................................................................................534
Handling Firmware Update Errors...........................................................................................................535
Java VM Updating Procedure..................................................................................................................536
App2Me Updating Procedure.................................................................................................................537
Brower Unit Updating Procedure.............................................................................................................538
Installing Another Language.........................................................................................................................540
Reboot/System Setting Reset.......................................................................................................................543
Software Reset...........................................................................................................................................543
System Settings and Copy Setting Reset..................................................................................................543
Controller Self-Diagnostics...........................................................................................................................545
Overview....................................................................................................................................................545
SD Card Appli Move....................................................................................................................................547
Overview....................................................................................................................................................547
Move Exec.................................................................................................................................................548
Undo Exec..................................................................................................................................................549
Downloading Stamp Data............................................................................................................................550
NVRAM Data Upload/Download..............................................................................................................551
Uploading Content of NVRAM to an SD card.......................................................................................551
Downloading an SD Card to NVRAM....................................................................................................551
Address Book Upload/Download..............................................................................................................553
Information List...........................................................................................................................................553
Download..................................................................................................................................................553
Upload.......................................................................................................................................................554
Using the Debug Log.....................................................................................................................................555
Overview....................................................................................................................................................555
Switching ON and Setting UP Save Debug Log.....................................................................................555
Retrieving the Debug Log from the HDD.................................................................................................559
Recording Errors Manually.......................................................................................................................559
Card Save Function.......................................................................................................................................560

18

Overview....................................................................................................................................................560
Procedure...................................................................................................................................................560

6. Troubleshooting
SC Tables.......................................................................................................................................................565
Service Call Conditions.............................................................................................................................565
SC1xx: Scanning.......................................................................................................................................568
SC 2xx: Exposure......................................................................................................................................572
SC3xx: Image Processing 1..................................................................................................................577
SC4xx: Image Processing - 2...................................................................................................................582
SC5xx: Paper Feed and Fusing................................................................................................................586
SC6xx: Device Communication...............................................................................................................599
SC7xx: Peripherals....................................................................................................................................608
SC8xx: Overall System.............................................................................................................................614
SC9xx: Miscellaneous..............................................................................................................................632
Process Control Error Conditions..................................................................................................................637
Developer Initialization Result..................................................................................................................637
Process Control Self-Check Result............................................................................................................638
Line Position Adjustment Result.................................................................................................................640
Troubleshooting Guide..................................................................................................................................642
Image Quality............................................................................................................................................642
Line Position Adjustment............................................................................................................................644
Image Problems at Regular Intervals.......................................................................................................650
Sub-scan Magnification Error..................................................................................................................651
Trapezoid Image Adjustment...................................................................................................................654
Loud Squeaking Noise from PCDU.........................................................................................................657
Loud Noise from the Paper Tray..............................................................................................................660
Grainy Image............................................................................................................................................660
Toner Supply Error....................................................................................................................................668
Paper Jam Troubleshooting......................................................................................................................669
No Feed Paper Jam from PFU..................................................................................................................682
Setting for Special Paper 4, 5 and 6 Mode...........................................................................................683
Jam Detection.................................................................................................................................................693
Paper Jam Display.....................................................................................................................................693

19

Jam Codes and Display Codes................................................................................................................694

Electrical Component Defects.......................................................................................................................699
Sensors ......................................................................................................................................................699
Blown Fuse Conditions..............................................................................................................................703
Scanner Test Mode........................................................................................................................................705
SBU Test Mode..........................................................................................................................................705
IPU Test Mode...........................................................................................................................................705

7. Energy Saving
Energy Save...................................................................................................................................................707
Energy Saver Modes................................................................................................................................707
Energy Save Effectiveness........................................................................................................................708
Paper Save.....................................................................................................................................................710
Effectiveness of Duplex/Combine Function............................................................................................710

INDEX...........................................................................................................................................................715

20

1. Product Information
Specifications

See "Appendices" for the following information:

General Specifications
Supported Paper Sizes
Software Accessories
Optional Equipment

21

1. Product Information

Machine Configuration
1

22

Machine D104/D106

Item

Machine
Code

Call
out

Mainframe

D104/
D106

[1]

D104: C1.5a, D106: C1.5c

Platen cover

G329

[2]

One from the two;

ARDF

D366

[3]

[3] is standard.

Side tray

D427

[4]

1-bin tray

D426

[12]

Shift tray

D428

[11]

Internal finisher

D429

[10]

Remarks

One of the following 4 choices: [10] only, [11] only, [12]

only, or [11]+[12]

Machine Configuration

Machine
Code

Item
Punch unit: 2/3
holes

D390-17

Punch unit: 2 holes

D390-27

Punch unit: 4 holes

D390-31

Call
out

Remarks

[9]

Requires [10].
Requires [10].

Two-tray paper
feed unit

D331

[6]

One-tray paper
feed unit

D425

[7]

Caster Table

D448

[8]

Envelope Feeder

D559

[5]

One from [6], [7], and [8];

The one-tray PFU [6] requires [8].

Item

If neither [6] nor [7] is installed, install [8] if required by the

customer.
This option can be installed only in the tray 1 of the
mainframe.

Machine code

Remark

USB2.0/SD Slot Type G

D556

Card Reader Bracket

D547

Fax Option Type C2551

D555

Memory Unit Type B

G578

Hand Set

B433

Gigabit Ethernet Type B

IEEE 1284
Wireless LAN
(IEEE 802.11a/g)
Wireless LAN
(IEEE 802.11g)
Bluetooth
File Format Converter

Requires [10].

D377-21

SAF memory:
Requires the Fax Option.
For NA model only: Requires the Fax Option.
-

B679
D377-01, 02

D377-19

You can only install one of these at a time.

B826
D377-04

23

1. Product Information

Optional Counter Interface Unit

Type A

B870

Key Counter Bracket

A674

Postscript3 Unit Type C2551

D556-4, -5, -6

IPDS Unit Type C2551

D556-12, -13,
-14

Camera Direct Print Card Type I

Browser Unit Type E

24

You can only install one of these in SD slot 1 at

a time.

D546
D430-05, 06, 07

In SD card slot 2

Overview

Overview
Mechanical Component Layout

25

1. Product Information

1. Scanner HP sensor
2. 2nd carriage

3. 1st carriage
4. Original length sensor
5. Lens
6. SBU
7. Inverter roller
8. Paper exit roller
9. Junction gate
10. Duplex unit
11. Fusing unit
12. PTR (Paper transfer roller) unit
13. Registration roller
14. Vertical transport roller 1
15. By-pass feed roller

26

16. Feed roller: T1

17. Vertical transport roller 2
18. Feed roller: T1
19. Vertical transport roller 3
20. Tray 2
21. Tray 1
22. Laser unit
23. Drum unit
24. Development unit
25. ITB cleaning unit
26. ITB roller
27. Toner bottle
28. ITB (Image Transfer Belt) unit
29. Inner Tray

Overview

Paper Path

With options

1. DF path
2. Exit path: Straight feed out
3. Exit path: Side tray
4. Duplex path
5. Vertical transport path: Tray 1

6. By-pass tray path

7. Vertical transport path: Tray 2
8. Vertical transport path: Tray 3 (option)
9. Vertical transport path: Tray 4 (option)
10. Inverter path (option)
11. Exit path: Staple/ Shift

27

1. Product Information

Without options

1. DF path

5. By-pass tray path

2. Inverter path

6. Vertical transport path: Tray 2

3. Duplex path

7. Exit path

4. Vertical transport path: T1

28

Overview

Drive Layout

1. Scanner motor

10. Paper feed motor: T1

2. Toner supply motors

11. By-pass motor

3. ITB contact motor

12. Registration motor

4. Used toner collection motor

13. Duplex exit motor

5. Drum motor: CMY

14. PTR contact motor

6. Development motor: CMY

15. ITB unit motor

7. Development clutch: K

16. Duplex entrance motor

8. Drum/Development motor: K

17. Fusing/Paper exit motor

9. Paper feed motor: T2

18. Inverter motor

29

1. Product Information

Guidance for Those Who are Familiar with

Predecessor Products
Machine D104/D106 is a successor model to Machine D038/D041. If you have experience with the
predecessor products, the following information will be of help when you read this manual.
Different Points from Predecessor Products

30

D104/D106

D038/D041

Security Card

Standard

Optional

VM Card

Standard

Optional

Safety shutdown function

Available

Not available

2. Installation
Installation Requirements
Environment

1. Temperature Range: 10C to 32C (50F to 89.6F)

2. Humidity Range: 15% to 80% RH
3. Ambient Illumination: Less than 1500 lux (do not expose to direct sunlight)
4. Ventilation: 3 times/hr/person or more
5. Do not let the machine get exposed to the following:
1) Cool air from an air conditioner
2) Heat from a heater
6. Do not install the machine in areas that are exposed to corrosive gas.
7. Install the machine at locations lower than 2,000 m (6,560 ft.) above sea level.
8. Install the machine on a strong, level base. (Inclination on any side must be no more than 5 mm.)
9. Do not install the machine in areas that get strong vibrations.
Do not leave the toner bottle in a place directly exposed to sunlight.

31

2. Installation

The toner bottle must be kept at a temperature of 35C (95F) or less. Be careful not to leave the
toner bottle in a hot place when transporting or storing it.

Machine Level

Front to back: Within 5 mm (0.2")

Right to left: Within 5 mm (0.2")

Machine Space Requirements

This machine, which uses high voltage power sources, can generate ozone gas. High ozone density
is harmful to human health. Therefore, the machine must be installed in a well-ventilated room.

A: Over 100 mm (3.9")

B: Over 100 mm (3.9")
C: Over 315 mm (12.4")
D: Over 400 mm (15.7")
Put the machine near the power source with the clearance shown above.

32

Installation Requirements

Power Requirements

Insert the plug firmly in the outlet.

Do not use an outlet extension plug or cord.
Ground the machine.

1. Input voltage level:

120 V to 127 V, 60 Hz: More than 12 A
220 V to 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz: More than 10 A
2. Permissible voltage fluctuation: 10 %
3. Do not put things on the power cord.

33

2. Installation

Optional Unit Combinations

Machine Options

No.

Options

2-tray paper feed unit

1-tray paper feed unit

Caster table

Envelop Feeder

Platen cover

ARDF (Standard)

1-bin tray unit

Shift tray

Side Tray

10

Internal finisher

11

*Punch kit (4 types)

No. 10 required; One of the types

12

Fax unit

13

Memory Unit (32M)*

Fax unit required

14

USB2.0/SD Slot Type G

15

Card Reader Bracket

16

ADF Handle Type B

17

Optional Counter Interface Unit

18

Key Counter Bracket

*: Child options (Child options require a parent option.)

34

Remarks

One from No.1 or No.2 (No. 2

requires No. 3)

This option can be installed only in

the tray 1 of the mainframe.
One from No.5 or No.6

If No 10 is installed, then No 7 and/

or No 8 cannot be installed.

One from No. 15 or No. 16

Optional Unit Combinations

Controller Options
No.

Options

IEEE 802.11a/g

IEEE 1284

Bluetooth

File Format Converter

Gigabit Ethernet

PostScript 3

PictBridge

Browser Unit

Remarks

One from six items (I/F Slot)

One of these (SD card slot 1)

SD card slot 2 (during
installation only)

35

2. Installation

Copier Installation
Power Sockets for Peripherals

CAUTION
Rating voltage for peripherals.
Make sure to plug the cables into the correct sockets.

[1] ARDF: Rating voltage output connector for accessory Max. DC24V

[2] Finisher: Rating voltage output connector for accessory Max. DC24V

Installation Flow Chart

This flow chart shows the best procedure for installation.

36

Copier Installation

*1: The shift tray should be installed first if you want to install the shift tray with the 1-bin tray at the same
time.

Accessory Check
Check the quantity and condition of these accessories.
No.

Description

Qty

Destination
-17, -27

1.

Stamp

2.

EU Safety Sheet

3.

WEEE

-27

37

2. Installation

No.

38

Description

Qty

Destination
--17, -19, -21,
-27, -28, -29

4.

Certification

5.

Warranty Sheet (Chinese)

6.

Operating Instruction About this machine

7.

Operating Instruction Troubleshooting

8.

Operating Instruction Quick Reference Copy Guide

9.

-17, -29, -21,

-19

-27, -29, -21,

-19

Operating Instruction Quick Reference Printer Guide

10.

Operating Instruction Quick Reference Scanner Guide

-17, -27, -29,

-21, -19

11.

Operating Instruction Manual for This Machine

12.

Operating Instruction Safety Information

13.

CD-ROM Instruction About this machine

14.

CD-ROM Instruction Troubleshooting

15.

CD-ROM Instruction Copy/Document Server Reference

16.

CD-ROM Instruction Facsimile Reference

17.

CD-ROM Instruction Printer Reference

18.

CD-ROM Instruction Scanner Reference

19.

CD-ROM Instruction Network and System Settings Reference

20.

CD-ROM Instruction Security Reference

21.

PostScript 3 Supplement

22.

Printer Driver CD-ROM

23.

Scanner Driver & Utility CD-ROM

24.

Clear Cover

25.

SD Card (Java VM)

26.

Inverter Tray

-27

-17, -27, -29,

-21, -19

-27, -29, -21,

-19

-29

-17, -27, -29

-17, -27, -29,

-21, -19

Copier Installation

No.

Description

27.

Handle Cover

28.

Decal - Paper Size

29.

Sheet: Data: Display: Plain

Qty

Destination

-17, -27, -29,

-21, -19

-17, -27, -29,

-21, -19

-27, -29, -21,

-19

Installation Procedure

Remove the tapes from the development units before you turn the main switch on. The development
units can be severely damaged if you do not remove the tapes.
Put the machine on the paper tray unit first if you install an optional paper tray unit at the same time. Then
install the machine and other options.
Keep the shipping retainers after you install the machine. You may need them in the future if you
transport the machine to another location.

Hold the handles [A] and grips [B] when lifting or moving the machine.

39

2. Installation

Do not hold the right bottom frame [C] of the machine when lifting or moving the machine. If you do
so, the right bottom frame [C] of the machine may be bent.

Tapes and Retainers

1. Remove all the tapes and retainers on the machine.

40

Copier Installation

2. Open the DF left cover [A], and then remove all the tapes and retainer on the ADF if the ADF has
been installed.
3. Open the ADF unit, and then remove all the tapes and plastic package.
Keep the SD card for the Java VM and the decal sheet for the tray number and paper size. These
items will be used in the later step.

4. Pull out the tray 1 and 2 [A], and then remove all the tapes and retainers in the tray 1 and 2.

41

2. Installation

5. Remove the scanner unit stay [A].

6. Keep the scanner unit stay in the cutout [B] in the inner tray.
For the EU models, the scanner unit stay cannot be inserted in the cutout on the inner tray. You
must bring this stay back to your depot.

7. Install the inverter tray [A] (hooks).

42

Copier Installation

8. Open the duplex unit [A].

9. Remove the sheet of paper [B] from the fusing unit.

10. Open the paper transfer unit [A].

11. Remove the front and rear stoppers [B] with a red tag.
12. Close the duplex unit.

43

2. Installation

13. Attach the handle cover [A] to the front side of the duplex unit.

Developer and Toner Bottles

1. Open the front door [A], and then remove the PCDU toner collection bottle [B].

2. Remove the ITB lock lever [A] from the PCDU toner collection bottle.
Keep this lever for the later step.

44

Copier Installation

3. Remove four tapes [A] from the four development units.

4. Remove the all tapes [A] from the toner hopper units.
The toner hopper cover [B] can be removed with tape [C].
Make sure that the all toner hopper covers are removed, when removing all tapes.

45

2. Installation

5. Check if the toner hopper shutter [A] is fully closed.

If the toner hopper shutter is not fully closed and the inlet [B] of the toner hopper unit is visible,
the toner bottle cannot be installed properly.

6. Attach the ITB lock lever [A] to the ITB contact arm [B].
The arrow mark on the top of the ITB lock lever should be pointed to the machine.
This lock lever will not be removed once it is attached to the ITB contact arm.
7. Press the ITB lock lever [C] and turn it down as shown above.
8. Reinstall the PCDU toner collection bottle.

46

Copier Installation

9. Take out the toner bottle package [A] from the toner bottle box [B].
10. Unpack the toner bottle package, and then remove the tape [C].
11. Shake each toner bottle five or six times.

12. Slide the toner bottles [A] in toner bottle cartridges.

Each toner bottle has unique projections [B]. This prevents the toner bottle from being loaded in
a wrong toner hopper unit.

47

2. Installation

13. Push the toner bottle, and then turn each one to the right (clockwise).

14. Remove the SD card slot cover [A] (

x 1).

15. Insert the SD Card (Java VM) provided in the accessories into SD slot 2 [B].
16. Reattach the SD card slot cover (

x 1).

17. Switch the machine on.

18. On the operation panel, remove the bottom blank keytop and replace it with the keytop provided.
19. Attach the decal to the copier.
20. Close the front door.

Paper Trays

1. Pull each paper tray [A] out. Then adjust the side guides and end guide to match the paper size.
To move the side guides, first pull out the tray fully. Then push down the green lock at the rear
inside the tray.

48

Copier Installation

Emblem and Decals

1. Attach the correct emblem [A] and the cover [B] to the front door [C] of the machine, if the emblem
is not attached.
If you want to change the emblem that has been already attached, remove the panel with an
object (not a sharp object) as shown [D], and then install the correct emblem.
2. Attach the correct paper tray number and size decals to the paper trays [E].
Paper tray number and size decals are also used for the optional paper tray or the optional LCT.
Keep these decals for use with these optional units.

Initialize the Developer

1. Make sure that the platen or ARDF is closed and the main power is turned off.
2. Plug in the machine.
3. Turn the main power switch on. The machine automatically starts the initialization procedure. The Start
button LED turns green when this procedure has finished.
4. Make copies of image samples (text, photo, and text/photo modes).
5. Do the Automatic Color Calibration process (ACC) for each mode (Copy mode, Printer 600 x 600
dpi, Printer 1800 x 600 dpi, and Printer 1200 x 1200 dpi) as follows:
1) Print the ACC test pattern (User tools > Maintenance > ACC > Start).
2) Put the printout on the exposure glass.
3) Put 10 sheets of white paper on top of the test chart.
49

2. Installation

4) Close the ARDF or the platen cover.

5) Press "Start Scanning" on the LCD panel. The machine starts the ACC.
6. Check that the sample image has been copied normally.
7. Open the front cover.

8. Remove the instruction guide sheet [A], and make sure the SMC report [B] is stored as shown above.
Then replace the instruction guide sheet.

Settings Relevant to the Service Contract

Change the necessary settings for the following SP modes if the customer has made a service contract.
You must select one of the counter methods (developments/prints) in accordance with the contract
( SP5045-001).
Counting method
SP No.

SP5-045-001

Function

Default

Specifies if the counting method used in meter charge

mode is based on developments or prints. NOTE: You
"0": Developments
can set this one time only. You cannot change the
setting after you have set it for the first time.

A3/11" x 17" double counting

SP No.
SP5-104-001

Function

Specifies whether the counter is doubled for A3/11"

x 17" paper. When you have to change this setting, "No": Single counting
contact your supervisor.

Service Tel. No. Setting

50

Default

Copier Installation

SP No.
SP5-812-001
through 004

Function

Default

5812-002 programs the service station fax number.

The number is printed on the counter list when the
meter charge mode is selected. This lets the user fax
the counter data to the service station.

Settings for @Remote Service

Prepare and check the following check points before you visit the customer site. For details, ask the
@Remote key person.
Check points before making @Remote settings
1. The setting of SP5816-201 in the mainframe must be "0".
2. Print the SMC with SP5990-002 and then check if a device ID2 (SP5811-003) must be correctly
programmed.
6 spaces must be put between the 3-digit prefix and the following 8-digit number (e.g.
xxx______xxxxxxxx).
ID2 (SP5811-003) and the serial number (SP5811-001) must be the same (e.g. ID2:
A01______23456789 = serial No. A0123456789)
3. The following settings must be correctly programmed.
Proxy server IP address (SP5816-063)
Proxy server Port number (SP5816-064)
Proxy User ID (SP5816-065)
Proxy Password (SP5816-066)
4. Get a Request Number
Execute the @Remote Settings
1. Enter the SP mode.
2. Input the Request number which you have obtained from @Remote Center GUI, and then enter [OK]
with SP5816-202.
3. Confirm the Request number, and then click [EXECUTE] with SP5816-203.
4. Check the confirmation result with SP5816-204.
Value

Meaning

Solution/ Workaround

Succeeded

Request number error

Check the request number again.

51

2. Installation

Value

Meaning

Solution/ Workaround

Communication error (proxy enabled) Check the network condition.

Communication error (proxy disabled) Check the network condition.

Proxy error (Illegal user name or

password)

Check Proxy user name and password.

Communication error

Check the network condition.

Other error

See "SP5816-208 Error Codes" below this.

Request number confirmation

executing

Processing Please wait.

5. Make sure that the screen displays the Location Information with SP5816-205 only when it has been
input at the Center GUI.
6. Click [EXECUTE] to execute the registration with SP5816-206.
7. Check the registration result with SP5816-207.
Value

Meaning

Succeeded

Request number error

Check the request number again.

Already registered

Check the registration status.

Communication error (proxy enabled) Check the network condition.

Communication error (proxy disabled) Check the network condition.

Proxy error (Illegal user name or

password)

Check Proxy user name and password.

Other error

See "SP5816-208 Error Codes" below this.

Request number confirmation

executing

Processing Please wait.

8. Exit the SP mode.

SP5816-208 Error Codes

52

Solution/ Workaround

Copier Installation

Cause

Code
-12002

Operation Error,
Incorrect Setting

Meaning
Inquiry, registration attempted
without acquiring Request No.

Solution/ Workaround
Obtain a Request Number
before attempting the Inquiry or
Registration.

-12003 Attempted registration without

execution of a confirmation and no
previous registration.

Perform Confirmation before

attempting the Registration.

-12004 Attempted setting with illegal entries

for certification and ID2.

Check ID2 of the mainframe.

-12005 @Remote communication is

prohibited. The device has an
Embedded RC gate-related
problem.

Make sure that "Remote

Service" in User Tools is set to
"Do not prohibit".

-12006 A confirmation request was made

after the confirmation had been
already completed.

Execute registration.

-12007 The request number used at

registration was different from the
one used at confirmation.

Check Request No.

-12008

Update certification failed because

mainframe was in use.

Check the mainframe condition.

If the mainframe is in use, try
again later.

53

2. Installation

Cause

Code

Meaning

Solution/ Workaround

-2385 Other error

-2387 Not supported at the Service Center
-2389 Database out of service

-2390 Program out of service

-2391
Error Caused by
Response from
GW URL

Two registrations for the same

mainframe

Check the registration condition

of the mainframe

-2392 Parameter error

-2393 External RCG not managed
-2394 Mainframe not managed
-2395 Box ID for external RCG is illegal.
-2396

Mainframe ID for external RCG is

illegal.

-2397 Incorrect ID2 format

Check the ID2 of the mainframe.

-2398 Incorrect request number format

Check the Request No.

Moving the Machine

This section shows you how to manually move the machine from one floor to another floor. See the section
"Transporting the Machine" if you have to pack the machine and move it a longer distance.
Remove all trays from the optional paper feed unit.

Transporting the Machine

Main Frame
1. Do SP 4806-001 to move the scanner carriage from the home position. This prevents dust from falling
into the machine during transportation.
2. Make sure there is no paper left in the paper trays. Then fix down the bottom plates with a sheet of
paper and tape.
3. Do one of the following:

54

Copier Installation

Attach shipping tape to the covers and doors.

Shrink-wrap the machine tightly.
After you move the machine, Make sure you do the "Auto Color Registration" as follows. This
optimizes color registration.
Do the "Forced Line Position Adj. Mode c" (SP2-111-3).
Then do the "Forced Line Position Adj. Mode a" (SP2-111-1).
To check if SP 2-111-1 was successful, watch the screen during the process. A message is
displayed at the end. Also, you can check the result with SP 2-194-10 to -12.

Make sure that the side fences in the trays are correctly positioned to prevent color registration
errors.

55

2. Installation

Paper Feed Unit (D331)

Accessory Check

Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list.
No.

Description

Qty

Paper Feed Unit

Screw - M4 x 10

Securing Bracket

Installation Procedure

Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure.
The handles of the main machine for lifting must be inserted inside the machine and locked, unless
these handles are used for the installation or relocation of the main machine.
You need two or more persons to lift the copier. The copier is highly unstable when lifted by one
person, and may cause human injury or property damage.
56

Paper Feed Unit (D331)

1. Remove the strips of tape.

2. Set the copier [A] on the paper tray unit [B].

When installing the copier, be careful not to pinch the cable [C].

3. Remove the connector cover [A] (rivet screw x 1).

4. Connect the cable [B] to the copier, as shown.
5. Attach a securing bracket [C] to each side of the paper tray unit, as shown (

x 1: M3 x 8 each).

6. Re-install the connector cover.

57

2. Installation

7. Remove the 1st and 2nd paper trays [A] and secure the paper tray unit with two screws (M4 x 10)
[B].
8. Reinstall all the paper trays.
9. Attach the appropriate paper tray number decal and paper size decal to each handle of the trays.
The paper tray number and size decal sheet is in the accessory box of the main machine.

10. Rotate the adjuster [A] until the machine cannot be pushed across the floor.
11. Load paper into the paper trays and select the proper paper size.
12. Turn on the main switch.
13. Adjust the registration for each tray (

Image Adjustment).

For tray 3, use SP1002-004

For tray 4, use SP1002-005
14. Check the machines operation and copy quality.
58

Paper Feed Unit (D425)

Paper Feed Unit (D425)

Component Check
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list.
No.

Description

Qty

Paper Feed Unit

Securing bracket

Screw (M4 x 10)

Installation Procedure

Turn off the main switch of the copier and unplug the power cord before you start the installation
procedure.
You need two or more persons to lift the copier. The copier is highly unstable when lifted by one
person, and may cause human injury or property damage.
Do not lift the copier with the paper feed unit installed. The handle and grips may be damaged.

The one-tray paper feed unit must be installed on the caster table (D448). Prepare the caster table
first before installing this unit.
59

2. Installation

1. Remove all tape on the paper feed unit.

2. Remove the paper tray and remove all tapes and padding.
3. Put the paper tray unit on the caster table (D448).
For details about the installation of the caster table, see the Caster Table (D488) installation
procedure.

4. Grasp the handle [A] and grips [B] of the machine.

5. Lift the copier and install it on the paper feed unit [C].
Hold the handle and grips of the machine when you lift and move the machine.

60

Paper Feed Unit (D425)

6. Remove the rear connector cover [A] of the main machine (rivet screw x 1).
7. Connect the harness [B] to the main machine.
8. Reinstall the rear connector cover [A] (rivet screw x 1).
9. Remove tray 1 and 2 of the machine.
10. Fasten the screws (M4 x 10) [C].
11. Reinstall all trays.
12. Attach the securing brackets [D] (M4 x 10;

x 1 each).

13. Load paper into the paper feed unit.

14. Turn on the main power switch of the machine.
15. Adjust the registration for each tray (

Image Adjustment).

Use SP1002-004
16. Check the paper feed unit operation and copy quality.

61

2. Installation

Caster Table (D488)

Component Check

No.

Description

Caster Table

Pin

Step Screw

Installation Procedure
1. Put the caster table on a flat place.

2. Install the two pins in the screw holes.

62

Qty

Caster Table (D488)

Use the screw holes [A] and [C] if the mainframe is directly installed on the caster table.
Use the screw holes [B] and [C] if the one-tray paper feed unit (D425) is installed on the caster
table.

3. Grasp the handle [A] and grips [B] of the machine, if the copier is to be installed on the caster table.
Hold the handle and grips of the machine when you lift and move the machine.
4. Lift the copier or one-tray paper feed unit [C], and then install it on the caster table [D].
5. Pull out tray 2 of the mainframe or the tray of the one-tray paper feed unit.

6. Secure the machine or one-tray paper feed unit to the caster table (step screw x 2)
63

2. Installation

7. Reinstall the tray in the mainframe or one-tray paper feed unit.

8. Adjust the five leveling adjustors of the caster table.

64

ARDF (D366)

ARDF (D366)
Component Check
Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list.
No.

Description

Qty

ARDF

Stamp Cartridge

Knob Screw

Stud Screw

Attention Decal Top Cover

Installation Procedure

Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure.
1. Remove all tapes and shipping retainers.

65

2. Installation

2. Insert the two stud screws [A] on the top of the machine.

3. Mount the ARDF [A] by aligning the screw keyholes [B] of the ARDF support plate over the stud screws.
4. Slide the ARDF toward the front of the machine.
5. Secure the ARDF with the two knob screws [C].

66

ARDF (D366)

6. Install the stamp cartridge [A] in the ARDF.

7. Peel off the platen sheet [A] and place it on the exposure glass.
8. Align the rear left corner (of the platen sheet) with the corner [B] on the exposure glass.
9. Close the ARDF.
10. Open the ARDF and check that the platen sheet is correctly attached.

67

2. Installation

11. Attach the decal [A] to the top cover as shown. Choose the language that you want.
12. Plug in and turn on the main power switch of the machine, and then check the ARDF operation.
13. Make a full size copy. Check that the registrations (side-to-side and leading edge) and image skew
are correct. If they are not, adjust the registrations and image skew (see "Image Adjustment" in the
"Replacements and Adjustments" chapter).

68

Platen Cover Installation (G329)

Platen Cover Installation (G329)

1. Install the stud screws [A] (

x 2) on the top cover as shown.

2. Position the platen cover bracket [B] on the heads of the stud screws, and slide the platen cover [C]
to the left.

69

2. Installation

Side Tray (D427)

Component Check

70

Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list.
No.

Description

Qty

Side Tray Paper Exit Unit

Side Tray

Decal: Push

Decal: Door Push

Screw: M3x8

Tray Stopper

Side Tray (D427)

Installation Procedure

Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure.
1. Remove all tapes on the side tray.

2. Open the duplex unit [A].

3. Remove the right upper cover [B] (

x 2).

4. Close the side tray paper exit unit [A], and then connect the harness [B] to the machine.
5. Install the side tray paper exit unit (

x 2: removed in step 3).

71

2. Installation

6. Install the side tray [A].

7. Lift the side tray, and then install the tray stopper [B] (

x 1: M3x8).

8. Attach the Push door decal [A] to the top front edge of the duplex unit cover.

9. Close the duplex unit, and then attach the Push decal [A] to the duplex unit cover.

72

Side Tray (D427)

10. Turn on the main power switch of the machine.

11. Check the side tray operation.

73

2. Installation

1-Bin Tray Unit (D426)

Component Check

Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list.
No.

Description

Tray

1-Bin Tray Unit

Screw: Blue (M3 x 6)

Screw (M3 x 8)

Tray Support Bar

Installation Procedure

Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure.

74

Qty

1-Bin Tray Unit (D426)

If both the shift tray unit and the 1-bin tray unit are installed in the mainframe at the same time, install
the shift tray unit first. Installing the shift tray unit after the 1-bin tray unit may be difficult.
1. Remove all tapes.

2. Remove the inverter tray [A] (hook).

3. Open the right door [B] of the machine.
4. Remove the front right cover [C] (

x 1).

5. Remove the paper exit cover [A] (

x 1).

75

2. Installation

6. Remove the connector cover [A] with a small flat screwdriver.

7. Remove the left frame cover [B] (

8. Install the 1-bin tray unit [A] (

x 1).

x 1: M3x6 blue,

x 1).

9. Install the tray [A] (with the tray support bar) in the machine.

76

1-Bin Tray Unit (D426)

10. Attach the tray support cover [B] (

7).

x 2: M3x8 in the accessories and one screw removed in step

11. Reassemble the machine.

12. Turn on the main power switch of the machine, and check the 1-bin tray unit operation.

77

2. Installation

Shift Tray Unit (D428)

Component Check

Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list.
No.
1

Description
Shift Tray Unit

Qty
1

Installation Procedure

Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure.

If both the shift tray unit and the 1-bin tray unit are installed in the mainframe at the same time, install
the shift tray unit first. Installing the shift tray unit after the 1-bin tray unit may be difficult.
1. Remove all tapes.

78

Shift Tray Unit (D428)

2. Remove the inverter tray [A] (hook).

3. Remove the output tray [B] (

x 2).

4. Put the shift tray [A] in the machine, and then connect the harness to the connector [B] on the inner
rear frame.
If the shift tray is difficult to install in the mainframe, remove the paper exit cover [C] first (
1).

79

2. Installation

5. Install the shift tray [A] fully in the machine (

6. Reinstall the inverter tray.
7. Turn on the main power switch of the machine.
8. Check the shift tray unit operation.

80

x 2).

Internal Finisher (D429)

Internal Finisher (D429)

This procedure explains how to install the internal finisher, without installing the punch unit at the same time.

Component Check

Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list.
No.

Description

Qty

Internal Finisher

Inverter Unit

Inner Bottom Plate

Screw: M3x10

Screw: M3x6

12

Guide Rail

Inverter Cover

Left Cover

81

2. Installation

Installation Procedure

Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure.

Preparing before Installing the Internal Finisher

1. Remove all tapes from the internal finisher.

2. Remove the inverter tray [A].

3. Open the front door [B].

4. Remove the PCDU toner collection bottle [A].

5. Hold down the ITB lock lever [B] and turn it in the arrow direction.
6. Remove the inner right cover [A] (

82

x 2).

Internal Finisher (D429)

7. Open the duplex unit [A], and then remove the front right cover [B] (

x 1).

8. Remove the following:

Inner tray [A] (

x 2)

Left frame rear cover [B] (

Left frame cover [C] (

x 1)

Paper exit cover [D] (

x 1)

Inner rear cover [E] (

x 1)

x 2)

83

2. Installation

9. Install the inner bottom plate [A] (

10. Attach the left cover [A] (

x 6).

x 2: M3x6, one screw removed in step 8).

Internal Finisher Installation

If the punch unit (D390) is to be installed with this finisher (D429) at the same time, skip this procedure
below, and then refer to the installation procedure of "Punch Unit (D390)".

84

Internal Finisher (D429)

1. Insert the inverter unit [A] in the machine.

2. Insert two joint pins [A] into the two holes in the inner rear bracket.
3. Fully attach the front side [B] of the inverter unit to the paper exit unit of the mainframe after inserting
the two joint pins ( x 1: M3x6).
Insert the two joint pins before attaching the front side of the inverter unit to the paper exit unit of
the mainframe. Otherwise, paper jams may occur between the paper exit unit and inverter unit.

85

2. Installation

4. Install the guide rail [A] (

x 2: M3x6).

5. Attach the inverter cover [A] (

x 3: M3x10).

6. Install the internal finisher [A] from the left side of the machine.

86

Internal Finisher (D429)

7. Insert the rear rail pins [A] into the frame of the machine (

x 1: M3x6).

8. Push the internal finisher [A] and connect the cable [B] to the power socket of the machine.
9. Reassemble the machine.
10. Turn on the main power switch of the machine.
11. Check the internal finisher operation.

87

2. Installation

Punch Unit (D390)

Component Check

88

Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list.
No.

Description

Qty

Punch Unit

Output Tray Lower Cover

Drawer Connector

Bracket

Left Frame Cover

Punch Cover

Punch Unit (D390)

Installation Procedure
If the internal finisher has not already been installed, skip the "Removing the Internal Finisher" section, and
go to the "Preparing the Punch Unit before Installing the Internal Finisher" section. Also do "Preparing before
Installing the Internal Finisher" in the "Internal Finisher (D429)" section.
If the internal finisher has already been installed, you must remove it first. Start from the "Removing the
Internal Finisher" section.

Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure.

Removing the Internal Finisher

1. Open the front door.

2. Open the right door [A], and then remove the front right cover [B] (

x 1).

3. Disconnect the cable [A] from the power socket of the machine, and then pull out the internal finisher
[B].
89

2. Installation

2
4. Remove the internal finisher [A] (

x 1: M3x6).

5. Remove the inverter cover [A] (

x 3: M3x10).

6. Remove the guide rail [A] (

90

x 2: M3x6).

Punch Unit (D390)

7. Pull the inverter unit [A] toward the front side (

x 1: M3x6).

8. Remove the inverter unit [A] from the machine.

Preparing the Punch Unit before Installing the Internal Finisher

91

2. Installation

1. Remove the inverter right bracket [A] from the inverter unit (

x 4).

2. To remove screw [B], open guide plate [C].

3. Remove the positioning pin bracket [A] from the inverter right bracket (

4. Attach the inverter right bracket [A] to the punch unit [B] (

92

x 1: M3x6).

x 2).

Punch Unit (D390)

5. Slide the inverter small guide [A] to the front side (arrow direction), and then remove it (

x 1).

6. Remove all the tapes on the punch unit.

If all the tapes are not removed, SC763 may occur.

7. Attach the inverter unit [A] to the punch unit [B], and then secure the inverter unit with the punch unit
( x 4 removed in step 1).

8. Attach the drawer connector [A] of the punch unit to the rear bracket of the inverter unit (
removed in step 3).

x2

9. Attach the clamp [B] to the rear bracket of the inverter unit.

93

2. Installation

Installing the Punch and Inverter Unit

1. Install the punch and inverter unit [A] in the mainframe.

2. Insert the two joint pins [A] (this picture does not show the two joint pins) into the two holes in the inner
rear bracket.
3. Fully attach the front side [B] of the inverter unit to the paper exit unit of the mainframe after inserting
two joint pins ( x 1: M3x6).
Insert the two joint pins before attaching the front side of the inverter unit to the paper exit unit of
the mainframe. Otherwise, paper jams may occur between the paper exit unit and inverter unit.

94

Punch Unit (D390)

2
4. Remove the stopper [A] from the guide rail, and then attach with the screw holes [B] (these screw
holes must be used when the internal finisher is installed with the punch unit).

5. Install the guide rail [A] on the front edge of the inner bottom plate (

6. Install the punch cover [A] (

x 2).

x 3: M3x6).

95

2. Installation

Preparing the Internal Finisher

1. Remove the left rear cover [A] and the rear cover [B] of the internal finisher (

2. Attach the drawer connector [A] to the rear bracket of the finisher.
3. Connect the harnesses [B] to the connectors [C] on the main board.
Black harness connector to CN16
Gray harness connector to CN17
4. Reinstall the rear cover (removed in step 1) (

96

x 2).

x 2 each).

Punch Unit (D390)

Installing the Internal Finisher

1. Install the internal finisher [A] in the mainframe (

2. Remove the bracket [A] (

3. Attach the bracket [A] (

x 1).

x 2).

x 2); this bracket is for the internal finisher when used with the punch unit.

97

2. Installation

4. Remove the output tray lower cover [A]; this cover is for the internal finisher without the punch unit
( x 3).

5. Attach the output tray lower cover [A]; this cover is for the internal finisher when used with the punch
unit ( x 3).
98

Punch Unit (D390)

Note

The two projections [A] on the output tray lower cover (this plate is actually attached to the output
tray lower cover) must be inserted along the two guide rails [B] inside the output tray unit.

Push the slide plate [A] to check if the output tray lower cover is correctly installed. The left side
picture shows the correct result and the right side picture shows the incorrect result.

6. Attach the left frame cover [A] (

x 2).
99

2. Installation

7. Push the internal finisher in the mainframe.

8. Connect the I/F cable [B] of the finisher to the inlet of the mainframe.

100

Envelope Feeder EF3010 (D559)

Envelope Feeder EF3010 (D559)

Component Check
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list.
No.
1

Description
Envelope Feeder

Qty

Installation Procedure

This tray can be only installed in tray 1 of the copier. Do not install this tray in trays other than tray 1.
Otherwise, paper jam or other paper problem may occur.
1. Remove all tapes and red tag from the envelope feeder.

101

2. Installation

2. Pull paper tray 1 [A] part of the way out.

3. Remove two screws from both tray guides.
4. Pull out paper tray 1 [A].

5. Install the envelope feeder [A] into tray 1 of the main machine.
6. Secure two screws at both tray guides.
7. Close the tray 1, and then turn on the machine.

102

Card Reader Bracket Type C5501 (D547)

Card Reader Bracket Type C5501 (D547)

Component Check
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list.
No.

Description

Qty

Screw: M3 x 8

Screw: M3 x 14*1

Screw: M3 x 25

Tapping Screw: M3 x 10

Upper Tray

Lower Tray

Tray Bracket

Clamp

*1: Not used in this machine

103

2. Installation

Installation Procedure

1. Remove the screw [A] on the scanner right cover.

2. Attach the tray bracket [B] to the scanner right cover (

[C] x 2: M3x10,

[D] x 1: M3x25).

For this model, use the screw holes marked "3" on the table bracket.

3. Attach the lower tray [A] to the tray bracket (

x 2: M3x8).

4. Attach the upper tray [B] to the tray bracket (

x 1: M3x8).

5. Use the clamps as necessary to clamp the cable of the card read/writer device.

104

Card Reader Bracket Type C5501 (D547)

The smart card reader must be placed on this card reader tray. If not, some antenna or transmitter in
the main machine may be interrupted.

105

2. Installation

USB2.0/SD Slot Type G (D556)

Accessory Check

Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list.
No.

Description

Qty

USB2.0/SD Slot

Ground Plate

USB Cable

Screw: M3 x 6 blue

Screw: M3 x 8

Decal

Clamp

PDF Direct Card*1

*1: If the PostScript 3 option is used in this machine, this card is not necessary.

Installation Procedure

1. Connect the USB cable [B] to the USB slot [A] in the USB2.0/SD Slot unit.
2. Attach the ground plate [C] to the bracket of the USB2.0/SD Slot (

106

x 1: M3x6 blue).

USB2.0/SD Slot Type G (D556)

3. Remove the rear cover [A] (

x 8).

4. Remove the scanner left cover [A] (

5. Remove the left frame cover [B] (

x 2).
x 2).

6. Remove the part [A] on the scanner left cover.

107

2. Installation

2
7. Make four holes in the scanner left cover with a screwdriver as shown [A].
Smooth the four holes in the scanner left cover as shown [B].

8. Route the USB cable [A] through the gaps in the left scanner cover.
9. Secure the USB2.0/SD Slot [B] with the left scanner cover as shown above (
Use the screw holes [C] as shown above.

108

x 4: M3x8).

USB2.0/SD Slot Type G (D556)

10. Attach the scanner left cover [A] to the mainframe (

x 2).

11. Connect the USB cable [B] to USB-A (this is the USB slot closest to the front side of the machine) as
shown above.
Make sure that the USB cable is inserted in USB-A (front side).

12. Attach the clamp [A] to the left middle area of the rear cover.
13. Wind the USB cable [B] two or three times not to interrupt the other slots, and then clamp the cable
loops ( x 1).
If PostScript 3 is already installed, go to step 23. If not, follow the steps from 14 to 22.
14. Remove the SD slot cover (

x 1), and move the SD card from SD slot 1 to SD slot 2.

15. Insert the PDF direct card in SD slot 1.

16. Plug in and turn on the mainframe.

109

2. Installation

17. Enter the System SP mode.

18. Move security applications (HDD Encryption unit and Data Overwrite Security Unit) from the SD card
in SD slot 2 to the SD card in SD slot 1 with SP5-873-001 "Move Exec" ( p.132 "SD Card Appli
Move").
19. Enter the Scanner SP mode, and then change the setting of SP1013-001 from "0" to "1".

20. Enter the Printer SP mode, and then change the setting of SP1110-001 from "0" to "1".
21. Exit the SP mode, and then turn off the machine.
22. Remove the SD card in slot 2, and then attach the SD slot cover (
Keep this card in the safe place (

x 1).

p.132).

23. Turn on the mainframe.

24. Check the operation of the USB2.0/SD Slot.

25. Attach the decal [A] to the USB2.0/SD Slot as shown above.

Testing the SD Card/USB Slot

1. Insert an SD card or USB memory device in the slot.
You can connect only one removable memory device at a time.
2. Close the media slot cover.
If you leave the cover open, static electricity conducted through an inserted SD card could cause the
machine to malfunction.
3. Make sure that no previous settings remain.
If a previous setting remains, press the [Clear Modes] key.
4. Place an original on the exposure glass.
5. Press [Store File].
6. Press [Store to Memory Device].

110

USB2.0/SD Slot Type G (D556)

7. Press [OK].
8. Press the [Start] key.
When writing is complete, a confirmation message appears.
9. Press [Exit].
10. Remove the memory device from the media slot.
Do not remove the memory device while writing is in process.

111

2. Installation

Mechanical Counter (NA Only)

This counter is supplied as a spare part.

Installation Procedure
1. Rear cover (

p.168)

2. Rear lower cover (

p.168)

3. Controller box cover (

p.293)

4. Remove the cutout [A] in the rear lower cover with nippers.

5. Attach the mechanical counter [A] to the bracket [B] and connect the harness to each mechanical
counter as shown above.
The one [C] of two harnesses is not used in this model.

112

Mechanical Counter (NA Only)

6. Attach the mechanical counter bracket [A] to the frame (

x 2).

7. Connect the mechanical counter harness [C] to the mechanical counter [D] and the BCU (CN218)
[E], and route the harness as shown above ( x 5)
8. Reassemble the machine.
9. Plug in the machine and turn on the main power switch.
10. Enter the SP mode.
11. Set SP5987-001 to "1: ON".
12. Exit the SP mode, and then turn the machine off and on.

113

2. Installation

Key Counter Bracket

After the key counter bracket is installed in the mainframe, the following options cannot be used at the same
time.
Internal Finisher Type C2550 (D429)

Handset (B433)

Installation Procedure

1. Hold the key counter plate nuts [A] on the inside of the key counter bracket [B] and insert the key
counter holder [C].
2. Secure the key counter holder to the bracket (
3. Install the key counter cover [D] (
4. Rear cover (

114

p.168)

x 2).

x 2).

Key Counter Bracket

5. Cut off the part [A] of the rear cover.

6. Peel off double sided tape on the key counter bracket, and attach the key counter to the scanner left
cover.

7. Connect the key counter cable [A] to the connector [B].

8. Reassemble the machine.

115

2. Installation

Key Counter Interface Unit

Installation Procedure

1. Rear cover (

p.168)

2. Cut off the part [A] of the rear cover.

3. Rear lower cover (

p.168)

4. Controller box cover (

p.293)

5. Attach the clamp [A] to the DRB bracket.

6. Install the key counter interface board [B] on the DRB bracket (

116

x 4).

Key Counter Interface Unit

7. Connect and route the key counter cable [A] to the connector on the key counter interface board as
shown above (ground screw x 1,
x 6).
8. Connect and route the harness [B] to the connector on the key counter interface board and connector
CN216 [C] on the BCU ( x 5)

9. Pull the key counter cable through from the cutout and connect it to the connector [A] of the key counter
unit.
10. Reassemble the machine.

117

2. Installation

Anti-Condensation Heater
Installation Procedure

This heater is supplied as a spare part.

1. Rear cover (

p.168)

2. Open the ARDF or platen cover.

3. Glass cover [A] (stepped screw x 4)

4. Disconnect the DF I/F cable [A].

5. Scanner right cover [B] (

118

x 2)

Anti-Condensation Heater

6. ARDF exposure glass [A]

Position the white marker [B] at the rear-left corner when you reattach the ARDF exposure glass.

7. Rear scale [A] (stepped screw x 3)

119

2. Installation

8. Exposure glass [A] with left scale.

Position the marker at the front-left corner when you reattach the exposure glass.

9. Move the scanner carriage fully across to the right side by rotating the scanner motor [A] at the rear
of the machine.
10. Put the connector of the heater [B] through the cutout [C].

11. Move the scanner carriage to the left side as shown above by rotating the scanner motor at the rear
of the machine.
12. Install the heater in the scanner unit (

x 1).

13. Secure the cable cover [A] and the left side of the heater (

120

x 1).

Anti-Condensation Heater

2
14. Attach a clamp as shown above.
15. Connect the harness [A] of the heater to the connector [B] in the frame of the machine.
16. Reassemble the machine.

121

2. Installation

Tray Heater
Installation Procedure

Mainframe

This heater is supplied as a spare part.

1. Remove trays 1 and 2 from the machine.

2. Remove the connector cover [A] (

x 1).

3. Connect the connector [B] of the heater to the connector of the main machine.
4. Install the heater [C] inside the machine (
5. Reassemble the machine.

122

x 1).

Tray Heater

Tray Heater for D425 (Option)

1. Remove the rear connector cover [A] (rivet screw x 1) of the mainframe.
2. Disconnect the harness [B].

3. Remove the rear lower cover [A] of the mainframe (

x 5).

4. Pull out all the tray cassettes of the paper feed unit.

123

2. Installation

5. Remove the securing brackets [A] (

( x 2).

x 1 each), and then the rear cover [B] of the paper feed unit

6. Pass the connector [A] through the opening [B].

7. Install the tray heater [C] (

x 1)

8. Connect the heater harness [A] of the heater to the relay harness [B].

124

Tray Heater

9. Insert the heater harness [A] into the tube [B], and push the tube against the rear frame of the paper
feed unit as shown above.
Make sure that the tube is in contact with the rear frame [C].

10. Route the relay harness [A] as shown above (

x 5).

Make sure that the connector [A] is placed securely as shown above.
Make sure that the edge of the tube [B] is placed as shown above.
11. Reattach the rear cover of the paper feed unit (

x 2) and securing brackets (

x 1 each)

125

2. Installation

12. Remove the connector cap [A] from the tray heater harness.
13. Connect the relay harness [B] to the tray heater harness [C] of the mainframe.
Do not connect the relay harness [B] to the tray heater harness of the mainframe before installing
the securing bracket [D]. Otherwise, the securing bracket may pinch the relay harness.

14. Clamp the harness [A] as shown above (

x 1).

15. Reinstall the rear lower cover of the mainframe (

16. Reinstall all the tray cassettes.

126

x 5).

Tray Heater

Tray Heater for D331 (Option)

1. Remove the rear connector cover [A] (rivet screw x 1) of the mainframe.
2. Disconnect the harness [B].

3. Remove the rear lower cover [A] of the mainframe (

x 5).

4. Pull out all the tray cassettes of the paper feed unit.

127

2. Installation

5. Remove the securing brackets [A] (

x 2).

x 1 each), and then rear cover [B] of the paper feed unit (

6. Pass the connector [A] through the opening [B].

7. Install the tray heater [C] (

x 1).

8. Connect heater harness [A] of the heater to the relay harness [B].

128

Tray Heater

2
9. Remove the harness guide [A] (

x 1), and move it in the blue arrow direction as shown above.

10. Insert the heater harness [A] into the tube [B], and push the tube against the rear frame of the paper
feed unit as shown above.
Make sure that the tube is contact with the rear frame [C].

11. Route the relay harness as shown above (

x 6).
129

2. Installation

Make sure that the edge of the tube [A] is placed as shown above.
The clamp [B] is not used.
12. Reinstall the harness guide.

13. Reattach the rear cover of the paper feed unit (

x 2) and securing brackets (

x 1 each).

14. Remove the connector cap [A] from the tray heater harness.
15. Connect the relay harness [B] to the tray heater harness [C] of the mainframe.
Do not connect the relay harness [B] to the tray heater harness of the mainframe before installing
the securing bracket [D]. Otherwise, the securing bracket may pinch the relay harness.

16. Clamp the harness [A] as shown above (

x 1).

17. Reinstall the rear lower cover of the mainframe (

18. Reinstall all the tray cassettes.

130

x 5).

Controller Options

Controller Options
Overview
This machine has I/F card slots for optional I/F connections and SD card slot applications.
After you install an option, check that the machine can recognize it (see "Check All Connections" at the
end of this section).

I/F Card Slots

I/F slot [A] is used for one of the optional I/F connections (only one can be installed): IEEE1284,
IEEE802.11a/g, g (Wireless LAN), Bluetooth, File Format Converter.
I/F slot [B] is used only for Gigabit Ethernet.

SD Card Slots
Slot 1 is used for Security Card by default. Merge multiple SD cars in one SD card If the following
optional applications are to be installed in this machine; PostScript 3, PictBridge and/or IPDS.
Slot 2 is used for VM card (App2Me) by default or for service only (for example, updating the
firmware). If the Browser Unit is to be installed in this machine, remove the VM card from the SD slot
2, and then use the SD slot 2 for installing the Browser Unit. Reinstall the VM card in the SD slot 2
after completing the installation of the Browser Unit.

131

2. Installation

USB Slots
Left-side USB slot [C]: Used for connecting a digital camera (only works if PictBridge is installed).
Right-side USB slot [D]: Used when installing the optional USB2.0/SD card slot

SD Card Appli Move

The PostScript3 application and fonts cannot be moved to another SD card. However, other
applications can be moved onto the PostScript3 SD card.

Overview
The service program "SD Card Appli Move" (SP5-873) lets you copy application programs from one SD
card to another SD card.
Slot 1 is used to store application programs. But there are four possible applications (PostScript 3, Security
Card (DataOverwriteSecurity and HDD Encryption Unit), PictBridge, IPDS). You cannot run application
programs from Slot 2. However you can move application programs from Slot 2 to Slot 1 with the following
procedure.
Make sure that the target SD card has enough space.
1. Enter SP5873 "SD Card Appli Move".
2. Then move the application from the SD Card in Slot 2 to the SD Card in Slot 1.
Do steps 1-2 again if you want to move another application program.
3. Exit the SP mode.
Be very careful when you do the SD Card Appli Move procedure:
The data necessary for authentication is transferred with the application program from an SD card to
another SD card. Authentication fails if you try to use the SD card after you copy the application
program from one card to another card.
Do not use the SD card if it has been used before for other purposes. Normal operation is not
guaranteed when such an SD card is used.
Keep the SD card in the place after you copy the application program from one card to another card.
This is done for the following reasons:
1) The SD card can be the only proof that the user is licensed to use the application program.
2) You may need to check the SD card and its data to solve a problem in the future.

132

Controller Options

SD Card Storage:
1. Hold down the ITB lock lever [A] and turn it in the arrow direction.
2. Remove the inner cover [B] ( x 4), and then keep the SD card in the place [C] after you
copy the application program from one card to another card.
You cannot copy PostScript application to another SD card. You have to copy the other application
(PictBridge, Security Card or IPDS) to the SD card that stores the PostScript application.

Move Exec
The menu "Move Exec" (SP5-873-001) lets you copy application programs from the original SD card to
another SD card.
Do not turn ON the write protect switch of the system SD card or application SD card on the machine.
If the write protect switch is ON, a download error (e.g. Error Code 44) occurs during a firmware
upgrade or application merge.
1. Turn the main switch off.
2. Make sure that an SD card is in SD Card Slot 1. The application program is copied to this SD card.
3. Insert the SD card with the application program in SD Card Slot 2.The application program is copied
from this SD card.
4. Turn the main switch on.
5. Start the SP mode.
6. Select SP5-873-001 "Move Exec."
7. Follow the messages shown on the operation panel.
8. Turn the main switch off.
9. Remove the SD card from SD Card Slot 2.

133

2. Installation

10. Turn the main switch on.

11. Check that the application programs run normally.

Undo Exec

"Undo Exec" (SP5-873-002) lets you copy back application programs from an SD card to the original SD
card. You can use this program when, for example, you have mistakenly copied some programs by using
Move Exec (SP5-873-001).
Do not turn ON the write protect switch of the system SD card or application SD card on the machine.
If the write protect switch is ON, a download error (e.g. Error Code 44) occurs during a firmware
upgrade or application merge.
1. Turn the main switch off.
2. Insert the original SD card in SD Card Slot 2. The application program is copied back into this card.
3. Insert the SD card with the application program in SD Card Slot 1.The application program is copied
back from this SD card.
4. Turn the main switch on.
5. Start the SP mode.
6. Select SP5-873-002 "Undo Exec."
7. Follow the messages shown on the operation panel.
8. Turn the main switch off.
9. Remove the SD card from SD Card Slot 2.
This step assumes that the application programs in the SD card are used by the machine.
10. Turn the main switch on.
11. Check that the application programs run normally.
12. Make sure that the machine can recognize the option (see "Check All Connections" at the end of this
section).

PostScript 3

The PostScript3 application and fonts cannot be moved to another SD card. However, other
applications can be moved onto the PostScript3 SD card.

134

Controller Options

Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure.

1. Remove the SD slot cover [A] from the SD card slots (

x 1).

2. Remove the Security Card [B] from the SD slot 1 and VM card [C] from the SD slot 2.

3. Turn the SD-card label face of the Security Card [A] to the front of the machine. Then push it [A] slowly
into SD slot 2 [B] until you hear a click.
4. Turn the SD-card label face of the PostScript3 [B] to the front of the machine. Then push it slowly into
slot 1 [B] until you hear a click.
5. Plug in and turn on the main power switch, and then execute "Move Exec" with SP5-873-001.
For details, see "SD Card Appli Move".
6. Turn off the machine after completing the "Move Exec".
7. Remove the Security Card from the SD slot 2, and then keep the Security Card in the place for the SD
card storage ( p.132 "SD Card Appli Move").
8. Reinstall the VM card in the SD slot 2.
9. Attach the SD slot cover (

x 1).
135

2. Installation

10. Attach the "Adobe PostScript 3" decal [A] to the front door.
11. Make sure that the machine can recognize the option (see "Check All Connections" at the end of this
section).

File Format Converter

Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure.

1. Remove the I/F-slot cover [A] (

x 2).

2. Install the file format converter [B] into the I/F-slot and then fasten it with screws.
3. Plug in and turn on the main power switch.
4. Check or set the following SP codes with the values shown below.

136

Controller Options

SP No.

Title

Setting

SP5-836-001

Capture Function (0:Off 1:On)

"1"

SP5-836-002

Panel Setting

"0"

5. Check the operation.

6. Make sure that the machine can recognize the option (see "Check All Connections" at the end of this
section).

IEEE1284

Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure.
You can only install one of the following network interfaces at a time: (IEEE 802.11 a/g, g (Wireless LAN),
IEEE1284, Bluetooth).

1. Remove the I/F-slot cover [A] (

x 2).

2. Install the interface board [B] (Knob-screw x 2) into the I/F-slot.

3. Make sure that the machine can recognize the option (see "Check All Connections" at the end of this
section).

137

2. Installation

IEEE 802.11 a/g, g (Wireless LAN)

Installation Procedure

Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure.
You can only install one of the following network interfaces at one time: (IEEE 802.11 a/g, g (Wireless
LAN), IEEE1284, Bluetooth).

1. Remove the I/F-slot cover [A] from the I/F-slot (

x 2).

2. Install the wireless LAN board [B] (Knob-screw x 2) into the I/F-slot.
3. Make sure that the machine can recognize the option (see "Check All Connections" at the end of this
section).

138

Controller Options

4. Peel off the double-sided tapes on the Velcro fasteners [A], and then attach them at the front left and
rear left of the machine.
5. Attach "ANT1" (having a black ferrite core) [B] to the front left of the machine.
6. Attach "ANT2" (having a white ferrite core) [C] to the rear right of the machine.
"ANT1" is a transmission/reception antenna and "ANT2" is a reception antenna. Do not attach
them at the wrong places.
7. Attach the clamps as shown above.
8. Wire the cables and clamp them (

x 7).

Make sure that the cables are not slack. Keep them wired tightly along the covers.
You may have to move the machine if the reception is not clear.
Make sure that the machine is not located near an appliance or any type of equipment that generates
strong magnetic fields.
Put the machine as close as possible to the access point.

139

2. Installation

Installing Various Hardware Combinations

Refer to the above picture when installing the USB2.0/SD.

UP Mode Settings for Wireless LAN

Enter the UP mode. Then do the procedure below to perform the initial interface settings for IEEE 802.11
a/g, g. These settings take effect every time the machine is powered on.
You cannot use the wireless LAN if you use Ethernet.
1. Press the "User Tools/Counter" key.
2. On the touch panel, press "System Settings".
The Network I/F (default: Ethernet) must be set for either Ethernet or wireless LAN.
3. Select "Interface Settings".
4. Press "Wireless LAN". Only the wireless LAN options show.
5. Communication Mode. Select either "802.11 Ad hoc", "Ad hoc" or "Infrastructure".
6. SSID Setting. Enter the SSID setting. (The setting is case sensitive.)
7. Channel. You need this setting when Ad Hoc Mode is selected.
Range: 1 to 14 (default: 11)
The allowed range for the channel settings may vary for different countries.
8. WEP (Encryption) Setting. The WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) setting is designed to protect wireless
data transmission. The same WEP key is required on the receiving side in order to unlock encoded
data. There are 64 bit and 128 bit WEP keys.
WEP:
Selects "Active" or "Inactive" ("Inactive" is default.).
140

Controller Options

Range of Allowed Settings:

64 bit: 10 characters
128 bit: 26 characters
9. Transmission Speed. Press the Next button to show more settings. Then select the transmission speed
for the mode: Auto, 11 Mbps, 5.5 Mbps, 2 Mbps, 1 Mbps (default: Auto). This setting should match
the distance between the closest machine or access point. This depends on which mode is selected.

For the Ad Hoc Mode, this is the distance between the machine and the closest PC in the network.
For the Infrastructure Mode, this is the distance between the machine and the closest access
point.
11 Mbps: 140 m (153 yd.)
5.5 Mbps: 200 m (219 yd.)
2 Mbps: 270 m (295 yd.)
1 Mbps: 400 m (437 yd.)
10. Press "Return to Default" to initialize the wireless LAN settings.
Press "Yes" to initialize the following settings:
Transmission mode
Channel
Transmission Speed
WEP
SSID
WEP Key

SP Mode and UP Mode Settings for IEEE 802.11 a/g, g Wireless LAN
The following SP commands and UP modes can be set for IEEE 802.11 a/g, g.
SP No.

Name

Function

5840-006

Channel MAX

Sets the maximum range of the channel settings for the country.

5840-007

Channel MIN

Sets the minimum range of the channels settings allowed for your
country.

5840-011

WEP Key Select

Used to select the WEP key (Default: 00).

UP mode

Name

Function

141

2. Installation

SSID

Used to confirm the current SSID setting.

WEP Key

Used to confirm the current WEP key setting.

WEP Mode

Used to show the maximum length of the string that can be used
for the WEP Key entry.

Bluetooth

Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure.
You can only install one of the following network interfaces at a time: (IEEE 802.11 a/g, g (Wireless LAN),
IEEE1284, Bluetooth).

1. Remove the slot cover [A] (

x 2).

2. Install the Bluetooth board [A] (Knob-screw x 2) into the slot.

142

Controller Options

3. Insert the Bluetooth card [B] into the Bluetooth card adaptor.
4. Install the Bluetooth card adaptor on the Bluetooth board.
5. Attach the antenna cap to the Bluetooth board.
6. Make sure that the machine can recognize the option (see "Check All Connections" at the end of this
section).

PictBridge

Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure.

You must install the PictBridge option in SD Card slot 1. However, the Postscript3 option, Security
Card and IPDS unit option are also installed in SD Card slot 1. You must do the SD Card Appli move
procedure first if you have the PpostScript3, Security Card or IPDS unit option installed and you want
to install the PictBridge unit.

1. Remove the SD slot cover [A] for SD cards (

x 1).

2. Remove the VM card [B] from the SD slot 2.

143

2. Installation

3. Turn the SD card label face of the PictBridge [A] to the front of the machine. Then push it slowly into
SD slot 2 until you hear a click.
4. Plug in and turn on the main power switch, and then execute "Move Exec" with SP5-873-001.
For details, see "SD Card Appli Move".
5. Turn off the machine after completing the "Move Exec".
6. Remove the PictBrdige from the SD slot 2, and then keep the PictBrdige card in the place for the SD
card storage ( p.132 "SD Card Appli Move").
7. Reinstall the VM card in the SD slot 2.
8. Attach the SD slot cover (

x 1).

9. Make sure that the machine can recognize the option (see "Check All Connections" at the end of this
section).

Browser Unit Type E

Installation Procedure

Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure.
Do not leave the SD card in slot 2 after installing this application.

144

Controller Options

1. Remove the SD slot cover [A] for SD cards (

x 1).

2. Remove the VM card [B] from the SD slot 2.

3. Turn the SD-card label face of the Browser Unit [A] to the front of the machine. Then push it slowly
into SD slot 2 [A] until you hear a click.
4. Plug in and turn on the main power switch.
5. Push the "User Tools" key.
If an administrator setting is registered for the machine, step 5 and 6 are required. Otherwise,
skip to step 7
6. Push the "Login/ Logout" key.
7. Login with the administrator user name and password.
8. Touch "Extended Feature Settings" twice on the LCD.
9. Touch "Install" on the LCD.
10. Touch "SD Card".
11. Touch the "Browser" line.
145

2. Installation

12. Under "Install to" touch "Machine HDD" and touch "Next".
13. When you see "Ready to Install", check the information on the screen to confirm your previous
selection.
14. Touch "OK". You will see "Installing the extended feature... Please wait.", and then "Completed".
15. Touch "Exit" to go back to the setting screen.

16. Touch "Change Allocation".

17. Touch the "Browser" line.
18. Press the hard key that you want to use for the Browser Unit. As a default, this function is assigned to
the "Other Functions" key (the bottom key of the function keys).
19. Touch "OK".
20. Touch "Exit" twice to go back to the copy screen.
21. Turn off the main power switch.
22. Install the key for "Browser Unit" to the place where you want.
23. Remove the SD card of the Brower Unit from SD slot 2.
24. Reinstall the VM card in the SD slot 2.
25. Attach the slot cover [A] (

x 1).

26. Keep the SD card in the place ( p.132 "SD Card Appli Move") after you install the application
program from the card to HDD. This is because the SD card can be the only proof that the user is
licensed to use the application program. You may need to check the SD card and its data to solve a
problem in the future.

Gigabit Ethernet

Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure.

146

Controller Options

1. Rear cover [A] (

x 8)

2. Remove the I/F-slot cover [A] from the I/F-slot (

3. Remove the controller bracket [B] (

x 1).

x 2).

147

2. Installation

4. Install the Gigabit Ethernet board [A] in the connector [B] on the controller board.

5. Secure the GigabitEthernet board [A] to the controller box (

x 2).

6. Reassemble the controller bracket (

x 8).

x 2) and rear cover (

7. Attach the ferrite core [A] to the LAN cable [B] as shown above, and connect the LAN cable to the
machine.
8. Make sure that the machine can recognize this option (see "Check All Connections" at the end of this
section).

Check All Connections

1. Plug in the power cord. Then turn on the main switch.
2. Enter the printer user mode. Then print the configuration page.
User Tools > Printer Settings > List Test Print > Config. Page
All installed options are shown in the "System Reference" column.

148

3. Preventive Maintenance
Maintenance Tables
See "Appendices" for the following information:
Preventive Maintenance Items
Other Yield Parts

149

3. Preventive Maintenance

PM Parts Settings
Before Removing the Old PM Parts
1. Enter the SP mode.
2. Output the SMC logging data with SP5-990-004.

3. Set the following SPs to "1" before you turn the power off. Then, the machine will reset the PM counters
automatically. In the case of developer, the developer initialization will also be done automatically.
4. Exit the SP mode.
Item

SP
Black: 3902-001

Development Unit

Cyan: 3902-002
Magenta: 3902-003
Yellow: 3902-004
Black: 3902-009

Drum Unit

Cyan: 3902-010
Magenta: 3902-011
Yellow: 3902-012

ITB Unit

3902-013

Fusing Unit

3902-014

Heating Roller Unit

3902-016

ITB Cleaning Unit

3902-017

PTR Unit

3902-018

PCDU Toner Collection Bottle

3902-019*1

ITB Toner Collection Bottle

3902-020*1

*1: Only if the toner collection bottle is replaced before the machine detects near-full.
For the following units, there is a new unit detection mechanism. It is not necessary to reset PM counters.
Development unit

150

PM Parts Settings

PCU/ ITB Toner Collection Bottle (if full or near-full)

After Installing the New PM parts

1. Turn on the main power switch.
2. Output the SMC logging data with SP5-990-004 and check the counter values.
3. Make sure that the PM counters for the replaced units are "0" with SP7-803. If the PM counter for a
unit was not reset, then reset that counter with SP 7-804.
4. Make sure that the exchange counter counts up with SP7-853.

5. Make sure that the counters for the previous units (SP7-906) on the new SMC logging data list (from
step 2 above) are equal to the counters (SP7-803) for these units on the previous SMC logging data
list (the list that was output in the "Before removing the old parts" section).
6. Make sure that the unit replacement date is updated with SP7-950.

Preparation before Operation Check

1. Clean the exposure glasses (for DF and book scanning).
2. Enter the user tools mode.
3. Do the "Automatic Color Calibration (ACC)" for the copier mode & printer mode as follows:
Print the ACC test pattern (User Tools > Maintenance > ACC > Start).
Put the printout on the exposure glass.
Put 10 sheets of white paper on the test chart. This ensures the precise ACC adjustment.
Close the ARDF or the platen cover.
Press "Start Scanning" on the LCD. Then, the machine starts the ACC.
4. Exit the User Tools mode, and then enter the SP mode.
5. Do the "Forced line position adjustment" as follows.
First do SP2-111-3 (Mode c).
Then do SP2-111-1 (Mode a).
To check if SP 2-111-1 was successful, watch the screen during the process. A message is
displayed at the end. Also, you can check the result with SP 2-194-10 to -12.
6. Exit the SP mode.

Operation Check
Check if the sample image has been copied normally.

151

3. Preventive Maintenance

152

4. Replacement and Adjustment

Beforehand
Installing options, please do the following:
If there is a fax unit in the machine, print out all messages stored in the memory, the lists of userprogrammed items, and the system parameter list.
If there are printer jobs in the machine, print out all jobs in the printer buffer.
Turn off the main switch and disconnect the power cord, the telephone line, and the network cable.

Always touch a grounded surface to discharge static electricity from your hands before you handle
SD cards, printed circuit boards, or memory boards.

153

4. Replacement and Adjustment

Special Tools
Part Number

154

Description

Qty

B645 5010

SD Card

G021 9350

Loop-back Connector - Parallel

C401 9503

20X Magnification Scope

A257 9300

Grease Barrierta S552R

A092 9503

C4 Color Test Chart (3 pcs/set)

B679 5100

Plug - IEEE1284 Type C

A184 9501

Optics Adjustment Tool (2 pcs/set)

5203 9502

Silicon Grease G-501

Image Adjustment

Image Adjustment
Scanning
Check the printing registration/side-to-side adjustment and the blank margin adjustment before you do
the following scanner adjustments.
Use S-2-1 test chart to do the following adjustments.

Scanner sub-scan magnification

A: Sub-scan magnification
1. Put the test chart on the exposure glass. Then make a copy from one of the feed stations.
2. Check the magnification ratio. Adjust with SP4-008 if necessary.
Standard: 1.0%.

155

4. Replacement and Adjustment

Scanner leading edge and side-to-side registration

4
A: Leading Edge Registration
1. Put the test chart on the exposure glass. Then make a copy from one of the feed stations.
2. Check the leading edge and side-to-side registration. Adjust the following SP modes if necessary.
Standard: 0 2 mm for the leading edge registration, 0 2 mm for the side-to-side registration.
SP mode
Leading Edge Registration

SP4-010-001

Side-to-Side Registration

SP4-011-001

ARDF
ARDF side-to-side, leading edge registration and trailing edge

156

Image Adjustment

A: Leading edge registration, B: Side-to-Side registration

Use A3/DLT paper to make a temporary test chart as shown above.
1. Put the temporary test chart on the ARDF. Then make a copy from one of the feed stations.
2. Check the registration. Check the leading edge and side-to-side registration. Adjust the following SP
modes if necessary.
Standard: 4.2 3.0 mm for the leading edge registration, 2 3.0 mm for the side-to-side registration.
Use the following SP modes to adjust if necessary.
SP Code

What It Does

Adjustment Range

SP6-006-001

Side-to-Side Registration (1st side)

3.0 mm

SP6-006-002

Side-to-Side Registration (2nd side)

3.0 mm

SP6-006-003

Leading Edge Registration

5.0 mm

SP6-006-005

Buckle: Duplex Front

5.0 mm

SP6-006-006

Buckle: Duplex Rear

5.0 mm

SP6-006-007

Rear Edge Erase (Trailing Edge)

5.0 mm

ARDF sub-scan magnification

1. Put the temporary test chart on the ARDF. Then make a copy from one of the feed stations.
2. Check the magnification ratio. Adjust with SP6-017-001 if necessary.
Standard: 5.0%
Reduction mode: 5.0%
Enlargement mode: 5.0%

157

4. Replacement and Adjustment

Registration
Image Area

A = 4.2 mm, B = 2.25 mm, C = 3.25

Make sure that the registration is adjusted within the adjustment standard range as shown below.

Leading Edge
Adjusts the leading edge registration for each paper type and process line speed.

Side to Side
Adjusts the side-to-side registration for each paper feed station. Use SP mode (SP1-002) to adjust the sideto-side registration for the optional paper feed unit, LCT, and duplex unit.

Adjustment Standard
Leading edge (sub-scan direction): 4.2 1.5 mm
Side to side (main-scan direction): 2.25 1.75 mm

Paper Registration Standard

The registration in both main- and sub-scan directions can change within the following tolerance.
Sub-scan direction: 0 9 mm
Main-scan direction: 0 4 mm

158

Image Adjustment

Adjustment Procedure
1. Enter SP2-109-003.
2. Print out the test pattern (14: Trimming Area) with SP2-109-003.
Registration can change slightly as shown on the previous page. Print some pages of the
"Trimming Area" for step 3 and 4. Then average the leading edge and side-to-side registration
values, and adjust each SP mode.
3. Do the leading edge registration adjustment.
1) Check the leading edge registration and adjust it with SP1-001.
2) Select the adjustment conditions (paper type and process line speed).
3) Input the value. Then press the

key.

4) Generate a trim pattern to check the leading edge adjustment.

4. Do the side-to-side registration adjustment.
1) Check the side-to-side registration and adjust it with SP1-002.
2) Select the adjustment conditions (paper feed station).
3) Input the value. Then press the

key.

4) Generate a trim pattern to check the leading edge adjustment.

Erase Margin Adjustment

Adjust the erase margin C and D only if the registration (main scan and sub scan) cannot be adjusted
within the standard values. Do the registration adjustment after adjusting the erase margin C and D,
and then adjust the erase margin A and B.

159

4. Replacement and Adjustment

4
1. Enter SP2-109-003.
2. Print out the test pattern (14: 1-dot trimming pattern) with SP2-109-003.
3. Check the erase margin A and B. Adjust them with SP2-103-001 to -010 if necessary.
Leading edge: 1.5 to 5.0 mm,
Side-to-side: 0.5 to 4.0 mm,
Trailing edge: 0.5 to 0.6 mm

Color Registration
Line Position Adjustment
The automatic line position adjustment usually is done for a specified condition to get the best color prints.
Do the following if color registration shifts:
Do "Auto Color Registration" as follows to do the forced line position adjustment.
1. First do SP2-111-3.
2. Then do SP2-111-1.
To check if SP 2-111-1 was successful, watch the screen during the process. A message is displayed
at the end. Also, you can check the result with SP 2-194-007 (0: Completed successfully, 1: Failed).
You should also do the line position adjustment at these times:

160

Image Adjustment

1. After you transport or move the machine (you should do the forced line position adjustment if
you install the machine at the user location.) if the machine is pre-installed at the workshop and
moved to the user location,
2. When you remove the PCDU
3. When you remove or replace the image transfer belt, image transfer belt unit or laser optical
housing unit

Printer Gamma Correction

The ACC is usually sufficient to adjust the color balance to get the best print output. You only need
the printer gamma correction to fine-tune to meet user requirements.

Use SP modes if you want to modify the printer gamma curve created with ACC. You can adjust the gamma
data for the following:
Highlight
Middle
Shadow areas
IDmax.
The adjustable range is from 0 to 30 (31 steps).

Copy Mode
- Photo Mode Item to Adjust
ID max:
1

(K, C, M, and Y)

Level on the C-4 chart

Adjustment Standard
Adjust the offset value so that the
density of level 10 matches that of
level 10 on the C-4 chart.

For adjusting ID max: Soft keys on the operation panel (SP4-918-009)

Middle (Middle ID)
2

(K, C, M, and Y)

Adjust the offset value so that the

density of level 6 matches that of
level 6 on the C-4 chart.

For adjusting Middle: Soft keys on the operation panel (SP4-918-009)

161

4. Replacement and Adjustment

Item to Adjust

Level on the C-4 chart

Adjust the offset value so that the

density of level 8 matches that of
level 8 on the C-4 chart.

Shadow (High ID)

3

Adjustment Standard

(K, C, M, and Y)

For adjusting Shadow: Soft keys on the operation panel (SP4-918-009)

Adjust the offset value so that dirty
background does not show on the
copy and the density of level 3 is
slightly lighter than that of level 3
on the C-4 chart.

Highlight (Low ID)

4

(K, C, M, and Y)

For adjusting Highlight: Soft keys on the operation panel (SP4-918-009)

Adjust the offset value so that the
color balance of black scale levels
3 through 5 in the copy is seen as
gray (no C, M, or Y should be
visible). If the black scale contains
C, M, or Y, do steps 1 to 4 again.

K Highlight (Low ID)

(C,M, and Y)
5

<on the full color copy>

For adjusting K Highlight: Soft keys on the operation panel (SP4-918-009)

- Text (Letter) Mode, Full Color Item to Adjust

ID max: (K, C, M, and

Y)

Level on the C-4 chart (K)

Adjustment Standard
Adjust the offset value so that the
density of level 10 matches that of
level 10 on the C-4 chart.

For adjusting ID max: Soft keys on the operation panel (SP4-918-009)

Middle (Middle ID)
2

(K, C, M, and Y)

Adjust the offset value so that the

density of level 6 matches that of
level 6 on the C-4 chart.

For adjusting Middle: Soft keys on the operation panel (SP4-918-009)

Shadow (High ID)
3

(K, C, M, and Y)

Adjust the offset value so that the

density of level 8 matches that of
level 8 on the C-4 chart.

For adjusting Shadow: Soft keys on the operation panel (SP4-918-009)

162

Image Adjustment

Item to Adjust

Level on the C-4 chart (K)

Adjust the offset value so that dirty

background does not show on the
copy and the density of level 3 is
slightly lighter than that of level 3
on the C-4 chart.

Highlight (Low ID)

4

Adjustment Standard

(K, C, M, and Y)

For adjusting Highlight: Soft keys on the operation panel (SP4-918-009)

- Text (Letter) Mode, Single Color Item to Adjust

ID max: (K)

Level on the C-4 chart (K)

Adjustment Standard
Adjust the offset value so that the
density of level 10 matches that
of level 10 on the C-4 chart.

For adjusting K ID max: Soft keys on the operation panel (SP4-918-009)

Middle (Middle ID) (K)

Adjust the offset value so that the

density of level 6 matches that of
level 6 on the C-4 chart.

For adjusting K Middle: Soft keys on the operation panel (SP4-918-009)

Shadow (High ID) (K)

Adjust the offset value so that the

density of level 8 matches that of
level 8 on the C-4 chart.

For adjusting K Shadow: Soft keys on the operation panel (SP4-918-009)

Highlight (Low ID) (K)

Adjust the offset value so that dirty

background does not show on
the copy and the density of level
3 is slightly lighter than that of
level 3 on the C-4 chart.

For adjusting K Highlight: Soft keys on the operation panel (SP4-918-009)

Text parts of the test pattern cannot be printed clearly after you adjust "shadow" as shown above. At
this time, check if the 5 line/mm pattern at each corner is printed clearly. If it is not, adjust the offset
value of "shadow" again until it is.

163

4. Replacement and Adjustment

Printer Mode
There are six adjustable modes (select these modes with printer SP1-102-001):
1200 x 1200 photo mode
1200 x 1200 text mode
2400 x 600 photo mode
2400 x 600 text mode
1800 x 600 photo mode
1800 x 600 text mode
600 x 600 photo mode

600 x 600 text mode

K

Highlight

SP1-104-1

SP1-104-21

SP1-104-41

SP1-104-61

Shadow

SP1-104-2

SP1-104-22

SP1-104-42

SP1-104-62

Middle

SP1-104-3

SP1-104-23

SP1-104-43

SP1-104-63

IDmax

SP1-104-4

SP1-104-24

SP1-104-44

SP1-104-64

- Adjustment Procedure 1. Do ACC for the printer mode.

2. Turn the main power off and on.
3. Enter SP mode.
4. Select "Printer SP".
5. Select SP1-102-001. Then select the necessary print mode to adjust.
6. Choose SP1-103-1 to print out a tone control test sheet if you want to examine the image quality for
these settings.
7. Adjust the color density with SP1-104. Compare the tone control test sheet with the C4 test chart.
Adjust the density in this order: "ID Max", "Shadow", "Middle", "Highlight".
8. Use SP1-105-001 to keep the adjusted settings.

164

Exterior Covers

Exterior Covers
PCDU Toner Collection Bottle
If you replace this toner collection bottle after the machine detects that it is full or near-full, the machine
automatically resets the PM counter for the PCDU toner collection bottle after replacement.
But, if you replace a bottle that is not full or near-full, then you must reset the PM counter for this unit. To do
this, set SP 3902 019 to 1 before you start to work on the machine.

1. Open the front door [A].

2. PCDU toner collection bottle [A] (lock x 2)

Front Door
1. Open the front door.

165

4. Replacement and Adjustment

2. PCDU toner collection bottle (

p.165)

3. Release the belt [A].

4. Front door [A] (

x 2, pin x 2)

ITB Cleaning Unit Cover

1. Open the ITB cleaning unit cover [A] (

166

x 2).

Exterior Covers

2. Release the tab [A], and then remove the ITB cleaning unit cover [B].

Left Cover

1. Left cover [A] (

x 10)

167

4. Replacement and Adjustment

Rear Cover

4
1. Rear cover [A] (

x 8)

Rear Lower Cover

1. Rear lower cover [A] (

168

x 5)

Exterior Covers

Dust Filter

4
1. Dust filter cover [A] (hooks)
2. Dust filter [B]

Right Rear Cover

1. Rear cover (

p.168)

2. Open the duplex unit [A].

3. Right rear cover [B] (

x 5)

169

4. Replacement and Adjustment

Operation Panel

4
1. Remove six screws on the operation panel [A].
2. Slide the operation panel to the front side.

3. Disconnect the harness [A].

4. Operation panel [B]

Touch Panel Position Adjustment

It is necessary to calibrate the touch panel at the following times:

When you replace the operation panel.
When you replace the controller board.
When the touch panel detection function does not operate correctly

170

Exterior Covers

Do not use items [2] to [9] on the Self-Diagnostic Menu. These items are for design use only.
1. Press

, press "1", "1", "9", "3", and then press

5 times to open the Self-Diagnostics menu.

2. On the touch screen press "Touch Screen Adjust" (or press"1").

3. Use a pointed (not sharp) tool to press the upper left mark

4. Press the lower right mark when " " shows.

5. Press [#] OK on the screen (or press

) when you are finished.

6. Touch [#] Exit on the screen to close the Self-Diagnostic menu. Save the calibration settings.

Inner Right Cover

1. PCDU toner collection bottle (

p.165)

171

4. Replacement and Adjustment

2. Press the ITB lock lever [A] and turn it up clockwise as shown above.
3. Inner right cover [B] (

x 2)

Inner Cover
1. PCDU toner collection bottle (
2. Inner right cover (

p.171)

3. Inner cover [A] (

x 4)

p.165)

Front Right Cover

1. Open the duplex unit.
2. PCDU toner collection bottle (
3. Inner right cover (

p.165)

p.171)

4. Remove the front right cover [A] with the operation panel [B] lifted up (
172

x 1).

Exterior Covers

Right Upper Cover

4
1. Right upper cover [A] (

x 2)

Left Frame and Left Frame Rear Cover

1. Left frame cover [A] (

x 1)

2. Left frame rear cover [B] (

x 2)

173

4. Replacement and Adjustment

Paper Exit Cover

4
1. Inverter tray [A]
2. Paper exit cover [B] (

Inverter Tray

1. Inverter tray [A] (hooks)

174

x 1)

Exterior Covers

Inner Tray

4
1. Inner tray [A] (

x 2)

Inner Rear Cover

1. Left frame cover (

p.173 "Left Frame and Left Frame Rear Cover")

2. Paper exit cover (

p.174)

3. Inner tray (

p.175)

4. Inner rear cover [A] (

x 1)

175

4. Replacement and Adjustment

Scanner Unit
Exposure Glass
1. Rear cover (

p.168)

2. Open the ARDF or platen cover.

3. Glass cover [A] (

x 4)

4. Disconnect the DF I/F cable [A]

5. Scanner right cover [B] (

176

x 2)

Scanner Unit

6. ARDF exposure glass [A]

Position the white marker [B] at the rear-left corner when you reattach the ARDF exposure glass.

7. Rear scale [A] (

x 3)

177

4. Replacement and Adjustment

8. Exposure glass [A] with left scale

Position the marker at the front-left corner when you reattach the exposure glass.

Original Length Sensors

1. Exposure glass with left scale (

p.176)

2. SBU cover [A] (

x 6)

The three screws [B] do not need to be fully removed. Just loosen them to remove the SBU cover.

3. Original length sensors [A] (hooks,

178

x1,

x 1 each))

Scanner Unit

Exposure Lamp
1. Rear cover (

p.168)

2. Operation panel (
3. Exposure glass (

p.170)
p.176)

4
4. Scanner rear cover [A] (

x 1)

5. Disconnect the connector [A] from the lamp stabilizer [B].

179

4. Replacement and Adjustment

6. Move the carriage unit [A] to the cutout position [B].

7. Cable guide [A] (hooks)

Keep the cable guide for reassembling.
8. Adjustor clamp [B] (
9. Pulley [C]

180

x 1)

Scanner Unit

10. Release the cable clamp [A] (one hook under the cable clamp) at the rear edge of the exposure lamp.

11. Hold down the snap [B], and then slide the exposure lamp [C] to the front side.

12. Exposure lamp [A]

Reassembling

181

4. Replacement and Adjustment

Run the cable so there is no slack. Slide the adjustor clamp [A] to adjust the cable slack.
[B]: Good
[C]: Not good

Scanner Motor
1. Rear cover (

p.168)

2. Scanner motor assembly [A] (

3. Scanner motor [A] (

x 2, spring x 1,

x 1, timing belt x 1)

x 2, ground plate [B] x 1)

Make sure that the ground plate [B] is attached when installing the scanner motor in the scanner
motor bracket.
Do the scanner image adjustment after replacing the scanner motor (
Adjustment").
182

p.155 "Image

Scanner Unit

Sensor Board Unit (SBU)

1. Exposure glass (

p.176)

4
2. Original length sensor assembly [A] (

3. Sensor board unit [A] (

x 1,

x1,

x 4, ground screw x 1,

x 1 each)

x 2)

When reassembling
Adjust the following SP modes after you replace the sensor board unit:
SP4008 (Sub Scan Mag.Adjustment): See "Image Adjustment: Scanning" (p.155 "Image
Adjustment").
SP4010 (LE Regist Adjust): See "Image Adjustment: Scanning" (p.155 "Image Adjustment").
SP4011 (S-to-S Regist Adjustment): See "Image Adjustment: Scanning" (p.155 "Image
Adjustment").

183

4. Replacement and Adjustment

SP4688 (DF: Density Adjustment): Use this to adjust the density level if the ID of outputs made in the
DF and Platen mode is different.

Exposure Lamp Stabilizer

1. Rear cover (

p.168)

2. Exposure lamp stabilizer assembly [A] (

x 2,

x 2)

Scanner HP Sensor
1. Rear Cover (

p.168)

2. Scanner rear cover (

p.179 "Exposure Lamp")

3. Move the 1st scanner carriage [A] to the right side by rotating the scanner motor [B] clockwise.

184

Scanner Unit

4. Remove the mylar [A].

5. Remove the scanner HP sensor [B] (

x 1, hooks).

Platen Cover Sensor

1. Scanner rear cover (

p.179 "Exposure Lamp")

2. Holder bracket [A] (

x 1)

3. Platen cover sensor [B] (

x 1)

Front Scanner Wire

1. Rear Cover (

p.168)

2. Operation panel (
3. Exposure glass (

p.170)
p.176)

185

4. Replacement and Adjustment

4. Scanner left cover [A] (

5. Scanner left stay [A] (

x 2)

x 3)

6. Scanner front frame [B] (

186

x 5)

Scanner Unit

7. Take aside the connector bracket [A] (

8. Scanner rear frame [B] (
9. Scanner motor assembly (

x 8,

x all,

x 2).

x all)

p.182)

10. Rear scanner drive pulley [A] (

x 1)

187

4. Replacement and Adjustment

11. Front scanner wire clamp [A]

12. Loosen the front scanner wire bracket [B] (

x 1)

13. Front scanner wire

14. Move the shaft [C] in the red arrow direction (
[D] ( x 1).

Reinstalling the Front Scanner Wire

188

x 1: at front), and remove the scanner drive pulley

Scanner Unit

1. Position the center ball [A] in the middle of the forked holder.
2. Pass the right end (with the ball) [B] through the square hole. Pass the left end (with the ring) through
the notch.
3. Wind the right end counterclockwise (shown from the machines front) five times. Wind the left end
clockwise three times.
The two green marks [C] come together when you have done this. Stick the wire to the pulley
with tape. This lets you easily handle the assembly at the time of installation.

4. Install the drive pulley on the shaft [A] (

x 1,

x 1).

Do not attach the pulley to the shaft with the screw at this time.
5. Insert the left end into the slit [B]. The end should go via the rear track of the left pulley [C] and the
rear track of the movable pulley [D].

189

4. Replacement and Adjustment

6. Hook the right end onto the front scanner wire bracket [A]. The end should go via the rear track of
the right pulley [B] and the rear track of the movable pulley [C].
Do not attach the scanner wire bracket with the screw at this time.

7. Remove the tape from the drive pulley.

190

Scanner Unit

8. Insert a scanner positioning pin [A] through the 2nd carriage hole [B] and the left holes [C] in the front
rail. Insert another scanner positioning pin [D] through the 1st carriage hole [E] and the right holes in
the front rail [F].
9. Insert two more scanner positioning pins through the holes in the rear rail.
10. Screw the drive pulley to the shaft [G].
11. Screw the scanner wire bracket to the front rail [H].
12. Install the scanner wire clamp [I].
13. Pull out the positioning pins.
Make sure the 1st and 2nd carriages move smoothly after you remove the positioning pins. Do
steps 8 through 13 again if they do not.

Rear Scanner Wire

1. Rear Cover (

p.168)

2. Operation panel (
3. Exposure glass (

p.170)
p.176)

4. Scanner left cover (

p.185 "Front Scanner Wire")

5. Scanner front frame (

6. Scanner left stay (
7. Scanner rear frame (

p.185 "Front Scanner Wire")

p.185 "Front Scanner Wire")

p.185 "Front Scanner Wire")

8. Follow steps 10 through 14 in the p.185 "Front Scanner Wire". You can remove the rear scanner
wire with the same manner for replacing the front scanner wire.

191

4. Replacement and Adjustment

Reinstalling the Rear Scanner Wire

4
1. Position the center ball [A] in the middle of the forked holder.
2. Pass the left end (with the ball) [B] through the drive pulley notch. Pass the right end (with the ring)
through the drive pulley hole.
3. Wind the left end [B] clockwise (shown from the machines front) five times. Wind the right end
counterclockwise three times.
The two green marks [C] come together when you do this. Attach the wire to the pulley with tape.
This lets you easily handle the assembly at the time of installation.
4. Install the drive pulley on the shaft.
Do not attach the pulley on the shaft with the screw at this time.
5. Install the wire.
The winding of the wire on the three pulleys at the rear of the scanner should be the same as the
winding on the three pulleys at the front. This must show as a mirror image.
Example: At the front of the machine, the side of the drive pulley with the three windings must face the
front of the machine. At the rear of the machine, it must face the rear.
6. Do steps 7 through 13 from the "Reinstalling the Front Scanner Wire" (p.185 "Front Scanner Wire").

192

Scanner Unit

When removing the rear scanner wire, removing the timing pulley [A] is required before moving
the shaft ( x 1).

193

4. Replacement and Adjustment

Laser Optics
Turn off the main switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the procedures in this section.
Laser beams can cause serious eye injury.

Caution Decal Location

The caution decal is placed as shown below.

Be sure to turn off the main switch and disconnect the power plug from the power outlet before
beginning any disassembly or adjustment of the laser unit. This copier uses a class IIIb laser beam
with a wavelength of 648 - 663 nm and an output of 9 mW. The laser can cause serious eye injury.

Laser Unit

Before installing a new laser unit, remove the polygon motor holder bracket and the tag from the new
unit.

194

Laser Optics

Preparing a new laser unit

4
1. Polygon mirror motor cover [A] of the laser unit (

2. Polygon motor holder bracket [B] with a red tag (

x 4)

x 3)

195

4. Replacement and Adjustment

3. Install the three screws [C] (removed in step 2) in the laser unit.
4. Reinstall the polygon mirror motor cover [A] (

x 4).

Before removing the old laser unit

Do the following settings before removing the laser unit. These are adjustments for skew adjustment motors
in the laser unit.
1. Plug in and turn on the main power switch of the copier.
2. Enter the SP mode.
3. Execute SP2-220-001 to clear the Mirror-No.2 positioning motor setting for Cyan.

4. Execute SP2-220-002 to clear the Mirror-No.2 positioning motor setting for Magenta.
5. Execute SP2-220-003 to clear the Mirror-No.2 positioning motor setting for Yellow.
6. Exit the SP mode.
7. Turn off the main power switch and disconnect the power cord of the copier.

Recovery procedure for no replacement preparation of laser unit

If you did not do the procedure in Before removing the laser unit before removing the laser unit, you must
do the following.
1. Turn off the main power switch and disconnect the power cord of the copier.
2. Remove the left cover (see the following "Removing the laser unit").

3. Disconnect the harness [A] of the skew correction motor.

4. Do steps 1 to 7 of "Before removing the laser unit".
5. Connect the harness [A] and reinstall the left cover.
6. Plug in and turn on the main power switch.

196

Laser Optics

Removing the laser unit

4
1. Left cover [A] (

x 10)

2. ITB cleaning unit [A] (

x 2)

197

4. Replacement and Adjustment

3. Ventilation rear fan holder [A] (

x 2,

x 1)

4. Ventilation front fan holder [B] (

x 2,

x 1,

5. Remove the laser unit [A] (

x 2,

x 2,

x 1)

x 3)

After installing a new laser unit

Do the following adjustment after installing the new laser unit.
1. Open the front door of the machine.
2. Plug in and turn on the main power switch.
3. Check that the settings of SP2-119-001, -002 and -003 are "0". If these settings are not "0", execute
"Recovery procedure for no replacement preparation of laser unit" described above.
If this step is not correctly done, an image problem may occur on printouts.

198

Laser Optics

4. Input the SP settings on the sheet provided with a new LD unit.

SP2-101-001 to -004: Color Registration: Main Scan for each color

SP2-101-013 to -016: Color Registration: Sub Scan for each color
SP2-102-001, -003, -004, -006, -007, -009, -010, -012: Main Magnification for each color
and line speed
SP2-104-001 to -004: :LD Initial Power Adjustment for each color
The printed values [A] are different for each laser unit.
5. Print the test pattern (14: 1-dot trimming pattern in the SP2-109-003).
6. Check that the left and right trim margin is within 4 1 mm. If not, change the standard value for the
main scan magnification adjustment.
7. Select "0" with SP2-109-003 after printing the "1-dot trimming pattern.
8. Do the line position adjustment.
First do SP2-111-003.
Then do SP2-111-001.
To check if SP 2-111-001 was successful, watch the screen during the process. A message is
displayed at the end. Also, you can check the result with SP 2-194-010 to -012.
9. Exit the SP mode.

Polygon Mirror Motor

1. Laser unit (

p.194)

199

4. Replacement and Adjustment

2. Polygon mirror motor cover [A] (

3. Polygon mirror motor holder [A] (

4. Polygon mirror motor [B] (

x 4,

x 4)

x 1)
x 1)

After installing the laser optics housing unit:

Do the "Line Pos. Adjust Execute:Mode c" (SP2-111-003).
Then do the "Line Pos. Adjust Execute:Mode a" (SP2-111-001).
To check if SP 2-111-001 was successful, watch the screen during the process. A message is displayed
at the end. Also, you can check the result with SP2-194-010 to -012.

200

Image Creation

Image Creation
PCDU (Photo Conductor and Development Unit)

Do not touch the OPC drum. Do not let metal objects touch the development sleeve.
1. Open the front door.
2. PCDU toner collection bottle (

p.165)

3. Hold down the ITB lock lever [A] and turn it in the arrow direction.
4. PCDU [B] (

x 2 each)

201

4. Replacement and Adjustment

When installing a new PCDU

4
Remove the cover [A] on the toner inlet and pull out the tape [B] from the new development unit before
installing a new PCDU in the machine.

Drum Unit and Development Unit

The new drum unit has a front cover. When you attach the new drum unit to the development unit, remove
the front cover first.
Use it for installing the new drum unit and development unit.
1. If you install a new drum unit only, set SP 3902-xxx to "1".
Black: 3902-009
Cyan: 3902-010
Magenta: 3902-011
Yellow: 3902-012
If you do this, then the machine will reset the PM counter for the drum unit automatically, after
you turn the power on again.
2. If you install a new development unit only, set SP 3902-xxx to "1".
Black: 3902-001
Cyan: 3902-002
Magenta: 3902-003
Yellow: 3902-004

202

Image Creation

If you do this, then the machine will reset the PM counter for the development unit automatically,
after you turn the power on again.
3. Turn the machine power off.
4. PCDU (

p.201)

5. Front cover [A] (

x 2)

6. Rear cover [A] (

x 2)

203

4. Replacement and Adjustment

7. Drum unit [A] and development unit [B] (

x 1)

When the development unit is removed from the drum unit, clean the entrance mylar [A] with a
vacuum cleaner.

8. Remove the connector [A] with a small flat tool [B].

204

Image Creation

Keep this connector [A] for the new drum unit.

9. If you change the development unit, do the ACC procedure.
10. Execute the drum phase adjustment with SP1902-001 twice.

New unit detection for the development unit

When a new development unit is installed in the machine, the machine will automatically reset the PM
counters for the development unit and drum unit, even if the drum unit was not changed. To avoid resetting
both counters after you install a new development unit only, make sure that step 2 in the procedure above
is done before installing.

Toner Hopper Unit

Toner hopper unit: K, C, M
1. Open the front door.
2. PCDU toner collection bottle (
3. Inner cover (
4. PCDU (

p.165)

p.172)

p.201)

Remove the corresponding color PCDU. For example, if you remove the toner hopper unit: K,
remove the black PCDU.

5. Toner supply drive gear [A] (hook x 1)

6. Toner hopper unit: K, C, M [B] (

x 2,

x 1 for K and M; 2 for C ,

x 1 each)

205

4. Replacement and Adjustment

7. Place the toner hopper unit [A] on sheets of paper.

Toner hopper unit: Y

1. Open the front door.
2. PCDU toner collection bottle (
3. Inner cover (
4. PCDU (

p.165)

p.172)

p.201)

5. Gear cover [A] (

x 2,

x 2)

6. Toner supply drive gear (hook x 1)

7. Toner hopper unit: Y [B] (

206

x 2,

x 1 each)

Image Creation

8. Place the toner hopper unit [A] on sheets of paper.

When installing a new toner hopper unit

Developer must be added to the new toner hopper. Some developer (8 g) is provided with each new toner
hopper unit. Pour this into the toner hopper unit before reattaching the inner cover.

1. Slowly open the toner hopper shutter [A].

Do not try to open the toner hopper shutter fully at one try. This shutter comes off easily without
the inner cover. If the toner hopper shutter has come off, reattach it.
2. Pour the developer (8 g) into the inlet [B] of the toner hopper unit.
3. Close the toner hopper shutter.
4. Reassemble the machine.

207

4. Replacement and Adjustment

Toner Supply Motor

1. Open the front door.
2. PCDU toner collection bottle (
3. Inner cover (
4. Inner tray (

p.165)

p.172)
p.175)

5. Toner supply drive gear [A] (hook x 1)

6. Pull the toner supply drive shaft [B].

7. Take aside the toner supply gear unit [A] (

NOTE

208

x 3).

Image Creation

When removing the toner supply gear unit for Yellow, one of screws on the toner supply gear unit
is difficult to see.
1) Remove the left cover (

p.167).

4
2) Check the screw position [A] as shown above.

8. Release the clamp [A], and then disconnect the harness [B].

209

4. Replacement and Adjustment

9. Toner supply motor [A] (

x 1,

x 1,

x 2)

NOTE
Apply Silicon Grease G501 to the gear of the motor. The appropriate amount of grease is as
shown below.

4
The flat screwdriver in the photo is a small size.

Toner Collection Motor

1. Open the front door.
2. PCDU toner collection bottle (
3. PCDU: Yellow (

p.201)

4. Ventilation Fan: Front (

"Removing the laser unit" under p.194 "Laser Unit")

5. Disconnect two harnesses [A].

210

p.165)

Image Creation

6. Toner collection motor assembly [A] (

7. Gears [A] (

x 2,

x 3)

x 1)

8. Toner collection motor [A] (

x 2)

211

4. Replacement and Adjustment

NOTE
Apply Silicon Grease G501 to the gear of the motor. The appropriate amount of grease is as
shown below.

The flat screwdriver in the photo is a small size.

PCDU Toner Collection Bottle Full Sensor

1. Toner collection motor assembly (

p.210 "Toner Collection Motor")

2. PCDU toner collection bottle full sensor [A] (

x 1,

x 1, hooks)

PCDU Toner Collection Bottle Set Switch

1. Toner collection motor assembly (

212

p.210 "Toner Collection Motor")

Image Creation

2. PCDU toner collection bottle set switch [A] (hooks,

x 1)

RFID Board
1. All toner hopper units (
2. Inner tray (

p.205)

p.175)

3. Toner supply drive shafts [A]

213

4. Replacement and Adjustment

4. Harness cover [A] (

5. RFID board [A] (

214

x 1)

x 3,

x 1)

Image Transfer

Image Transfer
ITB Cleaning Unit
If you replace the cleaning unit or toner collection bottle after the machine detects that it is full or near-full,
the machine automatically resets the PM counter for the bottle after replacement.
But, if you replace a bottle that is not full or near-full, then you must reset the PM counter for this unit. To do
this, set SPs 3902-017 and -020 to 1 before you turn off the power switch.
If you do this, then the machine will reset the PM counter for the units automatically, after you turn the power
on again.
SP 3902-017 is for the ITB cleaning unit and SP 3902-020 is for the ITB toner collection bottle.

1. Open the ITB cleaning unit cover [A] (

2. ITB cleaning unit [A] (

x 2).

x 2)

215

4. Replacement and Adjustment

When installing the ITB cleaning unit

Secure the front side [B] first with a screw. This [B] is the positioning screw.

ITB Toner Collection Bottle Full Sensor

1. Left cover (

p.167)

2. Bottle full sensor assembly [A] (

x 1,

x 1,

x 1)

3. ITB toner collection bottle full sensor [B] (hooks)

ITB (Image Transfer Belt) Unit

1. ITB cleaning unit (

p.215)

2. PCU toner collection bottle (

3. Unlock the ITB lock lever (
4. Duplex unit (

216

p.280)

p.165)
p.171 "Inner Right Cover").

Image Transfer

5. Release the arm [A] (

x 1).

6. Pull the lever [B] to open the paper transfer unit.

7. Harness cover [C] (

x 1)

8. Grasp the handles [A], and then pull out the ITB unit fully [B] (

x 2,

x 1).

9. Remove the ITB unit motor after pulling out the ITB unit from the machine. (

"Next procedure")

If it takes much time to reinstall the ITB unit after removing it from the machine, close the paper transfer
unit to prevent the drum units from being exposed to light.

ITB Unit Motor

1. ITB cleaning unit (
2. ITB unit (

p.215)

p.216)

217

4. Replacement and Adjustment

3. ITB unit motor [A] (

x 3,

Image Transfer Belt

1. ITB cleaning unit (
2. ITB unit (

218

p.215)

p.216)

3. ITB unit motor (

p.217)

4. Two stays [A] (

x 2 each)

x 1)

Image Transfer

5. Front holder bracket [A] (as seen from the front) (

x 1: M3x10)

6. Rear holder bracket [A] (as seen from the rear) (

x 1: M3x10)

7. Handle [A] (

x 2: M3x10)

219

4. Replacement and Adjustment

8. Guide bracket [A]

9. Pull the tension roller [A] as shown.

10. Front guide pin bracket [A] (

11. Press roller bracket [B] (

220

x 2)

x 1)

Image Transfer

12. Attach the handle [A], which was removed in step 7, to the projection [B] on the rear left side (
1).

This handle will be used as a stand in later steps.

13. Stand the ITB unit [A] as shown above.

14. Image transfer belt [B]

When reinstalling a new image transfer belt

Reset the PM counter

221

4. Replacement and Adjustment

There is a rim [A] at each edge of the transfer belt. The ends of all the rollers ([B] for example) in the
transfer belt unit must be between the two rims.
There are two rims (width [C]: about 5 mm) at the front and rear edges inside the image transfer
belt.

This belt must be installed the correct way around. When you reinstall the image transfer belt unit,
install it with the white mark [A] on the belt at the rear side of the unit.

ITB Contact Motor

1. Pull out all the toner bottles.
2. Inverter tray (
3. Inner tray (

222

p.174)
p.175)

Image Transfer

4. Take aside the ITB contact motor unit [A] (

5. Disconnect two harnesses [A], and then remove the ITB contact motor unit (

6. Gears [A] (

x 2)

x 1)

x 1)

7. ITB contact motor [B] (

x 2)
223

4. Replacement and Adjustment

NOTE
Apply Silicon Grease G501 to the gear of the motor. The appropriate amount of grease is as
shown below.

The flat screwdriver in the photo is a small size.

ITB Contact Sensor

1. ITB contact motor unit (

p.222 "ITB Contact Motor")

2. ITB contact sensor [A] (hooks)

224

Paper Transfer

Paper Transfer
PTR (Paper Transfer Roller) Unit
If you install a new PTR unit, then set SP 3902-018 to "1" before you start this procedure.
If you do this, then the machine will reset the PM counter for the paper transfer unit automatically,
after you turn the power on again.
1. Open the duplex unit.

2. Open the paper transfer unit [A].

If the paper transfer unit cannot be opened, keep your hand supporting the PTR unit as shown
above and release very carefully the front tension lever [A] of the PTR unit. In this case, the PTR
unit open lever [B] does not work to open the PTR unit.
225

4. Replacement and Adjustment

The spring tension of the tension lever is very strong. Be very careful to release the tension lever.
Otherwise, your hand or fingers may be injured.

4
3. Remove the PTR unit [A], releasing the two locks [B].

4. Remove the two springs [A].

Keep these two springs from the old PTR unit and install them in the new PTR unit.

Paper Transfer Unit Full-Open

1. Duplex unit (

226

p.280)

Paper Transfer

4
2. Release the arm [A] (

x 1).

3. Open the paper transfer unit [B] fully.

ID Sensor Board
1. Duplex unit (

p.280)

2. Open the paper transfer unit fully (

3. ID sensor cover [A] (

p.226 "Paper Transfer Unit Full-Open").

x 2)

227

4. Replacement and Adjustment

4. ID sensor board [A] (

x 6, ,

x 1,

x 1)

If the black spacer [B] is stuck to the sensor board as shown above, remove all black spacers.
These black spacers should be used when a new ID sensor board is installed.

Cleaning for ID sensors

ID sensors require cleaning maintenance every EM. Do the following steps for ID sensor cleaning.
1. PCDU: K (
2. ITB unit (

p.201)
p.216)

3. Clean the ID sensors [A].

Use a cloth moistened with alcohol to clean the ID sensors.

228

Paper Transfer

Do not use a dry cloth. Otherwise, the ID sensors may get more dirty due to static electricity.

After installing a new ID sensor unit/board

Do the following adjustment after installing a new ID sensor unit/board.
1. Plug in and turn on the main power switch of the copier.
2. Enter the SP mode.

4
3. Input all correction coefficients [A] for the ID sensor with the SP modes referring to the barcode sheet
provided with the new ID sensor unit/board.
For example, input "0.98" with SP3-362-013.
4. Exit the SP mode.

PTR Contact Motor

1. Open the duplex unit.
2. Open the paper transfer unit (
3. Inner right cover (
4. Inner cover (

p.225 "PTR (Paper Transfer Roller) Unit").

p.171)

p.172)

229

4. Replacement and Adjustment

5. Disconnect the two harnesses [A] (

6. Interlock switch bracket [B] (

x 1).

x 3,

x all)

7. Spring [A]
Do not forget to reinstall the spring [A] when reassembling. Otherwise, SC400 may occur.
8. PTR contact motor bracket [B] (

230

x 3)

Paper Transfer

9. Gear [A] (

x 1, bearing x 1)

10. PTR contact motor [B] (

x 2,

x 3)

NOTE
Apply Silicon Grease G501 to the gear of the motor. The appropriate amount of grease is as
shown below.

The flat screwdriver in the photo is a small size.

PTR Contact Sensor

1. PTR contact motor bracket (

p.229 "PTR Contact Motor")

231

4. Replacement and Adjustment

2. PTR contact sensor [A] (hooks,

x 2,

x 1)

Temperature and Humidity Sensor

1. Right rear cover (

p.169)

2. Temperature and humidity sensor [A] (

232

x 1,

x 1,

x 1)

Drive Unit

Drive Unit

The drawing above shows the drive unit layout.

1. ITB unit motor
2. Fusing/paper exit motor
3. Drum motor: CMY
4. Development motor: CMY
5. Development clutch: K

6. Drum/Development motor: K
7. Paper feed motor: T1
8. Paper feed motor: T2
9. Registration motor

There are some motors and clutches that are not shown in the above drawing:
Duplex inverter motor

Duplex Exit Motor

Duplex Entrance Motor

By-pass Motor

Gear Unit
1. Rear cover (

p.168)

233

4. Replacement and Adjustment

2. Rear lower cover (

p.168)

3. Open the controller box (

p.294 "Controller Box")

4
4. Remove all connectors and clamps (blue arrows) on the HVPS: CB board [A].
5. Pull all the PCDUs to the front side. (

6. Gear unit [A] (

x all,

p.201)

x all: blue arrows,

x 8)

The short screwdriver (190 mm or less in total length) is required to remove the screw [B].

Adjustment after reinstalling the gear unit

Do the following procedures after reinstalling the gear unit.
1. Turn on the main power switch.
2. Enter "System SP" in the SP mode.
3. Do "Drum Phase Adj." with SP1902-001.
4. Check the result of the Drum Phase Adjustment with SP1902-002.
0: Success, 2: Failure due to no sampling data,
3: Failure due to insufficient number of pattern detections
234

Drive Unit

When the result of this adjustment is "2" or "3":

Check that the all PCDUs are correctly set and that the ITB unit is correctly set.
Do "Drum Phase Adj." again after checking the PCDUs and ITB unit.
When the result is still "2" or "3" after checking the PCDUs and image transfer belt unit:
Check that the gear unit is installed correctly.
5. Exit the SP mode.

Registration Motor
1. Rear cover (

p.168)

2. Rear lower cover (

p.168)

3. Open the controller box (

4. Registration motor [A] (

p.294 "Controller Box")

x 2,

x 1)

The short screwdriver (190 mm or less in total length) is required to remove the screw [B]
The picture below shows how to remove the screw [C] of the gear unit. The controller box should
be closed at this time.

235

4. Replacement and Adjustment

4
Paper Feed Motor: T1
1. Rear cover (

p.168)

2. Rear lower cover (

p.168)

3. Open the controller box (

4. Paper feed motor: T1 [A] (

p.294 "Controller Box")

x 1,

x 2)

The picture below shows how to remove the screw [B] of the paper feed motor T1.

236

Drive Unit

4
Paper Feed Motor: T2
1. Rear lower cover (

p.168)

2. Paper feed motor: T2 [A] (

x 1,

x 2)

Drum Motor: CMY

Do not remove the PCDUs when you replace the drum motor-CMY.
1. Rear cover (

p.168)

2. Rear lower cover (

p.168)

3. Open the controller box (

p.294 "Controller Box")

237

4. Replacement and Adjustment

4. Drum motor: CMY [A] (

x 3,

x 1)

Development Motor: CMY

1. Rear cover (

p.168)

2. Rear lower cover (

p.168)

3. Open the controller box (

p.294 "Controller Box")

4. Development motor: CMY [A] (

x 3,

x 1)

Drum/Development Motor: K
1. Rear cover (

p.168)

2. Rear lower cover (

p.168)

3. Open the controller box (

238

p.294 "Controller Box")

Drive Unit

4. Drum/Development motor: K [A] (

x 3,

x 1)

Development Clutch: K
1. Rear cover (

p.168)

2. Rear lower cover (

p.168)

3. Open the controller box (

p.294 "Controller Box")

4. Drum/Development Motor: K (

p.238)

5. Remove the bracket with the development clutch: K [A] (

x 2,

x 1,

x 1)

6. Remove the development clutch: K [B] from the bracket.

Fusing/Paper Exit Motor

1. Rear cover (

p.168)

2. Rear lower cover (

p.168)
239

4. Replacement and Adjustment

3. Open the controller box (

p.294 "Controller Box")

4
4. Loosen the stay [A] (

x 1, hook [B] x 1)

The hook [B] is installed as shown above. Do not pull the stay by force, or the hook might be
broken.

5. Fusing/paper exit motor [A] (

x 3,

x 1)

The picture below shows how to remove the screw [B] of the fusing/paper exit motor.

240

Drive Unit

241

4. Replacement and Adjustment

Fusing
Fusing Unit

Turn off the main switch and wait until the fusing unit cools down before beginning any of the
procedures in this section. The fusing unit can cause serious burns.
1. Open the duplex unit.

2. Open the paper transfer unit [A]

3. Release the lock levers [B].
4. Hold the fusing unit handles [C], and then pull out the fusing unit.

242

Fusing

If the fusing unit is stuck to the PTR unit and cannot be removed from the machine, keep your hand supporting
the PTR unit as shown above and release very carefully the front tension lever [A] of the PTR unit. In this
case, the PTR unit open lever [B] does not work to open the PTR unit.
The spring tension of the tension lever is very strong. Be very careful to release the tension lever.
Otherwise, your hand or fingers may be injured.

When installing the fusing unit

Make sure that the both lock levers [B] are locked before closing the duplex unit. Otherwise, these lock
levers [B] can be broken.

Entrance Guide Plate

1. Fusing unit (

p.242)

2. Entrance Guide Plate [A] (

x 2)

Cleaning Requirement
The entrance guide plate requires cleaning maintenance at every 60 K interval. Clean the entrance guide
plate with a cloth moistened with alcohol at the following points.

243

4. Replacement and Adjustment

Stripper Plate
1. Fusing unit (

244

p.242)

Fusing

2. Fusing upper cover [A] (

x 4)

3. Open the exit guide plate [A].

4. Remove the e-rings [A] at the front and rear side, and then springs [B] at the front and rear side.

245

4. Replacement and Adjustment

5. Turn the stripper plate [A], and then remove it.

Cleaning Requirement
The stripper plate requires cleaning maintenance at every 60 K interval. Clean the stripper plate with a
cloth moistened with alcohol at the following points.

Exit Guide Plate Cleaning Procedure

The exit guide plate requires cleaning maintenance at every 60 K interval.
1. Fusing unit (

246

p.242)

Fusing

2. Open the exit guide plate [A].

3. Clean the exit guide plate [A] with a cloth moistened with alcohol.

Fusing Gear Shafts Lubrication Procedure

The fusing gear shafts require cleaning maintenance (if it is dirty) at every 60 K interval.
1. Fusing unit (

p.242)

2. Fusing upper cover (

p.244)

247

4. Replacement and Adjustment

3. Rear stay [A] (

x 2)

4. Fusing idle gears [B]

5. Apply "Barrierta S552R" to the gear shafts [A] of the fusing unit. The appropriate amount of grease
is as shown above. The flat screwdriver [B] in the photo is a small size.

Heating Roller Fusing Lamp

1. Fusing unit (

p.242)

2. Fusing upper cover (

248

p.244 "Stripper Plate")

Fusing

3. Remove the cords [A] from the rear stay (

4. Rear lamp stay [B] (

x 2)

5. Remove the cords [C] from the front stay (

6. Front lamp stay [D] (

x 2).

x 2).

x 2)

7. Heating roller fusing lamp [A]

Heating Roller Unit

1. Fusing unit (

p.242)

2. Fusing upper cover (

p.244 "Stripper Plate")

3. Heating roller fusing lamp (

p.248)

249

4. Replacement and Adjustment

4. Terminal base [A] (

5. Thermostat base [A] (

6. Left frame [B] (

x 3)

x 2)

x 4)

Some cables are still connected to the fusing unit at this time. Do not put any tension to the
connected cables during this procedure.

250

Fusing

7. Slide the front and rear flanges [A] to the outer sides to detach both flanges from the front and rear
heating roller brackets.

8. Hold the both flange at the front and rear side of the heating roller unit [A], and then pull the heating
roller unit [A].

251

4. Replacement and Adjustment

When reinstalling the heating roller unit

4
Make sure that the flange with mark F [A] is placed to the front side of the fusing unit when reinstalling
the heating roller unit.

Pressure Roller
Cleaning Procedure
The pressure roller requires cleaning maintenance (if it is dirty) at every 60 K interval.
1. Fusing unit (

p.242)

2. Fusing upper cover (

p.244 "Stripper Plate")

3. Open the exit guide plate [A]

4. Clean the pressure roller [B] with a dry cloth.

252

Fusing

Clean the both ends [C] of the pressure roller as well as the center area.

Replacement Procedure
1. Heating roller unit (

p.249)

2. Bearing [A] at the front end of the pressure roller (C-ring x 1)

3. Rear stay [A] (

x 2)

4. Pressure lever [B] (spring x 1)

5. Pressure roller gear [C] (C-ring x 1)
6. Bearing [D] at the rear end of the pressure roller

253

4. Replacement and Adjustment

7. Pressure roller [A]

When reassembling the pressure roller

When replacing the pressure roller, you have to apply lubricant to the following places.

Apply "Barrierta S552R" to the front edge [A] and rear edge [B] of the pressure roller as shown above.

Heating Roller Thermostats

Side Heating Roller Thermostat
1. Fusing upper cover (

254

p.244 "Stripper Plate")

Fusing

2. Side heating roller thermostat [A] (

x 2)

Do not re-use a thermostat that is already opened. Safety is not guaranteed if you do this.

Lower Heating Roller Thermostats

1. Heating roller unit (

p.249)

1. Lower heating roller thermostats [A] (

x 2 each)

Do not re-use a thermostat that is already opened. Safety is not guaranteed if you do this.

Heating Roller Thermistor

1. Fusing upper cover (

p.244 "Stripper Plate")

255

4. Replacement and Adjustment

2. Heating roller thermistor bracket [A] (

3. Heating roller thermistor [A] (

x 1,

x 1)

x 1)

Cleaning Requirement
The heating roller thermistor requires cleaning maintenance at every 60 K interval. Clean the heating roller
thermistor with a dry cloth.

Pressure Roller Thermistor

Pressure Roller Thermistor: Center
1. Fusing unit (

p.242)

2. Fusing upper cover (

256

p.244 "Stripper Plate")

Fusing

3. Thermistor center assembly [A] (

x 1,

4. Pressure roller thermistor: Center [A] (

x 1)

x 1)

Pressure Roller Thermistor: End

1. Fusing unit (

p.242)

2. Fusing upper cover (

p.244 "Stripper Plate")

257

4. Replacement and Adjustment

3. Thermistor end assembly [A] (

x 1,

4. Pressure roller thermistor: End [A] (

x 1)

x 1)

Cleaning Requirement
The pressure roller thermistors (center and end) require cleaning maintenance at every 60 K interval. Clean
the pressure roller thermistors (center and end) with a dry cloth.

Thermopile
1. Fusing unit (

258

p.242)

Fusing

2. Thermopile base [A] (

3. Thermopile [A] (

x 2,

x 1)

x 1)

When cleaning the lens of the thermopile

Do this cleaning procedure after the fusing unit has completely cooled down. Otherwise, you may
get a serious burn.
1. Fusing unit (

p.242)

259

4. Replacement and Adjustment

2. Clean the thermopile lens [A] with a dry cloth.

Cleaning Unit (Option) Installation Procedure

1. Fusing unit (

p.242)

2. Fusing upper cover [A] (

260

x 4)

Fusing

3. Top right frame [A] (

x 2)

4. Install the cleaning unit [A] in the fusing unit.

5. Secure the cleaning unit [A] (

x 2)

6. Reassemble the fusing unit.

261

4. Replacement and Adjustment

Paper Feed
Paper Tray

4
1. Pull paper tray 1 or 2 [A] part of the way out.
2. Remove two screws from both tray guides.
3. Pull out paper tray 1 or 2 [A].

Feed Roller
Tray 1 and Tray 2
1. Paper tray 1 or 2 (

p.262)

2. Press down the bottom plate [A].

3. Slide the feed roller shaft [B] to the rear side (
4. Feed roller [C] (hook x 1)

262

x 1).

Paper Feed

When reinstalling the feed roller

Do not touch the feed roller with your bare hands when replacing it. If you do, clean the feed roller with a
damp cloth or alcohol.

Friction Pad
1. Paper tray 1 or 2 (
2. Feed roller (

p.262)

p.262)

3. Remove the coupling gear [A] (pin x 1, spring x 1,

x 1).

4. Slide the feed roller shaft to the front side, and then remove it.

5. Friction pad [A] (hooks, spring x 1)

263

4. Replacement and Adjustment

When reinstalling the friction pad

Make sure that the mylar [A] does not go under the friction pad when reinstalling the friction pad.
Do not touch the friction pad with your bare hands, when replacing it. If you do, clean the friction pad with
a damp cloth or alcohol.

Paper Size Switch

1. Paper tray 1 and 2 (

p.262)

Paper size switch: T1 [A]

Paper size switch: T2 [B]

264

Paper Feed

2. Paper size switch [A] (hooks,

x 1)

Paper End Sensor

Paper End Sensor: T1
1. Paper tray 1 and 2 (

p.262)

2. Release the two clamps [A].

3. Paper end sensor: T1 [B] (hooks,

x 1)

Paper End Sensor: T2

1. Paper tray 1 and 2 (

p.262)

265

4. Replacement and Adjustment

2. Release the clamp [A].

3. Paper end sensor: T2 [B] (hooks,

x 1)

Registration Sensor
1. Duplex unit (

p.280)

2. Open the paper transfer unit to the fully-open position (

3. Registration roller guide [A] (

266

x 2)

p.226).

Paper Feed

4. Close the paper transfer unit [A].

5. Relay guide plate [B] (

x 2)

6. Upper vertical transport guide [C] (

7. Registration sensor [A] (

x 1,

x 2, hooks,

x 4)

x 1)

267

4. Replacement and Adjustment

Cleaning the registration roller

Clean the registration roller and registration idle roller [A] with a damp cloth every 60 K (total count).
Never use alcohol to clean the registration roller.

Vertical Transport Sensor

Vertical Transport Sensor 1
1. Duplex unit (

p.280)

2. Middle guide plate [A] (

268

x 2)

Paper Feed

3. Open the lower right door [A].

4. Release the belt [B].

5. Open the lower guide plate [A]

6. Middle guide bracket [B] (

7. Sensor bracket [A] (

x 1,

x 4,

x 2,

x 1)

x 1)

269

4. Replacement and Adjustment

8. Vertical transport sensor 1 [B] (

x 1, hooks)

Vertical Transport Sensor 2

1. Duplex unit (

p.280)

2. Open the lower right door [A].

3. Release the belt [B].

4. Release the rear pivot [A], and then remove the lower right door [B].

270

Paper Feed

5. Lower guide bracket [A] (

6. Sensor bracket [A] (

x 2)

x 1)

7. Vertical transport sensor 2 [B] (hooks,

x 1)

271

4. Replacement and Adjustment

Paper Exit
Junction Gate Solenoid Fan
1. Right upper cover (
2. Right rear cover (

p.173)
p.169)

3. Fan base [A] (

x 1,

x 1)

4. Junction gate solenoid fan [B] (hooks)

When installing the junction gate solenoid fan

Make sure that the junction gate solenoid fan is installed with its decal facing to the left side.

Paper Exit Unit

1. Fusing Unit (

p.242)

2. Front right cover (

p.172)

3. Junction gate solenoid fan base (

4. Paper exit cover (
5. Inner Tray (

272

p.174)

p.175)

p.272 "Junction Gate Solenoid Fan")

Paper Exit

6. Front harness cover [A] (

x 1)

7. Remove or disconnect the following:

Two screws [A] at the front side
Front harness [B]
Ground cable [C] (

x 1)

Rear harness [D]

273

4. Replacement and Adjustment

4
8. Paper exit unit [A]

Fusing Exit Sensor

1. Paper exit unit (

p.272)

2. Sensor assembly [A] (

274

x 1,

x 1,

x 1)

Paper Exit

3. Fusing exit sensor [A] (

x 1)

Paper Exit Sensor

1. Paper exit unit (

p.272)

2. Paper exit sensor [A] (hooks,

x 1)

275

4. Replacement and Adjustment

When installing the paper exit sensor

4
Stand the paper exit unit so that [A] is facing up. Otherwise, the paper exit sensor feeler interrupts the
installation of the paper exit sensor.
Insert the hook [B] first.

Inverter Sensor
1. Paper exit unit (

p.272)

2. Remove the screw [A].

3. Release all clamps that clamp the harness [B].

276

Paper Exit

4. Move the sensor assembly [A] to the cutout [B], and then remove it (

x1,

x 1)

5. Inverter sensor [A] (hooks)

Inverter Motor
1. Paper exit unit (

p.272)

277

4. Replacement and Adjustment

2. Inverter motor [A] (

x 2,

x 1)

Fusing Front Fan

1. Front right cover (

2. Fusing front fan [A] (

p.172)

x 2,

x 1,

x 1)

When installing the fusing front fan

Make sure that the fusing front fan is installed with its decal facing to the rear side.

278

Paper Exit

Make sure that harnesses are correctly set [A] along the guide on the fan frame without slack [B]. Otherwise,
the some of the wires could be pinched and damaged or cut between the fan frame and the frame of the
main machine. SC533 can be issued if the harnesses are broken.

279

4. Replacement and Adjustment

Duplex Unit
Duplex Unit

1. Remove the screw [A].

2. Open the duplex unit.

3. Move the duplex unit in the direction shown by

4. Disconnect the harness [B].

280

, and remove the hook [A].

Duplex Unit

5. Release the front and rear arms [A], [B] (

x 1 each).

6. Remove the clip [A].

7. Slide the duplex unit [B] to the front side, and then remove it.

Duplex Entrance Sensor

1. Duplex unit (

p.280)

281

4. Replacement and Adjustment

2. Duplex inner cover [A] (

x 2)

3. Duplex entrance guide unit [A] (hook x 3)

Lift up the duplex guide plate [A] first when reinstalling the duplex entrance guide unit.

4. Duplex outer guide plate [A] (

282

x 4)

Duplex Unit

5. Duplex entrance sensor [A] (hook)

Duplex Exit Sensor

1. Pull out the 1st tray.
2. Duplex unit (

p.280)

3. Duplex exit sensor assembly cover [A] (

4. Duplex exit sensor assembly [B] (

x 1)

x 1, ground screw x 1,

x 1,

x 1)

283

4. Replacement and Adjustment

5. Duplex exit sensor [A] (hook)

Duplex Entrance Motor

1. Duplex unit (

p.280)

2. Duplex inner cover (

p.281 "Duplex Entrance Sensor")

3. Duplex entrance motor with the bracket [A] (

284

x 3,

x1,

x 1)

Duplex Unit

4. Separate the duplex entrance motor [A] from the bracket (

x 2)

Duplex Exit Motor

1. Duplex unit (

p.280)

2. Duplex inner cover (

p.281 "Duplex Entrance Sensor")

3. Duplex exit motor with the bracket [A] (

x 3,

x 2,

4. Separate the duplex exit motor [A] from the bracket (

x 1)

x 2)

By-pass Motor
1. Duplex unit (

p.280)

2. Duplex inner cover (

p.281 "Duplex Entrance Sensor")

285

4. Replacement and Adjustment

3. By-pass motor with the bracket [A] (

x 3,

x 2,

x 1)

Remove the clamp [B] from the bracket to disconnect the harness.

4. By-pass motor [A] (

x 2)

By-pass Tray Unit

1. Duplex unit (

p.280)

2. Duplex inner cover (

p.281 "Duplex Entrance Sensor")

3. Reinstall the duplex unit once, and open it.

286

Duplex Unit

4. Disconnect the harness [A].

5. Close the duplex unit.

6. Open the by-pass tray unit [A]

7. By-pass tray unit (

x 2, hook [B]).

Use a flat-head screw driver or similar tool to push the hook [B] down.

By-pass Paper Length Sensor

1. Open the by-pass tray unit.

287

4. Replacement and Adjustment

2. By-pass tray right cover [A] (

x 2)

3. By-pass paper length sensor [A] (

By-Pass Paper Size Sensor

1. By-pass tray unit (

p.286)

2. By-pass tray cover [A] (hook x 1)

288

x 1)

Duplex Unit

3. By-pass paper size sensor [A] (

x 1)

When reinstalling the by-pass paper size sensor

1. Adjust the projection [A] of the left side fence bar (it must be centered).
2. Install the by-pass paper size detection switch so that the hole [B] in this switch faces the projection
[C] of the left side fence bar.
3. Reassemble the copier.
4. Plug in and turn on the main power switch.
5. Check this switch operation with SP5803-046 (By-Pass Size Detection SW < Input Check).
- Display on the LCD Paper Size

Display

Paper Size

Display

A3 SEF

00001001

A5 SEF

00001110

B4 SEF

00001011

B6 SEF

00001100

289

4. Replacement and Adjustment

A4 SEF

00000011

A6 SEF

00001101

B5 SEF

00000111

Smaller A6 SEF

00001101

By-pass Paper End Sensor

1. By-pass tray unit (

p.286)

2. By-pass paper end sensor [A] (

x 1, hook)

Reinstalling the By-pass Paper End Sensor

Reinstall the right hook first and then the left hook using a flat-head screw driver or similar tool.

By-pass Feed Roller

1. By-pass tray unit (

p.286)

2. By-pass feed roller [A] (hook)

290

Duplex Unit

By-pass Tray HP Sensor

1. Open the by-pass tray unit.
2. Open the duplex unit.

3. Remove the hand holder [A].

4. Rotate the actuator [A] counter clockwise as shown above.

5. By-pass tray HP sensor [B] (hook).

291

4. Replacement and Adjustment

Electrical Components
Boards
Controller Box Closed

292

[A]

BCU

[B]

Controller Board

[C]

IPU

[D]

DRB

[E]

SDVDB (Shut Down and Voltage Detection Board)

[F]

PSU

Electrical Components

Controller Box Open

4
[A]

HVPS: TTS Board

[B]

HVPS: CB Board

Controller Box Cover

1. Rear cover (

p.168)

2. Remove the scanner cable bracket [A] (

x 3)

3. Loosen the five screws pointed by the arrow marks in the picture above.
4. Remove the three screws [B] at the bottom of the controller box.
5. Slid up the controller box cover [C], and then remove it.

293

4. Replacement and Adjustment

Controller Box
Opening the controller box
1. Rear cover (

p.168)

2. Rear lower cover (

p.168)

3. Controller box cover (

p.293)

4. Remove the three screws and disconnect the scanner cable [A] (ground screw x 1)

5. Open the controller box [A].

BCU
1. Rear cover (

p.168)

2. Controller box cover (

294

p.293)

Electrical Components

4
3. BCU [A] (

x 7,

x All)

Make sure the NVRAM is correctly installed on the BCU. Insert the NVRAM in the NVRAM slot
with the "half-moon" pointing [B] to the downward side.

When installing the new BCU

1. Remove the NVRAM from the old BCU.
2. Install the NVRAM on the new BCU after you replace the BCU.
3. Reassemble the machine.
4. Turn on the main power of the machine.
5. "SC995-01" occurs.
6. Enter the serial number with SP5811-004.
7. Turn the main power of the machine off and on.
Make sure you print out the SMC reports ("SP Mode Data" and "Logging Data") before you replace
the NVRAM.
Keep NVRAM away from any objects that can cause static electricity. Static electricity can damage
NVRAM data.

295

4. Replacement and Adjustment

HDD

Copy the address book data to an SD card from the HDD with SP5846-051 before replacing the
HDD if possible.
1. Rear cover (

p.168)

2. Controller box cover (

p.293)

3. Open the BCU bracket [A] (

4. HDD with bracket [A] (

5. HDD bracket [B] (

x 2,

x 5,

x 4,

x 2).

x 4)

6. HDD

After installing a new HDD

1. Do SP5832-001 to format the HDD.
296

x 3, flat cable x 2).

Electrical Components

2. Do SP5853-001 to copy the preset stamp data from the firmware to the HDD.
3. Do SP5846-052 to copy back the address book to the hard disk from the SD card to which you have
already copied the address book data if possible.
4. Do SP5-878-001 to install the DataOverwriteSecurity application.
5. Do SP5878-002 to install the HDD Encryption application.
6. Turn off the machine.

Disposal of HDD Units

Never remove an HDD unit from the work site without the consent of the client.
If the customer has any concerns about the security of any information on the HDD, the HDD must
remain with the customer for disposal or safe keeping.

The HDD may contain proprietary or classified (Confidential, Secret) information. Specifically, the
HDD contains document server documents and data stored in temporary files created automatically
during copy job sorting and jam recovery. Such data is stored on the HDD in a special format so it
cannot normally be read but can be recovered with illegal methods.

IPU Board
1. Rear cover (

p.168)

2. Controller box cover (

3. Open the BCU bracket (

p.293)
p.296 "HDD")

4. Flat cable holders [A]

5. Flat cables [B]
6. IPU board [C] (

x 6,

x all)

297

4. Replacement and Adjustment

Controller Box Fan

1. Rear cover (

p.168)

2. Open the controller box (

p.294 "Controller Box").

3. Controller box fan with bracket [A] (

4. Controller box fan [A] (

x 2,

x 2,

x 1,

x 1,

x 1)

x 1)

When installing the controller box fan

Make sure that the controller box fan is installed with its decal facing upward.

298

Electrical Components

Fusing Rear Fan

1. Rear cover (

p.168)

2. Open the controller box (

p.294 "Controller Box").

3. Fusing rear fan with the bracket [A] (

x 2,

x 1,

x 1)

4. Disconnect the connector [A].

5. Remove the bottom bracket [B] (hook x 5).

299

4. Replacement and Adjustment

6. Fusing rear fan [A]

When installing the fusing rear fan

Make sure that the fusing rear fan is installed with its decal facing to the rear side.

DRB
1. Rear cover (

p.168)

2. Rear lower cover (

p.168)

3. DRB [A] (

x all)

x 6,

SDVDB
1. Rear cover (

300

p.168)

Electrical Components

2. Rear lower cover (

3. SDVDB [A] (

p.168)

x 3,

x 5)

PSU
1. Rear cover (

p.168)

2. Rear lower cover (

p.168)

3. DRB with the bracket [A] (

x 4,

x all,

x all)

301

4. Replacement and Adjustment

4. Power cord [A] (Blue: ground screw x 1,

x 2)

5. Remove the clamp [B] from the bracket.

6. PSU board [C] (

x 9,

x All,

x All)

HVPS: TTS Board

1. Rear cover (

p.168)

2. Open the controller box (

3. HVPS: TTS board [B] (

p.294 "Controller Box")

x 5,

x all)

HVPS: CB Board
1. Rear cover (

p.168)

2. Open the controller box (

302

p.294 "Controller Box")

Electrical Components

4
3. HVPS: CB board [A] (

x 6, All

s)

Controller Board
1. Rear cover (

p.168)

2. Open the controller box (

p.294 "Controller Box")

3. Controller box fan bracket (

4. Controller box left bracket [A] (

p.298 "Controller Box Fan")

x 6)
303

4. Replacement and Adjustment

4
5. Controller board assembly [A] (

x 7,

x 2)

6. Remove the SD cards [A], interface rails [B], NVRAM [C] and RAM-DIMMs [D].
7. Controller board [E]

304

Electrical Components

When installing a new controller board

1. Install the NVRAM from the old controller board on a new controller board.
2. Install the new controller board in the machine.
3. Disconnect the cables of the HDD from the controller board.
Disconnecting the cables of the HDD is very important. Otherwise, the HDD is automatically
formatted and all data in the HDD is lost due to the security limitation.
4. Reassemble the machine.
5. Turn on the main power of the machine.
6. Turn off the main power of the machine, and then connect the cables of the HDD again.

Make sure you print out the SMC reports ("SP Mode Data" and "Logging Data") before you replace
the NVRAM.
Keep NVRAMs away from any objects that can cause static electricity. Static electricity can damage
NVRAM data.
Make sure the NVRAM is correctly installed on the controller board.

HDD Encryption Recovery from a Device Problem

The flowchart below shows the recovery possibility of the HDD encryption if one of devices related with
the HDD encryption is defective.

305

4. Replacement and Adjustment

Restoring the Encryption key

When replacing the controller board for a model in which the HDD encryption unit has been installed,
updating the encryption key is required.
1. Prepare an SD card which is initialized.
2. Make the "restore_key" folder in the SD card.
3. Make an "nvram_key.txt" file in the "restore_key" folder in the SD card.
4. Ask an administrator to input the encryption key (this has been printed out earlier by the user) into the
"nvram_key.txt" file.
5. Remove only the HDD (

p.296 "HDD").

6. Turn on the main power switch.

7. Confirm that the prompt on the LCD tells you to install the SD card (storing the encryption key) in the
machine.
8. Turn off the main power switch.
9. Remove the SD slot cover (

x 1).

10. Insert the SD card that contains the encryption key into SD slot 2.
11. Turn on the main power switch, and the machine automatically restores the encryption key in the flash
memory on the controller board.
12. Turn off the main power switch after the machine has returned to normal status.
13. Remove the SD card from SD slot 2, and then attach the SD slot cover (
306

x 1).

Electrical Components

14. Reinstall the HDD.

Clearing the NVRAM

When replacing the controller board and a customer has lost the encryption key, clearing the NVRAM is
required to recover the HDD encryption unit.
1. Prepare an SD card which is initialized.
2. Make the "restore_key" folder in the SD card.
3. Make an "nvram_key.txt" file in the "restore_key" folder in the SD card.
4. Input "nvclear" into the "nvram_key.txt" file.
5. Turn on the main power switch.
6. Confirm that the prompt on the LCD tells you to install the SD card (storing the encryption key) in the
machine.

7. Turn off the main power switch.

8. Insert the SD card that contains "nvclear" into SD slot 2.
9. Turn on the main power switch, and the machine automatically restores the encryption key in the flash
memory on the controller board.
10. Turn off the main power switch after the machine has returned to normal status.
11. Remove the SD card from slot 2.
12. Turn on the main power switch.
13. Initialize the NVRAM (SP5801-001) and HDD unit (SP5832-001) with SP mode.
14. The user must enable the HDD encryption unit with a user tool.

NVRAM Replacement Procedure

NVRAM on the BCU
1. Make sure that you have the SMC report (factory settings). This report comes with the machine (
p.49 "Initialize the Developer").
2. Output the SMC data (

SP5-990-001) if possible.

3. Turn the main switch off.

4. Install an SD card into SD card slot 2. Then turn the main power on.
5. Copy the NVRAM data to an SD card (

SP5-824-001) if possible.

6. Turn off the main switch. Then unplug the power cord.
7. Replace the NVRAM on the BCU and reassemble the machine.

307

4. Replacement and Adjustment

8. Plug in the power cord. Then turn the main switch on.
9. SC195 occurs.
10. Copy the data from the SD card to the NVRAM (
them to the SD card.

SP5-825-001) if you have successfully copied

11. Turn the main switch off. Then remove the SD card from SD card slot 2.
12. Turn the main switch on.
13. Specify the SP and UP mode settings.
14. Do the process control self-check.
15. Do ACC for the copier application program.

16. Do ACC for the printer application program.

NVRAM on the Controller

1. Make sure that you have the SMC report (factory settings). This report comes with the machine (
p.49 "Initialize the Developer").
2. Output the SMC data (

SP5-990-001) if possible.

3. Turn the main switch off. Then unplug the power cord.
4. Remove the rear cover (

p.168)

5. Remove the controller cover [A] (

x 2).

6. Disconnect the cables of the HDD from the controller board.

Disconnecting the cables of the HDD is very important. Otherwise, the HDD is automatically
formatted and all data in the HDD is lost due to the security limitation.
7. Install a New NVRAM on the controller. Then reassemble the machine.

308

Electrical Components

8. Remove the SD slot cover (

x 1).

9. Remove the Security SD from SD slot 1.

10. Install a new Security SD in SD slot 1.
11. Turn the main switch on.
12. SC995-02 occurs.
13. Turn the machine off.
14. Connect the cables of the HDD to the controller board.
15. Reassemble the machine, and then turn on the machine.
16. Do the process control self-check.

17. Do ACC for the copier application program.

18. Do ACC for the printer application program.
19. Do SP5-878-001 to install the DataOverwriteSecurity application.
20. Do SP5878-002 to install the HDD Encryption application.
21. Merge all applications in a one SD card in SD slot 1 if necessary (
Move").

p.132 "SD Card Appli

309

4. Replacement and Adjustment

310

5. System Maintenance
Service Program Mode
Make sure that the data-in LED is not on before you go into the SP mode. This LED indicates that some
data is coming to the machine. When the LED is on, wait for the copier to process the data.

SP Tables
There are most commonly used SP codes in the "Main SP Tables - 1 to - 9" of "Main Chapters".
See "Appendices" for the following information:
System SP Tables (all SP codes)

Printer SP Tables
Scanner SP Tables

Types of SP Modes
System SP: SP modes related to the engine functions
Printer SP: SP modes related to the controller functions
Scanner SP: SP modes related to the scanner functions
Fax SP: SP modes related to the fax functions
Select one of the Service Program modes (System, Printer, Scanner, or Fax) from the touch panel as shown
in the diagram below after you access the SP mode. This section explains the functions of the System/
Printer/Scanner SP modes. Refer to the Fax service manual for the Fax SP modes.

311

5. System Maintenance

SP Mode Button Summary

Here is a short summary of the touch-panel buttons.

Opens all SP groups and sublevels.

Closes all open groups and sublevels and restores the initial SP mode display.
Opens the copy window (copy mode) so you can make test copies. Press SP Mode (highlighted)
in the copy window to return to the SP mode screen,

312

Service Program Mode

Enter the SP code directly with the number keys if you know the SP number. Then press . (The
required SP Mode number will be highlighted when pressing . If not, just press the required SP
Mode number.)
Press two times to leave the SP mode and return to the copy window to resume normal operation.
Press any Class 1 number to open a list of Class 2 SP modes.
Press to scroll the show to the previous or next group.
Press to scroll to the previous or next display in segments the size of the screen display (page).
Press to scroll the show the previous or next line (line by line).
Press to move the highlight on the left to the previous or next selection in the list.

Switching Between SP Mode and Copy Mode for Test Printing

1. In the SP mode, select the test print. Then press "Copy Window".
2. Use the copy window (copier mode), to select the appropriate settings (paper size, etc.) for the test
print.
3. Press Start

to start the test print.

4. Press SP Mode (highlighted) to return to the SP mode screen and repeat from step 1.

Selecting the Program Number

Program numbers have two or three levels.
1. Refer to the Service Tables to find the SP that you want to adjust before you begin.
2. Press the Group number on the left side SP Mode window that contains the SP that you want to adjust.
3. Use the scrolling buttons in the center of the SP mode window to show the SP number that you want
to open. Then press that number to expand the list.
4. Use the center touch-panel buttons to scroll to the number and title of the item that you want to set and
press it. The small entry box on the right activates and shows the below default or the current settings.

313

5. System Maintenance

Refer to the SP Tables for the range of allowed settings.

5. Do this procedure to enter a setting:
Press to toggle between plus and minus and use the keypad to enter the appropriate number.
The number you enter writes over the previous setting.
Press

to enter the setting. (The value is not registered if you enter a number that is out of range.)

Press "Yes" when you are prompted to complete the selection.

6. If you need to perform a test print, press Copy Window to open the copy window and select the
settings for the test print. Press Start and then press SP Mode (highlighted) in the copy window to
return to the SP mode display.
7. Press Exit two times to return to the copy window when you are finished.

Service Mode Lock/Unlock

At locations where the machine contains sensitive data, the customer engineer cannot operate the machine
until the Administrator turns the service mode lock off. This function makes sure that work on the machine is
always done with the permission of the Administrator.
1. If you cannot go into the SP mode, ask the Administrator to log in with the User Tool and then set
"Service Mode Lock" to OFF after he or she logs in:
User Tools > System Settings > Administrator Tools > Service Mode Lock > OFF
This unlocks the machine and lets you get access to all the SP codes.
The CE can service the machine and turn the machine off and on. It is not necessary to ask the
Administrator to log in again each time the machine is turned on.
1. Go into the SP mode and set SP5169 to "1" if you must use the printer bit switches.
2. After machine servicing is completed:
314

Service Program Mode

Change SP5169 from "1" to "0".

Turn the machine off and on. Tell the administrator that you have completed servicing the
machine.
The Administrator will then set the "Service Mode Lock" to ON.

Remarks
Display on the Control Panel Screen
The maximum number of characters which can show on the control panel screen is limited to 30 characters.
For this reason, some of the SP modes shown on the screen need to be abbreviated. The following are
abbreviations used for the SP modes for which the full description is over 30 characters.

Paper Weight
Thin paper: 52-59 g/m2 (14-16lb. Bond)
Plain Paper1: 60-74 g/m2 (16-20lb. Bond)
Plain Paper2: 75-81 g/m2 (20lb. Bond)
Middle Thick: 82-105 g/m2 (20-28lb. Bond)
Thick Paper 1: 106-169 g/m2 (28lb. Bond-90lb. Index)
Thick Paper 2: 170-210 g/m2 (65lb. Cover-54lb. Bond)
Thick Paper 3: 211-256 g/m2 (65lb. Cover-54lb. Bond)
Paper Type
N: Normal paper
MTH: Middle thick paper
TH: Thick paper

Paper Feed Station

P: Paper tray
B: By-pass table

Color Mode [Color]

[K]: Black in B&W mode
[Y], [M], or [C]: Yellow, Magenta, or Cyan in Full Color mode
[YMC]: Only for Yellow, Magenta, and Cyan
[FC]: Full Color mode
[FC, K], [FC, Y], [FC, M], or [FC, C]: Black, Yellow, Magenta, or Cyan in full color mode
Print Mode

Process Speed

S: Simplex

L: Low speed (60 mm/s)

D: Duplex

M: Middle speed (120 mm/s)

315

5. System Maintenance

Others
The following symbols are used in the SP mode tables.
FA: Factory setting
(Data may be adjusted from the default setting at the factory. Refer to the factory setting sheets enclosed.
You can find it under the jammed paper removal decal.)
DFU: Design/Factory Use only
Do not touch these SP modes in the field.
A sharp (#) to the right hand side of the mode number column means that the main switch must be turned
off and on to effect the setting change.
An asterisk (*) to the right hand side of the mode number column means that this mode is stored in the
NVRAM. If you do a RAM clear, this SP mode will be reset to the default value. "ENG" and "CTL" show
which NVRAM contains the data.

ENG: NVRAM on the BCU board

CTL: NVRAM on the controller board
The settings of each SP mode are explained in the right-hand column of the SP table in the following way.
[Adjustable range / Default setting / Step] Alphanumeric
If "Alphanumeric" is written to the right of the bracket as shown above, the setting of the SP mode
shows on the screen using alphanumeric characters instead of only numbers. However, the settings
in the bracket in the SP mode table are explained by using only the numbers.
SSP: This denotes a "Special Service Program" mode setting.

316

Main SP Tables-1

Main SP Tables-1
SP1-XXX (Feed)
[Leading Edge Registration] Leading Edge Registration Adjustment
(Tray Location, Paper Type, Color Mode), Paper Type -> Plain, Thick 1, Thick 2 or Thick3
1001

Adjusts the leading edge registration by changing the registration motor operation timing
for each mode.
Increasing a value: an image is moved to the trailing edge of paper.
Decreasing a value: an image is moved to the leading edge of paper.
001 Tray:Plain:600dpi

*ENG

002 Tray:Thick1:600dpi

*ENG

003 Tray:M-Thick:600dpi

*ENG

004 By-pass:Plain:600dpi

*ENG

005 By-pass:Thick1:600dpi

*ENG

006 By-pass:Thick2:600dpi

*ENG

007 By-pass:Thick3:600dpi

*ENG

008 By-pass: M-Thick:600dpi

*ENG

009 Duplex:Plain:600dpi

*ENG

010 Duplex:M-Thick:600dpi

*ENG

[9 to 9 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]

317

5. System Maintenance

011 Tray:Thick1:1200dpi

*ENG

012 Tray:M-Thick:1200dpi

*ENG

013 By-pass:Plain:1200dpi

*ENG

014 By-pass:Plain:1200dpi

*ENG

015 By-pass:Thick1:1200dpi

*ENG

016 By-pass:Thick2:1200dpi

*ENG

017 By-pass:Thick3:1200dpi

*ENG

018 By-pass:M-Thick:1200dpi

*ENG

019 Duplex:Plain:1200dpi

*ENG

020 Duplex:M-Thick:1200dpi

*ENG

[9 to 9 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]

[Side-to-Side Registration]
1002

Adjusts the side-to-side registration by changing the laser main scan start position for each
mode and tray.
Increasing a value: an image is moved to the rear edge of paper.
Decreasing a value: an image is moved to the front edge of paper.
001 By-pass

*ENG

002 Paper Tray 1

*ENG

003 Paper Tray 2

*ENG

004 Paper Tray 3

*ENG

005 Paper Tray 4

*ENG

006 Duplex

*ENG

[4 to 4 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]

[Paper Buckle] Paper Buckle Adjustment

1003

(Tray Location, Paper Type), Paper Type: M-Thick: Middle Thick

Adjusts the amount of paper buckle at the registration roller by changing the paper feed
timing.

318

Main SP Tables-1

001 Tray1:Plain:600dpi

*ENG

002 Tray1:Thick1:600dpi

*ENG

003 Tray1:M-Thick:600dpi

*ENG

004 Tray234:Plain:600dpi

*ENG

005 Tray234:Thick1:600dpi

*ENG

006 Tray234:M-Thick:600dpi

*ENG

007 By-pass:Plain:600dpi

*ENG

008 By-pass:Thick1:600dpi

*ENG

009 By-pass:Thick2:600dpi

*ENG

010 By-pass:Thick3:600dpi

*ENG

011 By-pass:M-Thick:600dpi

*ENG

012 Duplex:Plain:600dpi

*ENG

013 Duplex:M-Thick:600dpi

*ENG

014 Tray1:Plain:1200dpi

*ENG

015 Tray1:Thick1:1200dpi

*ENG

016 Tray1:M-Thick:1200dpi

*ENG

017 Tray234:Plain:1200dpi

*ENG

018 Tray234:Thick1:1200dpi

*ENG

019 Tray234:M-Thick:1200dpi

*ENG

020 By-pass:Plain:1200dpi

*ENG

021 By-pass:Thick1:1200dpi

*ENG

022 By-pass:Thick2:1200dpi

*ENG

023 By-pass:Thick3:1200dpi

*ENG

024 By-pass:M-Thick:1200dpi

*ENG

025 Duplex:Plain:1200dpi

*ENG

026 Duplex:M-Thick:1200dpi

*ENG

[5 to 5 / 2 / 1 mm/step]

[5 to 5 / 0 / 1 mm/step]

[5 to 5 / 2 / 1 mm/step]

[5 to 5 / 0 / 1 mm/step]

319

5. System Maintenance

1007

[By-Pass Size Detection] By-Pass Size Detection Display

0:LT SEF/ 1:LG

001

*ENG

Enables or disables the automatic paper size detection function of the by-pass tray.
This SP determines what paper size the machine detects if the detected size is less than 8.5".
0: LT SEF (default), 1: LG
[Reload Permit Setting]

1101

Specifies the settings of the reload permit for cold temperature in color mode.
Destination: NA; North America, TWN; Taiwan, EU; Europe, AA; Asia Pasific

001

002

003

Pre-rotation Start Temp.

*ENG

[0 to 75 / 50 / 1 deg/step]

Specifies the pre-rotation start temperature.

Reload Target Temp.:Center

*ENG

[135 to 145 / 135 / 1 deg/step]

Specifies the reload target temperature of the heating roller.

Reload Target Temp.:Press

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 20 / 1 deg/step]

Specifies the reload target temperature of the pressure roller.

Temp.:Delta:Cold: Center

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 10 / 1 deg/step]

004 Specifies the temperature correction of the heating roller (center) when the fusing unit is
determined as cold state.
Temp.:Delta:Cold:End

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 45 / 1 deg/step]

005 Specifies the temperature correction of the heating roller (end) when the fusing unit is
determined as cold state.
Temp.:Delta:Cold: Press

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 0 / 1 deg/step]

006 Specifies the temperature correction of the pressure roller when the fusing unit is determined
as cold state.
Rotation Time:Cold

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 2 / 1 sec/step]

007 Specifies the threshold time for the fusing unit heating when the fusing unit is determined as
cold state.

320

Main SP Tables-1

Temp.:Delta:Warm: Center

*ENG

[0 to 100 / NA: 10, EU/AA: 5 / 1 deg/step]

008 Specifies the temperature correction of the heating roller (center) when the fusing unit is
determined as warm state.
Temp.:Delta:Warm:End

*ENG

[40 to 200 / NA: 45, EU/AA: 35 / 1 deg/step]

009 Specifies the temperature correction of the heating roller (end) when the fusing unit is
determined as warm state.
Temp.:Delta:Warm:Press

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 0 / 1 deg/step]

010 Specifies the temperature correction of the pressure roller when the fusing unit is determined
as warm state.
Time:Warm

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 2 / 1 sec/step]

011 Specifies the threshold time for the fusing unit heating when the fusing unit is determined as
warm state.
Temp.:Delta:Hot: Center

*ENG

[0 to 100 / NA: 10, EU/AA: 5 / 1 deg/step]

012 Specifies the temperature correction of the heating roller (center) when the fusing unit is
determined as hot state.
Temp.:Delta:Hot:End

*ENG

[0 to 100 / NA: 45, EU/AA: 35 / 1 deg/step]

013 Specifies the temperature correction of the heating roller (end) when the fusing unit is
determined as hot state.
Temp.:Delta:Hot:Press

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 0 / 1 deg/step]

014 Specifies the temperature correction of the pressure roller when the fusing unit is determined
as hot state.
Time:Hot

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 2 / 1 sec/step]

015 Specifies the threshold time for the fusing unit heating when the fusing unit is determined as
hot state.
Temp.:Delta:Cold:BW:Center

*ENG

[0 to 100 / NA: 10, EU/AA: 5 / 1 deg/step]

016 Specifies the temperature correction of the heating roller (center) in the black and white mode
when the fusing unit is determined as cold state.
Temp.:Delta:Cold:BW:End

*ENG

[0 to 100 / NA: 45, EU/AA: 35 / 1 deg/step]

017 Specifies the temperature correction of the heating roller (end) in the black and white mode
when the fusing unit is determined as cold state.
321

5. System Maintenance

Temp.Delta:Cold:BW:Press

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 0 / 1 deg/step]

018 Specifies the temperature correction of the pressure roller in the black and white mode when
the fusing unit is determined as cold state.
Rotation Time:BW:Cold

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 2 / 1 sec/step]

019 Specifies the threshold time for the fusing unit heating in black and white mode when the
fusing unit is determined as cold state.

020

Temp.:Delta:Warm:BW:Cent
er

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 10 / 1 deg/step]

Specifies the temperature correction of the heating roller (center) in the black and white mode
when the fusing unit is determined as warm state.
Temp.:Delta:Warm:BW:End

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 45 / 1 deg/step]

021 Specifies the temperature correction of the heating roller (end) in the black and white mode
when the fusing unit is determined as warm state.
Temp.Delta:Warm:BW:Press

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 0 / 1 deg/step]

022 Specifies the temperature correction of the pressure roller in the black and white mode when
the fusing unit is determined as warm state.
Rotation Time:BW:Warm

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 2 / 1 sec/step]

023 Specifies the threshold time for the fusing unit heating in black and white mode when the
fusing unit is determined as warm state.
Temp.:Delta:Hot:BW:Center

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 10 / 1 deg/step]

024 Specifies the temperature correction of the heating roller (center) in the black and white mode
when the fusing unit is determined as hot state.
Temp.:Delta:Hot:BW: End

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 45 / 1 deg/step]

025 Specifies the temperature correction of the heating roller (end) in the black and white mode
when the fusing unit is determined as hot state.
Temp.:Delta:Hot:BW: Press

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 0 / 1 deg/step]

026 Specifies the temperature correction of the pressure roller in the black and white mode when
the fusing unit is determined as hot state.

322

Main SP Tables-1

Rotation Time:BW:Hot

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 2 / 1 sec/step]

027 Specifies the threshold time for the fusing unit heating in black and white mode when the
fusing unit is determined as hot state.
030 Flicker Control

*ENG

[0 or 1 / 0 / -]

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 65 / 1 deg/step]

102 Temp.:Delta:Cold: BW2:End

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 80 / 1 deg/step]

103 Temp.:Delta:Cold: BW2:Press

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 0 / 1 deg/step]

104 Rotation Time: BW2:Cold

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 2 / 1 sec/step]

105

Temp.:Delta:Warm:
BW2:Center

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 65 / 1 deg/step]

106

Temp.:Delta:Warm:
BW2:End

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 80 / 1 deg/step]

107

Temp.:Delta:Warm:
BW2:Press

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 0 / 1 deg/step]

108 Rotation Time: BW2:Warm

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 2 / 1 sec/step]

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 65 / 1 deg/step]

110 Temp.:Delta:Hot: BW2:End

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 80 / 1 deg/step]

111 Temp.:Delta:Hot: BW2:Press

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 0 / 1 deg/step]

112 Rotation Time: BW2:Hot

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 2 / 1 sec/step]

101

109

Temp.:Delta:Cold:
BW2:Center

Temp.:Delta:Hot:
BW2:Center

[Feed Permit Setting]

1102

Specified the settings of the paper feeding timing.

Destination: NA; North America, TWN; Taiwan, EU; Europe, AA; Asia Pasific

001 Temp.:Lower Delta:Center

*ENG

[0 to 100 / NA: 30, EU/AA: 25 / 1 deg/step]

002 Temp.:Lower Delta:End

*ENG

[0 to 100 / NA: 65, EU/AA: 55 / 1 deg/step]

003 Temp.:Upper Delta:Center

*ENG

[0 to 50 / NA: 15, EU/AA: 25 / 1 deg/step]

004 Temp.:Upper Delta:End

*ENG

[0 to 50 / 15 / 1 deg/step]
323

5. System Maintenance

005 Temp.:Lower Delta:Press

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 65 / 1 deg/step]

006 Rotation Time

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 0 / 1 sec/step]

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 35 / 1 deg/step]

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 35 / 1 deg/step]

*ENG

[0 to 50 / 15 / 1 deg/step]

010 Temp.:Upper Delta:End:Sp.1

*ENG

[0 to 50 / 15 / 1 deg/step]

011 Temp.:Lower Delta:Press:Sp.1

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 30 / 1 deg/step]

012 Rotation Time:Sp.1

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 0 / 1 sec/step]

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 30 / 1 deg/step]

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 30 / 1 deg/step]

*ENG

[0 to 50 / 20 / 1 deg/step]

016 Temp.:Upper Delta:End:Sp.2

*ENG

[0 to 50 / 20 / 1 deg/step]

017 Temp.:Lower Delta:Press:Sp.2

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 60 / 1 deg/step]

018 Rotation Time:Sp2

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 0 / 1 sec/step]

019 Feed Permit Time

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 60 / 1 sec/step]

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 25 / 1 deg/step]

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 25 / 1 deg/step]

*ENG

[0 to 50 / 10 / 1 deg/step]

023 Temp.:Upper Delta:End:Sp.3

*ENG

[0 to 50 / 10 / 1 deg/step]

024 Temp.:Lower Delta:Press:Sp.3

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 30 / 1 deg/step]

025 Rotation Time:Sp3

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 0 / 1 sec/step]

007

Temp.:Lower
Delta:Center:Sp.1

008 Temp.:Lower Delta:End:Sp.1

009

013

Temp.:Upper
Delta:Center:Sp.1

Temp.:Lower
Delta:Center:Sp.2

014 Temp.:Lower Delta:End:Sp.2

015

020

Temp.:Upper
Delta:Center:Sp.2

Temp.:Lower
Delta:Center:Sp.3

021 Temp.:Lower Delta:End:Sp.3

022

324

Temp.:Upper
Delta:Center:Sp.3

Main SP Tables-1

1105

[Print Target Temp]

(Printing Mode, Roller Type, [Color], Simplex/Duplex)
Roller Type > Center and Ends: Heating roller, Pressure > Pressure roller
Paper Type -> Plain, Thin, Thick, OHP, Middle Thick, Special
Destination: NA; North America, TWN; Taiwan, EU; Europe, AA; Asia Pasific

001

Plain1:FC:Center

*ENG

[100 to 160 / NA: 150, EU/AA: 141 / 1 deg/

step]

Specifies the heating roller target temperature for the ready condition in full color printing.
002

003

Plain1:FC:Press

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

Specifies the pressure roller target temperature for the ready condition in full color printing..
Plain1:BW:Center

*ENG

[100 to 160 / NA: 140, EU/AA: 131 / 1 deg/

step]

Specifies the heating roller target temperature for the ready condition in BW printing.
004

005

Plain1:BW:Press

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

Specifies the pressure roller target temperature for the ready condition in BW printing.
Plain2:FC:Center

*ENG

[100 to 160 / NA: 155, EU/AA: 146 / 1 deg/

step]

Specifies the heating roller target temperature for the ready condition in full color printing.
006

007

Plain2:FC:Press

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]

Specifies the pressure roller target temperature for the ready condition in full coloe printing.
Plain2:BW:Center

*ENG

[100 to 160 / NA: 145, EU/AA: 136 / 1 deg/

step]

Specifies the heating roller target temperature for the ready condition in BW printing.
008

Plain2:BW:Press

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

Specifies the pressure roller target temperature for the ready condition in BW printing.

009 Thin:FC:Center

*ENG

[100 to 160 / 145 / 1 deg/step]

010 Thin:FC:Press

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

011 Thin:BW:Center

*ENG

[100 to 160 / 135 / 1 deg/step]

325

5. System Maintenance

326

012 Thin:BW:Press

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

013 M-thick:FC:Center

*ENG

[100 to 170 / 160 / 1 deg/step]

014 M-thick:FC:Press

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

015 M-thick:BW:Center

*ENG

[100 to 170 / 150 / 1 deg/step]

016 M-thick:BW:Press

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

017 Thick1:FC:Center

*ENG

[100 to 200 / 155 / 1 deg/step]

018 Thick1:FC:Press

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

019 Thick1:BW:Center

*ENG

[100 to 200 / 165 / 1 deg/step]

020 Thick1:BW:Press

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

021 Thick2:FC:Center

*ENG

[100 to 200 / 165 / 1 deg/step]

022 Thick2:FC:Press

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

023 Thick2:BW:Center

*ENG

[100 to 200 / 155 / 1 deg/step]

024 Thick2:BW:Press

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

025 Thick3:FC:Center

*ENG

[100 to 200 / 170 / 1 deg/step]

026 Thick3:FC:Press

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

027 Thick3:BW:Center

*ENG

[100 to 200 / 160 / 1 deg/step]

028 Thick3:BW:Press

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

029 Special1:FC:Center

*ENG

[100 to 170 / 160 / 1 deg/step]

030 Special1:FC:Press

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

031 Special1:BW:Center

*ENG

[100 to 170 / 150 / 1 deg/step]

032 Special1:BW:Press

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

033 Special2:FC:Center

*ENG

[100 to 175 / 165 / 1 deg/step]

034 Special2:FC:Press

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

035 Special2:BW:Center

*ENG

[100 to 175 / 155 / 1 deg/step]

036 Special2:BW:Press

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

037 Special3:FC:Center

*ENG

[100 to 175 / 155 / 1 deg/step]

Main SP Tables-1

038 Special3:FC:Press

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

039 Special3:BW:Center

*ENG

[100 to 175 / 145 / 1 deg/step]

040 Special3:BW:Press

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

041 Envelop:Center

*ENG

[100 to 200 / 175 / 1 deg/step]

042 Envelop:Press

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

101 Plain1:FC:Center:Low Speed

*ENG

[100 to 200 / 125 / 1 deg/step]

102 Plain1:FC:Press:Low Speed

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

Plain1:BW:Center:Low
Speed

*ENG

[100 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]

104 Plain1:BW:Press:Low Speed

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

105 Plain2:FC:Center:Low Speed

*ENG

[100 to 200 / 130 / 1 deg/step]

106 Plain2:FC:Press:Low Speed

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

Plain2:BW:Center:Low
Speed

*ENG

[100 to 200 / 125 / 1 deg/step]

108 Plain2:BW:Press:Low Speed

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

109 Thin:FC:Center:Low Speed

*ENG

[100 to 200 / 125 / 1 deg/step]

110 Thin:FC:Press:Low Speed

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

111 Thin:BW:Center:Low Speed

*ENG

[100 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]

112 Thin:BW:Press:Low Speed

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

M-Thick:FC:Center:Low
Speed

*ENG

[100 to 200 / 135 / 1 deg/step]

114 M-Thick:FC:Press:Low Speed

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

103

107

113

115

M-Thick:BW:Center:Low
Speed

*ENG

[100 to 200 / 130 / 1 deg/step]

116

M-Thick:BW:Press:Low
Speed

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

117

Special1:FC:Center:Low
Speed

*ENG

[100 to 200 / 135 / 1 deg/step]

327

5. System Maintenance

328

118

Special1:FC:Press:Low
Speed

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

119

Special1:BW:Center:Low
Speed

*ENG

[100 to 200 / 130 / 1 deg/step]

120

Special1:BW:Press:Low
Speed

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

121

Special2:FC:Center:Low
Speed

*ENG

[100 to 200 / 140 / 1 deg/step]

122

Special2:FC:Press:Low
Speed

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

123

Special2:BW:Center:Low
Speed

*ENG

[100 to 200 / 135 / 1 deg/step]

124

Special2:BW:Press:Low
Speed

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

125

Special3:FC:Center:Low
Speed

*ENG

[100 to 200 / 130 / 1 deg/step]

126

Special3:FC:Press:Low
Speed

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

127

Special3:BW:Center:Low
Speed

*ENG

[100 to 200 / 125 / 1 deg/step]

128

Special3:BW:Press:Low
Speed

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

131 OHP:Center

*ENG

[100 to 200 / 165 / 1 deg/step]

132 OHP:Press

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

133 Envelop:Center:Low Speed

*ENG

[100 to 200 / 160 / 1 deg/step]

134 Envelop:Press:Low Speed

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

135 Plain1:Grossy:Center

*ENG

[100 to 200 / 130 / 1 deg/step]

136 Plain1:Grossy:Press

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

137 Plain2:Grossy:Center

*ENG

[120 to 200 / 135 / 1 deg/step]

138 Plain2:Grossy:Press

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

Main SP Tables-1

139 M-thick:Grossy:Center

*ENG

[120 to 200 / 140 / 1 deg/step]

140 M-thick:Grossy:Press

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

141 Special4:FC:Center

*ENG

[120 to 200 / 155 / 1 deg/step]

142 Special4:FC:Press

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

143 Special4:BW:Center

*ENG

[100 to 200 / 145 / 1 deg/step]

144 Special4:BW:Press

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

145 Special5:FC:Center

*ENG

[100 to 200 / 165 / 1 deg/step]

146 Special5:FC:Press

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

147 Special5:BW:Center

*ENG

[100 to 200 / 155 / 1 deg/step]

148 Special5:BW:Press

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

149 Special6:FC:Center

*ENG

[100 to 200 / 150 / 1 deg/step]

150 Special6:FC:Press

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

151 Special6:BW:Center

*ENG

[100 to 200 / 140 / 1 deg/step]

152 Special6:BW:Press

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

153 Envelop:Center:Thick1

*ENG

[100 to 200 / 150 / 1 deg/step]

154 Envelop:Press:Thick1

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 165 / 1 deg/step]

155 Envelop:Center:Thick2

*ENG

[100 to 200 / 165 / 1 deg/step]

156 Envelop:Press:Thick2

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

157 Envelop:Center:Thick3

*ENG

[100 to 200 / 170 / 1 deg/step]

158 Envelop:Press:Thick3

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

1106

[Fusing Temp. Display] Fusing Temperature Display (Heating or Pressure)

Displays the current temperature of the heating and pressure rollers.

001 Center

[10 to 250 / 0 / 1 deg/step]

002 End

[10 to 250 / 0 / 1 deg/step]

329

5. System Maintenance

The heating roller has two lamps. One heats the center of the heating roller and the other
heats both ends of the heating roller.
003 Pressure Center

[10 to 250 / 0 / 1 deg/step]

005 Thermister Atmosphere

[10 to 250 / 0 / 1 deg/step]

The pressure roller has no lamp.

1107
001

002

003

004

005

006

007

008

1108
001

330

[Standby Target Temp. Setting]

Stanby/Preheat1: Center

*ENG

[100 to 150 / 135 / 1 deg/step]

Specifies the temperature of the heating roller for the ready or energy save 1 mode.
Stanby/Preheat1: Press

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 0 / 1 deg/step]

Specifies the temperature of the pressure roller for the ready or energy save 1 mode.
Preheat2: Center

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 130 / 1 deg/step]

Specifies the temperature of the heating roller for the energy save 2 mode.
Preheat2:Press

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 0 / 1 deg/step]

Specifies the temperature of the pressure roller for the energy save 2 mode.
Low Power:Center

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 0 / 1 deg/step]

Specifies the temperature of the heating roller for the low power mode.
Low Power:Press

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 0 / 1 deg/step]

Specifies the temperature of the pressure roller for the low power mode.
Print Ready:Center

*ENG

[120 to 150 / 130 / 1 deg/step]

Specifies the temperature of the heating roller for the print ready condition.
Print Ready:Press

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 10 / 1 deg/step]

Specifies the temperature of the pressure roller for the print ready condition.
[After Reload/Job Target Temp.]
Center

*ENG

[120 to 150 / 130 / 1 deg/step]

Specifies the temperature of the heating roller after re-load or job.

Main SP Tables-1

002

1111

Press

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step]

Specifies the temperature of the pressure roller after re-load or job.

[Environment Correction:Fusing]
Temp.: Threshold: Low

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 17 / 1 deg/step]

001 Specifies the threshold temperature for low temperature. If the fusing temperature is 17C
or less, the machine executes the fusing mode for low temperature.
Temp.: Threshold: High

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 30 / 1 deg/step]

002 Sepcifies the threshold temperature for high temperature. If the fusing temperature is 30C
or more, the machine executes the fusing mode for high temperature.
Low Temp. Correction

*ENG

[0 to 15 / 5 / 1 deg/step]

003 Specifies the additional temperature for the target temperature. If the fusing temperature is
in low temperature condition, this temperature is added to the taraget temperature.
High Temp. Correction

*ENG

[0 to 15 / 0 / 1 deg/step]

004 Specifies the additional temperature for the target temperature. If the fusing temperature is
in high temperature condition, this temperature is added to the taraget temperature.
005 Job Low Temp. Correction

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 5 / 0.1 deg/step]

006 Job High Temp. Correction

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 0 / 0.1 deg/step]

007 Job Low Temp. Correction:Sp. *ENG

008

1112

Job High Temp.

Correction:Sp.

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 10 / 0.1 deg/step]

[0 to 100 / 0 / 0.1 deg/step]

[Image Process Temp. Correction]

These SPs are used for the fusing temperature control for variable job images. This control
saves the power comsumption when the machine copies or prints a job text image in black
and white mode.
Temp.:Normal:Center:Level1

*ENG

[-10 to 10 / 0 / 1 /step]

001 Specifies the subtractive temperature level 1 of the fusing temperature control for variable
job images.

331

5. System Maintenance

Temp.:Normal:Center:Level2

*ENG

[-25 to 10 / -10 / 1 /step]

002 Specifies the subtractive temperature level 2 of the fusing temperature control for variable
job images.
003006
003

004

[Envir. Correct:Fusing]
Low Temp. Correction

*ENG

[0 to 15 / 5 / 1 deg/step]

Specifies the temperature correction in the low temperature condition.

High Temp. Correction

*ENG

[0 to 15 / 5 / 1 deg/step]

Specifies the temperature correction in the high temperature condition.

Offset Temp:Low

*ENG

[0 to 15 / 6.5 / 0.1 deg/step]

005 Specifies the temperature correction of the paper feeding taraget in the low temperature
condition.
Offset Temp:High

*ENG

[0 to 15 / 5 / 0.1 deg/step]

006 Specifies the temperature correction of the paper feeding taraget in the high temperature
condition.
1113

001

[Curl Correction]
Execute Pattern

*ENG

[0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Off, 1: On

Selects the curl correction type.

Humidity:Threshold:M002 humid

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 65 / 1 %/step]

Specifies the threshold between low and middle humidity.

003

Humidity:Threshold:H-humid

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]

Specifies the threshold between middle and high humidity.

Permit Temp.:Delta:Press:M*ENG
004 humid

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

Specifies the threshold temperature for the curl control in middle humidity.

332

Main SP Tables-1

Permit Temp.:Delta:Press:H*ENG
005 humid

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

Specifies the threshold temperature for the curl control in high humidity.
[Stand-by Mode Setting]
006

P-Roll Thresh AF Job

*ENG

[0 to 160 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

CPM:M-humid

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]

008 Specifies the CPM ratio of the decurl control against to the normal operation in middle
humidity.
009

1115
001

1132

CPM:H-humid

[0 to 100 / 65 / 1 %/step]

Specifies the CPM ratio of the decurl control against to the normal operation in high humidity.

[Target Temp. Correction]

Temp.:Delta:End

*ENG

[-10 to 100 / 0 / 1 deg/step]

Specifies the different temperature between end and center of the heating roller.
[Maximum Duty Switch]
Control Method Switch

001

*ENG

*ENG

[0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Fixed Duty, 1: Power Control

Selects the heater control method.

Use "1: Power Contro" if hot offset occurs after power-on and input voltage is relatively hight.

1141

[Fusing SC Issue Time Info]

001 SC Number
SC Cause

*ENG

Displays the issued SC number.

*ENG

[0 to 9 / - / 1/step]

002 Shows the SC cause

0: Timeout 1, 1: Timeout 2, 2: Timeout 3, 4 to 9: Not used
101

Htg Roller:Ctr Diff1

*ENG

[-20 to 260 / - / 1 deg/step]

Displays the calculated temperature at the center of the heating roller when an SC was issued.

333

5. System Maintenance

104

105

106

107

108

151

*ENG

[-100 to 260 / - / 1 deg/step]

Displays the calculated temperature at the end of the heating roller when an SC was issued.
Htg Roller:End Det1

*ENG

[-10 to 260 / - / 1 deg/step]

Displays the detected temperature at the end of the heating roller when an SC was issued.
Htg Roller:End Corr1

*ENG

[-10 to 260 / - / 1 deg/step]

Displays the ambient temperature at the end of the heating roller when an SC was issued.
Press Roller Temp Value1

*ENG

[-10 to 260 / - / 1 deg/step]

Displays the temperature at the pressure roller when an SC was issued.

Press Roller:End Temp Value1

*ENG

[-10 to 260 / - / 1 deg/step]

Displays the temperature at the end of the pressure roller when an SC was issued.
Htg Roller:Ctr Diff2

*ENG

[-200 to 260 / - / 1 deg/step]

SPs from -151 to -157 show previous fusing SC information.

152 Htg Rolloer:Ctr Det2

*ENG

153 Htg Roller:Ctr Corr2

*ENG

154 Htg Roller:End Diff2

*ENG

155 Htg Roller:End Det2

*ENG

156 Htg Roller:End Corr2

*ENG

157 Press Roller Temp Value2

*ENG

Htg Roller:Ctr Diff3

*ENG

201

334

Htg Roller:End Diff1

[-10 to 260 / - / 1 deg/step]

[-20 to 260 / - / 1 deg/step]

SPs from -201 to -207 show fusing SC information before previous fusing SC.

202 Htg Rolloer:Ctr Det3

*ENG

203 Htg Roller:Ctr Corr3

*ENG

204 Htg Roller:End Diff3

*ENG

205 Htg Roller:End Det3

*ENG

206 Htg Roller:End Corr3

*ENG

207 Press Roller Temp Value3

*ENG

[-10 to 260 / - / 1 deg/step]

Main SP Tables-1

1142

001

[Fusing Jam Detection]

SC Display

*ENG

[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: ON, 1: OFF

Enables or disables the fusing consecutive jam (three times) SC detection.

1153

[Low Temp. Start Up]

001 Temp.:Threshold Value1

* ENG

[-10 to 100 / 5 / 1C./step]

Sepcifies the threshold temperature 1 for the warming up in the low temperature condition.
002

003

005

010

Temp.:Threshold Value2

* ENG

[-10 to 100 / 15 / 1C./step]

Sepcifies the threshold temperature 2 for the warming up in the low temperature condition.
Temp.:Target

* ENG

[0 to 100 / 100 / 1C./step]

Sepcifies the target temperature for the warming up in the low temperature condition.
Temp.: Rotation Threshold
Value1

* ENG

[-10 to 100 / 30 / 1C./step]

Sepcifies the threshold temperature 1 for the warming up rotation in the low temperature
condition.
Time:Heat Storage
Devision1

* ENG

[0 to 250 / 60 / 1 sec./step]

Sepcifies the execution time 1 for the warming up in the low temperature condition.
011

Time:Heat Storage
Devision2

* ENG

[0 to 250 / 30 / 1 sec../step]

Sepcifies the execution time 2 for the warming up in the low temperature condition.
1801

[Motor Speed Adjust]

001 Regist Mot:60:Thick

*ENG

002 Regist Mot:120

*ENG

003 Bk OpcDevMot:120

*ENG

[4 to 4 / 0.1 / 0.01 %/step]

004 Bk OpcDevMot:60:Thick

*ENG

[4 to 4 / 0.4 / 0.01 %/step]

[4 to 4 / 0.3 / 0.05 %/step]

335

5. System Maintenance

336

005 Color OpcMot:120

*ENG

006 Color OpcMot:60

*ENG

007 Fusing Mot:120

*ENG

[6 to 6 / -0.4 / 0.01 %/step]

008 Fusing Mot:60:Thick

*ENG

[6 to 6 / -0.05 / 0.01 %/step]

009 Transfer Mot:120

*ENG

[4 to 4 / 0 / 0.01 %/step]

010 TransferMot:60:Thick

*ENG

[4 to 4 / 0 / 0.01 %/step]

011 Feed1:CW60:Thick

*ENG

012 Feed1:CW120

*ENG

013 Feed1:CCW60:Thick

*ENG

014 Feed1:CCW120

*ENG

015 Feed12:CW60:Thick

*ENG

016 Feed12:CW120

*ENG

017 Feed12:CCW60:Thick

*ENG

018 Feed12:CCW120

*ENG

019 By-pass:60:Thick

*ENG

020 By-pass:120

*ENG

021 Inverter:CW60:Thick

*ENG

022 Inverter:CW120

*ENG

023 Inverter:CCW60:Thick

*ENG

024 Inverter:CCW120

*ENG

025 Duplex Entrance:60

*ENG

026 Duplex Entrance:120

*ENG

027 Duplex Exit:60

*ENG

028 Duplex Exit:120

*ENG

029 R-Tray Exit Motor

*ENG

[2 to 2 / 0 / 0.05 %/step]

030 Fine Adj. Control

*ENG

[0 to 1 / 1 /1]

[15 to 15 / 0 / 1 %/step]

[2 to 2 / 0.3 / 0.05 %/step]

[2 to 2 / 0 / 0.05 %/step]

[2 to 2 / 0.3 / 0.05 %/step]

Main SP Tables-1

031 Offset:120:Color

*ENG

032 Offset:60:Color

*ENG

033 Regist Mot:60:1200dpi

*ENG

034 Feed1:CW60:1200dpi

*ENG

035 Feed1:CCW60:1200dpi

*ENG

036 Feed2:CW60:1200dpi

*ENG

037 Feed2:CCW60:1200dpi

*ENG

038 By-pass:60:1200dpi

*ENG

039 Inverter:CW60:1200dpi

*ENG

040 Inverter:CCW60:1200dpi

*ENG

041 FusingMot:60:1200dpi

*ENG

[6 to 6 / -0.05 / 0.01 %/step]

042 BkOpcDevMot:60:1200dpi

*ENG

[4 to 4 / -0.4 / 0.01 %/step]

043 TransferMot:60:1200dpi

*ENG

[4 to 4 / 0 / 0.01 %/step]

[-7 to 7 / 0 /1step]
[4 to 4 / 0.3 / 0.05 %/step]

[2 to 2 / 0.3 / 0.05 %/step]

[2 to 2 / 0 / 0.05 %/step]

[Sub Mag ADJ]

1803

These SPs can adjust the sub-scan magnification error. However, first read the "Sub-scan
Magnification Error" in the "Troubleshooting Guide" (Main Chapters) to execute these SPs.
NEVER EXECUTE these SPs before reading the "Sub-scan Magnification Error". Otherwise,
color registration errors occur on outputs and this cannot be recovered by the line position
adjustment.

001 Plain:600dpi:input

*ENG

002 Plain:1200dpi:input

*ENG

003 Thick:input

*ENG

004 Plain:600dpi:result

*ENG

005 Plain:1200dpi:result

*ENG

006 Thick:result

*ENG

[-1 to 1 / 0 / 0.1 %/step]

[0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Success, 1: Failure

337

5. System Maintenance

Main SP Tables-2
SP2-XXX (Drum)
2013

[Envir. Correct:PCU]
Displays the environmental condition, which
is measured in absolute humidity.
[1 to 5 / / 1 /step]

001 Envir. Range:FC:Display

*ENG

1: LL (LL <= 4.3 g/m3)

2: ML (4.3 < ML <= 11.3 g/m3)
3: MM (11.3 < MM <= 18.0 g/m3)

4: MH (18.0 < MH <= 24.0 g/m3)

5: HH (24.0 g/m3 < HH)
007 Current Temp.: Display

*ENG

008 Relative Humidity: Display

*ENG

009 Absolute Humidity: Display

*ENG

010 Envir. Range:Bk:Display

*ENG

Displays the current temperature.

[0 to 100 / 0 / 1 deg/step]
Displays the current relative humidity.
[0 to 100 / 0 / 1%RH/step]
Displays the absolute humidity.
[0 to 100 / 0 / 0.01 g/m3/step]
Displays the previous environmental
condition, which is measured in absolute
humidity.
[1 to 5 / / 1 /step]
1: LL, 2: ML, 3: MM, 4: MH, 5: HH

338

011 Previous Temp.: Display

*ENG

012 Relative Humidity: Display

*ENG

013 Absolute Humidity: Display

*ENG

Displays the previous temperature.

[0 to 100 / 0 / 1 deg/step]
Displays the previous relative humidity.
[0 to 100 / 0 / 1%RH/step]
Displays the previous absolute humidity.
[0 to 100 / 0 / 0.01 g/m3/step]

Main SP Tables-2

[Color Regist Adjust]

2101

These values are the parameters for the automatic line position adjustment and are adjusted
at the factory. However, you must input a value for SP2101-001 after replacing the laser
optics housing unit. For details, see "Laser Optics Housing Unit" in the "Replacement and
Adjustment" section. The value should be provided with the new laser optics housing unit.

001 Bk: Main Scan: Dot

*ENG

002 C Main Scan: Dot

*ENG

003 M Main Scan: Dot

*ENG

004 Y Main Scan: Dot

*ENG

013 Bk: Sub Scan: Line

*ENG

014 C: Sub Scan: Line

*ENG

015 M: Sub Scan: Line

*ENG

016 Y: Sub Scan: Line

*ENG

[512 to 511 / 0 / 1 dot/step]

[16384 to 16383 / 0 / 1 line/step]

[Magnification Adjust]
2102

These values are the parameters for the automatic line position adjustment and are adjusted
at the factory. These SPs must be input only when a new laser unit is installed.

001 Main Mag.: Bk:High Spd

*ENG

003 Main Mag.: Bk:Low Spd

*ENG

004 Main Mag.: C:High Spd

*ENG

006 Main Mag.: C:Low Spd

*ENG

007 Main Mag.: M:High Spd

*ENG

009 Main Mag.: M:Low Spd

*ENG

010 Main Mag.: Y:High Spd

*ENG

012 Main Mag.: Y:Low Spd

*ENG

2103

[0 to 560 / 280 / 1 /step]

[Erase Margin Adjust] (Area, Paper Size)

Adjusts the erase margin by deleting image data at the margins.

339

5. System Maintenance

001 Lead Edge

*ENG

002 Trailing Edge

*ENG

003 Left

*ENG

004 Right

*ENG

006 Duplex Trail. L Size

*ENG

[0 to 4 / 1 / 0.1 mm/step]

007 Duplex Trail. M Size

*ENG

[0 to 4 / 0.8 / 0.1 mm/step]

008 Duplex Trail. S Size

*ENG

[0 to 4 / 0.6 / 0.1 mm/step]

009 Duplex Left Edge

*ENG

010 Duplex Right Edge

*ENG

011 Duplex Trail. L Size:Thick

*ENG

[0 to 4 / 1 / 0.1 mm/step]

012 Duplex Trail. M Size:Thick

*ENG

[0 to 4 / 0.8 / 0.1 mm/step]

013 Duplex Trail. S Size:Thick

*ENG

[0 to 4 / 0.6 / 0.1 mm/step]

014 Duplex Left Edge:Thick

*ENG

015 Duplex Right Edge:Thick

*ENG

2104

340

[0 to 9.9 / 2 / 0.1 mm/step]

[0 to 4 / 0.3 / 0.1 mm/step]

[0 to 4 / 0.3 / 0.1 mm/step]

[LD Initial Power Adjust]

Adjusts the LD initial power. These SPs must be input only when a new laser unit is installed.

001 Bk

*ENG

002 C

*ENG

003 M

*ENG

004 Y

*ENG

2109

[0 to 9.9 / 4.2 / 0.1 mm/step]

[80 to 120 / 100 / 1 %/step]

[Test Pattern]
Generates the test pattern using "COPY Window" tab in the LCD.

Main SP Tables-2

Pattern Selection

[0 to 23 / 0 / 1/step]

0 None
1: Vertical Line (1dot)

12. Independent Pattern (2dot)

2: Vertical Line (2dot)

13. Independent Pattern (4dot)

3: Horizontal (1dot)

14. Trimming Area

4: Horizontal (2dot)

16: Hounds Tooth Check (Horizontal)

003 5: Grid Vertical Line

17: Band (Horizontal)

6: Grid Horizontal Line

18: Band (Vertical)

7: Grid pattern Small

19: Checker Flag Pattern

8: Grid pattern Large

20: Grayscale Vertical Margin

9: Argyle Pattern Small

21: Grayscale Horizontal Margin

10: Argyle Pattern Large

23: Full Dot Pattern

11. Independent Pattern (1dot)

Specifies the color for the test pattern.

005 Color Selection

[1 to 4 / 1 / 1/step]
1: All colors, 2: Magenta, 3: Yellow, 4: Cyan

006 Density: Bk

007 Density: C

[0 to 15 / 15 / 1 /step]

008 Density: M

0: Lightest density

009 Density: Y

2111

Specifies the color density for the test pattern.

15: Darkest density

[Line Pos. Ajust]

Executes the fine line position adjustment twice.

001 Execute: Mode a

If this SP is not completed (NG is displayed), do

SP2111-003 first and then try this SP again.
Executes the fine line position adjustment once.

002 Execute:Mode b

If this SP is not completed, do SP2111-003 first and

then try this SP again.

341

5. System Maintenance

Executes the rough line position adjustment once.

003 Execute:Mode c

2112

After doing this SP, make sure to execute

SP2111-001 or -002. Otherwise, the line position
adjustment is not perfectly done.

[TM/P Sensor Test] ID Sensor Check FA

This SP is used to check the ID sensors at the factory.
The results of this SP are displayed in SP2140 to
SP2145.

001 Execute

[Skew Adjustment]

2117

These SPs must be used when a new laser optics housing unit is installed, see "Laser Optics
Housing Unit" in the "Replacement and Adjustment" section.
001 Pulse: C

*ENG

002 Pulse: M

*ENG

003 Pulse: Y

*ENG

2118

[75 to 75 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]

[Skew Adjustment]

001 Execute: C

*ENG

002 Execute: M

*ENG

003 Execute: Y

*ENG

2119

342

Specifies a skew adjustment value for the skew motor M, C or Y.

Changes the current skew adjustment values to the

values specified with SP2117.
These SPs must be used when a new laser optics
housing unit is installed. For details, see "Laser
Optics Housing Unit" in the "Replacement and
Adjustment" section.

[Skew Adjustment Display]

Displays the current skew adjustment value for each skew motor.

001 C

*ENG

002 M

*ENG

003 Y

*ENG

[75 to 75 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]

Main SP Tables-2

[P-Sensor Test]
2140

Displays the maximum result values of the ID sensor check.

Front, Center, Rear: ID sensors for the automatic line position adjustment and the process
control

001 PWM

*ENG

[TM-Sensor Test]
005 PWM: Front

*ENG

006 PWM: Center

*ENG

007 PWM: Rear

*ENG

[0 to 1024 / 0 / 1/step]

[P-Sensor Test]
2141

Displays the maximum result values of the ID sensor check.

Front, Center, Rear: ID sensors for the automatic line position adjustment and the process
control

001 Average

*ENG

[TM-Sensor Test]
005 Average: Front

*ENG

006 Average: Center

*ENG

007 Average: Rear

*ENG

[0 to 5.5 / 0 / 0.01V/step]

[P-Sensor Test]
2142

Displays the maximum result values of the ID sensor check.

Front, Center, Rear: ID sensors for the automatic line position adjustment and the process
control

343

5. System Maintenance

001 Maximum

*ENG

[TM-Sensor Test]
005 Maximum: Front

*ENG

006 Maximum: Center

*ENG

007 Maximum: Rear

*ENG

[0 to 5.5 / 0 / 0.01V/step]

[P-Sensor Test]
2143

Displays the minimum result values of the ID sensor check.

Front, Center, Rear: ID sensors for the automatic line position adjustment and the process
control

001 Minimum

*ENG

[TM-Sensor Test]
005 Minimum: Front

*ENG

006 Minimum: Center

*ENG

007 Minimum: Rear

*ENG

[0 to 5.5 / 0 / 0.01V/step]

[P-Sensor Test]
2144

Displays the maximum result 2 values of the ID sensor check.

Front, Center, Rear: ID sensors for the automatic line position adjustment and the process
control

001 Maximum 2:

*ENG

[TM-Sensor Test]

344

005 Maximum 2: Front

*ENG

006 Maximum 2: Center

*ENG

007 Maximum 2: Rear

*ENG

[0 to 5.5 / 0 / 0.01V/step]

Main SP Tables-2

[P-Sensor Test]
2145

Displays the minimum result 2 values of the ID sensor check.

Front, Center, Rear: ID sensors for the automatic line position adjustment and the process
control

001 Minimum 2

*ENG

[TM-Sensor Test]
005 Minimum 2: Front

*ENG

006 Minimum 2: Center

*ENG

007 Minimum 2: Rear

*ENG

2193

003

[0 to 5.5 / 0 / 0.01V/step]

[MUSIC Condition]
Line Position Adjustment: Condition Setting
Page: Job End: FC

*ENG

[0 to 999 / 200 / 1 page/step]

Adjusts the threshold of the line position adjustment for color printing mode after job end.
Page: Interrupt: BW+FC

*ENG

[0 to 999 / 300 / 1 page/step]

004 Adjusts the threshold of the line position adjustment for BW and color printing mode during
job.
2194

[MUSIC Exe Result] Line Position Adjustment: Execution Result

001 Year

*ENG

[0 to 99 / 0 / 1 year/step]

002 Month

*ENG

[1 to 12 / 1 / 1 month/step]

003 Date

*ENG

[1 to 31 / 1 / 1 day/step]

004 Hour

*ENG

[0 to 23 / 0 / 1 hour/step]

005 Minute

*ENG

[0 to 59 / 0 / 1 minute/step]

006 Temperature

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 0 / 1 deg/step]

007 Execution Result

*ENG

008 Number of Execution

*ENG

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Completed successfully, 1: Failed
[0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 times/step]

345

5. System Maintenance

009 Number of Failure

*ENG

[0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 times/step]

010 Error Counter: C

*ENG

[0 to 9 / 0 / 1 /step]

011 Error Counter: M

*ENG

0: Not done
1: Completed successfully
2: Cannot detect patterns

012 Error Counter: Y

*ENG

3: Fewer lines on the pattern than the target

4: Out of the adjustment range
5 to 9: Not used

[Skew Origin Set]

2220

Resets the value of the skew adjustment motor for each color.
These SPs must be executed when a new laser optics housing unit is installed. For details,
see "Laser Unit" in the "Replacement and Adjustment" section.

001 C:Skew Motor

*ENG

002 M:Skew Motor

*ENG

003 Y:Skew Motor

*ENG

2241

[Ambient Temp/Hum:Display]
Displays the environment temperature and humidity.

001 Temperature

[5 to 45 / - / 0.1deg/step]

002 Relative Humidity

[0 to 100 / - / 0.1 %RH/step]

003 Absolute Humidity

[0 to 100 / - / 0.1 g/m3/step]

2326

001

[Transfer Roller CL: Bias]

Transfer Roller Cleaning: Bias Adjustment
Positive:befor and after JOB

*ENG

[0 to 2100 / 250 / 10 V /step]

Adjusts the positive voltage of the paper transfer roller for cleaning the paper transfer roller.

Negative:befor and after

002 JOB

*ENG

[10 to 400 / 100 / 10 %/step]

Adjusts the negative current of the paper transfer roller for cleaning the paper transfer roller.
346

Main SP Tables-2

Positive:after JAM

*ENG

[0 to 2100 / 2000 / 10 V/step]

003 Adjusts the negative current limit of the paper transfer roller for cleaning the paper transfer
roller.
004 Negative:after JAM

*ENG

[10 to 400 / 100 / 10 %/step]

[Common: BW: Bias]

2351

Image Transfer Belt: B/W: Bias Adjustment

Normal: 120 mm/sec, Low: 60 mm/sec

001

003

Image Transfer:Normal Speed

*ENG

[0 to 60 / 25 / 1 A]

Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt in B/W mode for plain paper.
Image Transfer:Low Speed

*ENG

[0 to 60 / 13 / 1 A]

Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt in B/W mode for thick 1 paper.
[Common: FC: Bias]

2357

Image Transfer Belt: Full Color: Bias Adjustment

Normal: 120 mm/sec, Low: 60 mm/sec

001

002

003

004

009

010

Image Transfer: Normal Spd:Bk

*ENG

[0 to 60 / 23 / 1 A]

Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Black in full color mode for plain paper.
Image Transfer:: Normal Spd:C

*ENG

[0 to 60 / 22 / 1 A]

Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Magenta in full color mode for plain paper.
Image Transfer: Normal Spd:M

*ENG

[0 to 60 / 25 / 1 A]

Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Cyan in full color mode for plain paper.
Image Transfer: Normal Spd:Y

*ENG

[0 to 60 / 29 / 1 A]

Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Yellow in full color mode for plain paper.
Image Transfer: Low Speed:Bk

*ENG

[0 to 60 / 13 / 1 A]

Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Black in full color mode for thick 1 paper.
Image Transfer: Low Speed:C

*ENG

[0 to 60 / 12 / 1 A]

Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Magenta in full color mode for thick 1 paper.

347

5. System Maintenance

011

012

Image Transfer: Low Speed:M

*ENG

[0 to 60 / 13 / 1 A]

Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Cyan in full color mode for thick 1 paper.
Image Transfer: Low Speed:Y

*ENG

[0 to 60 / 14 / 1 A]

Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Yellow in full color mode for thick 1 paper.
[Plain: Bias: BW]

2403

Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for plain paper in black-and-white mode.
Normal: 120 mm/sec, Low: 60mm/sec

001 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 20 / 1 A /step]

002 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 23 / 1 A /step]

003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st

*ENG

004 Paper Transfer: Low: 2nd

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 12 / 1 A /step]

[Plain: Bias: FC]

2407

Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for plain paper in full color mode.
Normal: 120 mm/sec, Low: 60mm/sec

001 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 25 / 1 A /step]

002 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 28 / 1 A /step]

003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 13 / 1 A /step]

004 Paper Transfer: Low: 2nd

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 14 / 1 A /step]

[Plain-T:SizeCorrect:BW]
2411

Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for each paper size.
SP2403 and SP2407 are multiplied by these SP values.
Normal: 120 mm/sec, Low: 60mm/sec

348

Main SP Tables-2

001 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: S1

*ENG

002 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S1

*ENG

[100 to 4000 / 100 / 5%/step]

003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st: S1

*ENG

S1 size > 290 mm (Paper width)

004 Paper Transfer: Low: 2nd: S1

*ENG
[100 to 4000 / 140 / 5%/step]

005 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: S2

*ENG

290 mm > S2 size > 250 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 165 / 5%/step]

006 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S2

*ENG

290 mm > S2 size > 250 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 150 / 5%/step]

007 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st: S2

*ENG

290 mm > S2 size > 250 mm (Paper

width)

[100 to 4000 / 190 / 5%/step]

008 Paper Transfer: Low : 2nd:S2

*ENG

290 mm > S2 size > 250 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 175 / 5%/step]

009 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: S3

*ENG

010 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S3

*ENG

250 mm > S3 size > 194 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 230 / 5%/step]
250 mm > S3 size > 194 mm (Paper
width)
[100 to 4000 / 190 / 5%/step]

011 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st: S3

*ENG

250 mm > S3 size > 194 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 290 / 5%/step]

012 Paper Transfer: Low 2nd:S3

*ENG

250 mm > S3 size > 194 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 190 / 5%/step]

013 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: S4

*ENG

194 mm > S4 size > 150 mm (Paper

width)

349

5. System Maintenance

[100 to 4000 / 285 / 5%/step]

014 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S4

*ENG

015 PaperTransfer: Low:1st:S4

*ENG

194 mm > S4 size > 150 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 210 / 5%/step]
194 mm > S4 size > 150 mm (Paper
width)
[100 to 4000 / 360 / 5%/step]

016 Paper Transfer: Low 2nd: S4

*ENG

017 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: S5

*ENG

018 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S5

*ENG

019 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st: S5

*ENG

020 Paper Transfer: Low 2nd: S5

*ENG

194 mm > S4 size > 150 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 200 / 5%/step]
150 mm > S5 size (Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 340 / 5%/step]
150 mm > S5 size (Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 210 / 5%/step]
150 mm > S5 size (Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 420 / 5%/step]
150 mm > S5 size (Paper width)

[Plain-T:SizeCorrect:FC]
2412

Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for each paper size.
SP2403 and SP2407 are multiplied by these SP values.
Normal: 120 mm/sec, Low: 60mm/sec

001 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: S1

*ENG

002 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S1

*ENG

[100 to 4000 / 100 / 5%/step]

003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st: S1

*ENG

S1 size > 290 mm (Paper width)

004 Paper Transfer: Low: 2nd: S1

*ENG
[100 to 4000 / 130 / 5%/step]

005 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: S2

350

*ENG

290 mm > S2 size > 250 mm (Paper

width)

Main SP Tables-2

[100 to 4000 / 160 / 5%/step]

006 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S2

*ENG

007 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st: S2

*ENG

290 mm > S2 size > 250 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 140 / 5%/step]
290 mm > S2 size > 250 mm (Paper
width)
[100 to 4000 / 215 / 5%/step]

008 Paper Transfer: Low : 2nd:S2

*ENG

290 mm > S2 size > 250 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 160 / 5%/step]

009 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: S3

*ENG

250 mm > S3 size > 194 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 215 / 5%/step]

010 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S3

*ENG

250 mm > S3 size > 194 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 175 / 5%/step]

011 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st: S3

*ENG

250 mm > S3 size > 194 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 320 / 5%/step]

012 Paper Transfer: Low 2nd:S3

*ENG

250 mm > S3 size > 194 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 190 / 5%/step]

013 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: S4

*ENG

194 mm > S4 size > 150 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 285 / 5%/step]

014 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S4

*ENG

015 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st: S4

*ENG

194 mm > S4 size > 150 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 190 / 5%/step]
194 mm > S4 size > 150 mm (Paper
width)

351

5. System Maintenance

[100 to 4000 / 465 / 5%/step]

016 Paper Transfer: Low: 2st Side: S4

*ENG

017 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: S5

*ENG

018 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S5

*ENG

019 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st: S5

*ENG

020 Paper Transfer: Low 2nd: S5

*ENG

194 mm > S4 size > 150 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 220 / 5%/step]
150 mm > S5 size (Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 355 / 5%/step]
150 mm > S5 size (Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 230 / 5%/step]
150 mm > S5 size (Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 565 / 5%/step]
150 mm > S5 size (Paper width)

[Thin: Bias: BW]

2453

Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thin paper in black-and-white mode.
Normal: 120 mm/sec, Low: 60 mm/sec

001 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 20 / 1 A /step]

003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st

*ENG

[0 to 250 / 12 / 1 A /step]

[Thin: Bias: FC]

2457

Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thin paper in full color mode.
Normal: 120 mm/sec, Low: 60 mm/sec

001 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 25 / 1 A /step]

003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 13 / 1 A /step]

2482

[Gloss: Bias: BW]

Paper Transfer: 1st

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 15 / 1 A /step]

001 Adjusts the transfer current of the paper transfer roller for the 1st side of gloss paper in black
and white mode.
2483

352

[Gloss: Bias: FC]

Main SP Tables-2

Paper Transfer: 1st

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 15 / 1 A /step]

001 Adjusts the transfer current of the paper transfer roller for the 1st side of gloss paper in full
color mode.
[Thick 1: Bias: BW]
2502

Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thick 1 paper in black-and-white mode.
Thick: 60 mm/sec

001 Paper Transfer: 1st

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 15 / 1 A /step]

002 Paper Transfer: 2nd

*ENG

Not used

[Thick 1: Bias: FC]

2507

Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thick 1 paper in full color mode.

Thick: 60 mm/sec
001 Paper Transfer: 1st

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 15 / 1 A /step]

002 Paper Transfer: 2nd

*ENG

Not used

[Thick-T:Size Correct:BW]
2511

Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for each paper size.
SP2502 and SP2507 are multiplied by these SP values.
Thick: 60 mm/sec

001 Paper Transfer: 1st: S1

*ENG

002 Paper Transfer: 2nd: S1

*ENG

[100 to 4000 / 100 / 5%/step]

S1 size > 290 mm (Paper width)
Not used
[100 to 4000 / 125 / 5%/step]

005 Paper Transfer: 1st: S2

*ENG

290 mm > S2 size > 250 mm (Paper

width)

006 Paper Transfer: 2nd: S2

*ENG

Not used
[100 to 4000 / 150 / 5%/step]

009 Paper Transfer: 1st: S3

*ENG

250 mm > S3 size > 194 mm (Paper

width)

353

5. System Maintenance

010 Paper Transfer: 2nd: S3

*ENG

Not used
[100 to 4000 / 275 / 5%/step]

013 Paper Transfer: 1st: S4

*ENG

194 mm > S4 size > 150 mm (Paper

width)

014 Paper Transfer: 2nd: S4

*ENG

Not used

017 Paper Transfer: 1st: S5

*ENG

018 Paper Transfer: 2nd: S5

*ENG

[100 to 4000 / 400 / 5%/step]

150 mm > S5 size (Paper width)
Not used

[Thick-T:Size Correct:FC]

2512

Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for each paper size.
SP2502 and SP2507 are multiplied by these SP values.
Thick: 60 mm/sec

001 Paper Transfer: 1st: S1

*ENG

002 Paper Transfer: 2nd: S1

*ENG

[100 to 4000 / 100 / 5%/step]

S1 size > 290 mm (Paper width)
Not used
[100 to 4000 / 110 / 5%/step]

005 Paper Transfer: 1st: S2

*ENG

290 mm > S2 size > 250 mm (Paper

width)

006 Paper Transfer: 2nd: S2

*ENG

Not used
[100 to 4000 / 115 / 5%/step]

009 Paper Transfer: 1st: S3

*ENG

250 mm > S3 size > 194 mm (Paper

width)

010 Paper Transfer: 2nd: S3

*ENG

Not used
[100 to 4000 / 405 / 5%/step]

354

013 Paper Transfer: 1st: S4

*ENG

194 mm > S4 size > 150 mm (Paper

width)

014 Paper Transfer: 2nd: S4

*ENG

Not used

017 Paper Transfer: 1st: S5

*ENG

[100 to 4000 / 690 / 5%/step]

150 mm > S5 size (Paper width)

Main SP Tables-2

018 Paper Transfer:: 2nd: S5

*ENG

Not used

[Thick 2: Bias: BW]

2553

Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thick2 paper in black-and-white mode.
Thick: 60 mm/sec

001 Paper Transfer: 1st

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 10 / 1 A /step]

002 Paper Transfer: 2nd

*ENG

Not used

[Thick 2: Bias: FC]

2558

Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thick2 paper in full color mode.
Thick: 60 mm/sec

001 Paper Transfer: 1st

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 13 / 1 A /step]

002 Paper Transfer: 2nd

*ENG

Not used

2603

[OHP: Bias: BW]

Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for OHP in black-and-white mode.

001 Paper Transfer

2608

*ENG

[0 to 200 / NA: 15, EU/AA: 13 / 1 A /step]

[OHP: Bias: FC]

Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for OHP in full color mode.

001 Paper Transfer

2630

*ENG

[0 to 200 / NA: 24, EU/AA: 20 / 1 A /step]

[OHP: Env. Correct Table]

002 Paper Transfer: BW: 1st

*ENG

[1 to 50 / NA: 39, EU/AA: 26 / 1 /step]

003 Paper Transfer: FC: 1st

*ENG

[1 to 50 / NA: 7, EU/AA: 47 / 1 /step]

[Thick 3: Bias: BW]

2651

Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thick paper 3 in black-and-white mode.
Thick: 60 mm/sec

355

5. System Maintenance

001 Paper Transfer: 1st

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 10 / 1 A /step]

002 Paper Transfer: 2nd

*ENG

Not used

[Thick 3: Bias: FC]

2652

Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thick paper 3 in full color mode.
Thick: 60 mm/sec

001 Paper Transfer: 1st

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 13 / 1 A /step]

002 Paper Transfer: 2nd

*ENG

Not used

[M-Thick:Bias:BW] Middle Thick: Bias: BW

2703

Normal: 120mm/sec, Low: 60mm/sec

Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for middle thick in black-and-white mode.

001 Paper Transfer:Normal:1st

*ENG

002 Paper Transfer:Normal:2nd

*ENG

003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 11 / 1 - A /step]

004 Paper Transfer: Low: 2nd

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 13 / 1 - A /step]

[0 to 200 / 20 / 1 - A /step]

[M-Thick:Bias:FC] Middle Thick: Bias: BW

2707

Normal: 120mm/sec, Low: 60mm/sec

Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for middle thick in full color mode.

001 Paper Transfer:Normal:1st

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 25 / 1 - A /step]

002 Paper Transfer:Normal:2nd

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 28 / 1 - A /step]

003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 11/ 1 - A /step]

004 Paper Transfer: Low: 2nd

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 14 / 1 - A /step]

[SP 1: Bias: BW]

2753

Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for special paper 1 in black-and-white mode.
Normal: 120mm/sec, Low: 60mm/sec

356

Main SP Tables-2

001 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st

*ENG

002 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd

*ENG

003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 11 / 1 A /step]

004 Paper Transfer: Low: 2nd

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 13 / 1 A /step]

[0 to 200 / 20 / 1 A /step]

[SP 1: Bias: FC]

2757

Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for special paper 1 in full color mode.
Normal: 120mm/sec, Low: 60mm/sec

001 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 25 / 1 A /step]

002 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 28 / 1 A /step]

003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 11 / 1 A /step]

004 Paper Transfer: Low: 2nd

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 14 / 1 A /step]

[SP1,2,3-T:Size Correct:BW]
2761

Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for each paper size.
SP2753 and SP2757 are multiplied by these SP values.
Normal: 120mm/sec, Low: 60mm/sec

001 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: S1

*ENG

002 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S1

*ENG

[100 to 4000 / 100 / 5%/step]

003 Paper Transfer:Low:1st:S1

*ENG

S1 size > 290 mm (Paper width)

004 Paper Transfer:Low:2nd:S1

*ENG
[100 to 4000 / 140 / 5%/step]

005 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: S2

*ENG

290 mm > S2 size > 250 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 165 / 5%/step]

006 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S2

*ENG

290 mm > S2 size > 250 mm (Paper

width)

357

5. System Maintenance

[100 to 4000 / 150 / 5%/step]

007 Paper Transfer:Low:1st:S2

*ENG

008 Paper Transfer:Low:2nd:S2

*ENG

290 mm > S2 size > 250 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 190 / 5%/step]
290 mm > S2 size > 250 mm (Paper
width)
[100 to 4000 / 175 / 5%/step]

009 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: S3

*ENG

250 mm > S2 size > 194 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 230 / 5%/step]

010 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S3

*ENG

250 mm > S2 size > 194 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 190 / 5%/step]

011 PaperTransfer:Low:1st:S3

*ENG

250 mm > S2 size > 194 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 290 / 5%/step]

012 PaperTransfer:Low:2nd:S3

*ENG

250 mm > S2 size > 194 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 190 / 5%/step]

013 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: S4

*ENG

194 mm > S4 size > 150 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 285 / 5%/step]

014 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S4

*ENG

194 mm > S4 size > 150 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 210 / 5%/step]

015 PaperTransfer:Low:1st:S4

*ENG

016 PaperTransfer:Low:2nd:S4

*ENG

017 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: S5

*ENG

194 mm > S4 size > 150 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 360 / 5%/step]

358

194 mm > S4 size > 150 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 200 / 5%/step]
150 mm > S5 size (Paper width)

Main SP Tables-2

018 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S5

*ENG

019 PaperTransfer:Low:1st:S5

*ENG

020 PaperTransfer:Low:2nd:S5

*ENG

[100 to 4000 / 340 / 5%/step]

150 mm > S5 size (Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 210 / 5%/step]
150 mm > S5 size (Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 420 / 5%/step]
150 mm > S5 size (Paper width)

[SP1,2,3-T:Size Correct:FC]
2762

Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for each paper size.
SP2753 and SP2757 are multiplied by these SP values.
Normal: 120 mm/sec, Low: 60 mm/sec

001 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: S1

*ENG

002 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S1

*ENG

[100 to 4000 / 100 / 5%/step]

003 Paper Transfer:Low:1st:S1

*ENG

S1 size > 290 mm (Paper width)

004 Paper Transfer:Low:2nd:S1

*ENG
[100 to 4000 / 130 / 5%/step]

005 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: S2

*ENG

290 mm > S2 size > 250 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 160 / 5%/step]

006 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S2

*ENG

290 mm > S2 size > 250 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 140 / 5%/step]

007 Paper Transfer:Low:1st:S2

*ENG

290 mm > S2 size > 250 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 215 / 5%/step]

008 Paper Transfer:Low:2nd:S2

*ENG

290 mm > S2 size > 250 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 160 / 5%/step]

009 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: S3

*ENG

250 mm > S2 size > 194 mm (Paper

width)

359

5. System Maintenance

[100 to 4000 / 215 / 5%/step]

010 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S3

*ENG

011 PaperTransfer:Low:1st:S3

*ENG

250 mm > S2 size > 194 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 175 / 5%/step]
250 mm > S2 size > 194 mm (Paper
width)
[100 to 4000 / 320 / 5%/step]

012 PaperTransfer:Low:2nd:S3

*ENG

250 mm > S2 size > 194 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 190 / 5%/step]

013 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: S4

*ENG

194 mm > S4 size > 150 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 285 / 5%/step]

014 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S4

*ENG

194 mm > S4 size > 150 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 190 / 5%/step]

015 PaperTransfer:Low:1st:S4

*ENG

194 mm > S4 size > 150 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 465 / 5%/step]

360

016 PaperTransfer:Low:2nd:S4

*ENG

017 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: S5

*ENG

018 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S5

*ENG

019 PaperTransfer:Low:1st:S5

*ENG

020 PaperTransfer:Low:2nd:S5

*ENG

194 mm > S4 size > 150 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 220 / 5%/step]
150 mm > S5 size (Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 355 / 5%/step]
150 mm > S5 size (Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 230 / 5%/step]
150 mm > S5 size (Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 565 / 5%/step]
150 mm > S5 size (Paper width)

Main SP Tables-2

[SP 4: Bias: BW]

2783

Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for special paper 1 in black-and-white mode.
Normal: 120 mm/sec, Low: 60 mm/sec

001 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 15 / 1 A /step]

[SP 4: Bias: FC]

2787

Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for special paper 1 in full color mode.
Normal: 120 mm/sec, Low: 60 mm/sec

001 Paper Transfer

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 15 / 1 A /step]

[SP4,5,6-T:Size Correct:BW]
2791

Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for each paper size.
SP2783 and SP2787 are multiplied by these SP values.

Normal: 120 mm/sec, Low: 60 mm/sec

001 Paper Transfer: S1

*ENG

[100 to 4000 / 100 / 5%/step]

S1 size > 290 mm (Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 125 / 5%/step]

005 Paper Transfer: S2

*ENG

290 mm > S2 size > 250 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 150 / 5%/step]

009 Paper Transfer: S3

*ENG

250 mm > S2 size > 194 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 275 / 5%/step]

013 Paper Transfer: S4

*ENG

017 Paper Transfer: S5

*ENG

194 mm > S4 size > 150 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 400 / 5%/step]
150 mm > S5 size (Paper width)

361

5. System Maintenance

[SP4,5,6-T:Size Correct:FC]
2792

Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for each paper size.
SP2783 and SP2787 are multiplied by these SP values.
Normal: 120 mm/sec, Low: 60 mm/sec

001 Paper Transfer: S1

*ENG

[100 to 4000 / 100 / 5%/step]

S1 size > 290 mm (Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 110 / 5%/step]

005 Paper Transfer: S2

*ENG

009 Paper Transfer: S3

*ENG

290 mm > S2 size > 250 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 115 / 5%/step]

250 mm > S2 size > 194 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 405 / 5%/step]

013 Paper Transfer: S4

*ENG

017 Paper Transfer: S5

*ENG

194 mm > S4 size > 150 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 690 / 5%/step]
150 mm > S5 size (Paper width)

[SP 2: Bias: BW]

2803

Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for special paper 2 in black-and-white mode.
Normal: 120mm/sec, Low: 60mm/sec

001 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st

*ENG

002 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd

*ENG

003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 11 / 1 A /step]

004 Paper Transfer: Low: 2nd

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 13 / 1 A /step]

[0 to 200 / 20 / 1 A /step]

[SP2: Bias: FC]

2807

Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for special paper 2 in full color mode.
Normal: 120mm/sec, Low: 60mm/sec

001 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st

362

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 25 / 1 A /step]

Main SP Tables-2

002 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 28 / 1 A /step]

003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 11 / 1 A /step]

004 Paper Transfer: Low: 2nd

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 14 / 1 A /step]

[SP 5: Bias: BW]

2833

Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for special paper 5 in black-and-white mode.
Normal: 120mm/sec, Low: 60mm/sec

001 Paper Transfer

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 15 / 1 A /step]

[SP 5: Bias: FC]

2837

Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for special paper 5 in full color mode.
Normal: 120 mm/sec, Low: 60 mm/sec

001 Paper Transfer

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 15 / 1 A /step]

[SP3: Bias: BW]

2852

Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for special paper 3 in black-and-white mode.
Normal: 120mm/sec, Low: 60mm/sec

001 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st

*ENG

002 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd

*ENG

003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 11 / 1 A /step]

004 Paper Transfer: Low: 2nd

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 13 / 1 A /step]

[0 to 200 / 20 / 1 A /step]

[Special 3: Bias: FC]

2857

Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for special paper 3 in full color mode.
Normal: 120mm/sec, Low: 60mm/sec

001 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 25 / 1 A /step]

002 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 28 / 1 A /step]

003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 11 / 1 A /step]

363

5. System Maintenance

004 Paper Transfer: Low: 2nd

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 14 / 1 A /step]

[SP 6: Bias: BW]

2883

Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for special paper 6 in black-and-white mode.
Normal: 120mm/sec, Low: 60mm/sec

001 Paper Transfer

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 15 / 1 A /step]

[SP 6: Bias: FC]

2887

Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for special paper 6 in full color mode.
Normal: 120mm/sec, Low: 60mm/sec

001 Paper Transfer

2940

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 15 / 1 A /step]

[Charge Bias On Timing]

001 T1:Standard Speed DFU

T1:Low Speed

*ENG

[-500 to 1000 / 0 / 10 msec /step]

*ENG

[-500 to 1000 / -80 / -80 msec /step]

If a horizontal white band at 40 mm from the leading edge occurs in the low speed mode,
002 change this setting from "-80" to "-500".
[Side Effect]:
"580 msec" is added to the first copy/ print time when using the low speed mode.

364

Main SP Tables-3

Main SP Tables-3
SP3-XXX (Process)
3011

[Process Cont. Manual Execution]

001 Normal Procon

002 Toner Density Adjst

Executes the normal process control manually

(potential control).
Check the result with SP3-325-001 after executing
this SP.
Executes the toner density adjustment manually.
Check the result with SP3-325-001 after executing
this SP.
Executes the process control that is normally done
before ACC.

003 Procon BF-ACC

004 With Full MUSIC

Executes the process control that is normally done

at the same time as MUSIC. This SP does the MUSIC
(line position adjustment) twice.

005 With Normal MUSIC

Executes the process control that is normally done

at the same time as MUSIC. This SP does the MUSIC
(line position adjustment) once.

The type of process control is selected with

SP3-041-004.

[Process Cont. Check Result] Process Control Self-check Result

Displays the result of the latest process control self-check.
3012

All colors are displayed. The results are displayed in the order "Y C M K"
e.g., 11 (Y) 99 (C) 11 (M) 11 (K): The self-check for Cyan failed but the others were
successful.
See the "Error Condition Tables" in the Process Control Error section for details.

365

5. System Maintenance

001 History: Latest

*ENG

002 Result: Latest 1

*ENG

003 Result: Latest 2

*ENG

004 Result: Latest 3

*ENG

005 Result: Latest 4

*ENG

006 Result: Latest 5

*ENG

007 Result: Latest 6

*ENG

008 Result: Latest 7

*ENG

009 Result: Latest 8

*ENG

010 Result: Latest 9

*ENG

3013

[TD Sen Initial Setting] Developer Initialization Setting

001 Execution: ALL

002 Execution: COL

003 Execution: Bk

004 Execution: C

005 Execution: M

006 Execution: Y

3014

[1111 to 99999999 / - / 1/step]

Executes the TD sensor initialization for each

color.

[TD Sen Initial Set Result] Developer Initialization Result: Display

[0 to 9999 / - / 1 /step ]
Display: YMCK

*ENG

1: Success
2 to 9: Failure

001 Displays the developer initialization result. See the "Error Condition Tables" in the Process
Control Error section for details on the meaning of each code.
All colors are displayed. Values are displayed in the order Y M C Bk.
e.g., 1 (Y) 1 (M) 2 (C) 1 (Bk): Initialization of Cyan failed but the others succeeded.

366

Main SP Tables-3

3015

[Forced Toner Supply] Forced Toner Supply ([Color])

001 Execution: ALL

002 Execution: COL (MCY)

003 Execution: Bk

004 Execution: C

005 Execution: M

006 Execution: Y

3016

[Forced Toner Supply Cntl] Forced Toner Supply Setting ([Color])

Specifies the manual toner supply time for each color.

001 Supply Time: Bk

*ENG

002 Supply Time: C

*ENG

003 Supply Time: M

*ENG

004 Supply Time: Y

*ENG

3020
001005

Executes the manual toner supply to the

development unit.

[0 to 30 / 4 / 1 sec/step]

[Vt Limit Error]

DFU

001 Delta Vt Threshold

*ENG

[0 to 5 / 5 / 0.01 V/step]

002 Upper Threshold

*ENG

[0 to 5 / 4.7 / 0.01 V/step]

003 Upper Error Thresh

*ENG

[0 to 99 / 20 / 1 time/step]

004 Lower Threshold

*ENG

[0 to 5 / 0.5 / 0.01 V/step]

005 Lower Error Thresh

*ENG

[0 to 99 / 10 / 1 times/step]

367

5. System Maintenance

006 Upper Counter: Bk

*ENG

007 Upper Counter: C

*ENG

008 Upper Counter: M

*ENG

009 Upper Counter: Y

*ENG

Displays the total times of the Vt upper or lower

limit error.

010 Lower Counter: Bk

*ENG

[0 to 99 / 0 / 1 times/step]

011 Lower Counter: C

*ENG

012 Lower Counter: M

*ENG

013 Lower Counter: Y

*ENG

3021

[TD Sensor Initial Set] Developer Initialization Setting

Specifies the developer agitation time for each color at the developer initialization.

001 Agitation Time: Bk

*ENG

002 Agitation Time: C

*ENG

003 Agitation Time: M

*ENG

004 Agitation Time: Y

*ENG

005008

[0 to 200 / 30 / 1 sec/step]

Sets the execution flag of the developer initialization for each color.

005 Execution Flag: Bk

*ENG

006 Execution Flag: C

*ENG

0: Flag OFF, 1: Flag ON

007 Execution Flag: M

*ENG

008 Execution Flag: Y

*ENG

This flag is cleared after executing TD sensor

initialization.

009 Initial Setting Off

*ENG

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]

Enables or disables developer initialization.

DFU
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0: Enable, 1: Disable

3022

368

[Toner Replenishment Mode]

Sets the toner supply flag of each color.

Main SP Tables-3

005 Execution Flag: Bk

*ENG

006 Execution Flag: C

*ENG

0: Flag OFF, 1: Flag ON

007 Execution Flag: M

*ENG

008 Execution Flag: Y

*ENG

This flag is cleared after executing TD sensor

initialization.

3041

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]

[Process Control Type]

[0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step ] Alphanumeric

001

Bias Control

*ENG

0: FIXED (Use the fixed values for the charge DC bias

and development DC bias set with SP2-005 and
SP2-229.)
1: CONTROL

Enables or disables the process control.

[0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step] Alphanumeric
002

LD Power Control

*ENG

0: FIXED (at the value in SP2221-xxx)

1: CONTROL (adjusted by process control)

Selects the LD power control mode.

AutoControl Prohibition
003 Set

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] Alphanumeric
*ENG

0: Permit
1: Forbid

Enables or disables the automatic process control at power-on or door opening.

[0 to 2 / 2 / 1/step]
004

Pre-ACC Process Control

*ENG

0: Not Execute
1: Process Control
2: TC Control

Selects the process control mode that is done before ACC.

[0 to 2 / 2 / 1/step]
005 P-Pattern Selection

*ENG

0: FIXED
1: INITIALIZED
2: CALCULATED

369

5. System Maintenance

3044

[Toner Supply Type] Toner Supply Type ([Color])

Selects the toner supply method type.

001 Bk

*ENG

002 C

*ENG

003 M

*ENG

004 Y

*ENG

3045

[0 to 4 / 4 / 1/step] Alphanumeric
0: FIXED (with the supply rates stored with SP 3401)
1: PID (Vtref_Fixed)
2: PID (Vtref_Control)
3: MBD (Vtref_Fixed)
4: MBD (Vtref_Control)

[Toner End Detection: Set]

Enables/disables the toner alert display on the LCD.
DFU

001 ON/OFF

*ENG

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0: Detect, 1: Not Detect
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]

002 NE Detection

*ENG

0: ALL (Calculation and TE sensor)

1: TE Sensor

3101

[Toner End/Near End]

Displays the amount of each color toner.
001 Toner Replenishment: Bk

*ENG

002 Toner Replenishment: C

*ENG

003 Toner Replenishment: M

*ENG

004 Toner Replenishment: Y

*ENG

[1 to 600 / 235 / 1 g/step]

005-008 Displays the consumed amount of each color toner.

370

005 Toner Consumption: Bk

*ENG

006 Toner Consumption: C

*ENG

007 Toner Consumption: M

*ENG

008 Toner Consumption: Y

*ENG

[0 to 3000 / 0 / 0.001 g/step]

Main SP Tables-3

009-012

Displays the remaining amount of each color toner. These are calculated by the operating
times of the toner supply pumps.

009 Toner Remaining: Bk

*ENG

010 Toner Remaining: C

*ENG

011 Toner Remaining: M

*ENG

012 Toner Remaining: Y

*ENG

[50000 to 600 / 0 / 0.001 g/step]

Adjusts the threshold of toner near end for each color. The toner near end message appears
on the LCD when the remaining toner amount reaches this threshold. When one of these
013-016
SPs (SP3-101-009 to 012 or -032 to -035) reaches this threshold, toner near end is
detected.
013 Near End Thresh: Bk

*ENG

014 Near End Thresh: C

*ENG

015 Near End Thresh: M

*ENG

016 Near End Thresh: Y

*ENG

Delta Vt Threshold

*ENG

[0 to 600 / 5 / 1 g/step]

[0 to 600 / 0 / 1 g/step]

[0 to 5 / 0.5 / 0.01 V/step]

021 This SP is the threshold for toner end. Delta Vt: Vt-Vtref
When both this SP and SP3-101-026 occur at same time, toner end is determined.
022-025

Displays the total delta Vt (Vt-Vtref) value for each color.These are calculated by pixel
counting.

022 Delta Vt Sum: Bk

*ENG

023 Delta Vt Sum: C

*ENG

024 Delta Vt Sum: M

*ENG

025 Delta Vt Sum: Y

*ENG

026 Delta Vt Sum Threshold

*ENG

[0 to 655 / 0 / 0.01 V/step]

[0 to 255 / 10 / 1 V/step]

028-031 Displays the consumed toner amount calculated with the pixel count for each color.

371

5. System Maintenance

028 Pixel: Consumption: Bk

*ENG

029 Pixel: Consumption: C

*ENG

030 Pixel: Consumption: M

*ENG

031 Pixel: Consumption: Y

*ENG

[0 to 3000 / 0 / 0.001 g/step]

032-035 Displays the remaining toner amount for each color, using pixel count.

032 Pixel: Remaining : Bk

*ENG

033 Pixel: Remaining : C

*ENG

034 Pixel: Remaining : M

*ENG

035 Pixel: Remaining : Y

*ENG

[-50000 to 600 / 0 / 0.001 g/step]

040-043 Displays the pixel M/A for each color.

040 Pixel M/A: Bk

*ENG

041 Pixel M/A: C

*ENG

042 Pixel M/A: M

*ENG

043 Pixel M/A: Y

*ENG

[0 to 1 / 0.6 / 0.001 mg/cm2/step]

*ENG

Adjusts the delta Vt (Vt Vtref) of toner end

before toner near end is detected.

044 Delta Vt Thresh BF NE

[0 to 1 / 0.05 / 0.001 mg/cm2/step]

[0 to 5 / 0.5 / 0.01 V/step]

045 Delta Vt Sum Thresh BF NE

*ENG

Adjusts the total delta Vt (Vt Vtref) of toner

end before toner near end is detected.
[0 to 255 / 10 / 1 V/step]

046-049 Displays the latest mohno off time.

046 Mohno Off Time: Bk

*ENG

047 Mohno Off Time: C

*ENG

048 Mohno Off Time: M

*ENG

049 Mohno Off Time: Y

*ENG

[0 to 0 x FFFFFFFF / 0 / 1 sec/step]

050-053 Adjusts the threshold of the remaining toner for the toner near-end detection. DFU

372

Main SP Tables-3

050 TE Sn Detect Thresh:Bk

*ENG

051 TE Sn Detect Thresh:C

*ENG

052 TE Sn Detect Thresh:M

*ENG

053 TE Sn Detect Thresh:Y

*ENG

3131

[TE Count: Display]

Display the number of toner end detections for each color.

001 Bk

*ENG

002 C

*ENG

003 M

*ENG

004 Y

*ENG

3201

002 Current: C

*ENG

003 Current: M

*ENG

004 Current: Y

*ENG

[0 to 5.5 / 0.01 / 0.01 V/step]

[Vtcnt: Display/Set]
Displays or adjusts the current Vtcnt value for each color.

001 Current: Bk

*ENG

002 Current: C

*ENG

003 Current: M

*ENG

004 Current: Y

*ENG

008

Display the current voltage of the TD sensor for each color.

*ENG

005-

[0 to 99 / 0 / 1 time/step]

[TD Sensor: Vt Display]

001 Current: Bk

3221

[1 to 600 / 57 / 1 g/step]

[2 to 5 / 4 / 0.01 V/step]

Displays or adjusts the Vtcnt value for each color at developer initialization.

373

5. System Maintenance

005 Initial: Bk

*ENG

006 Initial: C

*ENG

007 Initial: M

*ENG

008 Initial: Y

*ENG

3222

Displays or adjusts the current Vtref value for each color.

*ENG

002 Current: C

*ENG

003 Current: M

*ENG

004 Current: Y

*ENG

008

*ENG

006 Initial: C

*ENG

007 Initial: M

*ENG

008 Initial: Y

*ENG

012

[0 to 5.5 / 3 / 0.01 V/step]

Displays or adjusts Vtref correction by pixel coverage for each color.

009 Pixel Correction: Bk

*ENG

010 Pixel Correction: C

*ENG

011 Pixel Correction: M

*ENG

012 Pixel Correction: Y

*ENG

3223

[0 to 5.5 / 3 / 0.01 V/step]

Displays or adjusts the Vtref value for each color at developer initialization.

005 Initial: Bk

009-

374

[Vtcnt: Display/Set]

001 Current: Bk

005-

[2 to 5 / 4 / 0.01 V/step]

[-5 to 5.5 / 0 / 0.01 V/step]

[-5 to 5 / 0 / 0.01 V/step]

[Vtref U/L-Limit Set]

Adjusts the lower or upper limit value of Vtref for each color.

Main SP Tables-3

001 Lower: Bk

*ENG

002 Lower: C

*ENG

003 Lower: M

*ENG

004 Lower: Y

*ENG

005 Upper: Bk

*ENG

006 Upper: C

*ENG

007 Upper: M

*ENG

008 Upper: Y

*ENG

009 Initial TC

*ENG

010 Upper: TC

*ENG

011 Lower: TC

*ENG

012 Upper Sensitivity

*ENG

013 Lower Sensitivity

*ENG

014 TD Thresh H/M

*ENG

[1 to 10 / 3.5 / 0.1 wt%/step]

015 TD Thresh M/L

*ENG

[1 to 10 / 3.5 / 0.1 wt%/step]

016 UpperTC:K

*ENG

017 UpperTC:C

*ENG

[1 to 15 / 8.5 / 0.1 wt%/step]

018 UpperTC:M

*ENG

Adjusts the upper limit of the toner concentration

for each color.

019 UpperTC:Y

*ENG

3224

[0 to 5 / 2 / 0.01 V/step]

[0 to 5 / 4 / 0.01 V/step]

Adjusts the initial toner concentration.

[1 to 15 / 7 / 0.1 wt%/step]

Adjusts the upper limit of the toner concentration.

[1 to 15 / 8.5 / 0.1 wt%/step]
Adjusts the lower limit of the toner concentration.
[1 to 15 / 4 / 0.1 wt%/step]
Adjusts the upper limit of the TD sensor sensitivity.
[0.2 to 0.5 / 0.44 / 0.001 V/wt% /step]
Adjusts the lower limit of the TD sensor sensitivity.
[0.2 to 0.5 / 0.209 / 0.001 V/wt% /step]

[Vtref Correct: Pixel]

Adjusts the coefficient of Vtref correction for each coverage and color.

375

5. System Maintenance

001 Low Coverage Coeff. Bk

*ENG

002 Low Coverage Coeff.C

*ENG

003 Low Coverage Coeffi.M

*ENG

004 Low Coverage Coeff. Y

*ENG

005 High Coverage Coeff, Bk

*ENG

006 High Coverage Coeff, C

*ENG

007 High Coverage Coeff, M

*ENG

008 High Coverage Coeff, Y

*ENG

009 Low Coverage: Thresh

*ENG

[0 to 5 / 0.2 / 0.1 /step]

[0 to 5 / 0.3 / 0.01 V/step]

Adjusts the threshold of the low

coverage.
[0 to 20 / 3 / 0.1 %/step]

010 High Coverage: Thresh:M

*ENG

Adjusts the threshold of the high

coverage.
[0 to 100 / 60 / 1 %/step]

376

011 TC Upper Limit Correction

*ENG

[0 to 5 / 0.5 / 0.1 wt%/step]

012 TC Upper Limit:Display:Bk

*ENG

013 TC Upper Limit:Display: C

*ENG

014 TC Upper Limit:Display: M

*ENG

015 TC Upper Limit:Display: Y

*ENG

016 Process Control Threshold:M

*ENG

[0 to 255 / 50 / 1 time/step]

017 High Coverage: Threshold:H

*ENG

Adjusts the threshold of the high

coverage.

018 High Coverage: Threshold:L

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 20 / 1 %/step]

019 Process Control Thresh:H

*ENG

020 Process Control Thresh:L

*ENG

021 Initial ProCon Thresh

*ENG

[0 to 255 / 6 / 1 time/step]

022 High Coverage Thresh:LS

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 10 / 1 %/step]

[1 to 15 / 8.5 / 0.1 wt% /step]

[0 to 255 / 14 / 1 time/step]

Main SP Tables-3

023 Process Control Thresh:LS

3236

*ENG

[Toner Supply Consum.: Display]

Displays the toner amount of the latest toner supply for each color.

001 Latest: Bk

*ENG

002 Latest: C

*ENG

003 Latest: M

*ENG

004 Latest: Y

*ENG

3237

Displays the toner amount of the latest toner supply for each color.
*ENG

[0 to 200 / 5 / 1 sec/step]

[Vt Target: Setting]

Displays the Vt target value at developer initialization.

001 Bk

*ENG

002 C

*ENG

003 M

*ENG

004 Y

*ENG

3241

[0 to 40000 / 0 / 0.1 mg/step]

[Developer Agitation Setting]

001 Agitation Time

3238

[0 to 255 / 4 / 1 time/step]

[0 to 5 / 2.7 / 0.01 V/step]

[Background Potential Setting]

001 Coefficient: Bk

*ENG

002 Coefficient: C

*ENG

These are parameters for calculating the charge

bias referring to the development bias at process
control.

003 Coefficient: M

*ENG

[-1000 to 1000 / 0 / 1 /step]

004 Coefficient: Y

*ENG

DC charge bias = Development bias x (1 + 0.001

x these vales) + SP3-241-005 to -008

377

5. System Maintenance

005 Offset: Bk

*ENG

006 Offset: C

*ENG

These are additional values for calculating the

charge bias referring to the development bias at
process control.

007 Offset: M

*ENG

[0 to 255 / 140 / 1 V/step]

008 Offset: Y

*ENG

DC charge bias = Development bias x (1 + 0.001

x SP3-241-001 to -004) + these values

3251

[Coverage]
These (-001 to -016) are coefficients for SP3-222-009 to -012.
001 Latest: Pixcel Bk

*ENG

002 Latest: Pixcel C

*ENG

Displays the latest coverage for each color.

003 Latest: Pixcel M

*ENG

[0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 cm2/step]

004 Latest: Pixcel Y

*ENG

Displays the average coverage of each color for the Vtref correction.
005-008 "Average S" is defined when the number of developed pages does not reach the number
specified with SP3251-017.
005 Average S: Bk

*ENG

006 Average S: C

*ENG

007 Average S: M

*ENG

008 Average S: Y

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 5 / 0.01 %/step]

Displays the average coverage of each color for the Vtref correction.
009-012 "Average M" is defined when the number of developed pages does not reach the number
specified with SP3251-018.
009 Average M: Bk

*ENG

010 Average M: C

*ENG

011 Average M: M

*ENG

012 Average M: Y

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 5 / 0.01 %/step]

Displays the average coverage of each color for the Vtref correction.
013-016 "Average L" is defined when the number of developed pages does not reach the number
specified with SP3-251-019.
378

Main SP Tables-3

013 Average L: Bk

*ENG

014 Average L: C

*ENG

015 Average L: M

*ENG

016 Average L: Y

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 5 / 0.01 %/step]

017-019 Adjusts the threshold for SP3-251-005 to -016.

017 Total Page Setting: S

*ENG

[1 to 100 / 10 / 1 sheet/step]

018 Total Page Setting: M

*ENG

[1 to 500 / 10 / 1 sheet/step]

019 Total Page Setting: L

*ENG

[1 to 999 / 50 / 1 sheet/step]

020-022 Adjusts the threshold for SP3-251-024 to -027.

020 Total Page Setting: S2

*ENG

[1 to 100 / 20 / 1 sheet/step]

021 Total Page Setting: M2

*ENG

[1 to 500 / 10 / 1 sheet/step]

022 Total Page Setting: L2

*ENG

[1 to 999 / 50 / 1 sheet/step]

024-027 Displays the latest coverage ratio for each color.

024 Latest Coverage: Bk

*ENG

025 Latest Coverage: C

*ENG

026 Latest Coverage: M

*ENG

027 Latest Coverage: Y

*ENG

028

3311

[0 to 100 / - / 0.01 %/step]

Displays the threshold of whether to perform developer churning or not.

DevAgi. Theresh BF ProCon

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 20 / 1 %/step]

[ID Sn Detection Value]

Displays the ID sensor (regular) offset voltage for Vsg adjustments.
001 Voffset reg: Bk

*ENG

002 Voffset reg: C

*ENG

003 Voffset reg: M

*ENG

004 Voffset reg: Y

*ENG

[0 to 5 / 0 / 0.01 V/step]

[0 to 5.5 / 0 / 0.01 V/step]

379

5. System Maintenance

005-007 Displays the ID sensor (diffusion) offset voltage for Vsg adjustments.
005 Voffset dif: C

*ENG

006 Voffset dif: M

*ENG

007 Voffset dif: Y

*ENG

[0 to 5.5 / 0 / 0.01 V/step]

008-010 Displays the ID sensor offset voltage for Vsg adjustments.

3321

008 Voffset TM (Front)

*ENG

009 Voffset TM (Center)

*ENG

010 Voffset TM (Rear)

*ENG

[ID/TM Sensor All]

010 P/TM Sensor All

3322

380

Execute the ID sensor initialization setting for all

sensors

[Vsg Adjust. Result: Vsg]

Displays the result value of the Vsg adjustment for each sensor.

001 Vsg reg: Bk

*ENG

002 Vsg reg: C

*ENG

003 Vsg reg: M

*ENG

004 Vsg reg: Y

*ENG

005 Vsg dif: C

*ENG

006 Vsg dif: M

*ENG

007 Vsg dif: Y

*ENG

008 Vsg TM (Front)

*ENG

009 Vsg TM (Center)

*ENG

010 Vsg TM (Rear)

*ENG

3323

[0 to 5.5 / 0 / 0.01 V/step]

[Vsg Adjust. Result: Ifsg]

[0 to 5.5 / 0 / 0.01 V/step]

Main SP Tables-3

001 Ifsg: Bk

*ENG

002 Ifsg: C

*ENG

003 Ifsg: M

*ENG

004 Ifsg: Y

*ENG

005 Ifsg TM (Front)

*ENG

006 Ifsg TM (Center)

*ENG

007 Ifsg TM (Rear)

*ENG

3324

[0 to 50 / 0 / 0.1 mA/step]

[0 to 50 / 0 / 0.1 mA/step]

[Vsg Adjustment: Set]

003 Vsg Error Counter

*ENG

[0 to 99 / 0 / 0.1 time/step]

004 Vofset Threshold

*ENG

[0 to 5 / 1 / 0.01 V/step]

005 Vsg Upper Threshold

*ENG

[0 to 5 / 4.5 / 0.01 V/step]

006 Vsg Lower Threshold

*ENG

[0 to 5 / 3.5 / 0.01 V/step]

[Vsg Adjustment Result]

3325

Displays the result of the Vsg adjustment.

The displayed numbers mean the result of each sensor (sensor for Front, sensor for Bk, sensor
for Cyan, sensor for Center, sensor for Magenta, sensor for Yellow and sensor for Rear).

381

5. System Maintenance

001 Latest

*ENG

002 Latest 1

*ENG

003 Latest 2

*ENG

004 Latest 3

*ENG

005 Latest 4

*ENG

006 Latest 5

*ENG

007 Latest 6

*ENG

008 Latest 7

*ENG

009 Latest 8

*ENG

010 Latest 9

*ENG

3363

[111 to 999 / 999 / 1 /step]

9: Unexpected error
3: Offset voltage error
2: Vsg adjustment value error
1: O.K

[ID Pattern Timing Setting]

001 Scan YCMBk

*ENG

Adjusts the detection timing for the process

control pattern.
[-500 to 500 / 0 / 1 mm/step]

002 Detection Delay Time

*ENG

Adjusts the timing when the paper transfer unit is

kept away from the image transfer belt.
[0 to 2500 / 400 / 1 msec/step]

003 Delay Time

*ENG

Adjusts the processing timing for the process

control pattern.
[0 to 2500 / 1335 / 1 msec/step]

004 MUSIC Delay Time

*ENG

Adjusts the processing timing for the pattern that

is used for the line position adjustment.
[-2500 to 2500 / 300 / 1 msec/step]

3411

382

[Toner Supply Rate: Display]

Displays the current toner supply rate.

Main SP Tables-3

001 Latest: Bk

*ENG

002 Latest: C

*ENG

003 Latest: M

*ENG

004 Latest: Y

*ENG

3421

[0 to 100 / - / 1 %/step]

[Toner Supply Range]

001 Upper Limit: Bk

*ENG

002 Upper Limit: C

*ENG

Adjusts the toner supply rate during printing.

003 Upper Limit: M

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 100 / 1%/step]

004 Upper Limit: Y

*ENG

005 Minimum Supply Time: Bk

*ENG

006 Minimum Supply Time: C

*ENG

Adjusts the minimum toner supply time.

007 Minimum Supply Time: M

*ENG

[0 to 1000 / 0 / 1 msec/step]

008 Minimum Supply Time: Y

*ENG

3501

[Process Control Target M/A]

Adjusts the target M/A of the full coverage in single color printer mode.

001 Maximum M/A: Bk

*ENG

002 Maximum M/A: C

*ENG

003 Maximum M/A: M

*ENG

004 Maximum M/A: Y

*ENG

3510

[0 to 1 / 0.45 / 0.001 mg/cm2/step]

[0 to 1 / 0.445 / 0.001 mg/cm2/step]

[Image Adj. Counter:Display]

Displays the total page counter for each adjustment mode.

383

5. System Maintenance

001 Process Control: BW

*ENG

002 Process Control: FC

*ENG

003 Power ON: BW

*ENG

004 Power ON: FC

*ENG

005 MUSIC: BW

*ENG

006 MUSIC: FC

*ENG

007 Vsg Adj.

*ENG

008 Charge AC Control

*ENG

009 MUSIC: Power ON: BW

*ENG

010 MUSIC: Power ON: FC

*ENG

3511

384

[0 to 2000 / 0 / 1 page/step]

[Execution Interval: Setting]

Adjusts the threshold for each adjustment mode.

001 Job End: Process Control: BW

*ENG

[0 to 2000 / 250 / 1 page/step]

002 Job End: Process Control: FC

*ENG

[0 to 2000 / 100 / 1 page/step]

003 Interrupt: Process Control: BW

*ENG

[0 to 2000 / 500 / 1 page/step]

004 Interrupt: Process Control: FC

*ENG

[0 to 2000 / 200 / 1 page/step]

005 Initial: Potential Control: BW

*ENG

[0 to 2000 / 250 / 1 page/step]

006 Initial: Potential Control: FC

*ENG

[0 to 2000 / 100 / 1 page/step]

007 Vsg Adj. Counter

*ENG

[0 to 2000 / 0 / 1 page/step]

008 Charge AC Control Counter

*ENG

[0 to 2000 / 500 / 1 page/step]

019 Envir.Correction:ON/OFF

*ENG

020 Gamma Correction: ON/OFF

*ENG

021 Non-use Time Correct:ON/OFF

*ENG

022 Correction Coeff. 1: JE: BW

*ENG

[0 to 1 / 0.2 / 0.01 /step]

023 Correction Coeff. 2: JE: BW

*ENG

[0 to 1 / 1 / 0.01/step]

[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: Not Correct (OFF),
1: Correct (ON)

Main SP Tables-3

024 Correction Coeff. 1: JE: FC

*ENG

[0 to 1 / 0.5 / 0.01/step]

025 Correction Coeff. 2: JE: FC

*ENG

[0 to 1 / 1 / 0.01/step]

026 Correction Coeff. 1: Interrupt: BW

*ENG

[0 to 1 / 0.1 / 0.01/step]

027 Correction Coeff. 2: Interrupt: BW

*ENG

[0 to 1 / 1 / 0.01/step]

028 Correction Coeff. 1: Interrupt: FC

*ENG

[0 to 1 / 0.25 / 0.01/step]

029 Correction Coeff. 2: Interrupt: FC

*ENG

[0 to 1 / 1 / 0.01/step]

030 Max. Number Correction Threshold

*ENG

[0 to 99 / 2 / 1/step]

031 Max. Number Correction Counter

*ENG

[0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]

[Image Adj.: Interval]

3512

Adjusts the timing for execution of process control and line position adjustment during printing
or copying.

001 During Job

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 5 / 1 page/step]

002 During Stand-by

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 10 / 1 minute/step]

[PCU Motor Stop Time: Bk]

3513

Displays the last time that the PCU motors stopped.

These are used for process control execution timing.

001 Year

*ENG

[0 to 99 / 0 / 1/step]

002 Month

*ENG

[1 to 12 / 1 / 1/step]

003 Date

*ENG

[1 to 31 / 1 / 1/step]

004 Hour

*ENG

[0 to 23 / 0 / 1/step]

005 Minute

*ENG

[0 to 59 / 0 / 1/step]

[Environmental Displ: Job End]

3514

Displays the environmental conditions at the last job.

These are used for process control execution timing.

001 Temperature

*ENG

[-1280 to 1270 / 0 / 0.1C/step]

385

5. System Maintenance

002 Relative Humidity

*ENG

[0 to 1000 / - / 0.1%RH/step]

003 Absolute Humidity

*ENG

[0 to 1000 / - / 0.1 g/cm3/step]

[Execution Interval: Display]

3515

Displays the current interval for process control execution.

When the machine calculates the timing for process control, it uses a number of conditions.
These are the results after considering all the conditions.

001 Job End: Process Control: BW

*ENG

[0 to 2000 / 250 / 1 page/step]

002 Job End: Process Control: FC

*ENG

[0 to 2000 / 100 / 1 page/step]

003 Interrupt: Process Control: BW

*ENG

[0 to 2000 / 500 / 1 page/step]

004 Interrupt: Process Control: FC

*ENG

[0 to 2000 / 200 / 1 page/step]

[Refresh Mode]
3516

386

While making prints with low coverage, the developer is agitated with less toner consumption
and the toner carrier attraction tends to increase. This may cause low image density or poor
transfer (white dots). To prevent this, the coagulated toner or overcharged toner has to be
consumed by performing the refresh mode.

001 Dev. Motor Rotation: Display: Bk

*ENG

002 Dev. Motor Rotation: Display: C

*ENG

003 Dev. Motor Rotation: Display: M

*ENG

004 Dev. Motor Rotation: Display: Y

*ENG

005 Rotation Threshold

*ENG

[0 to 1000 / 0 / 0.1 m/step]

[0 to 1000 / 0.1 / 1 m/step]

Main SP Tables-3

006 Pixel Coverage Sum: Bk

*ENG

007 Pixel Coverage Sum: C

*ENG

008 Pixel Coverage Sum: M

*ENG

009 Pixel Coverage Sum: Y

*ENG

010 Required Area: Bk

*ENG

011 Required Area: C

*ENG

012 Required Area: M

*ENG

013 Required Area: Y

*ENG

014 Refresh Threshold: Bk

*ENG

015 Refresh Threshold: C

*ENG

016 Refresh Threshold: M

*ENG

017 Refresh Threshold: Y

*ENG

018 Pattern Number: Bk

*ENG

019 Pattern Number: C

*ENG

020 Pattern Number: M

*ENG

021 Pattern Number: Y

*ENG

022 Pattern Number: Upper limit

*ENG

023 Toner Consumption Pattern Area

*ENG

[10 to 2550 / 280 / 10 cm2/

step]

024 Supply Coefficient

*ENG

[0 to 2.55 / 1 / 0.01/step]

025 Job End Area Coefficient

*ENG

[0.1 to 25.5 / 1 / 0.1/step]

026 Job End Vb Coefficient

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 30 / 1%/step]

027 Job End Length

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 19 / 1mm/step]

028 Job End Supply Amt

*ENG

[0 to 1 / 0.45 / 0.001 mg/cm2/

step]

[0 to 65535 / 0 / 1 cm2/step]

[0 to 255 / 49 / 1 cm2/m/step]

[0 to 255 / 25 / 1 cm2/m/step]

[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 time/step]

387

5. System Maintenance

029 Refresh:Page Thresh

*ENG

030 Mode Counter:Bk

*ENG

031 Mode Counter:FC

*ENG

[0 to 1000 / 0 / 1 page/step]

[Blade Damage Prevention]

3517

Adjusts the threshold temperature for preventing the cleaning blade in the transfer belt
cleaning unit from being damaged. If the temperature is above this value, toner is applied
to the transfer belt at set intervals during the job to prevent the blade from flipping over.

001 Execution Temp. Thresh

3518

*ENG

[0 to 50 / 40 / 1C/step]

[Image Adj. Execution Flag] DFU

001 Toner End Recovery: Bk

*ENG

002 Toner End Recovery: C

*ENG

003 Toner End Recovery: M

*ENG

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]

004 Toner End Recovery: Y

*ENG

0: OFF. 1: ON

005 Vsg Adjustment

*ENG

006 Developer Agitation

*ENG

007 Process Control

*ENG

008 MUSIC

*ENG

009 Drum Phase Adj.

*ENG

010 Charge AC Control

*ENG

011 Blade Damage Prevention

*ENG

[0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step]
0: OFF. 1: ON (once), 2: ON (twice)
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step]
0: OFF. 1: ON (once), 2: ON (twice)
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0: OFF. 1: ON
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
Sets "1", when the following values shows.

012 Vsg Average Error

*ENG

Vsg_reg_ave:
3.5 < Vsg_reg_ave < 4.5 or Vsg_dif_ave:
0.0 < Vsg_dif_ave < 0.5

388

Main SP Tables-3

3519

[Toner End Prohibition Setting]

Enables or disables each adjustment at toner end.

001 Process Control

*ENG

[0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step]

002 MUSIC

*ENG

0: Permit (adjustment is done even toner end

condition)

003 TC Adjustment

*ENG

1: Forbid (adjustment is not done at toner end

condition)

3520

[ITB Idle Rotation]

001 Temperature: High

*ENG

002 Temperature: Medium

*ENG

Specifies the idle rotation times of the ITB

after the process control.

003 Temperature: Low

*ENG

[0 or 3 / 0 / 1 revolution/step]

004 Temp.: L: Power ON

*ENG

005 to
Adjusts the threshold temperature for entering the ITB idle rotation after the process control.
011
005 Temp. Range Thresh:T2

*ENG

[20 or 30 / 30 / 1 deg/step]

006 Temp. Range Thresh:T1

*ENG

[0 or 15 / 15 / 1 deg/step]

010 Temp. Thresh:High

*ENG

[0 or 50 / 30 / 1 deg/step]

011 Temp. Thresh:Low

*ENG

[0 or 50 / 15 / 1 deg/step]

[Initial Process Control Setting]

3522

Adjusts the threshold for the process control at power on.

When the current condition has changed by more than the values of these SPs when
compared with the conditions at the previous operation, the process control at power on is
executed.

002 Non-use Time Setting

*ENG

[0 to 1440 / 360 / 1 minute/step]

003 Temp. Change Thresh

*ENG

[0 to 99 / 10 / 1C/step]

004 Relative Humidity Range

*ENG

[0 to 99 / 50 / 1 %RH/step]

005 Absolute Humidity Range

*ENG

[0 to 99 / 6 / 1 g/m3/step]

389

5. System Maintenance

[Rapi Timer]
100 Time Setting

*ENG

[0 to 255 / 30 / 1 sec/step]

Adjusts the time-out time to get the Rapi timer.

[Non-use Time Process Control Setting]
3531

Adjusts the threshold for the process control at stand-by.

When the current condition has changed by more than the values of these SPs when
compared with the conditions at the previous operation, the process control at stand-by is
executed.

001 Non-use Time Setting

*ENG

[0 to 1440 / 360 / 1 minute/step]

002 Temp. Change Thresh

*ENG

[0 to 99 / 10 / 1C/step]

003 Relative Humidity Change

*ENG

[0 to 99 / 50 / 1 %RH/step]

004 Absolute Humidity Change

*ENG

[0 to 99 / 6 / 1 g/m3/step]

*ENG

Adjusts the maximum execution time for the

process control at stand-by.

005 Maximum Execution Number

[0 to 99 / 10 / 1 time/step]
3611

390

[Dev. Gamma: Display/Set]

001 Bk (Current)

*ENG

002 C (Current)

*ENG

003 M (Current)

*ENG

004 Y (Current)

*ENG

005 Bk (Target Display)

*ENG

006 C (Target Display)

*ENG

007 M (Target Display)

*ENG

008 Y (Target Display)

*ENG

Displays the current development gamma for Bk

[0 to 5 / 0.9 / 0.01 mg/cm2/kV /step]
Displays the current development gamma for C/
M/Y.
[0 to 5 / 0.8 / 0.01 mg/cm2/kV /step]
Displays the target development gamma for Bk.
[0 to 5 / 0.9 / 0.01 mg/cm2/kV /step]
Displays the target development gamma for C/
M/Y.
[0 to 5 / 0.8 / 0.01 mg/cm2/kV /step]

Main SP Tables-3

009 Bk (Standard Target Set)

*ENG

Displays the standard target development

gamma for each color.
[0 to 5 / 0.9 / 0.01 mg/cm2/kV /step]

010 C (Standard Target Set)

*ENG

011 M (Standard Target Set)

*ENG

012 Y (Standard Target Set)

*ENG

013 Environmental Correction

*ENG

[0 to 5 / 0.8 / 0.01 mg/cm2/kV /step]

Turns on or off the environmental correction for

target development gamma.
[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
0: Not Correct, 1: Correct

014 K (Max Correction)

*ENG

015 C (Max Correction)

*ENG

016 M (Max Correction)

*ENG

017 Y (Max Correction)

*ENG

018 K (Max Abs Hum)

*ENG

019 C (Max Abs Hum)

*ENG

020 M (Max Abs Hum)

*ENG

021 Y (Max Abs Hum)

*ENG

3612

5
[0 to 5 / 0.1 / 0.01 mg/cm2/kv/step]

[1 to 99 / 15 / 1 g/m3/step]

[Vk Display]
Displays Vk for each color.

001 Bk

*ENG

002 C

*ENG

003 M

*ENG

004 Y

*ENG

[-300 to 300 / - / 1 V/step]

391

5. System Maintenance

[Dev. DC Control:Display]
3621

Normal: 120 mm/sec, Low: 70 mm/sec

Displays the development DC bias adjusted with the process control for each line speed and
color.

001 Normal Speed:Bk

*ENG

002 Normal Speed:C

*ENG

003 Normal Speed:M

*ENG

004 Normal Speed:Y

*ENG

009 Low Speed:Bk

*ENG

010 Low Speed:C

*ENG

011 Low Speed:M

*ENG

012 Low Speed:Y

*ENG

[0 to 700 / 550 / 1 -V/step]

[Charge DC Control: Display]

3631

Normal: 120 mm/sec, Low: 60 mm/sec

Displays the charge DC voltage adjusted with the process control for each line speed and
color.

392

001 Normal Speed:Bk

*ENG

002 Normal Speed:C

*ENG

003 Normal Speed:M

*ENG

004 Normal Speed:Y

*ENG

009 Low Speed:Bk

*ENG

010 Low Speed:C

*ENG

011 Low Speed:M

*ENG

012 Low Speed:Y

*ENG

[0 to 2000 / 690 / 1 -V/step]

Main SP Tables-3

[Charge DC Control: Display]

3641

Normal: 120 mm/sec

Displays the charge AC voltage adjusted with the process control for each color.

001 Normal Speed:Bk

*ENG

002 Normal Speed:C

*ENG

003 Normal Speed:M

*ENG

004 Normal Speed:Y

*ENG

[0 to 3 / 1.75 / 0.01 kV/step]

[LD Power Control: Display]

3651

Normal: 120 mm/sec, Low: 60 mm/sec

Displays the LD power adjusted for each environment.

001 Normal Speed:Bk

*ENG

002 Normal Speed:C

*ENG

003 Normal Speed:M

*ENG

004 Normal Speed:Y

*ENG

009 Low Speed:Bk

*ENG

010 Low Speed:C

*ENG

011 Low Speed:M

*ENG

012 Low Speed:Y

*ENG

3711

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 %/step]

[HST Control: Bk]

Displays the factory settings of the black PCU.

001 Vcnt

*ENG

[0 to 5 / 4 / 0.1 V/step]

002 Vt

*ENG

[0 to 5 / 2.5 / 0.1 V/step]

003 Sensitivity: HL

*ENG

[1.22 to 3.77 / 2.5 / 0.01 V/step]

004 Sensitivity: HM

*ENG

[0 to 2.55 / 1.3 / 0.01 V/step]

005 Sensitivity: ML

*ENG

[0 to 2.55 / 1.2 / 0.01 V/step]

393

5. System Maintenance

006 Set Detection

*ENG

[0 to 5 / 1 / 0.1 V/step]

007 Without Developer

*ENG

[0 to 5 / 1.2 / 0.1 V/step]

008 With Developer

*ENG

[0 to 5 / 1.3 / 0.1 V/step]

009 Serial Number 1

*ENG

010 Serial Number 2

*ENG

011 Adjustment: Vt

*ENG

012 Adjustment: Vtref

*ENG

013 Adjustment: Vtcnt

*ENG

[0 to 5 / 4 / 0.01 V/step]

014 Adjustment: Gamma

*ENG

[0 to 2.55 / 0 / 0.01 mg/cm2/kV /step]

015 Adjustment: Vcnt Result

*ENG

[0 to 9 / 9 / 1 /step]

3712

394

[0 to 255 / - / 1 V/step]

[0 to 5 / 3 / 0.1 V/step]

[HST Control: C]
Displays the factory settings of the magenta PCU.

001 Vcnt

*ENG

[0 to 5 / 4 / 0.1 V/step]

002 Vt

*ENG

[0 to 5 / 2.5 / 0.1 V/step]

003 Sensitivity: HL

*ENG

[1.22 to 3.77 / 2.5 / 0.01 V/step]

004 Sensitivity: HM

*ENG

[0 to 2.55 / 1.3 / 0.01 V/step]

005 Sensitivity: ML

*ENG

[0 to 2.55 / 1.2 / 0.01 V/step]

006 Set Detection

*ENG

[0 to 5 / 1 / 0.1 V/step]

007 Without Developer

*ENG

[0 to 5 / 1.2 / 0.1 V/step]

008 With Developer

*ENG

[0 to 5 / 1.3 / 0.1 V/step]

009 Serial Number 1

*ENG

010 Serial Number 2

*ENG

011 Adjustment: Vt

*ENG

012 Adjustment: Vtref

*ENG

013 Adjustment: Vtcnt

*ENG

[0 to 255 / - / 1 V/step]

[0 to 5 / 3 / 0.1 V/step]
[0 to 5 / 4 / 0.01 V/step]

Main SP Tables-3

014 Adjustment: Gamma

*ENG

[0 to 2.55 / 0 / 0.01 mg/cm2/kV /step]

015 Adjustment: Vcnt Result

*ENG

[0 to 9 / 9 / 1 /step]

3713

[HST Control: M]
Displays the factory settings of the cyan PCU.

001 Vcnt

*ENG

[0 to 5 / 4 / 0.1 V/step]

002 Vt

*ENG

[0 to 5 / 2.5 / 0.1 V/step]

003 Sensitivity: HL

*ENG

[1.22 to 3.77 / 2.1 / 0.01 V/step]

004 Sensitivity: HM

*ENG

[0 to 2.55 / 1.3 / 0.01 V/step]

005 Sensitivity: ML

*ENG

[0 to 2.55 / 1.2 / 0.01 V/step]

006 Set Detection

*ENG

[0 to 5 / 1 / 0.1 V/step]

007 Without Developer

*ENG

[0 to 5 / 1.2 / 0.1 V/step]

008 With Developer

*ENG

[0 to 5 / 1.3 / 0.1 V/step]

009 Serial Number 1

*ENG

010 Serial Number 2

*ENG

011 Adjustment: Vt

*ENG

012 Adjustment: Vtref

*ENG

013 Adjustment: Vtcnt

*ENG

[0 to 5 / 4 / 0.01 V/step]

014 Adjustment: Gamma

*ENG

[0 to 2.55 / 0 / 0.01 mg/cm2/kV /step]

015 Adjustment: Vcnt Result

*ENG

[0 to 9 / 9 / 1 /step]

3714

[0 to 255 / - / 1 V/step]

[0 to 5 / 3 / 0.1 V/step]

[HST Control:Y]
Displays the factory settings of the yellow PCU.

001 Vcnt

*ENG

[0 to 5 / 4 / 0.1 V/step]

002 Vt

*ENG

[0 to 5 / 2.5 / 0.1 V/step]

003 Sensitivity: HL

*ENG

[1.22 to 3.77 / 2.5 / 0.01 V/step]

004 Sensitivity: HM

*ENG

[0 to 2.55 / 1.3 / 0.01 V/step]

395

5. System Maintenance

005 Sensitivity: ML

*ENG

[0 to 2.55 / 1.2 / 0.01 V/step]

006 Set Detection

*ENG

[0 to 5 / 1 / 0.1 V/step]

007 Without Developer

*ENG

[0 to 5 / 1.2 / 0.1 V/step]

008 With Developer

*ENG

[0 to 5 / 1.3 / 0.1 V/step]

009 Serial Number 1

*ENG

010 Serial Number 2

*ENG

011 Adjustment: Vt

*ENG

012 Adjustment: Vtref

*ENG

013 Adjustment: Vtcnt

*ENG

[0 to 5 / 4 / 0.01 V/step]

014 Adjustment: Gamma

*ENG

[0 to 2.55 / 0 / 0.01 mg/cm2/kV /step]

015 Adjustment: Vcnt Result

*ENG

[0 to 9 / 9 / 1 /step]

3800

[0 to 255 / - / 1 V/step]

[0 to 5 / 3 / 0.1 V/step]

[Toner Collection Bttl Full]

Displays/ adjusts the PCDU toner collection bottle detection settings.
Condition

*CTL

[0 to 4 / 0 / 1 /step]

001 Displays the current condition of the PCDU toner collection bottle.
0: Factory default, 1: Before near full, 2; Near full, 3: Full, 4: Reserved
002 Detection Times

*CTL

003 Print Page AF Near Full

*CTL

004 Pixel Count AF Near Full

*CTL

Not used
[0 to 50 / - / 1 /step]
Not used
[0 to 2000 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]
Not used
[0 to 200000 / - / 1 cm2/step]
Not used

005 Pixel Count AF Replacement

*CTL

Displays the pixel counter after replacement of

toner collection bottle.
[0 to 200000 / - / 1 cm2/step]

396

Main SP Tables-3

008

Coefficient

*ENG

[0.1 to 1 / 1 / 0.1 /step]

Adjusts the toner amount between near full and full. (0.1 indicates 10%.)
Enables or disables the calling for @Remote.
Alarm Setting

*ENG

[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
0: Enable @Remote calling
1: Disable @Remote calling

011
NOTE:

If the PCDU toner collection bottle has been replaced before the machine detects used toner
near full when this setting is set to "0", the machine cannot detect toner collection bottle near
full. In that case, set SP3-902-017 to "1".
Day Thresh:NF

*ENG

[1 to 30 / 10 / 1 day/step]

012 Sets the threshold days for the near-full display. The near-full of the PCDU toner collection
bottle is displayed after the toner collection full sensor has detected the actuator in the PCDU
toner collection bottle.

013 Total Collected Toner

*ENG

Displays the total amount from the near full

detection.
[0 to 999999999 / 1 / 1]

014 Full Detection Date

3810

*ENG

Displays the date of the near full detection for

the PCDU toner collection bottle.

[ITB T-Collection Bttl Full]

Condition

*CTL

[0 to 4 / 0 / 1 /step]

001 Displays the current condition of the ITB toner collection bottle.
0: Factory default, 1: Before near full, 2; Near full, 3: Full, 4: Reserved
002 Detection Times

*CTL

003 Print Page AF Near Full

*CTL

004 Pixel Count AF Near Full

*CTL

Not used
[0 to 50 / - / 1 /step]
Not used
[0 to 2000 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]
Not used
[0 to 200000 / - / 1 cm2/step]

397

5. System Maintenance

Not used
005 Pixel Count AF Replacement

*CTL

Displays the pixel counter after replacement of

toner collection bottle.
[0 to 200000 / - / 1 cm2/step]

008

Coefficient

*ENG

[0.1 to 1 / 1 / 0.1 /step]

Adjusts the toner amount between near full and full. (0.1 indicates 10%.)
Enables or disables the calling for @Remote.
Alarm Setting

*ENG

[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
0: Enable @Remote calling
1: Disable @Remote calling

011
NOTE:

If the toner collection bottle has been replaced before the machine detects used toner near
full when this setting is set to "0", the machine cannot detect toner collection bottle near full.
In that case, set SP3-902-017 to "1".
Day Thresh:NF

*ENG

[1 to 30 / 10 / 1 day/step]

012 Sets the threshold days for the near-full display. The near-full of the IT toner collection bottle
is displayed after the toner collection full sensor has detected the actuator in the ITB toner
collection bottle.

013 Total Collected Toner

*ENG

Displays the total amount from the near full

detection.
[0 to 999999999 / 1 / 1]

014 Full Detection Date

3901

Displays the date of the near full detection fot the

ITB toner collection bottle.

[New Unit Detection]

Turns new PCU detection on or off.

001 ON/OFF Setting

398

*ENG

*ENG

[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
0: OFF, 1: ON

Main SP Tables-3

[Manual New Unit Set]

3902

Turns the new unit detection flag for each PM unit on or off.
The use of these counters is explained in the PM section and in the relevant parts of section
3 (Replacement and Adjustment).

001 Development Unit: Bk

*ENG

002 Development Unit: C

*ENG

[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]

003 Development Unit: M

*ENG

0: OFF, 1: ON

004 Development Unit: Y

*ENG

005 Developer: Bk

*ENG

006 Developer: C

*ENG

007 Developer: M

*ENG

008 Developer: Y

*ENG

009 PCU: Bk

*ENG

010 PCU: C

*ENG

[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]

011 PCU: M

*ENG

0: OFF, 1: ON

012 PCU: Y

*ENG

013 ITB Unit

*ENG

014 Fusing Unit

*ENG

0: OFF, 1: ON

015 Fusing Pad

*ENG

Do not use 3902-013 if you only change the

cleaning unit.

016 Fusing Belt

*ENG

017 ITB Cleaning Unit

*ENG

3902-017: This is for the image transfer belt

cleaning unit.

018 PTR Unit

*ENG

019 PCU Toner Collection Bottle

*ENG

020 ITB Toner Collection Bottle

*ENG

Not used
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
0: OFF, 1: ON

[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]

[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
0: OFF, 1: ON

399

5. System Maintenance

Main SP Tables-4
SP4-XXX (Scanner)

4008

[Sub Scan Mag. Adjustment]

Adjusts the sub-scan magnification by changing the scanner motor speed.

001 SScan Mag.Adjust

*ENG

[-1.0 to 1.0 / 0 / 0.1%/step] FA

[L-Edge Regist Adjustment]

4010

Adjusts the leading edge registration by changing the scanning start timing in the sub-scan
direction.

001 LE Regist Adjust

*ENG

[-2.0 to 2.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step] FA

[S-to-S Regist Adjustment]

4011

Adjusts the side-to-side registration by changing the scanning start timing in the main scan
direction.

001 StoS Rgst Adjust

*ENG

[-2.5 to 2.5 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ] FA

[Scanner Erase Margin: Scale] Scanner: Erase Margin: Scale

4012

Sets the blank margin at each side for erasing the original shadow caused by the gap
between the original and the scale.

001 Book: Leading Edge

002 Book: Trailing Edge
003 Book: Left

*ENG

[0 to 3.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ] FA

*ENG

[0 to 3.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ] FA

004 Book: Right

005 ADF: Leading Edge
007 ADF: Left
008 ADF: Right

400

Main SP Tables-4

[Scanner Free Run]

4013

Performs the scanner free run with the exposure lamp on or off in the following mode.
Full color mode / Full Size / A3 or DLT

001 Lamp: OFF

002 Lamp: ON

4014

*ENG

[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
0: OFF, 1: ON

[Scan]
Execute the scanner free fun with each mode.

001 HP Detection Enable

Scanner free run with HP sensor check.

002 HP Detection Disable

Scanner free run without HP sensor check.

4020

[Dust Check]
Turns the ADF scan glass dust check on/ off.

001 Detection: ON/OFF

*ENG

[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: OFF, 1: ON
Selects the detect level.

002 Dust Detection: Level

*ENG

[0 to 8 / 4 / 1 /step]
0: lowest detection level
8: highest detection level
Selects the level of the sub scan line correction
when using the ARDF.
[0 to 4 / 0 / 1 /step]

003 Correction Level

*ENG

0: Off
1: Weakest
2: Weak
3: Strong
4: Strongest

401

5. System Maintenance

[APS Operation Check]

4301

Displays a code that represents the original size detected by the original sensors. (See "Input
Check Table".)

001 APS Operation Check

4303

[APS Min Size]

Specifies the result of the detection when the outputs from the original sensors are all OFF.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]

001 APS Min. Size

*ENG

0: No Original
1: A5-Lengthwise (16K SEF if 4305 is set to 3)

[0 to 3 / 0 / 1 /step]

4305

[8K/16K Detection]

*ENG

0: Normal Detection (the machine detects A4/LT

size as A4 or LT, depending on the paper size
setting)
1: A4-Sideways LT-Lengthwise
2: LT-Sideways A4-Lengthwise
3: 8K 16K

001 This program enables the machine to automatically recognize the 8K/16K size.
4308

[Scan Size Detection]

001 Detect: ON/OFF

4309

402

*ENG

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: ON, 1: OFF

[Scan Size Detect Setting] DFU

001 Original Density Thresh

*ENG

[0 to 255 / 32 / 1 digit /step]

002 Detection Time

*ENG

[20 to 100 / 60 / 20 msec /step]

003 Lamp ON:Delay Time

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 40 / 20 msec /step]

Main SP Tables-4

[Scanner Erase Margin]

4400

*ENG

Set the Mask for Original.

These SPs set the area to be masked during platen (book) mode scanning.
001 Book: Leading Edge
002 Book: Trailing Edge
003 Book: Left
004 Book: Right

[0 to 3.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step]

005 ADF: Leading Edge

007 ADF: Left

008 ADF: Right

4417

[IPU Test Pattern]

Selects the IPU test pattern.

001 Test Pattern Selection

0: Scanned image
1: Gradation main scan A
2: Gradation main scan B
3: Gradation main scan C
4: Gradation main scan D
5: Gradation sub scan (1)
6: Grid pattern
7: Slant grid pattern
8: Gradation RGBCMYK
9: UCR pattern
10: Color patch 16 (1)
11: Color patch 16 (2)
12: Color patch 64
4429

[0 to 24 / 0 / 1/step ]
13: Grid pattern CMYK
14: Color patch CMYK
15: Gray pattern (1)
16: Gray pattern (2)
17: Gray Pattern (3)
18: Shading pattern
19: Thin line pattern
20: Scanned + Grid pattern
21: Scanned + Gray scale
22: Scanned + Color patch
23: Scanned + Slant Grid C
24: Scanned + Slant Grid D

[Illegal Copy Output]

403

5. System Maintenance

001 Copy
002 Scanner

*ENG

[0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]

003 Fax

4440

[Saturation Adjustment]
Adjusts the level of saturation for copying.
[0 to 5 / 3 / 1 /step]
0: High
1: Lowest

001 -

*ENG

2: Lower
3: Default
4: Higher
5: Highest

4450
001

002

[Scan Image Path Selection]

Black Subtraction ON/OFF

[0 or 1 / 1 / - ] 0: OFF, 1: ON

Uses or does not use the black reduction image path.

SH ON/OFF

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step] 0: ON, 1: OFF

Uses or does not use the shading image path.

[Digital AE Set] DFU

4460

001 Lower Limit

*ENG

[0 to 1023 / 364 / 4 digit/step]

002 Background Level

*ENG

[512 to 1532 / 932 / 1 digit/step]

4501

404

Specifies the level of deleting the background in the ADS mode. You can adjust its level for
each scanning method (platen, ADF).

[ACC Target Density]

Selects the ACC target.

Main SP Tables-4

001 Copy: Bk: Text

*ENG

002 Copy: C: Text

*ENG

003 Copy: M: Text

*ENG

004 Copy: Y: Text

*ENG

[0 to 10 / 5 / 1 /step]

005 Copy: Bk: Photo

*ENG

10: Darkest density

006 Copy: C: Photo

*ENG

007 Copy: M: Photo

*ENG

008 Copy: Y: Photo

*ENG

4505

[ACC Correction:Bright]
Adjusts the offset correction for light areas of the ACC pattern.

001 Master:K

*ENG

002 Master:C

*ENG

003 Master:M

*ENG

004 Master:Y

*ENG

005 Slave:K

*ENG

006 Slave:C

*ENG

007 Slave:M

*ENG

008 Slave:Y

*ENG

4506

[-128 to 127 / 0 / 1 /step]

Reserved

[ACC Correction: Dark]

Adjusts the offset correction for dark areas of the ACC pattern.

001 Master:K

*ENG

002 Master:C

*ENG

003 Master:M

*ENG

004 Master:Y

*ENG

[-128 to 127 / 0 / 1 /step]

405

5. System Maintenance

005 Slave:K

*ENG

006 Slave:C

*ENG

007 Slave:M

*ENG

008 Slave:Y

*ENG

4550

[Scanner Appl.:Text/Chart]

4551

[Scanner Appl.: Text]

4552

[Scanner Appl.:Txt Dropout]

4553

[Scanner Appl.:Text/Photo]

4554

[Scanner Appl.: Photo]

4565

[Scanner Appl.: GrayScale]

4570

[Scan Appl.: Color: Text-Photo]

4571

[Scan Appl.: Color: Glossy Photo]

4572

[Scan Appl.: Color: AutoColor]

MTF: 0 (Off), 1-15 (Strong)

Reserved

*ENG

-005

[0 to 15 / 8 / 1 /step]
0: MTF Off

Sets the MTF level (Modulation Transfer Function) designed to improve image contrast. Set
higher for stronger effect, lower for weaker effect.
-006

-007

-008

Smoothing: 0 (x1), 1-7 (Strong)

*ENG

[0 to 7 / 4 / 1 /step]

Use to remove "jaggies" if they appear. Set higher for smoother images.
Brightness: 1255

*ENG

[1 to 255 / 128 / 1 /step]

*ENG

[1 to 255 / 128 / 1 /step]

Set higher for darker, set lower for lighter.

Contrast: 1255

Set higher for more contrast, set lower for less contrast.
I-Dot Erase :0 (x1) 1-7 (Strong)

*ENG

[0 to 7 / 0 / 1 /step]

-009 Sets the erasure level of Irregular Dots. Set higher for stronger effect, lower for weaker effect.
0: Not activated

406

Main SP Tables-4

4580

[FAX Appl.: Text/Chart]

4582

[FAX Appl.: Text/Photo]

4583

[FAX Appl.: Photo]

MTF: 0 (Off), 1-15 (Strong)

*ENG

-005

[0 to 15 / 8 / 1 /step]
0: MTF Off

Sets the MTF level (Modulation Transfer Function) designed to improve image contrast. Set
higher for stronger effect, lower for weaker effect.
-006

-007

-008

Smoothing: 0 (x1), 1-7 (Strong)

*ENG

[0 to 7 / 4 / 1 /step]

Use to remove "jaggies" if they appear. Set higher for smoother images.
Brightness: 1255

*ENG

[1 to 255 / 128 / 1 /step]

*ENG

[1 to 255 / 128 / 1 /step]

Set higher for darker, set lower for lighter.

Contrast: 1255

Set higher for more contrast, set lower for less contrast.
I-Dot Erase:0 (x1), 1-7 (Strong)

*ENG

[0 to 7 / 0 / 1 /step]

-009 Selects the contrast level for B/W the Text mode. Sets the erasure level of Irregular Dots. Set
higher for stronger effect, lower for weaker effect.
0: Not activated
Texture Erase:0 (Fix), 1-2

*ENG

[0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step]

-010 Sets the erasure level of textures. Set higher for stronger effect, lower for weaker effect. This
SP (suffix "-010") only exists in SP4580, 4582 and 4583.
0: Not activated
4581

[FAX Appl.: Text]

4584

[FAX Appl.: Original 1]

4585

[FAX Appl.: Original 2]

MTF: 0 (Off), 1-15 (Strong)

-005

*ENG

[0 to 15 / 8 / 1 /step]
0: MTF Off

Sets the MTF level (Modulation Transfer Function) designed to improve image contrast. Set
higher for stronger effect, lower for weaker effect.
407

5. System Maintenance

-006

-007

-008

Smoothing: 0 (x1), 1-7 (Strong)

*ENG

[0 to 7 / 4 / 1 /step]

Use to remove "jaggies" if they appear. Set higher for smoother images.
Brightness: 1255

*ENG

[1 to 255 / 128 / 1 /step]

Set higher for darker, set lower for lighter.

Contrast: 1255

*ENG

[1 to 255 / 128 / 1 /step]

Set higher for more contrast, set lower for less contrast.
I-Dot Erase:0 (x1), 1-7 (Strong)

*ENG

[0 to 7 / 0 / 1 /step]

-009 Selects the contrast level for B/W the Text mode. Sets the erasure level of Irregular Dots. Set
higher for stronger effect, lower for weaker effect.
0: Not activated

5
4647

[Scanner Hard Error]

Displays the result of the SBU connection check.
[0 to 65535 / 0 / 1 /step]

001 Power-ON

0: OK, Other: SBU connection check failure

If the SBU connection check fails, SC144 occurs.

[DF: Density Adjustment]

4688

Adjusts the white shading parameter when scanning an image with the ARDF.
Adjusts the density level if the ID of outputs made in the DF and Platen mode is different.

001 4802

*ENG

[DF Shading FreeRun]

001 Lamp OFF

002 Lamp ON

4804

Executes the scanner free run of shading movement

with exposure lamp on or off.
Press "OFF" to stop this free run. Otherwise, the free
run lasts.

[Home Position Opetation]

001 -

408

[50 to 150 / 107 / 1%/ step ]

Executes the scanner HP detection.

Main SP Tables-4

4806

[Carriage Move]
Moves the carriage from the scanner home position.

001 -

4807

Dust may fall through the DF exposure glass.

Therefore, do this SP when you transport the
machine a long distance.

[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]

[SBU Test Pattern Change]

Selects the SBU test pattern.
0: Normal output

001 1: Fixed value output

2: Main scan gradation

3: Sub scan gradation
4: Grid pattern
[ACC Data Display]
4902

This SP outputs the final data read at the end of ACC execution.
A zero is returned if there was an error reading the data.
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]

001 R DATA1

*ENG

Photo C Patch Level 1 (8-bit)

002 G DATA1

*ENG

Photo M Patch Level 1 (8-bit)

003 B DATA1

*ENG

Photo Y Patch Level 1 (8-bit)

004 R DATA2

*ENG

Photo C Patch Level 17 (8-bit)

005 G DATA2

*ENG

Photo M Patch Level 17(8-bit)

006 B DATA2

*ENG

Photo Y Patch Level 17 (8-bit)

4904

[IPU Board Test]

409

5. System Maintenance

Bit0: TAURUS register

Bit1: ORION register
Bit2: LUPUS register
001

Test1

Bit3 to 11: Not used

Bit12: Ri20
Bit13 to 15: Not used
0: OK, 1: Error

Performs a write and read check of the ASICs on the BCU board and displays the result.
Bit0: Image path from SBU to TAURUS
Bit1: Image path from TAURUS to ORION
Bit2: Image path from ORION to TAURUS

Bit3: Image path from TAURUS to LUPUS

002

Test2

Bit4 to 11: Not used

Bit12: Image path from LUPUS to Ri20
Bit13: Image path from Ri20 to GAVD
Bit14 and 15: Not used
0: OK, 1: Error

Performs an image path check on the BCU board and displays the result.
4918

[Man Gamma Adj]

009 -

4993

Adjusts the manual gamma for Copy/Photo or

Copy/Text with the soft keys on the operation
panel.

[High Light Correction]

Selects the Highlight correction level.

001 Sensitivity Selection

*ENG

[0 to 9 / 4 / 1 /step]
0: weakest sensitivity
9: strongest sensitivity

410

Main SP Tables-4

Selects the range level of Highlight correction.

002 Range Selection

*ENG

[0 to 9 / 4 / 1 /step]
0: weakest skew correction,
9: strongest skew correction

4994

[Text/Photo Detection Level Adj.]

Selects the definition level between Text and Photo for high compression PDF.
[0 to 2 / 1 / 1 /step]

001 High Compression PDF

*ENG

0: Text priority
1: Normal
2: Photo priority

[White Paper Detect Level]

4996

Selects the threshold level of the original background density. Increasing this threshold level
machine easily judge that an original is white.
[0 to 6 / 3 / 1 /step]

001 -

*ENG

0: lightest
6: Darkest

411

5. System Maintenance

Main SP Tables-5
SP5-XXX (Mode)

5024

[mm/inch Display Selection]

Display units (mm or inch) for custom paper sizes.

001 0:mm 1:inch

*CTL

0: mm (Europe/Asia)
1: inch (USA)

[Accounting Counter]

5045

Selects the counting method.

NOTE: The counting method can be changed only once, regardless of whether the counter
value is negative or positive.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]

001 Counter Method

*CTL

0: Developments
1: Prints

5047

[Paper Display]
Turns on or off the printed paper display on the LCD.

001 Backing Paper

5051

*CTL

[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
0: OFF, 1: ON

[Toner Refill Detection Display]

Enables or disables the toner refill detection display.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ] Alphanumeric

5051 1 -

*CTL

0: ON
1: OFF

5055

412

[Display IP Address]
Display or does not display the IP address on the LCD.

Main SP Tables-5

001 -

5056

0: OFF 1: ON

Display or does not display the coverage counter on the LCD.

*CTL

[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
0: Not display, 1: Display

[Toner Remaining Icon Display Change]

Display or does not display the remaining toner display icon on the LCD.

001 -

5062

[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]

[Coverage Counter Display]

001 -

5061

*CTL

*CTL

[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
0: Not display, 1: Display

[Parts PM System Setting]

Display or does not display the PM part yield on the LCD.

001 PCU:Bk

*CTL

002 PCU:M

*CTL

003 PCU:C

*CTL

004 PCU:Y

*CTL

005 Dev Unit:Bk

*CTL

006 Dev Unit:M

*CTL

[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]

007 Dev Unit:C

*CTL

0: Not display, 1: Display

008 Dev Unit:Y

*CTL

009 Fusing Unit

*CTL

010 Fusing Roller

*CTL

011 Fusing Belt

*CTL

012 PCU Toner Collection Bottle

*CTL

413

5. System Maintenance

5066

[Parts PM Menu Display Setting] Not used

001 -

*CTL

[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
0: Not display, 1: Display

[Parts PM System Setting]

5067

Selects the service maintenance or user maintenance for each PM parts.

If the user service is selected, PM alart is displayed on the LCD.

001 PCU:Bk

*CTL

002 PCU:M

*CTL

003 PCU:C

*CTL

004 PCU:Y

*CTL

005 Dev Unit:Bk

*CTL

006 Dev Unit:M

*CTL

007 Dev Unit:C

*CTL

008 Dev Unit:Y

*CTL

009 Fusing Unit

*CTL

010 Fusing Roller

*CTL

011 Fusing Belt

*CTL

012 PCU Toner Collection Bottle

*CTL

5104

[0: Service] or [1: User]

[0: Service] or [1: User]

[0: Service] or [1: User]

[A3/DLT Double Count] SSP

[0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step]
PCU:Bk

001

*CTL

0: No
1: Yes
2: Yes except By-pass

Specifies whether the counter is doubled for A3/DLT. "Yes" counts except from the bypass
tray. When "Yes" is selected, A3 and DLT paper are counted twice, that is A4 x2 and LT x2
respectively.

414

Main SP Tables-5

5113

[Optional Counter Type]

This program specifies the counter type.
0: None, 1: Key card (RK 3, 4)

001

Default Optional Counter

Type

*CTL

2: Key card (down), 3: Prepaid card

4: Coin rack, 5: MF key card
8: Key counter + Vendor
9: Bar-code Printer
This program specifies the external counter type.

External Optional Counter

002
Type

0: None
*CTL

1: Expansion Device 1
2: Expansion Device 2
3: Expansion Device 3

5114

[Optional Counter I/F]

001 MF Key Card Extension

5118

[Disable Copying]

*CTL

[0: Not installed/ 1: Installed (scanning

accounting)]

*CTL

[0: Not disabled/ 1: Disabled]

*CTL

[0: Yes (removed)/ 1: Standby (installed but not

used)/ 2: No (not removed)]

001 This program disables copying.

5120
001

5121
001

[Mode Clear Opt. Counter

Removal]

This program updates the information on the optional counter. When you install or remove
an optional counter, check the settings.
[Counter Up Timing]

*CTL

[0: Feed/ 1: Exit]

This program specifies when the counter goes up. The settings refer to "paper feed" and
"paper exit" respectively.

415

5. System Maintenance

[0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step]
5126

[F Size Original Setting]

0: 8 1/2" x 13" (Foolscap)

*ENG

1: 8 1/4" x 13" (Folio)

2: 8" x 13" (F)

001 Selects F size original setting.

5127

[APS Mode]

*CTL

[0: Not disabled/ 1: Disabled]

001 This program disables the APS.

5150

[By-Pass Length Setting]

*CTL

[0: OFF/ 1: ON]

Determines whether the transfer sheet from the by-pass tray is used or not.
001 Normally the paper length for sub scanning paper from the by-pass tray is limited to 600
mm, but this can be extended with this SP to 1260 mm.
5162

[App. Switch Method]

*CTL

[0: Soft Key Set/ 1: Hard Key Set]

001 This program specifies the switch that selects an application program.
[Fax Printing Mode at Optional Counter Off]
5167

Enables or disables the automatic print out without an accounting device. This SP is used
when the receiving fax is accounted by an external accounting device.

Fax Printing Mode at Optional

001
*CTL
Counter Off

[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
0: Automatic printing
1: No automatic printing

[CE Login]
5169

If you will change the printer bit switches, you must log in to service mode with this SP before
you go into the printer SP mode.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]

001 -

*CTL

0: Disabled
1: Enabled

416

Main SP Tables-5

5181

[Size Adjust]
Adjusts the paper size for each tray.

001 Tray 1:1

*ENG

002 Tray 1: 2

*ENG

003 Tray 1: 3

*ENG

004 Tray 1: 4

*ENG

005 Tray 2: 1

*ENG

006 Tray 2: 2

*ENG

007 Tray 2: 3

*ENG

008 Tray 2: 4

*ENG

009 Tray 3: 1

*ENG

010 Tray 3: 2

*ENG

011 Tray 3: 3

*ENG

012 Tray 3: 4

*ENG

013 Tray 4: 1

*ENG

[0 to 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / 1 /step]

0: A4 LEF, 1: LT LEF
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
0: A3, 1: DLT
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
0: B4, 1: LG
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
0: B5 LEF, 1: Exe LEF
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]

0: A4 LEF, 1: LT LEF
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
0: A3, 1: DLT
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
0: B4, 1: LG
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
0: B5 LEF, 1: Exe LEF
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
0: A4 LEF, 1: LT LEF
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
0: A3, 1: DLT
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
0: B4, 1: LG
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
0: B5 LEF, 1: Exe LEF
[0 to 2 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
0: A4LEF, 1: LTLEF

417

5. System Maintenance

014 Tray 4: 2

*ENG

015 Tray 4: 3

*ENG

016 Tray 4: 4

*ENG

[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
0: A3, 1: DLT
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
0: B4, 1: LG
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
0: B5 LEF, 1: Exe LEF

[RK 4 Disconnect Operation]

5186

Enables or disables the prevention for RK4 (accounting device) disconnection.

If the RK4 is disconnected for 10 seconds when this SP is set to "1 (Enable)", the machine
automatically jams a sheet of paper and stops.

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
001 -

*ENG

0: Disable
1: Enable

5188

[Copy NV Version]
Displays the version number of the NVRAM on the controller board.

001 5196

*CTL

[90 degree rotation (copy)]

001 5212

[Page Numbering]

Not used
*CTL

This program adjusts the position of the second side page numbers.
A " value" moves the page number positions to the left edge.
A "+ value" moves the page number positions to the right edge.
003 Duplex Printout Right/Left Position
004 Duplex Printout High/Low Position

418

[10 to 10 / 0 / 1 mm/step]

Main SP Tables-5

[Set Time]
Adjusts the RTC (real time clock) time setting for the local time zone.
Examples: For Japan (+9 GMT), enter 540 (9 hours x 60 min.)
DOM: +540 (Tokyo)
5302

NA: -300 (New York)

EU: + 60 (Paris)
CH: +480 (Peking)
TW: +480 (Taipei)
AS: +480 (Hong Kong)

002 Time Difference

5307

*CTL#

[-1440 to 1440 / Area / 1 min./step ]

[Summer Time]
[ 0 to 1 / NA, EU, ASIA / 1 /step]
Setting

001

0: Disabled
1: Enabled
NA and EUR: 1, ASIA: 0

Enables or disables the summer time mode.

Make sure that both SP5-307-3 and -4 are correctly set. Otherwise, this SP is not
activated even if this SP is set to "1".

419

5. System Maintenance

Rule Set (Start)

Specifies the start setting for the summer time mode.

There are 8 digits in this SP. For months 1 to 9, the "0" cannot be input in the first digit, so the
eight-digit setting for -2 or -3 becomes a seven-digit setting.
1st and 2nd digits: The month. [1 to 12]
3rd digit: The week of the month. [1 to 5]
003

4th digit: The day of the week. [0 to 6 = Sunday to Saturday]

5th and 6th digits: The hour. [00 to 23]
7th digit: The length of the advanced time. [0 to 9 / 1 hour /step]
8th digit: The length of the advanced time. [0 to 5 / 10 minutes /step]
For example: 3500010 (EU default)

The timer is advanced by 1 hour at am 0:00 on the 5th Sunday in March

The digits are counted from the left.
Make sure that SP5-307-1 is set to "1".
Rule Set (End)

Specifies the end setting for the summer time mode.

There are 8 digits in this SP.
1st and 2nd digits: The month. [1 to 12]
004

3rd digit: The week of the month. [0 to 5]

4th digit: The day of the week. [0 to 7 = Sunday to Saturday]
5th and 6th digits: The hour. [00 to 23]
The 7th and 8 digits must be set to "00".
The digits are counted from the left.
Make sure that SP5-307-1 is set to "1".

5404

[User Code Counter Clear]

001 -

5411

*CTL

Clears all counters for users.

*CTL

Determines whether easy LDAP certification is

done.

[LDAP Certification]

004 Easy Certification

[0 to 1 / 1 / 1] 1: On, 0: Off

420

Main SP Tables-5

This SP is referenced only when SP5411-4 is set

to "1" (On).
005 Password Null Not Permit

*CTL

[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Password NULL not permitted.
1: Password NULL permitted.

5413

[Lockout Setting]

001 Lockout On/Off

*CTL

Switches on/off the lock on the local address

book account.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Off, 1: On

002 Lockout Threshold

*CTL

Sets a limit on the frequency of lockouts for

account lockouts.

[1 to 10 / 5 / 1]
Determines whether the system waits the
prescribed time for input of a correct user ID and
password after an account lockout has occurred.
003 Cancellation On/Off

*CTL

[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Off (no wait time, lockout not cancelled)
1: On (system waits, cancels lockout if correct
user ID and password are entered.

004 Cancellation Time

*CTL

Determines the length of time that the system waits

for correct input of the user ID and password after
a lockout has occurred. This setting is used only
if SP5413-3 is set to "1" (on).
[1 to 999 / 60 / 1 min.]

005 Counter Clear Time

5414

*CTL

Not Used

[Access Mitigation]

421

5. System Maintenance

Switches on/off masking of continuously used

IDs and passwords that are identical.
001 Mitigation On/Off

*CTL

[0 to 1 / 0 /1]
0: Off
1: On

002 Mitigation Time

*CTL

Sets the length of time for excluding continuous

access for identical user IDs and passwords.
[0 to 60 / 15 / 1 min.]

5415

[Password Attack]

001 Permissible Number

*CTL

Sets the number of attempts to attack the system

with random passwords to gain illegal access to
the system.
[0 to 100 / 30 / 1 attempt]

002 Detect Time

*CTL

Sets the time limit to stop a password attack once

such an attack has been detected.
[1 to 10 / 5 / 1 sec.]

5416

[Access Information]

001 Access User Max Num

*CTL

Limits the number of users used by the access

exclusion and password attack detection
functions.
[50 to 200 / 200 / 1 users]

002 Access Password Max Num

*CTL

Limits the number of passwords used by the

access exclusion and password attack detection
functions.
[50 to 200 / 200 / 1 passwords]

003 Monitor Interval

*CTL

Sets the processing time interval for referencing

user ID and password information.
[1 to 10 / 3 / 1 sec.]

5417

422

[Access Attack]

Main SP Tables-5

001 Access Permissible Number

*CTL

Sets a limit on access attempts when an excessive

number of attempts are detected for MFP
features.
[0 to 500 / 100 / 1]

002 Attack Detect Time

*CTL

Sets the length of time for monitoring the

frequency of access to MFP features.
[10 to 30 / 10 / 1 sec.]

003 Productivity Fall Wait

*CTL

Sets the wait time to slow down the speed of

certification when an excessive number of access
attempts have been detected.
[0 to 9 / 3 / 1 sec.]

004 Attack Max Num

*CTL

Sets a limit on the number of requests received

for certification in order to slow down the
certification speed when an excessive number of
access attempts have been detected.

[50 to 200 / 200 /1 attempt]

[User Authentication]
5420

These settings should be done with the System Administrator.

Note: These functions are enabled only after the user access feature has been enabled.

001 Copy

*CTL

Determines whether certification is required

before a user can use the copy applications.
[0 to 1 / 0 /1]
0: On, 1: Off

423

5. System Maintenance

Color Security Setting

*CTL

Enables or disables the color copy limitation for each copy mode when the user
authentication is "ON".
0: Enable (default), 1: Disable
002

Bit0: B/W mode

Bit1: Mono color mode
Bit2: Two colors mode
Bit3: Full color mode
Bit4: Automatic color mode
Bit5 to 7: Reserved

011 Document Server

*CTL

Determines whether certification is required

before a user can use the document server.
[0 to 1 / 0 /1]
0: On, 1: Off

021 Fax

*CTL

Determines whether certification is required

before a user can use the fax application.
[0 to 1 / 0 /1]
0: On, 1: Off

031 Scanner

*CTL

Determines whether certification is required

before a user can use the scan applications.
[0 to 1 / 0 /1]
0: On, 1: Off

041 Printer

*CTL

Determines whether certification is required

before a user can use the printer applications.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: On, 1: Off

051 SDK1
061 SDK2
071 SDK3

424

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1] 0: ON. 1: OFF
*CTL

Determines whether certification is required

before a user can use the SDK application.

Main SP Tables-5

5481

[Authentication Error Code]

These SP codes determine how the authentication failures are displayed.

001 System Log Disp

*CTL

Determines whether an error code appears in the

system log after a user authentication failure
occurs.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Off, 1: On

002 Panel Disp

*CTL

Determines whether an error code appears on

the operation panel after a user authentication
failure occurs.
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
1: On, 0: Off

5490

[MF Key Card (Japan only)]

Sets up operation of the machine with a keycard.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
001 Job Permit Setting

*CTL

0: Disabled. Cancels operation without a user

code.
1: Enabled. Allows operation without a user
code.

002 Count Mode Setting

5501

*CTL

[PM Alarm]
[0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 / step]
001 PM Alarm Level

*CTL

0: Alarm off
1 to 9999: Alarm goes off when Value (1 to
9999) x 1000 > PM counter
[0 or 1 / 1 / -]

002 Original Count Alarm

5504

[Jam Alarm]

*CTL

*CTL

0: No alarm sounds
1: Alarm sounds after the number of originals
passing through the ARDF > 10,000
425

5. System Maintenance

Sets the alarm to sound for the specified jam level (document misfeeds are not included).
[0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
001

0: Zero (Off)
1: Low (2.5K jams)
2: Medium (3K jams)
3: High (6K jams)
[Error Alarm]
Sets the error alarm level.

5505

The error alarm counter counts "1" when any SC is detected. However, the error alarm
counter decreases by "1" when an SC is not detected during a set number of copied sheets
(for example, default 1500 sheets).
The error alarm occurs when the SC error alarm counter reaches "5".
001 -

5507

[Supply Alarm]

*CTL
*CTL

[0 to 255 / 20 / 100 copies /step]

-

Enables or disables the notifying a supply call via the @Remote.

001 Paper Supply Alarm

0: Off, 1: On

002 Staple Supply Alarm

0: Off, 1: On

003 Toner Supply Alarm

0: Off, 1: On

080 Toner Call Timing

Changes the timing of the "Toner Supply Call" via the

@Remote, when the following conditions occur.
0: At replacement
1: At near end

426

Main SP Tables-5

128 Interval :Others

132 Interval :A3
133 Interval :A4
134 Interval :A5
141 Interval :B4
142 Interval :B5

[250 to 10000 / 1000 / 1 /step]

160 Interval :DLT

164 Interval :LG
166 Interval :LT

172 Interval :HLT

5508*
001*

002*

003*

011*

012*

013*

[CC Call]
Jam Remains

*CTL

0: Disable, 1: Enable

Enables/disables initiating a call for an unattended paper jam.

Continuous Jams

0: Disable, 1: Enable

Enables/disables initiating a call for consecutive paper jams.

Continuous Door Open

0: Disable, 1: Enable

Enables/disables initiating a call when the front door remains open.

Jam Detection: Time Length

[3 to 30 / 10 / 1 minute /step]

Sets the time a jam must remain before it becomes an "unattended paper jam".
Jam Detection: Continuous Count

[2 to 10 / 5 / 1 /step]

Sets the number of consecutive paper jams required to initiate a call.

Door Open: Time Length

[3 to 30 / 10 / 1 /step]

Sets the length of time the door remains open before the machine initiates a call.

427

5. System Maintenance

[SC/Alarm Setting]
5515

With @Remote in use, these SP codes can be set to issue an SC call when an SC error
occurs. If this SP is switched off, the SC call is not issued when an SC error occurs.
001 SC Call
002 Service Parts Near End Call
003 Service Parts End Call

[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
0: Off
1: On

004 User Call

006 Communication Test Call
007 Machine Information Notice

008 Alarm Notice

[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]

009 Non Genuin Tonner Alarm

0: Off

010 Supply Automatic Ordering Call

1: On

011 Supply Manegement Report Call

012 Jam/Door Open Call
5610

[Base Gamma Cntl P: Command]

004

005

006

5611

001

Recall Factory Setting

Recalls the factory settings of the base gamma control points.

Restore Factory Setting

Overwrites the current values onto the factory settings of the base gamma control points.
Restore Prev. Setting

Recalls the previous settings of the base gamma control points.

[Toner Color in 2C]
B-C

*ENG

[0 to 128 / 100 / 1 /step]

128: Darkest density

Adjusts the Cyan correction value of the blue signal in two-color mode.

428

Main SP Tables-5

B-M

002

*ENG

[0 to 128 / 100 / 1 /step]

128: Darkest density

Adjusts the Magenta correction value of the blue signal in two-color mode.
G-C

003

*ENG

[0 to 128 / 100 / 1 /step]

128: Darkest density

Adjusts the Cyan correction value of the blue signal in two-color mode.
G-Y

004

*ENG

[0 to 128 / 100 / 1 /step]

128: Darkest density

Adjusts the Yellow correction value of the blue signal in two-color mode.
R-M

005

*ENG

[0 to 128 / 100 / 1 /step]

128: Darkest density

Adjusts the Magenta correction value of the blue signal in two-color mode.
R-Y

006

*ENG

[0 to 128 / 100 / 1 /step]

128: Darkest density

Adjusts the Yellow correction value of the blue signal in two-color mode.
5618

[Color Mode Display Selection]

[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
001

*CTL

0: ACS, Colour, Black & White, Two Colour, Single

colour
1: ACD, Full Colour, Black & White

Selects the color selection display on the LCD.

Memory Clear (SP5-801)

The following tables list the items that are cleared. The serial number information, meter charge setting
and meter charge counters (SP8-581, 582, 583, 584, and 586) are not cleared.
5801

[Memory Clear]

429

5. System Maintenance

001 All Clear

Resets all correction data for process control and all

software counters, and returns all modes and adjustments to
their default values.

002 Engine [ENG]

Clears the engine settings.

003 SCS

Initializes default system settings, SCS (System Control

Service) settings, operation display coordinates, and ROM
update information.

004 IMH Memory Clr

Initializes the IMH settings.

005 MCS

Initializes the Mcs settings.

006 Copier application

Initializes all copier application settings.

007 Fax application

Initializes the fax reset time, job login ID, all TX/RX settings,
local storage file numbers, and off-hook timer.
The following service settings:
Bit switches
Gamma settings (User & Service)
Toner Limit

008 Printer application

The following user settings:

Tray Priority
Menu Protect
System Setting except for setting of Energy Saver
I/F Setup (I/O Buffer and I/O Timeout)
PCL Menu

009 Scanner application

Initializes the scanner defaults for the scanner and all the
scanner SP modes.

010 Web Service

Deletes the network file application management files and

thumbnails, and initializes the job login ID.

011 NCS

012 R-FAX
014 Clear DCS Setting

430

All setting of Network Setup (User Menu)

(NCS: Network Control Service)
Initializes the job login ID, SmartDeviceMonitor for
Admin, job history, and local storage file numbers.
Initializes the DCS (Delivery Control Service) settings.

Main SP Tables-5

015 Clear UCS Setting

Initializes the UCS (User Information Control Service)

settings.

016 MIRS Setting

Initializes the MIRS (Machine Information Report Service)

settings.

017 CCS

Initializes the CCS (Certification and Charge-control

Service) settings.

018 SRM Memory Clr

Initializes the SRM (System Resource Manager) settings.

019 LCS

Initializes the LCS settings.

020 Web Uapli

Initializes the web user application settings.

021 ECS

Initializes the ECS settings.

5803

[Input Check]

See "Input Check Table" in this section.

5804

[Output Check]

See "Output Check Table" in this section.

5806

[RFID CONT.READING]
001 TIMES

002 NOT 0

003 RET.

Displays the read times of RFID.

004 EXE.ALL
005 EXE.K
006 EXE.M
007 EXE.C
008 EXE.Y
[SC Reset]
5810

Resets a type A service call condition.

Turn the main switch off and on after resetting the SC code.
001 Fusing SC Reset

431

5. System Maintenance

5811

[Machine Serial] Machine Serial Number Display

002 Display

*ENG

004 5812

Displays the machine serial number.

Inputs the serial number.

[Service Tel. No. Setting]

Service

*CTL

001 Sets the telephone number for a service representative. This number is printed on the
Counter List, which can be printed with the users "Counter" menu.
This can be up to 20 characters (both numbers and alphabetic characters can be input).
Facsimile

*CTL

002 Sets the fax or telephone number for a service representative. This number is printed on the
Counter List.
This can be up to 20 characters (both numbers and alphabetic characters can be input).
Supply

*CTL

003 Use this to input the telephone number of your supplier for consumables. Enter the number
and press #.
Operation

*CTL

004 Use this to input the telephone number of your sales agency. Enter the number and press
#.
5816

[Remote Service]

*CTL

I/F Setting
Selects the remote service setting.
001

[0 to 2 / 2 / 1 /step]
0: Remote service off
1: CSS remote service on
2: @Remote service on

432

Main SP Tables-5

CE Call
Performs the CE Call at the start or end of the service.
002

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Start of the service
1: End of the service
NOTE: This SP is activated only when SP 5816-001 is set to "2".
Function Flag

Enables or disables the remote service function.

003 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
NOTE: This SP setting is changed to "1" after @Remote registor has been completed.
SSL Disable

Uses or does not use the RCG certification by SSL when calling the RCG.
007 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Uses the RCG certification
1: Does no use the RCG certification
RCG Connect Timeout
008 Specifies the connect timeout interval when calling the RCG.
[1 to 90 / 10 / 1 second /step]
RCG Write Timeout
009 Specifies the write timeout interval when calling the RCG.
[1 to 100 / 60 / 1 second /step]
RCG Read Timeout
010 Specifies the read timeout interval when calling the RCG.
[1 to 100 / 60 / 1 second /step]
Port 80 Enable
011

Enables/disables access via port 80 to the SOAP method.

[0 or 1 / 0 / ]
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled

433

5. System Maintenance

RFU (Remote Frimware Update) Timing

Selects the RFU timing.
013 [0 or 1 / 1 / ]
0: RFU is executed whenever update request is received.
1: RFU is executed only when the machine is in the sleep mode.
RCG C Registed
021

This SP displays the Embedded RC Gate installation end flag.

0: Installation not completed
1: Installation completed
RCG C Regist Detail

This SP displays the Embedded RC Gate installation status.

022 0: RCG device not registered
1: RCG device registered
2: Device registered
Connect Type (N/M)
This SP displays and selects the Embedded RC Gate connection method.
023 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step
0: Internet connection
1: Dial-up connection
Use Proxy
062 This SP setting determines if the proxy server is used when the machine communicates with
the service center.
Proxy Host

063

This SP sets the address of the proxy server used for communication between Embedded
RC Gate-N and the gateway. Use this SP to set up or display the customer proxy server
address. The address is necessary to set up Embedded RC Gate-N.
The address display is limited to 128 characters. Characters beyond the 128
character are ignored.
This address is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report.

434

Main SP Tables-5

Proxy Port Number

This SP sets the port number of the proxy server used for communication between Embedded
064 RC Gate-N and the gateway. This setting is necessary to set up Embedded RC Gate-N.
This port number is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report.
Proxy User Name
This SP sets the HTTP proxy certification user name.
065
The length of the name is limited to 31 characters. Any character beyond the 31st
character is ignored.
This name is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report.
Proxy Password

This SP sets the HTTP proxy certification password.

066
The length of the password is limited to 31 characters. Any character beyond the 31st
character is ignored.
This name is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report.

435

5. System Maintenance

CERT: Up State
Displays the status of the certification update.

5
067

436

The certification used by Embedded RC Gate is set correctly.

The certification request (setAuthKey) for update has been received from the GW
URL and certification is presently being updated.

The certification update is completed and the GW URL is being notified of the
successful update.

The certification update failed, and the GW URL is being notified of the failed update.

The period of the certification has expired and new request for an update is being
sent to the GW URL.

11

A rescue update for certification has been issued and a rescue certification setting
is in progress for the rescue GW connection.

12

The rescue certification setting is completed and the GW URL is being notified of the
certification update request.

13

The notification of the request for certification update has completed successfully,
and the system is waiting for the certification update request from the rescue GW
URL.

14

The notification of the certification request has been received from the rescue GW
controller, and the certification is being stored.

15

The certification has been stored, and the GW URL is being notified of the successful
completion of this event.

16

The storing of the certification has failed, and the GW URL is being notified of the
failure of this event.

17

The certification update request has been received from the GW URL, the GW URL
was notified of the results of the update after it was completed, but a certification
error has been received, and the rescue certification is being recorded.

18

The rescue certification of No. 17 has been recorded, and the GW URL is being
notified of the failure of the certification update.

Main SP Tables-5

CERT: Error
Displays a number code that describes the reason for the request for update of the
certification.

068

Normal. There is no request for certification update in progress.

Request for certification update in progress. The current certification has expired.

An SSL error notification has been issued. Issued after the certification has expired.

Notification of shift from a common authentication to an individual certification.

Notification of a common certification without ID2.

Notification that no certification was issued.

Notification that GW URL does not exist.

069 CERT: Up ID

The ID of the request for certification.

083 Firmware Up Status

Displays the status of the firmware update.

084 Non-HDD Firm Up

This setting determines if the firmware can be updated,

even without the HDD installed.
0: Not allowed update
1: Allowed update

085 Firm Up User Check

This SP setting determines if the operator can confirm the

previous version of the firmware before the firmware
update execution. If the option to confirm the previous
version is selected, a notification is sent to the system
manager and the firmware update is done with the
firmware files from the URL.

086 Firmware Size

Allows the service technician to confirm the size of the

firmware data files during the firmware update execution.

087 CERT: Macro Ver.

Displays the macro version of the @Remote certification.

088 CERT: PAC Ver.

Displays the PAC version of the @Remote certification.

089 CERT: ID2 Code

Displays ID2 for the @Remote certification. Spaces are

displayed as underscores (_). Asteriskes (*) indicate that
no @Remote certification exists. "000000___________"
indicates "Common certification".

437

5. System Maintenance

090 CERT: Subject

Displays the common name of the @Remote certification

subject. CN = the following 17 bytes. Spaces are
displayed as underscores (_). Asterisks (*) indicate that
no @Remote certification exists. "000000___________"
indicates "Common certification".

091 CERT: Serial No.

Displays serial number for the @Remote certification.

Asterisks (*) indicate that no @Remote certification exists.

092 CERT: Issuer

Displays the common name of the issuer of the @Remote

certification. CN = the following 30 bytes. Asteriskes ()
indicate that no @Remote certification exists.

093 CERT: Valid Start

Displays the start time of the period for which the current
@Remote certification is enabled.

094 CERT: Valid End

Displays the end time of the period for which the current
@Remote certification is enabled.

150

151

152

153

154

156

157

438

Selection Country
Not used
Line Type Automatic Judgment
Not used
Line Type Judgment Result
Not used
Selection Dial/Push
Not used
Outside Line/Outgoing Number
Not used
Dial Up User Name
Not used
Dial Up Password
Not used

Main SP Tables-5

161

162

163

164

Local Phone Number

Not used
Connection Timing Adjustment: Incoming
Not used
Access Point
Not used
Line Connecting
Not used

173 Modem Serial Number

174

187

Not used

Retransmission Limit

Not used
FAX TX Priority

Not used

200 Manual Polling

Not used

Regist: Status
Displays a number that indicates the status of the @Remote service device.
0: Neither the @Remote device nor Embedded RCG Gate is set.
1: The Embedded RCG Gate is being set. Only Box registration is completed. In this status,
201 @Remote device cannot communicate with this device.
2: The Embedded RCG Gate is set. In this status, the @Remote device cannot communicate
with this device.
3: The @Remote device is being set. In this status the Embedded RCG Gate cannot be set.
4: The @Remote module has not started.
202 Letter Number

Allows entry of the request number needed for the

Embedded RCG Gate.

203 Confirm Execute

Executes the confirmation request to the @Remote Gateway.

204 Confirm Result

439

5. System Maintenance

Displays a number that indicates the result of the confirmation executed with SP5816-203.
0: Succeeded
1: Confirmation number error
2: Registration in progress
3: Proxy error (proxy enabled)
4: Proxy error (proxy disabled)
5: Proxy error (Illegal user name or password)
6: Communication error
7: Certification update error
8: Other error
9: Confirmation executing

Confirm Place
205 Displays the result of the notification sent to the device from the Gateway in answer to the
confirmation request. Displayed only when the result is registered at the Gateway.
206 Register Execute

Executes "Embedded RCG Registration".

Register Result
Displays a number that indicates the registration result.
0: Succeeded
2: Registration in progress
3: Proxy error (proxy enabled)
207 4: Proxy error (proxy disabled)
5: Proxy error (Illegal user name or password)
6: Communication error
7: Certification update error
8: Other error
9: Registration executing
Error Code
208 Displays a number that describes the error code that was issued when either SP5816-204
or SP5816-207 was executed.

440

Main SP Tables-5

Cause

Illegal Modem Parameter

Operation Error, Incorrect

Setting

Error Caused by Response

from GW URL

Code

Meaning

-11001

Chat parameter error

-11002

Chat execution error

-11003

Unexpected error

-12002

Inquiry, registration attempted without acquiring

device status.

-12003

Attempted registration without execution of an

inquiry and no previous registration.

-12004

Attempted setting with illegal entries for

certification and ID2.

-12005

@Remote communication is prohibited. The

device has an Embedded RC gate-related
problem.

-12006

A confirmation request was made after the

confirmation had been already completed.

-12007

The request number used at registration was

different from the one used at confirmation.

-12008

Update certification failed because mainframe

was in use.

-2385

Attempted dial up overseas without the correct

international prefix for the telephone number.

-2387

Not supported at the Service Center

-2389

Database out of service

-2390

Program out of service

-2391

Two registrations for same device

-2392

Parameter error

441

5. System Maintenance

-2393

RCG device not managed

-2394

Device not managed

-2395

Box ID for RCG device is illegal

-2396

Device ID for RCG device is illegal

-2397

Incorrect ID2 format

-2398

Incorrect request number format

Releases the machine from its Embedded RCG Gate setup.

5
5821

209 Instl Clear

NOTE: Turn off and on the main power switch after this
setting has been changed.

250 CommLog Print

Prints the communication log.

[Remote Service Address]

002 RCG IP Address

*CTL

Sets the IP address of the RCG (Remote

Communication Gate) destination for call
processing at the remote service center.

[NV-RAM Data Upload]

5824

Uploads the UP and SP mode data (except for counters and the serial number) from the
NVRAM to an SD card. For details, see the "NVRAM Data Upload/Download" in the
"System Maintenance Reference" of the Field Service Manual.
001 -

[NV-RAM Data Download]

5825

Downloads the UP and SP mode data from an SD card to the NVRAM. For details, see the
"NVRAM Data Upload/Download" in the "System Maintenance Reference" of the Field
Service Manual.
001 -

5828

442

[Network Setting]

*CTL

Main SP Tables-5

Enables or disables 1284 Compatibility.

050 1284 Compatibility (Centro)

[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Enables or disables ECP Compatibility.
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]

052 ECP (Centro)

0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
This SP is activated only when SP5-828-50 is set to
"1".
Enables/disables Job Spooling.

065 Job Spooling

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled

066 Job Spooling Clear: Start Time

Treatment of the job when a spooled job exists at power

on.
0: ON (Data is cleared)
1: OFF (Automatically printed)
Validates or invalidates the job spooling function for each
protocol.
0: Validates
1: Invalidates
bit0: LPR

069 Job Spooling (Protocol)

bit1: FTP
bit2: IPP
bit3: SMB
bit4: BMLinkS
bit5: DIPRINT
bit6: sftp
bit7: (Reserved)
Enables or disables the Telnet protocol.

090 TELNET (0: OFF 1: ON)

[0 or 1 / 1 / ]
0: Disable, 1: Enable

443

5. System Maintenance

Enables or disables the Web operation.

091 Web (0: OFF 1: ON)

[0 or 1 / 1 / ]
0: Disable, 1: Enable
This is the IPv6 local address link referenced on the
Ethernet or wireless LAN (802.11b) in the format:

145 Active IPv6 Link Local Address "Link Local Address" + "Prefix Length"
The IPv6 address consists of a total 128 bits configured
in 8 blocks of 16 bits each.

147

Active IPv6 Stateless Address

1

149

Active IPv6 Stateless Address

2

151

Active IPv6 Stateless Address

3

Active IPv6 Stateless Address

153
4
155

These SPs are the IPv6 status addresses (1 to 5) referenced

on the Ethernet or wireless LAN (802.11b) in the format:
"Status Address" + "Prefix Length"
The IPv6 address consists of a total 128 bits configured
in 8 blocks of 16 bits each.

Active IPv6 Stateless Address

5
This SP is the IPv6 manually set address referenced on the
Ethernet or wireless LAN (802.11b) in the format:

156 IPv6 Manual Address

"Manual Set Address" + "Prefix Length"

The IPv6 address consists of a total 128 bits configured
in 8 blocks of 16 bits each.

158 IPv6 Gateway Address

This SP is the IPv6 gateway address referenced on the

Ethernet or wireless LAN (802.11b). The IPv6 address
consists of a total 128 bits configured in 8 blocks of 16
bits each.
Enables or disables the automatic setting for IPv6 stateless.

161 IPv6 Stateless Auto Setting

[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: Disable, 1: Enable

444

Main SP Tables-5

Displays or does not display the Web system items.

236 Web Item visible

[0 x 0000 to 0 x ffff / 0 x ffff] 0: Not displayed, 1:

Displayed
bit0: Net RICOH
bit1: Consumable Supplier
bit2-15: Reserved (all)

237 Web shopping link visible

Displays or does not display the link to Net RICOH on the

top page and link page of the web system.
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
0: Not display, 1:Display

238 Web supplies Link visible

Displays or does not display the link to Consumable

Supplier on the top page and link page of the web system.
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]

0: Not display, 1:Display

239 Web Link1 Name

This SP confirms or changes the URL1 name on the link

page of the web system. The maximum characters for the
URL name are 31 characters.

240 Web Link1 URL

This SP confirms or changes the link to URL1 on the link

page of the web system. The maximum characters for the
URL are 127 characters.

241 Web Link1 visible

Displays or does not display the link to URL1 on the top

page of the web system.
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
0: Not display, 1:Display

5832

242 Web Link2 Name

Same as "-239"

243 Web Link2 URL

Same as "-240"

244 Web Link2 visible

Same as "-241"

[HDD] HDD Initialization

*CTL

445

5. System Maintenance

001 HDD Formatting (ALL)

002 HDD Formatting (IMH)
003 HDD Formatting (Thumbnail)
004 HDD Formatting (Job Log)
005 HDD Formatting (Printer Fonts)
006 HDD Formatting (User Info)

Initializes the hard disk. Use this SP mode only

if there is a hard disk error.

007 Mail RX Data

008 Mail TX Data
009 HDD Formatting (Data for a Design)

010 HDD Formatting (Log)

011 HDD Formatting (Ridoc I/F)
5836

[Capture Settings]

*CTL

Capture Function (0:Off 1:On)

0: Disable, 1: Enable

001 With this function disabled, the settings related to the capture feature cannot be initialized,
displayed, or selected.
002

Panel Setting

0: Displayed, 1: Not displayed

Displays or does not display the capture function buttons.

5836-71 to 5836-76, Copier and Printer Document Reduction
The following 6 SP modes set the default reduction for stored documents sent to the
document management server via the MLB.
Enabled only when optional MLB (Media Link Board) is installed.

446

071 Reduction for Copy Color

0: 1to-1, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4

072 Reduction for Copy B&W Text

0: 1to-1, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4

073 Reduction for Copy B&W Other

0: 1to-1, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4

074 Reduction for Printer Color

0: 1to-1, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4

075 Reduction for Printer B&W

0: 1to-1, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4

Main SP Tables-5

076 Reduction for Printer B&W HQ

0: 1to-1, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4

5836-81 to 5836-86, Stored document format

The following 6 SP modes set Sets the default format for stored documents sent to the document
management server via the MLB.
Enabled only when optional MLB (Media Link Board) is installed.
0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR,
081 Format for Copy Color

2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR
This SP is not used in this model.

082 Format for Copy B&W Text

083 Format for Copy B&W Other

0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR,
2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR
0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR,

2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR
0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR,

084 Format for Printer Color

2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR
This SP is not used in this model.

085 Format for Printer B&W

086 Format for Printer B&W HQ

Default for JPEG

0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR,
2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR
0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR,
2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR
[5 to 95 / 50 / 1 /step]

091 Sets the JPEG format default for documents sent to the document management server via
the MLB with JPEG selected as the format.
Enabled only when optional MLB (Media Link Board) is installed.
101 Primary srv IP address

Sets the IP address for the primary capture server. This is

basically adjusted by the remote system.

102 Primary srv scheme

This is basically adjusted by the remote system.

103 Primary srv port number

This is basically adjusted by the remote system.

447

5. System Maintenance

104 Primary srv URL path

This is basically adjusted by the remote system.

111 Secondary srv IP address

Sets the IP address for the secondary capture server. This is

basically adjusted by the remote system.

112 Secondary srv scheme

This is basically adjusted by the remote system.

113 Secondary srv port number This is basically adjusted by the remote system.
114 Secondary srv URL path

This is basically adjusted by the remote system.

120 Default Reso Rate Switch

This is basically adjusted by the remote system.

Reso: Copy (Color)

[0 to 3 / 2 / 1/step]

121 Selects the resolution for color copy mode. This is basically adjusted by the remote system.
0: 600dpi/ 1: 300dpi/ 2: 150dpi/ 3: 75dpi

Reso: Copy (Mono)

[0 to 5 / 3 / 1/step]

122 Selects the resolution for BW copy mode. This is basically adjusted by the remote system.
0: 600dpi/ 1: 400dpi/ 2: 300dpi/ 3: 200dpi/ 4: 150dpi/ 5: 100dpi
Reso: Print (Color)
123

This is basically adjusted by the remote system.

[0 to 3 / 2 / 1/step]

Selects the resolution for color print mode. This is basically adjusted by the remote system.
0: 600dpi/ 1: 300dpi/ 2: 150dpi/ 3: 75dpi
Reso: Print (Mono)

124

This is basically adjusted by the remote system.

[0 to 5 / 3 / 1/step]

Selects the resolution for BW print mode. This is basically adjusted by the remote system.
0: 600dpi/ 1: 400dpi/ 2: 300dpi/ 3: 200dpi/ 4: 150dpi/ 5: 100dpi

5840

448

[IEEE 802.11]

Main SP Tables-5

[1 to 11 or 13 / 11 or 13 / 1 /step]
Channel MAX

*CTL

Europe/Asia: 1 to 13
NA/ Asia: 1 to 11

Sets the maximum number of channels available for data transmission via the wireless LAN.
006 The number of channels available varies according to location. The default settings are set
for the maximum end of the range for each area. Adjust the upper 4 bits to set the maximum
number of channels.
Do not change the setting.
[1 to 11 or 13 / 1 / 1 /step]
Channel MIN

*CTL

Europe: 1 to 13
NA/ Asia: 1 to 11

Sets the minimum number of channels available for data transmission via the wireless LAN.
007 The number of channels available varies according to location. The default settings are set
for the minimum end of the range for each area. Adjust the lower 4 bits to set the minimum
number of channels.

Do not change the setting.

[0 x 00 to 0 x FF / 0 x FF to Auto / -]
0 x FF to Auto [Default]
0 x 11 55M Fix
0 x 10 48M Fix
0 x 0F 36M Fix
0 x 0E 18M Fix
0 x 0D 12M Fix
008 Transmission Speed

*CTL

0 x 0B 9M Fix
0 x 0A 6M Fix
0 x 07 11M Fix
0 x 05 5.5M Fix
0 x 08 1M Fix
0 x 13 0 x FE (reserved)
0 x 12 72M (reserved)
0 x 09 22M (reserved)
449

5. System Maintenance

Selects the WEP key.

[00 to 11 / 00 / 1 binary]
011 WEP key Select

*CTL

00: Key #1
01: Key #2 (Reserved)
10: Key #3 (Reserved)
11: Key #4 (Reserved)
Adjusts the fragment threshold for the
IEEE802.11 card.

042 Fragment Thresh

*CTL

[256 to 2346 / 2346 / 1]

This SP is displayed only when the IEEE802.11
card is installed.

Determines whether the CTS self function is

turned on or off.
043 11g CTS to Self

*CTL

[0 to 1 / 1 / 1] 0: Off, 1: On
This SP is displayed only when the IEEE802.11
card is installed.

044 11g Slot Time

*CTL

Selects the slot time for IEEE802.11.

[0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 0: 20 m, 1: 9 m
Selects the debug level for WPA authentication
application.

045 WPA Debug Lvl

*CTL

[1 to 3 / 3 / 1]
1: Info, 2: warning, 3: error
This SP is displayed only when the IEEE802.11
card is installed.

5841

450

[Supply Name Setting]

Main SP Tables-5

001 Toner Name Setting: Black

002 Toner Name Setting: Cyan
003 Toner Name Setting: Yellow
004 Toner Name Setting: Magenta
007 OrgStamp

Specifies supply names. These

appear on the screen when the user
presses the Inquiry button in the user
tools screen.

*CTL

011 Staple Std1

012 Staple Std2
013 Staple Std3
014 Staple Std4
5844

[USB]

001

Transfer Rate

*CTL

0x01: Full speed

0x04: Auto Change

Adjusts the USB transfer rate.

100 Notify Unsupport

*CTL

Displays a message of the unspported USB

device for the USB host slot.
[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
0: Not displayed, 1: Displayed

[Delivery Server Setting]

5845

*CTL

Provides items for delivery server settings.

001

FTP Port No.

[0 to 65535 / 3670 / 1 /step]

Sets the FTP port number used when image files to the Scan Router Server.
IP Address (Primary)

Range: 000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255

002 Use this SP to set the Scan Router Server address. The IP address under the transfer tab
can be referenced by the initial system setting.

451

5. System Maintenance

Delivery Error Display Time

[0 to 999 / 300 / 1 second /step]

006 Use this setting to determine the length of time the prompt message is displayed when a
test error occurs during document transfer with the NetFile application and an external
device.
IP Address (Secondary)

Range: 000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255

008 Specifies the IP address assigned to the computer designated to function as the secondary
delivery server of Scan Router. This SP allows only the setting of the IP address without
reference to the DNS setting.
Delivery Server Model

[0 to 4/ 0 / 1 /step]

Allows changing the model of the delivery server registered by the I/O device.

0: Unknown
009 1: SG1 Provided
2: SG1 Package
3: SG2 Provided
4: SG2 Package
Delivery Svr Capability

[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]

Changes the capability of the registered that the I/O device registered.
Bit7 = 1 Comment information exits
Bit6 = 1 Direct specification of mail address possible
010

Bit5 = 1 Mail RX confirmation setting possible

Bit4 = 1 Address book automatic update function exists
Bit3 = 1 Fax RX delivery function exists
Bit2 = 1 Sender password function exists
Bit1 = 1 Function to link MK-1 user and Sender exists
Bit0 = 1 Sender specification required (if set to 1, Bit6 is set to "0")

452

Main SP Tables-5

Delivery Svr Capability (Ext)

[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]

Changes the capability of the registered that the I/O device registered.
011

Bit7 = 1 Address book usage limitation (Limitation for each authorized user)
Bit6 = 1 RDH authorization link
Bit5 to 0: Not used
Rapid Sending Control

022

Enables or disables the prevention function for the continuous data sending error.
[0 to 1 / 0 / -]
0: Disable, 1: Enable

5846

[UCS Settings]

*CTL

Machine ID (For Delivery Server)

Displays ID

001 Displays the unique device ID in use by the delivery server directory. The value is only
displayed and cannot be changed. This ID is created from the NIC MAC or IEEE 1394
EUI. The ID is displayed as either 6-byle or 8-byte binary.
Machine ID Clear (For Delivery Server)

Clears ID

002 Clears the unique ID of the device used as the name in the file transfer directory. Execute
this SP if the connection of the device to the delivery server is unstable. After clearing the
ID, the ID will be established again automatically by cycling the machine off and on.
Maximum Entries

[2000 to 20000/ 2000 /1 /step]

003 Changes the maximum number of entries that UCS can handle.
If a value smaller than the present value is set, the UCS managed data is cleared, and the
data (excluding user code information) is displayed.
Delivery Server Retry Timer

[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]

006 Sets the interval for retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acquire the delivery
server address book.
Delivery Server Retry Times

[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]

007 Sets the number of retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acquire the delivery server
address book.

453

5. System Maintenance

Delivery Server Maximum Entries

[2000 to 50000 / 2000 / 1/step]

008 Sets the maximum number account entries of the delivery server user information managed
by UCS.
010

LDAP Search Timeout

[1 to 255 / 60 / 1 /step]

Sets the length of the timeout for the search of the LDAP server.

020 WSD Maximum Entries

040

Addr Book Migration (SD => HDD)

Not used in this machine.
Fill Addr Acl Info.

This SP must be executed immediately after installation of an HDD unit in a basic machine
that previously had no HDD. The first time the machine is powered on with the new HDD
installed, the system automatically takes the address book from the NVRAM and writes it
onto the new HDD. However, the new address book on the HDD can be accessed only
by the system administrator at this stage. Executing this SP by the service technician
immediately after power on grants full address book access to all users.
041

Procedure
1. Turn the machine off.
2. Install a new HDD.
3. Turn the machine on.
4. The address book and its initial data are created on the HDD automatically.
5. However, at this point the address book can be accessed by only the system
administrator or key operator.
6. Enter the SP mode and do SP5846-041. After this SP executes successfully, any user
can access the address book.

454

Main SP Tables-5

Displays the slot number where an address book data

is in.
[0 to 30 / - /1]
0: Unconfirmed
043 Addr Book Media

1: SD Slot 1
2: SD Slot 2
4: USB Flash ROM
20: HDD
30: Nothing

047 Initialize Local Addr Book

Clears the local address book information, including the

user code.

048 Initialize Delivery Addr Book

Clears the distribution address book information,

except the user code.

049 Initialize LDAP Addr Book

Clears the LDAP address book information, except the

user code.

050 Initialize All Addr Book

Clears all directory information managed by UCS,

including all user codes.

051 Backup All Addr Book

Uploads all directory information to the SD card.

052 Restore All Addr Book

Downloads all directory information from the SD card.

Deletes the address book data from the SD card in the

service slot.
Deletes only the files that were uploaded from this
machine.
053 Clear Backup Info

This feature does not work if the card is write-protected.

After you do this SP, go out of the SP mode, and
then turn the power off.
Do not remove the SD card until the Power LED
stops flashing.

455

5. System Maintenance

Search Option
This SP uses bit switches to set up the fuzzy search options for the UCS local address book.
Bit: Meaning
060

0: Checks both upper/lower case characters

1: Japan Only
2: Japan Only
3: Japan Only
4 to 7: Not Used
Complexity Option 1
Use this SP to set the conditions for password entry to access the local address book.
Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to upper case and sets the length of the
password.

062 [0 to 32 / 0 / 1 /step]
This SP does not normally require adjustment.
This SP is enabled only after the system administrator has set up a group password
policy to control access to the address book.

091 FTP Auth Port Setting

Specifies the FTP port for getting a distribution server

address book that is used in the identification mode.
[0 to 65535 / 3671 / 1 /step]

094 Encryption Stat

[Rep Resolution Reduction]

Shows the status of the encryption function for the

address book data.
*CTL

SP5847-1 through SP5847-8 changes the default settings of image data transferred
externally by the Net File page reference function.
5847

[ 0 to 5 / 2 / 1 /step]
SP5847-21 sets the default for JPEG image quality of image files handled by NetFile.
"Net files" are jobs to be printed from the document server using a PC and the
DeskTopBinder software.

456

Main SP Tables-5

001 Rate for Copy Color

0: 1x

002 Rate for Copy B&W Text

1: 1/2x
2: 1/3x

003 Rate for Copy B&W Other

3: 1/4x

004 Rate for Printer Color

4: 1/6x

005 Rate for Printer B&W

5: 1/8x

Network Quality Default for JPEG

021 Sets the default value for the quality of JPEG images sent as NetFile pages. This function
is available only with the MLB (Media Link Board) option installed.
[5 to 95 / 50 / 1 /step]
[Web Service]

*CTL

SP5848-2 sets the 4-bit switch assignment for the access control setting. Setting of 0001
has no effect on access and delivery from Scan Router.

5848

5848 100 sets the maximum size allowed for downloaded images. The default is equal
to 1 gigabyte.
Access Ctrl: Repository (only
002
Lower 4 bits)

003

Access Ctrl: Doc. Svr. Print (Lower

4 bits)

004

Access Ctrl: user Directory (only

Lower 4 bits)

007

Access Ctrl: Comm. Log Fax

(Lower 4 bits)

009 Access Ctrl: Job Ctrl (Lower 4 bits)

Access Ctrl: Device management
011
(Lower 4 bits)

0000: No access control

0001: Denies access to DeskTop Binder.
0010: No writing control

Switches access control on and off.

0000: No access control
0001: Denies access to DeskTop Binder.

021 Access Ctrl: Delivery (Lower 4 bits)

022

Access Ctrl: uadministration

(Lower 4bits)

457

5. System Maintenance

Repository: Download Image

100
Max. Size

5849

[Installation Date]

5849 1 Display

Specifies the max size of the image data that the

machine can download.
[1 to 1024 / 1024 / 1 MB /step]
*CTL

The "Counter Clear Day" has been changed to

"Installation Date" or "Inst. Date".
Determines whether the installation date is printed on
the printout for the total counter.

5849 2 Switch to Print

[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
0: OFF (No Print)
1: ON (Print)

003 Total Counter

[Bluetooth Mode]
5851

Sets the operation mode for the Bluetooth Unit. Press either key.
[0:Public] [1: Private]
[Stamp Data Download]

5853

Use this SP to download the fixed stamp data stored in the firmware of the ROM and copy
it to the HDD. This SP can be executed as many times as required. This SP must be executed
after replacing or formatting the hard disks.
This SP can be executed only with the hard disks installed.
[Remote ROM Update]

5856

Allows the technician to upgrade the firmware using a local port (IEEE1284) when
updating the remote ROM.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
002 Local Port

*CTL

0: Disable
1: Enable

458

Main SP Tables-5

5857

[Save Debug Log]

On/Off (1:ON 0:OFF)

*CTL

0: OFF, 1: ON

001 Switches the debug log feature on and off. The debug log cannot be captured until this
feature is switched on.
Target (2: HDD 3: SD)

2: HDD, 3: SD Card

002 Selects the storage device to save debug logs information when the conditions set with
SP5-858 are satisfied.
[ 2 to 3 / 2 / 1 /step]
Save to HDD
005

006

Saves the debug log of the input SC number in memory to the HDD.
A unique file name is generated to avoid overwriting existing file names on the SD Card.
Up to 4MB can be copied to an SD Card. 4 MB segments can be copied one by one to
each SD Card.

Save to SD Card
Saves the debug log of the input SC number in memory to the SD card.

009 Copy HDD to SD Card (Latest 4 MB)

010 Copy HDD to SD Card (Latest 4 MB Any Key)
011 Erase HDD Debug Data
012 Erase SD Card Debug Data
013 Free Space on SD Card
014 Copy SD to SD (Latest 4 MB)
015 Copy SD to SD (Latest 4 MB Any Key)
016 Make HDD Debug
017 Make SD Debug
[Debug Save When]
5858

*CTL

These SPs select the content of the debugging information to be saved to the destination
selected by SP5857-002.
SP5858-3 stores one SC specified by number. Refer to Section 4 for a list of SC error codes.

459

5. System Maintenance

001 Engine SC Error

Turns on/off the debug save for SC codes generated by

copier engine errors.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/ step]
0: OFF, 1: ON

002 Controller SC Error

Turns on/off the debug save for SC codes generated by

GW controller errors.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/ step]
0: OFF, 1: ON

003 Any SC Error

[0 to 65535 / 0 / 1 /step]
Turns on/off the debug save for jam errors.

004 Jam

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/ step]
0: OFF, 1: ON

5859

[Debug Save Key No.]

*CTL

001 Key 1
002 Key 2
003 Key 3
004 Key 4
005 Key 5
006 Key 6
007 Key 7

These SPs allow you to set up to 10 keys for log files for
functions that use common memory on the controller
board.
[9999999 to 9999999 / 0 / ]

008 Key 8
009 Key 9
010 Key 10
5860

[SMTP/POP3/IMAP4]

020 Partial Mail Receive Timeout

460

*CTL

[1 to 168 / 72 / ]

Main SP Tables-5

Sets the amount of time to wait before saving a mail that breaks up during reception. The
received mail is discarded if the remaining portion of the mail is not received during this
prescribed time.
021 MDN Response RFC2298 Compliance

[0 to 1 / 1 / ]

Determines whether RFC2298 compliance is switched on for MDN reply mail.

0: No
1: Yes
022 SMTP Auth. From Field Replacement

[0 to 1 / 0 / ]

Determines whether the FROM item of the mail header is switched to the validated account
after the SMTP server is validated.
0: No. "From" item not switched.

1: Yes. "From item switched.

025 SMTP Auth. Direct Setting

[0 or 1 / 0 / ]

Selects the authentication method for SMPT.

Bit switch:
Bit 0: LOGIN
Bit 1: PLAIN
Bit 2: CRAM MD5
Bit 3: DIGEST MD5
Bit 4 to 7: Not used
This SP is activated only when SMTP authorization is enabled by UP mode.
Selects the MIME header type of an E-mail sent
by S/MIME.
026

S/MIME: MIME Header

Setting

[0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
0: Microsoft Outlook Express standard
1: Internet Draft standard
2: RFC standard

5866

[E-mail Report] Not Used

461

5. System Maintenance

Enables or disables the e-mail alert.

001 Report Validity

*CTL

[0 or 1 / 0 / ]
0: Enable, 1: Disable

005 Add Date Field

*CTL

Adds or does not add the date field to the

header of the alert mail.
[0 or 1 / 0 / ]
0: Not added, 1: Added

5870

[Common Key Info Writing]

001 Writing

Initialize

*CTL

Rewrites the common certification used for the

@Remote.

*CTL

Initializes the set certification.

003 When the GW controller board is replaced with a new one for repair, you must execute the
"Initiralize (-003)" and "Writing (-001)" just after the new board replacement.
NOTE: Turn off and on the main power switch after the "Initiralize (-003)" and "Writing
(-001)" have been done.
5873

001 Move Exec

This SP copies the application programs from the original SD card in

SD card slot 2 to an SD card in SD card slot 1.

002 Undo Exec

This SP copies back the application programs from an SD card in SD

Card Slot 2 to the original SD card in SD card slot 1. Use this menu
when you have mistakenly copied some programs by using "Move
Exec" (SP5873-1).

5875

462

[SD Card Appli Move]

[SC Auto Reboot]

Main SP Tables-5

Enables or disables the automatic reboot function when

an SC error occurs.
[0 or 1/ 0 / ]

001 Reboot Setting

0: The machine reboots automatically when the

machine issues an SC error and logs the SC error code.
If the same SC occurs again, the machine does not
reboot.

*CTL

1: The machine does not reboot when an SC error

occurs.
The reboot is not executed for Type A or C SC codes.
Selects the reboot method for SC.
002 Reboot Type

*CTL

[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: Manual reboot, 1: Automatic reboot

5878

[Option Setup]

001 Overwrite Security

Enables the Data Overwrite Security unit. Press

"EXECUTE" on the operation panel. Then turn the
machine off and on.

002 HDD Encryption

Installs the HDD Encryption unit.

*ENG

Deletes the fixed phrase.

5881

[Fixed Phrase Block Erasing]

001 -

5884

[Plain 1/2 Setting]

Select the paper type (plain 1 or plain 2) for each tray.

001 By-pass Table

*ENG

002 Tray 1

*ENG

003 Tray 2

*ENG

004 Tray 3

*ENG

005 Tray 4

*ENG

[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
0: Plain Paper 1
1: Plain Paper 2

463

5. System Maintenance

5885

[Set WIM Function] Web Image Monitor Settings

Close or disclose the functions of web image monitor.
0: OFF, 1: ON
Bit Meaning
0: Forbid all document server access (1)
1: Forbid user mode access (1)

020 Document Server ACC Ctrl

*CTL

2: Forbid print function (1)

3: Forbid fax TX (1)
4: Forbid scan sending (1)
5: Forbid downloading (1)
6: Forbid delete (1)

7: Reserved
Selects the display type for the document box list.
050 DocSvr Format

*CTL

[0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
0: Thumbnail, 1: Icon, 2: Details

051 DocSvr Trans

*CTL

Sets the number of documents to be displayed in

the document box list.
[5 to 20 / 10 / 1]
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step]

Set Signature

*CTL

100

0: Signature for each e-mail

1: Signature for all e-mails
2: No signature

Selects whether the signature is added to the scanned documents with the WIM when they
are transmitted by an e-mail.

101 Set Encryption

*CTL

Determines whether the scanned documents with

the WIM are encrypted when they are
transmitted by an e-mail.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Not encrypted, 1:Encryption

464

200 Detect Mem Leak

*CTL

Not used

201 DocSur Timeout

*CTL

Not used

Main SP Tables-5

5887

[SD Get Counter]

This SP determines whether the ROM can be updated.

001 -

*CTL

This SP sends a text file to an SD card inserted in

SD card Slot 2 (lower slot). The operation stores.
The file is stored in a folder created in the root
directory of the SD card called SD_COUNTER.
The file is saved as a text file (*.txt) prefixed with
the number of the machine.
1. Insert the SD card in SD card Slot 2 (lower
slot).
2. Select SP5887 then touch [EXECUTE].
3. Touch [Execute] in the message when you
are prompted.

5888

[Personal Information Protect]

Selects the protection level for logs.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1}

001 -

*CTL

0: No authentication, No protection for logs

1: No authentication, Protected logs (only an
administrator can see the logs)

5894

[External Counter Setting]

-

001 Switch Charge Mode

5896

*ENG

[0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step]

[Copy/PrinterPriority]
-

[0 or 1 / 0 / -]

001 Selects the priority memory type. The larger memory is used for the selected mode (copy or
printer).
0: Copy priority, 1: Printer priority
5907

[Plug & Play Maker/Model Name]

465

5. System Maintenance

001

5913

Selects the brand name and the production name for Windows Plug & Play. This information
is stored in the NVRAM. If the NVRAM is defective, these names should be registered again.
After selecting, press the "Original Type" key and "#" key at the same time. When the setting
is completed, the beeper sounds five times.
[Switchover Permission Time]
Print Application Timer

*CTL

[3 to 30 / 3 / 1 second /step]

002 Sets the amount of time to elapse while the machine is in standby mode (and the operation
panel keys have not been used) before another application can gain control of the display.
5967

[Copy Server Set Function]

*CTL

0: ON, 1: OFF

Enables and disables the document server. This is a security measure that prevents image
001 data from being left in the temporary area of the HDD. After changing this setting, you must
switch the main switch off and on to enable the new setting.

5974

[Cherry Server]
Specifies which version of ScanRouter, "Lite" or "Full", is installed.

001 Cherry Server

*CTL

[0 or 1 / 0 / ]
0: Lite, 1: Full

[Device Setting]
5985

The NIC and USB support features are built into the GW controller. Use this SP to enable
and disable these features. In order to use the NIC and USB functions built into the controller
board, these SP codes must be set to "1".
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Disable, 1: Enable, 2: Function limitation
When the "Function limitation" is set, "On board NIC" is
limited only for the NRS or LDAP/NT authentication.
001 On Board NIC
Other network applications than NRS or LDAP/NT
authentication are not available when this SP is set to
"2". Even though you can change the initial settings of
those network applications, the settings do not work.

466

Main SP Tables-5

002 On Board USB

5987

0: Disable, 1: Enable

[Mech. Counter Protection]

001 0: OFF / 1: ON

This SP detects that a mechanical counter device is removed.

If it is detected, SC610 occurs.

[SP print mode]

5990

Prints out the SMC sheets.

001 All (Data List)

002 SP (Mode Data List)

003 User Program

004 Logging Data

005 Diagnostic Report

006 Non-Default

007 NIB Summary

008 Capture Log

021 Copier User Program

022 Scanner SP

023 Scanner User Program

This SP detects that a mechanical counter device is removed.

If it is detected, SC610 occurs.

001

5997

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]

[Fusing Cont mode]

001 fast/silent

[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
0: Off, 1: On

467

5. System Maintenance

Turns on or off the fusing unit preceding mode.

The machine turns on the fusing unit first by default after power-on or recovery from the
energy save mode.
If a customer does not want the fusing unit to rotate before sending a job to the machine,
change this setting to "0". In this case, the first print time or recovery time may be little bit
longer than before.

468

Main SP Tables-6

Main SP Tables-6
SP6-XXX (Peripherals)
6006

[ADF Adjustment]
Adjusts the side-to-side and leading registration of originals with the ARDF.

001 S-to-S Registration 1st

002 S-to-S Registration 2nd

*ENG

003 Leading Edge Registration

[-3.0 to 3.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ]

[-5.0 to 5.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ]

Adjusts the amount of paper buckle to correct original skew for the front and rear sides.
005 Buckle: Duplex: 1st
006 Buckle: Duplex: 2nd

*ENG

[-5.0 to 5.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ]

Adjusts the erase margin at the original trailing edge.

007 Trailing Edge Erase

*ENG

[-5.0 to 5.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ]

[ADF INPUT Check]

6007

Displays the signals received from the sensors and switches of the ARDF. Only Bit 0 is used
for ADF input check ( "Iutput Check Table" in this section").
[ADF OUTPUT Check]

6008

Activates the electrical components for functional check.

It is not possible to activate more than one component at the same time (
Table" in this section")

6009

"Output Check

[ADF Free Run]

Performs a DF free run in simplex, duplex mode or stamp mode.

002 Free Run Duplex Mode

469

5. System Maintenance

6010

[Stamp Position Adj.] Fax Stamp Position Adjustment

Adjusts the horizontal position of the stamp on the scanned originals.

001 -

*ENG

[-5.0 to 5.0 / 0 / 1 mm/step]

[Original Size Detection Priority] Original Size Detection Priority

6016

Specifies the original size for a size detected by the original sensor, since original sensors
cannot recognize all sizes.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
*ENG

0: Setting 1
1: Setting 2

5
001 -

NA

EU/
ASIA

6017

Setting 1

Setting 2

DLT SEF

Folio SEF 11" x 15"

LG SEF

Foolscap SEF

LT SEF

US EXE 8" x 10"

LT LEF

US EXE LEF

DLT SEF

8K 267 x 390 mm

LT SEF

16K 195 x 267 mm

LT LEF

16K 267 x 195 mm

[DF Magnification Adj.] DF Magnification Adjustment

Adjusts the magnification in the sub-scan direction for the ARDF.

001 -

*CTL

[-5.0 to 5.0 / 0 / 0.1 %/step]

[Staple Position Adjustment]

6101

Adjusts the staple position for finisher.

+ Value: Moves the staple position to the rear side.
- Value: Moves the staple position to the front side.

001 -

470

ENG

[-2 to 2 / 0 / 0.2mm/step]

Main SP Tables-6

6102

[Punch Position Adjustment]

Adjusts the punching position in the sub scan direction.

001 Leading Edge Adjustment

6103

[-1.5 to 1.5 / 0 / 0.1mm/step]

ENG

[-4 to 4 / 0 / 0.1mm/step]

[Jogger Position Adjustment]

Adjusts the jogger position

001 -

6104

ENG

[Punch Position Adjustment]

Adjusts the punching position in the main scan direction.

001 Side-to-Side Adjustment

ENG

[-2.0 to 2.0 / 0 / 0.2mm/step]

[Finisher Input Check] Finisher (D429)

6120

Displays the signals received from sensors and switches of the finisher. (
Table" in this section")

"Iutput Check

[Finisher Output Check] Finisher (D429)

6121

Displays the signals received from sensors and switches of the finisher. (
Table" in this section")

"Output Check

471

5. System Maintenance

Main SP Tables-7
SP7-XXX (Data Log)

7401

[Total SC Counter]
Displays the number of SC codes detected.

001 -

*CTL

[0 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step ]

[SC History]

7403

Logs the SC codes detected.

The 10 most recently detected SC Codes are not displayed on the screen, but can be seen
on the SMC (logging) outputs.

001 Latest
002 Latest 1
003 Latest 2
004 Latest 3
005 Latest 4
006 Latest 5

*CTL

007 Latest 6
008 Latest 7
009 Latest 8
010 Latest 9

7502

[Total Paper Jam Counter]

Displays the total number of jams detected.

001 -

472

* CTL

[0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step ]

Main SP Tables-7

7503

[Total Original Jam Counter]

Displays the total number of original jams.

001 -

*CTL

[0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 original/step ]

[Paper Jam Location]

7504

ON: On check, OFF: Off Check

Displays the number of jams according to the location where jams were detected.
NOTE: The LCT is counted as the 3rd feed station.
001 At Power On

*CTL

003 Tray 1: ON

*CTL

004 Tray 2: ON

*CTL

005 Tray 3: ON

*CTL

006 Tray 4: ON

*CTL

008 Bypass: ON

*CTL

009 Duplex: ON

*CTL

011 Vertical Transport 1: ON

*CTL

012 Vertical Transport 2: ON

*CTL

017 Registration: ON

*CTL

018 Fusing Entrance: ON

*CTL

019 Fusing Exit: ON

*CTL

020 Paper Exit: ON

*CTL

025 Duplex Exit: ON

*CTL

027 Duplex Entrance: ON

*CTL

For details,
Detection"

p.693 "Jam

473

5. System Maintenance

7505

474

028 1-Bin Exit Sensor

*CTL

051 SEF Sensor 1

*CTL

052 SEF Sensor 2

*CTL

053 Bank SEF Sensor 1

*CTL

057 Regist Sensor

*CTL

059 Fusing Exit Sensor

*CTL

060 Exit Sensor

*CTL

065 Duplex Exit Sensor

*CTL

068 1-Bin Exit: ON

*CTL

240 Finisher Entrance

*CTL

241 Finisher Shift Tray Exit

*CTL

242 Finisher Staple

*CTL

243 Finisher Exit

*CTL

244 Finisher Drive Motor

*CTL

245 Finisher Tray Lift Motor

*CTL

246 Finisher Jogger Motor

*CTL

247 Finisher Shift Motor

*CTL

248 Finisher Staple Motor

*CTL

249 Finisher Exit Motor

*CTL

250 Finisher Entrance

*CTL

251 Finisher Proof Exit

*CTL

[Original Jam Detection]

Displays the total number of original jams by location.

For details,
Detection"

p.693 "Jam

For details,
Detection"

p.693 "Jam

Main SP Tables-7

001 At Power On
003 Skew Correction: ON
004 Registration: ON
005 Paper Exit: ON

*CTL

For details,
Detection"

p.693 "Jam

053 Skew Correction: OFF

054 Registration: OFF
055 Paper Exit: OFF

7506

[Jam Count by Paper Size]

Displays the number of jams according to the paper size.
005 A4 LEF

006 A5 LEF
014 B5 LEF
038 LT LEF
044 HLT LEF
132 A3 SEF
133 A4 SEF
134 A5 SEF

*CTL

[0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step ]

141 B4 SEF
142 B5 SEF
160 DLT SEF
164 LG SEF
166 LT SEF
172 HLT SEF
255 Others

475

5. System Maintenance

7507

[Plotter Jam History]

Displays the 10 most recently detected paper jams.

001 Latest
002 Latest 1
003 Latest 2
004 Latest 3
005 Latest 4
006 Latest 5

*CTL

007 Latest 6
008 Latest 7
009 Latest 8
010 Latest 9

7508

[Original Jam History]

Displays the 10 most recently detected original jams.
001 Latest
002 Latest-1
003 Latest-2
004 Latest-3
005 Latest-4
006 Latest-5
007 Latest-6
008 Latest-7
009 Latest-8
010 Latest-9

7624
476

[Parts PM Use Setting]

*CTL

Main SP Tables-7

7801

001 PCU:Bk

*CTL

002 PCU:M

*CTL

003 PCU:C

*CTL

004 PCU:Y

*CTL

005 Dev Unit:Bk

*CTL

006 Dev Unit:M

*CTL

007 Dev Unit:C

*CTL

008 Dev Unit:Y

*CTL

009 Image Transfer Belt

*CTL

010 ITB Cleaning Unit

*CTL

011 Fusing Unit

*CTL

012 PTR Unit

*CTL

013 PCU Toner Collection Bottle

*CTL

0: No (Not PM maintenance)
1: Yes (PM maintenance)

[ROM No./Firmware Version]

255 -

7803

[0 or 1 / 1 / -]

*CTL

Displays all versions and ROM numbers in the

machine.

[PM Counter Display]

(Page, Unit, [Color])
Displays the number of sheets printed for each current maintenance unit.
PM counters click up based on the number of A4 (LT) LEF size sheets printed. Therefore,
the A3 (DLT) Double Count is activated. The Double Count cannot be deactivated.

-001 to When a unit is replaced, the machine automatically detects that the new unit is installed.
-021 Then, the current PM counter value is automatically moved to the PM Counter - Previous
(SP7-906-1 to 21) and is reset to "0".
The total number of sheets printed with the last unit replaced can be checked with
SP7-906-1 to 21.
001 Paper

477

5. System Maintenance

002 Page: PCU: Bk

003 Page: PCU: C
004 Page: PCU: M
005 Page: PCU: Y
006 Page: Development Unit: Bk
007 Page: Development Unit: C
008 Page: Development Unit: M
009 Page: Development Unit: Y

010 Page: Developer: Bk

011 Page: Developer: C
012 Page: Developer: M
013 Page: Developer: Y
014 Page: ITB Unit
015 Page: ITB Cleaning Unit
016 Page: Fusing Unit
017 Page:Fusing Pad
018 Page: Fusing Belt
019 Page:PTR Unit
020 Page:ITB T-Collect Bottle
021 Page:PCU T-Collect Bottle
Displays the number of revolutions of motors or clutches for each current maintenance unit.
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 revolution/step ]
-031 to When a unit is replaced, the machine automatically detects that the new unit is installed.
-048 Then, the current PM counter value is automatically moved to the PM Counter - Previous
(SP7-906-31 to 48) and is reset to "0". The total number of revolutions made with the last
unit replaced can be checked with SP7-906-31 to 48.
031 Rotation: PCU: Bk

478

Main SP Tables-7

032 Rotation: PCU: C

033 Rotation: PCU: M
034 Rotation: PCU: Y
035 Rotation: Development Unit: Bk
036 Rotation: Development Unit: C
037 Rotation: Development Unit: M
038 Rotation: Development Unit: Y
039 Rotation: Developer: Bk
040 Rotation: Developer: C
041 Rotation: Developer: M

042 Rotation: Developer: Y

043 Rotation:ITB Unit
044 Rotation: ITB Cleaning Unit
045 Rotation: Fusing Unit
046 Rotation: Fusing Pad
047 Rotation: Fusing Belt
048 Rotation: PTR Unit
-049 to [0 to 999999999 / - / 1 mg/step ]
-050 Displays the total amount of each toner collection bottle.
049 Amount:ITB T-Collect Bottle
050 Amount:PCU T-Collect Bottle

479

5. System Maintenance

[0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]
Displays the value given by the following formula:
(Current revolution Target revolution) 100. This shows how much of the units expected
-061 to lifetime has been used up.
-078
The Rotation% counter is based on rotations, not prints. If the number of rotations reaches
the limit, the machine enters the end condition for that unit. If the print count lifetime is
reached first, the machine also enters the end condition, even though the R% counter is still
less than 100%.
061 Rotation (%): PCU: Bk
062 Rotation (%): PCU: C
063 Rotation (%): PCU: M

064 Rotation (%): PCU: Y

065 Rotation (%): Development Unit: Bk
066 Rotation (%): Development Unit: C
067 Rotation (%): Development Unit:M
068 Rotation (%): Development Unit: Y
069 Rotation (%): Developer: Bk
070 Rotation (%): Developer: C
071 Rotation (%): Developer: M
072 Rotation (%): Developer: Y
073 Rotation (%): ITB Unit
074 Rotation (%): ITB Cleaning Unit
075 Rotation (%): Fusing Unit
076 Rotation (%): Fusing Pad
077 Rotation (%): Fusing Belt
078 Rotation (%):PTR Unit
-079 to [0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]
-080 Displays how much of the units expected lifetime has been used up.

480

Main SP Tables-7

079 Amt(%):ITB T-Collect Bottle

080 Amt(%):PCU T-Collect Bottle
Displays the value given by the following formula:
(Current printouts Target printouts) 100. This shows how much of the units expected
lifetime has been used up.

-091 to
-108 The Page% counter is based on printouts, not revolutions. If the number of printouts reaches
the limit, the machine enters the end condition for that unit. If the revolution count lifetime is
reached first, the machine also enters the end condition, even though the Page% counter
is still less than 100%.
091 Page (%): PCU: Bk
092 Page (%): PCU: C

093 Page (%): PCU: M

094 Page (%): PCU: Y
095 Page (%): Development Unit: Bk
096

*ENG

[0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]

*ENG

[0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]

Page (%): Development Unit: C

097 Page (%): Development Unit: M
098 Page (%): Development Unit: Y
099 Page (%): Developer: Bk
100 Page (%): Developer: C
101 Page (%): Developer: M
102 Page (%): Developer: Y
103 Page (%): ITB Unit
104 Page (%): ITB Cleaning Unit
105 Page (%): Fusing Unit
106 Page (%): Fusing Pad
107 Page (%): Fusing Belt
108 Page (%): PTR Unit

481

5. System Maintenance

7804

[PM Counter Reset] PM Counter Clear

(Unit, [Color])
Clears the PM counter.
Press the Enter key after the machine asks "Execute?", which will store the PM counter value
in SP7-906 (PM Counter - Previous) and reset the value of the current PM counter
(SP7-803) to "0".
001 Paper
002 PCU: Bk
003 PCU: C

004 PCU: M
005 PCU: Y
006 PCU: All
007 Development Unit: Bk
008 Development Unit: C
009 Development Unit: M
010 Development Unit: Y
011 Development Unit: All
012 Developer: Bk
013 Developer: C
014 Developer: M
015 Developer: Y
016 Developer: All
017 ITB Unit
018 ITB Cleaning Unit
019 Fusing Unit
020 Fusing Pad
021 Fusing Belt

482

Main SP Tables-7

022 PTR Unit

023 ITB T-Collect Bottle
024 PCU T-Collect Bottle
100 All

7807

[SC/Jam Counter Reset]

Clears the counters related to SC codes and paper jams.

001 -

*CTL

001 Error Total

*CTL

002 Error Staple

*CTL

7826

7827

[MF Error Counter] Japan Only

[MF Error Counter Clear] Japan Only

-

7832

*CTL

Displays the result of the diagnostics.

*CTL

[ACC Counter]

001 Copy ACC

002 Printer ACC

--

7836

[Self-Diagnose Result Display]

001 7835

Displays the ACC exectuion times for each mode.

Total Memory Size (CTL)

Displays the memory capacity of the controller system.

001 -

*CTL

483

5. System Maintenance

[DF Glass Dust Check]

7852

7853

484

Counts the number of occurrences (0 to 65,535) when dust was detected on the scanning
glass of the ADF or resets the dust detection counter. Counting is done only if SP4-020-1
(ADF Scan Glass Dust Check) is switched on.
001 Dust Detection Counter

*CTL

002 Dust Detection Clear Counter

*CTL

[0 to 65535 / - / 1 /step]

[Replacement Counter]
Displays the PM parts replacement number.
001 PCU: Bk

*CTL

002 PCU: C

*CTL

003 PCU: M

*CTL

004 PCU: Y

*CTL

005 Development Unit: Bk

*CTL

006 Development Unit: C

*CTL

007 Development Unit: M

*CTL

008 Development Unit: Y

*CTL

009 Developer: Bk

*CTL

010 Developer: C

*CTL

011 Developer: M

*CTL

012 Developer: Y

*CTL

013 ITB Unit

*CTL

014 ITB Cleaning Unit

*CTL

015 Fusing Unit

*CTL

016 Fusing Pad

*CTL

017 Fusing Belt

*CTL

[0 to 255 / - / 1 /step]

Main SP Tables-7

018 PTR Unit

*CTL

019 ITB T-Collect Bottle

*CTL

020 PCU T-Collect Bottle

*CTL

[0 to 255 / - / 1 /step]

[Coverage Range]
Sets the color coverage threshold.
Coverage rate = Coverage per page / A4 full coverage (dots) x 100
There are three coverage counters: Color 1, Color 2, and Color 3
[A] 5% (default) is adjustable with SP7855-001.
[B] 20% (default) is adjustable with SP7855-002.
7855

The setting value [B] must be set larger than [A].

The total numbers of printouts (BW printing plus color printing) for each coverage range
are displayed with the following SPs.
Color1 counter: SP8601-021
Color2 counter: SP8601-022
Color3 counter: SP8601-023

7906

001 Coverage Range 1

*CTL

[1 to 200 / 5 /1]

002 Coverage Range 2

*CTL

[1 to 200 / 20 /1]

[Prev. Unit PM Counter]

(Page or Rotations, Unit, [Color]), Dev.: Development Unit

*ENG

-001 to Displays the number of sheets printed with the previous maintenance units.
-020 [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 page/step ]
001 Page: PCU: Bk
002 Page: PCU: C
003 Page: PCU: M
004 Page: PCU: Y
005 Page: Development Unit: Bk

485

5. System Maintenance

006 Page: Development Unit: C

007 Page: Development Unit: M
008 Page: Development Unit: Y
009 Page: Developer: Bk
010 Page: Developer: C
011 Page: Developer: M
012 Page: Developer: Y
013 Page: ITB Unit

014 Page: ITB Cleaning Unit

015 Page: Fusing Unit
016 Page: Fusing Pad
017 Page: Fusing Belt
018 Page: PTR Unit
019 Page:ITB T-Collect Bottle
020 Page:PCU T-Collect Bottle
-031 to Displays the number of revolutions for motors or clutches in the previous maintenance units.
-050 [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 mm/step ]
031 Rotation: PCU: Bk
032 Rotation: PCU: C
033 Rotation: PCU: M
034 Rotation: PCU: Y
035 Rotation: Development Unit: Bk
036 Rotation: Development Unit: C
037 Rotation: Development Unit: M
038 Rotation: Development Unit: Y
039 Rotation: Developer: Bk

486

Main SP Tables-7

040 Rotation: Developer: C

041 Rotation: Developer: M
042 Rotation: Developer: Y
043 Rotation: ITB Unit
044 Rotation: ITB Cleaning Unit
045 Rotation: Fusing Unit
046 Rotation: Fusing Pad
047 Rotation: Fusing Belt
048 Rotation: PTR Unit
049 Rotation:ITB T-Collect Bottle

050 Rotation:PCU T-Collect Bottle

-061 to Displays the number of sheets printed with the previous maintenance unit or toner cartridge.
-080 [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %/step ]
061 Rotation %: PCU: Bk
062 Rotation %: PCU: C
063 Rotation %: PCU: M
064 Rotation %: PCU: Y
065 Rotation %: Development Unit: Bk
066 Rotation %: Development Unit: C
067 Rotation %: Development Unit: M
068 Rotation %: Development Unit: Y
069 Rotation %: Developer: Bk
070 Rotation %: Developer: C
071 Rotation %: Developer: M
072 Rotation %: Developer: Y
073 Rotation %: ITB Unit

487

5. System Maintenance

074 Rotation %: ITB Cleaning Unit

075 Rotation %: Fusing Unit
076 Rotation %: Fusing Pad
077 Rotation %: Fusing Belt
078 Rotation %: PTR Unit
079 Rotation %:ITB T-Collect Bottle
080 Rotation %:PCU T-Collect Bottle
Displays the value given by the following formula:

-091 to (Current count Yield count) x 100, where "Current count" is the current values in the counter
-108 for the part, and "Yield count" is the recommended yield.
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %/step ]
091 Page (%): PCU: Bk
092 Page (%): PCU: C
093 Page (%): PCU: M
094 Page (%): PCU: Y
095 Page (%): Development Unit: Bk
096 Page (%): Development Unit: C
097 Page (%): Development Unit: M
098 Page (%): Development Unit: Y
099 Page (%): Developer: Bk
100 Page (%): Developer: C
101 Page (%): Developer: M
102 Page (%): Developer: Y
103 Page (%): ITB Unit
104 Page (%): ITB Cleaning Unit
105 Page (%): Fusing Unit

488

Main SP Tables-7

106 Page (%): Fusing Pad

107 Page (%): Fusing Belt
108 Page (%): PTR Unit

7931

[Toner Bottle Bk]

Displays the toner bottle information for Bk.
001 Machine Serial ID

*ENG

002 Cartridge Ver

*EGN

003 Brand ID

*EGN

004 Area ID

*EGN

005 Product ID

*EGN

006 Color ID

*EGN

007 Maintenance ID

*EGN

008 New Product Information

*EGN

009 Recycle Counter

*EGN

010 Date

*EGN

011 Serial No.

*EGN

012 Toner Remaining

*EGN

5
-

489

5. System Maintenance

5
7932

490

013 EDP Code

*EGN

014 End History

*EGN

015 Refill Information

*EGN

016 Attachment: Total Counter

*EGN

017 Attachment: Color Counter

*EGN

018 End: Total Counter

*EGN

019 End: Color Counter

*EGN

020 Attachment Date

*EGN

021 End Date

*EGN

[Toner Bottle M]
Displays the toner bottle information for M.
001 Machine Serial ID

*ENG

002 Cartridge Ver

*EGN

003 Brand ID

*EGN

004 Area ID

*EGN

005 Product ID

*EGN

006 Color ID

*EGN

007 Maintenance ID

*EGN

008 New Product Information

*EGN

009 Recycle Counter

*EGN

010 Date

*EGN

011 Serial No.

*EGN

012 Toner Remaining

*EGN

Main SP Tables-7

013 EDP Code

*EGN

014 End History

*EGN

015 Refill Information

*EGN

016 Attachment: Total Counter

*EGN

017 Attachment: Color Counter

*EGN

018 End: Total Counter

*EGN

019 End: Color Counter

*EGN

020 Attachment Date

*EGN

021 End Date

7933

[Toner Bottle C]
Displays the toner bottle information for C.
001 Machine Serial ID

*ENG

002 Cartridge Ver

*EGN

003 Brand ID

*EGN

004 Area ID

*EGN

005 Product ID

*EGN

006 Color ID

*EGN

007 Maintenance ID

*EGN

008 New Product Information

*EGN

009 Recycle Counter

*EGN

010 Date

*EGN

011 Serial No.

*EGN

012 Toner Remaining

*EGN

491

5. System Maintenance

5
7934

492

013 EDP Code

*EGN

014 End History

*EGN

015 Refill Information

*EGN

016 Attachment: Total Counter

*EGN

017 Attachment: Color Counter

*EGN

018 End: Total Counter

*EGN

019 End: Color Counter

*EGN

020 Attachment Date

*EGN

021 End Date

*EGN

[Toner Bottle Y]
Displays the toner bottle information for Y.
001 Machine Serial ID

*ENG

002 Cartridge Ver

*EGN

003 Brand ID

*EGN

004 Area ID

*EGN

005 Product ID

*EGN

006 Color ID

*EGN

007 Maintenance ID

*EGN

008 New Product Information

*EGN

009 Recycle Counter

*EGN

010 Date

*EGN

Main SP Tables-7

7935

011 Serial No.

*EGN

012 Toner Remaining

*EGN

013 EDP Code

*EGN

014 End History

*EGN

015 Refill Information

*EGN

016 Attachment: Total Counter

*EGN

017 Attachment: Color Counter

*EGN

018 End: Total Counter

*EGN

019 End: Color Counter

*EGN

020 Attachment Date

*EGN

021 End Date

*EGN

[Toner Bottle Log 1: Bk]

001 Serial No.
002 Attachment Date
003 Attachment: Total Counter

*ENG

Displays the toner bottle information log

1 for Bk.

*ENG

Displays the toner bottle information log

2 for Bk.

*ENG

Displays the toner bottle information log

3 for Bk.

004 Refill Information

005 Serial No.
006 Attachment Date
007 Attachment: Total Counter
008 Refill Information
009 Serial No.
010 Attachment Date
011 Attachment: Total Counter
012 Refill Information

493

5. System Maintenance

013 Serial No.

014 Attachment Date
015 Attachment: Total Counter

*ENG

Displays the toner bottle information log

4 for Bk.

*ENG

Displays the toner bottle information log

5 for Bk.

*ENG

Displays the toner bottle information log

1 for M.

*ENG

Displays the toner bottle information log

2 for M.

*ENG

Displays the toner bottle information log

3 for M.

*ENG

Displays the toner bottle information log

4 for M.

016 Refill Information

017 Serial No.
018 Attachment Date
019 Attachment: Total Counter
020 Refill Information

7936

[Toner Bottle Log 1: M]

001 Serial No.
002 Attachment Date
003 Attachment: Total Counter
004 Refill Information
005 Serial No.
006 Attachment Date
007 Attachment: Total Counter
008 Refill Information
009 Serial No.
010 Attachment Date
011 Attachment: Total Counter
012 Refill Information
013 Serial No.
014 Attachment Date
015 Attachment: Total Counter
016 Refill Information

494

Main SP Tables-7

017 Serial No.

018 Attachment Date
019 Attachment: Total Counter

*ENG

Displays the toner bottle information log

5 for M.

*ENG

Displays the toner bottle information log

1 for C.

020 Refill Information

7937

[Toner Bottle Log 1: C]

001 Serial No.
002 Attachment Date
003 Attachment: Total Counter

004 Refill Information

005 Serial No.
006 Attachment Date
007 Attachment: Total Counter

*ENG

Displays the toner bottle information log

2 for C.

*ENG

Displays the toner bottle information log

3 for C.

*ENG

Displays the toner bottle information log

4 for C.

*ENG

Displays the toner bottle information log

5 for C.

008 Refill Information

009 Serial No.
010 Attachment Date
011 Attachment: Total Counter
012 Refill Information
013 Serial No.
014 Attachment Date
015 Attachment: Total Counter
016 Refill Information
017 Serial No.
018 Attachment Date
019 Attachment: Total Counter
020 Refill Information

495

5. System Maintenance

7938

[Toner Bottle Log 1: Y]

001 Serial No.
002 Attachment Date
003 Attachment: Total Counter

*ENG

Displays the toner bottle information log

1 for Y.

*ENG

Displays the toner bottle information log

2 for Y.

*ENG

Displays the toner bottle information log

3 for Y.

*ENG

Displays the toner bottle information log

4 for Y.

*ENG

Displays the toner bottle information log

5 for Y.

004 Refill Information

005 Serial No.
006 Attachment Date
007 Attachment: Total Counter
008 Refill Information

009 Serial No.

010 Attachment Date
011 Attachment: Total Counter
012 Refill Information
013 Serial No.
014 Attachment Date
015 Attachment: Total Counter
016 Refill Information
017 Serial No.
018 Attachment Date
019 Attachment: Total Counter
020 Refill Information

7950

496

[Unit Replacement Date]

Displays the replacement date of each PM unit.

Main SP Tables-7

001 ITB Unit

*ENG

002 ITB Cleaning Unit

*EGN

003 PTR Unit

*EGN

004 Fusing Unit

*EGN

005 Fusing Pad

*EGN

006 Fusing Belt

*EGN

013 PCU: Bk

*EGN

014 PCU: C

*EGN

015 PCU: M

*EGN

016 PCU: Y

*EGN

017 Development Unit:Bk

*EGN

018 Development Unit:C

*EGN

019 Development Unit:M

*EGN

020 Development Unit:Y

*EGN

021 Developer:Bk

*EGN

022 Developer:C

*EGN

023 Developer:M

*EGN

024 Developer:Y

*EGN

[Remaining Day Counter]

7951

*ENG

Displays the remaining unit life of each PM unit.

[0 to 255 / 255 / 1 day/step]
001 Page: PCU: Bk
002 Page: PCU: C
003 Page: PCU: M
004 Page: PCU: Y

497

5. System Maintenance

005 Page: Development Unit: Bk

006 Page: Development Unit: C
007 Page: Development Unit: M
008 Page: Development Unit: Y
009 Page: Developer: Bk
010 Page: Developer: C
011 Page: Developer: M
012 Page: Developer: Y

013 Page: ITB Unit

014 Page: ITB Cleaning Unit
015 Page: Fusing Unit
016 Page: Fusing Pad
017 Page: Fusing Belt
018 Page: PTR Unit
031 Rotation: PCU: Bk
032 Rotation: PCU: C
033 Rotation: PCU: M
034 Rotation: PCU: Y
035 Rotation: Development Unit: Bk
036 Rotation: Development Unit: C
037 Rotation: Development Unit: M
038 Rotation: Development Unit: Y
039 Rotation: Developer: Bk
040 Rotation: Developer: C
041 Rotation: Developer: M
042 Rotation: Developer: Y

498

Main SP Tables-7

043 Rotation: ITB Unit

044 Rotation: ITB Cleaning Unit
045 Rotation: Fusing Unit
046 Rotation: Fusing Pad
047 Rotation: Fusing Belt
048 Rotation:PTR Unit
049 Rotation:ITB T-Collect Bottle
050 Rotation:PCU T-Collect Bottle

[PM Yield Setting]

7952

Adjusts the unit yield of each PM unit.

001 Rotation: ITB Unit

*EGN

[0 to 999999999 / 172177000 / 1000 mm/

step]

002 Rotation: ITB Cleaning Unit

*EGN

[0 to 999999999 / 129133000 / 1 mm/step]

003 Rotation: Fusing Unit

*EGN

004 Rotation: Fusing Roller

*EGN

005 Rotation: Fusing Belt

*EGN

006 Rotation:PTR Unit

*EGN

[0 to 999999999 / 172177000 / 1000 mm/

step]

*EGN

[0 to 999999999 / 300000 / 1000 mg/step]

011 Page: ITB Unit

*EGN

[0 to 999999 / 240000 / 1000 sheet/step]

012 Page: ITB Cleaning Unit

*EGN

[0 to 999999 / 180000 / 1 sheet/step]

013 Page: Fusing Unit

*EGN

014 Page: Fusing Pad

*EGN

015 Page: Fusing Belt

*EGN

[0 to 999999999 / 87264000 / 1000 mm/

step]

007 Amount:ITB T-Collect Bottle

008

Amount:PCU T-Collect
Bottle

[0 to 999999 / 144000 / 1 sheet/step]

499

5. System Maintenance

016 Page: PTR Unit

*EGN

021 Day Threshold: PCU: Bk

*EGN

022 Day Threshold: PCU: C

*EGN

023 Day Threshold: PCU: M

*EGN

024 Day Threshold: PCU: Y

*EGN

Day Threshold:
025
Development Unit: Bk

*EGN

026

Day Threshold:
Development Unit: C

*EGN

027

Day Threshold:
Development Unit: M

*EGN

028

Day Threshold:
Development Unit: Y

*EGN

029

Day Threshold: Developer:

Bk

*EGN

030

Day Threshold: Developer:

C

*EGN

031

Day Threshold: Developer:

M

*EGN

Day Threshold: Developer:

032
Y

*EGN

033 Day Threshold: ITB Unit

*EGN

Day Threshold: ITB

Cleaning Unit

*EGN

035 Day Threshold: Fusing Unit

*EGN

036 Day Threshold: Fusing Roller

*EGN

037 Day Threshold: Fusing Belt

*EGN

034

500

[0 to 999999 / 240000 / 1 sheet/step]

Adjusts the threshold day of the near end for each

PM unit.
[1 to 30 / 15 / 1 day/step]
These threshold days are used for @Remote
alarms.

Adjusts the threshold day of the near end for each

PM unit.
[1 to 30 / 15 / 1 day/step]
These threshold days are used for @Remote
alarms.

Main SP Tables-7

038 Rotation: PCU: Bk

039 Rotation: PCU: C

*EGN
[0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm/step]

040 Rotation: PCU: M

041 Rotation: PCU: Y
042

Rotation: Development Unit:

Bk

*EGN

043

Rotation: Development Unit:

C

*EGN

Rotation: Development Unit:

044
M

*EGN

Rotation: Development Unit:

Y

*EGN

045

[0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm/step]

046 Rotation: Developer: Bk

047 Rotation: Developer: C
048 Rotation: Developer: M

*EGN

[0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm/step]

*EGN

[0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]

*EGN

[0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]

049 Rotation: Developer: Y

050 Page: PCU: Bk
051 Page: PCU: C
052 Page: PCU: M
053 Page: PCU: Y
054 Page: Development Unit: Bk
055 Page: Development Unit: C
056 Page: Development Unit: M
057 Page: Development Unit: Y

501

5. System Maintenance

058 Page: Developer: Bk

059 Page: Developer: C
060 Page: Developer: M

*EGN

[0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]

061 Page: Developer: Y

062 Day Threshold:PTR Unit
063 Day Thresh:ITB T-Collect Bttl
064

7953

Day Thresh:PCU T-Collect

Bttl

Adjusts the threshold day of the near end for each

PM unit.
*EGN

[1 to 30 / 15 / 1 day/step]
These threshold days are used for @Remote
alarms.

[Operation Env. Log: PCU: Bk]

Displays the PCU rotation distance in each specified operation environment.
T: Temperature (C), H: Relative Humidity (%)
001 T<=0
002 0<T<=5:0<=H<30
003 0<T<=5:30<=H<70
004 T<=5: 70<=H<=100
005 5<T<15: 0<=H<30
006 5<T<15: 30<=H<55
007 5<T<15: 55<=H<80
008 5<T<15: 80<=H<=100
009 15<=T<25: 0<=H<30
010 15<=T<25: 30<=H<55

502

*CTL

[0 to 99999999 / - / 1 mm/step]

Main SP Tables-7

011 15<=T<25: 55<=H<80

012 15<=T<25: 80<=H<=100
013 25<=T<30: 0<=H<30
014 25<=T<30: 30<=H<55
015 25<=T<30: 55<=H<80
016 25<=T<30: 80<=H<=100

*CTL

[0 to 99999999 / - / 1 mm/step]

017 30<=T: 0<=H<30

018 30<=T: 30<=H<55
019 30<=T: 55<=H<80
020 30<=T: 80<=H<=100

7954

[Operation Env. Log Clear]

Clears the operation environment log.
001 -

503

5. System Maintenance

Main SP Tables-8
Input and Output Check Tables
Input Check Table
When entering the Input Check mode, 8 digits display the result for a section. Each digit corresponds to a
different device as shown in the table.

Bit No.

Result

0 or 1

0 or 1

0 or 1

0 or 1

0 or 1

0 or 1

0 or 1

0 or 1

Copier
5803

504

Description

Reading
0

5803 1 C-Dev. Mtr:LOCK

Normal

Lock

5803 2 C-Drum Mtr:LOCK

Normal

Lock

5803 3 Bk-Drum/Dev. Mtr:LOCK

Normal

Lock

5803 4 ITB Mtr:LOCK

Normal

Lock

5803 5 Fusing/P-Exit Mtr:LOCK

Normal

Lock

5803 6 Electrical FAN:LOCK

Normal

Lock

5803 7 Fusing Fan:LOCK

Normal

Lock

5803 8 Dev. Front Fan:LOCK

Normal

Lock

5803 9 Dev. Rear Fan:LOCK

Normal

Lock

5803 10 Fusing Exit Fan:LOCK

Normal

Lock

5803 11 LD Unit FAN:LOCK

Normal

Lock

5803 12 Jun. Gate SOL Fan:LOCK

Normal

Lock

5803 13 Fusing:New Detection

New

Not new

5803 14 Fusing:Area Detection

Main SP Tables-8

5803 15 Zero Cross

Not detected

Detected

Paper detected

No paper detected

5803 17 Drum Phase Sn:Bk

Actuator not detected

Actuator detected

5803 18 Drum Phase Sn:Color

Actuator not detected

Actuator detected

Inverter gate open

Inverter gate close

5803 20 Duplex Exit Sensor

Paper detected

No paper detected

5803 21 Duplex Entrance Sensor

Paper detected

No paper detected

HP

Not HP

5803 23 HVPS:CB

5803 24 HVPS:T

5803 25 Right Door Open SW

Door close

Door open

5803 26 Right Lower Cover OP SW

Cover close

Cover open

5803 27 Mechanical Counter:Bk

Not set

Set

5803 28 Mechanical Counter:FC

Not set

Set

5803 29 Key Counter Set Sensor

Set

Not set

5803 30 Key Card Set Sensor

Set

Not set

5803 31 Toner End Sensor: K

End

Not end

5803 32 Toner End Sensor: C

End

Not end

5803 33 Toner End Sensor: M

End

Not end

5803 34 Toner End Sensor: Y

End

Not end

5803 35 Fusing Entrance Sensor

Paper detected

No paper detected

5803 36 Fusing Exit Sensor

Paper detected

No paper detected

5803 37 Paper Exit Sensor

Paper detected

No paper detected

5803 16 Regist Sensor

5803 19 Inverter Sensor

5803 22

ID/MUSIC Sn Shutter HP Sn
(PTR Contact Sensor)

5803 38 ITB Contact HP Sensor

HP (Contact)

Not HP
(not contact)

505

5. System Maintenance

5803 39 ITB T-Collect Bttl:Set SW

Set

Not set

5803 40 PCU T-Collect Bttl:Set SW

Set

Not set

5803 41 PCU T-Collect Bttl Full Sn

Full

Not full

5803 42 Vertical Transport 1 Sn

Paper detected

No paper detected

5803 43 Vertical Transport 2 Sn

Paper detected

No paper detected

5803 44 Tray1 Size Detection SW

See "Table 1" below.

5803 45 Tray2 Size Detection SW

See "Table 1" below.

5803 46 Bypass Size Detection SW

See "Table 2" below.

5803 47 Bypass Length Detection Sn

Detected

Not detect

HP

Not HP

5803 49 Tray1 Paper End Sensor

Not end

End

5803 50 Tray2 Paper End Sensor

Not end

End

5803 51 Bypass Paper End Sensor

Not end

End

5803 52 Tray1 Set SW

Set

Not set

5803 53 Tray2 Set SW

Set

Not set

5803 54 Interlock SW 1

Door close

Door open

5803 55 Interlock SW 2

Door close

Door open

5803 56 DIP SW

5803 57 BCU Version

Not set

Set

Lock

Normal

Paper detected

No paper detected

Set

Not set

5803 72 1-Bin:Transport Sensor

Paper detected

No paper detected

5803 73 1-Bin:Paper Sensor

Paper detected

No paper detected

5803 74 1-Bin Set Detection

Set

Not set

5803 48 Bypass HP Sensor

5803 58 PCU T-Collect Motor Set

5803 59 Reserve Fan:LOCK
5803 70 R-Tray Paper Exit Sensor
5803 71 R-Tray Set Sensor

506

Main SP Tables-8

5803 75 Shift Tray:Half Turn Sn

Not HP

HP

5803 76 Shift Tray Set Detection

Not set

Set

5803 77 1T PFU:Size Sensors

See "Table 4".

5803 78 1T PFU:Paper Lift Sn

Not upper limit

Upper limit

5803 79 1T PFU:Paper Height Sn

5803 80 1T PFU:Right Cover SW

Open

Close

5803 81 1T PFU:Set Detection

Not set

Set

5803 82 1T PFU:Paper End Sn

Not end

End

5803 83 2T PFU:Upper Size Sns

See "Table 4" below.

5803 84 2T PFU:Lower Size Sns

5803 85 2T PFU:Upper Paper Lift Sn

Not upper limit

Upper limit

5803 86 2T PFU:Lower Paper Lift Sn

Not upper limit

Upper limit

5803 87 2T PFU:Upper Paper Height Sn

5803 88 2T PFU:Lower Paper Height Sn

Open

Close

5803 90 2T PFU:Upper PE Sn

Not end

End

5803 91 2T PFU:Lower PE Sn

Not end

End

5803 92 2T PFU:V-Transport Sn

Paper detected

No paper detected

5803 94 LD OFF Check:Factory

5803 200 Scanner HP Sensor

Not HP

HP

5803 201 Platen Cover Sensor

Open

Close

5803 89 2T PFU:Right Cover SW

Table 1: Paper Size Switch (Tray 1/ 2):

Switch 1 is used for tray set detection.
0: Pushed, 1: Not pushed
Models
North America

Bit
Europe/Asia

0
507

5. System Maintenance

11" x 17" SEF*1

A3 SEF*1

(A3 SEF)

(11" x 17" SEF)

8.5" x 14" SEF *2

B4 SEF *2

(B4 SEF)

(8.5" x 14" SEF)

A4 SEF

A4 SEF

8.5" x 11" SEF

8.5" x 11" SEF

B5 SEF

B5 SEF

11" x 81/2" LEF*3

A4 LEF*3

(A4 LEF)

(11" x 81/2" LEF)

10.5" x 7.25" LEF*4

B5 LEF*4

(B5 LEF)

(10.5" x 7.25" LEF)

A5 LEF

A5 LEF

*1: The machine detects either 11" x 17" SEF or A3 SEF, depending on the setting of SP 5-181-002
(Tray 1) or SP 5-181-006 (Tray 2).
*2: The machine detects either 8.5" x 14" SEF or B4 SEF, depending on the setting of SP 5-181-003
(Tray 1) or SP 5-181-007 (Tray 2).
*3: The machine detects either 11" x 81/2" LEF or A4 LEF, depending on the setting of SP 5-181-001
(Tray 1) or SP 5-181-005 (Tray 2).
*4: The machine detects either B5 LEF or 10.5" x 7.25" LEF, depending on the setting of SP 5-181-004
(Tray 1) or SP 5-181-008 (Tray 2).
Table 2: Paper Size (By-pass Table):
0: ON, 1: OFF
By-pass Paper Size Sensor

508

Length Sensor

NA

EU/ASIA

HLT SEF

B6 SEF

HLT SEF

A5 SEF

HLT SEF

A5 SEF

LT/LG SEF*1

A4 SEF

bit3

Bit2

Bit1

Bit0

1
0

Main SP Tables-8

By-pass Paper Size Sensor

Length Sensor

NA

EU/ASIA

LT/LG SEF*1

A5 LEF

DLT SEF

A3 SEF

LT LEF

A4 LEF

bit3

Bit2

Bit1

Bit0

*1: The paper size (LT or LG) can be selected with SP1-007-001.
Table 3: APS Original Size Detection:
Original Size

Width Sensor

Length Sensor

Metric version

Inch version

W1

W2

W3

L1

L2

SP4-301
display

A3

11" x 17"

00000011

B4

10" x 14"

00000011

F4
8.5" x 13", 8.25" x 13",
or 8" x 13"

8.5" x 14"

00000011

A4 LEF

8.5" x 11"

00000000

B5 LEF

00000000

A4 SEF

11" x 8.5"

00000010

B5 SEF

00000010

A5 LEF/ SEF

5.5" x 8.5",
8.5" x 5.5"

00000000

SP 5126 controls the size

that is detected

Table 4: Paper Size Switch (Tray 3/ 4):

"Bit 0" is used for tray set detection. 0: Set, 1: Not set
0: Not Interrupted, 1: Interrupted
Models
North America

Bit
Europe/Asia

509

5. System Maintenance

11" x 17" SEF*1

A3 SEF*1

(A3 SEF)

(11" x 17" SEF)

8.5" x 14" SEF *2

B4 SEF *2

(B4 SEF)

(8.5" x 14" SEF)

A4 SEF

A4 SEF

B5 SEF

B5 SEF

8.5" x 11" SEF

8.5" x 11" SEF

11" x 81/2" LEF*3

A4 LEF*3

(A4 LEF)

(11" x 81/2" LEF)

10.5" x 7.25" LEF*4

B5 LEF*4

(B5 LEF)

(10.5" x 7.25" LEF)

A5 LEF

A5 LEF

A5 SEF

A5 SEF

*1: The machine detects either 11" x 17" SEF or A3 SEF, depending on the setting of SP 5-181-010 (Tray
3) or SP 5-181-014 (Tray 4).
*2: The machine detects either 8.5" x 14" SEF or B4 SEF, depending on the setting of SP 5-181-011 (Tray
3) or SP 5-181-015 (Tray 4).
*3: The machine detects either 11" x 81/2" LEF or A4 LEF, depending on the setting of SP 5-181-009
(Tray 3) or SP 5-181-013 (Tray 4).
*4: The machine detects either B5 LEF or 10.5" x 7.25" LEF, depending on the setting of SP 5-181-012
(Tray 3) or SP 5-181-016 (Tray 4).
ARDF (D366)
6007

510

Description

Reading
0

6007 1 Original Length Sn1 (B5 Sn)

Paper not detected

Paper detected

6007 2 Original Length Sn2 (A4 Sn)

Paper not detected

Paper detected

6007 3 Original Length Sn3 (LG Sn)

Paper not detected

Paper detected

6007 4 Original Width Sn:S

Paper not detected

Paper detected

Main SP Tables-8

6007 5 Original Width Sn:M

Paper not detected

Paper detected

6007 6 Original Width Sn:L

Paper not detected

Paper detected

6007 7 Original Width Sn:LL

Paper not detected

Paper detected

6007 9 Original Set Sn

Paper not detected

Paper detected

6007 10 Trailing Edge Sn

Paper not detected

Paper detected

6007 11 Skew Correction Sn

Paper not detected

Paper detected

6007 13 Registration Sn

Paper not detected

Paper detected

6007 14 Exit Sn

Paper not detected

Paper detected

ADF cover close

ADF cover open

HP

Not HP

6007 15 Feed Cover SW

6007 16 Lift Up Sn

Internal Finisher (D429)

6120

Description

Reading
0

6120 1 Staple Slide HP Sensor

Not HP

HP

6120 2 Punch Slide HP Sensor

Not HP

HP

6120 3 Staple HP Sensor

Not HP

HP

6120 4 Paper T-Edge Sensor

Paper not detected

Paper detected

6120 5 Pick Roller Lift Sensor

Up

Down

Paper not detected

Paper detected

Down

Up

Paper not detected

Paper detected

6120 9 Rear Jogger HP Sensor

HP

Not HP

6120 10 Front Jogger HP Sensor

HP

Not HP

Normal

Lock

Close

Open

6120 6 Paper Detection Sensor

6120 7 Belt Roller Lift Sensor
6120 8 Entrance Sensor

6120 11 Fan Lock Signal

6120 12 Finisher Open Switch

511

5. System Maintenance

6120 13 Punch Unit:Area Detect2

See "Table 5" below.

6120 14 Punch Unit:Area Detect1

6120 15 Paper Stack Sensor 2

HP

Not HP

6120 16 Paper Stack Sensor 1

HP

Not HP

6120 17 Punch Position Sensor

Not HP

HP

6120 18 Paper Width Sensor:A3

Paper not detected

Paper detected

6120 19 Paper Width Sensor:LD

Paper not detected

Paper detected

6120 20 Paper Width Sensor:B4

Paper not detected

Paper detected

6120 21 Paper Width Sensor:A4

Paper not detected

Paper detected

6120 22 Paper Width Sensor:16K

Paper not detected

Paper detected

6120 23 Paper Width Sensor:B5

Paper not detected

Paper detected

Full

Not full

Upper

Not upper

Paper not detected

Paper detected

6120 27 Tray Lower Sensor

Lower

Not lower

6120 28 Jogger HP Sensor

Not HP

HP

6120 29 Punch HP Sensor

Not rear

Rear Position

6120 30 Stapler Safety Sensor

No staple

Staple detected

6120 31 Staple Empty Sensor

No staple

Staple detected

Not set

Set

6120 24 Punch Hopper Full Sensor

6120 25 Tray Upper Sensor
6120 26 Relay Sensor

6120 32 Punch Unit Sensor

Table 5: Area Display:
The bit 0 of these SPs shows the punch unit type.
2: 2 Holes, 2/3: 2/3 Holes, 4 (EU): 4 Holes Europe,
4 (Scan.): 4 Holes Scandinavia
SP
6120-013

512

Punch Unit:Area Detect2

2/3

4 (EU)

4 (Scan.)

Main SP Tables-8

6120-014

Punch Unit:Area Detect2

Output Check Table

Copier
5804

Display

Description

5804 1 Paper Feed M1:CW:190mm/s

5804 2 Paper Feed M1:CW:120mm/s

5804 3 Paper Feed M1:CW:60mm/s

5804 4 P-Feed M1:CW:60mm/s:Thick

5804 5 Paper Feed M1:CCW:190mm/s

5804 6 Paper Feed M1:CCW:120mm/s

5804 7 Paper Feed M1:CCW:60mm/s

5804 8 P-Feed M1:CCW:60mm/s:Thick

5804 9 Paper Feed M2:CW:190mm/s

5804 10 Paper Feed M2:CW:120mm/s

5804 11 Paper Feed M2:CW:60mm/s

5804 12 P-Feed M2:CW:60mm/s:Thick

5804 13 Paper Feed M2:CCW:190mm/s

5804 14 Paper Feed M2:CCW:120mm/s

5804 15 Paper Feed M2:CCW:60mm/s

5804 16 P-Feed M2:CCW:60mm/s:Thick

5804 17 Bypass M:CW:190mm/s

5804 18 Bypass M:CW:120mm/s

5804 19 Bypass M:CW:60mm/s:400mA

5804 20 Bypass M:CW:60mm/s:300mA

5804 21 Bypass M:CCW:190mm/s

513

5. System Maintenance

514

5804 22 Bypass M:CCW:120mm/s

5804 23 Bypass M:CCW:60mm/s

5804 24 Registration M:120mm/s

5804 25 Registration M:60mm/s

5804 26 Regist M:60mm/s:Thick

5804 27 Inverter M:CW:280mm/s

5804 29 Inverter M:CW:120mm/s

5804 31 Inverter M:CW:60mm/s

5804 33 Inverter M:280mm/s

5804 35 Inverter M:120mm/s

5804 37 Inverter M:60mm/s

5804 39 Duplex Exit M:280mm/s

5804 40 Duplex Exit M:120mm/s

5804 41 Duplex Exit M:60mm/s

5804 42 Duplex Ent. M:280mm/s

5804 43 Duplex Ent. M:120mm/s

5804 44 Duplex Ent. M:60mm/s

5804 45 Color Dev. M:120mm/s

5804 46 Color Dev. M:60mm/s

5804 47 Color Drum. M:120mm/s

5804 48 Color Drum. M:60mm/s

5804 49 Bk Drum M:120mm/s

5804 50 Bk Drum M:60mm/s

5804 51 ITB Motor:120mm/s

5804 52 ITB Motor:60mm/s

5804 53 Fusing/P-Exit M:120mm/s

Main SP Tables-8

5804 54 Fusing/P-Exit M:60mm/s

5804 55 Electrical FAN:H

5804 56 Electrical FAN:L

5804 57 Fusing Fan:H

5804 58 Fusing Fan:L

5804 59 Dev. Front FAN:H

5804 60 Dev. Front FAN:L

5804 61 Dev. Rear FAN:H

5804 62 Dev. Rear FAN:L

5804 63 Fusing Exit Fan:H

5804 64 Fusing Exit Fan:L

5804 65 LD Unit Fan:H

5804 67 PSU Fan:H

5804 69 Junc. Gate SOL Fan:H

5804 70 Junc. Gate SOL Fan:L

5804 71 Toner Supply M:Bk

5804 72 Toner Supply M:C

5804 73 Toner Supply M:M

5804 74 Toner Supply M:Y

5804 75 PCU T-Collect Motor

5804 76 ID/MUSIC Sn Shutter Motor

PTR Contact Motor

5804 77 ITB Contact Motor

5804 78 Bk Dev. Clutch

5804 79 Junction Gate SOL

5804 80 PWM:Potential Sn:Bk

5804 81 PWM:Potential Sn:C

515

5. System Maintenance

516

5804 82 PWM:Potential Sn:M

5804 83 PWM:Potential Sn:Y

5804 84 HVPS:Charge AC:Bk:H

5804 85 HVPS:Charge AC:Bk:L

5804 86 HVPS:Charge AC:C:H

5804 87 HVPS:Charge AC:C:L

5804 88 HVPS:Charge AC:M:H

5804 89 HVPS:Charge AC:M:L

5804 90 HVPS:Charge AC:Y:H

5804 91 HVPS:Charge AC:Y:L

5804 92 HVPS:Charge DC:Bk

5804 93 HVPS:Charge DC:C

5804 94 HVPS:Charge DC:M

5804 95 HVPS:Charge DC:Y

5804 96 HVPS:Dev. Bias:Bk

5804 97 HVPS:Dev. Bias:C

5804 98 HVPS:Dev. Bias:M

5804 99 HVPS:Dev. Bias:Y

5804 100 HVPS:PTR Bias:- PWM

5804 101 HVPS:PTR Bias:+ PWM

5804 102 HVPS:ITR Bias:Bk

5804 103 HVPS:ITR Bias:Bk

5804 104 HVPS:ITR Bias:Bk

5804 105 HVPS:ITR Bias:Bk

5804 106 MUSIC Sensor:R:PWM

5804 107 MUSIC Sensor:C:PWM

Main SP Tables-8

5804 108 MUSIC Sensor:F:PWM

5804 109 Reserve Fan:H

5804 110 Reserve Fan:LOCK

5804 111 Toner End Sn Power

5804 120 R-Tray M:280mm/s

5804 121 R-Tray M:120mm/s

5804 122 R-Tray SOL

5804 123 Shift Motor

5804 124 1T PFU:Tray Lift M

5804 125 1T PFU:Paper Feed M

5804 126 1T PFU:Paper Feed CL

5804 127 2T PFU:Relay CL

5804 128 2T PFU:Upper Feed CL

5804 129 2T PFU:Lower Feed CL

5804 130 2T PFU:P-Feed M:190mm/s

5804 131 2T PFU:P-Feed M:120mm/s

5804 132 2T PFU:P-Feed M:60mm/s

5804 133 2T PFU:Upper Tray Lift M

5804 134 2T PFU:Lower Tray Lift M

5804 192 RFID ON/OFF: Bk

5804 193 RFID ON/OFF: C

5804 194 RFID ON/OFF: M

5804 195 RFID ON/OFF: Y

5804 196 RFID COM ON: Bk

5804 197 RFID COM ON: C

5804 198 RFID COM ON: M

517

5. System Maintenance

5804 199 RFID COM ON: Y

5804 202 Scanner Lamp

5804 210 Polygon Motor

5804 216 LD1: Bk

5804 218 LD1: M

5804 220 LD1: C

5804 222 LD1: Y

Internal Finisher (D429)

518

6121

Description

Description

6121 1 Transport Motor

6121 2 Front Jogger Motor

6121 3 Rear Jogger Motor

6121 4 Stapler Slide Motor

6121 5 Stuck Feed-out Motor

6121 6 Pick Roller Lift Motor

6121 7 Staple Motor

6121 8 Tray Lift Motor

6121 9 Paper Detection SOL

6121 10 Paddle Rotation SOL

6121 11 Belt Roller SOL

6121 12 Junction Gate SOL

6121 13 Fan Motor

6120 14 Punch Motor

6120 15 Punch Slide Motor

6120 16 Inverter Roller SOL

Main SP Tables-8

ARDF (D366)
6008

Display

Description

6008 3 Feed Motor: Forward

Feed Motor-Forward rotation

6008 4 Feed Motor: Reverse

Feed Motor-Reverse rotation

6008 5 Transport Motor: Forward

Transport Motor- Forward rotation

6008 6 Transport Motor: Forward

Transport Motor- Forward rotation

6008 9 Feed Clutch

6008 10 Pick-up Solenoid

6008 11 Junction Gate Solenoid

6008 12 Stamp Solenoid

Stamp Solenoid

519

5. System Maintenance

Main SP Tables-9
Printer Service Mode
SP1-XXX (Service Mode)
1001

Bit Switch

001 Bit Switch 1

bit 0

DFU

bit 1

DFU

bit 2

DFU

bit 3

No I/O Timeout

0: Disable

1: Enable

Enable: The MFP I/O Timeout setting will have no effect. I/O Timeouts will never occur.
bit 4

SD Card Save Mode

0: Disable

Enable: Print jobs will be saved to an SD Card in the GW SD slot (

Save Function").

1: Enable
p.560 "Card

bit 5

DFU

bit 6

DFU

bit 7

[RPCS,PCL]: Printable area frame border

0: Disable

1: Enable

Enable: The machine prints all RPCS and PCL jobs with a border on the edges of the
printable area.
1001

520

Bit Switch

Main SP Tables-9

002 Bit Switch 2

bit 0

DFU

bit 1

DFU

bit 2

Applying a collation Type

Shift Collate

Normal Collate

A collation type (shift or normal) will be applied to all jobs that do not already have a
Collate Type configured.
If #5-0 is enabled, this Bit Switch has no effect.
bit 3

[PCL5e/c,PS]: PDL Auto Switching

0: Enable

1: Disable

Disable: The MFPs ability to change the PDL processor mid-job.

Some host systems submit jobs that contain both PS and PCL5e/c. If Auto PDL switching
is disabled, these jobs will not be printed properly.

1001

bit 4

DFU

bit 5

DFU

bit 6

DFU

bit 7

DFU

Bit Switch

521

5. System Maintenance

003 Bit Switch 3

bit 0

DFU

bit 1

DFU

bit 2

[PCL5e/c]: Legacy HP compatibility

0: Disable

1: Enable

Enable: Uses the same left margin as older HP models such as HP4000/HP8000.
In other words, the left margin defined in the job (usually "<ESC>*r0A") will be changed
to "<ESC>*r1A"

1001

bit 3

DFU

bit 4

DFU

bit 5

DFU

bit 6

DFU

bit 7

DFU

Bit Switch

004 Bit Switch 4 DFU

bit 0

DFU

bit 1

DFU

bit 2

DFU

bit 3

IPDS print-side reversal

0: Disable

1: Enable

If enabled, the simplex pages of IPDS jobs will be printed on the front side because of
printing on the back side of the page. This might reduce printing speed.

1001

bit 4

DFU

bit 5

DFU

bit 6

DFU

bit 7

DFU

Bit Switch

005 Bit Switch 5

522

Main SP Tables-9

Show "Collate Type", "Staple Type" and "Punch

Type" buttons on the operation panel.
bit 0

Disable

Enable

If enabled, users will be able to configure a Collate Type, Staple Type, and Punch Type
from the operation panel. The available types will depend on the device and configured
options.
After enabling the function, the settings will appear under:
"User Tools > Printer Features > System"

bit 1

Multiple copies if a paper size or type mismatch

occurs

0: Disable
(Single
copy)

1: Enable
(Multiple copy)

If a paper size or type mismatch occurs during the printing of multiple copies, only a
single copy is output by default. Using this BitSw, the device can be configured to print
all copies even if a paper mismatch occurs.
bit 2

DFU

bit 3

[PS] PS Criteria

Pattern3

Pattern1

Change the number of PS criterion used by the PS interpreter to determine whether a

job is PS data or not.
Pattern3: includes most PS commands.
Pattern1: A small number of PS tags and headers
bit 4

Increase max number of the stored jobs to 1000

jobs.

Disable
(100)

Enable (1000)

Enable: Changes the maximum number of jobs that can be stored on the HDD via Job
Type settings to 1000. The default is 100.
bit 5

Face-up output

Disable

Enable

Enable: All print jobs will be output face-up in the destination tray.
bit 6

Method for determining the image rotation for the

edge to bind on.

0: Disable

1: Enable

If enabled, the image rotation will be performed as they were in the specifications of
older models for the binding of pages of mixed orientation jobs.
The old models are below:
- PCL: Pre-04A models
- PS/PDF/RPCS:Pre-05S models

523

5. System Maintenance

bit 7

1001

Letterhead mode printing

1: Enable
(Duplex)

0: Disable

1: Enable

Bit Switch

006 Bit Switch 6 DFU

1001

0: Disable

Bit Switch

007 Bit Switch 7

Print path
bit 0

5
bit 1
to 7

If enabled, simplex pages (in mixed simplex/duplex PS/PCL5 jobs only) and the last
page of an odd paged duplex job (PS, PCL5, PCL6), are always routed through the
duplex unit. Not having to switch paper paths increases the print speed slightly.
-

008 Bit Switch 8

bit 0

DFU

bit 1

DFU

bit 2

DFU

bit 3

[PCL,PS]: Allow BW jobs to print without requiring

User Code

Disable

Enable

1001

DFU

Bit Switch

Enable: BW jobs submitted without a user code will be printed even if usercode
authentication is enabled.
Color jobs will not be printed without a valid user code.

524

bit 4

DFU

bit 5

DFU

bit 6

DFU

bit 7

DFU

Main SP Tables-9

1001

Bit Switch

005 Bit Switch 9

PDL Auto Detection timeout of jobs submitted via
USB or Parallel Port (IEEE 1284).
bit 0

0
"Disabled
(Immediatel
y)"

1
"Enabled
(10 seconds)"

To be used if PDL auto-detection fails. A failure of PDL autodetection doesn't necessarily

mean that the job can't be printed. This bit switch tells the device whether to time-out
immediately (default) upon failure or to wait 10 seconds.
bit 1

DFU

bit 2

Job Cancel

Disabled
(Not
cancelled)

Enabled
(Cancelled)

If this bit switch, all jobs will be cancelled after a jam occurs.
Note: If this bitsw is enabled, printing under the following conditions might result in
problems:
- Job submission via USB or Parallel Port
- Spool printing (WIM >Configuration > Device Settings > System)
bit 3

PCL/PS bypass tray paper rotation (SEF/LEF)

0: Disable

1: Enable

This bitsw causes the device to revert to the behavior of previous generations. It only
takes effect if "Bypass Tray Setting Priority" = "Driver/Command".
Previous spec (bitsw=1): If a standard sized paper mismatch occurred in the bypass
tray, the MFP always prompted for SEF paper.
If this bitsw=0 (default) then in the event of a standard sized paper mismatch, the MFP
will always prompt for paper of the rotation (SEF/LEF) determined by the MFP bypass
tray paper setting or by the bypass tray sensor.
Bit 4
to 7
1003
1003 1

DFU

[Clear Setting]
Initialize Printer System
Initializes settings in the "System" menu of the user mode.

1003 3 Delete Program

525

5. System Maintenance

1004
1004 1

1005
1005 1

1006

[Print Summary]
Print Summary
Prints the service summary sheet (a summary of all the controller settings).
[Display Version]
Disp. Version
Displays the version of the controller firmware.
[Sample/Locked Print]

*CTL

0: Linked, 1: On

Enables and disables the document server. When you select "0," the document server is
1006 1 enabled or disabled in accordance with Copy Service Mode SP5-967. When you select
"1," the document server is enabled regardless of Copy Service Mode SP5-967.
[Data Recall]
1101

Recalls a set of gamma settings. This can be either a) the factory setting, b) the previous
setting, or c) the current setting.

1101 1 Factory
1101 2 Previous
1101 3 Current

*CTL

1101 4 ACC

1102

1102 1

1103

[Resolution Setting]
Selects the printing mode (resolution) for the printer gamma adjustment.
2400x600 Photo, 1800x600 Photo, 600 x 600 Photo, 2400x600 Text, 1800x600, Text,
600x600 Text
[Test Page]
Prints the test page to check the color balance before and after the gamma adjustment.

1103 1 Color Gray Scale

1103 2 Color Pattern
526

Main SP Tables-9

1104

[Gamma Adjustment]
Adjusts the printer gamma for the mode selected in the "Mode Selection" menu.

1104 1 Black: Highlight

1104 2 Black: Shadow
1104 3 Black: Middle
1104 4 Black: IDmax
1104 21 Cyan: Highlight

*CTL

[0 to 30 / 15 / 1/step ]

1104 22 Cyan: Shadow

1104 23 Cyan: Middle

1104 24 Cyan: IDmax

1104 41 Magenta: Highlight
1104 42 Magenta: Shadow
1104 43 Magenta: Middle
1104 44 Magenta: IDmax
1104 61 Yellow: Highlight

*CTL

[0 to 30 / 15 / 1/step ]

1104 62 Yellow: Shadow

1104 63 Yellow: Middle
1104 64 Yellow: IDmax
[Save Tone Control Value]
1105

Stores the print gamma adjusted with the "Gamma Adj." menu item as the current setting.
Before the machine stores the new "current setting", it moves the data currently stored as the
"current setting" to the "previous setting" memory storage location.

1105 1 Save Tone Control Value

1106

[Toner Limit]
Adjusts the maximum toner amount for image development.

527

5. System Maintenance

1106 1 Toner Limit Value

*CTL

[100 to 400 / 260 / 1 %/step ]

Scanner SP Mode
SP1-xxx (System and Others)
1001

[Scan Nv Version]

1001 5 -

1004

*CTL

[Compression Type]
Selects the compression type for binary picture processing.

1004 1 Compression Type

*CTL

[1 to 3 / 1 / 1/step ]
1: MH, 2: MR, 3: MMR

[Erase margin]
1005

Creates an erase margin for all edges of the scanned image.

If the machine has scanned the edge of the original, create a margin. This SP is activated
only when the machine uses TWAIN scanning.

1005 1 Range from 0 to 5 mm

1009

[Remote scan disable]

*CTL

*CTL

[0 to 5 / 0 / 1 mm/step ]
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
0: enable, 1: disable

1009 1 Enable or disable remote scan.

1010

[Non Display Clear Light PDF] *CTL

[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
0: Display, 1: No display

1010 1 Enable or disable remote scan.

1011

528

[Org count Disp]

*CTL

[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]

Main SP Tables-9

Selects the original counter display.

1011 1 0: Displays remaining memory for the original scanning.
1: Displays original counter.

1012

1012 1

1013

[UserInfo release]

*CTL

[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
0: No, 1: Yes

Clear the following settings:

Address, Sender, Text / Subject, Filename

[Multimedia Function Setting]

*CTL

[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
0: OFF, 1: ON

1013 1 On or off multimedia function

SP2-XXX (Scanning-image quality)

[Compression Level (Grayscale)]
2021

Selects the compression ratio for grayscale processing mode (JPEG) for the three settings that
can be selected at the operation panel.

2021 1 Comp 1: 5-95

[5 to 95 / 20 / 1 /step ]

2021 2 Comp 2: 5-95

[5 to 95 / 40 / 1 /step ]

2021 3 Comp 3: 5-95

*CTL

[5 to 95 / 65 / 1 /step ]

2021 4 Comp 4: 5-95

[5 to 95 / 80 / 1 /step ]

2021 5 Comp 5: 5-95

[5 to 95 / 95 / 1 /step ]

[Compression ratio of ClearLight PDF]

2024

Selects the compression ratio for clearlight PDF for the two settings that can be selected at
the operation panel.

2024 1 Compression Ratio (Normal)

2024 2 Compression Ratio (High)

*CTL

[5 to 95 / 25 / 1 /step ]
[5 to 95 / 20 / 1 /step ]

529

5. System Maintenance

Firmware Update
To update the firmware for this machine, you must have the new version of the firmware downloaded onto
an SD (Secure Digital) Card. The SD Card is inserted into SD Card Slot 2 on the left rear side of the controller
box.

Type of Firmware

Type of firmware

Function

Location of firmware

Message shown

Engine

Printer engine control

BCU Flash ROM

Engine

System/Copy
Application

Operating system

Flash ROM on the

controller board

System/Copy

Printer Application

Feature application

Flash ROM on the

controller board

Printer

Scanner Application

Feature application

Flash ROM on the

controller board

Scanner

Fax Application

Feature application

Flash ROM on the

controller board

Fax

NIB

Network Interface

Flash ROM on the

controller board

Network Support

Operation Panel

Panel control

Operation Panel

Lcdc.

Fax FCU

Fax control

FCU

GWFCU-4(ww)-1-1

Remote Fax

Fax control

Flash ROM on the

controller board

Remote Fax

Language firmware

Language 1

Operation Panel
Two languages can be
selected from 16 languages.

Language 2

WebDocBox

Document server
application

Flash ROM on the

controller board

Web Uapl

WebSys

Web Service application

Flash ROM on the

controller board

Web Support

Language

530

Firmware Update

PS/ PDF

Page description language

(PostScript3)

PS3 SD card

PS3/ PDF

PictBridge

PictBridge control

PictBridge SD card

PctBrgd

ARDF

ARDF control

ARDF

ADF

Finisher (D429)

Finisher control

Finisher (D429)

Finisher

Java VM

SDK application

Java VM SD card

SDK

Data Overwrite
Security

Security application

Security SD card

HDD Format Option

Before You Begin

An SD card is a precision device. Always observe the following precautions when you handle SD cards:

Always switch the machine off before you insert an SD card. Never insert the SD card into the slot
with the power on.
Do not remove the SD card from the service slot after the power has been switched on.
Never switch the machine off while the firmware is downloading from the SD card.
Keep SD cards in a safe location where they are not exposed to high temperature, high humidity, or
exposure to direct sunlight.
Always handle SD cards with care. Do not bend or scratch them. Do not let the SD card get exposed
to shock or vibration.
Make sure that the write protection of an SD card is unlocked when you download an application to
it. If not, downloading fails and a download error (e.g. Error Code 44) occurs during a firmware
upgrade.
Keep the following points in mind when you use the firmware update software:
"Upload" means to send data from the machine to the SD card. "Download" means to send data from
the SD card to the machine.
To select an item on the LCD, touch the appropriate button on the soft touch-screen of the LCD, or,
press the appropriate number key on the 10-key pad of the operation panel. For example, when "Exit
(0)" shows on the screen you can touch the Exit button on the screen, or, press the button on the
operation panel of the copier.
Make sure that the machine is disconnected from the network to prevent a print job for arriving while
the firmware update is in progress before you start the firmware update procedure.

531

5. System Maintenance

Updating Firmware
Preparation
If the SD card is blank, copy the entire "romdata" folder onto the SD card.
If the card already contains the "romdata" folder, copy the "D104" folder onto the card.
If the card already contains folders up to "D104", copy the necessary firmware files (e.g. D104xxxx.fwu)
into this folder.
Do not put multiple machine firmware programs on the same SD card. Copy the only model firmware
you want.

Updating Procedure
1. Turn the main power switch off.
2. Remove the slot cover (

x 1).

3. Remove the Java VM card from SD slot 2

4. Insert the SD card into SD slot 2. Make sure the label on the SD card faces the rear side of the machine.
5. Slowly push the SD card into the slot so it locks in place. You will hear it click. Make sure the SD card
locks in place.
To remove the SD, push it in to unlock the spring lock. Then release it so it pops out of the slot.
6. Disconnect the network cable from the copier if the machine is connected to a network.
7. Switch the main power switch on. After about 45 seconds, the initial version update screen appears
on the LCD in English.
8. On the screen, touch the button or press the corresponding number key on the operation panel to
select the item in the menu that you want to update.
ROM/NEW

532

What it means

ROM:

Tells you the number of the module and name of the version currently installed.
The first line is the module number, the second line the version name.

NEW:

Tells you the number of the module and name version on the SD card. The first
line is the module number, the second line the version name.

Firmware Update

Controller, engine and operation panel firmware cannot be updated at the same time. It is
recommended to update firmware modules one by one.
9. Touch "UpDate (#)" (or

) to start the update.

The progress bar does not show for the operation panel firmware after you touch "OpPanel".
The power on key flashes on and off at 0.5 s intervals when the LCDC firmware is updating. The
power key flashes on and off at 3 s intervals when the update is finished.
10. The "Update is Done" message appears on the operation panel after completing the updating. The
message differs depending on the firmware that has been updated.
11. Switch the copier main power switch off when you see the "Update is Done" message or follow the
procedure that is displayed on the operation panel.
12. Press in the SD card to release it. Then remove it from the slot.
13. Install the Java card in SD slot 2, and then attach the SD slot cover (

x 1).

14. Switch the copier on for normal operation.

Error Messages
An error message shows in the first line if an error occurs during the download.
The error code consists of the letter "E" and a number. The example above shows error "E24" displayed.
For details, refer to the Error Message Table. ( "Handling Firmware Update Error")

Firmware Update Error

If a firmware update error occurs, this means the update was cancelled during the update because the
module selected for update was not on the SD card.

533

5. System Maintenance

Recovery after Power Loss

If the ROM update is interrupted as a result of accidental loss of power while the firmware is updating,
then the correct operation of the machine cannot be guaranteed after the machine is switched on again.
If the ROM update does not complete successfully for any reason, then in order to ensure the correct
operation of the machine, the ROM update error will continue to show until the ROM is updated successfully.
In this case, insert the card again and switch on the machine to continue the firmware download
automatically from the card without the menu display.

Updating the LCDC for the Operation Panel

Do the following procedure to update the LCDC (LCD Control Board).
1. Turn the copier main switch off.
2. Remove the SD slot cover (

x 1).

3. Remove the Java VM card from SD slot 2.

4. Insert the SD card into SD slot 2.
5. Switch the copier main switch on.
6. The initial screen opens in English after about 45 seconds.
7. Touch "Ope Panel.xx".
8. "xx" differs depending on the destination.
9. Touch "UpDate(#) or (

) to start the update.

10. Downloading starts after about 9 seconds.

11. The operation panel goes off and the main power on key flashes in red at 0.5 s intervals when the
data is downloading. The same key starts flashing in green at 1 s intervals when the update is finished.
534

Firmware Update

12. Press the "Exit" button.

13. Switch the copier main power switch off and remove the SD card from SD slot 2
14. Install the Java VM card in SD slot 2.
15. Attach the SD slot cover (

x 1).

16. Switch the copier on.

17. Then turn the copier off and on again.

Handling Firmware Update Errors

An error message shows in the first line if an error occurs during a download. The error code consists of
the letter "E" and a number ("E20", for example).

Error Message Table

Code

Meaning

Solution

20

Cannot map logical address

Make sure the SD card is inserted correctly.

21

Cannot access memory

HDD connection incorrect or replace hard disks.

22

Cannot decompress compressed

data

Incorrect ROM data on the SD card, or data is corrupted.

23

Error occurred when ROM update Controller program abnormal. If the second attempt fails,
program started
replace controller board.

24

SD card access error

30

No HDD available for stamp data

HDD connection incorrect or replace hard disks.
download

31

Data incorrect for continuous

download

Insert the SD card with the remaining data required for

the download, the re-start the procedure.

32

Data incorrect after download

interrupted

Execute the recovery procedure for the intended module

download, then repeat the installation procedure.

33

Incorrect SD card version

Incorrect ROM data on the SD card, or data is corrupted.

34

Module mismatch - Correct

module is not on the SD card)

SD update data is incorrect. Acquire the correct data

(Japan, Overseas, OEM, etc.) then install again.

Make sure SD card inserted correctly, or use another SD

card.

535

5. System Maintenance

35

Module mismatch Module on

SD card is not for this machine

SD update data is incorrect. The data on the SD card is

for another machine. Acquire correct update data then
install again.

36

Cannot write module Cause

other than E34, E35

SD update data is incorrect. The data on the SD card is

for another machine. Acquire correct update data then
install again.

40

Engine module download failed

Replace the update data for the module on the SD card

and try again, or replace the BCU board.

42

Operation panel module

download failed

Replace the update data for the module on the SD card

and try again, or replace the LCDC.

43

Stamp data module download

failed

Replace the update data for the module on the SD card

and try again, or replace the hard disks.

44

Controller module download

failed

Replace the update data for the module on the SD card

and tray again, or replace controller board.

49

Firmware update is prohibited

50

Electronic confirmation check

failed

Set the setting of "Update Firmware" under the

"Administrator Tools" to "Do not Prohibit".
(Administrator Tools > Extended Security > Update
Firmware)
SD update data is incorrect. The data on the SD card is
for another machine. Acquire correct update data then
install again.

Java VM Updating Procedure

1. Turn the main power off, then remove the SD slot cover (
SD slot 2.

x 1), and remove the Java VM card from

2. Insert the Java VM card to the SD card writer that is connected to PC.
3. Make sure which drive is assigned for the SD card.
4. Decompress the downloaded update file, then two files exist that one file is ".exe" file extension and
the other is ".bat" file extension.
5. Double click the ".bat" file then command prompt screen is appeared.
6. The first command line is shown as
"Please input drive letter of SD card [a x]:"
Then enter the SD card drive name, and press "Enter" key.

536

Firmware Update

7. "Press any key to continue" is appeared, then press "Enter" key again. The updating to the SD card
starts.
8. "Press any key to continue" is appeared again, then press "Enter" key. The command prompt screen
is disappeared automatically if the updating is successful.
9. Remove the Java VM card from the SD card writer after going off the access lamp on the SD card
writer.
10. Insert the Java VM card in the SD slot 2 of the machine and turn the main power on.

App2Me Updating Procedure

Follow this procedure to update App2Me if a new version is available.
1. Push the [User/Tools] key on the operation panel.
2. If an administrator setting is registered for the machine, Step 3 and Step 4 are required. Otherwise,
skip to step 5.

3. Push [Login/Logout] on the operation panel.

4. Login with the administrator user name and password.
5. Touch "Extended Feature Settings" twice on the LCD.
6. Touch each of the applications until the status changes to "Stop".
7. Turn the machine off.
8. Remove the SD slot cover (

x 1), and then remove the Java VM card from SD slot 2.

9. Prepare the newer App2Me file from the Firmware Download Center, and then unzip the zip file.
(The folder name is "337051920".)

537

5. System Maintenance

10. Copy the App2Me Provider folder into the specified path for the VM card. The path is:
"SD_Card Drive\ sdk\dsdk\dist\337051920"
11. Turn the SD card label face to the rear of the machine, and then push it slowly into SD slot 2 (lower
slot) until you hear a click.
12. Attach the SD slot cover (

x 1).

13. Turn the main power switch on.

14. Press [User Tools] on the operation panel.
15. Touch the "Extended Feature Settings" button twice.
16. Touch the "Extended Feature Info" tab on the LCD.
17. Touch the "App2Me" line.
18. Set the setting of the "Auto Start" to "On".

19. Touch the "Exit" button.

20. Exit the [User Tools/Counter] settings.

Brower Unit Updating Procedure

1. Remove the SD slot cover [A] for SD cards (

2. Remove the VM card [B] from the SD slot 2.

538

x 1).

Firmware Update

3. Turn the SD-card label face of the latest version Brower Unit [A] to the front of the machine. Then push
it slowly into SD slot 2 until you hear a click.
4. Plug in and turn on the main power switch.

5. Push the "User Tools" key.

If an administrator setting is registered for the machine, step 5 and 6 are required. Otherwise,
skip to step 7
6. Push the "Login/ Logout" key.
7. Login with the administrator user name and password.
8. Touch "Extended Feature Settings" twice on the LCD.
9. Touch "Uninstall" on the LCD.
10. Touch the "Browser" line
11. Confirmation message appears on the LCD.
12. Touch "Yes" to proceed.
13. Reconfirmation message appears on the LCD.
14. Touch "Yes" to uninstall the browser unit.
15. You will see "Uninstalling the extended feature... Please wait.", and then "Completed".
16. Touch "Exit" to go back to the setting screen.
17. Exit "User/Tools" setting, and then turn off the main power switch.
18. Remove the SD card from SD card slot 2.
19. Overwrite the updated program in the "sdk" folder of the browser unit application with PC.
20. Do the "Installation Procedure" to install the browser unit.
21. Remove the SD card of the latest version Brower Unit from SD slot 2.
22. Reinstall the VM card in the SD slot 2.
23. Attach the SD slot cover [A] (

x 1).
539

5. System Maintenance

Installing Another Language

Many languages are available. But you can only switch between two languages at a time. Do the following
procedure to select the two languages you want. You can select both of the languages you want from the
user interface on the operation panel.
1. Switch the copier main power switch off.
2. Remove the SD slot cover (

x 1).

3. Insert the SD card with the language data into SD Card Slot 2.
4. Switch the copier main power switch on. The initial screen opens after about 45 seconds.
5. Touch "Language Data (2)" on the screen (or press

).

6. Touch "LANG. 1(1)" or "LANG. 2(2)"

Key

What it does

LANG. 1(1)

Touch this button on the screen (or press on the 10-key pad) to open the
next screen so you can select the 1st language.

LANG. 1(2)

Touch this button on the screen (or press on the 10-key pad) to open the
next screen so you can select the 2nd language.

Exit(0)

Touch this key on the screen (or press on the 10-key pad) to quit the update
procedure and return to normal screen.

7. Touch "LANG 1(1)" to select the 1st Language. Touch "LANG (2)" to select the 2nd Language.

540

Installing Another Language

8. Touch the appropriate button on the screen (or press the number on the 10-keypad) to select a
language as the 1st (or 2nd) language.
If a language is already selected, it will show in reverse.

Touching "Exit (0)" returns you to the previous screen.

9. If you do not see the language that you want to select, touch "
press
or ) to show more choices.

(7)" or "

(9)" on the screen (or

The Download Screen opens after you select a language.

The 1st or 2nd language selected for updating shows.
The following show to right of the selection:
1. The first column shows the language currently selected.
2. The 2nd column shows the language selected to replace that language.
The example below shows that the download will replace "Japanese" with "Italian" as the 1st
language.

541

5. System Maintenance

10. Touch "Update(#)" on the screen (or press

) to start the download.

Another screen with a progress bar does not show when the language is downloading.
The following occur at the time the language is downloading:
The operation panel switches off.
The LED on the power on key flashes rapidly.
11. After the message of installation completed has shown on the LCD, switch the copier main power
switch off. Then remove the SD card from the slot.
12. Switch the copier main power switch on to resume normal operation.

542

Reboot/System Setting Reset

Reboot/System Setting Reset

Software Reset
You can reboot the software with one of the following two procedures:
1. Turn the main power switch off and on.
2. Press and hold down
together for over 10 seconds. When the machine beeps once, release
both buttons. After Now loading. Please wait shows for a few seconds, the copy window will open.
The machine is ready for normal operation.

System Settings and Copy Setting Reset

System Setting Reset

The system settings in the UP mode can be reset to their defaults. Use the following procedure.
1. Press User Tools/Counter
2. Hold down

and then press System Settings.

You must press

first.

3. Press yes when the message prompts you to confirm that you want to reset the system settings.
4. Press exit when the message tells you that the settings have been reset.

Copier Setting Reset

Use the following procedure to reset the copy settings in the UP mode to their defaults.
1. Press User Tools/Counter
2. Hold down

and then press Copier/Document Server Settings.

543

5. System Maintenance

You must press

first.

5
3. Press Yes when the message prompts you to confirm that you want to reset the Copier Document
Server settings.
4. Press exit when the message tells you that the settings have been reset.

544

Controller Self-Diagnostics

Controller Self-Diagnostics
Overview
There are three types of self-diagnostics for the controller.
1. Power-on self-diagnostics: The machine automatically starts the self-diagnostics just after the power
has been turned on.
2. SC detection: The machine automatically detects SC conditions at power-on or during operation.
The following shows the workflow of the power-on and detailed self-diagnostics.

545

5. System Maintenance

546

SD Card Appli Move

SD Card Appli Move

Overview
The service program SD Card Appli Move (SP5-873) lets you to copy application programs from one
SD card to another SD card.
Slot 1 and Slot 2 are used to store application programs. However, more than two optional applications
are supplied for this machine. In that case, you can move application programs from Slot 2 to Slot 1 with
the following procedure.
Consider the following limitations when you try to merge SD cards.
PostScript3 cannot be moved to the other SD card.
The destination SD card should have the largest memory size of all the application SD cards. Refer
to the following table for the memory size of each SD card.
Outline of SD Card Appli Move:

1. Choose a SD card with enough space.

Do not use an SD card if it has been used on a computer. Normal operation is not guaranteed
when such an SD card is used.
2. Enter SP5873 SD Card Appli Move. Then move the application from the SD Card in Slot 2 to the
card in slot 1.
3. Exit the SP mode
Use caution when you do the SD Card Appli Move procedure:
The data necessary for authentication is transferred with the application program from an SD
card to another SD card. Authentication fails if you try to use the SD card after you copy the
application program from one card to another card.

547

5. System Maintenance

4. Remove the inner cover (

p.172 "Inner Cover").

5. Keep the SD card in the place [A] inside the inner cover after you have copied the application program
from one card to another card. This is done for the following reasons:
1) The SD card can be the only proof that the user is licensed to use the application program.
2) You may need to check the SD card and its data to solve a problem in the future.

Move Exec
The menu Move Exec (SP5-873-001) lets you copy application programs from the original SD card to
another SD card.
Do not turn ON the write protect switch of an application SD card on the machine. If the write protect
switch is ON, a download error (e.g. Error Code 44) occurs during a firmware upgrade or application
merge.
1. Turn the main switch off.
2. Make sure that an SD card is in SD Card Slot 1. The application program is copied into this SD card.
3. Insert the SD card (having stored the application program) to SD Card Slot 2. The application program
is copied from this SD card.
4. Turn the main switch on.
5. Start the SP mode.
6. Select SP5-873-001 Move Exec.
7. Follow the messages shown on the operation panel.
8. Turn the main switch off.
9. Remove the SD card from SD Card Slot 2.
10. Turn the main switch on.
548

SD Card Appli Move

11. Check that the application programs run normally.

Undo Exec
The menu Undo Exec (SP5-873-002) lets you copy back application programs from an SD card to the
original SD card. You can use this program when, for example, you have mistakenly copied some programs
by using Move Exec (SP5-873-001).
Do not turn ON the write protect switch of an application SD card on the machine. If the write protect
switch is ON, a download error (e.g. Error Code 44) occurs during a firmware upgrade or application
merge.
1. Turn the main switch off.
2. Insert the original SD card in SD Card Slot 2. The application program is copied back into this card.
3. Insert the SD card (having stored the application program) to SD Card Slot 1. The application program
is copied back from this SD card.

4. Turn the main switch on.

5. Start the SP mode.
6. Select SP5-873-002 Undo Exec.
7. Follow the messages shown on the operation panel.
8. Turn the main switch off.
9. Remove the SD card from SD Card Slot 2.
This step assumes that the application programs in the SD card are used by the machine.
10. Turn the main switch on.
11. Check that the application programs run normally.

549

5. System Maintenance

Downloading Stamp Data

The stamp data should be downloaded from the controller firmware to the hard disks at the following times:
After the hard disks have been replaced.
The print data contains the controller software. Execute SP 5853 to download the fixed stamp data required
by the hard disks.
1. Enter the SP mode.
2. Select SP5853 and then press EXECUTE. The following screen opens while the stamp data is
downloading.

The download is finished when the message prompts you to close.

3. Press the Exit button. Then turn the copier off and on again.

550

NVRAM Data Upload/Download

NVRAM Data Upload/Download

Uploading Content of NVRAM to an SD card
Do the following procedure to upload SP code settings from NVRAM to an SD card.
This data should always be uploaded to an SD card before the NVRAM is replaced.
Make sure that the write protection of an SD card is unlocked
1. Do SP5990-001 (SMC Print) before you switch the machine off. You will need a record of the NVRAM
settings if the upload fails.
2. Switch the copier main power switch off.
3. Remove the SD slot cover (s x 1).
4. Insert the SD card into SD card slot 2. Then switch the copier on.

5. Execute SP5824-001 (NVRAM Data Upload) and then press the "Execute" key.
6. The following files are copied to an NVRAM folder on the SD card when the upload procedure is
finished. The file is saved to the path and the following filename:
NVRAM\<serial number>.NV
Here is an example with Serial Number "K5000017114":
NVRAM\K5000017114.NV
7. In order to prevent an error during the download, be sure to mark the SD card that holds the uploaded
data with the number of the machine from which the data was uploaded.
You can upload NVRAM data from more than one machine to the same SD card.

Downloading an SD Card to NVRAM

Do the following procedure to download SP data from an SD card to the NVRAM in the machine.
The NVRAM data download may fail if the SD card with the NVRAM data is damaged, or if the
connection between the controller and BCU is defective.
Do the download procedure again if the download fails.
Do the following procedure if the second attempt fails:
Enter the NVRAM data manually using the SMC print you created before uploading the NVRAM
data.
1. Switch the copier main power switch off.

551

5. System Maintenance

2. Remove the SD slot cover (s x 1).

3. Insert the SD card with the NVRAM data into SD Card Slot 2.
4. Switch the copier main power switch on.
5. Do SP5825-001 (NVRAM Data Download) and press the "Execute" key.
The serial number of the file on the SD card must match the serial number of the machine for the
NVRAM data to download successfully. The download fails if the serial numbers do not match.
This procedure does not download the following data to the NVRAM:
Total Count
C/O, P/O Count

552

Address Book Upload/Download

Address Book Upload/Download

Information List
The following information is possible to be uploaded and downloaded.
Information
Registration No.
User Code
E-mail
Protection Code
Fax Destination
Fax Option
Group Name
Key Display

Select Title
Folder
Local Authentication
Folder Authentication
Account ACL
New Document Initial ACL

LDAP Authentication

Download
1. Prepare a formatted SD card.
2. Make sure that the write-protection on the SD card is off.
3. Turn off the main power switch of the main machine.
4. Remove the SD slot cover at the left rear side of the machine (

x 1).

5. Install the SD card into the SD card slot 2 (for service use).
6. Turn on the main power switch.
7. Enter the SP mode.
8. Do SP5-846-051 (Backup All Addr Book).
9. Exit the SP mode, and then turn off the main power switch.
10. Remove the SD card form the SD card slot 2.
11. Install the SD slot cover.
If the capacity of SD card is not enough to store the local user information, an error message is
displayed.
Carefully handle the SD card, which contains user information. Do not take it back to your
location.
553

5. System Maintenance

Upload
1. Turn off the main power switch of the main machine.
2. Remove the SD slot cover at the left rear side of the machine (

x 1).

3. Install the SD card, which has already been uploaded, into the SD card slot 2.
4. Turn on the main power switch.
5. Enter the SP mode.
6. Do SP5-846-052 (Restore All Addr Book).
7. Exit the SP mode, and then turn off the main power switch.
8. Remove the SD card form the SD card slot 2.
9. Install the SD slot cover.

The counter in the user code information is initialized after uploading.

The information of an administrator and supervisor cannot be downloaded nor uploaded.
If there is no data of address book information in the SD card, an error message is displayed.

554

Using the Debug Log

Using the Debug Log

Overview
This machine provides a Save Debug Log feature that allows the Customer Engineer to save and retrieve
error information for analysis.
Every time an error occurs, debug information is recorded in volatile memory. But this information is lost
when the machine is switched off and on.
To capture this debug information, the Save Debug Log feature provides two main features:
Switching on the debug feature so error information is saved directly to the HDD for later retrieval.
Copying the error information from the HDD to an SD card.
Do the following procedure below to set up the machine so the error information is saved automatically to
the HDD when a user has problems with the machine. Then ask the user to reproduce the problem.

Switching ON and Setting UP Save Debug Log

The debug information cannot be saved until the "Save Debug Log" function has been switched on and a
target has been selected.
1. Enter the SP mode and switch the Save Debug Log feature on.
Enter "System SP".
On the LCD panel, open SP5857.
2. Under "5857 Save Debug Log", touch "1 On/Off".

3. On the control panel keypad, press "1". Then press . This switches the Save Debug Log feature on.
The default setting is "0" (OFF). This feature must be switched on in order for the debug information
to be saved.

555

5. System Maintenance

4. Select the target destination where the debug information will be saved. Under "5857 Save Debug
Log", touch "2 Target", enter "2" with the operation panel key to select the hard disk as the target
destination. Then press .

Select "3 SD Card" to save the debug information directly to the SD card if it is inserted in the
service slot.
5. Now touch "5858" and specify the events that you want to record in the debug log. SP5858 (Debug
Save When) provides the following items for selection.
1

Engine SC Error

Saves data when an engine-related SC code is

generated.

Controller SC Error

Saves debug data when a controller-related SC Code

is generated.

Any SC Error

Saves data only for the SC code that you specify by

entering code number.

Jam

Saves data for jams.

More than one event can be selected.

Example 1: To Select Items 1, 2, 4
Touch the appropriate items(s). Press "ON" for each selection. This example shows "Engine SC Error"
selected.

556

Using the Debug Log

Example 2: To Specify an SC Code

Touch "3 Any SC Error", enter the 3-digit SC code number with the control panel number keys. Then
press . This example shows an entry for SC670.

For details about SC code numbers, please refer to the SC tables in Section 4. "Troubleshooting".
6. Select one or more memory modules for reading and recording debug information. Touch "5859".
Under "5859" press the necessary key item for the module that you want to record.
Enter the appropriate 4-digit number. Then press

Refer to the two tables below for the 4-digit numbers to enter for each key.
The example below shows "Key 1" with "2222" entered.

557

5. System Maintenance

The following keys can be set with the corresponding numbers. (The initials in parentheses indicate
the names of the modules.)
4-Digit Entries for Keys 1 to 10
Key No.

Copy

Printer

2222 (SCS)

14000 (SRM)

256 (IMH)

1000 (ECS)

1025 (MCS)

Scanner

Web

4848 (COPY)

4400 (GPS)

5375 (Scan)

5682 (NFA)

2224 (BCU)

4500 (PDL)

5682 (NFA)

6600 (WebDB)

4600 (GPS-PM)

3000 (UCS)

3300 (PTS)

2000 (NCS)

2000 (NCS)

6666 (WebSys)

10

2224 (BCU)

4126 (DCS)

2000 (NCS)

The default settings for Keys 1 to 10 are all zero ("0").

Key to Acronyms
Acronym

Meaning

Acronym

Meaning

ECS

Engine Control Service

NFA

Net File Application

GPS

GW Print Service

PDL

Printer Design Language

GSP-PM

GW Print Service Print Module

PTS

Print Server

IMH

Image Memory Handler

SCS

System Control Service

MCS

Memory Control Service

SRM

System Resource Management

NCS

Network Control Service

WebDB

Web Document Box

(Document Server)

1. The machine is now set to record the debugging information automatically on the HDD (the target
selected with SP5857-002) for the events that you selected with SP5858 and the memory modules
selected with SP5859.
558

Using the Debug Log

Please keep the following important points in mind when you do this setting:
Note that the number entries for Keys 1 to 5 are the same for the Copy, Printer, Scanner, and Web
memory modules.
The initial settings are all zero.
These settings remain in effect until you change them. Be sure to check all the settings, especially the
settings for Keys 6 to 10. To switch off a key setting, enter a zero for that key.
You can select any number of keys from 1 to 10 (or all) by entering the corresponding 4-digit numbers
from the table.
You cannot mix settings for the groups (COPY, PRINTER, etc.) for 006 to 010. For example, if you
want to create a PRINTER debug log you must select the settings from the 9 available selections for
the "PRINTER" column only.
One area of the disk is reserved to store the debug log. The size of this area is limited to 4 MB.

Retrieving the Debug Log from the HDD

Retrieve the debug log by copying it from the hard disk to an SD card.
1. Insert the SD card into slot 2 (service slot) of the copier.
2. Enter the SP mode and execute SP5857-009 (Copy HDD to SD Card (Latest 4 MB)) to write the
debugging data to the SD card.
3. Use a card reader to copy the file and send it for analysis to your local Ricoh representative by email.
You can also send the SD card by regular mail if you want.

Recording Errors Manually

SC errors and jams only are recorded to the debug log automatically. Please instruct the user to do the
following immediately after occurrence to save the debug data for any other errors that occur while the
customer engineer is not on site. Such problems also include a controller or panel freeze.
You must previously switch on the Save Debug Feature (SP5857-001) and select the hard disk as
the save destination (SP5857-002) if you want to use this feature.
1. Press

(Clear Modes).on the operation panel when the error occurs.

2. On the control panel, enter "01". Then hold down for at least 3 seconds until the machine beeps
and then release it. This saves the debug log to the hard disk for later retrieval with an SD card by the
service representatives.
3. Switch the machine off and on to resume operation.
The debug information for the error is saved on the hard disk. This lets the service representative retrieve
it on their next visit by copying it from the HDD to an SD card.
559

5. System Maintenance

Card Save Function

Overview
Card Save:
The Card Save function is used to save print jobs received by the printer on an SD card with no print
output. Card Save mode is toggled using printer Bit Switch #1 bit number 4. Card Save will remain
enabled until the SD card becomes full, or until all file names have been used.
Captures are stored on the SD card in the folder /prt/cardsave. File names are assigned sequentially
from PRT00000.prn to PRT99999.prn. An additional file PRT.CTL will be created. This file contains a
list of all files created on the card by the card save function.

Previously stored files on the SD card can be overwritten or left intact. Card Save SD has Add and
New menu items.
Card Save (Add): Appends files to the SD Card. Does not overwrite existing files. If the card
becomes full or if all file names are used, an error will be displayed on the operation panel.
Subsequent jobs will not be stored.
Card Save (New): Overwrites files in the card's /prt/cardsave directory.
Limitation:
Card Save cannot be used with PJL Status Readback commands. PJL Status Readbacks will not work.
In addition they will cause the Card Save to fail.

Procedure
1. Turn the main power switch OFF.
2. Insert the SD card into slot 2. Then turn the power ON.
3. Enter SP mode.
4. Select the Printer SP.
5. Select SP-1001 "Bit Switch.

560

Card Save Function

6. Select Bit Switch 1 Settings and use the numeric keypad to turn bit 4 ON and then press the #
button to register the change. The result should look like: 00010000. By doing this, Card Save option
will appear in the List/Test Print menu.

7. Press Exit to exit SP Mode.

8. Press the User Tools/Counter button.
9. Select Printer Features.

561

5. System Maintenance

10. Card Save (Add) and Card Save (New) should be displayed on the screen. Select Card Save (Add)
or Card Save (New).

11. Press OK and then exit the User Tools/Counter menu.

12. Press the Printer button.

13. Card Save should be displayed in the top left of the display panel.

14. Send a job to the printer. The Communicating light should start blinking as shown below.

562

Card Save Function

15. As soon as the printer receives the data, it will be stored on the SD card automatically with no print
output. Nothing is displayed on the screen, indicating that a Card Save operation was successful.
16. Press Offline and then the Clear/Stop button to exit Card Save mode.

17. Change the Bit Switch Settings back to the default 00000000. Press the # button in the numeric
keypad to register the changes.
18. Remove the SD card after the main power switch is turned off.

Error Messages
Card Save error messages:
Init error: A card save process (i.e. card detection, change to kernel mode) failed to initialize.
Card not found: Card cannot be detected in the slot.
No memory: Insufficient working memory to process the job.
Write error: Failed to write to the card.
Other error: An unknown error occurred.
If an error occurs, pressing OK will cause the device to discard the job and return to the ready state.

563

5. System Maintenance

564

6. Troubleshooting
SC Tables
Service Call Conditions
Summary
The SC Table section shows the SC codes for controller errors and other errors. The latter (not controller
errors) are put into four types. The type is determined by their reset procedures. The table shows the
classification of the SC codes.
Key
Controller
errors

Other errors

CTL

Definition
The error has occurred in the
controller.

Reset Procedure
See Troubleshooting Procedure in
the table.

The error involves the fusing unit. The Turn the main switch off and on. Reset
machine operation is disabled. The the SC (set SP5-810-1). Turn the main
user cannot reset the error.
switch off and on.

The error involves one or some

specific units. The machine operates Turn the operation switch off and on.
as usual, excluding the related units.

The error is logged. The SC-code

history is updated. The machine
operates as usual.

The machine operation is disabled.

You can reset the machine by turning
Turn the operation switch or main
the operation switch or main switch
power switch off and on.
off and on. If the error occurs again,
the same SC code is displayed.

The SC will not show. Only the SC

history is updated.

After you turn the main power switch off, wait for one second or more before you turn the main power
switch on ( SC 672). All SCs are logged. The print log data (SP5-990-004) in SP mode can check the
latest 10 SC codes detected and total counters when the SC code is detected.
If the problem concerns electrical circuit boards, first disconnect then reconnect the connectors before
you replace the PCBs.
565

6. Troubleshooting

If the problem concerns a motor lock, first check the mechanical load before you replace motors or
sensors.

SC Code Classification
The table shows the classification of the SC codes:
Class 1
1XX

2XX

Section
Scanning

Laser exposure

3XX

4XX

5XX

566

Image development 1

Image development 2

Paper feed / Fusing

SC Code

Detailed section

100 -

Scanner

190 -

Unique for a specific model

200 -

Polygon motor

220 -

Synchronization control

230 -

FGATE signal related

240 -

LD control

280 -

Unique for a specific model

300 -

Charge

330 -

Drum potential

350 -

Development

380 -

Unique for a specific model

400 -

Image transfer

420 -

Paper separation

430 -

Cleaning

440 -

Around drum

460 -

Unit

480 -

Others

500 -

Paper feed

515 -

Duplex

520 -

Paper transport

SC Tables

Class 1

5XX

6XX

7XX

8XX

9XX

Section

Paper feed / Fusing

Communication

Peripherals

Controller

Others

SC Code

Detailed section

530 -

Fan motor

540 -

Fusing

560 -

Others

570 -

Unique for a specific model

600 -

Electrical counters

620 -

Mechanical counters

630 -

Account control

640 -

CSS

650 -

Network

670 -

Internal data processing

680 -

Unique for a specific model

700 -

Original handling

720 -

Two-tray finisher

740 -

Booklet finisher

800 -

Error after ready condition

820 -

Diagnostics error

860 -

Hard disk

880 -

Unique for a specific model

900 -

Counter

920 -

Memory

990 -

Others

567

6. Troubleshooting

SC1xx: Scanning
No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Exposure lamp error
The peak white level is less than 64/255 digits (8 bits) when scanning the shading
plate.
Exposure lamp defective
Lamp stabilizer defective
Exposure lamp connector defective

101

Standard white plate dirty

Scanner mirror or scanner lens out of position or dirty
1. Check and clean the scanner mirror(s) and scanner lens.
2. Check and clean the shading plate.

3. Replace the exposure lamp.

4. Replace the lamp stabilizer.
5. Replace the scanner mirror(s) or scanner lens.
No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Scanner home position error 1
The scanner home position sensor does not detect the OFF condition during
operation.
Scanner motor driver defective
Scanner motor defective

120

Harness between BCU and scanner motor disconnected

Scanner HP sensor defective
Harness between BCU and HP sensor disconnected
1. Check the cable connection between the BCU and scanner motor.
2. Check the cable connection between the BCU and HP sensor.
3. Replace the scanner motor.
4. Replace the scanner HP sensor.

568

SC Tables

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Scanner home position error 2
The scanner home position sensor does not detect the ON condition during
operation.
Scanner motor driver defective
Scanner motor defective

121

Harness between BCU and scanner motor disconnected

Scanner HP sensor defective
Harness between BCU and HP sensor disconnected
1. Check the cable connection between the BCU board and scanner motor.
2. Check the cable connection between the BCU and HP sensor.
3. Replace the scanner motor.
4. Replace the scanner HP sensor.

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Black level detection error
The black level cannot be adjusted within the target value during the zero clamp.

141

Harness disconnected
Defective SBU
1. Check the cable connection
2. Replace the SBU.

569

6. Troubleshooting

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

White level detection error
The white level cannot be adjusted within the target during auto gain control.
Dirty exposure glass or optics section
SBU board defective
Exposure lamp defective
Lamp stabilizer defective

142

Scanner motor defective

1. Clean the exposure glass, white plate, mirrors, and lens.
2. Check if the exposure lamp is lit during initialization.
3. Check the harness connection between SBU and BCU.
4. Replace the exposure lamp.

5. Replace the scanner motor.

6. Replace the SBU board.
No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

SBU communication error
The SBU connection cannot be detected at power on or recovery from the energy
save mode.
Defective SBU

144

Defective harness
Defective detection port on the BCU
1. Replace the harness.
2. Replace the SBU.
3. Replace the BCU.

No.
161

570

Type
D

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

IPU error

SC Tables

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

The error result of self-diagnostic by the ASIC on the IPU is detected.
Defective IPU or BCU

-001

Defective connection between IPU (or BCU ) and SBU

1. Check the connection between IPU and SBU.
2. Replace the IPU board.
3. Replace the BCU.
An error is detected during an access to the IPU.

-002

Defective IPU or BCU

1. Replace the IPU board.
2. Replace the BCU.

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Copy Data Security Unit error

The copy data security board is not detected when the copy data security
function is set "ON" with the initial setting.
165

A device check error occurs when the copy data security function is set "ON"
with the initial setting.
Incorrect installation of the copy data security board
Defective copy data security board
1. Reinstall the copy data security board.
2. Replace the copy data security board.

571

6. Troubleshooting

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Serial Number Mismatch
Serial number stored in the memory does not have the correct code.
NVRAM defective

195

BCU replaced without original NVRAM

1. Reinstall the original NVRAM in the replaced BCU.
2. Turn off and on the main power switch of the copier if a new NVRAM is installed
in the BCU.

SC 2xx: Exposure
No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Polygon motor error 1: ON timeout
The polygon mirror motor does not reach the targeted operating speed within the
specified time after turning on or changing speed
Defective or disconnected harness to polygon motor driver board
Defective polygon motor driver board

202

Defective polygon motor.

1. Replace the polygon motor.
2. Replace the laser unit.
3. Replace the harness.
4. Replace the IPU board.
5. Replace the BCU.

572

SC Tables

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Polygon motor error 2: OFF timeout
The polygon mirror motor does leave the READY status within 3 seconds after the
polygon motor switches off.
Disconnected or defective harness to polygon motor driver board

203

Defective polygon motor driver board

Defective polygon motor
1. Check or replace the harness.
2. Replace the polygon motor.
3. Replace the IPU board.
4. Replace the BCU.

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Polygon motor error 3: XSCRDY signal error

The polygon ready (SCRDY_N) signal goes HIGH (inactive) while the laser diode
is firing.
Disconnected or defective harness to polygon motor driver board
204

Defective polygon motor

Defective polygon motor driver board
1. Check or replace the harness.
2. Replace the polygon motor.
3. Replace the IPU board.
4. Replace the BCU.

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

220

Laser synchronizing detection error: start position [K]: LD1

222

Laser synchronizing detection error: start position [Y]: LD1

573

6. Troubleshooting

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

The laser synchronizing detection signal for the start position of the LDB [K], [Y], is
not output for two seconds after LDB unit turns on while the polygon motor is rotating
normally.
Disconnected cable from the laser synchronizing detection unit or defective
connection
Defective laser synchronizing detector

Defective LDB
Defective BCU
1. Check the connectors.
2. Replace the laser unit.
3. Replace the IPU board.
4. Replace the BCU.

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

FGATE ON error: K
The PFGATE ON signal does not assert within 5 seconds after processing the image
in normal job or MUSIC for start position [K].
Defective ASIC

230

Poor connection between IPU and BCU.

Defective BCU
1. Check the connection between the controller board and the BCU.
2. Replace the BCU.
3. Replace the controller board.

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

FGATE OFF error: K

231

The PFGATE ON signal still asserts within 5 seconds after processing the image
in normal job or MUSIC (line position adjustment) for end position [K].
The PFGATE ON signal still asserts when the next job starts.
See SC 230 for troubleshooting details.

574

SC Tables

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

FGATE ON error: Y

232

The PFGATE ON signal does not assert within 5 seconds after processing the image
in normal job or MUSIC (line position adjustment) for start position [Y].
See SC 230 for troubleshooting details.

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

FGATE OFF error: Y

233

The PFGATE ON signal still asserts within 5 seconds after processing the image
in normal job or MUSIC (line position adjustment) for end position [Y].
The PFGATE ON signal still asserts when the next job starts.
See SC 230 for troubleshooting details.

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

FGATE ON error: M
234

The PFGATE ON signal does not assert within 5 seconds after processing the image
in normal job or MUSIC (line position adjustment) for start position [M].
See SC 230 for troubleshooting details.

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

FGATE OFF error: M

235

The PFGATE ON signal still asserts within 5 seconds after processing the image
in normal job or MUSIC (line position adjustment) for end position [M].
The PFGATE ON signal still asserts when the next job starts.
See SC 230 for troubleshooting details.

575

6. Troubleshooting

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

FGATE ON error: C

236

The PFGATE ON signal does not assert within 5 seconds after processing the image
in normal job or MUSIC (line position adjustment) for start position [C].
See SC 230 for troubleshooting details.

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

FGATE OFF error: C

237

The PFGATE ON signal still asserts within 5 seconds after processing the image
in normal job or MUSIC (line position adjustment) for end position [C].
The PFGATE ON signal still asserts when the next job starts.
See SC 230 for troubleshooting details.

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

240

LD error: K

241

LD error: Y
The BCU detects LDB error a few times consecutively when LDB unit turns on after
LDB initialization.
Worn-out LD

Disconnected or broken harness of the LD

1. Replace the harness of the LD.
2. Replace the laser unit.
3. Replace the IPU board.

576

SC Tables

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Line position adjustment (MUSIC) error
Line position adjustment fails four consecutive times.
Pattern sampling error ( insufficient image density )
Defective ID sensors for the line position adjustment
Defective image transfer belt unit
Defective PCDU(s)

285

Defective laser unit

1. Check and reinstall the image transfer belt unit and PCDU(s).
2. Check if each toner bottle has enough toner.
3. Replace the ID sensor.
4. Replace the image transfer belt unit.
5. Replace the PCDU(s).
6. Replace the laser unit.

SC3xx: Image Processing 1

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

312

AC charge output error [K]

313

AC charge output error [C]

314

AC charge output error [M]

315

AC charge output error [Y]

The measured voltage is not proper when BCU measures the charge output for each
color.
Disconnected or broken high voltage cable

Defective or not installed PCDU

Defective HVPS-CB board
1. Check or replace the connectors.
2. Replace the PCDU for the affected color.
3. Replace the HVPS-CB board.
577

6. Troubleshooting

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Color development motor error
The motor LOCK signal is not detected for more than two seconds while the motor
START signal is on.

325

Color development motor slip due to an increase in the torque caused by

connected components.
Defective motor.
1. Adjust the torque properly by replacing or cleaning the development unit.
2. Replace the development unit.
3. Replace the development motor: CMY if load torque is normal.

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

360

TD sensor (Vt high) error 1: K

361

TD sensor (Vt high) error 1: M

362

TD sensor (Vt high) error 1: C

363

TD sensor (Vt high) error 1: Y

The Vt value of the black, magenta, cyan, or yellow TD sensor exceeds the
specified value (default: 4.7V) with SP3020-002 twenty counts.
The [Vt - Vtref] value of the black, magenta, cyan, or yellow TD sensor exceeds
the specified value (default: 5.0V) with SP3020-001.
Black, magenta, cyan, or yellow TD sensor disconnected

Harness between TD sensor and development unit defective

Defective TD sensor.
1. Check the black, magenta, cyan, or yellow TD sensor connector and harness
between the TD sensor and development unit for damage.
2. Check the drawer connector of the PCDU.
3. Replace the development unit.
4. Replace the PCDU.

No.
364
578

Type
D

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

TD sensor (Vt low) error 2: K

SC Tables

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

365

TD sensor (Vt low) error 2: M

366

TD sensor (Vt low) error 2: C

367

TD sensor (Vt low) error 2: Y

The Vt value of the black, magenta, cyan, or yellow TD sensor is below the specified
value with SP3020-004 (default: 0.5V) ten counts.
TD sensor harness disconnected, loose, defective
A drawer connector disconnected, loose, defective

TD sensor defective

1. Check the black, magenta, cyan, or yellow TD sensor connector and harness
between the TD sensor and development unit for damage.
2. Check the drawer connector of the PCDU.
3. Replace the development unit.
4. Replace the PCDU.
No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

372

TD sensor adjustment error: K

373

TD sensor adjustment error: M

374

TD sensor adjustment error: C

375

TD sensor adjustment error: Y

579

6. Troubleshooting

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

SC is issued only if one of followings is satisfied.
During TD sensor initialization, the output value of the black, magenta, cyan,
or yellow TD sensor is not within the range of the specified value with
SP3238-001 to -004 (default: 2.7V) 0.2V.
The TD sensor output is 0.7 V or more when the Vcnt is 4.3 v.
The adjusted Vcnt is 4.7 V or less.
Heat seal not removed from a new developer pack

TD harness sensor disconnected, loose or defective

TD sensor defective
Harness between TD sensor and drawer disconnected, defective
Different developer density from initial developer density
1. Remove the heat seal from each PCDU.

2. Replace the development unit.

3. Replace the PCDU.
No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

380

Drum gear position sensor error: K

381

Drum gear position sensor error: M, C, Y

The machine does not detect a change signal (H
the drum phase adjustment.

L or L

H) for 2.4 seconds at

Dirty or defective drum gear position sensor

1. Check the harnesses.

2. Clean or replace the drum gear position sensor.
3. Replace the PCDU.

No.
396

580

Type
D

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Drum/Development motor error: K

SC Tables

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

The machine detects a High signal from the drum/development motor: K for 2
seconds after the drum/development motor: K turned on.
Overload on the drum/development motor: K
Defective drum/development motor: K
Defective harness

Shorted 24 V fuse on the PSU

Defective interlock system

1. Check or replace the harness.
2. Check if torque output value for drum/development motor is proper if not
replace the unit.
3. Replace the drum/development motor: K.
4. Replace the 24V fuse on the PSU.

No.

Type

397

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Drum motor error: CMY

The machine detects a High signal from the drum motor: CMY for 2 seconds after
the drum motor: CMY turned on.
Overload on the drum motor: CMY
Defective drum motor: CMY
Defective harness

Shorted 24 V fuse on the PSU

Defective interlock system
1. Check or replace the harness.
2. Check if torque output value for drum motor is proper if not replace the unit.
3. Replace the drum motor: CMY.
4. Replace the 24V fuse on the PSU.

581

6. Troubleshooting

SC4xx: Image Processing - 2

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

ID sensor adjustment error

400

When the Vsg error counter reaches "3", the machine detects "SC400".
The Vsg error counter counts "1" when the Vsg detected by ID sensor is more than
the value (default: 4.5V) specified with SP3324-005 or less than the value (default:
3.5V) specified with SP3324-006.
Dirty or defective ID sensor
ID sensor detection surface dirty
1. Check the harness of the ID sensor.
2. Clean or replace the ID sensor.

After replacing the ID sensor, input the ID sensor correction coefficient

with SP3362-013 and -016. For details, refer to "ID sensor board" in the
Replacement and Adjustment section.
3. Check the spring at the PTR unit contact lever. (See PTR Unit Contact Motor
in the chapter Replacement and Adjustment.)
4. Replace the BCU.
5. Replace the ITB unit.

582

SC Tables

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

ITB unit motor error
The motor LOCK signal is not detected for more than two seconds while the motor
START signal is on.
Motor overload
Defective ITB unit motor

441

Defective or disconnected connector

Check the operation of the ITB unit motor with SP5804-051.
No operation:
1. Check the harness of the ITB unit motor.
2. Check if the cleaning blade of the ITB cleaning unit is rolled up.
3. Replace the ITB unit motor.
4. Replace the ITB unit.

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

ITB contact motor error
The ITB contact sensor does not detect the movement of actuator at the sensor while
the polygon motor rotates.
Dirty ITB contact sensor
ITB contact motor overload.
Defective ITB contact motor
Disconnected connector of ITB contact sensor or motor

442

Shorted 24 V fuse on the PSU.

Disconnected cable
Check the operation of the ITB unit motor with SP5804-077.
No operation:
1. Check the harness connection of the ITB contact motor.
2. Replace the ITB contact motor.
Operation:
1. Check the harness connection of the ITB contact sensor.
2. Replace the ITB contact sensor.

583

6. Troubleshooting

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

ITB unit error
The machine detects the encoder sensor error.
Disconnect or defective harness
Defective ITB rotation sensor
ITB unit installation error

443

Defective ITB unit motor

ITB unit motor overload
1. Check the harness connection of the ITB rotation sensor.
2. Check the trash or scratch on the encoder disc surface of the ITB rotation sensor.
3. Check if the ITB unit is correctly set.
4. Replace the ITB unit motor.

5. Replace the ITB unit.

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

PTR (Paper Transfer Roller) contact error
The PTR contact sensor does not detect the movement of actuator at the sensor while
the polygon motor rotates.
Defective PTR contact sensor
Defective PTR contact motor
PTR contact motor overload
Broken +24V fuse on PSU

452

Defective or disconnected harness.

Defective BCU
Check the operation of the PTR contact motor with SP5804-076.
No operation:
1. Check the harness connection of the PTR contact motor.
2. Replace the PTR contact motor.
Operation:
1. Replace the PTR contact sensor.

584

SC Tables

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

High voltage power: Drum/ development bias output error
An error signal is detected for 0.2 seconds when charging the drum or development.
High voltage leak
Broken harness

491

Defective drum unit or development unit

Defective HVPS-CB board
1. Check or replace the harness.
2. Replace the drum unit or paper transfer unit.
3. Replace the HVPS-CB board.

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

High voltage power: Image transfer/ paper transfer bias output error

An error signal is detected for 0.2 seconds when charging the separation, image
transfer belt or paper transfer roller.
High voltage leak
Broken harness
Defective image transfer belt unit or paper transfer unit
Defective HVPS-TTS board
492

1. Input "0V" in the following SP settings:

SP2-326-001
SP2-326-003
SP2-407-001
2. Execute the "Process Control" with SP3011-001.
3. Replace the ITB unit if an SC occurs after the Process Control.
4. Replace the PTR unit if an SC does not occur after the Process Control.
5. Replace the HVPS-TTS board.

585

6. Troubleshooting

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

PCDU toner collection motor error
The machine detects that the PCDU toner collection bottle is not set for one second
when the PCDU toner collection motor is turned off.
PCDU toner collection bottle motor damaged
Disconnect or defective harness

495

Defective DRB board

Defective BCU
1. Check or replace the harness.
2. Replace the PCDU toner collection bottle motor.
3. Replace the DRB board
4. Replace the BCU
5. Check and retry the connecting procedure.

SC5xx: Paper Feed and Fusing

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

503

3rd paper tray lift motor malfunction (optional Paper Tray Unit)

504

4th paper tray lift motor malfunction (optional Paper Tray Unit)
The paper lift sensor did not activate within 18 sec. (for PTU) or 8 sec. (for LCT) after
the tray lift motor switched on.
An obstruction (jammed paper, paper scraps, etc.) has blocked the motor drive
and caused an overload.
Paper lift sensor connection loose, disconnected, or damaged

Paper lift sensor defective

Tray lift motor connection loose, disconnected, or damaged
Tray lift motor defective
1. Check or replace the harness.
2. Replace the tray lift motor.
3. Replace the BCU.

586

SC Tables

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Paper tray feed motor lock (optional Paper Tray Unit)
A motor lock signal is not detected for more than 1.5 s at power-on or the lock signal
is not detected for more than 1.0 s during rotation.

506

An obstruction (jammed paper, paper scraps, etc.) has blocked the feed motor
drive and caused an overload.
Paper tray feed motor connection loose, disconnected, or damaged
Paper tray feed motor defective
1. Check or replace the harness.
2. Replace the feed motor.
3. Replace the BCU

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

By-pass bottom plate error

The signal from the by-pass tray HP sensor does not change for 1.0 second after
the by-pass motor has rotated counterclockwise.
If this condition occurs three consecutive times, the SC is generated.
508

Disconnect or defective harness of the by-pass motor

Defective or disconnected connection for the by-pass motor.
Defective by-pass motor
Disconnect or defective harness of the by-pass HP sensor
Defective or disconnected connection for the by-pass HP sensor.
Defective by-pass HP sensor

587

6. Troubleshooting

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Check the operation of the by-pass motor with SP5804-023.
No operation:
1. Check the harness connection of the by-pass tray and duplex unit.
2. Replace the by-pass motor.
Operation:
Check the operation of the by-pass HP sensor with SP5803-048 while the by-pass
motor is rotating.
No change of Bit 0
1. Check the harness connection of the by-pass HP sensor.
2. Replace the by-pass HP sensor.

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

530

Ventilation fan: front error

531

Ventilation fan: rear error

The motor lock signal error is detected for 10 seconds after the motor lock signal
was first detected.
Defective ventilation fan: front or rear
Disconnected or defective harness
Defective DRB
Defective BCU
1. Check or replace the harness.
2. Replace the ventilation fan: front (SC530) or rear (SC531).
3. Replace the DRB.
4. Replace the BCU.

588

SC Tables

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Laser unit fan error
The motor lock signal error is detected for 10 seconds after the motor lock signal
was first detected.
Defective laser unit fan
Disconnected or defective harness

532

Defective drive board

Defective BCU
1. Check or replace the harness.
2. Replace the laser unit fan.
3. Replace the laser unit fan motor.
4. Replace the DRB.
5. Replace the BCU.

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Fusing front fan error
The motor lock signal error is detected for 10 seconds after the motor lock signal
was first detected.
Defective fusing front fan
Disconnected or defective harness

533

Defective DRB
Defective BCU
1. Check or replace the harness.
2. Replace the fusing front fan.
3. Replace the DRB.
4. Replace the BCU.

589

6. Troubleshooting

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Fusing rear fan error
The motor lock signal error is detected for 10 seconds after the motor lock signal
was first detected.
Defective fusing rear fan
Disconnected or defective harness

534

Defective DRB
Defective BCU
1. Check or replace the harness.
2. Replace the fusing rear fan.
3. Replace the DRB.
4. Replace the BCU.

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Controller box fan error
The motor lock signal error is detected for 10 seconds after the motor lock signal
was first detected.
Defective controller box fan

535

Disconnected or defective harness

Defective BCU
1. Check or replace the harness.
2. Replace the controller box fan.
3. Replace the BCU.

590

SC Tables

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Junction gate solenoid fan error
The motor lock signal error is detected for 10 seconds after the motor lock signal
was first detected.
Defective junction gate solenoid fan

536

Disconnected or defective harness

Defective BCU
1. Check or replace the harness.
2. Replace the junction gate solenoid fan.
3. Replace the BCU.

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Fusing/Paper exit motor error
The BCU receives the lock signal 2.0 seconds after turning on the fusing/paper exit
motor.

540

Motor overload
Defective fusing/paper exit motor
Defective or disconnected connection for the fusing/paper exit motor
1. Replace the fusing/paper exit motor.
2. Check or replace connector and harness for the fusing/paper exit motor.

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Heating roller error 1
The temperature detected by the thermopile does not reach 0C for 3 seconds.

541

Loose connection of the thermopile

Defective thermopile
1. Check that the thermopile is firmly connected.
2. Replace the thermopile.

591

6. Troubleshooting

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Heating roller warm-up error 1
The heating roller temperature does not reach 50C for 4 seconds after the
heating lamp on.

542

The heating roller temperature does not reach the ready temperature for 43
seconds after the fusing unit has rotated.
The heating roller temperature does not reach 100C for 24 seconds in the
low temperature condition after the heating lamp on.
Dirty or defective thermopile
Defective thermopile.
Trash on the surface of the thermopile lens.
Defective thermostat
Broken harness of thermostat

Input voltage is over guaranteed value

Defective heating roller lamp
1. Check if the thermopile is firmly connected.
2. Clean the surface of the thermopile lens.
3. Test the conductance for the thermopile and the heating roller.
4. Replace the thermopile.
5. Replace the harness of thermostat or thermostat.
6. Replace the heating roller lamp.
No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Heating roller fusing lamp overheat 1 (software error)
The detected fusing temperature stays at 230C for 1 second.

543

Defective PSU
Defective BCU
1. Replace the PSU.
2. Replace the BCU.

592

SC Tables

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Heating roller fusing lamp overheat 1 (hardware error)
During stand-by mode or a print job, the detected heating roller temperature reaches
250C.

544

Defective PSU
Defective BCU
Defective fusing control system
1. Replace the PSU.
2. Replace the BCU.

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Heating roller fusing lamp consecutive full power 1
When the fusing unit is not running in the ready condition, the heating roller fusing
lamp keeps on full power for 37 seconds.

545

Broken heating roller thermostat

Broken heating roller fusing lamp
1. Replace the heating roller thermostats.
2. Replace the heating roller fusing lamp.

593

6. Troubleshooting

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Zero cross error
The zero cross signal is detected for 0.05 seconds three times even though the
heater relay is off when turning on the main power.
The zero cross signal is not detected for 2 seconds even though the heater relay
is on after turning on the main power or closing the front door.

547

The detection error occurs twice or more in the 11 zero cross signal detections.
This error is defined when the detected zero cross signal is less than 45.
Defective fusing lamp relay
Defective fusing lamp relay circuit
Unstable power supply
1. Check the power supply source.
2. Replace the shorted 24V fuse on the PSU.

3. Replace the PSU

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Heating roller thermistor (end) error 2
The temperature measured by the heating roller thermistor (end) does not reach
0C for 150 seconds when the machine's inside temperature is 5C or more.

551

The temperature measured by the heating roller thermistor (end) is -5C or less
for 8 seconds.
Loose connection of heating roller thermistor (end)
Defective heating roller thermistor (end)
1. Check that the heating roller thermistor (end) is firmly connected.
2. Replace the heating roller thermistor (end).

594

SC Tables

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Heating roller warm-up error 2
The heating roller temperature does not reach the ready temperature for 65
seconds after the fusing unit has rotated.
The heating roller temperature does not reach 100C for 25 seconds in the
low temperature condition after the heating lamp on.

552

Dirty or defective thermistor (end)

Heating roller fusing lamp broken
Defected thermostat
Defective heating roller fusing lamp
1. Check if the heating roller thermistor (end) is firmly connected.
2. Replace the heating roller thermistor (end).
3. Replace the heating roller fusing lamp.

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Heating roller fusing lamp overheat 2 (software error)
The detected pressure roller temperature stays at 230C or more for 1 second.

553

Defective PSU
Defective BCU
1. Replace the PSU.
2. Replace the BCU.

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Heating roller fusing lamp overheat 2 (hardware error)
The heating roller thermistor (end) detects 250C or more.
Defective PSU

554

Defective BCU
Defective fusing control system
1. Replace the PSU.
2. Replace the BCU.

595

6. Troubleshooting

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Heating roller lamp consecutive full power 2
When the fusing unit is not running in the ready condition, the pressure roller-fusing
lamp keeps ON full power for 130 seconds or more.

555

Broken heating roller thermostat

Broken heating roller fusing lamp
1. Replace the heating roller thermostat.
2. Replace the heating roller fusing lamp.

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Zero cross frequency error

557

When the zero cross signal is 66 or more and it is detected 10 times or more in 11
detections, the machine determines that input 60 Hz and SC557 occurs.
Noise (High frequency)
Check the power supply source.

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Consecutive fusing jam
The paper jam counter for the fusing unit reaches 3 times. The paper jam counter is
cleared if the paper is fed correctly.

559

This SC is activated only when SP1142-001 is set to "1" (default "0").

Paper jam in the fusing unit.
Remove the paper that is jammed in the fusing unit. Then make sure that the fusing
unit is clean and has no obstacles in the paper feed path.

596

SC Tables

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Pressure roller thermister error 3
The temperature measured by the pressure roller thermistor (center) does not reach
0C for 45 seconds.

561

Loose connection of pressure roller thermistor (center)

Defective pressure roller thermistor (center)
1. Check that the pressure roller thermistor (center)is firmly connected.
2. Replace the pressure roller thermistor (center).

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Pressure roller overheat 3 (software error)
The detected fusing roller temperature stays at 230C or more for 1 second.

563

Defective PSU

Defective BCU
1. Replace the PSU.
2. Replace the BCU.

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Pressure roller overheat 3 (hardware error)
The pressure roller thermistor (center) detects 250C or more.
Defective PSU

564

Defective BCU
Defective fusing control system
1. Replace the PSU.
2. Replace the BCU.

597

6. Troubleshooting

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Pressure roller thermister error 4
The temperature measured by the pressure roller thermistor (end) does not reach 0
C for 45 seconds.

571

Loose connection of pressure roller thermistor (end)

Defective pressure roller thermistor (end)
1. Check that the pressure roller thermistor (end) is firmly connected.
2. Replace the pressure roller thermistor (end).

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Pressure roller overheat 4 (software error)

The detected pressure roller temperature stays at 230C or more for 1 second.
573

Defective PSU
Defective BCU
1. Replace the PSU.
2. Replace the BCU.

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Pressure roller overheat 4 (hardware error)
The pressure roller thermistor (end) detects 250C or more.
Defective PSU

574

Defective BCU
Defective fusing control system
1. Replace the PSU.
2. Replace the BCU.

598

SC Tables

SC6xx: Device Communication

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

610

Mechanical counter error: K

611

Mechanical counter error: FC

This SC is only for NA models.
The machine detects the mechanical counter error when SP5987-001 is set to "1".
Disconnected mechanical counter

Defective mechanical counter

Defective BCU
1. Check or replace the mechanical counter.
2. Replace the BCU.
No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

ARDF communication error

After the ARDF is detected, the break signal occurs or communication timeout occurs.
Incorrect installation of ARDF
ARDF defective
620

IPU defective
External noise
1. Check the cable connection of the ARDF.
2. Shut out the external noise.
3. Replace the ARDF.
4. Replace the IPU.

No.
621

Type
D

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Finisher communication error

599

6. Troubleshooting

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

While the BCU communicates with an optional unit, an SC code is displayed if one
of following conditions occurs.
The BCU receives the break signal which is generated by the peripherals only
just after the main switch is turned on.
When the BCU does not receive an OK signal from a peripheral 100ms after
sending a command to it. The BCU resends the command. The BCU does not
receive an OK signal after sending the command 3 times.
Cable problems

BCU problems

PSU problems in the machine

Main board problems in the peripherals
Defective main board of peripherals.
Disconnected peripherals.

1. Check if the cables of peripherals are correctly connected.

2. Replace the PSU if no power is supplied to peripherals.
3. Replace the main board of peripherals.
4. Replace the BCU.
No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Counter device error 1

632

CTL
B

After 3 attempts to send a data frame to the optional counter device via the serial
communication line, no ACK signal was received within 100 ms.
Serial line between the optional counter device, the relay board and copier
control board is disconnected or damaged
Make sure that SP5113 is set to enable the optional counter device.

600

SC Tables

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Counter device error 2

633

CTL
B

After 3 attempts to send a data frame to the optional counter device via the serial
communication line, no ACK signal was received within 100 ms.
Serial line between the optional counter device, the relay board and copier
control board is disconnected or damaged
Make sure that SP5113 is set to enable the optional counter device.

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Counter device error 3

634

CTL
B

A backup RAM error was returned by the counter device.

Counter device control board defective
Backup battery of counter device defective

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Counter device error 4

635

CTL
B

A backup battery error was returned by the counter device.

Counter device control board defective
Backup battery of counter device defective

No.
636

Type
CTL

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

SD Card Error

601

6. Troubleshooting

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Expanded authentication module error
There is no expanded authentication module in the machine.
The SD card or the file of the expanded authentication module is broken.
There is no DESS module in the machine.

01

No expanded authentication module

Defective SD card
No DESS module
1. Install the expanded authentication module.
2. Install the SD card.
3. Install the DESS module.

Version error
02

The version of the expanded authentication module is not correct.

Incorrect module version
1. Install the correct file of the expanded authentication module.

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

BCU control data transfer abnormal
A sampling of the control data sent from the BCU reveals an abnormality.
Controller board defective

641

CTL
D

External noise
BCU board defective
1. Check the connection between the controller board and BCU.
2. Replace the controller board.
3. Replace the BCU.

No.
650

602

Type
CTL
B

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Communication error of the remote service modem (RCG-M)

SC Tables

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Authentication error
The authentication for the RCG-M fails at a dial up connection.
Incorrect SP settings

-001

Disconnected telephone line

Disconnected modem board
Disconnected Local Area Network card
Check and set the correct user name (SP5816-156) and password (SP5816-157).
Incorrect modem setting

-004

Dial up fails due to the incorrect modem setting.

Same as -001
Check and set the correct AT command (SP5819-160).
Communication line error

-005

The supplied voltage is not sufficient due to the defective communication line or
defective connection.

Same as -001
Consult with the user's local telephone company.
No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Incorrect dial up connection
-001: Program parameter error

651

CTL
C

-002: Program execution error

An unexpected error occurs when the modem (RCG-M) tries to call the center with
a dial up connection.
Caused by a software bug
No action required because this SC does not interfere with operation of the machine.

603

6. Troubleshooting

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

NVRAM error

669

Retry of NVRAM communication fails three times after the machine has detected the
NVRAM error.
Caused by noise
Turn the main power switch off and on.

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Engine start up error

670

CTL
D

The ready signal from the engine board is not detected.

Defective engine board.
Replace the engine board.

6
No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Engine board mismatch error
Engine board and controller mismatch detected.

671

CTL
D

Wrong engine board installed.

Wrong controller board installed.
Check the type of engine board and controller board.
1. Replace the BCU.
2. Replace the controller board.

604

SC Tables

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Controller-to-operation panel communication error at startup
After powering on the machine, the communication circuit between the controller
and the operation panel is not opened, or communication with controller is
interrupted after a normal startup.

672

CTL
D

Controller stall
Controller board installed incorrectly
Controller board defective
Operation panel connector loose or defective
1. Check the harness connection.
2. Replace the controller board.

No.
681

Type
D

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

RFID: Communication error

Communication error occurs when the RFID starts to communicate with the RFID
receptor.
Noise
No memory chip on the toner cartridge
001-005

Defective RFID reader and writer

Disconnected RFID controller board I/F
1. Turn the main power off and on.
2. Replace the toner cartridge.
3. Replace the RFID controller board.
Retry of RFID communication fails three times after the machine has detected the
RFID communication error.
Defective RFID reader and writer

061-164

No memory chip on the toner cartridge

Noise
1. Replace the toner cartridge.
2. Turn the main power off and on.
3. Replace the RFID-R/W controller board.
605

6. Troubleshooting

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Memory chip at TD sensor: Communication error
Retry of memory chip communication fails three times after the machine has detected
the memory chip communication error.
Damaged memory chip data

682

Disconnected inter face

No memory chip on the development unit
Noise
1. Replace the development unit.
2. Replace the PCDU.

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

RFID: Unit check error

683

The machine gets RFID communication error even the toner cartridges have not been
installed in the machine.
Caused by noise
Turn the main power switch off and on.

606

SC Tables

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Memory address command error
The BCU does not receive a memory address command from the controller for the
prescribed time after the paper has reached the registration sensor.
Harness disconnection at BCU
Controller board loose or broken
Defective HDD

687

Defective BCU
Defective controller
1. Check if the controller is firmly connected to the BCU.
2. Update the firmware of the IPU.
3. Replace the HDD.
4. Update the firmware of the BCU.
5. Replace the BCU.

6. Replace the controller board.

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

GAVD communication error
The I2C bus device ID is not identified during initialization.
A device-status error occurs during I2C bus communication.
The I2C bus communication is not established due to an error other than a
buffer shortage.

690

Loose connection
Defective BCU
Defective LD controller board
1. Turn the main switch off and on.
2. Check the cable connection.
3. Replace the laser unit.
4. Replace the BCU board.

607

6. Troubleshooting

SC7xx: Peripherals
No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Shift tray motor error

730

The shift tray HP sensor does not activate within 1.86 seconds after the shift tray
motor starts to move at power on or copying. The 1st detection failure issues a jam
error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code.
Defective shift tray motor
Defective shift tray HP sensor.
Replace the shift tray motor.

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Finisher stapler motor error

The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code.
Staple jam
Motor overload
740

Defective stapler motor

Defective stapler safety sensor
1. Check the connections and cables for the components mentioned above.
2. Replace the stapler unit
3. Replace the finisher main board.

608

SC Tables

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Finisher stapler movement motor error
Motor overload
Loose connection of the stapler unit HP sensor
Loose connection of the stapler unit movement motor

742

Defective stapler unit HP sensor

Defective stapler movement motor
1. Check the connection of the stapler movement motor.
2. Check the connection of the stapler unit HP sensor.
3. Replace the stapler unit HP sensor.
4. Replace the stapler unit movement motor.

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Finisher: Tray lift motor error

Motor overload
750

Loose connection of the tray lift motor

Defective tray lift motor
1. Check the connections to the tray lift motor.
2. Replace the tray lift motor.

609

6. Troubleshooting

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Finisher punch motor error
The punch HP sensor is not activated within the specified time after the punch motor
turned on. The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this
SC code.
Punch HP sensor disconnected, defective

760

Punch motor disconnected or defective

Punch motor overload due to obstruction
1. Check the connections and cables for the punch motor and HP sensor.
2. Check for blockages in the punch motor mechanism.
3. Replace the punch slider unit.
4. Replace the punch unit.
5. Replace the finisher main board.

6
No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Finisher: Punch registration motor error
The punch unit moves but is not detected at the home position within the specified
time. The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC
code.

763

Motor harness disconnected, loose, defective

Defective registration motor
1. Check the connections to the punch registration motor.
2. Replace the punch unit slider.
3. Replace the punch unit.

610

SC Tables

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Finisher: Paper edge detection sensor error
The machine does not detect correct voltage from the paper edge detection sensor.
Defective connector

787

Defective paper edge detection sensor.

Defective DA or AD converter.
1. Replace the punch slider unit.
2. Replace the punch unit.

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

788

Finisher: Paper size sensor error without side tray

789

Finisher: Paper size sensor error with side tray

The machine does not detect correct voltage from the paper size sensors.

Defective connector
Defective paper size sensors
Defective DA or AD converter.
1. Replace the punch slider unit.
2. Replace the punch unit.
No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

790

Finisher: Front jogger motor error without side tray

793

Finisher: Front jogger motor error with side tray

611

6. Troubleshooting

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

The machine does not detect a correct signal from the front jogger fence HP sensor
at power-on. The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues
this SC code.
Defective front jogger motor
Loosen connection
Motor overload
Defective front jogger fence HP sensor
1. Replace the front jogger fence HP sensor.
2. Replace the front jogger motor.

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

791

Finisher: Rear jogger motor error without side tray

794

Finisher: Rear jogger motor error with side tray

The machine does not detect a correct signal from the rear jogger fence HP sensor
at power-on. The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues
this SC code.
Defective rear jogger motor
Loosen connection
Motor overload
Defective rear jogger fence HP sensor
1. Replace the rear jogger fence HP sensor.
2. Replace the rear jogger motor.

No.

612

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

792

Pick-up roller contact motor error without side tray

795

Pick-up roller contact motor error with side tray

SC Tables

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

The machine does not detect a correct signal from the pick-up roller HP sensor at
power-on. The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this
SC code.
Defective pick-up roller contact motor
Loosen connection
Motor overload
Defective pick-up roller HP sensor
1. Replace the pick-up contact motor.
2. Replace the pick-up roller HP sensor.

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Belt roller solenoid error
Disconnected harness

Defective belt roller position sensor

796

Defective belt roller solenoid

1. Check the harness connection.
2. Replace the belt roller position sensor.
3. Replace the belt roller solenoid.

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

NVRAM data error

797

Defective NVRAM on the main board of the internal finisher

1. Check the harness connection.
2. Replace the main board.

613

6. Troubleshooting

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Front Fan error
The machine detects the fan lock signal (ON) consecutively 200 ms.
Front fan damaged

798

Disconnect or defective the harness

Front fan overload
1. Check or replace the harness.
2. Replace the front fan.

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Output tray motor error

Output tray motor damaged

799

Output tray motor overload

Loose connection of the output tray motor
Defective output tray motor
Replace the output tray unit.

SC8xx: Overall System

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Energy saving I/O sub-system error

816

CTL
D

The energy saving I/O sub-system detects an error.

Controller board defective
Replace the controller board.

614

SC Tables

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Monitor Error

817

CTL
D

This is a file detection and electronic file signature check error when the boot loader
attempts to read the self-diagnostic module, system kernel, or root system files from
the OS Flash ROM, or the items on the SD card in the controller slot are false or
corrupted.
OS Flash ROM data defective; change the controller firmware
SD card data defective; use another SD card

No.

819

Type
CTL
C

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Fatal kernel error
Due to a control error, a RAM overflow occurred during system processing. One
of the following messages was displayed on the operation panel.

[0x5032]

HAIC-P2 error

[0x696e]

init died

Controller board defective

[0x766d]

vm_pageout: VM is full

Optional board defective

[554C]

USB error

No.
820

Type

System program defective

1. Replace controller firmware

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

CTL

Self-diagnostics error: CPU

[XXXX]: Detailed error code

CPU error

During the self-diagnostic, the controller CPU detects an error. There are 47 types
of error code (0001 to 4005) depending on the cause of the error. The CPU detects
[0001] to [06FF] an error and displays the specific error code with the program address where the
[0801] to [4005] error occurs.
System firmware problem
Defective controller

615

6. Troubleshooting

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

1. Turn the main switch off and on.
2. Reinstall the controller system firmware.
3. Replace the controller.
When the problem cannot be fixed with the above procedure, the following
information displayed on the screen needs to be fed back to a technical support
center.
SC code
Detailed error code
Program address
CPU/Memory Error
System firmware problem

[0702]

Defective RAM-DIMM

[0709]

Defective controller

[070A]

1. Reinstall the controller system software.

2. Replace the RAM-DIMM.
3. Replace the controller.

No.
821

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

CTL

Self-diagnostics error: ASIC

[XXXX]: Detailed error code

ASIC error

[0B00]

The write-&-verify check error has occurred in the ASIC.

Defective ASIC device
Replace the controller.
ASIC detection error
The I/O ASIC for system control is not detected.

[0B06]

Defective ASIC
Defective North Bridge and PCI I/F
Replace the controller board.

616

SC Tables

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Self-diagnosis error: ASIC
The CPU checks if the ASIC timer works correctly compared with the CPU timer. If
the ASIC timer does not function in the specified range, this SC code is displayed.
System firmware problem

[0D05]

Defective RAM-DIMM
Defective controller
1. Reinstall the controller system firmware.
2. Replace the RAM-DIMM.
3. Replace the controller board.
Video bridge device (ASIC) error 1
The CPU does not detect the video bridge device.

[50A1]

Defective I/F between the video bridge device and controller

Replace the controller board.

Video bridge device (ASIC) register error 1
The CPU detects the video bridge device, but detects error data from the video
bridge device.

[50A2]

Defective I/F between the video bridge device and controller

Replace the controller board.
No.

Type
CTL

822

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Self-diagnostic error: HDD (Hard Disk Drive)
[XXXX]: Detailed error code

[3003]

Timeout error

[3004]

Command error

When the main switch is turned on or starting the self-diagnostic, the HDD stays busy
for the specified time or more.

617

6. Troubleshooting

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Loose connection

Defective HDD
Defective controller
1. Check that the HDD is correctly connected to the controller.

2. Replace the HDD.

3. Replace the controller.

No.
823

Type
CTL
B

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Self-diagnostic error: NIB
[XXXX]: Detailed error code
MAC address check sum error

[6101]

[6104]

[6105]
-

618

The result of the MAC address check sum does not match the check sum stored in
ROM.
PHY IC error
The PHY IC on the controller cannot be correctly recognized.
PHY IC loop-back error
An error occurred during the loop-back test for the PHY IC on the controller.
Replace the controller.

SC Tables

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

[1401]
Self-diagnosis error: Standard NVRAM
The controller cannot recognize the standard NVRAM installed or detects that the
NVRAM is defective.

824

CTL
D

Loose connection
Defective standard NVRAM
Defective controller
1. Check the standard NVRAM is firmly inserted into the socket.
2. Replace the NVRAM.
3. Replace the controller board.

No.
826

Type
CTL
D

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Self-diagnostic Error: RTC/optional NVRAM

The one second counted by the RTC is different from the one second counted by the
CPU on the controller.
[1501]

Defective the RTC device

Replace the RTC device..
The RTC device is not detected.
Defective RTC device

[15FF]

NVRAM without RTC installed

Discharged backup battery
Replace the NVRAM with another NVRAM with an RTC device.

No.
827

Type
CTL
D

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Self-diagnostic error: Standard SDRAM DIMM
[XXXX]: Detailed error code

619

6. Troubleshooting

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Verification error
Error detected during a write/verify check for the standard RAM (SDRAM DIMM).
Loose connection
Defective SDRAM DIMM

[0201]

Defective controller
1. Turn the main switch off and on.
2. Replace the SDRAM DIMM.
3. Replace the controller.
Resident memory error
The SPD values in all RAM DIMM are incorrect or unreadable.

Defective RAM DIMM

[0202]

Defective SPD ROM on RAM DIMM

Defective 12C bus
1. Replace the RAM DIMM.

No.
828

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

CTL

Self-diagnostic error: ROM

[XXXX]: Detailed error code

Check sum error 1

[0101]

No.
829

[0401]

620

The boot monitor and OS program stored in the ROM DIMM is checked. If the
check sum of the program is incorrect, this SC code is displayed.
Type
CTL
B

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Self-diagnosis error: optional RAM
[XXXX]: Detailed error code
Verification error (Slot 1)
The data stored in the optional RAM in Slot 1 does not match the data when reading.

SC Tables

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Not specified RAM DIMM installed
Defective RAM DIMM
1. Replace the RAM DIMM.
2. Replace the controller board.

No.
833

Type
CTL
C

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Self-diagnostic error 8: Engine I/F ASIC
ASIC (Mandolin) for system control could not be detected. After the PCI
configuration, the device ID for the ASIC could not be checked.

[0F30]
[0F31]

Replace the BCU.

ASIC (Mandolin) for system control could not be detected. After the PCI
configuration, the device ID for the ASIC could not be checked.

[0F41]

Replace the BCU.

Could not initialize or read the bus connection.
[50B1]

Check for loose connections at the mother board.

Replace the mother board.
Value of the SSCG register is incorrect.

[50B2]

Check for loose connections at the mother board.

Replace the mother board.

No.
838

Type
CTL
D

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Self-diagnostic Error: Clock Generator

621

6. Troubleshooting

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

A verify error occurred when setting data is read from the clock generator on the
controller.
Defective clock generator

[2701]

Defective controller board

Replace the controller board.
No.
839

Type
CTL
C

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

USB NAND Flash ROM error
The ID of the USB NAND Flash ROM cannot be read.

[9101]

Defective controller board

Replace the controller board.
The USB NAND Flash ROM is disconnected.

[9110]

Defective controller board

Replace the controller board.

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

IEEE1394 interface error
The 1394 interface is unusable.

851

CTL
B

Defective IEEE1394
Defective controller.
1. Turn the main switch off and on.
2. Replace the IEEE1394 interface board.
3. Replace the controller.

622

SC Tables

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Wireless LAN card not detected

853

CTL
B

The wireless LAN card is not detected before communication is established, though
the wireless LAN board is detected.
Loose connection
Check the connection.

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Wireless LAN/Bluetooth card not detected

854

CTL
B

The wireless LAN/Bluetooth card is not detected after communication is established,

but the wireless LAN board is detected.
Loose connection
Check the connection.

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Wireless LAN/Bluetooth card error
An error is detected in the wireless LAN/Bluetooth card.

855

CTL

856

Loose connection
Defective wireless LAN/Bluetooth card
1. Check the connection.
2. Replace the wireless LAN/Bluetooth card.

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

USB interface error
The USB interface cannot be used due to a driver error.

857

CTL
B

Defective USB driver

Loose connection
1. Check the connection.
2. Replace the USB board.
623

6. Troubleshooting

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

HDD Encryption unit error 1
A serious error occurs when data is encrypted to update an encryption key with the
HDD encryption unit.
Encryption key acquisition error:
[0]

The controller fails to get a new encryption key.

Defective controller board
1. Replace the controller board.
Encryption key setting for HDD error:

[1]

858

The controller fails to copy a new encryption key to the HDD.

Defective SATA chip on the controller board
1. Replace the controller board.

CTL
C

NVRAM data encryption error 1:

[2]

An error occurs while the NVRAM data is encrypted.

Defective NVRAM on the controller board
1. Replace the NVRAM.
NVRAM data encryption error 2:

[30]

An error occurs before the NVRAM data is encrypted.

Defective controller board
1. Replace the controller board.
Other error:

[30]

A serious error occurs while the data is encrypted.

Same as SC991

624

SC Tables

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

HDD Encryption unit error 2
A serious error occurs when the HDD data is encrypted to update an encryption key
with the HDD encryption unit.
HDD check error:
The HDD is not correctly installed.
No HDD installed
[8]

859

Unformatted HDD
The encryption key on the controller is different from the one on the
HDD

CTL

1. Install the HDD correctly.

1. Initialize the HDD.

Power failure during the data encryption:
[9]

The data encryption (NVRAM and HDD) has not been completed.

Power failure during the data encryption

1. Initialize the HDD.
Data read/write error:

[10]

The DMAC error is detected twice or more.

Same as SC863

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

HDD: Initialization error
The controller detects that the hard disk fails.

860

CTL
B

HDD not initialized

Defective HDD
1. Reformat the HDD.
2. Replace the HDD.

625

6. Troubleshooting

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

HDD: Reboot error
The HDD does not become ready within 30 seconds after the power is supplied to
the HDD.
Loose connection

861

CTL
D

Defective cables
Defective HDD
Defective controller
1. Check the connection between the HDD and controller.
2. Check and replace the cables.
3. Replace the HDD.
4. Replace the controller.

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Bad sector number error

862

CTL
D

The number of bad sectors in the HDD (image data area) goes over 101.
Defective HDD
1. Format the HDD with SP5-832-002.
2. Replace the HDD.

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

HDD: Read error
The data stored in the HDD cannot be read correctly.

863

CTL
D

Defective HDD
Defective controller
1. Replace the HDD.
2. Replace the controller.

626

SC Tables

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

HDD: CRC error

864

CTL
D

While reading data from the HDD or storing data in the HDD, data transmission
fails.
Defective HDD
Replace the HDD.

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

HDD: Access error

865

CTL
D

An error is detected while operating the HDD.

Defective HDD
Replace the HDD.

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

SD card authentication error

866

CTL
B

A correct license is not found in the SD card.

SD-card data is corrupted.
Store correct data in the SD card.

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

SD card error

867

CTL
D

The SD card is ejected from the slot.

1. Install the SD card.
2. Turn the main switch off and on.

627

6. Troubleshooting

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

SD card access error
-13 to -3: File system error
Other number: Device error

868

CTL
D

An error report is sent from the SD card reader.

An error is detected in the SD card.
1. For a file system error, format the SD card on your PC.
2. For a device error, turn the mains switch off and on.
3. Replace the SD card.
4. Replace the controller.

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Address book error
An error is detected in the data copied to the address book over a network.
Defective software program

870

CTL
B

Defective HDD
Incorrect path to the server
1. Back up the address book data ( "Address Book Upload/Download" in the
Appendices) and Initialize the address book data (SP5-846-046) and the user
information.
(Restore the address book data if possible.)
2. Replace the HDD.

628

SC Tables

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

HDD mail data error
An error is detected in the HDD at machine initialization.

872

CTL
B

Defective HDD
Power failure during an access to the HDD
1. Turn the main switch off and on.
2. Initialize the HDD partition (SP5-832-007).
3. Replace the HDD.

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

HDD mail transfer error
An error is detected in the HDD at machine initialization.

873

CTL
B

Defective HDD

Power failure during an access to the HDD

1. Initialize the HDD partition (SP5-832-008).
2. Replace the HDD.

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Delete All error 1: HDD
An error is detected while all of the HDD or NVRAM are formatted physically by
the DataOverwriteSecurity Unit (D362).

874

CTL
D

DataOverwriteSecurity Unit (SD card) not installed

Defective HDD
1. Install the DataOverwriteSecurity Unit (D362).
2. Replace the HDD.

629

6. Troubleshooting

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Delete All error 2: Data area

875

CTL
D

An error is detected while all of the HDD or NVRAM are formatted logically by the
DataOverwriteSecurity Unit (D362).
The logical format for the HDD fails.
Turn the main switch off/on and try the operation again

No.

876

Type
CTL
D

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Log Data Error
An error was detected in the handling of the log data at power on or during machine
operation. This can be caused by switching the machine off while it is operating.
Log Data Error 1

-001

Damaged log data file in the HDD

Initialize the HDD with SP5832-004.
Log Data Error 2

-002

An encryption module not installed

1. Disable the log encryption setting with SP9730-004 ("0" is off.)
2. Install the DESS module.
Log Data Error 3

-003

Invalid log encryption key due to defective NVRAM data

1. Initialize the HDD with SP5832-004.
2. Disable the log encryption setting with SP9730-004 ("0" is off.)
Log Data Error 4

-004

Unusual log encryption function due to defective NVRAM data

Initialize the HDD with SP5832-004.

630

SC Tables

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Log Data Error 5

-005

Installed NVRAM or HDD which is used in another machine

1. Reinstall the previous NVRAM or HDD.
2. Initialize the HDD with SP5832-004.
Log Data Error 99

-099

Other than the above causes

Ask your supervisor.

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

HDD Data Overwrite Security SD card error
The 'all delete' function cannot be executed but the DataOverwriteSecurity Unit
(D362) is installed and activated.

877

CTL
D

Defective SD card (D362)

SD card (D362) not installed
1. Replace the NVRAM and then install the new SD card (D362).
2. Check and reinstall the SD card (D362).

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

TPM system authentication error

878

CTL
D

The system firmware is not authenticated by TPM (security chip).

Incorrect updating for the system firmware
Defective flash ROM on the controller board
Replace the controller board.

631

6. Troubleshooting

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

File format converter error

880

CTL
D

The file format converter does not respond.

Defective file format converter
Replace the file format converter.

SC9xx: Miscellaneous
No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Electric counter error
Abnormal data in the counters.

900

CTL
D

Defective NVRAM
Defective controller
1. Check the connection between the NVRAM and controller.
2. Replace the NVRAM.
3. Replace the controller.

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Printer application error
An error is detected in the printer application program.

920

CTL
D

Defective software
Unexpected hardware resource (e.g., memory shortage)
1. Software defective; switch off/on, or change the controller firmware if the
problem is not solved
2. Insufficient memory

632

SC Tables

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Printer font error

921

CTL
D

A necessary font is not found in the SD card.

A necessary font is not found in the SD card.
The SD card data is corrupted.
Check that the SD card has the correct data.

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Software performance error
The software makes an unexpected operation.
Defective software

990

CTL
D

Defective controller
Software error

1. Turn the main switch off and on.

2. Reinstall the controller and/or engine main firmware.

See Note 1 at the end of the SC table.

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Software continuity error

991

CTL
C

The software has attempted to perform an unexpected operation. However, unlike

SC 990, the object of the error is continuity of the software.
Software program error
Internal parameter incorrect, insufficient working memory.
This SC is not displayed on the LCD (logging only).

633

6. Troubleshooting

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Undefined error
Defective software program

992

CTL
D

An error undetectable by any other SC code occurred

Print the "Logging Data" with SP5990-004 and then check the SP7990.
If 498-Engine is found in the SP7990;
1. Check the harness connection of the temperature/humidity sensor.
2. Replace the temperature/humidity sensor.

No.
995

Type
D

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

CPM setting error
Defective BCU

-001

1. Input the serial number with SP5811-004, and turn the main power switch off/
on.
Defective NVRAM on the controller
Defective controller

-002

1. Install a new NVRAM, and turn off and on the main power switch after
SC995-002 has occurred.
2. Reinstall the previous NVRAM or download the information with SP5825-001,
after that turn the main power off and on.
Incorrect type controller installed

-003

Defective controller
Replace the controller board with the correct type.

-004

634

Incorrect model controller installed.

Replace the controller board with the correct model.

SC Tables

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Application function selection error
The application selected by the operation panel key does not start or ends
abnormally.
Software (including the software configuration) defective
An option required by the application (RAM, DIMM, board) is not installed

997

CTL
B

Nesting of the fax group addresses is too complicated

1. Check the devices necessary for the application program. If necessary devices
have not been installed, install them.
2. Check that application programs are correctly configured.
3. For a fax operation problem, simplify the nesting of the fax group addresses.
4. Take necessary countermeasures specific to the application program. If the
logs can be displayed on the operation panel, see the logs.

No.

Type

Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

Application start error

No applications start within 60 seconds after the power is turned on.
Loose connection of RAM-DIMM, ROM-DIMM
Defective controller
998

CTL
D

Software problem
1. Check the setting of SP5875-001. If the setting is set to "1 (OFF)", change it
to "0 (OFF)".
2. Check if the RAM-DIMM and ROM-DIMM are correctly connected.
3. Reinstall the controller system firmware.
4. Replace the controller.

Note 1
If a problem always occurs in a specific condition (for example. printer driver setting, image file), the
problem may be caused by a software error. In this case, the following data and information needs to be
sent back to your product specialist. Please understand that it may take some time to get a reply on how
to solve the problem, because in some cases the design staff in Japan must analyze the data.
Symptom / Possible Causes / Action taken
Summary sheet (SP mode Printer SP, SP1-004 [Print Summary])
635

6. Troubleshooting

SMC - All (SP5-990-001)

SMC - Logging (SP5-990-004)
Printer driver settings used when the problem occurs
All data displayed on the screen (SC code, error code, and program address where the problem is
logged.)
Image file which causes the problem, if possible

636

Process Control Error Conditions

Process Control Error Conditions

Developer Initialization Result
Displayed number shows results of each developer initialization result.
0000 = YMCK
SP-3-014-001 (Developer Initialization Result)
No.
1

Result
Successfully
completed

Description
Developer initialization is
successfully completed.

Possible Causes/Action
A cover was opened or the main switch was
turned off during the initialization.

Forced
termination

Developer initialization
was forcibly terminated.

1. Do the developer initialization again when

done in SP mode. Reinstall the engine main
firmware if the result is the same.

2. Turn the main switch off and on when done

at unit replacement.
6

Vt error

Vt is less than 0.7V when

Vcnt is 4.3V.

Vcnt error 1

Vcnt is more than 4.7V

when Vcnt is Vt target
0.2V.

Vcnt error 2

Vt is less than 0.7V when

Vcnt is 4.3V and Vcnt is
more than 4.7V when
Vcnt is Vt target 0.2V.

Vcnt error 3

Vcnt is Vt target over

0.2V.

1. Defective TD sensor
1. Defective TD sensor
2. Vt target settings are not correct.
3. Toner density error

1. Defective TD sensor

1. Defective TD sensor
2. Vt target settings are not correct.
3. Toner density error

The machine starts developer initialization after you set 1 in SP3-902-005, 006, 007, or 008.
Developer initialization automatically resumes when you open and close the front door or turn the
main switch off and on if an error other than Error 8 occurs.
637

6. Troubleshooting

Process Control Self-Check Result

Displayed number shows results of each Process Control Self-Check.
00000000 = YYMMCCKK
SP3-012-001 to -010 (Process Control Self-check Result)
No. Result
11

Successfully
completed

Description

Possible Causes/Action

Process control self-check

successfully completed.
Defective development unit
Vt maximum error and an image is faint:
1. Replace the toner hopper unit.

41

Vt error

Vt maximum or minimum
error is detected.

Vt maximum error and an image is O.K:

1. Replace the development unit.
2. Replace the BCU board.
Vt minimum error:
1. Replace the development unit.
2. Replace the BCU board.
Solid image is not sufficient density:
1. Retry the process control.
2. Replace the ID sensors.
3. Replace the BCU board.

53

ID sensor
coefficient (K5)
detection error

Not enough data can be

sampled.

Solid image is O.K.

1. Replace the ID sensors.
2. Replace the BCU board.
ID sensor is dirty:
1. Clean the ID sensors.
2. Retry the process control.

54

638

ID sensor
coefficient (K5)
maximum/
minimum error

When the K5 is more than

the value of
SP3-362-003 or less
than the value of
SP3-362-004, the error
54 is displayed.

ID sensor pattern density is too high or low.

Process Control Error Conditions

No. Result

55

Gamma error:
Maximum

Description

Possible Causes/Action

Gamma is out of range.

5.0 < Gamma

ID sensor pattern density is too high.

Hardware defective.
Same as 53
ID sensor pattern density is too low.

56

Gamma error:
Minimum

Gamma is out of range.

Hardware defective.

Gamma < 0.15

1. Same as 53
2. Replace the toner hopper unit.

57

Vk error:
Maximum

ID sensor pattern density is too low.

Vk is out of range.

Hardware defective.

300 < Vk

Same as 53
ID sensor pattern density is too high.

58

Vk error:
Minimum

Vk is out of range.

Background dirty

Vk < 300

Hardware defective

Same as 53

59

99

Sampling data
error during
gamma
correction

Not enough data can be

sampled during the
gamma correction.

Unexpected
error

Process control fails.

ID sensor pattern density is too high or low.

Hardware defective
Same as 53
Power Failure
Check the power source.

Vsg Adjustment Result

Displayed number shows results of each sensor check.
000 = FCR
SP3-325-001 to -010 (Vsg Adjustment Result)
No. Result

Description

Possible Causes/Action

Vsg adjustment is
correctly done.

O.K

639

6. Troubleshooting

No. Result

Description

Possible Causes/Action
Dirty ID sensors (toner, dust, or foreign material)
Dirty image transfer belt
Scratched image transfer belt
Defective ID sensors
Poor connection

ID sensor
adjustment
error

Vsg cannot be
adjusted within 4.0
0.5V.

Defective BCU
1. Clean the ID sensors.
2. Check the ITB cleaning unit. Clean or replace the
image transfer belt.
3. Replace the image transfer belt.
4. Replace the ID sensors.
5. Check the connection.
6. Replace the BCU board.

Defective ID sensors
ID sensor
output error

ID sensor output is
more than "Voffset
Threshold" (SP3-32
4-004)

Poor connection
Defective BCU
1. Replace the ID sensors.
2. Check the connection.
3. Replace the BCU board.

Vsg
Adjustment
error

Vsg adjustment has

not been
completed.

Other cases
Retry SP3-321-010.

Line Position Adjustment Result

SP2-194-010 to -012 (Line Position Adjustment Result: M, C, Y)
This SP shows the number as a line position adjustment result on the LCD. It shows which color has an error
(M, Y or C).
No.
0

640

Result

Description

Note

Not done

Line position adjustment has not been done.

Process Control Error Conditions

No.

Result

Description

Note

Completed
successfully

Line position adjustment has correctly been done,

Cannot detect
patterns

ID sensors have not detected the patterns for line position

See Note
adjustment.

Fewer lines on the

pattern than the
target

The patterns, which ID sensors have detected, are not

enough for line position adjustment.

See Note

More lines on the

pattern than the
target

Not used in this machine.

Not used

5-9

For details, see the "Troubleshooting Guide - Line Position Adjustment" section.

641

6. Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting Guide
Image Quality
The following work-flow shows the basic troubleshooting steps for the image quality problems on this
product.

642

Troubleshooting Guide

643

6. Troubleshooting

Line Position Adjustment

When there are color registration errors on the output, do the line position adjustment as follows.
Use A3/DLT size paper for this adjustment.

Test
1. Do SP2-111-003 (Mode c: rough adjustment).
2. Use SP2-194-007 to check if the result of the line position adjustment is correct (0: Completed
successfully, 1: Not completed). If the result is "1", refer to Countermeasure list for color registration
errors.
3. Do SP2-111-001 (Mode a: fine adjustment twice).

4. Use SP2-194-007 to check if the result of the line position adjustment is correct (0: Completed
successfully, 1: Not completed). If the result is "1", refer to Countermeasure list for color registration
errors.
5. Put some A3/DLT paper on the by-pass tray.
When you print a test pattern, use the by-pass tray to feed the paper.
6. Print out test pattern "7" with SP2-109-003.
7. Check the printed output with a loupe.
8. If there are no color registration errors on the output, the line position adjustment is correctly done. If
not, refer to the countermeasure list for color registration errors.

Countermeasure list for color registration errors

After Executing SP2-111-003
Result: "1" in SP2-194-007
Result: "2" or "3" (Line pattern detection failure) in SP2-194-010, -011, -012

644

Troubleshooting Guide

Test pattern check

Possible cause/Countermeasure
Defective image processing unit
Low density of test pattern

White image, Abnormal image, Low

density

Defective controller
1. Replace the high voltage power supply unit.
2. Do the forced process control (SP3-011-001) or supply
some toner (SP3-015-xxx).
3. Replace the BCU.
Defective ID sensors

Normal image, but with color

registration errors

Defective BCU
1. Replace the ID sensor.
2. Replace the BCU.

After Executing SP2-111-003

Result: "1" in SP2-194-007

One of results: "4" (Out of adjustable range) in SP2-194-010, -011, -012.
Test pattern check

Possible cause/Countermeasure
Defective laser unit

The main scan registrations of M, C, Y

are shifted by more than 15 mm from
the main scan registration of K.

Defective BCU
1. Replace the laser unit.
2. Replace the BCU.
Defective image transfer belt
Defective drive units

The sub scan registrations of M, C, Y

are shifted by more than 20 mm from
the sub scan registration of K.

Defective BCU
1. Replace the image transfer belt.
2. Replace the drum motor.
3. Replace the BCU.

645

6. Troubleshooting

Test pattern check

Possible cause/Countermeasure
Defective ID sensor at center
Deformed center area on the image transfer belt

The main scan registration is shifted by

more than 0.66 mm, but only at the
central area of the image on the output.

Defective BCU
1. Replace the ID sensor.
2. Replace the image transfer belt.
3. Replace the BCU.
Defective PCU
Defective laser unit

The skew for M, C, Y is more than

0.75 mm from the main scan
registration of K

Defective BCU
1. Reinstall or replace the BCU.
2. Replace the laser unit.
3. Replace the BCU.

Skew correction upper limit error

Defective BCU
Defective laser unit

Others

1. Replace the BCU.

2. Replace the laser unit.
After Executing SP2-111-003
Result: "1" in SP2-194-007
Result: "0" in SP2-194-010, -011, -012.
Test pattern check

Possible cause/Countermeasure
Do SP2-111-001 or -002.

After Executing SP2-111-001

Result: "1" in SP2-194-007
Result: "2" or "3" (Line pattern detection failure) in SP2-194-010, -011, -012

646

Troubleshooting Guide

Test pattern check

Possible cause/Countermeasure

White image, Abnormal image,

Defective image processing unit

Low density

Low density of test pattern

Defective BCU
1. Replace the high voltage power supply unit.
2. Do the forced process control (SP3-011-001) or supply
some toner (SP3-015-xxx).
3. Replace the BCU.

Normal image, but with color

registration errors

Defective ID sensor
Defective BCU
1. Replace the ID sensor.
2. Replace the BCU.

After Executing SP2-111-001

Result: "1" in SP2-194-007

Result: "4" (Out of adjustable range) in SP2-194-010, -011, -012
Test pattern check
Low image density on the output

Possible cause/Countermeasure
Low pattern density
Do the forced process control (SP3-011-001) or supply some
toner (SP3-015-xxx).

The main scan registrations of M, C, Y

are shifted by more than 1.4 mm from
the main scan registration of K.

No defective component
Defective laser optics housing unit
Defective BCU
1. Do SP2-111-003 again.
2. Replace the laser unit.
3. Replace the BCU.

647

6. Troubleshooting

Test pattern check

The sub scan registrations of M, C, Y
are shifted by more than 1.4mm from
the sub scan registration of K.

Possible cause/Countermeasure
No defective component
Defective image transfer belt
Defective drive units
Defective BCU
1. Do SP2-111-003 again.
2. Replace the image transfer belt.
3. Replace the drum motor.
4. Replace the BCU.

The main scan registration is shifted by

more than 0.66 mm, but only at the
central area of the image on the output.

Defective ID sensor at center

Deformed center area on the image transfer belt
Defective BCU
1. Replace the ID sensor.

2. Replace the image transfer belt.

3. Replace the BCU.
The skew for M, C, Y is more than
0.75 mm from the main scan
registration of K. at the end of the scan
line?

Defective PCDU
Defective laser unit
Defective BCU
1. Reinstall or replace the PCDU.
2. Replace the laser unit.
3. Replace the BCU.

Others

Skew correction upper limit error

Defective BCU
Defective laser unit
1. Replace the BCU.
2. Replace the laser unit.

After Executing SP2-111-001

Result: "0" in SP2-194-007
Result: No color registration errors in SP2-194-010, -011, -012

648

Troubleshooting Guide

Test pattern check

The main scan registration of K is
shifted.
The main scan length of K is shifted.

Possible cause/Countermeasure
Abnormal SP setting value of main scan: K
Adjust the value with SP2-101-001.
Abnormal SP setting value of main scan length detection:
K
Adjust the value with SP2-102-001 and -003.
Note:
The setting value of these SPs should be same.

After Executing SP2-111-001

Result: "0" in SP2-194-007
Result: Color registration errors in SP2-194-010, -011, -012
Test pattern check
Low image density on the output

Possible cause/Countermeasure
Low pattern density

Do the forced process control (SP3-011-001) or supply some

toner (SP3-015-xxx).
The main scan registration is shifted, but
only at the central area of the image on
the output.

Defective ID sensor at center

Deformed center area on the image transfer belt
Defective BCU
1. Replace the ID sensor.
2. Replace the image transfer belt.
3. Replace the BCU.

The main scan registrations of M, C, Y

are shifted.

Defective laser optics housing unit

Defective ID sensor
Defective BCU
Incorrect SP value
1. Replace the laser optics housing unit.
2. Replace the ID sensor.
3. Replace the BCU.
4. Adjust the value with SP2-182-004 to -021.

649

6. Troubleshooting

Test pattern check

The sub scan registrations of M, C, Y
are shifted.

Possible cause/Countermeasure
Defective image transfer belt
Defective drive units
Defective ID sensor
Defective BCU
Incorrect SP value
1. Replace the image transfer belt.
2. Replace the ID sensor.
3. Replace the drum motor.
4. Replace the BCU.
5. Adjust the value with SP2-182-022 to -039.

The skew of M, C, Y is different.

Defective PCDU
Defective laser optics housing unit

Defective BCU
1. Reinstall or replace the PCDU.
2. Replace the laser optics housing unit.
3. Replace the BCU.
The sub scan lines are shifted. Shifted
lines appear cyclically.

Defective PCDU
Defective drive unit
Drum phase adjustment error
1. Do SP1-902-001 (Drum phase adjustment); see
Replacement and Adjustment Drive Unit Gear Unit for
details.
2. Reinstall or replace the PCDU.
3. Check or replace the drive unit.

Image Problems at Regular Intervals

If a defect occurs in the image at one of these intervals, the related component may be defective.

650

Troubleshooting Guide

Development roller: 32 mm
PTR (Paper Transfer Roller): 75.0 mm
Drum: 94.2 mm
Fusing belt: 157.1 mm

Sub-scan Magnification Error

If a sub-scan magnification error of an image occurs on an output, follow the procedure below to adjust
the sub-scan magnification.

Sub-scan Magnification Adjustment Procedure

1. Adjust the sub-scan magnification for each paper type and print mode with the following SPs.
Input the same value in these SP settings. Otherwise, color registration errors occur on outputs
and this cannot be recovered by the line position adjustment.
SP1-803-001: Plain paper/ 600 dpi Input
SP1-803-002: Plain paper/ 1200 dpi Input
SP1-803-003: Thick paper Input
2. Turn the main power of the machine off and on.
3. Check if all settings of the following SPs are "0" (success).
SP1-803-004: Plain paper/ 600 dpi Result
SP1-803-005: Plain paper/ 1200 dpi Result
SP1-803-006: Thick paper Result

651

6. Troubleshooting

If one of the settings of SP1-803-004 to 006 is "1" (error), return to step 1 and then input a value
which is closer to "0" compared with the previously input value.
For example, if "+0.9" is input in the settings of SP1-803-001 to 003 and an error occurs, input
"+0.8" or less with SP1-803-001 to 003.
For example, if "-0.9" is input in the settings of SP1-803-001 to 003 and an error occurs, input
"-0.8" or more with SP1-803-001 to 003.
If an error still remains, refer to "Motor Speed Adjustment".
4. Execute the line position adjustment (rough) with SP2-111-003.
5. Execute the line position adjustment (fine) with SP2-111-001.
6. Make sample copies and check if the outputs are satisfactory.

Motor Speed Adjustment

If "Sub-scan Magnification Adjustment Procedure" does not solve the sub-scan magnification error, the
setting of the motor speed adjustment may be out of adjustable range. Check the following three points.
1. An error ("1") occurs in SP1-803-004.
[Setting values of the following SPs + input value with SP1-803-001] > motor speed adjustable range
e.g.) 3.5 (SP1-801-002) + 1 (SP1-803-001 to -003) = 4.5
In this case, "4.5" is over the maximum adjustable value ("4") of the SP1-801-002. As a result, the
result of the motor speed adjustment issues "1" (error).
Adjust the settings of the SP1-830-001 to -003 so that the total value (motor speed setting value
+ input value) is within the adjustable range for each motor described below.
SP No.

652

Max.

Min.

Title

SP1-801-002

-4

Regist Mot:120 (0.3 default)

SP1-801-003

-4

Bk OpcDevMot:120 (-0.1 default)

SP1-801-007

-6

Fusing Mot:120 (0.1 default)

SP1-801-009

-4

Transfer Mot:120 (0 default)

SP1-801-012

-2

Feed1:CW120 (0.3 default)

SP1-801-014

-2

Feed1:CCW120 (0.3 default)

SP1-801-016

-2

Feed2:CW120 (0.3 default)

SP1-801-018

-2

Feed2:CCW120 (0.3 default)

Troubleshooting Guide

SP No.

Max.

Min.

Title

SP1-801-020

-2

By-pass:120 (0.3 default)

SP1-801-022

-2

Inverter:CW120 (0 default)

SP1-801-024

-2

Inverter:CCW120 (0 default)

SP1-801-026

-2

Duplex Entrance:120 (0.3 default)

SP1-801-028

-2

Duplex Exit:120 (0.3 default)

2. An error ("1") occurs in SP1-803-005.

[Setting values of the following SPs + input value with SP1-803-001] > motor speed adjustable range
e.g.) 1.5 (SP1-801-025) + 1 (SP1-803-001 to -003) = 2.5
In this case, "2.5" is over the maximum adjustable value ("2") of the SP1-801-025. As a result, the
result of the motor speed adjustment issues "1" (error).
Adjust the settings of SP1-830-001 to -003 so that the total value (motor speed setting value +
input value) is within the adjustable range for each motor described below.
SP No.

Max.

Min.

SP1-801-025

-2

Duplex Entrance:60

SP1-801-027

-2

Duplex Exit:60

SP1-801-033

-4

Regist Mot:60:1200dpi

SP1-801-034

-2

Feed1:CW60:1200dpi

SP1-801-035

-2

Feed1:CCW60:1200dpi

SP1-801-036

-2

Feed2:CW60:1200dpi

SP1-801-037

-2

Feed2:CCW60:1200dpi

SP1-801-038

-2

By-pass:60:1200dpi

SP1-801-039

-2

Inverter:CW60:1200dpi

SP1-801-040

-2

Inverter:CCW60:1200dpi

SP1-801-041

-6

FusingMot:60:1200dpi

SP1-801-042

-4

BkOpcDevMot:60:1200dpi

SP1-801-043

-4

TransferMot:60:1200dpi

Title

653

6. Troubleshooting

3. An error ("1") occurs in the SP1-803-006.

[Setting values of the following SPs + input value with SP1-803-001] > motor speed adjustable range
e.g.) 3.5 (SP1-801-001) + 1 (SP1-803-001 to -003) = 4.5
In this case, "4.5" is over the maximum adjustable value ("4") of the SP1-801-025. As a result, the
result of the motor speed adjustment issues "1" (error).
Adjust the settings of SP1-830-001 to -003 so that the total value (motor speed setting value +
input value) is within the adjustable range for each motor described below.
SP No.

Max.

Min.

Title

SP1-801-001

-4

Regist Mot:60:Thick

SP1-801-004

-4

Bk OpcDevMot:60:Thick

SP1-801-008

-6

Fusing Mot:60:Thick

SP1-801-010

-4

TransferMot:60:Thick

SP1-801-011

-2

Feed1:CW60:Thick

SP1-801-013

-2

Feed1:CCW60:Thick

SP1-801-015

-2

Feed2:CW60:Thick

SP1-801-017

-2

Feed2:CCW60:Thick

SP1-801-019

-2

By-pass:60:Thick

SP1-801-021

-2

Inverter:CW60:Thick

SP1-801-023

-2

Inverter:CCW60:Thick

Trapezoid Image Adjustment

Before Adjusting the Trapezoid Image
1. Enter SP2-109 and print out the test pattern 14 (Trimming Area).

654

Troubleshooting Guide

2. Make sure the horizontal lines are parallel.

"Parallel": The gap between horizontal lines is 1.8 mm or less.

3. If the lines are not parallel, check the following and apply corrections as necessary:
Make sure that the side fences of the tray are set neatly against the sides of the paper.
Make sure that the PTR unit is connected to the bracket correctly.
Make sure that the shafts of the duplex unit are not bent nor damaged.

Adjusting the Trapezoid Image

1. Remove the following items:
Fusing unit (

p.242)

Front right cover (

p.172)

PCDU toner collection bottle (

Inner cover (

p.165)

p.172)

Inner right cover (

p.171)

655

6. Troubleshooting

2. Remove the interlock switch bracket [A] (

x 3,

x 1,

x 2).

3. Loosen the four screws [A] on the front fusing guide.

4. Remove the screw [B] on the adjustor lever.
This screw is not necessary after tightening the front fusing guide.

656

Troubleshooting Guide

5. If the horizontal lines slope down to the left [A], move the front fusing guide upward. To do this, turn
the adjustor lever [B] of the fusing front guide clockwise [C].
One step of the adjustor lever moves the front fusing guide by 1 mm.

6. If the horizontal lines slope down to the right [A], move the fusing front guide downward. To do this,
turn the adjustor lever [B] of the front fusing guide counterclockwise [C].
One step of the adjustor lever moves the front fusing guide by 1 mm.
7. Retighten the four screws for the front fusing guide.
8. Print out the test pattern and check the image quality.
9. If the symptom still occurs, repeat the above steps.

Loud Squeaking Noise from PCDU

Symptom:
657

6. Troubleshooting

A loud squeaking noise can be heard when two of the following conditions are met:
High image coverage
High original-to-copy ratio (1-to-x)
Printing at half speed
Cause:
Normally, silica inside the toner is deposited on the drum surface over a long period of time, some of which
is removed by the cleaning blade. However, when two or more of the conditions above are met, the rate
of deposit accelerates, and eventually the blade cannot run across the drum surface smoothly.
Solution:
If this problem is reported, replace the standard spring with the modified spring (P/N AA063690).
Side Effect:
The part life of the PCU may be shortened.

Replacement Procedure

1. Remove the front cover [A] from the PCDU (

x 2).

2. Slide the upper cover [A] of the drum unit as shown and remove it.

658

Troubleshooting Guide

3. Carefully lift up the metal plate [A], and then remove the spring [B] at the front side and rear side.
Be careful not to bend the metal plate.

4. Attach the modified spring [A] to the boss [B] on the lubricant holder.
5. Install the metal plate [C] in the spring [A] so that the modified spring is kept between the boss [B] on
the lubricant holder and the metal plate.

659

6. Troubleshooting

[A]: Standard spring (P/N: AA063887)

[B]: Modified spring (P/N: AA063690)
The modified spring [B] is black, and about 3 mm shorter than the old spring.
6. Reattach the upper cover of the drum unit.
7. Reattach the front cover to the PCDU (

x 2), and then reinstall the PCDU in the machine.

Loud Noise from the Paper Tray

Symptom:
A loud vibration can be heard while the paper is being fed from the paper tray.
Cause:
The excessive pressure between the feed roller and friction pad of the paper tray causes a loud vibration
due to the incorrect position of the maylar at the friction pad.
Solution:

Reinstall the friction pad in the correct position. For details, see "Friction Pad" in the section "Replacement
and Adjustment".

Grainy Image
If grainy images are reported from the field, use the following flowchart to take action in response to the
eight conditions.

660

Troubleshooting Guide

Possible Cause List

Cause 1: Grainy Image on Rough Surface Paper
When the surface of the paper is relatively rough, the strength of the electrical field between the ITB and
the "sunken" areas in the paper weakens, causing low image density only in these areas.

661

6. Troubleshooting

Action Procedure
1. If the grainy images only appear in black image areas with Printer Full Color mode, select "CMY
+K" with the PCL printer driver. For details, see "Action 1" described below.
2. Change the paper transfer bias. For details, see "Action 2A" described below.
3. Increase the amount of the toner per area (M/A). For details, see "Action 3" described below.
4. Ask a customer to change paper from high resistant paper to more smooth paper.
Cause 2: Grainy Image on Humid Paper
The surface resistance of paper such as humid paper is low, and the electrical field for the paper transfer
is weak.
Action Procedure
1. Ask a customer to keep paper in dry condition.

2. Turn on the tray heater if it has already been installed or ask a customer to install the optional tray
heater.
3. If the grainy images only appear in black image areas with Printer Full Color mode, select "CMY
+K" with the PCL printer driver. For details, see "Action 1" described below.
4. Change the paper transfer bias. For details, see "Action 2A" described below.
5. Increase the amount of the toner per area (M/A). For details, see "Action 3" described below.
Cause 3: Grainy Image on 2nd Side of Paper
This may be caused by the resistance value difference from 1st side and 2nd side paper. The resistance
of the 2nd side paper is changed after the paper has passed the fusing unit. As a result, the resistance
of 2nd side paper which has passed the fusing unit is out of the range for the standard resistance of
paper.
Action Procedure
1. If the grainy images only appear in black image areas with Printer Full Color mode, select "CMY
+K" with the PCL printer driver. For details, see "Action 1" described below.
2. Change the paper transfer bias. For details, see "Action 2B" described below.
3. Increase the amount of the toner per area (M/A). For details, see "Action 3" described below.
4. Ask a customer to change paper from rough surface paper to more smooth paper.
Cause 4: Grainy Image on Small Size Paper
The transfer current tends to leak at the non paper area of the paper transfer roller. As a result, insufficient
transfer current causes a grainy image when using small size paper in the high temperature and high
humidity condition.

662

Troubleshooting Guide

Action Procedure
1. If the grainy images only appear in black image areas with Printer Full Color mode, select "CMY
+K" with the PCL printer driver. For details, see "Action 1" described below.
2. Use the A4 LEF paper. If A4 LEF paper does not solve the grainy image, check the other causes
(Cause 1, 2 and 3)
3. Change the paper size correction coefficient. For details, see "Action 4" described below.
4. Increase the amount of the toner per area (M/A). For details, see "Action 3" described below.
5. Ask a customer to change paper from high resistant paper to more smooth paper.
Cause 5: Blur Uneven Black Image
The resistance difference between the image transfer roller and image transfer belt causes the blur uneven
black image when printing a high coverage image. This symptom tends to occur especially just after
initial machine installation.
Action Procedure
1. Leave a machine for several hours if this symptom appears just after initial machine installation.
2. If the grainy images only appear in black image areas with Printer Full Color mode, select "CMY
+K" with the PCL printer driver. For details, see "Action 1" described below.

3. Decrease the target development gamma. For details, see "Action 5" described below.
4. Decrease the image transfer roller current for black and paper transfer roller current. For details,
see "Action 6" described below.
Cause 6: Grainy Image on High Resistance Small Paper
The transfer current tends to leak at the non paper area of the paper transfer roller. As a result, insufficient
transfer current causes a grainy image when using high resistance paper such as photo paper and OHP.
Action Procedure
1. Change the feeding direction from SEF to LEF.
2. Change the paper size correction coefficient. For details, see "Action 4" described below.
Cause 7: Grainy Image on OHP
The grainy image, which includes white dots, occurs when using OHP in the low temperature and low
humidity condition.
Action Procedure
Change the environmental correction table of the paper transfer roller for OHP. For details, see
"Action 8" described below.

663

6. Troubleshooting

Cause 8: Bk Grainy Image on High Smoothness Paper

The black solid image may become grainy on the high smoothness paper when the black solid area is
printed in the full color printing mode. This is because the transfer current for the full color printing is
excessive for the high smoothness paper. (Basically the transfer current for the monochrome printing is
lower than the transfer current for the full color printing.)
Action Procedure
Select "CMY+K" with the PCL printer driver. For details, see "Action 1" described below.

Action List
Action 1
With this setting for PCL, all BW images are printed using process black, including text.

Action Procedure
Select "CMY+K" with the PCL printer driver. (Print Quality -> Color: Manual -> Gray reproduction ->
CMY+K)
Action 2A
Changing the PTR current for each paper type can solve the grainy image for the 1st side of paper.
Action Procedure
1. Increase the PTR current for the 1st side of paper in steps of 2 A until +6 A from the default value.
B/W mode/ Normal speed: SP2-403-001
B/W mode/ Low speed: SP2-403-003
Full Color mode/ Normal speed: SP2-407-001
Full Color mode/ Low speed: SP2-407-003
2. If the grainy images get worse, decrease the PTR current in steps of 2 A until -6 A from the default
value.
3. If the grainy images only occur when using a specific type of paper, set the Paper Type setting to one
of the Special Paper settings as follows.
- If the current Paper Type setting is one of the following, change it to Special Paper 1.
Plain Paper 1, Plain Paper 2, Middle Thick, Thin Paper, Coated Paper: Gloss
Select Special Paper 1, then adjust the settings of the following SP modes:
B/W mode/ Normal speed: SP2-753-001
B/W mode/ Low speed: SP2-753-003

664

Troubleshooting Guide

Full Color mode/ Normal speed: SP2-757-001

Full Color mode/ Low speed: SP2-757-003
- If the current Paper Type setting is one of the following, change it to Special Paper 4.
Thick Paper 1, Thick Paper 2, Thick Paper 3
Select Special Paper 4, then adjust the settings of the following SP modes:
B/W mode: SP2-783-001
Full Color mode: SP2-787-001
Action 2B
Changing the PTR current for each paper type can solve the grainy image for the 2nd side of paper.
Action Procedure
1. Increase the PTR current for the 2nd side of paper in steps of 2 A until +6 A from the default value.
B/W mode/ Normal speed: SP2-403-002
B/W mode/ Low speed: SP2-403-004
Full Color mode/ Normal speed: SP2-407-002

Full Color mode/ Low speed: SP2-407-004

2. If the grainy images get worse, decrease the PTR current in steps of 2 A until -6 A from the default
value.
3. If the grainy images only occur when using a specific type of paper, set the Paper Type setting to one
of the Special Paper settings as follows.
- If the current Paper Type setting is one of the following, change it to Special Paper 1.
Plain Paper 1, Plain Paper 2, Middle Thick, Thin Paper, Coated Paper: Gloss
Select Special Paper 1, then adjust the settings of the following SP modes:
B/W mode/ Normal speed: SP2-753-002
B/W mode/ Low speed: SP2-753-004
Full Color mode/ Normal speed: SP2-757-002
Full Color mode/ Low speed: SP2-757-004
- If the current Paper Type setting is one of the following, change it to Special Paper 4.
Thick Paper 1, Thick Paper 2, Thick Paper 3
Select Special Paper 4, then adjust the settings of the following SP modes:
B/W mode: SP2-783-001
Full Color mode: SP2-787-001

665

6. Troubleshooting

Basically, there are different setting values for 1st side and 2nd side of thick paper when using the
by-pass printing mode. When using thick paper in the by-pass printing mode, adjust the PTR current
of Special Paper 4 for the 2nd side of thick paper. Always use the adjusted setting of Special Paper
4 when the 2nd side of thick paper is fed from the by-pass tray.
Action 3
Increase the amount of the toner per area (M/A). However, too much toner may cause the toner blasting.
Action Procedure
1. Set the following SP modes to the values highlighted in bold.
Set the setting of SP3-501-001 to 0.500 mg/cm2 for Maximum M/A: Bk.
Set the setting of SP3-501-002 to 0.495 mg/cm2 for Maximum M/A: C.
Set the setting of SP3-501-003 to 0.495 mg/cm2 for Maximum M/A: M.

Set the setting of SP3-501-004 to 0.495 mg/cm2 for Maximum M/A: Y.

2. Execute Process Control with SP3-011-001.
Action 4
Changing the correction value of the PTR current for each paper size can solve the grainy image.
The paper size correction coefficient setting for non-special paper types is applied to several different
paper types at once. This can create side effects for paper types on which the symptom is not occurring.
Therefore, if you only want to change the setting for one type, use the Special Paper settings.
Action Procedure
1. Increase the correction value of the PTR current for each paper size in steps of 10% against the default
setting for each SP mode until +30% against the default setting of each SP mode.
- If the current Paper Type setting is one of the following, change it to Special Paper 1, 2 or 3.
Plain Paper 1, Plain Paper 2, Middle Thick, Thin Paper, Coated Paper: Gloss
Select Special Paper 1, 2 or 3, then adjust the settings of the following SP modes:
B/W mode for Plain Paper: SP2-411-001 to -020
Full Color mode for Plain Paper: SP2-412-001 to -020
- If the current Paper Type setting is one of the following, change it to Special Paper 4, 5 or 6.
Thick Paper 1, Thick Paper 2, Thick Paper 3
Select Special Paper 4, 5 or 6, then adjust the settings of the following SP modes:
B/W mode for Thick Paper: SP2-511-001 to -017
Full Color mode for Thick Paper: SP2-512-001 to -017.

666

Troubleshooting Guide

2. If the grainy images get worse, decrease the correction value of the PTR current for each paper size
in steps of -10% against the default setting for each SP mode until -30% against the default setting of
each SP mode.
If the special paper setting which is proper for this action procedure has already been used for the other
paper setting, change the following SPs of non-special paper types.
B/W mode for Special 1, 2 and 3: SP2-761-005 to -020
Full Color mode for Special 1, 2 and 3: SP2-762-005 to -020
B/W mode for Special 4, 5 and 6: SP2-791-005 to -020
Full Color mode for Special 4, 5 and 6: SP2-792-005 to -020
Action 5
Decreasing the target gamma for the developer can solve the grainy image.
Action Procedure
1. Change the setting of SP3-611-009 from "0.90" to "0.85".
2. Execute the SP3-011-001.

Action 6
Decreasing the transfer current values for the ITB roller and PTR can solve the grainy image in the BW
printing mode. However, decreasing the transfer current of the ITB roller affects other settings (paper
type and size) and may cause a light toner image for some paper type and size.
Action Procedure
Change the settings of SP2-351-001 by -2 A or SP2-351-003 by -1 A.
1. Decrease the transfer current of the PTR for each paper type by 1 A until -4 A from the default
setting.
B/W mode/ Normal or low speed for Plain Paper: SP2-403-001 to -004
B/W mode/ Normal or low speed for Thin Paper: SP2-453-001 and -003
B/W mode/ Low speed for Glossy Paper: SP2-482-001
B/W mode/ Low speed for Thick 1: SP2-502-001
B/W mode/ Low speed for Thick 2: SP 2-553-001
B/W mode/ Low speed for OHP: SP 2-603-001
B/W mode/ Low speed for Thick 3: SP 2-651-001
B/W mode/ Normal or low speed for Middle Thick Paper: SP2-703-001 to -004
B/W mode/ Normal or low speed for Special 1 Paper: SP2-753-001 to -004
B/W mode/ Normal or low speed for Special 2 Paper: SP2-803-001 to -004
667

6. Troubleshooting

B/W mode/ Normal or low speed for Special 3 Paper: SP2-852-001 to -004
B/W mode/ Low speed for Special 4 Paper: SP2-783-001
B/W mode/ Low speed for Special 5 Paper: SP2-833-001
B/W mode/ Low speed for Special 6 Paper: SP2-883-001
If the result of step 2 is not satisfactory, change the settings of SP2-351-001 by -2 A or SP2-351-003
by -1 A again and then decrease the transfer current of the PTR for each paper type by 1 A until
-4 A from the default setting again.
Action 7
Increasing the transfer current for the PTR can solve the grainy image on small size paper. Use Special
4, Special 5 or Special 6 for the small size paper setting. It is because the adjusted transfer current for
small size paper is very different from the transfer current for normal paper.
Action Procedure

1. Increase the settings of the PTR transfer current corrections for each paper size until a grainy image
on small size paper is solved.
B/W mode: SP2-791-005 to -017
Full color mode: SP2-791-005 to -017
Action 8
Increasing the transfer current for the PTR can solve the grainy image on OHP in the full color printing.
Action Procedure
1. Change the setting of SP2-608-001 from 20 A to 18 A.
2. Change the setting of SP2-630-003 from 47 to 11.
3. If the result of steps 1 and 2 are not satisfactory, decrease the setting of SP2-608-001 by 1 A until
a grainy image on OHP in the full color printing.

Toner Supply Error

If the toner end message is displayed even though the toner bottle still has toner in itself, check the following
points.
1. Check if the setting of SP3044-001 to -004 is set to "4".
2. Check if the toner supply motor for each color works correctly with SP5804-071 to -074.
Replace the toner supply motor with a new motor if it is defective.

668

Troubleshooting Guide

3. Check if the red mark is painted besides the black cord of the toner supply motor. The left picture [A]
shows a correct motor and right picture [B] shows a malfunction motor.
Replace the toner supply motor with a new motor if the red mark is painted besides the red cord
of the toner supply motor.

4. Check if the gear [A] of the toner supply motor is attached to the motor shaft.
Replace the toner supply motor with a new motor if the gear of the toner supply motor is not
attached to the motor shaft.
5. Check if the toner supply drive shaft is correctly installed.
Install the tone supply drive shaft correctly if not.

Paper Jam Troubleshooting

This explains the troubleshooting for each paper jam code; Jam code 3, 4, 8, 11, 12, 17, 19, 51, 52
and 59. Refer to the following troubleshooting procedure corresponding to the paper jam code.

669

6. Troubleshooting

Jam 3: Paper is not fed from Tray 1.

1. Pull out the tray 1 and tray 2 from the machine (

x 2 each).

2. Turn on the paper feed motor using SP5-804-005 (Output check: Paper Feed M1:CCW:190mm/
s).

3. Check if the feed roller shaft [A] for the tray 1 rotates.

4. Replace the one-way clutch [A] with P/N D1051164 if the feed roller shaft does not rotate.

670

Troubleshooting Guide

5. Open the duplex unit with the paper feed motor rotating.
6. Press the surface of the vertical transport roller [A] for the tray 1 gently with a small piece of paper,
as shown above.

7. Replace the one-way clutch [A] with P/N D1051166 if the roller stops easily.
8. Ask a customer to fix the end fence and side fences in the tray 1 with the end fence stopper and screws
installed in the tray 1.
For details about fixing the end fence of the paper tray, see "Fixing the End Fence of the Paper
Tray" described below.
9. Instruct the customer to press down the paper stack until the bottom plate of the tray 1 is locked when
loading paper in the paper tray.
Fixing the End Fence of the Paper Tray
671

6. Troubleshooting

1. Pull out the paper tray from the machine.

2. Hold the sides of the end fence [A], and then move it to the position as shown above.

3. Turn over the paper tray [A].

4. Install the end fence stopper [B] in the notch [C] of the end fence.

672

Troubleshooting Guide

5. Install the screw [A] loosely in the end fence stopper.

6. Turn over the paper tray, and then adjust the end fence for the paper size to be used.

7. Pull the end fence stopper [A], and then tighten the screw.
8. Make sure that the end fence is firmly fixed.

Jam 4: Paper is not fed from Tray 2.

1. Pull out the tray 1 and tray 2 from the machine (

x 2 each).

2. Turn on the paper feed motor using SP5-804-013 (Output check: Paper Feed M2:CCW:190mm/
s).

3. Check if the feed roller shaft [A] for the tray 2 rotates.

673

6. Troubleshooting

4. Replace the one-way clutch [A] with P/N D1051164 if the feed roller shaft does not rotate.

5. Open the lower right door with the paper feed motor rotating.
6. Press the surface of the vertical transport roller [A] for the tray 2 gently with a small piece of paper,
as shown above.

674

Troubleshooting Guide

7. Replace the one-way clutch [A] with P/N D1051166 if the roller stops easily.
8. Ask a customer to fix the end fence and side fences in the tray 1 with the end fence stopper and screws
installed in the tray 1.

For details about fixing the end fence of the paper tray, see "Fixing the End Fence of the Paper
Tray" described below.
9. Instruct the customer to press down the paper stack until the bottom plate of the tray 1 is locked when
loading paper in the paper tray.
Fixing the End Fence of the Paper Tray
1. Pull out the paper tray from the machine.

2. Hold the sides of the end fence [A], and then move it to the position as shown above.

675

6. Troubleshooting

3. Turn over the paper tray [A].

4. Install the end fence stopper [B] in the notch [C] of the end fence.

5. Install the screw [A] loosely in the end fence stopper.

6. Turn over the paper tray, and then adjust the end fence for the paper size to be used.

676

Troubleshooting Guide

7. Pull the end fence stopper [A], and then tighten the screw.
8. Make sure that the end fence is firmly fixed.

Jam 8: Paper is not fed from the by-pass tray.

1. Remove the paper from the trays 1 and 2.
2. Open the duplex unit.
3. Turn on the paper feed motor on using SP5-804-001 (Output check: Paper Feed M2:CW:190mm/
s).

4. Press the surface of the vertical transport roller [A] for the tray 1 gently with a small piece of paper,
as shown above.

677

6. Troubleshooting

5. Replace the one-way clutch [A] with P/N D1051166 if the roller stops easily.

Jam 11: Vertical transport sensor 1 does not detect paper from the tray 1.
1. Remove the paper from the trays 1 and 2.
2. Open the lower right door.
3. Turn on the paper feed motor on using SP5-804-009 (Output check: Paper Feed M2:CW:190mm/
s).

6
4. Press the surface of the vertical transport roller [A] for the tray 2 gently with a small piece of paper,
as shown above.

5. Replace the one-way clutch with P/N D1051166 if the roller stops easily.

678

Troubleshooting Guide

6. If Jam 11 still occurs, replace the brackets [A] [B] for the vertical transport covers (Front: P/N
D0392943, Rear: P/N D0392944).

Jam 12: Vertical transport sensor 2 does not detect paper from Tray 2.
1. Remove the lower guide bracket (

p.268 "Vertical Transport Sensor ")

2. Press down on the vertical transport sensor bracket in the area around the emboss (bead) [A] as
shown above.
3. If there is a gap between this area of the bracket and the frame underneath it, replace the bracket
with P/N D0392929.

679

6. Troubleshooting

4. If Jam 11 still occurs, replace the brackets [A] [B] for the vertical transport covers (Front: P/N
D0392943, Rear: P/N D0392944).

Jam 17: Registration sensor does not detect paper.

1. Remove the paper from the trays 1 and 2.
2. Open the duplex unit.
3. Turn on the paper feed motor using SP5-804-001 (Output check: Paper Feed M2:CW:190mm/s).

6
4. Press the surface of the vertical transport roller [A] for the tray 1 gently with a small piece of paper,
as shown above.

5. Replace the one-way clutch [A] with P/N D1051166 if the roller stops easily.
680

Troubleshooting Guide

6. If Jam 17 still occurs, turn on the paper feed motor using SP5-804-009 (Output check: Paper Feed
M2:CW:190mm/s).

7. Press the surface of the vertical transport roller [A] for the tray 2 gently with a small piece of paper,
as shown above.

8. Replace the one-way clutch [A] with P/N D1051166 if the roller stops easily.

Jam 51/ Jam 52: Vertical transport sensor 1/2 does not turn off.
1. Open the lower right door.

681

6. Troubleshooting

2. Replace the brackets for the vertical transport covers (Front: P/N D0392943, Rear: P/N
D0392944).

Jam 59: Fusing exit sensor does not turn off.

If Jam 59 occurs frequently, replace the fusing exit sensor bracket (D0394952) (
Sensor").

p.274 "Fusing Exit

No Feed Paper Jam from PFU

Symptom:
A non-feed paper jam occurs when the machine tries to feed relatively heavy weight paper from the PFU.
Cause:
There is not enough pressure on the top sheet of paper stack to separate it from the other sheets.
Solution:
1. Instruct a customer to adjust the amount of paper stuck in the PFU when using heavy weight paper
types.
If the customer wants to use the heavy weight paper in the full load condition, try step 2.

682

Troubleshooting Guide

2. Replace the pressure tension springs (P/N D3312773) as shown above with special springs (P/N
D3312774) ( "Lift Motors" under the chapter Replacement and Adjustment" of the PFU service
manual).

Side Effect:
These "special springs" will increase the paper feed pressure. Therefore, if a customer uses thin paper types
after installing "special springs", multi-feeds may occur.

Setting for Special Paper 4, 5 and 6 Mode

Default Settings for Special Paper Modes

Paper Transfer Current

Special Paper 1

Same as Middle Thick

Fusing Temperature
600 dpi
Same as Middle Thick
(155C)

1200 dpi
Same as Middle Thick
(130C)

Special Paper 2

Same as Middle Thick

160C

135C

Special Paper 3

Same as Middle Thick

150C

125C

Special Paper 4

Same as Thick Paper 1

Same as Thick Paper 1

(150C)

683

6. Troubleshooting

Special Paper 5

Same as Thick Paper 1

Same as Thick Paper 1

(160C)

Special Paper 6

Same as Thick Paper 1

145C

Special Paper 1-3 are designed for plain paper and Middle Thick paper types.
Special Paper 4-6 are designed for paper types equivalent to Thick paper 1 or thicker.
Special Paper 2-3 and 5-6 are intended to solve specific types of image problems, and Special Paper
1 and 4 are intended to be used as a customized mode if modes 2-6 are ineffective.
Special Paper 1:
Use this mode if the issue occurs only with a specific type of Plain Paper of Middle Thick Paper, and you
need to change (customize) the paper transfer current and/or fusing temperature settings. The default
settings for this mode are exactly the same as those for Middle Thick.
Special Paper 2:
Use this mode if poor fusing occurs only with a specific type of Plain Paper or Middle Thick Paper.

Special Paper 3:
Use this mode if blistered images occur only with a specific type of Plain Paper of Middle Thick Paper.
Special Paper 4:
Use this mode if the issue occurs only with a specific type of Thick Paper, and you need to change (customize)
the paper transfer current and/or fusing temperature settings. The default settings for this mode are exactly
the same as those for Thick Paper 1.
Special Paper 5:
Use this mode if poor fusing occurs only with a specific type of Thick Paper.
Special Paper 6:
Use this mode if blistered images occur only with a specific type of Thick Paper.

How to select the proper Special Paper mode

With this model, you cannot select Special Paper 4, 5, and 6 from the operation panel or inside the printer
driver. Therefore, if you want to use these modes, select the following instead:
Copy Mode
1. In User Tools, set the "Paper Type" and "Paper Thickness" for the target tray as follows:
Equivalent to

684

Paper Type

Paper Thickness

Special Paper 1

Special Paper 1

Plain Paper or Middle Thick

Special Paper 2

Special Paper 2

Plain Paper or Middle Thick

Troubleshooting Guide

Special Paper 3

Special Paper 3

Plain Paper or Middle Thick

Special Paper 4

Special Paper 1

Thick Paper 1, 2 or 3

Special Paper 5

Special Paper 2

Thick Paper 1, 2 or 3

Special Paper 6

Special Paper 3

Thick Paper 1, 2 or 3

2. Select the target tray and make copies.

Printer Mode
Refer to the following table of recommended settings.
System Setting (Tray Paper Setting)

Special Paper 1 to 3

Paper Tray

Paper Type

Paper Thickness

Tray 1 to 4

Special Paper 1 to 3

Bypass Tray (Driver/

Command Priority)

Any setting

Any setting

Bypass Tray (Machine

Setting Priority)

Special Paper 1 to 3

Plain Paper or Middle

Thick

Special Paper 4 to 6

Thick Paper 1, 2 or 3

Paper Source Tray

Paper Type

Plain Paper or
Middle Thick

Tray 1 to 2
Special Paper 4 to 6

Tray 3 to 4
Bypass Tray

Printer Driver Setting

Paper Tray
Tray 1 to 4
Special Paper 1 to 3

Bypass Tray (Driver/

Command Priority)
Bypass Tray (Machine
Setting Priority)

Target Tray

Bypass Tray

Special Paper 1 to 3

685

6. Troubleshooting

Special Paper 4 to 6

Tray 1 to 2

Target Tray

None

Tray 3 to 4

Not Available (Tray 3 and 4 do not have thick

paper capability.)

Bypass Tray

Bypass Tray

None

Special Paper 1 to 3
Paper Trays (Trays 1 4)
1. In User Tools, set the "Paper Type" and "Paper Thickness" for the target tray.
Equivalent to

Paper Type

Paper Thickness

Special Paper 1

Special Paper 1

Plain Paper or Middle Thick

Special Paper 2

Special Paper 2

Plain Paper or Middle Thick

Special Paper 3

Special Paper 3

Plain Paper or Middle Thick

2. Inside the printer driver, set the "Paper Source Tray" and "Paper Type" to the same tray and paper
type that you selected in Step 1 above.
Bypass Tray
"Driver/Command" Priority (default)
Inside the printer driver, set the "Paper Source Tray" to the bypass tray, and the "Paper Type" to Special
Paper 1, 2, or 3.
The machine will ignore the "Paper Type" setting in User Tools.
"Machine Setting" Priority
1. In User Tools, set the "Paper Type" and "Paper Thickness" for the bypass tray.
Equivalent to

Paper Type

Paper Thickness

Special Paper 1

Special Paper 1

Plain Paper or Middle Thick

Special Paper 2

Special Paper 2

Plain Paper or Middle Thick

Special Paper 3

Special Paper 3

Plain Paper or Middle Thick

2. Inside the printer driver, set the "Paper Source Tray" to the bypass tray, and the "Paper Type" to the
same paper type that you selected in Step 1 above.

686

Troubleshooting Guide

Special Paper 4 to 6
1. In User Tools, set the "Paper Type" and "Paper Thickness" for the target tray.
Equivalent to

Paper Type

Paper Thickness

Special Paper 4

Special Paper 1

Thick Paper 1, 2 or 3

Special Paper 5

Special Paper 2

Thick Paper 1, 2 or 3

Special Paper 6

Special Paper 3

Thick Paper 1, 2 or 3

2. Inside the printer driver, set the "Paper Source Tray" to the target tray (from Step 1 above), and Paper
Type to "None".

SP Modes for Setting the Paper Type

RTR Current ( A) = RTR standard current ( A) x Paper size correction co-efficient (%) x X
Plain Paper

Mode

Resolution
(Process
Speed)

600dpi
(120mm/s)

Print side

RTR standard
current ( A)

Paper size correction co-efficient

(%)

Face side

2-403-001

2-411-005(S2),009(S3),013(S4),
017(S5)

Back side

2-403-002

2-411-006(S2),010(S3),014(S4),
018(S5)

Face side

2-403-003

2-411-007(S2),011(S3),015(S4),
019(S5)

Back side

2-403-004

2-411-008(S2),012(S3),016(S4),
020(S5)

Face side

2-407-001

2-412-005(S2),009(S3),013(S4),
017(S5)

Back side

2-407-002

2-412-006(S2),010(S3),014(S4),
018(S5)

Face side

2-407-003

2-412-007(S2),011(S3),015(S4),
019(S5)

Back side

2-407-004

2-412-008(S2),012(S3),016(S4),
020(S5)

BW
1200dpi
(60mm/s)

600dpi
(120mm/s)
Color
1200dpi
(60mm/s)

687

6. Troubleshooting

Middle Thick
Resolution
Print side
(Process Speed)

Mode

600dpi
(120mm/s)

Face side

2-703-001

Back side

2-703-002

1200dpi
(60mm/s)

Face side

2-703-003

Back side

2-703-004

600dpi
(120mm/s)

Face side

2-707-001

Back side

2-707-002

1200dpi
(60mm/s)

Face side

2-707-003

Back side

2-707-004

Resolution
Print side
(Process Speed)

RTR standard
current
( A)

600dpi
(120mm/s)

Face side
Only

2-453-001

1200dpi
(60mm/s)

Face side
Only

2-453-003

600dpi
(120mm/s)

Face side
Only

2-457-001

1200dpi
(60mm/s)

Face side
Only

2-457-003

Print side

RTR standard
current
( A)

BW

Color

RTR standard
current
( A)

Paper size correction co-efficient

(%)

Common with the Plain Paper 1

Common with the Plain Paper 1

Thin Paper

Mode

BW

Color

Paper size correction co-efficient

(%)

Common with the Plain Paper 1

Common with the Plain Paper 1

Coated Paper Gloss

Mode

688

Resolution
(Process
Speed)

Paper size correction co-efficient

(%)

Troubleshooting Guide

BW

60mm/s Only

Face side
Only

2-482-001

Color

60mm/s
Only

Face side
Only

2-483-001

Common with the Plain Paper 1

Thick Paper 1
Mode

Resolution
Print side
(Process Speed)

RTR standard current

( A)

Paper size correction co-efficient

(%)

BW

60mm/s Only

Face side
Only

2-502-001

2-511-005(S2), 009(S3), 013(S4),

017(S5)

Color

60mm/s
Only

Face side
Only

2-507-001

2-512-005(S2), 009(S3), 013(S4),

017(S5)

Mode

Resolution
Print side
(Process Speed)

RTR standard current

( A)

Paper size correction co-efficient

(%)

BW

60mm/s
Only

Face side
Only

2-553-001

Color

60mm/s
Only

Face side
Only

2-558-001

Thick Paper 2

Common with the Thick Paper 1

Thick Paper 3
Mode

Resolution
Print side
(Process Speed)

RTR standard current

( A)

BW

60mm/s
Only

Face side
2-651-001
Only

Color

60mm/s
Only

Face side
2-652-001
Only

Paper size correction co-efficient

(%)

Common with the Thick Paper 1

OHP
Mode

Resolution
Print side
(Process Speed)

RTR standard current

( A)

Paper size correction co-efficient

(%)

689

6. Troubleshooting

BW

60mm/s
Only

Face side
Only

2-603-001

Color

60mm/s
Only

Face side
Only

2-608-001

Common with the Thickl Paper 1

Special Paper 1

Mode

RTR standard
current
( A)

Paper size correction co-efficient

(%)

Face side

2-753-001

2-761-005(S2), 009(S3), 013(S4),

017(S5)

Back side

2-753-002

2-761-006(S2), 010(S3), 014(S4),

018(S5)

Face side

2-753-003

2-761-007(S2), 011(S3), 015(S4),

019(S5)

Back side

2-753-004

2-761-008(S2), 012(S3), 016(S4),

020(S5)

Face side

2-757-001

2-762-005(S2), 009(S3), 013(S4),

017(S5)

Back side

2-757-002

2-762-006(S2), 010(S3), 014(S4),

018(S5)

Face side

2-757-003

2-762-007(S2), 011(S3), 015(S4),

019(S5)

Back side

2-757-004

2-762-008(S2), 012(S3), 016(S4),

020(S5)

RTR standard
current
( A)

Paper size correction co-efficient

(%)

Resolution
Print side
(Process Speed)

600dpi
(120mm/s)
BW

1200dpi
(60mm/s)

600dpi
(120mm/s)
Color
1200dpi
(60mm/s)

Special Paper 2

Mode

690

Resolution
Print side
(Process Speed)

Troubleshooting Guide

600dpi
(120mm/s)

Face side

2-803-001

Back side

2-803-002

1200dpi
(60mm/s)

Face side

2-803-003

Back side

2-803-004

600dpi
(120mm/s)

Face side

2-807-001

Back side

2-807-002

1200dpi
(60mm/s)

Face side

2-807-003

Back side

2-807-004

BW

Color

Common with the Special Paper 1

Common with the Special Paper 1

Special Paper 3

Mode

BW

Color

Resolution
Print side
(Process Speed)

RTR standard
current
( A)

600dpi
(120mm/s)

Face side

2-852-001

1200dpi
(60mm/s)

Face side

2-852-003

600dpi
(120mm/s)

Face side

2-857-001

1200dpi
(60mm/s)

Face side

2-857-003

Paper size correction co-efficient

(%)

Common with the Special Paper 1

Special Paper 4

Mode

Resolution
Print side
(Process Speed)

RTR standard
current
( A)

Paper size correction co-efficient

(%)

BW

60mm/s
Only

Face side
Only

2-783-001

2-791-005(S2), 009(S3), 013(S4),

017(S5)

Color

60mm/s
Only

Face side
Only

2-787-001

2-792-005(S2), 009(S3), 013(S4),

017(S5)

691

6. Troubleshooting

Special Paper 5

Mode

Resolution
Print side
(Process Speed)

RTR standard
current
( A)

BW

60mm/s
Only

Face side
Only

2-833-001

Color

60mm/s
Only

Face side
Only

2-837-001

Paper size correction co-efficient

(%)

Common with the Special Paper 4

Special Paper 6

692

Mode

Resolution
Print side
(Process Speed)

RTR standard
current
( A)

BW

60mm/s
Only

Face side
Only

2-883-001

Color

60mm/s
Only

Face side
Only

2-887-001

Paper size correction co-efficient

(%)

Common with the Special Paper 4

Jam Detection

Jam Detection
Paper Jam Display
SP7-507 shows the paper jam history.

CODE: Indicates the jam code.

SIZE: Indicates the paper Size Code.

TOTAL: Indicates the total counter (SP7-502-001).

DATE: indicates the date when the jam occurred.

Paper Size Code

Size Code

Paper Size

Size Code

Paper Size

05

A4 LEF

141

B4 SEF

06

A5 LEF

142

B5 SEF

14

B5 LEF

160

DLT SEF

38

LT LEF

164

LG SEF

44

HLT LEF

166

LT SEF

132

A3 SEF

172

HLT SEF

133

A4 SEF

255

Others

134

A5 SEF

693

6. Troubleshooting

Jam Codes and Display Codes

Mainframe
SP7-504 shows how many jams occurred at each location.

694

LCD
Display

Jam Code SP Display

Description

7504 1

At Power On

Paper is stack at power-on.

Note

7504 3

Tray 1: ON

Paper is not fed from tray 1.

A2

7504 4

Tray 2: ON

Paper is not fed from tray 2.

A1

7504 5

Tray 3: ON

Paper is not fed from tray 3 (one-tray paper

feed unit).

7504 6

Tray 4: ON

Paper is not fed from tray 4.

7504 8

Bypass: ON

Paper is not fed from the by-pass tray.

7504 9

Duplex: ON

Paper is jammed at the duplex unit.

7504 11

Vertical Transport 1: ON

Vertical transport sensor 1 does not detect

paper from tray 1.

A1

7504 12

Vertical Transport 2: ON

Vertical transport sensor 2 does not detect

paper from tray 2.

7504 17

Registration: ON

Registration sensor does not detect paper.

A2

7504 18

Fusing Entrance: ON

Fusing entrance sensor does not detect paper.

7504 19

Fusing Exit: ON

Fusing exit sensor does not detect paper.

7504 20

Paper Exit: ON

Paper exit sensor does not detect paper.

7504 21

Relay Exit: ON

Tray exit sensor (bridge unit) does not detect

paper.

7504 24

Inverter Sn: ON

Inverter sensor does not detect paper.

7504 25

Duplex Exit: ON

Duplex exit sensor does not detect paper.

7504 27

Duplex Entrance: ON

Duplex entrance sensor does not detect paper.

7504 28

1-Bin Exit Sensor

1-bin tray exit sensor does not detect paper.

A2
Z

Jam Detection

LCD
Display

Jam Code SP Display

Description

7504 29

R-tray Paper Exit: ON

Paper exit sensor of the side tray does not detect

paper.

7504 51

Vertical Transport
Sensor1

Vertical transport sensor 1 does not turn off.

A1, A2

7504 52

Vertical Transport
Sensor2

Vertical transport sensor 2 does not turn off.

7504 53

Vertical Transport
Sensor3

Vertical transport sensor 3 does not turn off.

7504 57

Registration Sensor

Registration sensor does not turn off.

7504 58

Fusing Entrance Sensor

Fusing entrance sensor does not turn off.

7504 59

Fusing Exit Sensor

Fusing exit sensor does not turn off.

7504 60

Exit Sensor

Paper exit sensor does not turn off.

7504 64

Inverter Sensor

Inverter sensor does not turn off.

7504 65

Duplex Exit Sensor

Duplex exit sensor does not turn off.

7504 67

Duplex Entrance Sensor

Duplex entrance sensor does not turn off.

7504 68

1-Bin Exit: ON

1-bin tray exit sensor does not turn off.

7504 69

R-tray Paper Exit Sensor

Paper exit sensor of the side tray does not turn

off.

7504 230

FIN:Paper Exit Error

The machine does not get paper exit data from

the internal finisher.

R1, R2

7504 231

FIN:Command Error

The machine gets a command error from the

internal finisher.

R1, R2

7504 240

Fin. Entrance: ON

Entrance sensor of the internal finisher does not

C, R1, R2
detect paper.

7504 241

Fin. Entrance Sensor

Entrance sensor of the internal finisher does not

turn off.

R1, R2

7504 242

Feed-Out Belt Motor

The mainframe detects the lock signal from the

paper transport motor of the internal finisher.

R1, R2

695

6. Troubleshooting

Description

7504 243

Stapler Motor

The mainframe detects the lock signal from the

staple motor of the internal finisher.

R1, R2

7504 244

Jogger Motor

The mainframe detects the lock signal from the

front or rear jogger motor of the internal finisher.

R1, R2

7504 245

Pick-Up Roller Lift Motor

The mainframe detects the lock signal from the

pick-up roller contact motor of the internal
finisher.

R1, R2

7504 246

Stapler Unit Drive Motor

The mainframe detects the lock signal from the

stapler unit movement motor of the punch unit.

R1, R2

7504 247

Output Tray Motor

The mainframe detects the lock signal from the

feed motor of the internal finisher.

R1, R2

7504 248

Belt Lift Solenoid

The mainframe detects the belt lift solenoid error

from the internal finisher.

R1, R2

7504 249

Finisher Fan

The mainframe detects the finisher fan error

from the internal finisher.

R1, R2

7504 250

Punch Motor

The mainframe detects the lock signal from the

punch motor.

R1, R2

7504 251

Finisher Proof Exit

The mainframe detects the lock signal from the

registration motor of the punch unit.

R1, R2

7504 252

FIN:Stapler Position Error

The stapler unit stays on the jogger end fence

so that stapling is disabled.

R1, R2

7504 253

FIN:Job Data Error

Unexpected job data is sent to the internal

finisher from the mainframe.

R1, R2

The jam location display depends on where a paper jam is detected at power-on.

696

LCD
Display

Jam Code SP Display

Jam Detection

ARDF (Original Jam)

LCD
Display

Jam Code SP Display

Description

7505 1

At Power On

Original is stack at power-on.

7505 3

Skew Correction: ON

Skew correction sensor does not detect paper.

7505 4

Registration: ON

Registration sensor does not detect paper.

7505 5

Paper Exit: ON

Exit Sensor does not detect paper.

7505 53

Skew Correction: OFF

Skew correction sensor does not turn off.

7505 54

Registration: OFF

Registration sensor does not turn off.

7505 55

Paper Exit: OFF

Exit Sensor does not turn off.

697

6. Troubleshooting

Sensor Locations

698

Electrical Component Defects

Electrical Component Defects

Sensors

The CN numbers in the following table are the connector numbers on the BCU.
No.

SW4

Sensor Name/
Sensor Board Name

Activ
e

CN

Duplex Unit Open Switch

CN232/2

ID Sensor: Front

CN214/8, 9

ID Sensor: Center

CN214/6, 7

ID Sensor: Rear

CN214/2, 3

S19

PTR Contact Sensor

CN232/4

S6

Registration Sensor

CN214/11

S35

Drum Phase Sensor: K

CN220/2

S36

Drum Phase Sensor:

CMY

CN220/17

S21

Toner End Sensor - Y

S22

Toner End Sensor - M

S23

Toner End Sensor - C

S24

Toner End Sensor - K

S5

CN234/14,
17, 20, 23

Condition

Symptom

Open

"Open Cover" is displayed.

Shorted

"Open cover" cannot be

detected.

Open/
Shorted
Open/
Shorted
Open/
Shorted
Open/
Shorted

SC400

SC400

SC400

SC452

Open

Jam A2 (Jam17)

Shorted

Jam B (Jam57)

Open/
Shorted
Open/
Shorted

SC380/SC396

SC381/SC397

Open

Toner end cannot be

detected.

Shorted

Toner end is detected when

there is enough toner.

699

6. Troubleshooting

No.

Sensor Name/
Sensor Board Name

S12

ITB Rotation Sensor

S10

Vertical Transport Sensor

1

S8

Paper End

S9

Sensor 1, 2

S11

Vertical Transport Sensor

2

Activ
e

CN

H/L

CN219/20

CN219/10

Condition
Open/
Shorted

Jam A1 (Jam11)

Shorted

Jam A1, A2 (Jam51)

Open

Paper end is not detected

when there is no paper in
the paper tray.

Shorted

Paper end is detected when

there is paper in the paper
tray.

Open

Jam Y (Jam12)

Shorted

Jam Y (Jam52)

Open/
SW6

Tray 1 Paper Size Switch

CN211/11,
12, 13, 15

Shorted
Shorted

S13

S15

700

By-pass Paper Size

Sensor

By-pass Paper End

Sensor

CN221/9,
10, 12, 13

Open/
Shorted

By-pass Paper Length

Sensor

CN221/15

S16

By-pass HP Sensor

CN221/21

Paper size error

Tray 1 is detected when tray
1 is not set.
Paper size error

Open

Paper on the by-pass tray is

not detected when paper is
set.

Shorted

Paper on the by-pass tray is

detected when paper is not
set.

CN221/18

S14

SC443

Open

CN214/17,
19

CN219/15

Symptom

Open
Shorted
Open/
Shorted

Paper size error

SC508

Electrical Component Defects

No.

Sensor Name/
Sensor Board Name

Activ
e

CN

Condition
Open

Jam B (Jam18)

Shorted

Jam C (Jam58)

Open

Jam Z (Jam27)

Shorted

Jam Z (Jam67)

Open

Jam Z (Jam25)

Shorted

Jam Z (Jam65)

S7

Fusing Entrance Sensor

CN214/14

S17

Duplex Entrance Sensor

CN221/24

S18

Duplex Exit Sensor

CN221/27

S34

TD Sensor - K

CN212/B9,
B11

Open/

S32

TD Sensor - M

CN212/A9,
A11

Open/

S33

TD Sensor - C

CN212/B3,
B5

Open/

S31

TD Sensor - Y

CN212/A3,
A5

Open/

S26

Fusing Exit Sensor

CN227/18

S30

SW5

PCDU Toner Collection

Bottle Full Sensor

PCDU Toner Collection

Bottle Set Switch

Symptom

Shorted

Shorted

Shorted

Shorted

SC372

SC373

SC374

SC375

Open

Jam C (Jam19)

Shorted

Jam C (Jam59)

Open

Used toner near full

indicated when it is not near
full.

Shorted

Used toner near full cannot

be detected when the waste
toner bottle is nearly full.

Open

Toner collection bottle is not

detected when the waste
toner bottle is set.

Shorted

Toner collection bottle is

detected when the waste
toner bottle is not set.

CN211/9

CN211/7

701

6. Troubleshooting

No.

S29

Sensor Name/
Sensor Board Name

ITB Toner Collection

Bottle Full Sensor

Activ
e

CN

Condition

Open

Used toner near full

indicated when it is not near
full.

Shorted

Used toner near full cannot

be detected when the waste
toner bottle is nearly full.

CN211/4

Open/
SW7

Tray 2 Paper Size Switch

CN211/16,
17, 18, 20

Shorted
Shorted

702

S37

Temperature/
Humidity Sensor

CN222/15,
17

S28

Thermopile

CN237/14

TH1

Heating Roller Thermistor

CN233/4

TH2

Pressure Roller
Thermistor 1 (Center)

CN233/11

TH3

Pressure Roller
Thermistor 2 (Ends)

CN233/9

S27

Paper Exit Sensor

CN227/21

S1

Original Length Sensor 1

CN206/2

S2

Original Length Sensor 2

CN206/5

Symptom

Open/
Shorted
Open/
Shorted
Open/
Shorted
Open/
Shorted
Open/
Shorted

Paper size error

Tray 2 is detected when the
tray 2 is not set.
Printed image has some
problems such as rough
image, dirty background,
weak image or poor fusing.
SC541

SC551

SC561

SC571

Open

Jam C (Jam20)

Shorted

Jam C (Jam60)

Open/

Original paper size cannot

be detected.

Shorted
Open/
Shorted

Original paper size cannot

be detected.

Electrical Component Defects

No.

Sensor Name/
Sensor Board Name

Activ
e

CN

S3

Scanner HP Sensor

CN205/2

S4

Platen Cover Sensor

CN205/5

S20

ITB Contact Sensor

CN234/5

S25

Inverter Sensor

CN227/15

SW2

Right Lower Door Open

Switch

CN219/13

Condition

Symptom

Open

SC120

Shorted

SC121

Open/

Platen cover open cannot

be detected.

Shorted
Open/
Shorted

SC442

Open

Jam C (Jam 24)

Shorted

Jam C (Jam64)

Open

"Open Cover" is displayed.

Shorted

"Open cover" cannot be

detected.

Blown Fuse Conditions

Power Supply Unit

Fuse

Rating

Symptom when turning on the main switch

120V

220V - 240V

FU101

15A/125V

8A/250V

The controller works, but SC547 is issued. (5V power to

the fusing unit is not supplied.)

FU102

10A/125V

5A/250V

No response. (5V power to the PSU is not supplied.)

FU103

2A/250V

2A/250V

AC power to the scanner heater and tray heater is not

supplied.

FU5

5A/250V

5A/250V

5V power to the BCU is not supplied.

FU6

5A/250V

5A/250V

5VS power to the controller is not supplied.

FU7

10A/125V

10A/250V

24VS power to the BCU is not supplied.

703

6. Troubleshooting

Fuse

Rating

Symptom when turning on the main switch

120V

220V - 240V

FU8

10A/125V

10A/250V

24VS power to the BCU is not supplied.

FU9

10A/125V

10A/250V

24V power to the DRB and controller is not supplied.

For continued protection against risk of fire, replace only with same type and rating of fuse.

704

Scanner Test Mode

Scanner Test Mode

SBU Test Mode
Output the SBU test pattern with SP4-807-001 to make sure the scanner SBU control operates correctly.
The SBU test pattern prints out after you have set the SP mode settings and pressed the start key.
The CCD on the SBU board may be defective if the copy is abnormal and the SBU test pattern is
normal.
The followings can be the cause if the copy is normal and the SBU test pattern is abnormal:
The harness may not be correctly connected between the SBU and the IPU.
The IPU or SBU board may be defective.

IPU Test Mode

You can check the IPU board with the SP mode menu, SP4-904-1.
If no error is detected, the test ends. Then the completion code shows in the operation panel display. If an
error is detected, the test is interrupted. Then an error code shows. The table below lists the completion and
error codes.

SP4-904-1 Register Access

There are 16 bits switches in this SP. Each bit indicates a different CPU. The error result is displayed on the
operation panel as a decimal number.
0: Normal, 1: Error

SP4-904-2 Image Path

There are 16 bits switches in this SP. Each bit indicates a different CPU path. The error result is displayed
on the operation panel as a decimal number.
0: Normal, 1: Error
Errors may be caused by the following problems:
1. Short circuit on the signal lines
When the IPU board is installed, a pin or two on the ASIC is damaged.
Some conductive matter or object is trapped among the pins.
Condensation
2. Destruction of circuit elements
705

6. Troubleshooting

Over current or a defective element breaks the circuit.

3. Abnormal power supply
The required voltage is not supplied to the devices.
4. Overheat/overcooling
The environment is inappropriate for the board (the scanner unit).
5. Static electricity
Static electricity of a high voltage occurs during the test.
6. Others
The scanner and IPU are incorrectly connected.
When you have completed a check, turn the main switch off and on before you do another check. When
you have completed all necessary checks, turn the main switch off and on.

706

7. Energy Saving
Energy Save
Energy Saver Modes
Customers should use energy saver modes properly, to save energy and protect the environment.

The area shaded grey in this diagram represents the amount of energy that is saved when the timers are
at the default settings. If the timers are changed, then the energy saved will be different. For example, if
the timers are all set to 240 min., the grey area will disappear, and no energy is saved before 240 min.
expires.

Timer Settings
The user can set these timers with User Tools (System settings > Timer setting)
Auto off timer (1 240 min): Off/Sleep Mode
Default settings: 1 min.

707

7. Energy Saving

Return to Stand-by Mode

Off/Sleep Mode
Recovery time.
DI-C1.5: Min. 10 sec.

Recommendation
We recommend that the default settings should be kept.
If the customer requests that these settings should be changed, please explain that their energy costs
could increase, and that they should consider the effects on the environment of extra energy use.
If it is necessary to change the settings, please try to make sure that the Auto Off timer is not too long.
Try with a shorter setting first, such as 30 min., then go to a longer one (such as 60 min.) if the customer
is not satisfied.
If the timers are all set to the maximum value, the machine will not begin saving energy until 240
minutes has expired after the last job. This means that after the customer has finished using the machine
for the day, energy will be consumed that could otherwise be saved.
If you change the settings, the energy consumed can be measured using SP8941, as explained below.

Energy Save Effectiveness

SP 8941 (Machine Status) keeps a record of the amount of time that the machine spends in each mode.
8941-001: Operating mode
8941-002: Standby mode
8941-003: Panel off mode (Not used in this model)
8941-004: Low power mode (Not used in this model)
8941-005: Off/sleep mode
With this data, and the power consumption values from the specifications, we can estimate the amount of
energy that is used by the machine.
This should only be used as a reference value, because the power consumption specifications are measured
in a controlled environment with a constant power supply.
To get an exact measurement at the customers site, a watt meter must be used to measure the actual energy
consumed.
To use SP8941 to calculate the energy consumed:
At the start of the measurement period, read the values of SP8941 001 to 005.
At the end of the measurement period, read the values of SP8941 001 to 005 again.

708

Energy Save

Find the amount of time spent in each mode (subtract the earlier measurement from the later
measurement).
Multiply this by the power consumption spec for each mode.
Convert the result to kWh (kilowatt hours)
Here is an example calculation.

Machine
Date

Power
Consumption
(W): Data: a

SP8941:
Machine
Status

Start Time:
(min.) Data:
b

End Time:
(min.) Data:
c

Time
Differences
(Data:b Data: c)
(min.) Data: d

Power
Consumptio
n (Data:a x
Data:d)
(Wmin.)
Data: e

Operatin
g mode

1081.8

001:
Operatin
g Time

21089.0

21386.0

297.0

321294.6

Ready
mode
(stand by)

214.0

002:
Standby
Time

306163.0

308046.0

1883.0

402962.0

Energy
mode
214.0
(Panel off)

003:
Energy
71386.0
Save Time

75111.0

3725.0

797150.0

Low
power
mode

153.0

004: Low
power
Time

154084.0

156340.0

2256.0

345168.0

Off/
Sleep
mode

7.0

005: Off
mode
Time

508776.0

520377.0

11601.0

81207.0

Total Time of Data: d (min.)

19762.0

Total Time of Data: d/60min. (Hour)

329.37

Total Power Consumption of Data: e (Wmin.)

1947781.6
0

Total Power Consumption of Data: e /60min./1000W (KWH)

32.46

709

7. Energy Saving

Paper Save
Effectiveness of Duplex/Combine Function
Duplexing and the combine functions reduce the amount of paper used. This means that less energy overall
is used for paper production, which improves the environment.

1. Duplex:

Reduce paper volume in half!

2. Combine mode:

Reduce paper volume in half!

710

Paper Save

3. Duplex + Combine:

Using both features together can further reduce paper volume by 3/4!
To check the paper consumption, look at the total counter and the duplex counter.
The total counter counts all pages printed.
For one duplex page, the total counter goes up by 2.
For a duplex job of a three-page original, the total counter goes up by 3.
The duplex counter counts pages that have images on both sides.
For one duplex page, the duplex counter goes up by 1.
For a duplex job of a three-page original, the duplex counter will only increase by 1, even though
two sheets are used.

Recommendation
Please explain the above features to the customers, so that they can reduce their paper usage.
Model DI-C1.5
Total counter: SP 8581-001
Duplex counter: SP 8411-001
Single-sided with combine mode: SP 8421-004
Duplex with combine mode: SP 8421-005
The following table shows paper savings and how the counters increase for some simple examples of
single-sided and duplex jobs
Duplex mode:
Originals

Simplex Sheet
used

Duplex Sheets
used

Paper
Saved

Total counter

Duplex counter

SP8501-001

SP8411-001

711

7. Energy Saving

Originals

Simplex Sheet
used

Duplex Sheets
used

Paper
Saved

Total counter

Duplex counter

SP8501-001

SP8411-001

10

10

10

20

20

10

10

20

10

If combine mode is used, the total and duplex counters work in the same way as explained previously. The
following table shows paper savings and how the counters increase for some simple examples of duplex/
combine jobs.
2 in 1 mode:

Originals

Simplex Sheet
used

Duplex Sheets
used

Paper
Saved

Total counter

Duplex counter

SP8501-001

SP8421-004

10

10

20

20

10

10

10

10

Duplex + 2 in 1 mode:

712

Originals

Simplex Sheet
used

Duplex Sheets
used

Paper
Saved

Total counter

Duplex counter

SP8501-001

SP8421-005

Paper Save

Originals

Simplex Sheet
used

Duplex Sheets
used

Paper
Saved

Total counter

Duplex counter

SP8501-001

SP8421-005

10

10

11

11

12

12

713

7. Energy Saving

714

Model DI-C1.5
Machine Code: D104/D106
Appendices

17 December, 2010

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. Appendix: Specifications
General Specifications.......................................................................................................................................3
Copier.............................................................................................................................................................3
Printer...............................................................................................................................................................7
Scanner...........................................................................................................................................................8
Supported Paper Sizes.......................................................................................................................................9
Paper Feed......................................................................................................................................................9
Paper Exit......................................................................................................................................................12
Platen/ARDF Original Size Detection........................................................................................................16
Software Accessories.......................................................................................................................................18
Printer and LAN Fax Drivers........................................................................................................................18
Scanner Driver.............................................................................................................................................18
Utility Software.............................................................................................................................................19
Optional Equipment.........................................................................................................................................20
ARDF (D541)...............................................................................................................................................20
Paper Feed Unit (D425)..............................................................................................................................20
Paper Feed Unit (D331)..............................................................................................................................21
Internal Finisher (D429) and Punch Unit (D390)......................................................................................22
Shift Tray (D428).........................................................................................................................................23
1-bin Tray Unit (D426)...............................................................................................................................23
Side Tray (D427).........................................................................................................................................24
Envelope Feeder EF3010 (D559).............................................................................................................24

2. Appendix: Preventive Maintenance Tables

Maintenance Tables........................................................................................................................................25
Preventive Maintenance Items....................................................................................................................25
Others Yield Parts.........................................................................................................................................27

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

System SP1-xxx................................................................................................................................................31
SP1-XXX (Feed)............................................................................................................................................31
System SP2xxx.................................................................................................................................................71
SP2-XXX (Drum)...........................................................................................................................................71
System SP3xxx...............................................................................................................................................157
SP3-XXX (Process).....................................................................................................................................157
1

System SP4xxx...............................................................................................................................................207
SP4-XXX (Scanner)....................................................................................................................................207
System SP5xxx...............................................................................................................................................230
SP5-XXX (Mode).......................................................................................................................................230
System SP6xxx...............................................................................................................................................295
SP6-XXX (Peripherals)...............................................................................................................................295
System SP7-xxx..............................................................................................................................................298
SP7-XXX (Data Log)..................................................................................................................................298
System SP8-xxx..............................................................................................................................................333
SP8-xxx: Data Log2..................................................................................................................................333
Input and Output Check Tables....................................................................................................................377
Input Check Table.....................................................................................................................................377
Output Check Table..................................................................................................................................386
Test Pattern Printing........................................................................................................................................393
Printer Service Mode.....................................................................................................................................395
SP1-XXX (Service Mode)..........................................................................................................................395
Scanner SP Mode..........................................................................................................................................404
SP1-xxx (System and Others)...................................................................................................................404
SP2-XXX (Scanning-image quality)..........................................................................................................405

INDEX...........................................................................................................................................................407

1. Appendix: Specifications
General Specifications

Copier
Configuration:
Print Process:

Resolution:

Gradation:

Desktop
Laser beam scanning & Dry electrostatic transfer system
4 drums tandem method
Scan: 600 dpi
Print: 600 dpi/ 1200 dpi
Scan: 8 bits/pixel each for RGB/ 600 dpi 1 bit/pixel
Print: 600dpi / 4 bits/pixel

Original type:

Sheets, book, objects

Maximum original size:

A3/11" x 17"

1. Appendix: Specifications

ADF 1 to 1, LT/ A4 LEF

Thin (59 g/m2 or less)
C1.5a: 20 cpm (color/black & white)

C1.5c: 25 cpm (color/black & white)

Plain 1 (74 g/m2 or less)/ 2 (81 g/m2 or less)
C1.5a: 20 cpm (color/black & white)
C1.5c: 25 cpm (color/black & white)
Middle Thick (105 g/m2 or less)
C1.5a: 20 cpm (color/black & white)
C1.5c: 25 cpm (color/black & white)
Copy speed:

Thick 1 (169 g/m2 or less)

C1.5a: 12.5 cpm (color/black & white)
C1.5c: 12.5 cpm (color/black & white)
Thick 2 (210 g/m2 or less)
C1.5a: 12.5 cpm (color/black & white)
C1.5c: 12.5 cpm (color/black & white)
Thick 3 (256 g/m2 or less)
C1.5a: 12.5 cpm (color/black & white)
C1.5c: 12.5 cpm (color/black & white)
OHP, Glossy (1200 dpi)
C1.5a: 12.5 cpm (color/black & white)
C1.5c: 12.5 cpm (color/black & white)
Color:
9.2 seconds or less (A4/LT LEF)

First copy (normal mode):

Black & white:

6.4 seconds or less (A4/LT LEF) for NA model
6.3 seconds or less (A4/LT LEF) for EU/AA model

Warm-up time:

Less than 22 seconds (20C)

Standard tray: 250 sheets x 2 + 100

Print Paper Capacity:

(80 g/m2, 20 lb)

By-pass tray: 100 sheets (Plain), 40 sheets (Thick 1: 106 - 169g/m2), 20

sheets (Thick 2/3: 170 - 256 g/m2), 35 sheets (Postcard)
Optional paper feed tray: 500 sheets x 2

General Specifications

(Refer to "Supported Paper Sizes".)

-

Print Paper Size:

Tray 1/ Tray 2
By-pass
Optional Tray

Minimum
A5 (LEF)/
8.5" x 11"
90 x 148 mm
A5 (LEF)/
8.5" x 11"

Maximum
A3/11" x 17"

305 x 600 mm
A3/11" x 17"

Standard tray 1: 60 to 256 g/m2 (16 to 68 lb.)

Standard tray 2: 60 to 169 g/m2 (16 to 45 lb.)
Printing Paper Weight:

Optional paper tray: 60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lb.)

By-pass tray: 52 to 256 g/m2 (14 to 68 lb.)
Duplex unit: 60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lb.)
Standard exit tray: 500 sheets or more (face down)*1
Shift tray: 250 sheets (80 g/m2)

Output Paper Capacity:

1-bin tray: 100 (80 g/m2)

Side tray: 50 (80 g/m2)
Internal finisher 500 (80 g/m2)
*1: T6200, A4 LEF

Continuous copy:

Up to 999 sheets

1. Appendix: Specifications

Arbitrary: From 25 to 400% (1% step)

Zoom:

Memory:
Power Source:

NA

Europe

25%

25%

50%

50%

65%

65%

73%

71%

78%

75%

85%

82%

93%

93%

100%

100%

121%

115%

129%

122%

155%

141%

200%

200%

400%

400%

Standard: 1.5 GB
120 V - 127 V, 60 Hz: 12A or more (for North America)
220 V - 240 V, 50/60 Hz: 8A or more (for Europe/ASIA)
-

Power Consumption:

Maximum
Sleep Mode

120V

220 - 240V

1600 W or less

1680 W or less

2.0 W or less

2.0 W or less

(*1) The complete system consists of mainframe, ARDF, finisher, and LCT.
The above measurements were made in accordance with Ricoh standard methodology.
Dimensions (W x D x H):
Copier: 587 x 676 x 725 mm (23.1" x 26.7" x 28.5")
Copier + PFU + Right tray + Internal finisher: 1009 x 676 x 1117 mm (39.7" x 26.7" x 44.0")

General Specifications

Weight:

Less than 85 kg (187 lb.) [without ARDF excluding toner]

Less than 100 kg (220 lb.) [with ARDF excluding toner]

Printer
PCL 5c/6 (standard)
Printer Languages:

Adobe PostScript 3 (optional)

PDF Direct (optional)
PictBridge (optional)
PCL 5c/6:
300 x 300 dpi : Available only in B/W mode

Resolution and
Gradation:

600 x 600 dpi : Fast (1 bit), Standard (2 bits), Fine (4 bit)

PS3:
600 x 600 dpi : Fast (1 bit), Standard (2 bits), Fine (4 bit)
1200 dpi x 1200 dpi
C1.5a:
20 ppm in Plain/Middle Thick mode

Printing speed:

12.5 ppm in Thick/OHP mode (depending on paper type)

C1.5c:
25 ppm in Plain/Middle Thick mode
12.5 ppm in Thick/OHP mode (depending on paper type)
PCL 5c/6 (Standard):
45 Compatible fonts

Resident Fonts:

13 International fonts
Adobe PostScript 3 (Optional):
136 fonts (24 Type 2 fonts, 112 Type 14 fonts)
USB2.0: Standard
Ethernet (100 Base-TX/10 Base-T): Standard

Host Interfaces:

Gigabit Ethernet (1000 Base-T): Optional

IEEE1284 parallel x 1: Optional
IEEE802.11a/g, g (Wireless LAN): Optional

1. Appendix: Specifications

Network Protocols:

TCP/IP (IPv4, IPv6), IPX/SPX, AppleTalk (Auto Switching)

HDD

160 GB (standard)

Scanner
Standard Scanner
Resolution:

Main scan/Sub scan

600 dpi
Twain Mode:

Available scanning
Resolution Range:

100 to1200 dpi

Delivery Mode:
100/200/300/400/600 dpi

Grayscales:
Scanning Throughput
(ARDF mode):

Interface:

Compression Method:

1 bit or 8 bits/pixel
Scan to E-mail / Folder:
BW: 44 ipm (A4LEF / BW Text (Print) / 200dpi /Compression: On (MH))
FC: 44 ipm (A4LEF / FC Text / Photo / 200dpi / Compression: Standard)
Ethernet (100 Base-TX/10 Base-T/1000 Base-T for TCP/IP),
Wireless LAN, USB2.0/SD Slot
B&W: TIFF (MH, MR, MMR)
Gray Scale, Full Color: JPEG

Supported Paper Sizes

Supported Paper Sizes

1

Paper Feed
North America
BT: By-pass Tray, T1/2: Tray 1/2 (standard), T3/4: Tray 3/4 (option), DU: Duplex Unit
Paper

Size
(W x L)

BT

T1/2

T3/4

DU

A3 W

12" x 18"

A3 SEF

297 x 420mm

S1

S1

A4 SEF

210 x 297mm

A4 LEF

297 x 210mm

S3

S3

A5 SEF

148 x 210mm

A5 LEF

210 x 148mm

A6 SEF

105 x 148mm

B4 SEF

257 x 364mm

S2

S2

B5 SEF

182 x 257mm

B5 LEF

257 x 182mm

S4

S4

B6 SEF

128 x 182mm

Ledger

11" x 17"

A1

A1

Letter SEF

8.5" x 11"

Letter LEF

11" x 8.5"

A3

A3

Legal SEF

8.5" x 14"

A2

A2

Government Legal
SEF

8.25" x 14"

Half Letter SEF

5.5" x 8.5"

1. Appendix: Specifications

Size

Paper

(W x L)

BT

T1/2

T3/4

DU

Executive SEF

7.25" x 10.5"

Executive LEF

10.5" x 7.25"

A4

A4

8" x 13"

8.5" x 13"

8.25" x 13"

11" x 15"

10" x 14"

8" x 10"

8K

267 x 390mm

16K SEF

195 x 267mm

16K LEF

267 x 195mm

F SEF
Foolscap SEF

Folio SEF

Custom
Com10 Env.

4.125" x 9.5"

Monarch Env.

3.875" x 7.5"

C6 Env.

114 x 162mm

C5 Env.

162 x 229mm

DL Env.

110 x 220mm

Remarks:
A

Supported: the sensor detects the paper size.

Supported: the user specifies the paper size.

Supported: depends on a technician adjustment

10

Paper size which has same superscript number can be changeable with SP setting. (eg.
Ledger: A1 <=> A3 SEF: S1)

Not supported

Supported Paper Sizes

Europe/ Asia
BT: By-pass Tray, T1/2: Tray 1/2 (standard), T3/4: Tray 3/4 (option), DU: Duplex Unit
Paper

Size
(W x L)

BT

T1/2

T3/4

DU

A3 W

12" x 18"

A3 SEF

297 x 420mm

A1

S1

A4 SEF

210 x 297mm

A4 LEF

297 x 210mm

A3

A3

A5 SEF

148 x 210mm

A5 LEF

210 x 148mm

A6 SEF

105 x 148mm

B4 SEF

257 x 364mm

A2

A2

B5 SEF

182 x 257mm

B5 LEF

257 x 182mm

A4

A4

B6 SEF

128 x 182mm

Ledger

11" x 17"

S1

S1

Letter SEF

8.5" x 11"

Letter LEF

11" x 8.5"

S3

S3

Legal SEF

8.5" x 14"

S2

S2

Government Legal
SEF

8.25" x 14"

Half Letter SEF

5.5" x 8.5"

Executive SEF

7.25" x 10.5"

Executive LEF

10.5" x 7.25"

S4

S4

8" x 13"

8.5" x 13"

F SEF
Foolscap SEF

11

1. Appendix: Specifications

Size

Paper

BT

T1/2

T3/4

DU

8.25" x 13"

11" x 15"

10" x 14"

8" x 10"

8K

267 x 390mm

16K SEF

195 x 267mm

16K LEF

267 x 195mm

(W x L)

1
Folio SEF

Custom
Com10 Env.

4.125" x 9.5"

Monarch Env.

3.875" x 7.5"

C6 Env.

114 x 162mm

C5 Env.

162 x 229mm

DL Env.

110 x 220mm

Remarks:
A

Supported: the sensor detects the paper size.

Supported: the user specifies the paper size.

Supported: depends on a technician adjustment

Paper size which has same superscript number can be changeable with SP setting. (eg.
Ledger: S1 <=> A3 SEF: A1)

Not supported

Paper Exit
Mainframe and optional trays
Main: Mainframe/ 1-bin: 1-bin tray/ Shift: Shift Tray/ Side: Side Tray
12

Supported Paper Sizes

Paper

Size (W x L)

Main

1-bin

Shift

Side

A3 W

12" x 18"

A3 SEF

297 x 420 mm

A4 SEF

210 x 297 mm

A4 LEF

297 x 210 mm

A5 SEF

148 x 210 mm

A5 LEF

210 x 148 mm

A6 SEF

105 x 148 mm

B4 SEF

257 x 364 mm

B5 SEF

182 x 257 mm

B5 LEF

257 x 182 mm

B6 SEF

128 x 182 mm

Ledger

11" x 17"

Letter SEF

8.5" x 11"

Letter LEF

11" x 8.5"

Legal SEF

8.5" x 14"

8.25" x 14"

Half Letter SEF

5.5" x 8.5"

Executive SEF

7.25" x 10.5"

Executive LEF

10.5" x 7.25"

F SEF

8" x 13"

Foolscap SEF

8.5" x 13"

Government
Legal SEF

13

1. Appendix: Specifications

Paper

Size (W x L)

Main

1-bin

Shift

Side

8.25" x 13"

11" x 15"

10" x 14"

8" x 10"

8K

267 x 390 mm

16K SEF

195 x 267 mm

16K LEF

267 x 195 mm

Folio SEF

Custom
Com10 Env.

4.125" x 9.5"

Monarch Env.

3.875" x 7.5"

C6 Env.

114 x 162 mm

C5 Env.

162 x 229 mm

DL Env.

110 x 220 mm

Remarks:
Y

Supported

Not supported

Internal Finisher
Str: Straight Feed Out/ Inv: Inverter Path/ Srt; Sort/ Stp: Staple/ 2/3P: 2/3 Holes Punch/ 4P: 4 Holes
Punch/ S4P: Scandinavia 4 Holes Punch/ RT: Right Tray
Paper

14

Size (W x L)

Internal finisher
Str

Inv

Srt

Stp

2/3P

4P

S4P

A3 W

12" x 18"

A3 SEF

297 x 420 mm

10

30

A4 SEF

210 x 297 mm

20

50

Y*

Supported Paper Sizes

Paper

Size (W x L)

Internal finisher
Str

Inv

Srt

Stp

2/3P

4P

S4P

A4 LEF

297 x 210 mm

20

50

A5 SEF

148 x 210 mm

A5 LEF

210 x 148 mm

A6 SEF

105 x 148 mm

B4 SEF

257 x 364 mm

10

30

B5 SEF

182 x 257 mm

20

50

B5 LEF

257 x 182 mm

20

50

B6 SEF

128 x 182 mm

Ledger

11" x 17"

10

30

Letter SEF

8.5" x 11"

20

50

Y*

Letter LEF

11" x 8.5"

20

50

Legal SEF

8.5" x 14"

10

30

Y*

8.25" x 14"

10

30

Half Letter SEF

5.5" x 8.5"

Executive SEF

7.25" x 10.5"

20

50

Executive LEF

10.5" x 7.25"

20

50

F SEF

8" x 13"

Foolscap SEF

8.5" x 13"

10

30

Y*

8.25" x 13"

10

30

11" x 15"

10

30

10" x 14"

8" x 10"

267 x 390 mm

10

30

Government
Legal SEF

Folio SEF

8K

15

1. Appendix: Specifications

Paper

Size (W x L)

Internal finisher
Str

Inv

Srt

Stp

2/3P

4P

S4P

16K SEF

195 x 267 mm

16K LEF

267 x 195 mm

20

50

Custom
Com10 Env.

4.125" x 9.5"

Monarch Env.

3.875" x 7.5"

C6 Env.

114 x 162 mm

C5 Env.

162 x 229 mm

DL Env.

110 x 220 mm

Remarks:
Y

Supported (*1: 2 holes punch only)

30

Output up to 30 sheets

50

Output up to 50 sheets

Not supported

Platen/ARDF Original Size Detection

16

Size

Platen

ARDF

Platen

ARDF

(width x length) [mm]

Inches

Inches

Metric

Metric

A3 (297 x 420) L

Y*3

B4 (257 x 364) L

Y*3

A4 (210 x 297) L

Y*1

Y*3

A4 (297 x 210) S

Y*3

Y*3

B5 (182 x 257) L

Y*3

B5 (257 x 182) S

Y*3

Supported Paper Sizes

A5 (148 x 210) L

-*1

A5 (210 x 148) S

B6 (128 x 182) L

B6 (182 x 128) S

11" x 17" (DLT)

Y*2

Y*2

11" x 15"

Y*2

10" x 14"

8.5" x 14" (LG)

Y*2

8.5" x 13" (F4)

Y*2

Y*4

Y*4

8.25" x 13"

Y*4

Y*4

8" x 13"(F)

Y*4

Y*4

8.5" x 11" (LT)

Y*3

Y*2

Y*3

Y*2

11" x 8.5" (LT)

Y*3

Y*2

Y*3

Y*2

Y*2

5.5" x 8.5" (HLT)

-*1

8.5" x 5.5" (HLT)

8K (267 x 390)

Y*3

Y*2

16K L (195 x 267)

Y*3

Y*2

16K S (267 x 195)

Y*3

Y*2

7.25" x 10.5" (Executive)

10.5" x 7.25" (Executive)

Y*2

8" x 10"

*1: Use SP4-303 to detect original sizes as A5 lengthwise/HLT when the message Can-t detect original
size shows.
*2: The machine can detect the paper size depending on the setting of SP6-016-1.
*3: The machine can detect the paper size depending on the setting of SP4-305-1.
*4: The machine can detect the paper size depending on the setting of SP5-126-1.

17

1. Appendix: Specifications

Software Accessories
1

The printer drivers and utility software are provided as following two CD-ROMs
1: Printer Drivers and Utilities CD-ROM
2: Scanner Drivers and Utilities CD-ROM.
An auto-run installer lets you to select the components you want to install.

Printer and LAN Fax Drivers

Printer Language

MacOS8.6 to 9.x,
MacOSX10.1

Windows 2000, XP, Server 2003, Vista,

Server 2008, 7

or later

PCL5c
/ PCL6

Yes

No

PS3

Yes

Yes

RPCS

No

No

The PCL5c/6 and PS3 drivers are provided on the printer drivers CD-ROM
The PS3 drivers are all genuine Adobe PS drivers, except for Windows 2000/XP/2003/Vista/7.
Windows 2000 uses Microsoft PS. A PPD file for each operating system is provided with the driver.
The PPD installer for Macintosh supports Mac OS X 10.1 or later versions.
The LAN Fax driver lets you fax documents directly form your PC. Address Book Editor and Cover
Sheet Editor are to be installed as well. (These require the optional fax unit.)

Scanner Driver
Printer Language
Network TWAIN

Windows 2000, XP, Server

2003, Vista, 7

MacOS8.6 to 9.x, MacOSX10.1

Yes

No

or later

The Network TWAIN driver is provided on the scanner drivers CD-ROM.

18

Software Accessories

Utility Software
Software

Description

Font Manager

A font management utility with screen fonts for the printer

(2000/XP/Server 2003/7)

This is provided on the printer drivers CD-ROM

Printer Utility for Mac

A utility for peer-to-peer printing over a NetBEUI or TCP This

software provides several convenient functions for printing
from Macintosh clients.

(Mac)

This is provided on the scanner drivers CD-ROM

19

1. Appendix: Specifications

Optional Equipment
1

ARDF (D541)

Simplex
Paper Size/Weight:
Duplex

Size

A3 to A5, DLT to HLT

Weight

40 to 128 g/m2 (10 to 34 lb.)

Size

A3 to A5, DLT to HLT

Weight

52 to 105 g/m2 (14 to 28 lb.)

Table Capacity:

50 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb)

Original Standard Position:

Rear left corner

Separation:

Feed belt and separation roller

Original Transport:

Roller transport

Original Feed Order:

From the top original

Copy

Supported Magnification Ratios:

Fax

32 to 200 %

Color

32.6 to 200 %

Black & white

48.9 to 200 %

Power Source:

DC 24V, 5V from the scanner unit

Power Consumption:

50 W or less

Dimensions (W x D x H):

550 mm x 491 mm x 120 mm (21.7" x 19.3" x 4.7")

Weight:

10 kg (22 lb.)

Paper Feed Unit (D425)

20

Paper Feed System:

Feed Roller and Friction Pad

Paper Height Detection:

4 steps (100%, 70%, 30%, Near end)

Capacity:

500 sheets

Paper Weight:

80 g/m2 (21 lb.)

Optional Equipment

Paper Size:

A3 SEF to A5, DLT SEF to HLT

Power Source:

DC 24V, 5V (from the main frame)

Power Consumption:

15 W

Dimensions (W x D x H):

550 mm x 520 mm x 137 mm (22" x 20.8" x 5.48")

Weight:

Less than 12 kg (26.4 lbs)

Paper Feed Unit (D331)

Paper Size:

A5 to A3, 51/2" x 81/2" SEF to 11" x 17"

Paper Weight:

60 - 105 g/m2, 16 - 28 lb

Tray Capacity:

500 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb) x 2 trays

Paper Feed System:

Feed roller and friction pad

Paper Height Detection:

4 steps (100%, 70%, 30%, Near end)

24 Vdc and 5Vdc (from the copier/printer)

Power Source:

120 Vac (120 V version) from the copier/printer when the optional
tray heater is installed
220 240 Vac (230 V version) from the copier/printer when the
optional tray heater is installed

Power Consumption:

35 W (Copying/printing)

Weight:

25 kg (55 lb)

Size (W x D x H):

550 mm x 520 mm x 271 mm

21

1. Appendix: Specifications

Internal Finisher (D429) and Punch Unit (D390)

No punch mode:

A3/11" x 17" to B6/5.5" x 8.5" (SEF)

Punch mode:
2 holes:
A3, A4 or 11" x 17", 8.5" x 14" (SEF), 8.5" x 13" (SEF), 8.5" x 11"
3 holes:
Print Paper Size:

A3, A4 (LEF) or 11" x 17", 8.5" x 11" (LEF)

4 holes (Europe):
A3, A4 (LEF) or 11" x 17", 8.5" x 11" (LEF)
4 holes (Scandinavia):
A3, A4 or 11" x 17", 8.5" x 14" (SEF), 8.5" x 13" (SEF), 8.5" x 11",
7.25" x 10.5"
Staple mode:
A3/11" x 17" to B5/8.5" x 11"
No punch mode:
52 to 256 g/m2 (14 to 68 lb.)
Punch mode:

Paper Weight:

52 to 105 g/m2 (14 to 28 lb.)

Staple mode:
52 to 128 g/m2 (14 to 34 lb.)
Label/Thick paper/OHP cannot be stapled

Tray Capacity:

Staple capacity:

500 sheets: A4, 8.5" x 11" or less

250 sheets: B4, 8.5" x 14" or more
50 sheets: A4, 8.5" x 11" or smaller
30 sheets: B4, 8.5" x 14" or larger
3 positions

Staple position:

1-staple: 2 positions (Top/ Bottom)

2-staples: 1 position

Staple replenishment:

22

Cartridge (5000 staples)

Optional Equipment

Power consumption:

50 W + 12 W (Punch Unit)
Finisher:

Dimensions (W x D x H):

535 x 525 x 205 mm (21.1" x 20.7" x 8.1")

Punch Unit:

98 x 500 x 165 mm (3.9" x 19.7" x 6.5")

Weight:

Without punch unit:

13 kg (28.6 lb.)

With punch unit:

16.2 Kg (35.6 lb.)

Shift Tray (D428)

Paper Capacity:

250 sheet (A4/ 81/2" x 111/2" or smaller: 80g/m2/ 20 lbs)

Standard sizes
A6 SEF to A3, HLT to DLT

Paper Size:

Non-standard sizes
Width: 90 to 305 mm
Length: 148 to 600 mm

Paper Weight:

52-256 g/m2/ 14 - 68 lbs

Power Consumption:

Max 13 W (Power is supplied from the mainframe.)

Dimension (W x D x H):

431 x 477.5 x 107mm (17.2" x 19.1" x 4.3")

Weight:

Approx. 2kg (4.4lbs)

1-bin Tray Unit (D426)

Paper Size:

Standard Size:
A3 /DLT to A5/ HLT SEF

Paper Weight:

60 to 105 g/m2, 16 to 28 lb.

Tray Capacity:

100 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb., A4)

Power Source:

DC 24 V, 5 V (from the copier)

Power Consumption:

Less than 1 W

23

1. Appendix: Specifications

Weight:

Less than 2kg (4.4lbs)

Size (W x D x H):

455 x 530 x 226mm (18.2" x 21.2" x 9")

Side Tray (D427)

Paper Size:

Standard Size:
A3 /DLT to A5/ HLT SEF

Paper Weight:

60 to 105 g/m2, 16 to 28 lb.

Tray Capacity:

50 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb., A4)

Power Source:

DC 24 V, 5 V (from the copier)

Power Consumption:

Less than 40 W

Weight:

1.5 kg

Size (W x D x H):

480 x 480 x 170mm (19.2"x19.2"x6.8")

Envelope Feeder EF3010 (D559)

A3, A4, A5, A6, B4, B5, B6, DLT (11x17),
Paper Size:

Paper Weight:
Tray Capacity:

24

Legal (8.5x14), Foolscap (8.5x13), Letter (8.5x11),

GovernmentLG (8.25x14), Folio (8.25x13), F/GL(8x13), Eng
Quatro (8x10), Executive(7.25x10.5), Half Letter(5.5x8.5),
Com10(4.125x9.5), Monarch(3.875x7.5), C5, C6, DL Env,
11x15, 10x14
60 - 256 g/m2/ 14 - 68 Bond lbs.
250 sheets
150 sheets (A5SEF/ A6SEF/ B6SEF/ Half Letter SEF)

Power Source:

Power Consumption:

Weight:

2 or less kg/ 4.4 or less lbs.

Size (W x D x H):

495.8 550 94 mm/ 19.5" 21.7" 3.7"

2. Appendix: Preventive Maintenance

Tables
Maintenance Tables

Preventive Maintenance Items

A4 (LT) long-edge feed
5% image coverage ratio
Color ratio: 20%
2 print/job
Environment: Normal temperature and humidity
Yield may change depending on circumstances and print conditions.
Symbol keys: C: Clean, R: Replace, L: Lubricant, I: Inspect

Mainframe
Item

60K

120K

240K

EM

Remarks

Scanner
Reflector

Optics cloth

1st/2nd/3rd Mirrors

Optics cloth

Front and Rear Rails

Dry cloth

Exposure Glass

Dry cloth

ADF Exposure Glass

Dry cloth

APS Sensor

Dry cloth

PCDU
Drum Unit-K, C, M, Y

PCDU Toner Collection Bottle

25

2. Appendix: Preventive Maintenance Tables

Item

60K

120K

240K

EM

Remarks

ITB and PTR unit

ITB Cleaning Unit

ID Sensors

Alcohol

Fusing
Alcohol

Pressure Roller

C*

Heating Roller Thermistor

Dry cloth

Pressure Roller Thermistor

Dry cloth

Entrance Guide Plate

Alcohol

Exit Guide Plate

Alcohol

Stripper Plate

Alcohol

Thermopile

Dry cloth

Fusing Gear Shafts

Cleaning Unit (Option)*NOTE

*: Clean it if dirty.

S552R
R

Dry cloth

Others
Dust Filter

The cleaning unit prevents the pressure roller from getting dirty due to paper dust.
Item

60K

120K

240K

EM

Remarks

Paper Feed
Feed Roller: Tray 1/2

Damp cloth

Friction Pad: Tray 1/2

Dry cloth

Registration Roller
Registration Sensor
26

C*1

C
C

Damp cloth
Never use alcohol.
Dry cloth

Maintenance Tables

Item

60K

120K

240K

EM

Remarks

Vertical Transport Roller

Damp cloth

Vertical Transport Sensor

Dry cloth

By-pass Feed Roller

Damp cloth

By-pass Friction Pad

Dry cloth

By-pass HP Sensor

Dry cloth

Paper Dust Container

Vacuum

Duplex Transport Roller

Damp cloth

Duplex Exit Sensor

Dry cloth

Paper Exit Roller

Damp cloth

Inverter Roller

Damp cloth

Inverter Relay Roller

Damp cloth

Inverter Sensor

Dry cloth

Fusing Exit Sensor

Dry cloth

Duplex

Paper Exit

*1: The registration roller requires a cleaning maintenance every 60 K (total count).

Others Yield Parts

The parts mentioned in these tables have a target yield. However, the total copy/print volume made by
the machine will not reach the target yield within the machines targeted lifetime if the machine is used
under the target usage conditions (ACV, color ratio, P/J, and C/O). So, these parts are categorized not
as PM parts but as yield parts (EM parts).

Mainframe
Item

240K

EM

Remarks

PCDU
27

2. Appendix: Preventive Maintenance Tables

Development Unit-K, C, M, Y

ITB and PTR unit

Image Transfer Belt

PTR unit

Fusing
Fusing Unit

ARDF (D366)
Item

80K

EM

Remarks

Pick-up Roller

Number of originals

Feed Belt

Number of originals

Separation Roller

Number of originals

Sensors

Blower brush

Platen Sheet Cover

Damp cloth; alcohol (Replace if

required.)

White Plate

Dry or damp cloth

Drive Gear

Grease G501

Transport Roller

Damp cloth; alcohol

Exit Roller

Damp cloth; alcohol

Inverter Roller

Damp cloth; alcohol

Idle Rollers

Damp cloth; alcohol

One-tray Paper Feed Unit (D425)

Item

60K

Feed Roller
Bottom Plate Pad
28

120K

EM

Remarks

Dry cloth

Dry cloth

Maintenance Tables

Paper Feed Guide

Friction Pad

Paper Feed Clutch

Dry cloth

Dry cloth

Two-tray Paper Feed Unit (D331)

Item

60K

120K

EM

Remarks

Paper Feed Roller

Dry cloth

Friction Pad

Dry cloth

Paper Feed Guides

Dry cloth

Relay Rollers

Dry cloth

Bottom Plate Pad

Dry cloth

Relay Clutch

Replace if necessary

Paper Feed Clutch

Replace if necessary

1 Bin Tray (D426)

Items

150K

EM

Exit Rollers

Idle Rollers

Tray

Remarks
Damp or Dry cloth
Damp or Dry cloth

Damp cloth

Blower brush

Paper Sensor

Blower brush

Bearing

S552R

Exit Sensor

Shift Tray (D427)

Items

EM

Remarks

29

2. Appendix: Preventive Maintenance Tables

Tray

30

Damp cloth

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

System SP1-xxx
SP1-XXX (Feed)
[Leading Edge Registration] Leading Edge Registration Adjustment
(Tray Location, Paper Type, Color Mode), Paper Type -> Plain, Thick 1, Thick 2 or Thick3
1001

Adjusts the leading edge registration by changing the registration motor operation timing
for each mode.
Increasing a value: an image is moved to the trailing edge of paper.
Decreasing a value: an image is moved to the leading edge of paper.
001 Tray:Plain:600dpi

*ENG

002 Tray:Thick1:600dpi

*ENG

003 Tray:M-Thick:600dpi

*ENG

004 By-pass:Plain:600dpi

*ENG

005 By-pass:Thick1:600dpi

*ENG

006 By-pass:Thick2:600dpi

*ENG

007 By-pass:Thick3:600dpi

*ENG

008 By-pass: M-Thick:600dpi

*ENG

009 Duplex:Plain:600dpi

*ENG

010 Duplex:M-Thick:600dpi

*ENG

[9 to 9 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]

31

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

011 Tray:Thick1:1200dpi

*ENG

012 Tray:M-Thick:1200dpi

*ENG

013 By-pass:Plain:1200dpi

*ENG

014 By-pass:Plain:1200dpi

*ENG

015 By-pass:Thick1:1200dpi

*ENG

016 By-pass:Thick2:1200dpi

*ENG

017 By-pass:Thick3:1200dpi

*ENG

018 By-pass:M-Thick:1200dpi

*ENG

019 Duplex:Plain:1200dpi

*ENG

020 Duplex:M-Thick:1200dpi

*ENG

[9 to 9 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]

[Side-to-Side Registration]
1002

Adjusts the side-to-side registration by changing the laser main scan start position for each
mode and tray.
Increasing a value: an image is moved to the rear edge of paper.
Decreasing a value: an image is moved to the front edge of paper.
001 By-pass

*ENG

002 Paper Tray 1

*ENG

003 Paper Tray 2

*ENG

004 Paper Tray 3

*ENG

005 Paper Tray 4

*ENG

006 Duplex

*ENG

[4 to 4 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]

[Paper Buckle] Paper Buckle Adjustment

1003

(Tray Location, Paper Type), Paper Type: M-Thick: Middle Thick

Adjusts the amount of paper buckle at the registration roller by changing the paper feed
timing.

32

System SP1-xxx

001 Tray1:Plain:600dpi

*ENG

002 Tray1:Thick1:600dpi

*ENG

003 Tray1:M-Thick:600dpi

*ENG

004 Tray234:Plain:600dpi

*ENG

005 Tray234:Thick1:600dpi

*ENG

006 Tray234:M-Thick:600dpi

*ENG

007 By-pass:Plain:600dpi

*ENG

008 By-pass:Thick1:600dpi

*ENG

009 By-pass:Thick2:600dpi

*ENG

010 By-pass:Thick3:600dpi

*ENG

011 By-pass:M-Thick:600dpi

*ENG

012 Duplex:Plain:600dpi

*ENG

013 Duplex:M-Thick:600dpi

*ENG

014 Tray1:Plain:1200dpi

*ENG

015 Tray1:Thick1:1200dpi

*ENG

016 Tray1:M-Thick:1200dpi

*ENG

017 Tray234:Plain:1200dpi

*ENG

018 Tray234:Thick1:1200dpi

*ENG

019 Tray234:M-Thick:1200dpi

*ENG

020 By-pass:Plain:1200dpi

*ENG

021 By-pass:Thick1:1200dpi

*ENG

022 By-pass:Thick2:1200dpi

*ENG

023 By-pass:Thick3:1200dpi

*ENG

024 By-pass:M-Thick:1200dpi

*ENG

025 Duplex:Plain:1200dpi

*ENG

026 Duplex:M-Thick:1200dpi

*ENG

[5 to 5 / 2 / 1 mm/step]

3
[5 to 5 / 0 / 1 mm/step]

[5 to 5 / 2 / 1 mm/step]

[5 to 5 / 0 / 1 mm/step]

33

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

1007

[By-Pass Size Detection] By-Pass Size Detection Display

0:LT SEF/ 1:LG

001

*ENG

Enables or disables the automatic paper size detection function of the by-pass tray.
This SP determines what paper size the machine detects if the detected size is less than 8.5".
0: LT SEF (default), 1: LG
[Reload Permit Setting] DFU

3
1101

Specifies the settings of the reload permit for cold temperature in color mode. However, these
SPs are desgined for the factory use only. Do not change the adjusted setting.
Destination: NA; North America, TWN; Taiwan, EU; Europe, AA; Asia Pasific

001

002

003

Pre-rotation Start Temp.

*ENG

[0 to 75 / 50 / 1 deg/step]

Specifies the pre-rotation start temperature.

Reload Target Temp.:Center

*ENG

[135 to 145 / 135 / 1 deg/step]

Specifies the reload target temperature of the heating roller.

Reload Target Temp.:Press

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 75 / 1 deg/step]

Specifies the reload target temperature of the pressure roller.

Temp.:Delta:Cold: Center

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 20 / 1 deg/step]

004 Specifies the temperature correction of the heating roller (center) when the fusing unit is
determined as cold state.
Temp.:Delta:Cold:End

*ENG

[0 to 100 / NA: 55, EU/AA: 45 / 1 deg/step]

005 Specifies the temperature correction of the heating roller (end) when the fusing unit is
determined as cold state.
Temp.:Delta:Cold: Press

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 0 / 1 deg/step]

006 Specifies the temperature correction of the pressure roller when the fusing unit is determined
as cold state.
Rotation Time:Cold

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 2 / 1 sec/step]

007 Specifies the threshold time for the fusing reload when the fusing unit is determined as cold
state.

34

System SP1-xxx

Temp.:Delta:Warm: Center

*ENG

[0 to 100 / NA: 10, EU/AA: 15 / 1 deg/step]

008 Specifies the temperature correction of the heating roller (center) when the fusing unit is
determined as warm state.
Temp.:Delta:Warm:End

*ENG

[40 to 200 / 45 / 1 deg/step]

009 Specifies the temperature correction of the heating roller (end) when the fusing unit is
determined as warm state.
Temp.:Delta:Warm:Press

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 55 / 1 deg/step]

010 Specifies the temperature correction of the pressure roller when the fusing unit is determined
as warm state.
Time:Warm

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 2 / 1 sec/step]

011 Specifies the threshold time for the fusing reload when the fusing unit is determined as warm
state.
Temp.:Delta:Hot: Center

*ENG

[0 to 100 / NA: 10, EU/AA: 15 / 1 deg/step]

012 Specifies the temperature correction of the heating roller (center) when the fusing unit is
determined as hot state.
Temp.:Delta:Hot:End

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 45 / 1 deg/step]

013 Specifies the temperature correction of the heating roller (end) when the fusing unit is
determined as hot state.
Temp.:Delta:Hot:Press

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 55 / 1 deg/step]

014 Specifies the temperature correction of the pressure roller when the fusing unit is determined
as hot state.
Time:Hot

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 2 / 1 sec/step]

015 Specifies the threshold time for the fusing unit heating when the fusing unit is determined as
hot state.
Temp.:Delta:Cold:BW:Center

*ENG

[0 to 100 / NA: 20, EU/AA: 15 / 1 deg/step]

016 Specifies the temperature correction of the heating roller (center) in the black and white mode
when the fusing unit is determined as cold state.
Temp.:Delta:Cold:BW:End

*ENG

[0 to 100 / NA: 55, EU/AA: 45 / 1 deg/step]

017 Specifies the temperature correction of the heating roller (end) in the black and white mode
when the fusing unit is determined as cold state.
35

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

Temp.Delta:Cold:BW:Press

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 0 / 1 deg/step]

018 Specifies the temperature correction of the pressure roller in the black and white mode when
the fusing unit is determined as cold state.
Rotation Time:BW:Cold

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 2 / 1 sec/step]

019 Specifies the threshold time for the fusing unit heating in black and white mode when the
fusing unit is determined as cold state.

3
020

Temp.:Delta:Warm:BW:Cent
er

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 10 / 1 deg/step]

Specifies the temperature correction of the heating roller (center) in the black and white mode
when the fusing unit is determined as warm state.
Temp.:Delta:Warm:BW:End

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 45 / 1 deg/step]

021 Specifies the temperature correction of the heating roller (end) in the black and white mode
when the fusing unit is determined as warm state.
Temp.Delta:Warm:BW:Press

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 55 / 1 deg/step]

022 Specifies the temperature correction of the pressure roller in the black and white mode when
the fusing unit is determined as warm state.
Rotation Time:BW:Warm

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 2 / 1 sec/step]

023 Specifies the threshold time for the fusing unit heating in black and white mode when the
fusing unit is determined as warm state.
Temp.:Delta:Hot:BW:Center

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 10 / 1 deg/step]

024 Specifies the temperature correction of the heating roller (center) in the black and white mode
when the fusing unit is determined as hot state.
Temp.:Delta:Hot:BW: End

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 45 / 1 deg/step]

025 Specifies the temperature correction of the heating roller (end) in the black and white mode
when the fusing unit is determined as hot state.
Temp.:Delta:Hot:BW: Press

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 55 / 1 deg/step]

026 Specifies the temperature correction of the pressure roller in the black and white mode when
the fusing unit is determined as hot state.

36

System SP1-xxx

Rotation Time:BW:Hot

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 2 / 1 sec/step]

027 Specifies the threshold time for the fusing unit heating in black and white mode when the
fusing unit is determined as hot state.
030 Flicker Control

*ENG

[0 or 1 / 0 / -]

*ENG

[0 to 100 / NA: 20, EU/AA: 15 / 1 deg/step]

102 Temp.:Delta:Cold: BW2:End

*ENG

[0 to 100 / NA: 55, EU/AA: 45 / 1 deg/step]

103 Temp.:Delta:Cold: BW2:Press

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 0 / 1 deg/step]

104 Rotation Time: BW2:Cold

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 2 / 1 sec/step]

105

Temp.:Delta:Warm:
BW2:Center

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 10 / 1 deg/step]

106

Temp.:Delta:Warm:
BW2:End

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 45 / 1 deg/step]

107

Temp.:Delta:Warm:
BW2:Press

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 55 / 1 deg/step]

108 Rotation Time: BW2:Warm

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 2 / 1 sec/step]

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 10 / 1 deg/step]

110 Temp.:Delta:Hot: BW2:End

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 45 / 1 deg/step]

111 Temp.:Delta:Hot: BW2:Press

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 55 / 1 deg/step]

112 Rotation Time: BW2:Hot

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 2 / 1 sec/step]

101

109

Temp.:Delta:Cold:
BW2:Center

Temp.:Delta:Hot:
BW2:Center

[Feed Permit Setting]

1102

Specified the settings of the paper feeding timing.

Destination: NA; North America, TWN; Taiwan, EU; Europe, AA; Asia Pasific

-001 DFU
to -005 These SPs are desgined for the factory use only. Do not change the adjusted setting.
001 Temp.:Lower Delta:Center

*ENG

[0 to 100 / NA: 30, EU/AA: 20 / 1 deg/step]

002 Temp.:Lower Delta:End

*ENG

[0 to 100 / NA: 65, EU/AA: 50 / 1 deg/step]

37

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

003 Temp.:Upper Delta:Center

*ENG

[0 to 50 / NA: 15, EU/AA: 25 / 1 deg/step]

004 Temp.:Upper Delta:End

*ENG

[0 to 50 / NA: 15, EU/AA: 25 / 1 deg/step]

005 Temp.:Lower Delta:Press

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 60 / 1 deg/step]

006 Rotation Time

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 0 / 1 sec/step]

-007 DFU

to -011 These SPs are desgined for the factory use only. Do not change the adjusted setting.
Temp.:Lower
Delta:Center:Sp.1

*ENG

[0 to 100 / NA: 20, EU/AA: 11 / 1 deg/step]

*ENG

[0 to 100 / NA: 40, EU/AA: 31 / 1 deg/step]

*ENG

[0 to 50 / 15 / 1 deg/step]

010 Temp.:Upper Delta:End:Sp.1

*ENG

[0 to 50 / 15 / 1 deg/step]

011 Temp.:Lower Delta:Press:Sp.1

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 60 / 1 deg/step]

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 3 / 1 sec/step]

007

008 Temp.:Lower Delta:End:Sp.1

009

Temp.:Upper
Delta:Center:Sp.1

Rotation Time:Sp.1
012 Usage Limitation:

Use 3 seconds or more for this setting.

-013 DFU
to -017 These SPs are desgined for the factory use only. Do not change the adjusted setting.
013

Temp.:Lower
Delta:Center:Sp.2

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 30 / 1 deg/step]

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 30 / 1 deg/step]

*ENG

[0 to 50 / 20 / 1 deg/step]

016 Temp.:Upper Delta:End:Sp.2

*ENG

[0 to 50 / 20 / 1 deg/step]

017 Temp.:Lower Delta:Press:Sp.2

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 60 / 1 deg/step]

018 Rotation Time:Sp2

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 0 / 1 sec/step]

014 Temp.:Lower Delta:End:Sp.2

015

Temp.:Upper
Delta:Center:Sp.2

-019 DFU
to -024 These SPs are desgined for the factory use only. Do not change the adjusted setting.

38

System SP1-xxx

019 Feed Permit Time

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 60 / 1 sec/step]

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 25 / 1 deg/step]

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 25 / 1 deg/step]

*ENG

[0 to 50 / 10 / 1 deg/step]

023 Temp.:Upper Delta:End:Sp.3

*ENG

[0 to 50 / 10 / 1 deg/step]

024 Temp.:Lower Delta:Press:Sp.3

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 30 / 1 deg/step]

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 3 / 1 sec/step]

020

Temp.:Lower
Delta:Center:Sp.3

021 Temp.:Lower Delta:End:Sp.3

022

Temp.:Upper
Delta:Center:Sp.3

Rotation Time:Sp3

025 Usage Limitation:

Use 3 seconds or more for this setting.
1105

[Print Target Temp]

(Printing Mode, Roller Type, [Color], Simplex/Duplex)
Roller Type > Center and Ends: Heating roller, Pressure > Pressure roller
Paper Type -> Plain, Thin, Thick, OHP, Middle Thick, Special
Destination: NA; North America, TWN; Taiwan, EU; Europe, AA; Asia Pasific
Plain1:FC:Center

*ENG

[100 to 160 / NA: 150, EU/AA: 141 / 1 deg/

step]

001 Specifies the heating roller target temperature for the ready condition in full color printing.
Usage Limitation:
+5C against the default value for each destination is the upper limit for this setting.
Plain1:FC:Press (DFU)
002

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 95 / 1 deg/step]

Specifies the pressure roller target temperature for the ready condition in full color printing.
DFU:
This SP is desgined for the factory use only. Do not change the adjusted setting.

39

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

Plain1:BW:Center

*ENG

[100 to 160 / NA: 140, EU/AA: 131 / 1 deg/

step]

003 Specifies the heating roller target temperature for the ready condition in BW printing.
Usage Limitation:
+5C against the default value for each destination is the upper limit for this setting.
Plain1:BW:Press (DFU)

004

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 95 / 1 deg/step]

Specifies the pressure roller target temperature for the ready condition in BW printing.
DFU:
This SP is desgined for the factory use only. Do not change the adjusted setting.
Plain2:FC:Center

*ENG

[100 to 160 / NA: 155, EU/AA: 146 / 1 deg/

step]

005 Specifies the heating roller target temperature for the ready condition in full color printing.
Usage Limitation:
+5C against the default value for each destination is the upper limit for this setting.
Plain2:FC:Press (DFU)
006

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 95 / 1 deg/step]

Specifies the pressure roller target temperature for the ready condition in full coloe printing.
DFU:
This SP is desgined for the factory use only. Do not change the adjusted setting.
Plain2:BW:Center

*ENG

[100 to 160 / NA: 145, EU/AA: 136 / 1 deg/

step]

007 Specifies the heating roller target temperature for the ready condition in BW printing.
Usage Limitation:
+5C against the default value for each destination is the upper limit for this setting.
Plain2:BW:Press (DFU)
008

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 95 / 1 deg/step]

Specifies the pressure roller target temperature for the ready condition in BW printing.
DFU:
This SP is desgined for the factory use only. Do not change the adjusted setting.
Thin:FC:Center

*ENG

[100 to 160 / 135 / 1 deg/step]

009 Usage Limitation:

+5C against the default value is the upper limit for this setting.
40

System SP1-xxx

010 Thin:FC:Press (DFU)

Thin:BW:Center

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

*ENG

[100 to 160 / 125 / 1 deg/step]

011 Usage Limitation:

+5C against the default value is the upper limit for this setting.
012 Thin:BW:Press (DFU)
M-thick:FC:Center

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

*ENG

[100 to 170 / 150 / 1 deg/step]

013 Usage Limitation:

+10C against the default value is the upper limit for this setting.
014 M-thick:FC:Press (DFU)
M-thick:BW:Center

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]

*ENG

[100 to 170 / 140 / 1 deg/step]

015 Usage Limitation:

+10C against the default value is the upper limit for this setting.
016 M-thick:BW:Press (DFU)

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

Thick1:FC:Center

*ENG

[100 to 200 / 135 / 1 deg/step]

017 Usage Limitation:

+5C against the default value is the upper limit for this setting.
018 Thick1:FC:Press (DFU)
Thick1:BW:Center

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 135 / 1 deg/step]

*ENG

[100 to 200 / 125 / 1 deg/step]

019 Usage Limitation:

+5C against the default value is the upper limit for this setting.
020 Thick1:BW:Press (DFU)

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 110 / 1 deg/step]

Thick2:FC:Center

*ENG

[100 to 200 / 145 / 1 deg/step]

021 Usage Limitation:

+5C against the default value is the upper limit for this setting.
022 Thick2:FC:Press (DFU)

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 165 / 1 deg/step]

41

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

Thick2:BW:Center

*ENG

[100 to 200 / 135 / 1 deg/step]

023 Usage Limitation:

+5C against the default value is the upper limit for this setting.

024 Thick2:BW:Press (DFU)

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 140 / 1 deg/step]

Thick3:FC:Center

*ENG

[100 to 200 / 150 / 1 deg/step]

025 Usage Limitation:

+5C against the default value is the upper limit for this setting.
026 Thick3:FC:Press (DFU)
Thick3:BW:Center

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 178 / 1 deg/step]

*ENG

[100 to 200 / 140 / 1 deg/step]

027 Usage Limitation:

+5C against the default value is the upper limit for this setting.
028 Thick3:BW:Press (DFU)
Special1:FC:Center

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 150 / 1 deg/step]

*ENG

[100 to 170 / 150 / 1 deg/step]

029 Usage Limitation:

+5C against the default value is the upper limit for this setting.
030 Special1:FC:Press (DFU)
Special1:BW:Center

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 150 / 1 deg/step]

*ENG

[100 to 170 / 140 / 1 deg/step]

031 Usage Limitation:

+5C against the default value is the upper limit for this setting.
032 Special1:BW:Press (DFU)

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

Special2:FC:Center

*ENG

[100 to 175 / 155 / 1 deg/step]

033 Usage Limitation:

+5C against the default value is the upper limit for this setting.
034 Special2:FC:Press (DFU)
Special2:BW:Center

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 160 / 1 deg/step]

*ENG

[100 to 175 / 145 / 1 deg/step]

035 Usage Limitation:

+5C against the default value is the upper limit for this setting.

42

System SP1-xxx

036 Special2:BW:Press (DFU)

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

Special3:FC:Center

*ENG

[100 to 175 / 145 / 1 deg/step]

037 Usage Limitation:

+5C against the default value is the upper limit for this setting.
038 Special3:FC:Press (DFU)
Special3:BW:Center

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

*ENG

[100 to 175 / 135 / 1 deg/step]

039 Usage Limitation:

+5C against the default value is the upper limit for this setting.
040 Special3:BW:Press (DFU)
Envelop:Center

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

*ENG

[100 to 200 / 150 / 1 deg/step]

041 Usage Limitation:

+5C against the default value is the upper limit for this setting.
042 Envelop:Press (DFU)
Plain1:FC:Center:Low Speed

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 172 / 1 deg/step]

*ENG

[100 to 200 / 105 / 1 deg/step]

101 Usage Limitation:

+5C against the default value is the upper limit for this setting.
102

103

Plain1:FC:Press:Low Speed
(DFU)

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

Plain1:BW:Center:Low
Speed

*ENG

[100 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

Usage Limitation:
+5C against the default value is the upper limit for this setting.

104

Plain1:BW:Press:Low Speed
(DFU)

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

Plain2:FC:Center:Low Speed

*ENG

[100 to 200 / 110 / 1 deg/step]

105 Usage Limitation:

+5C against the default value is the upper limit for this setting.
106

Plain2:FC:Press:Low Speed
(DFU)

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

43

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

Plain2:BW:Center:Low
Speed
107

*ENG

[100 to 200 / 105 / 1 deg/step]

Usage Limitation:
+5C against the default value is the upper limit for this setting.

108

Plain2:BW:Press:Low Speed
(DFU)

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

Thin:FC:Center:Low Speed

*ENG

[100 to 200 / 105 / 1 deg/step]

109 Usage Limitation:

+5C against the default value is the upper limit for this setting.
110

Thin:FC:Press:Low Speed
(DFU)

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

Thin:BW:Center:Low Speed

*ENG

[100 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

111 Usage Limitation:

+5C against the default value is the upper limit for this setting.
112

113

Thin:BW:Press:Low Speed
(DFU)

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

M-Thick:FC:Center:Low
Speed

*ENG

[100 to 200 / 115 / 1 deg/step]

Usage Limitation:
+5C against the default value is the upper limit for this setting.

114

115

M-Thick:FC:Press:Low Speed
(DFU)

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

M-Thick:BW:Center:Low
Speed

*ENG

[100 to 200 / 110 / 1 deg/step]

Usage Limitation:
+5C against the default value is the upper limit for this setting.

116

44

M-Thick:BW:Press:Low
Speed (DFU)

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

System SP1-xxx

Special1:FC:Center:Low
Speed
117

*ENG

[100 to 200 / 115 / 1 deg/step]

Usage Limitation:
+5C against the default value is the upper limit for this setting.

118

119

Special1:FC:Press:Low
Speed (DFU)

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

Special1:BW:Center:Low
Speed

*ENG

[100 to 200 / 110 / 1 deg/step]

Usage Limitation:
+5C against the default value is the upper limit for this setting.

120

121

Special1:BW:Press:Low
Speed (DFU)

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

Special2:FC:Center:Low
Speed

*ENG

[100 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]

Usage Limitation:
+5C against the default value is the upper limit for this setting.

122

123

Special2:FC:Press:Low
Speed (DFU)

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

Special2:BW:Center:Low
Speed

*ENG

[100 to 200 / 115 / 1 deg/step]

Usage Limitation:
+5C against the default value is the upper limit for this setting.

124

125

Special2:BW:Press:Low
Speed (DFU)

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

Special3:FC:Center:Low
Speed

*ENG

[100 to 200 / 110 / 1 deg/step]

Usage Limitation:
+5C against the default value is the upper limit for this setting.

126

Special3:FC:Press:Low
Speed (DFU)

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

45

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

Special3:BW:Center:Low
Speed
127

*ENG

[100 to 200 / 105 / 1 deg/step]

Usage Limitation:
+5C against the default value is the upper limit for this setting.

128

Special3:BW:Press:Low
Speed (DFU)

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

OHP:Center

*ENG

[100 to 200 / 145 / 1 deg/step]

131 Usage Limitation:

+5C against the default value is the upper limit for this setting.
132 OHP:Press (DFU)
Envelop:Center:Low Speed

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 165 / 1 deg/step]

*ENG

[100 to 200 / 140 / 1 deg/step]

133 Usage Limitation:

+5C against the default value is the upper limit for this setting.
134

Envelop:Press:Low Speed
(DFU)

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 150 / 1 deg/step]

Plain1:Grossy:Center

*ENG

[100 to 200 / 110 / 1 deg/step]

135 Usage Limitation:

+5C against the default value is the upper limit for this setting.
136 Plain1:Grossy:Press (DFU)
Plain2:Grossy:Center

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

*ENG

[120 to 200 / 115 / 1 deg/step]

137 Usage Limitation:

+5C against the default value is the upper limit for this setting.
138 Plain2:Grossy:Press (DFU)
M-thick:Grossy:Center

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

*ENG

[120 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]

139 Usage Limitation:

+5C against the default value is the upper limit for this setting.
140 M-thick:Grossy:Press (DFU)

46

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

System SP1-xxx

Special4:FC:Center

*ENG

[120 to 200 / 135 / 1 deg/step]

141 Usage Limitation:

+5C against the default value is the upper limit for this setting.
142 Special4:FC:Press (DFU)
Special4:BW:Center

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 140 / 1 deg/step]

*ENG

[100 to 200 / 125 / 1 deg/step]

143 Usage Limitation:

+5C against the default value is the upper limit for this setting.
144 Special4:BW:Press (DFU)

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

Special5:FC:Center

*ENG

[100 to 200 / 145 / 1 deg/step]

145 Usage Limitation:

+5C against the default value is the upper limit for this setting.
146 Special5:FC:Press (DFU)
Special5:BW:Center

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 165 / 1 deg/step]

*ENG

[100 to 200 / 135 / 1 deg/step]

147 Usage Limitation:

+5C against the default value is the upper limit for this setting.
148 Special5:BW:Press (DFU)

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 140 / 1 deg/step]

Special6:FC:Center

*ENG

[100 to 200 / 130 / 1 deg/step]

149 Usage Limitation:

+5C against the default value is the upper limit for this setting.
150 Special6:FC:Press (DFU)
Special6:BW:Center

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 110 / 1 deg/step]

*ENG

[100 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]

151 Usage Limitation:

+5C against the default value is the upper limit for this setting.
152 Special6:BW:Press (DFU)
Envelop:Center:Thick1

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

*ENG

[100 to 200 / 115 / 1 deg/step]

153 Usage Limitation:

+5C against the default value is the upper limit for this setting.

47

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

154 Envelop:Press:Thick1 (DFU)

Envelop:Center:Thick2

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 135 / 1 deg/step]

*ENG

[100 to 200 / 145 / 1 deg/step]

155 Usage Limitation:

+5C against the default value is the upper limit for this setting.
156 Envelop:Press:Thick2 (DFU)

Envelop:Center:Thick3

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 165 / 1 deg/step]

*ENG

[100 to 200 / 150 / 1 deg/step]

157 Usage Limitation:

+5C against the default value is the upper limit for this setting.
158 Envelop:Press:Thick3 (DFU)
Postcard:Center:Thick1

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 178 / 1 deg/step]

*ENG

[100 to 200 / 105 / 1 deg/step]

159 Usage Limitation:

+5C against the default value is the upper limit for this setting.
160 Postcard:Press:Thick1 (DFU)
Postcard:Center:Thick2

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

*ENG

[100 to 200 / 115 / 1 deg/step]

161 Usage Limitation:

+5C against the default value is the upper limit for this setting.
162 Postcard:Press:Thick2 (DFU)
Postcard:Center:Thick3

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

*ENG

[100 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]

163 Usage Limitation:

+5C against the default value is the upper limit for this setting.
164 Postcard:Press:Thick3 (DFU)

1106

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

[Fusing Temp. Display] Fusing Temperature Display (Heating or Pressure)

Displays the current temperature of the heating and pressure rollers.

001 Center

[10 to 250 / 0 / 1 deg/step]

002 End

[10 to 250 / 0 / 1 deg/step]

The heating roller has two lamps. One heats the center of the heating roller and the other
heats both ends of the heating roller.
48

System SP1-xxx

003 Pressure Center

[10 to 250 / 0 / 1 deg/step]

005 Thermister Atmosphere

[10 to 250 / 0 / 1 deg/step]

006 Pressure End

[10 to 250 / 0 / 1 deg/step]

The pressure roller has no lamp.

1107
001

[Standby Target Temp. Setting]

Stanby/Preheat1: Center

*ENG

[100 to 150 / 135 / 1 deg/step]

Specifies the temperature of the heating roller for the ready or energy save 1 mode.

-002 DFU
to -006 These SPs are desgined for the factory use only. Do not change the adjusted setting.
002

003

004

005

006

007

Stanby/Preheat1: Press

[0 to 200 / 0 / 1 deg/step]

Specifies the temperature of the pressure roller for the ready or energy save 1 mode.
Preheat2: Center

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 130 / 1 deg/step]

Specifies the temperature of the heating roller for the energy save 2 mode.
Preheat2:Press

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 0 / 1 deg/step]

Specifies the temperature of the pressure roller for the energy save 2 mode.
Low Power:Center

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 0 / 1 deg/step]

Specifies the temperature of the heating roller for the low power mode.
Low Power:Press

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 0 / 1 deg/step]

Specifies the temperature of the pressure roller for the low power mode.
Print Ready:Center

*ENG

[120 to 150 / 130 / 1 deg/step]

Specifies the temperature of the heating roller for the print ready condition.
Print Ready:Press (DFU)

008

*ENG

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 10 / 1 deg/step]

Specifies the temperature of the pressure roller for the print ready condition.
DFU
This SP is desgined for the factory use only. Do not change the adjusted setting.

49

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

1108
001

[After Reload/Job Target Temp.]

Center

[120 to 150 / 130 / 1 deg/step]

Specifies the temperature of the heating roller after re-load or job.

Press (DFU)

002

*ENG

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step]

Specifies the temperature of the pressure roller after re-load or job.

DFU
This SP is desgined for the factory use only. Do not change the adjusted setting.

1111

[Environment Correction:Fusing] DFU

These SPs are desgined for the factory use only. Do not change the adjusted setting.
Temp.: Threshold: Low

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 17 / 1 deg/step]

001 Specifies the threshold temperature for low temperature. If the fusing temperature is 17C
or less, the machine executes the fusing mode for low temperature.
Temp.: Threshold: High

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 30 / 1 deg/step]

002 Sepcifies the threshold temperature for high temperature. If the fusing temperature is 30C
or more, the machine executes the fusing mode for high temperature.
Low Temp. Correction

*ENG

[0 to 15 / 5 / 1 deg/step]

003 Specifies the additional temperature for the target temperature. If the fusing temperature is
in low temperature condition, this temperature is added to the taraget temperature.
High Temp. Correction

*ENG

[0 to 15 / 0 / 1 deg/step]

004 Specifies the additional temperature for the target temperature. If the fusing temperature is
in high temperature condition, this temperature is added to the taraget temperature.
Job Low Temp. Correction

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 5 / 0.1 deg/step]

005 Specifies the additional temperature for the target temperature when the environmental
condition is determined as low temperature.
006 Job High Temp. Correction

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 0 / 0.1 deg/step]

Specifies the additional temperature for the target temperature when the environmental
condition is determined as high temperature.
007 Job Low Temp. Correction:Sp. *ENG

50

[0 to 100 / 10 / 0.1 deg/step]

System SP1-xxx

008

1112

Job High Temp.

Correction:Sp.

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 0 / 0.1 deg/step]

[Image Process Temp. Correction]

These SPs are used for the fusing temperature control for variable job images. This control
saves the power comsumption when the machine copies or prints a job text image in black
and white mode.
Temp.:Normal:Center:Level1
(DFU)

001

*ENG

[-10 to 10 / 0 / 1 /step]

Specifies the subtractive temperature level 1 of the fusing temperature control for variable
job images.
DFU
This SP is desgined for the factory use only. Do not change the adjusted setting.
Temp.:Normal:Center:Level2

002

*ENG

[-25 to 10 / NA: -10, EU/AA: -12 for C1.5a/

NA: -3, EU/AA: -10 for C1.5c / 1 /step]

Specifies the subtractive temperature level 2 of the fusing temperature control for variable
job images.
Usage Limitation:
Use 0C or less for this setting.

-003 to [Envir. Correct:Fusing] DFU

-006 These SPs are desgined for the factory use only. Do not change the adjusted setting.
003

004

Low Temp. Correction

*ENG

[0 to 15 / 5 / 1 deg/step]

Specifies the temperature correction in the low temperature condition.

High Temp. Correction

*ENG

[0 to 15 / 5 / 1 deg/step]

Specifies the temperature correction in the high temperature condition.

Offset Temp:Low

*ENG

[0 to 15 / 6.5 / 0.1 deg/step]

005 Specifies the temperature correction of the paper feeding taraget in the low temperature
condition.
Offset Temp:High

*ENG

[0 to 15 / 5 / 0.1 deg/step]

006 Specifies the temperature correction of the paper feeding taraget in the high temperature
condition.

51

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

1113

001

[Curl Correction]
Execute Pattern

*ENG

[0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: OFF, 1: ON

Selects the curl correction type.

-002 to
-006, DFU
-008, These SPs are desgined for the factory use only. Do not change the adjusted setting.
-009
Humidity:Threshold:M002 humid

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 65 / 1 %/step]

Specifies the threshold between low and middle humidity.

003

Humidity:Threshold:H-humid

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]

Specifies the threshold between middle and high humidity.

Permit Temp.:Delta:Press:M*ENG
004 humid

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

Specifies the threshold temperature for the curl control in middle humidity.
Permit Temp.:Delta:Press: H*ENG
005 humid

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

Specifies the threshold temperature for the curl control in high humidity.
[Stand-by Mode Setting]
006 P-Roll Thresh AF Job

*ENG

[0 to 160 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

Specifies the temperature of the pressure roller for the stand-by mode.
CPM:M-humid

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]

008 Specifies the CPM ratio of the decurl control against to the normal operation in middle
humidity.
009

52

CPM:H-humid

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 65 / 1 %/step]

Specifies the CPM ratio of the decurl control against to the normal operation in high humidity.

System SP1-xxx

1114

001

[Heat Storage Status] DFU

These SPs are desgined for the factory use only. Do not change the adjusted setting.
Temp.:Threshold: Press

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 80 / 1 deg/step]

Specifies the threshold temperature of the pressure roller for the heat storage status.

Temp.:Threshold:
002 Atmosphere

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 80 / 1 deg/step]

Specifies the threshold temperature inside the machine for the heat storage feedback control.

1115

001

1116

[Target Temp. Correction] DFU

This SP is desgined for the factory use only. Do not change the adjusted setting.
Temp.:Delta:End

*ENG

[-10 to 100 / 0 / 1 deg/step]

Specifies the different temperature between end and center of the heating roller.
[Press Temp. FB Control]
Execution mode

*ENG

[0 to 2 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: OFF, 1: ON: BW, 2: ON: BW/FC

001 Selects the heat storage FB control mode.

Usage Limitation:
Use "0: OFF" or "1: ON: BW" only.
-011
to -106

DFU
The following SPs below are desgined for the factory use only. Do not change the adjusted
setting.

011 Time Out

*ENG

[0 to 500 / 5 / 1 sec/step]

021 Delay:Standard Speed:FC:1 *ENG

[0 to 20,000 / 0 / 1 msec/step]

Delay:Standard Speed:BW:
*ENG
1

[0 to 20,000 / 0 / 1 msec/step]

022

025 Delay:Low Speed:FC:1

*ENG

[0 to 20,000 / 0 / 1 msec/step]

026 Delay:Low Speed:BW:1

*ENG

[0 to 20,000 / 0 / 1 msec/step]

031 Delay:Standard Speed:FC:2 *ENG

[0 to 20,000 / 0 / 1 msec/step]

53

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

032

Delay:Standard Speed:BW:
*ENG
2

035 Delay:Low Speed:FC:2

*ENG

[0 to 20,000 / 0 / 1 msec/step]

036 Delay:Low Speed:FC:2

*ENG

[0 to 20,000 / 0 / 1 msec/step]

041 Press Reference Temp.

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 0 / 1 deg/step]

042 Temp. Correction Lower Limit *ENG

[-30 to 0 / -2 / 1 deg/step]

043 Temp. Correction Upper Limit *ENG

[0 to 30 / 0 / 1 deg/step]

051

Paper Thickness
Coefficient:Plain1

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 20 / 1 /step]

052

Paper Thickness
Coefficient:Plain2

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 20 / 1 /step]

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 0 / 1 /step]

053 Paper Thickness Coeff.:Thin

54

[0 to 20,000 / 0 / 1 msec/step]

054

Paper Thickness Coeff.:Mthick

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 0 / 1 /step]

055

Paper Thickness
Coeff.:Thick1

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 0 / 1 /step]

056

Paper Thickness
Coeff.:Thick2

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 0 / 1 /step]

057

Paper Thickness
Coeff.:Thick3

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 0 / 1 /step]

058

Paper Thickness
Coeff.:Special1

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 0 / 1 /step]

059

Paper Thickness
Coeff.:Special2

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 0 / 1 /step]

060

Paper Thicknes
Coeff.:Special3

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 0 / 1 /step]

061

Paper Thickness
Coeff.:Envelop

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 0 / 1 /step]

071

Paper Thickness
Coeff.:Plain1:Low Speed

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 0 / 1 /step]

System SP1-xxx

072

Paper Thickness
Coeff.:Plain2:Low Speed

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 0 / 1 /step]

073

Paper Thickness
Coeff.:Thin:Low Speed

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 0 / 1 /step]

074

Paper Thickness Coeff.:Mthick:Low Speed

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 0 / 1 /step]

075

Paper Thickness
Coeff.:Special1:Low Speed

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 0 / 1 /step]

076

Paper Thickness
Coeff.:Special2:Low Speed

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 0 / 1 /step]

077

Paper Thickness
Coeff.:Special3:Low Speed

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 0 / 1 /step]

078

Paper Thickness
Coeff.:Plain1:Glossy

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 0 / 1 /step]

079

Paper Thickness
Coeff.:Plain2:Glossy

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 0 / 1 /step]

080

Paper Thickness Coeff.:Mthick:Glossy

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 0 / 1 /step]

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 0 / 1 /step]

081 Paper Thickness Coeff.:OHP

082

Paper Thickness
Coeff.:Envelop:Low Speed

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 0 / 1 /step]

101

Paper Thickness
Coeff.:Special4

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 200 / 1 /step]

102

Paper Thickness
Coeff.:Special5

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 200 / 1 /step]

103

Paper Thicknes
Coeff.:Special6

*ENG

[0 to 100 / NA: 75, EU/AA: 70 / 1 /step]

104

Paper Thickness
Coeff.:Envelop:Thick1

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 0 / 1 /step]

105

Paper Thickness
Coeff.:Envelop:Thick2

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 0 / 1 /step]

55

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

106

Paper Thickness
Coeff.:Envelop:Thick3

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 0 / 1 /step]

[Time Control] DFU

1117

The following SPs below are desgined for the factory use only. Do not change the adjusted
setting.

001 Control Time1

*ENG

[0 to 1000 / 1 / 1 sec./step]

002 Control Time2

*ENG

[0 to 1000 / 29 / 1 sec./step]

003 Temp:Plain:Center1

*ENG

[-35 to 35 / NA: 0, EU/AA: 9 / 1C/step]

004 Temp:Plain:Press.1

*ENG

[-35 to 35 / NA: -2, EU/AA: 9 for C1.5a/ NA:

0, EU/AA: 9 for C1.5c / 1C/step]

005 Temp:Plain:Center2

*ENG

[-35 to 35 / NA: 1, EU/AA: 10 / 1C/step]

006 Temp:Plain:Press.2

*ENG

[-35 to 35 / NA: 1, EU/AA: 10 / 1C/step]

007 Temp:M-Thick:Center1

*ENG

[-35 to 35 / 10 / 1C/step]

008 Temp:M-Thick:Press.1

*ENG

[-35 to 35 / 10 / 1C/step]

009 Temp:M-Thick:Center2

*ENG

[-35 to 35 / 10 / 1C/step]

010 Temp:M-Thick:Press.2

*ENG

[-35 to 35 / 10 / 1C/step]

011 Temp:Other:Center1

*ENG

[-35 to 35 / 10 / 1C/step]

012 Temp:Other:Press.1

*ENG

[-35 to 35 / 10 / 1C/step]

013 Temp:Other.Center2

*ENG

[-35 to 35 / 10 / 1C/step]

014 Temp:Other:Press.2

*ENG

[-35 to 35 / 10 / 1C/step]

015 Temp:Plain:BW: Center1

*ENG

[-35 to 35 / NA: 0, EU/AA: 9 / 1C/step]

016 Temp:Plain:BW:End1

*ENG

[-35 to 35 / NA: 0, EU/AA: 9 / 1C/step]

017 Temp:Plain:Center2

*ENG

[-35 to 35 / NA: 0, EU/AA: 9 / 1C/step]

018 Temp:Plain:BW:End2

*ENG

[-35 to 35 / NA: 0, EU/AA: 9 / 1C/step]

*ENG

[-35 to 35 / 20 / 1C/step]

*ENG

[-35 to 35 / 20 / 1C/step]

019

Temp:Other:Center1:LowSpee
d

020 Temp:Other:End1:LowSpeed

56

System SP1-xxx

021

Temp:Other.Center2:LowSpee
d

*ENG

[-35 to 35 / 20 / 1C/step]

022 Temp:Other:End2:LowSpeed

*ENG

[-35 to 35 / 20 / 1C/step]

023 Temp:Envelop:Center1

*ENG

[-35 to 35 / 15 / 1C/step]

024 Temp:Envelop:End1

*ENG

[-35 to 35 / 15 / 1C/step]

025 Temp:Envelop:Center2

*ENG

[-35 to 35 /15 / 1C/step]

026 Temp:Envelop:End2

*ENG

[-35 to 35 / 15 / 1C/step]

1121

[Switch:Rotation Start/Stop]

001 Time:After Reload

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 100 / 1 sec./step]

Specifies the interval of the re-load mode.

-002
to -010

DFU
The following SPs below are desgined for the factory use only. Do not change the adjusted
setting.

002 Time:After Recovery

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 10 / 1 sec./step]

003 Time:After Job

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 10 / 1 sec./step]

004 Press Temp.:After Reload

*ENG

[0 to 160 / 160 / 1C/step]

005 End Uniform Start Temp.:B4

*ENG

[0 to 250 / 200 / 1C/step]

006 End Uniform Start Temp.:B5

*ENG

[0 to 250 / 200 / 1C /step]

007 End Uniform Start Temp.:A5

*ENG

[0 to 250 / 190 / 1C /step]

008 Overshoot Prevent Temp.

*ENG

[0 to 250 / 200 / 1C /step]

009 Overshoot Prevent Time

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 10 / 1 sec./step]

010 Overshoot Prevent Temp.:End *ENG

[0 to 250 / 200 / 1C /step]

[Standby Rotation Setting] DFU

1122

The following SPs below are desgined for the factory use only. Do not change the adjusted
setting.

001 Rotation Interval

*ENG

[0 to 240 / 60 / 1 min./step]

57

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

002 Rotation Time

*ENG

[0 to 10000 / 600 / 1 msec/step]

[CPM Down Setting] DFU

Specifies the settings for the CPM down mode.
1124

DFU
The following SPs below are desgined for the factory use only. Do not change the adjusted
setting.

001 Low:Down Temp.

*ENG

[-50 to 0 / -20 / 1 deg/step]

Specifies the CPM down threshold temperature for the low temperature condition. If the fusing
temperature decreases -20C (adjustable) below the target temperature, the machine enters
the CPM down mode.
002 Low:Up Temp.

*ENG

[-50 to 0 / -15 / 1 deg/step]

Specifies the CPM up threshold temperature for the low temperature condition. If the fusing
temperature increases -15C (adjustable) below the target temperature, the machine enters
the CPM up mode.
003 Low :1st CPM

*ENG

[10 to 100 / 80 / 5 %/step]

Specifies the 1st CPM down ration against the normal CPM in the low temperature condition.
004 Low :2nd CPM

*ENG

[10 to 100 / 65 / 5 %/step]

Specifies the 2nd CPM down ration against the normal CPM in the low temperature condition.
005 Low :3rd CPM

*ENG

[10 to 100 / 50 / 5 %/step]

Specifies the 3rd CPM down ration against the normal CPM in the low temperature condition.
006 High :1st CPM

*ENG

[10 to 100 / 75 / 5 %/step]

Specifies the 1st CPM down ration against the normal CPM in the high temperature condition.
007 High:2nd CPM

*ENG

[10 to 100 / 50 / 5 %/step]

Specifies the 3rd CPM down ration against the normal CPM in the high temperature condition.
008 High:3rd CPM

*ENG

[10 to 100 / 25 / 5 %/step]

Specifies the 1st CPM down ration against the normal CPM in the high temperature condition.
009

58

High:1st CPM Down

Temp.:A3

*ENG

[100 to 225 / 200 / 1 deg/step]

System SP1-xxx

Specifies the heating roller temperature for 1st CPM down of A3 paper size.
010

High:2nd CPM Down

Temp.:A3

*ENG

[100 to 225 / 205 / 1 deg/step]

Specifies the heating roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of A3 paper size.
011

High:3rd CPM Down

Temp.:A3

*ENG

[100 to 225 / 210 / 1 deg/step]

Specifies the heating roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of A3 paper size.
012

High:1st CPM Down

Temp.:A4

*ENG

[100 to 225 / 175 / 1 deg/step]

Specifies the heating roller temperature for 1st CPM down of A4 paper size.
013

High:2nd CPM Down

Temp.:A4

*ENG

[100 to 225 / 177 / 1 deg/step]

Specifies the heating roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of A4 paper size.
014

High:3rd CPM Down

Temp.:A4

*ENG

[100 to 225 / 179 / 1 deg/step]

Specifies the heating roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of A4 paper size.
015

High:1st CPM Down

Temp.:B5:Press

*ENG

[100 to 225 / 177 / 1 deg/step]

Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of B5 paper size.
016

High:2nd CPM Down

Temp.:B5:Press

*ENG

[100 to 225 / 186 / 1 deg/step]

Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of B5 paper size.
017

High:3rd CPM Down

Temp.:B5:Press

*ENG

[100 to 225 / 225 / 1 deg/step]

Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of B5 paper size.
018

High:1st CPM Down

Temp.:A5:Press

*ENG

[100 to 225 / 178 / 1 deg/step]

Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of A5 paper size.
019

High:2nd CPM Down

Temp.:A5:Press

*ENG

[100 to 225 / 185 / 1 deg/step]

59

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of A5 paper size.
020

High:3rd CPM Down

Temp.:A5:Press

*ENG

[100 to 225 / 225 / 1 deg/step]

Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of A5 paper size.
021

High:1st CPM Down

Temp.:A6:Press

*ENG

[100 to 225 / 191 / 1 deg/step]

Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of A6 paper size.
022

High:2nd CPM Down

Temp.:A6:Press

*ENG

[100 to 225 / 225 / 1 deg/step]

Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of A6 paper size.
023

High:3rd CPM Down

Temp.:A6:Press

*ENG

[100 to 225 / 225 / 1 deg/step]

Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of A6 paper size.
024

*ENG

[1 to 250 / 10 / 1 sec/step]

Specifies the interval for CPM down judgement.

025

High:1st CPM Down

Temp.:Env.M-t:Press

*ENG

[100 to 225 / 137 / 1 deg /step]

026

High:2nd CPM Down

Temp.:Env.M-t:Press

*ENG

[100 to 225 / 142 / 1 deg /step]

027

High:3rd CPM Down

Temp.:Env.M-t:Press

*ENG

[100 to 225 / 187 / 1 deg /step]

028

High:1st CPM Down

Temp.:Narrow-Thick:Press

*ENG

[100 to 225 / 125 / 1 deg /step]

029

High:2nd CPM Down

Temp.:Narrow-Thick:Press

*ENG

[100 to 225 / 137 / 1 deg /step]

030

High:3rd CPM Down

Temp.:Narrow-Thick:Press

*ENG

[100 to 225 / 145 / 1 deg /step]

1131

60

Judging Interval

[Continues Print Mode Switch]

System SP1-xxx

[0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step]
001 Feed Permit Condition

*ENG

0: Productivity Priority mode

1: Quality Priority mode 1
2: Quality Priority mode 1

Selects the feed permission type.

0: No paper feed permission
1: Paper feed permission is done when changing the paper size from smaller one to larger
one.

2: Paper feed permission is done when changing the paper size from smaller one to larger
one and changing the copy/print mode from duplex mode to simplex mode.
[Maximum Duty Switch]
1132

DFU
The following SPs below are desgined for the factory use only. Do not change the adjusted
setting.

001 Control Method Switch

*ENG

[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: FIXED, 1: CONTROL

Selects the heater control method.

Use "1: CONTORL" if hot offset occurs after power-on and input voltage is relatively hight.
003

[PowerControl]
Power Offset

012 Voltage Detection

013

[Voltage Detection]
Temp.:Threshold Value

*ENG

[-4 to 4 / 0 / 1 /step]

*ENG

[0 to 350 / 0 / 1 V/step]

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 80 / 1C/step]

[Last Paper Heater OFF Control]

1133

001

DFU
The following SPs below are desgined for the factory use only. Do not change the adjusted
setting.
Heater OFF Time: Normal
Speed: FC

*ENG

[0 to 20000 / 2400 / 1 msec./step]

61

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

002

Heater OFF Time: Normal

Speed: BW

*ENG

[0 to 20000 / 1200 / 1 msec./step]

005

Heater OFF Time:Low

Speed:FC

*ENG

[0 to 20000 / 6300 / 1 msec./step]

006

Heater OFF Time:Low

Speed:BW

*ENG

[0 to 20000 / 1400 / 1 msec./step]

007

Heater OFF Time: After State

*ENG
Shift

[0 to 20000 / 17000 / 1 msec./step]

[Fusing SC Issue Time Info]

1141

DFU
The following SPs below are desgined for the factory use only. Do not change the adjusted
setting.

001 SC Number
SC Cause

*ENG

Displays the issued SC number.

*ENG

[0 to 9 / - / 1/step]

002 Shows the SC cause

0: Timeout 1, 1: Timeout 2, 2: Timeout 3, 4 to 9: Not used
101

104

105

106

107

108

62

Htg Roller:Ctr Diff1

*ENG

[-20 to 260 / - / 1 deg/step]

Displays the calculated temperature at the center of the heating roller when an SC was issued.
Htg Roller:End Diff1

*ENG

[-100 to 260 / - / 1 deg/step]

Displays the calculated temperature at the end of the heating roller when an SC was issued.
Htg Roller:End Det1

*ENG

[-10 to 260 / - / 1 deg/step]

Displays the detected temperature at the end of the heating roller when an SC was issued.
Htg Roller:End Corr1

*ENG

[-10 to 260 / - / 1 deg/step]

Displays the ambient temperature at the end of the heating roller when an SC was issued.
Press Roller Temp Value1

*ENG

[-10 to 260 / - / 1 deg/step]

Displays the temperature at the pressure roller when an SC was issued.

Press Roller:End Temp Value1

*ENG

[-10 to 260 / - / 1 deg/step]

Displays the temperature at the end of the pressure roller when an SC was issued.

System SP1-xxx

151

Htg Roller:Ctr Diff2

*ENG

SPs from -151 to -157 show previous fusing SC information.

154 Htg Roller:End Diff2

*ENG

155 Htg Roller:End Det2

*ENG

156 Htg Roller:End Corr2

*ENG

157 Press Roller Temp Value2

*ENG

158 Press Roller:End Temp Value2

*ENG

201

[-200 to 260 / - / 1 deg/step]

Htg Roller:Ctr Diff3

*ENG

[-10 to 260 / - / 1 deg/step]

3
[-20 to 260 / - / 1 deg/step]

SPs from -201 to -207 show fusing SC information before previous fusing SC.

204 Htg Roller:End Diff3

*ENG

205 Htg Roller:End Det3

*ENG

206 Htg Roller:End Corr3

*ENG

207 Press Roller Temp Value3

*ENG

208 Press Roller.End Temp Value3

*ENG

[-10 to 260 / - / 1 deg/step]

[Fusing Jam Detection]

1142

DFU
This SP is desgined for the factory use only. Do not change the adjusted setting.

001

SC Display

*ENG

[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: ON, 1: OFF

Enables or disables the fusing consecutive jam (three times) SC detection.

[Fusing Nip Band Check]
1152

DFU
The following SPs below are desgined for the factory use only. Do not change the adjusted
setting.

63

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

Execute

001 Executes the nip band measurement between heating roller and pressure roller.
If the nip band width is not 8 mm, and fusing is not good, replace the pressure roller or install
a new fusing unit.
002

003

004

Pre-Idling Time

*ENG

[0 to 999 / 600 / 1 sec/step]

Specifies the fusing rotation time before executing SP1152-001.

Stop Time

* ENG

[0 to 100 / 20 / 1 sec/step]

Specifies the time for paper staying at the nip.

Feed Time

* ENG

[0 to 10000 / 5000 / 1 msec./step]

Specifies the feeding time from the tray to the fusing unit at the fusing nip band check.
[Low Temp. Start Up]

1153

001

002

003

005

010

64

DFU
The following SPs below are desgined for the factory use only. Do not change the adjusted
setting.
Temp.:Threshold Value1

* ENG

[-10 to 100 / 5 / 1C./step]

Sepcifies the threshold temperature 1 for the warming up in the low temperature condition.
Temp.:Threshold Value2

* ENG

[-10 to 100 / 17 / 1C./step]

Sepcifies the threshold temperature 2 for the warming up in the low temperature condition.
Temp.:Target

* ENG

[0 to 100 / 100 / 1C./step]

Sepcifies the target temperature for the warming up in the low temperature condition.
Temp.: Rotation Threshold
Value1

* ENG

[-10 to 100 / 30 / 1C./step]

Sepcifies the threshold temperature 1 for the warming up rotation in the low temperature
condition.
Time:Heat Storage Devision1 * ENG

[0 to 250 / 60 / 1 sec./step]

Sepcifies the execution time 1 for the warming up in the low temperature condition.

System SP1-xxx

011

1801

Time:Heat Storage Devision2 * ENG

[0 to 250 / 30 / 1 sec../step]

Sepcifies the execution time 2 for the warming up in the low temperature condition.
[Motor Speed Adjust]

001 Regist Mot:60:Thick

*ENG

002 Regist Mot:120

*ENG

003 Bk OpcDevMot:120

*ENG

[4 to 4 / 0.1 / 0.01 %/step]

004 Bk OpcDevMot:60:Thick

*ENG

[4 to 4 / 0.4 / 0.01 %/step]

005 Color OpcMot:120

*ENG

006 Color OpcMot:60

*ENG

007 Fusing Mot:120

*ENG

[6 to 6 / -0.4 / 0.01 %/step]

008 Fusing Mot:60:Thick

*ENG

[6 to 6 / -0.05 / 0.01 %/step]

009 Transfer Mot:120

*ENG

[4 to 4 / 0 / 0.01 %/step]

010 TransferMot:60:Thick

*ENG

[4 to 4 / 0 / 0.01 %/step]

011 Feed1:CW60:Thick

*ENG

012 Feed1:CW120

*ENG

013 Feed1:CCW60:Thick

*ENG

014 Feed1:CCW120

*ENG

015 Feed12:CW60:Thick

*ENG

016 Feed12:CW120

*ENG

017 Feed12:CCW60:Thick

*ENG

018 Feed12:CCW120

*ENG

019 By-pass:60:Thick

*ENG

020 By-pass:120

*ENG

[4 to 4 / 0.3 / 0.05 %/step]

[15 to 15 / 0 / 1 %/step]

[2 to 2 / 0.3 / 0.05 %/step]

65

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

66

021 Inverter:CW60:Thick

*ENG

022 Inverter:CW120

*ENG

023 Inverter:CCW60:Thick

*ENG

024 Inverter:CCW120

*ENG

025 Duplex Entrance:60

*ENG

026 Duplex Entrance:120

*ENG

027 Duplex Exit:60

*ENG

028 Duplex Exit:120

*ENG

029 R-Tray Exit Motor

*ENG

[2 to 2 / 0 / 0.05 %/step]

030 Fine Adj. Control

*ENG

[0 to 1 / 1 /1]

031 Offset:120:Color

*ENG

032 Offset:60:Color

*ENG

033 Regist Mot:60:1200dpi

*ENG

034 Feed1:CW60:1200dpi

*ENG

035 Feed1:CCW60:1200dpi

*ENG

036 Feed2:CW60:1200dpi

*ENG

037 Feed2:CCW60:1200dpi

*ENG

038 By-pass:60:1200dpi

*ENG

039 Inverter:CW60:1200dpi

*ENG

040 Inverter:CCW60:1200dpi

*ENG

041 FusingMot:60:1200dpi

*ENG

[6 to 6 / -0.05 / 0.01 %/step]

042 BkOpcDevMot:60:1200dpi

*ENG

[4 to 4 / -0.4 / 0.01 %/step]

043 TransferMot:60:1200dpi

*ENG

[4 to 4 / 0 / 0.01 %/step]

[2 to 2 / 0 / 0.05 %/step]

[2 to 2 / 0.3 / 0.05 %/step]

[-7 to 7 / 0 /1step]
[4 to 4 / 0.3 / 0.05 %/step]

[2 to 2 / 0.3 / 0.05 %/step]

[2 to 2 / 0 / 0.05 %/step]

System SP1-xxx

[Sub Mag ADJ]

1803

These SPs can adjust the sub-scan magnification error. However, first read the "Sub-scan
Magnification Error" in the "Troubleshooting Guide" (Main Chapters) to execute these SPs.
NEVER EXECUTE these SPs before reading the "Sub-scan Magnification Error". Otherwise,
color registration errors occur on outputs and this cannot be recovered by the line position
adjustment.

001 Plain:600dpi:input

*ENG

002 Plain:1200dpi:input

*ENG

003 Thick:input

*ENG

004 Plain:600dpi:result

*ENG

005 Plain:1200dpi:result

*ENG

006 Thick:result

*ENG

1902

[-1 to 1 / 0 / 0.1 %/step]

[0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Success, 1: Failure

[Drum Phase Adj.] DFU

001 Execute

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1]

Execute drum phase adjustment.

[0 to 3 / 0 / 1]
Displays the result of drum phase adjustment.

002 Result

*ENG

0: Successfully done
2: Sampling failure
3: Insufficient detection number
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1]

003 Auto Execution

*ENG

Turns the automatic drum phase adjustment on or

off.
0: Off, 1: On

1907

[Inverter Timing Adj]

001 Inverter Position Adj.

*ENG

[10 to 10 / 0 / 1 mm/step]

[Feed Timing Adj]

67

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

002 R-Tray J-Gate SOL:ON

*ENG

003 R-Tray J-Gate SOL:OFF

*ENG

1950

[Fan Cooling Time Set] DFU

001 Development Fan1

*ENG

002 Development Fan2

*ENG

003 LD Unit Fan

*ENG

004 Fusing Exit Sn Fan

*ENG

005 Fusing Exit Fan

*ENG

006 Electrical Fan

*ENG

007 PSU Fan

*ENG

008 Junction Gate SOL Fan

*ENG

1951

[10 to 10 / 0 / 1 mm/step]

[0 to 600 / 0 / 1sec/step]

[Fan Start Time Set]

Adjust the start time for each fan motor after a job end.

001 Development Fan1

002 Development Fan2

*ENG

003 Imaging Fan

*ENG

004

Fusing Exit Sensor Cooling

Fan

005 Fusing Exit Fan

*ENG

006 Electrical Unit Fan

*ENG

007 PSU Fan

*ENG

008 Solenoid Cooling Fan

*ENG

1952

[0 to 900 / 0 / 1 sec/step]

[Fan Control Off Mode Time Set]

001 -

68

*ENG

*ENG

[0 to 60 / 0 / 1 min./step]

System SP1-xxx

1953

001

[Extra Fan Control]

State

*ENG

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Off, 1: On

Displays the extra fan cooling is On or Off.

002

Time: Threshold

*ENG

[0 to 60 / 60 / 1 min./step]

Specifies the threshold time for the extra fan control.

003 Rotat: Threshold

*ENG

[0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm/step]

004 Start Date

*ENG

Displays the execution time and date of the extra

fan cooling.

Time

*ENG

[0 to 7200 / 0 / 1 sec./step:

005

Specifies the execution time for the extra fan cooling.

006 Development Fan1

*ENG

007 Development Fan2

*ENG

008 Imaging Fan

*ENG

Fusing Exit Sensor Cooling

Fan

*ENG

[0 to 7200 / 1 / 1 sec./step]

010 Fusing Exit Fan

*ENG

Specifies the exexution time of the extra fan

rotation for each fan.

011 Electrical Unit Fan

*ENG

012 PSU Fan

*ENG

013 Solenoid Cooling Fan

*ENG

009

1954

[Fan Start Time Initial]

69

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

001 Development Fan1

*ENG

002 Development Fan2

*ENG

003 Imaging Fan

*ENG

70

Fusing Exit Sensor Cooling

Fan

*ENG

[0 to 600 / 1 /.1 sec. /step]

005 Fusing Exit Fan

*ENG

Specifies the initial execution time of the extra

fan rotation for each fan.

006 Electrical Unit Fan

*ENG

007 PSU Fan

*ENG

008 Solenoid Cooling Fan

*ENG

004

System SP2xxx

System SP2xxx
SP2-XXX (Drum)
[Charge DC V:Fixed] DFU
2005

(Paper Type, Process Speed, Color)

Paper Type > Plain, Thick 1, Thick 2
Adjusts the DC component of the charge roller bias in the various print modes.

Charge bias (DC component) is automatically adjusted during process control; therefore,
adjusting these settings does not effect while process control mode (SP3-041-1 Default: ON)
is activated. When deactivating process control mode with SP3-041-1, the values in these
SP modes are used for printing.
001 Plain: Bk

*ENG

002 Plain: C

*ENG

003 Plain: M

*ENG

004 Plain: Y

*ENG

009 Thick 2&FINE: Bk

*ENG

010 Thick 2&FINE: C

*ENG

011 Thick 2&FINE: M

*ENG

012 Thick 2&FINE: Y

*ENG

[0 to 1000 / 600 / 10 V/step]

[Charge DC V:Fixed] DFU

(Paper Type, Process Speed, Color)
2006

Paper Type > Plain, Thick 1, Thick 2

Adjusts the AC component of the charge roller bias in the various print modes.
Charge bias (AC component) is adjusted by environment correction (SP2-007-xxx to
SP2-011-xxx). These SPs are activated only when SP2-012-1 is set to "1: manual control".

71

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

001 Plain: Bk

*ENG

002 Plain: C

*ENG

003 Plain: M

*ENG

004 Plain: Y

*ENG

009 Thick 2&FINE: Bk

*ENG

010 Thick 2&FINE: C

*ENG

011 Thick 2&FINE: M

*ENG

012 Thick 2&FINE: Y

*ENG

[0 to 3000 / 2100 / 10V/step]

[Charge AC Current: LL] DFU

Charge Roller AC Current Adjustment for LL
2007

(Color)
Displays/sets the AC current target of the charge roller for LL environment (Low temperature
and Low humidity).

001 Environmental Target: Bk

*ENG

[0 to 3000 / 610 / 10 A/step]

002 Environmental Target: C

*ENG

[0 to 3000 / 630/ 10 A/step]

003 Environmental Target: M

*ENG

[0 to 3000 / 610 / 10 A/step]

004 Environmental Target: Y

*ENG

[0 to 3000 / 670 / 10 A/step]

[Charge AC Current: ML] DFU

2008

Charge Roller AC Current Adjustment for MM (Color)

Displays/sets the AC current target of the charge roller for ML environment (Meddle
temperature and Low humidity).

72

001 Environmental Target: Bk

*ENG

[0 to 3000 / 610 / 10 A/step]

002 Environmental Target: C

*ENG

[0 to 3000 / 630 / 10 A/step]

003 Environmental Target: M

*ENG

[0 to 3000 / 610 / 10 A/step]

004 Environmental Target: Y

*ENG

[0 to 3000 / 660 / 10 A/step]

System SP2xxx

[Charge AC Current: MM] DFU

2009

Charge Roller AC Current Adjustment for MM (Color)

Displays/sets the AC current target of the charge roller for MM environment (Middle
temperature and Middle humidity).

001 Environmental Target: Bk

*ENG

[0 to 3000 / 610 / 10 A/step]

002 Environmental Target: C

*ENG

[0 to 3000 / 630 / 10 A/step]

003 Environmental Target: M

*ENG

[0 to 3000 / 600 / 10 A/step]

004 Environmental Target: Y

*ENG

[0 to 3000 / 640 / 10 A/step]

[Charge AC A: MH] DFU

2010

Charge Roller AC Current Adjustment for MH (Color)

Displays/sets the AC current target of the charge roller for MH environment (Middle
temperature and High humidity).

001 Environmental Target: Bk

*ENG

002 Environmental Target: C

*ENG

003 Environmental Target: M

*ENG

[0 to 3000 / 840 / 10 A/step]

004 Environmental Target: Y

*ENG

[0 to 3000 / 880 / 10 A/step]

[0 to 3000 / 820 / 10 A/step]

[Charge AC A: HH] DFU

2011

Charge Roller AC Current Adjustment for HH (Color)

Displays/sets the AC current target of the charge roller for HH environment (High
temperature and High humidity).

001 Environmental Target: Bk

*ENG

002 Environmental Target: C

*ENG

003 Environmental Target: M

*ENG

[0 to 3000 / 840 / 10 A/step]

004 Environmental Target: Y

*ENG

[0 to 3000 / 940 / 10 A/step]

2012

[0 to 3000 / 860 / 10 A/step]

[Charge Output Control] DFU

73

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

Selects the AC voltage control type.

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
001 AC Voltage

*ENG

0: Process control
1: Manual control (AC voltages are decided
with SP2006.)

2013

[Envir. Correct:PCU]

Displays the environmental condition, which

is measured in absolute humidity.
[1 to 5 / / 1 /step]
001 Envir. Range:FC:Display

*ENG

1: LL (LL <= 4.3 g/m3)

2: ML (4.3 < ML <= 11.3 g/m3)
3: MM (11.3 < MM <= 18.0 g/m3)
4: MH (18.0 < MH <= 24.0 g/m3)
5: HH (24.0 g/m3 < HH)
Selects the environmental condition manually.
DFU

002 Forced Setting

*ENG

[0 to 5 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: The environmental condition is determined
automatically.
1: LL, 2: ML, 3: MM, 4: MH, 5: HH

003 Absolute Humidity: Thresh 1

*ENG

Changes the humidity threshold between LL

and ML. DFU
[0 to 100 / 4.3 / 0.01 g/m3/step]

004 Absolute Humidity: Thresh 2

*ENG

Changes the humidity threshold between ML

and MM. DFU
[0 to 100 / 11.3 / 0.01 g/m3/step]

005 Absolute Humidity: Thresh 3

*ENG

Changes the humidity threshold between MM

and MH. DFU
[0 to 100 / 18.0 / 0.01 g/m3/step]

006 Absolute Humidity: Thresh 4

*ENG

Changes the humidity threshold between MH

and HH. DFU
[0 to 100 / 24.0 / 0.01 g/m3/step]

74

System SP2xxx

007 Current Temp.: Display

*ENG

008 Relative Humidity: Display

*ENG

009 Absolute Humidity: Display

*ENG

010 Envir. Range:Bk:Display

*ENG

Displays the current temperature.

[0 to 100 / 0 / 1 deg/step]
Displays the current relative humidity.
[0 to 100 / 0 / 1%RH/step]
Displays the absolute humidity.
[0 to 100 / 0 / 0.01 g/m3/step]
Displays the previous environmental
condition, which is measured in absolute
humidity.

[1 to 5 / / 1 /step]
1: LL, 2: ML, 3: MM, 4: MH, 5: HH
011 Previous Temp.: Display

*ENG

012 Relative Humidity: Display

*ENG

013 Absolute Humidity: Display

*ENG

2014

Displays the previous temperature.

[0 to 100 / 0 / 1 deg/step]
Displays the previous relative humidity.
[0 to 100 / 0 / 1%RH/step]
Displays the previous absolute humidity.
[0 to 100 / 0 / 0.01 g/m3/step]

[Charge AC Control: Setting] DFU

001 Main Interval: Power ON

*ENG

002 Main Interval: Print

*ENG

003 Sub: Interval

*ENG

[0 to 500 / 10 / 1 page/step]

004 Sub:Thresh Temp

*ENG

[0 to 99 / 25 / 1 deg/step]

005 Sub:R-Humid Thresh

*ENG

[0 to 99 / 50 / 1 %RH/step]

006 Sub:A-Humid Thresh

*ENG

[0 to 99 / 12 / 1 g/m3/step]

007 Main:Temp Change Thresh

*ENG

[0 to 99 / 10 / 1 deg/step]

008 Main:RH Change Thresh

*ENG

[0 to 99 / 50 / 1 %RH/step]

009 Main:AH Change Thresh

*ENG

[0 to 99 / 6 / 1 g/m3/step]

010 Sub:Temp Change Thresh

*ENG

[0 to 20 / 1 / 0.1 deg/step]

[0 to 2000 / 500 / 1 page/step]

75

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

011 Sub:RH Change Thresh

*ENG

[0 to 50 / 5 / 1 %RH/step]

012 Sub:AH Change Thresh

*ENG

[0 to 20 / 1 / 0.1 g/m3/step]

013 Non-use Time

*ENG

[0 to 1440 / 360 / 10 min/step]

014 Correction Coeff.

*ENG

[0 to 2 / 1 / 0.01 kV/mA/step]

2015

[Charge AC Adj: Result]

001 Bk

*ENG

002 C

*ENG

003 M

*ENG

004 Y

*ENG

2016

[0 to 9 / 0 / 1 /step]

[ZnSt Application Mode]

The drum lubrication mode interrupts the copy/print job to prevent the drum filming or
cleaning problem after the high coverage image printing if some conditions are met. The
following SPs can be adjusted for the drum lubrication mode.
Temperature Threshold

*ENG

[0 to 50 / 15 / 1 deg/step]

001 Specifies the threshold temperature for the low temperature mode of the drum lubrication
during the multiple printing job.
Execution Interval: Setting:1

*ENG

[0 to 999 / 0 / 1 page/step]

002 Specifies the reference number of the outputs for the high coverage image job in the low
speed mode.
Execution Interval: Setting:2

*ENG

[0 to 999 / 0 / 1 page/step]

003 Specifies the reference number of the outputs for the high coverage image printing job in the
low temperature condition.
004

Execution Interval: Setting:3

*ENG

[0 to 999 / 0 / 1 page/step]

Specifies the reference number of the outputs for the low coverage image job.
High Coverage Threshold:1

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 10 / 0.01%/step]

005 Specifies the threshold for the high coverage image to the drum lubrication mode handled
by the setting 1 (SP2-016-002).

76

System SP2xxx

High Coverage Threshold:2

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 20 / 0.01%/step]

006 Specifies the threshold for the high coverage image to the drum lubrication mode handled
by the setting 2 (SP2-016-003).
High Coverage Threshold:3

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 0.5 / 0.01%/step]

007 Specifies the threshold for the low coverage image to the drum lubrication mode handled
by the setting 3 (SP2-016-004).
008

009

010

011

012

013

014

Application Time:1

*ENG

[0 to 99 / 0 / 1 sec./step]

Specifies the execution time for the drum lubrication mode of the setting 1 (SP2-016-002).
Application Time:2

*ENG

[0 to 99 / 0 / 1 sec./step]

Specifies the execution time for the drum lubrication mode of the setting 2 (SP2-016-003).
Application Time:3

*ENG

[0 to 99 / 0 / 1 sec./step]

Specifies the execution time for the drum lubrication mode of the setting 3 (SP2-016-004).
Average Coverage:1:K

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 0.05 / 0.01%/step]

Displays the average coverage of black color for the setting 1.

Average Coverage:1:M

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 0.05 / 0.01%/step]

Displays the average coverage of magenta color for the setting 1.

Average Coverage:1:C

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 0.05 / 0.01%/step]

Displays the average coverage of cyan color for the setting 1.

Average Coverage:1:Y

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 0.05 / 0.01%/step]

Displays the average coverage of yellow color for the setting 1.

015 Average Coverage:2:K

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 0.05 / 0.01%/step]

016 Average Coverage:2:M

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 0.05 / 0.01%/step]

017 Average Coverage:2:C

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 0.05 / 0.01%/step]

018 Average Coverage:2:Y

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 0.05 / 0.01%/step]

019 Average Coverage:3:K

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 0.05 / 0.01%/step]

020 Average Coverage:3:M

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 0.05 / 0.01%/step]

77

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

021 Average Coverage:3:C

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 0.05 / 0.01%/step]

022 Average Coverage:3:Y

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 0.05 / 0.01%/step]

Mode Counter:K

*ENG

[0 to 999 / - / 1 page/step]

023

024

Displays the black print counter after the previous drum lubrication.
Mode Counter:CMY

*ENG

[0 to 999 / - / 1 page /step]

Displays the color print counter after the previous drum lubrication.
[Color Regist Adjust]

2101

These values are the parameters for the automatic line position adjustment and are adjusted
at the factory. However, you must input a value for SP2101-001 after replacing the laser
optics housing unit. For details, see "Laser Optics Housing Unit" in the "Replacement and
Adjustment" section. The value should be provided with the new laser optics housing unit.

001 Bk: Main Scan: Dot

*ENG

002 C Main Scan: Dot

*ENG

003 M Main Scan: Dot

*ENG

004 Y Main Scan: Dot

*ENG

013 Bk: Sub Scan: Line

*ENG

014 C: Sub Scan: Line

*ENG

015 M: Sub Scan: Line

*ENG

016 Y: Sub Scan: Line

*ENG

[512 to 511 / 0 / 1 dot/step]

[16384 to 16383 / 0 / 1 line/step]

[Magnification Adjust]
2102

78

These values are the parameters for the automatic line position adjustment and are adjusted
at the factory. These SPs must be input only when a new laser unit is installed.

System SP2xxx

001 Main Mag.: Bk:High Spd

*ENG

003 Main Mag.: Bk:Low Spd

*ENG

004 Main Mag.: C:High Spd

*ENG

006 Main Mag.: C:Low Spd

*ENG

007 Main Mag.: M:High Spd

*ENG

009 Main Mag.: M:Low Spd

*ENG

010 Main Mag.: Y:High Spd

*ENG

012 Main Mag.: Y:Low Spd

*ENG

2103

[0 to 560 / 280 / 1 /step]

[Erase Margin Adjust] (Area, Paper Size)

Adjusts the erase margin by deleting image data at the margins.

001 Lead Edge

*ENG

002 Trailing Edge

*ENG

003 Left

*ENG

004 Right

*ENG

006 Duplex Trail. L Size

*ENG

[0 to 4 / 1 / 0.1 mm/step]

007 Duplex Trail. M Size

*ENG

[0 to 4 / 0.8 / 0.1 mm/step]

008 Duplex Trail. S Size

*ENG

[0 to 4 / 0.6 / 0.1 mm/step]

009 Duplex Left Edge

*ENG

010 Duplex Right Edge

*ENG

011 Duplex Trail. L Size:Thick

*ENG

[0 to 4 / 1 / 0.1 mm/step]

012 Duplex Trail. M Size:Thick

*ENG

[0 to 4 / 0.8 / 0.1 mm/step]

013 Duplex Trail. S Size:Thick

*ENG

[0 to 4 / 0.6 / 0.1 mm/step]

014 Duplex Left Edge:Thick

*ENG

015 Duplex Right Edge:Thick

*ENG

[0 to 9.9 / 4.2 / 0.1 mm/step]

[0 to 9.9 / 2 / 0.1 mm/step]

[0 to 4 / 0.3 / 0.1 mm/step]

[0 to 4 / 0.3 / 0.1 mm/step]

79

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

2104

[LD Initial Power Adjust]

Adjusts the LD initial power. These SPs must be input only when a new laser unit is installed.

001 Bk

*ENG

002 C

*ENG

003 M

*ENG

004 Y

*ENG

[80 to 120 / 100 / 1 %/step]

[LD Power Adjust] DFU

(Process Speed, Color)
2105

Adjusts the LD power of each color for each process speed.

Each LD power setting is decided by process control.
High Speed: 120 mm/sec, Low Speed: 60 mm/sec

001 Bk: High Speed

002 C: High Speed

*ENG

003 M: High Speed

*ENG

[50 to 120 / 100 / 1%/step]

004 Y: High Speed

*ENG

009 Bk: Low Speed

*ENG

Decreasing a value makes lines thinner on

the output.

010 C: Low Speed

*ENG

011 M: Low Speed

*ENG

012 Y: Low Speed

*ENG

2106

Increasing a value makes lines thicker on the

output.

[Polygon Rotation Time] DFU

Adjusts the time of the polygon motor rotation.

001 Warming-Up

*ENG

[0 to 60 / 10 / 1 sec/step]

002 Job End

*ENG

[0 to 60 / 0 / 1 sec/step]

2107

80

*ENG

[Image Parameter]
DFU

System SP2xxx

001 Image Gamma Flag

*ENG

002 Shading Correction Flag

*ENG

2109

[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step]

[Test Pattern]
Generates the test pattern using "COPY Window" tab in the LCD.
Pattern Selection

[0 to 23 / 0 / 1/step]

0 None
1: Vertical Line (1dot)

12. Independent Pattern (2dot)

2: Vertical Line (2dot)

13. Independent Pattern (4dot)

3: Horizontal (1dot)

14. Trimming Area

4: Horizontal (2dot)

16: Hounds Tooth Check (Horizontal)

003 5: Grid Vertical Line

17: Band (Horizontal)

6: Grid Horizontal Line

18: Band (Vertical)

7: Grid pattern Small

19: Checker Flag Pattern

8: Grid pattern Large

20: Grayscale Vertical Margin

9: Argyle Pattern Small

21: Grayscale Horizontal Margin

10: Argyle Pattern Large

23: Full Dot Pattern

11. Independent Pattern (1dot)

Specifies the color for the test pattern.
005 Color Selection

[1 to 4 / 1 / 1/step]
1: All colors, 2: Magenta, 3: Yellow, 4: Cyan

006 Density: Bk

007 Density: C

[0 to 15 / 15 / 1 /step]

008 Density: M

0: Lightest density

009 Density: Y

2111

Specifies the color density for the test pattern.

15: Darkest density

[Line Pos. Ajust]

Executes the fine line position adjustment twice.

001 Execute: Mode a

If this SP is not completed (NG is displayed), do

SP2111-003 first and then try this SP again.

81

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

Executes the fine line position adjustment once.

002 Execute:Mode b

If this SP is not completed, do SP2111-003 first and

then try this SP again.
Executes the rough line position adjustment once.

003 Execute:Mode c

2112

After doing this SP, make sure to execute

SP2111-001 or -002. Otherwise, the line position
adjustment is not perfectly done.

[TM/P Sensor Test] ID Sensor Check FA

This SP is used to check the ID sensors at the factory.
The results of this SP are displayed in SP2140 to
SP2145.

001 Execute

[Skew Adjustment]
2117

Specifies a skew adjustment value for the skew motor M, C or Y.

These SPs must be used when a new laser optics housing unit is installed, see "Laser Optics
Housing Unit" in the "Replacement and Adjustment" section.

001 Pulse: C

*ENG

002 Pulse: M

*ENG

003 Pulse: Y

*ENG

2118

82

[Skew Adjustment]

001 Execute: C

*ENG

002 Execute: M

*ENG

003 Execute: Y

*ENG

2119

[75 to 75 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]

Changes the current skew adjustment values to the

values specified with SP2117.
These SPs must be used when a new laser optics
housing unit is installed. For details, see "Laser
Optics Housing Unit" in the "Replacement and
Adjustment" section.

[Skew Adjustment Display]

Displays the current skew adjustment value for each skew motor.

System SP2xxx

001 C

*ENG

002 M

*ENG

003 Y

*ENG

[75 to 75 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]

[P-Sensor Test]
2140

Displays the maximum result values of the ID sensor check.

Front, Center, Rear: ID sensors for the automatic line position adjustment and the process
control

001 PWM

*ENG

[TM-Sensor Test]
005 PWM: Front

*ENG

006 PWM: Center

*ENG

007 PWM: Rear

*ENG

[0 to 1024 / 0 / 1/step]

[P-Sensor Test]
2141

Displays the maximum result values of the ID sensor check.

Front, Center, Rear: ID sensors for the automatic line position adjustment and the process
control

001 Average

*ENG

[TM-Sensor Test]
005 Average: Front

*ENG

006 Average: Center

*ENG

007 Average: Rear

*ENG

[0 to 5.5 / 0 / 0.01V/step]

[P-Sensor Test]
2142

Displays the maximum result values of the ID sensor check.

Front, Center, Rear: ID sensors for the automatic line position adjustment and the process
control

83

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

001 Maximum

*ENG

[TM-Sensor Test]
005 Maximum: Front

*ENG

006 Maximum: Center

*ENG

007 Maximum: Rear

*ENG

[0 to 5.5 / 0 / 0.01V/step]

[P-Sensor Test]
2143

Displays the minimum result values of the ID sensor check.

Front, Center, Rear: ID sensors for the automatic line position adjustment and the process
control

001 Minimum

*ENG

[TM-Sensor Test]
005 Minimum: Front

*ENG

006 Minimum: Center

*ENG

007 Minimum: Rear

*ENG

[0 to 5.5 / 0 / 0.01V/step]

[P-Sensor Test]
2144

Displays the maximum result 2 values of the ID sensor check.

Front, Center, Rear: ID sensors for the automatic line position adjustment and the process
control

001 Maximum 2:

*ENG

[TM-Sensor Test]

84

005 Maximum 2: Front

*ENG

006 Maximum 2: Center

*ENG

007 Maximum 2: Rear

*ENG

[0 to 5.5 / 0 / 0.01V/step]

System SP2xxx

[P-Sensor Test]
2145

Displays the minimum result 2 values of the ID sensor check.

Front, Center, Rear: ID sensors for the automatic line position adjustment and the process
control

001 Minimum 2

*ENG

[TM-Sensor Test]
005 Minimum 2: Front

*ENG

006 Minimum 2: Center

*ENG

007 Minimum 2: Rear

*ENG

[0 to 5.5 / 0 / 0.01V/step]

[Area Mag. Correction] LD Pulse Area Correction (Color, Area) FA

2150

Adjusts the magnification for each area. The main scan (297 mm) is divided into 8 areas.
Area 1 is at the front side of the machine (left side of the image) and area 8 is at the rear
side of the machine (right side of the image).
Decreasing a value makes the image shift to the left side on the print.
Increasing a value makes the image shift to the right side on the print.
1 pulse = 1/16 dot

027 Bk: Area0

*ENG

[-256 to 255 / 0 / 1sub-dot/step]

028 Bk: Area1

*ENG

029 Bk: Area2

*ENG

030 Bk: Area3

*ENG

031 Bk: Area4

*ENG

Adjusts the area magnification for LD 0.

032 Bk: Area5

*ENG

[256 to 255 / 0 / 1 sub-dot/step ]

033 Bk: Area6

*ENG

034 Bk: Area7

*ENG

035 Bk: Area8

*ENG

079 C: Area0

*ENG

[-256 to 255 / 0 / 1sub-dot/step]

85

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

86

080 C: Area1

*ENG

081 C: Area2

*ENG

082 C: Area3

*ENG

083 C: Area4

*ENG

084 C: Area5

*ENG

085 C: Area6

*ENG

086 C: Area7

*ENG

087 C: Area8

*ENG

131 M: Area0

*ENG

132 M: Area1

*ENG

133 M: Area2

*ENG

134 M: Area3

*ENG

135 M: Area4

*ENG

Adjusts the area magnification for LD 0.

136 M: Area5

*ENG

[256 to 255 / 0 / 1 sub-dot/step]

137 M: Area6

*ENG

138 M: Area7

*ENG

139 M: Area8

*ENG

183 Y: Area0

*ENG

184 Y: Area1

*ENG

185 Y: Area2

*ENG

186 Y: Area3

*ENG

187 Y: Area4

*ENG

Adjusts the area magnification for LD 0.

188 Y: Area5

*ENG

[256 to 255 / 0 / 1 sub-dot/step]

189 Y: Area6

*ENG

190 Y: Area7

*ENG

191 Y: Area8

*ENG

Adjusts the area magnification for LD 0. [255 to

255 / 0 / 1 sub-dot/step]

[-256 to 255 / 0 / 1sub-dot/step]

[256 to 255 / 0 / 1 sub-dot/step]

System SP2xxx

[Shading Correct Setting] FA

Adjusts the area correction value for each LD power.
2152

The main scan is divided into 16 areas. However, the image areas are limited from area 1
to area 14.
For BK and Magenta, area 1 is at the rear side of the machine (left side of the image) and
area 14 is at the front side of the machine (right side of the image).
For Cyan and Yellow, area 1 is at the front side of the machine (right side of the image) and
area 14 is at the rear side of the machine (left side of the image).

001 Bk: Area 0

*ENG

002 Bk: Area 1

*ENG

003 Bk: Area 2

*ENG

004 Bk: Area 3

*ENG

005 Bk: Area 4

*ENG

006 Bk: Area 5

*ENG

007 Bk: Area 6

*ENG

008 Bk: Area 7

*ENG

009 Bk: Area 8

*ENG

010 Bk: Area 9

*ENG

011 Bk: Area 10

*ENG

012 Bk: Area 11

*ENG

013 Bk: Area 12

*ENG

014 Bk: Area 13

*ENG

015 Bk: Area 14

*ENG

016 Bk: Area 15

*ENG

This is for the synchronizing detection board.

[50 to 150 / 100 / 1 %/step]

This is out of the image area.

[50 to 150 / 100 / 1 %/step]

87

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

88

033 C: Area 0

*ENG

034 C: Area 1

*ENG

035 C: Area 2

*ENG

036 C: Area 3

*ENG

037 C: Area 4

*ENG

038 C: Area 5

*ENG

039 C: Area 6

*ENG

040 C: Area 7

*ENG

041 C: Area 8

*ENG

042 C: Area 9

*ENG

043 C: Area 10

*ENG

044 C: Area 11

*ENG

045 C: Area 12

*ENG

046 C: Area 13

*ENG

047 C: Area 14

*ENG

048 C: Area 15

*ENG

065 M: Area 0

*ENG

This is for the synchronizing detection board.

[50 to 150 / 100 / 1 %/step]

This is out of the image area.

[50 to 150 / 100 / 1 %/step]
This is for the synchronizing detection board.
[50 to 150 / 100 / 1 %/step]

System SP2xxx

066 M: Area 1

*ENG

067 M: Area 2

*ENG

068 M: Area 3

*ENG

069 M: Area 4

*ENG

070 M: Area 5

*ENG

071 M: Area 6

*ENG

072 M: Area 7

*ENG

073 M: Area 8

*ENG

074 M: Area 9

*ENG

075 M: Area 10

*ENG

076 M: Area 11

*ENG

077 M: Area 12

*ENG

078 M: Area 13

*ENG

079 M: Area 14

*ENG

080 M: Area 15

*ENG

097 Y: Area 0

*ENG

3
[50 to 150 / 100 / 1 %/step]

This is out of the image area.

[50 to 150 / 100 / 1 %/step]
This is for the synchronizing detection board.
[50 to 150 / 100 / 1 %/step]

89

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

098 Y: Area 1

*ENG

099 Y: Area 2

*ENG

100 Y: Area 3

*ENG

101 Y: Area 4

*ENG

102 Y: Area 5

*ENG

103 Y: Area 6

*ENG

104 Y: Area 7

*ENG

105 Y: Area 8

*ENG

106 Y: Area 9

*ENG

107 Y: Area 10

*ENG

108 Y: Area 11

*ENG

109 Y: Area 12

*ENG

110 Y: Area 13

*ENG

111 Y: Area 14

*ENG

112 Y: Area 15

*ENG

2160

90

[50 to 150 / 100 / 1 %/step]

This is out of the image area.

[Vertical Line Width] DFU

001 600dpi:Bk

*ENG

002 600dpi:C

*ENG

003 600dpi:M

*ENG

004 600dpi:Y

*ENG

005 1200dpi:Bk

*ENG

006 1200dpi:C

*ENG

007 1200dpi:M

*ENG

008 1200dpi:Y

*ENG

[10 to 15 / 15 / 1 /step]

System SP2xxx

009 600dpi:Indet.:Bk

*ENG

010 1200dpi:Indet.:Bk

*ENG

600dpi:Multivalued:Bk
011
(2bit)

*ENG

2180

[10 to 15 / 15 / 1 /step]

[Line Pos. Adj. Clear] DFU

001 Color Regist.

003 MUSIC Result

004 Area Mag. Correction

2181

[Line Pos. Adj. Result] DFU

Displays the values for each correction.
"Paper Int. Mag: Subdot" indicates the magnification correction value between two
sheets of paper.
"Mag.Cor. Subdot" indicates the magnification correction value.
"M. Scan Erro." indicates the shift correction value in the main scan direction.
"S. Scan Erro." Indicates the shift correction value in the sub scan direction.
"M. Cor.: Dot" indicates the dot correction value in the main scan direction.
"M. Cor.: Subdot" indicates the sub dot correction value in the main scan direction.
Bk: Black, M: Magenta, C: Cyan, Y: Yellow

001 Paper Int. Mag: Subdot: Bk

*ENG

[32768 to 32767 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]

002 Mag.Cor. Subdot: Bk

*ENG

[32768 to 32767 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]

91

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

92

003 Skew: C

*ENG

004 Bent: C

*ENG

005 M. Scan Shift: Left: C

*ENG

006 M. Scan Shift: Center: C

*ENG

007 M. Scan Shift: RIght: C

*ENG

008 S. Scan Shift: Left: C

*ENG

009 S. Scan Shift: Center: C

*ENG

010 S. Scan Shift: RIght: C

*ENG

011 M. Cor.: Dot: C

*ENG

[512 to 511 / 0 / 1 dot/step]

012 M. Cor.: Subdot: C

*ENG

[15 to 15 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]

013 Paper Int. Mag: Subdot: C

*ENG

014 Mag.Cor. Subdot: C

*ENG

015 M. Left Mag.: Subdot: C

*ENG

016 M. Right Mag.: Subdot: C

*ENG

017 S. Cor.: 600 Line: C

*ENG

[16384 to 16383 / 0 / 1 line/step]

018 S. Cor.: 600 Subdot: C

*ENG

[1 to 1 / 0 / 0.001 line/step]

019 S. Cor.: 1200 Line: C

*ENG

[16384 to 16383 / 0 / 1 line/step]

020 S. Cor.: 1200 Subdot: C

*ENG

[1 to 1 / 0 / 0.001 line/step]

021 Skew: M

*ENG

022 Bent: M

*ENG

023 M. Scan Shift: Left: M

*ENG

024 M. Scan Shift: Center: M

*ENG

025 M. Scan Shift: Right: M

*ENG

026 S. Scan Shift: Left: M

*ENG

027 S. Scan Shift: Center: M

*ENG

028 S. Scan Shift: Right: M

*ENG

[5000 to 5000 / 0 / 0.001 m/step]

[32768 to 32767 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]

[5000 to 5000 / 0 / 0.001 m/step]

System SP2xxx

029 M. Cor.: Dot: M

*ENG

[512 to 511 / 0 / 1 dot/step]

030 M. Cor.: Subdot: M

*ENG

[15 to 15 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]

031 Paper Int. Mag: Subdot: M

*ENG

032 Mag.Cor. Subdot: M

*ENG

033 M. Left Mag.: Subdot: M

*ENG

034 M. Right Mag.: Subdot: M

*ENG

035 S. Cor.: 600 Line: M

*ENG

[16384 to 16383 / 0 / 1 line/step]

036 S. Cor.: 600 Subdot: M

*ENG

[1 to 1 / 0 / 0.001 line/step]

037 S. Cor.: 1200 Line: M

*ENG

[16384 to 16383 / 0 / 1 line/step]

038 S. Cor.: 1200 Subdot: M

*ENG

[1 to 1 / 0 / 0.001 line/step]

039 Skew: Y

*ENG

040 Bent: Y

*ENG

041 M. Scan Shift: Left: Y

*ENG

042 M. Scan Shift: Center: Y

*ENG

043 M. Scan Shift: Right: Y

*ENG

044 S. Scan Shift: Left: Y

*ENG

045 S. Scan Shift: Center: Y

*ENG

046 S. Scan Shift: Right: Y

*ENG

047 M. Cor.: Dot: Y

*ENG

[512 to 511 / 0 / 1 dot/step]

048 M. Cor.: Subdot: Y

*ENG

[15 to 15 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]

049 Paper Int. Mag: Subdot: Y

*ENG

050 Mag.Cor. Subdot: Y

*ENG

051 M. Left Mag.: Subdot: Y

*ENG

052 M. Right Mag.: Subdot: Y

*ENG

053 S. Cor.: 600 Line: Y

*ENG

[16384 to 16383 / 0 / 1 line/step]

054 S. Cor.: 600 Subdot: Y

*ENG

[1 to 1 / 0 / 0.001 line/step]

[32768 to 32767 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]

[5000 to 5000 / 0 / 0.001 m/step]

[32768 to 32767 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]

93

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

055 S. Cor.: 1200 Line: Y

*ENG

[16384 to 16383 / 0 / 1 line/step]

056 S. Cor.: 1200 Subdot: Y

*ENG

[1 to 1 / 0 / 0.001 line/step]

057 S. Cor.: 600 Subdot

*ENG

[1 to 1 / 0 / 0.001 line/step]

058 Drum Cor.:600:Subdot

*ENG

[7 to 7 / 0 / 1 /step]

059 S. Cor.:1200 Subdot

*ENG

[1 to 1 / 0 / 0.001 line/step]

060 Drum Cor.:1200:Subdot

*ENG

[7 to 7 / 0 / 1 /step]

[Line Pos. Adj. Offset] DFU

2182

(Color) M. Scan: Main scan, S. Scan: Sub-scan

High / Medium: 120 mm/sec, Low: 60 mm/sec

001 C Magnification

*ENG

002 M Magnification

*ENG

003 Y Magnification

*ENG

Adjusts the line position manually.

[-1 to 1 / 0 / 0.001%/step]
When line shifts are not corrected by the
automatic line position adjustment, do
this SP.
Increasing a value reduces the image in
the main scan direction.
Decreasing a value enlarges the image
in the main scan direction.

94

004 M. Scan: High: Dot: C

*ENG

[-512 to 511 / 0 / 1 dot/step]

005 M. Scan: High: Subdot: C

*ENG

[-15 to 15 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]

008 M. Scan: Low: Dot: C

*ENG

[-512 to 511 / 0 / 1 dot/step]

009 M. Scan: Low: Subdot: C

*ENG

[-15 to 15 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]

010 M. Scan: High: Dot: M

*ENG

[-512 to 511 / 0 / 1 dot/step]

011 M. Scan: High: Subdot: M

*ENG

[-15 to 15 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]

014 M. Scan: Low: Dot: M

*ENG

[-512 to 511 / 0 / 1 dot/step]

015 M. Scan: Low: Subdot: M

*ENG

[-15 to 15 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]

016 M. Scan: High: Dot: Y

*ENG

[-512 to 511 / 0 / 1 dot/step]

017 M. Scan: High: Subdot: Y

*ENG

[-15 to 15 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]

System SP2xxx

020 M. Scan: Low: Dot: Y

*ENG

[-512 to 511 / 0 / 1 dot/step]

021 M. Scan: Low: Subdot: Y

*ENG

[-15 to 15 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]

022 S. Scan: High: Dot: C

*ENG

[-16384 to 16383 / 0 / 1 line]

023 S. Scan: High: Subdot: C

*ENG

[1 to 1 / 0 / 0.001 /line]

026 S. Scan: Low: Dot: C

*ENG

[-16384 to 16383 / 0 / 1 line]

027 S. Scan: Low: Subdot: C

*ENG

[1 to 1 / 0 / 0.001 /line]

028 S. Scan: High: Dot: M

*ENG

[-16384 to 16383 / 0 / 1 line]

029 S. Scan: High: Subdot: M

*ENG

[1 to 1 / 0 / 0.001 /line]

032 S. Scan: Low: Dot: M

*ENG

[-16384 to 16383 / 0 / 1 line]

033 S. Scan: Low: Subdot: M

*ENG

[1 to 1 / 0 / 0.001 /line]

034 S. Scan: High: Dot: Y

*ENG

[-16384 to 16383 / 0 / 1 line]

035 S. Scan: High: Subdot: Y

*ENG

[1 to 1 / 0 / 0.001 /line]

038 S. Scan: Low: Dot: Y

*ENG

[-16384 to 16383 / 0 / 1 line]

039 S. Scan: Low: Subdot: Y

*ENG

[1 to 1 / 0 / 0.001 /line]

040 C:Skew

*ENG

041 M:Skew

*ENG

042 Y:Skew

*ENG

2190

[-50 to 50 / 0 / 1 m]

[Line Pos. Adj. Mode] DFU

001 Paper Int. Mag.: Subdot: Bk

*ENG

002 Paper Int. Mag.: Subdot: C

*ENG

003 Paper Int. Mag.: Subdot: M

*ENG

004 Paper Int. Mag.: Subdot: Y

*ENG

005 M. Scan Mag.: Subdot: C

*ENG

006 M. Scan Mag.: Subdot: M

*ENG

007 M. Scan Mag.: Subdot: Y

*ENG

[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 boolean/step]

[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 boolean /step]
0: Disable correction
1: Enable correction

95

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

008 Area Mag.: Subdot: C

*ENG

009 Area Mag.: Subdot: M

*ENG

010 Area Mag.: Subdot: Y

*ENG

[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 boolean /step]

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 boolean /step]

011 S. Scan Cor. Setting

*ENG

012 Detection Error Level

*ENG

0: Adjusted with Bk
1: Adjusted in minimum shift among four
colors
[0 to 3500 / 200 / 1 m/step]

[MUSIC Coeff Setting] DFU

2191

Position Adjustment: Coefficient Setting

ch 0: ID sensor at rear, ch 1: ID sensor at center, ch 2: ID sensor at front

96

001 ch 0: Filter: Front: a1

*ENG

[131071 to 131071 / 125869 / 1 bit/step]

002 ch 0: Filter: Front: a2

*ENG

[131071 to 131071 / 60488 / 1 bit/step]

003 ch 0: Filter: Front: b0

*ENG

[131071 to 131071 / 39 / 1 bit/step]

004 ch 0: Filter: Front: b1

*ENG

[131071 to 131071 / 77 / 1 bit/step]

005 ch 0: Filter: Front: b2

*ENG

[131071 to 131071 / 39 / 1 bit/step]

006 ch 0: Filter: Rear: a1

*ENG

[131071 to 131071 / 128596 / 1 bit/step]

007 ch 0: Filter: Rear: a2

*ENG

[131071 to 131071 / 63398 / 1 bit/step]

008 ch 0: Filter: Rear: b0

*ENG

[131071 to 131071 / 84 / 1 bit/step]

009 ch 0: Filter: Rear: b1

*ENG

[131071 to 131071 / 168 / 1 bit/step]

010 ch 0: Filter: Rear: b2

*ENG

[131071 to 131071 / 84 / 1 bit/step]

011 ch 1: Filter: Front: a1

*ENG

[131071 to 131071 / 125869 / 1 bit/step]

012 ch 1: Filter: Front: a2

*ENG

[131071 to 131071 / 60488 / 1 bit/step]

013 ch 1: Filter: Front: b0

*ENG

[131071 to 131071 / 39 / 1 bit/step]

014 ch 1: Filter: Front: b1

*ENG

[131071 to 131071 / 77 / 1 bit/step]

015 ch 1: Filter: Front: b2

*ENG

[131071 to 131071 / 39 / 1 bit/step]

System SP2xxx

016 ch 1: Filter: Rear: a1

*ENG

[131071 to 131071 / 128596 / 1 bit/step]

017 ch 1: Filter: Rear: a2

*ENG

[131071 to 131071 / 63398 / 1 bit/step]

018 ch 1: Filter: Rear: b0

*ENG

[131071 to 131071 / 84 / 1 bit/step]

019 ch 1: Filter: Rear: b1

*ENG

[131071 to 131071 / 168 / 1 bit/step]

020 ch 1: Filter: Rear: b2

*ENG

[131071 to 131071 / 84 / 1 bit/step]

021 ch 2: Filter: Front: a1

*ENG

[131071 to 131071 / 125869 / 1 bit/step]

022 ch 2: Filter: Front: a2

*ENG

[131071 to 131071 / 60488 / 1 bit/step]

023 ch 2: Filter: Front: b0

*ENG

[131071 to 131071 / 39 / 1 bit/step]

024 ch 2: Filter: Front: b1

*ENG

[131071 to 131071 / 77 / 1 bit/step]

025 ch 2: Filter: Front: b2

*ENG

[131071 to 131071 / 39 / 1 bit/step]

026 ch 2: Filter: Rear: a1

*ENG

[131071 to 131071 / 128596 / 1 bit/step]

027 ch 2: Filter: Rear: a2

*ENG

[131071 to 131071 / 63398 / 1 bit/step]

028 ch 2: Filter: Rear: b0

*ENG

[131071 to 131071 / 84 / 1 bit/step]

029 ch 2: Filter: Rear: b1

*ENG

[131071 to 131071 / 168 / 1 bit/step]

030 ch 2: Filter: Rear: b2

*ENG

[131071 to 131071 / 84 / 1 bit/step]

031 Q Format Selection

*ENG

[0 to 3 / 3 / 1/step]

[MUSIC Coeff Setting] DFU

2192

Line Position Adjustment: Threshold Setting

ch 0: ID sensor at rear, ch 1: ID sensor at center, ch 2: ID sensor at front

97

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

001 ch 0: 1st

*ENG

002 ch 0: 2nd

*ENG

003 ch 0: 3rd

*ENG

004 ch 0: 4th

*ENG

005 ch 1: 1st

*ENG

006 ch 1: 2nd

*ENG

007 ch 1: 3rd

*ENG

008 ch 1: 4th

*ENG

009 ch 2: 1st

*ENG

010 ch 2: 2nd

*ENG

011 ch 2: 3rd

*ENG

012 ch 2: 4th

*ENG

2193

001

[0.5 to 3 / 1.4 / 0.1 V/step]

[MUSIC Condition] DFU

Line Position Adjustment: Condition Setting
Auto Execution

*ENG

[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 ] 0: OFF, 1: ON

Enables/disables the automatic line position adjustment.

Page: Job End: BW+FC

*ENG

[0 to 999 / 200 / 1 page/step]

002 Adjusts the threshold of the line position adjustment for BW and color printing mode after
job end.
003

Page: Job End: FC

*ENG

[0 to 999 / 200 / 1 page/step]

Adjusts the threshold of the line position adjustment for color printing mode after job end.
Page: Interrupt: BW+FC

*ENG

[0 to 999 / 300 / 1 page/step]

004 Adjusts the threshold of the line position adjustment for BW and color printing mode during
job.
005

98

Page: Interrupt: FC

*ENG

[0 to 999 / 300 / 1 page/step]

Adjusts the threshold of the line position adjustment for color printing mode during jobs.

System SP2xxx

Page: Standby: BW + FC

*ENG

[0 to 999 / 100 / 1 page/step]

Adjusts the threshold of the line position adjustment for BW printing mode in stand-by mode.
006 The line position adjustment is done when the number of outputs in BW printing mode reaches
the value specified with this SP and the condition of SP2-193-008 or SP2-193-009 is
satisfied.
Page: Standby: FC

*ENG

[0 to 999 / 100 / 1 page/step]

Adjusts the threshold of the line position adjustment for BW printing mode in stand-by mode.
007 The line position adjustment is done when the number of outputs in color printing mode
reaches the value specified with this SP and the condition of SP2-193-008 or SP2-193-009
is satisfied.
Temp Change

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 5 / 1deg/step]

008 Adjust the temperature change threshold for the line position adjustment (Mode b: adjustment
once). The timing for line position adjustment depends on the combinations of several
conditions. Section Descriptions" section.
Elapse Time

*ENG

[1 to 1440 / 300 / 1 minute/step]

009 Adjust the time threshold for the line position adjustment (Mode b: adjustment once). The
timing for line position adjustment depends on the combinations of several conditions.
Temp Change 2

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 10 / 1deg/step]

011 Adjust the temperature change threshold for the line position adjustment (Mode a: adjustment
twice). The timing for line position adjustment depends on the combinations of several
conditions.
016 Page: Power ON:BW+FC
2194

*ENG

[0 to 999 / 200 / 1 page/step]

[MUSIC Exe Result] Line Position Adjustment: Execution Result

001 Year

*ENG

[0 to 99 / 0 / 1 year/step]

002 Month

*ENG

[1 to 12 / 1 / 1 month/step]

003 Date

*ENG

[1 to 31 / 1 / 1 day/step]

004 Hour

*ENG

[0 to 23 / 0 / 1 hour/step]

005 Minute

*ENG

[0 to 59 / 0 / 1 minute/step]

006 Temperature

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 0 / 1 deg/step]

99

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]

007 Execution Result

*ENG

008 Number of Execution

*ENG

[0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 times/step]

009 Number of Failure

*ENG

[0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 times/step]

010 Error Counter: C

*ENG

[0 to 9 / 0 / 1 /step]

011 Error Counter: M

*ENG

0: Completed successfully, 1: Failed

0: Not done
1: Completed successfully
2: Cannot detect patterns

012 Error Counter: Y

*ENG

3: Fewer lines on the pattern than the target

4: Out of the adjustment range
5 to 9: Not used

2197

[MUSIC Exe Time]

DFU

001 Execution Time

*ENG

[10 to 40 / 20 / 10 ms/step]

002 TM Sensor Position

*ENG

[48.2 to 500 / 48.2 / 0.1mm/step]

*ENG

[7.5 to 20 / 10 / 0.1 s/step]

*ENG

[0.1 to 9.9 / 4 / 0.1 sec /step]

2198

[Music A/D Interval] DFU

001 ADC Trigger

2199

[Music Time Setting] DFU

001 Error Time Set

[Skew Origin Set]
2220

Resets the value of the skew adjustment motor for each color.
These SPs must be executed when a new laser optics housing unit is installed. For details,
see "Laser Unit" in the "Replacement and Adjustment" section.

100

001 C:Skew Motor

*ENG

002 M:Skew Motor

*ENG

003 Y:Skew Motor

*ENG

System SP2xxx

[LD Power: Fixed] DFU

2221

Adjusts the fixed LD power for each line speed and color.
These SPs are activated only when SP3-041-002 is set to "0".
Normal: 120 mm/sec, Low: 60 mm/sec

001 Bk:Normal Spd

*ENG

002 C:Normal Spd

*ENG

003 M:Normal Spd

*ENG

004 Y:Normal Spd

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1%/step]

009 Bk:Low Spd

*ENG

Increasing this value makes the image

density darker.

010 C:Low Spd

*ENG

011 M:Low Spd

*ENG

012 Y:Low Spd

*ENG

[Dev. DC Bias:Fixed] DFU

Development DC Bias Adjustment
Adjusts the development bias.
2229

Development bias is automatically adjusted during process control; therefore, adjusting these
settings has no effect while Process Control (SP3-041-001 Default: ON) is activated.
After deactivating Process Control with SP3-041-001, the values in these SP modes are used
for printing.
Normal: 120 mm/sec, Low: 60 mm/sec

101

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

001 Plain: Bk

*ENG

002 Plain: M

*ENG

003 Plain: C

*ENG

004 Plain: Y

*ENG

009 Thick 2: Bk

*ENG

010 Thick 2: M

*ENG

011 Thick 2: C

*ENG

012 Thick 2: Y

*ENG

2241

[0 to 800 / 450 / 10 V/step]

[Ambient Temp/Hum:Display]
Displays the environment temperature and humidity.

001 Temperature

[5 to 45 / - / 0.1deg/step]

002 Relative Humidity

[0 to 100 / - / 0.1 %RH/step]

003 Absolute Humidity

[0 to 100 / - / 0.1 g/m3/step]

2302

[Env. Correct:Transfer] DFU

Environmental Correction: Image Transfer Belt Unit
Forced Setting

*ENG

[0 to 6 / 0 / 1 /step]

Sets the environment condition manually.

0: Automatic environment control
1: LL (Low temperature/ Low humidity)
002 2: ML (Middle temperature/ Low humidity)
3: MM (Middle temperature/ Middle humidity)
4: MH (Middle temperature/ High humidity)
5: HH (High temperature/ High humidity)
6: SLL (Super low temperature/ low humidity)
003

102

Absolute Humidity: Threshold 1

*ENG

Adjusts the threshold value between LL and ML.

[0 to 100 / 4 / 0.01 g/m3/step]

System SP2xxx

004

005

006

Absolute Humidity: Threshold 2

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 8 / 0.01 g/m3/step]

Adjusts the threshold value between ML and MM.

Absolute Humidity: Threshold 3

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 16 / 0.01 g/m3/step]

Adjusts the threshold value between MM and MH.

Absolute Humidity: Threshold 4

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 24 / 0.01 g/m3/step]

Adjusts the threshold value between MH and HH.

Temperature:Threshold

*ENG

[5 to 30 / 5 / 1 deg/step]

007 Adjusts the threshold temperature for SLL. If detected temperature is less than a value specified
by this SP, SLL condition is determined regardless of humidity.

2308

[Paper Size Correction] DFU

Adjusts the threshold value for the paper size correction.
[0 to 350 / 290 / 1 mm/step]

001 Threshold 1

*ENG

Threshold 1 < paper:

Paper is detected as "S1" size.
[0 to 350 / 250 / 1 mm/step]

002 Threshold 2

*ENG

Threshold 2 < paper < Threshold 1:

Paper is detected as "S2" size.
[0 to 350 / 194 / 1 mm/step]

003 Threshold 3

*ENG

Threshold 3 < paper < Threshold 2:

Paper is detected as "S3" size.
[0 to 350 / 150 / 1 mm/step]
Threshold 4 < paper < Threshold 3:

004 Threshold 4

*ENG

Paper is detected as "S4" size.

Paper < Threshold 4:
Paper is detected as "S5" size.

2311

[Non Image Area: Bias] DFU

103

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

001 Image Transfer

*ENG

Adjusts the bias of the image transfer belt between

images. This value is added to the value of the
image transfer belt bias.
[10 to 250 / 100 / 5 %/step]

002 Paper Transfer

*ENG

Adjusts the bias of the paper transfer roller between

images.
[0 to 2100 / 0 / 100V/step]

2316
001

2326

001

[Power ON:Bias] DFU

Image Transfer

*ENG

[0 to 60 / 5 / 1 A /step]

Adjusts the bias of the image transfer roller at power-on or a closed cover.
[Transfer Roller CL: Bias] DFU
Transfer Roller Cleaning: Bias Adjustment
Positive:befor and after JOB

*ENG

[0 to 2100 / 250 / 10 V /step]

Adjusts the positive voltage of the paper transfer roller for cleaning the paper transfer roller.

Negative:befor and after

002 JOB

*ENG

[10 to 400 / 100 / 10 %/step]

Adjusts the negative current of the paper transfer roller for cleaning the paper transfer roller.
Positive:after JAM

*ENG

[0 to 2100 / 2000 / 10 V/step]

003 Adjusts the negative current limit of the paper transfer roller for cleaning the paper transfer
roller.
004 Negative:after JAM

*ENG

[10 to 400 / 100 / 10 %/step]

[Common: BW: Bias]

2351

Image Transfer Belt: B/W: Bias Adjustment

Normal: 120 mm/sec, Low: 60 mm/sec

001

104

Image Transfer:Normal Speed

*ENG

[0 to 60 / 25 / 1 A]

Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt in B/W mode for plain paper.

System SP2xxx

003

Image Transfer:Low Speed

*ENG

[0 to 60 / 13 / 1 A]

Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt in B/W mode for thick 1 paper.
[Common: FC: Bias] DFU

2357

Image Transfer Belt: Full Color: Bias Adjustment

Normal: 120 mm/sec, Low: 60 mm/sec

001

002

003

004

009

010

011

012

2360

Image Transfer: Normal Spd:Bk

*ENG

[0 to 60 / 23 / 1 A]

Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Black in full color mode for plain paper.
Image Transfer:: Normal Spd:C

*ENG

[0 to 60 / 22 / 1 A]

Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Magenta in full color mode for plain paper.
Image Transfer: Normal Spd:M

*ENG

[0 to 60 / 25 / 1 A]

Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Cyan in full color mode for plain paper.
Image Transfer: Normal Spd:Y

*ENG

[0 to 60 / 29 / 1 A]

Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Yellow in full color mode for plain paper.
Image Transfer: Low Speed:Bk

*ENG

[0 to 60 / 13 / 1 A]

Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Black in full color mode for thick 1 paper.
Image Transfer: Low Speed:C

*ENG

[0 to 60 / 12 / 1 A]

Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Magenta in full color mode for thick 1 paper.
Image Transfer: Low Speed:M

*ENG

[0 to 60 / 13 / 1 A]

Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Cyan in full color mode for thick 1 paper.
Image Transfer: Low Speed:Y

*ENG

[0 to 60 / 14 / 1 A]

Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Yellow in full color mode for thick 1 paper.
[Common: BW Env. Correction Table] DFU

001 Image Transfer: Normal

*ENG

[1 to 50 / 42 / 1 /step]

003 Image Transfer: Low

*ENG

[1 to 50 / 38 / 1 /step]

[Common: FC Env. Correction Table] DFU

105

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

004 Image Transfer: Normal Spd:BK

*ENG

[1 to 50 / 25 / 1 /step]

005 Image Transfer: Normal Spd: C

*ENG

[1 to 50 / 46 / 1 /step]

006 Image Transfer: Normal Spd:M

*ENG

[1 to 50 / 43 / 1 /step]

007 Image Transfer:: Normal Spd:Y

*ENG

[1 to 50 / 45 / 1 /step]

012 Image Transfer: Low Speed:Bk

*ENG

[1 to 50 / 26 / 1 /step]

013 Image Transfer: Low Speed:C

*ENG

014 Image Transfer: Low Speed:M

*ENG

015 Image Transfer: Low Speed:Y

*ENG

[1 to 50 / 38 / 1 /step]
[1 to 50 / 45 / 1 /step]

[Plain: Bias: BW]

2403

Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for plain paper in black-and-white mode.
Normal: 120 mm/sec, Low: 60mm/sec

001 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 20 / 1 A /step]

002 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 23 / 1 A /step]

003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st

*ENG

004 Paper Transfer: Low: 2nd

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 12 / 1 A /step]

[Plain: Bias: FC]

2407

Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for plain paper in full color mode.
Normal: 120 mm/sec, Low: 60mm/sec

106

001 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 23 / 1 A /step]

002 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 28 / 1 A /step]

003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 13 / 1 A /step]

004 Paper Transfer: Low: 2nd

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 14 / 1 A /step]

System SP2xxx

[Plain-T:SizeCorrect:BW]
2411

Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for each paper size.
SP2403 and SP2407 are multiplied by these SP values.
Normal: 120 mm/sec, Low: 60mm/sec

001 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: S1

*ENG

002 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S1

*ENG

[100 to 4000 / 100 / 5%/step]

003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st: S1

*ENG

S1 size > 290 mm (Paper width)

004 Paper Transfer: Low: 2nd: S1

*ENG

[100 to 4000 / 140 / 5%/step]

005 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: S2

*ENG

290 mm > S2 size > 250 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 165 / 5%/step]

006 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S2

*ENG

290 mm > S2 size > 250 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 150 / 5%/step]

007 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st: S2

*ENG

290 mm > S2 size > 250 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 190 / 5%/step]

008 Paper Transfer: Low : 2nd:S2

*ENG

290 mm > S2 size > 250 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 175 / 5%/step]

009 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: S3

*ENG

010 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S3

*ENG

250 mm > S3 size > 194 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 230 / 5%/step]
250 mm > S3 size > 194 mm (Paper
width)
[100 to 4000 / 190 / 5%/step]

011 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st: S3

*ENG

250 mm > S3 size > 194 mm (Paper

width)

107

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

[100 to 4000 / 290 / 5%/step]

012 Paper Transfer: Low 2nd:S3

*ENG

013 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: S4

*ENG

250 mm > S3 size > 194 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 190 / 5%/step]

194 mm > S4 size > 150 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 285 / 5%/step]

014 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S4

*ENG

194 mm > S4 size > 150 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 210 / 5%/step]

015 PaperTransfer: Low:1st:S4

*ENG

194 mm > S4 size > 150 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 360 / 5%/step]

016 Paper Transfer: Low 2nd: S4

*ENG

017 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: S5

*ENG

018 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S5

*ENG

019 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st: S5

*ENG

020 Paper Transfer: Low 2nd: S5

*ENG

194 mm > S4 size > 150 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 200 / 5%/step]
150 mm > S5 size (Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 340 / 5%/step]
150 mm > S5 size (Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 210 / 5%/step]
150 mm > S5 size (Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 420 / 5%/step]
150 mm > S5 size (Paper width)

[Plain-T:SizeCorrect:FC]
2412

Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for each paper size.
SP2403 and SP2407 are multiplied by these SP values.
Normal: 120 mm/sec, Low: 60mm/sec

108

System SP2xxx

001 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: S1

*ENG

002 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S1

*ENG

[100 to 4000 / 100 / 5%/step]

003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st: S1

*ENG

S1 size > 290 mm (Paper width)

004 Paper Transfer: Low: 2nd: S1

*ENG
[100 to 4000 / 130 / 5%/step]

005 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: S2

*ENG

290 mm > S2 size > 250 mm (Paper

width)

[100 to 4000 / 160 / 5%/step]

006 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S2

*ENG

290 mm > S2 size > 250 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 140 / 5%/step]

007 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st: S2

*ENG

290 mm > S2 size > 250 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 215 / 5%/step]

008 Paper Transfer: Low : 2nd:S2

*ENG

290 mm > S2 size > 250 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 160 / 5%/step]

009 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: S3

*ENG

010 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S3

*ENG

250 mm > S3 size > 194 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 215 / 5%/step]
250 mm > S3 size > 194 mm (Paper
width)
[100 to 4000 / 175 / 5%/step]

011 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st: S3

*ENG

250 mm > S3 size > 194 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 320 / 5%/step]

012 Paper Transfer: Low 2nd:S3

*ENG

250 mm > S3 size > 194 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 190 / 5%/step]

013 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: S4

*ENG

194 mm > S4 size > 150 mm (Paper

width)

109

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

[100 to 4000 / 285 / 5%/step]

014 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S4

*ENG

015 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st: S4

*ENG

194 mm > S4 size > 150 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 190 / 5%/step]

194 mm > S4 size > 150 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 465 / 5%/step]

016 Paper Transfer: Low: 2st Side: S4

*ENG

017 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: S5

*ENG

018 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S5

*ENG

019 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st: S5

*ENG

020 Paper Transfer: Low 2nd: S5

*ENG

194 mm > S4 size > 150 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 220 / 5%/step]
150 mm > S5 size (Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 355 / 5%/step]
150 mm > S5 size (Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 230 / 5%/step]
150 mm > S5 size (Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 565 / 5%/step]
150 mm > S5 size (Paper width)

[Pain-T:Size-Env.Correct:BW] DFU
2413

Adjusts the size correction coefficient table for the paper transfer roller current for each paper
size. SP2403 and SP2407 are multiplied by these SP values.
Normal: 120 mm/sec, Low: 60 mm/sec

001 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: S1

*ENG

002 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S1

*ENG

[1 to 50 / 30 / 1/step]

003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st: S1

*ENG

S1 size > 290 mm (Paper width)

004 Paper Transfer: Low: 2nd: S1

*ENG
[1 to 50 / 23 / 1/step]

005 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: S2

110

*ENG

290 mm > S2 size > 250 mm

(Paper width)

System SP2xxx

[1 to 50 / 9 / 1/step]
006 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S2

*ENG

007 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st: S2

*ENG

290 mm > S2 size > 250 mm

(Paper width)
[1 to 50 / 34 / 1/step]
290 mm > S2 size > 250 mm
(Paper width)
[1 to 50 / 26 / 1/step]

008 Paper Transfer: Low : 2nd:S2

*ENG

290 mm > S2 size > 250 mm

(Paper width)

[1 to 50 / 10 / 1/step]
009 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: S3

*ENG

250 mm > S3 size > 194 mm

(Paper width)
[1 to 50 / 15 / 1/step]

010 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S3

*ENG

250 mm > S3 size > 194 mm

(Paper width)
[1 to 50 / 12 / 1/step]

011 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st: S3

*ENG

250 mm > S3 size > 194 mm

(Paper width)
[1 to 50 / 13 / 1/step]

012 Paper Transfer: Low 2nd:S3

*ENG

250 mm > S3 size > 194 mm

(Paper width)
[1 to 50 / 10 / 1/step]

013 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: S4

*ENG

194 mm > S4 size > 150 mm

(Paper width)
[1 to 50 / 15 / 1/step]

014 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S4

*ENG

015 Paper Transfer: LowSpeed: 1st Side: S4

*ENG

194 mm > S4 size > 150 mm

(Paper width)
[1 to 50 / 35 / 1/step]
194 mm > S4 size > 150 mm
(Paper width)

111

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

[1 to 50 / 13 / 1/step]

016 Paper Transfer: Low: 2nd Side: S4

*ENG

017 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: S5

*ENG

018 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S5

*ENG

019 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st: S5

*ENG

020 Paper Transfer: Low 2nd: S5

*ENG

194 mm > S4 size > 150 mm

(Paper width)
[1 to 50 / 29 / 1/step]
150 mm > S5 size (Paper width)
[1 to 50 / 15 / 1/step]
150 mm > S5 size (Paper width)
[1 to 50 / 41 / 1/step]
150 mm > S5 size (Paper width)
[1 to 50 / 13 / 1/step]
150 mm > S5 size (Paper width)

[Pain-T:Size-Env.Correct:FC] DFU
2414

Adjusts the size correction coefficient table for the paper transfer roller current for each paper
size. SP2403 and SP2407 are multiplied by these SP values.
Normal: 120 mm/sec, Low: 60 mm/sec

001 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: S1

*ENG

002 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S1

*ENG

[1 to 50 / 30 / 1/step]

003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st: S1

*ENG

S1 size > 290 mm (Paper width)

004 Paper Transfer: Low: 2nd: S1

*ENG
[1 to 50 / 37 / 1/step]

005 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: S2

*ENG

290 mm > S2 size > 250 mm (Paper

width)
[1 to 50 / 16 / 1/step]

006 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S2

*ENG

290 mm > S2 size > 250 mm (Paper

width)
[1 to 50 / 32 / 1/step]

007 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st: S2

112

*ENG

290 mm > S2 size > 250 mm (Paper

width)

System SP2xxx

[1 to 50 / 24 / 1/step]
008 Paper Transfer: Low : 2nd:S2

*ENG

009 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: S3

*ENG

290 mm > S2 size > 250 mm (Paper

width)
[1 to 50 / 36 / 1/step]
250 mm > S3 size > 194 mm (Paper
width)
[1 to 50 / 9 / 1/step]

010 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S3

*ENG

250 mm > S3 size > 194 mm (Paper

width)

[1 to 50 / 29 / 1/step]
011 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st: S3

*ENG

250 mm > S3 size > 194 mm (Paper

width)
[1 to 50 / 18 / 1/step]

012 Paper Transfer: Low 2nd:S3

*ENG

250 mm > S3 size > 194 mm (Paper

width)
[1 to 50 / 29 / 1/step]

013 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: S4

*ENG

194 mm > S4 size > 150 mm (Paper

width)
[1 to 50 / 7 / 1/step]

014 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S4

*ENG

194 mm > S4 size > 150 mm (Paper

width)
[1 to 50 / 22 / 1/step]

015 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st: S4

*ENG

194 mm > S4 size > 150 mm (Paper

width)
[1 to 50 / 4 / 1/step]

016 Paper Transfer: Low: 2st: S4

*ENG

017 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: S5

*ENG

018 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S5

*ENG

194 mm > S4 size > 150 mm (Paper

width)
[1 to 50 / 12 / 1/step]
150 mm > S5 size (Paper width)
[1 to 50 / 7 / 1/step]
150 mm > S5 size (Paper width)

113

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

019 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st: S5

*ENG

020 Paper Transfer: Low 2nd: S5

*ENG

[1 to 50 / 27 / 1/step]
150 mm > S5 size (Paper width)
[1 to 50 / 4 / 1/step]
150 mm > S5 size (Paper width)

[Plain:L-Edge Correction] DFU

2421

Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current at the paper leading edge in each
mode. SP2403 and SP2407 are multiplied by these SP values.
Normal: 120 mm/sec, Low: 60 mm/sec
The paper leading edge area can be adjusted with SP2422.

001 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st

*ENG

002 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd

*ENG

003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st

*ENG

004 Paper Transfer: Low: 2nd

*ENG

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]

[Plain: Switch Timing: L-Edge] DFU

2422

Adjusts the bias/ voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller/ discharge plate at the
paper leading edge between the erase margin area and the image area.
Normal: 120 mm/sec, Low: 60 mm/sec

114

001 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st

*ENG

002 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd

*ENG

003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st

*ENG

004 Paper Transfer: Low: 2nd

*ENG

[0 to 30 / 0 / 2 mm/step]

System SP2xxx

[Plain: T-Edge Correction] DFU

Plain Paper: Trailing Edge Correction
2423

Adjusts the correction coefficient to the paper transfer roller current for the paper trailing
edge in each mode. SP2403 and SP2407 are multiplied by these SP values.
Normal: 120 mm/sec, Low: 60 mm/sec
The paper trailing edge area can be adjusted with SP2424.

001 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st

*ENG

002 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd

*ENG

003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st

*ENG

004 Paper Transfer: Low: 2nd

*ENG

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]

[Plain: Switch Timing: T-Edge] DFU

2424

Adjusts the bias/voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller/discharge plate at the
paper trailing edge between the erase margin area and the image area.
Normal: 120 mm/sec, Low: 60 mm/sec

001 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st

*ENG

002 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd

*ENG

003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st

*ENG

004 Paper Transfer: Low: 2nd

*ENG

2430

[-98 to 0 / 0 / 2 mm/step]

[Plain: Env. Correct Table] DFU

003 Paper Transfer: BW: Normal: 1st

*ENG

[1 to 50 / 39 / 1 /step]

004 Paper Transfer: BW: Normal: 2nd

*ENG

[1 to 50 / 26 / 1 /step]

005 Paper Transfer: FC: Normal:1st

*ENG

[1 to 50 / 39 / 1 /step]

006 Paper Transfer: FC: Normal:2nd

*ENG

[1 to 50 / 33 / 1 /step]

009 PaperTransfer:BW:Low:1st

*ENG

010 Paper Transfer: BW:Low:2nd

*ENG

[1 to 50 / 25 / 1 /step]

115

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

011 Paper Transfer: FC: Low:1st

*ENG

[1 to 50 / 45 / 1 /step]

012 Paper Transfer: FC: Low:2nd

*ENG

[1 to 50 / 31 / 1 /step]

[Thin: Bias: BW]

2453

Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thin paper in black-and-white mode.
Normal: 120 mm/sec, Low: 60 mm/sec

001 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 20 / 1 A /step]

003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st

*ENG

[0 to 250 / 12 / 1 A /step]

[Thin: Bias: FC]

2457

Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thin paper in full color mode.
Normal: 120 mm/sec, Low: 60 mm/sec

001 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 23 / 1 A /step]

003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 13 / 1 A /step]

[Thin: L-Edge Correction] DFU

Thin Paper: Leading Edge Correction
2471

Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current at the paper leading edge in each
mode. SP2453 and SP2457 are multiplied by these SP values.
Normal: 120 mm/sec, Low: 60 mm/sec
The paper leading edge area can be adjusted with SP2472.

001 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st

*ENG

003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st

*ENG

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]

[Thin: Switch Timing: L-Edge] DFU

2472

Adjusts the bias/ voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller/ discharge plate at the
paper leading edge between the erase margin area and the image area.
Normal: 120 mm/sec, Low: 60 mm/sec

116

System SP2xxx

001 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st

*ENG

003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st

*ENG

[0 to 30 / 0 / 2 mm/step]

[Thin: T-Edge Correct] DFU

Thin Paper: Trailing Edge Correction
2473

Adjusts the correction coefficient to the paper transfer roller current for the paper trailing
edge in each mode. SP2453 and SP2457 are multiplied by these SP values.
Normal: 120 mm/sec, Low: 60 mm/sec

The paper trailing edge area can be adjusted with SP2474.

001 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st

*ENG

003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st

*ENG

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]

[Thin: Switch Timing: T-Edge] DFU

2474

Adjusts the bias/voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller/discharge plate at the
paper trailing edge between the erase margin area and the image area.
Normal: 120 mm/sec, Low: 60 mm/sec

001 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st

*ENG

003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st

*ENG

2480

[-100 to 0 / 0 / 2 mm/step]

[Thin: Env. Correct Table] DFU

003 Paper Transfer: BW: Normal: 1st

*ENG

[1 to 50 / 24 / 1 /step]

005 Paper Transfer: FC: Normal: 1st

*ENG

[1 to 50 / 38 / 1 /step]

009 Paper Transfer: BW: Normal: 1st

*ENG

[1 to 50 / 32 / 1 /step]

011 Paper Transfer: FC: Normal: 1st

*ENG

[1 to 50 / 44 / 1 /step]

2482

[Gloss: Bias: BW]

Paper Transfer: 1st

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 15 / 1 A /step]

001 Adjusts the transfer current of the paper transfer roller for the 1st side of gloss paper in black
and white mode.
117

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

2483

[Gloss: Bias: FC]

Paper Transfer: 1st

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 15 / 1 A /step]

001 Adjusts the transfer current of the paper transfer roller for the 1st side of gloss paper in full
color mode.
2485

[Gross: L-Edge Correct] DFU

001 Paper Transfer: 1st

*ENG

[10 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]

*ENG

[0 to 30 / 0 / 2 mm/step]

*ENG

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5 %/step]

*ENG

[-100 to 0 / 0 / 2 mm/step]

003 Paper Transfer: BW: 1st

*ENG

[1 to 50 / 17 / 1 /step]

005 Paper Transfer: FC: 1st

*ENG

[1 to 50 / 21 / 1 /step]

2486

[Gross: Switch Timing: L-Edge] DFU

001 Paper Transfer: 1st

2487

[Gross: T-Edge Correct] DFU

001 Paper Transfer: 1st

2488

[Gloss:Switch Timing:T-Edge] DFU

001 Paper Transfer: 1st

2489

[Glossy: Env. Correct Table] DFU

[Thick 1: Bias: BW]

2502

Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thick 1 paper in black-and-white mode.
Thick: 60 mm/sec

001 Paper Transfer: 1st

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 15 / 1 A /step]

002 Paper Transfer: 2nd

*ENG

Not used

[Thick 1: Bias: FC]

2507

Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thick 1 paper in full color mode.
Thick: 60 mm/sec

118

System SP2xxx

001 Paper Transfer: 1st

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 15 / 1 A /step]

002 Paper Transfer: 2nd

*ENG

Not used

[Thick-T:Size Correct:BW]
2511

Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for each paper size.
SP2502 and SP2507 are multiplied by these SP values.
Thick: 60 mm/sec

001 Paper Transfer: 1st: S1

*ENG

002 Paper Transfer: 2nd: S1

*ENG

[100 to 4000 / 100 / 5%/step]

S1 size > 290 mm (Paper width)

Not used
[100 to 4000 / 125 / 5%/step]

005 Paper Transfer: 1st: S2

*ENG

290 mm > S2 size > 250 mm (Paper

width)

006 Paper Transfer: 2nd: S2

*ENG

Not used
[100 to 4000 / 150 / 5%/step]

009 Paper Transfer: 1st: S3

*ENG

250 mm > S3 size > 194 mm (Paper

width)

010 Paper Transfer: 2nd: S3

*ENG

Not used
[100 to 4000 / 275 / 5%/step]

013 Paper Transfer: 1st: S4

*ENG

194 mm > S4 size > 150 mm (Paper

width)

014 Paper Transfer: 2nd: S4

*ENG

Not used

017 Paper Transfer: 1st: S5

*ENG

018 Paper Transfer: 2nd: S5

*ENG

[100 to 4000 / 400 / 5%/step]

150 mm > S5 size (Paper width)
Not used

[Thick-T:Size Correct:FC]
2512

Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for each paper size.
SP2502 and SP2507 are multiplied by these SP values.
Thick: 60 mm/sec

119

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

001 Paper Transfer: 1st: S1

*ENG

002 Paper Transfer: 2nd: S1

*ENG

[100 to 4000 / 100 / 5%/step]

S1 size > 290 mm (Paper width)
Not used
[100 to 4000 / 110 / 5%/step]

005 Paper Transfer: 1st: S2

*ENG

290 mm > S2 size > 250 mm (Paper

width)

006 Paper Transfer: 2nd: S2

*ENG

Not used
[100 to 4000 / 115 / 5%/step]

009 Paper Transfer: 1st: S3

*ENG

250 mm > S3 size > 194 mm (Paper

width)

010 Paper Transfer: 2nd: S3

*ENG

Not used
[100 to 4000 / 405 / 5%/step]

013 Paper Transfer: 1st: S4

*ENG

194 mm > S4 size > 150 mm (Paper

width)

014 Paper Transfer: 2nd: S4

*ENG

Not used

017 Paper Transfer: 1st: S5

*ENG

018 Paper Transfer:: 2nd: S5

*ENG

[100 to 4000 / 690 / 5%/step]

150 mm > S5 size (Paper width)
Not used

[Thick:Size-Env.Correct:BW] DFU
2513

Adjusts the size correction coefficient table for the paper transfer roller current for each paper
size. SP2502 and SP2507 are multiplied by these SP values.
Thick: 60 mm/sec

001 Paper Transfer: 1st: S1

*ENG

002 Paper Transfer: 2nd: S1

*ENG

[1 to 50 / 30 / 1/step]
S1 size > 290 mm (Paper width)
Not used
[1 to 50 / 36 / 1/step]

120

005 Paper Transfer: 1st: S2

*ENG

290 mm > S2 size > 250 mm (Paper

width)

006 Paper Transfer: 2nd: S2

*ENG

Not used

System SP2xxx

[1 to 50 / 40 / 1/step]
009 Paper Transfer: 1st: S3

*ENG

250 mm > S3 size > 194 mm (Paper

width)

010 Paper Transfer: 2nd: S3

*ENG

Not used
[1 to 50 / 27 / 1/step]

013 Paper Transfer: 1st: S4

*ENG

194 mm > S4 size > 150 mm (Paper

width)

014 Paper Transfer: 2nd: S4

*ENG

Not used

017 Paper Transfer: 1st: S5

*ENG

018 Paper Transfer: 2nd: S5

*ENG

[1 to 50 / 20 / 1/step]
150 mm > S5 size (Paper width)
Not used

[Thick:Size-Env.Correct:FC] DFU
2514

Adjusts the size correction coefficient table for the paper transfer roller current for each paper
size. SP2502 and SP2507 are multiplied by these SP values.
Thick: 60 mm/sec

001 Paper Transfer: 1st: S1

*ENG

002 Paper Transfer: 2nd: S1

*ENG

[1 to 50 / 30 / 1/step]
S1 size > 290 mm (Paper width)
Not used
[1 to 50 / 49 / 1/step]

005 Paper Transfer: 1st: S2

*ENG

290 mm > S2 size > 250 mm (Paper

width)

006 Paper Transfer: 2nd: S2

*ENG

Not used
[1 to 50 / 50 / 1/step]

009 Paper Transfer: 1st: S3

*ENG

250 mm > S3 size > 194 mm (Paper

width)

010 Paper Transfer: 2nd: S3

*ENG

Not used
[1 to 50 / 35 / 1/step]

013 Paper Transfer: 1st: S4

*ENG

194 mm > S4 size > 150 mm (Paper

width)

121

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

014 Paper Transfer: 2nd: S4

*ENG

017 Paper Transfer: 1st: S5

*ENG

018 Paper Transfer: 2nd: S5

*ENG

Not used
[1 to 50 / 6 / 1/step]
150 mm > S5 size (Paper width)
Not used

[Thick 1:L-Edge Correct] DFU

Thick 1 Paper: Leading Edge Correction

3
2521

Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current at the paper leading edge in each
mode. SP2502 and SP2507 are multiplied by these SP values.
Thick: 60 mm/sec
The paper leading edge area can be adjusted with SP2522.

001 Paper Transfer: 1st

*ENG

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]

002 Paper Transfer: 2nd

*ENG

Not used

[Thick 1: Switch Timing: L-Edge] DFU

2522

Adjusts the bias/ voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller/ discharge plate at the
paper leading edge between the erase margin area and the image area.
Thick: 60 mm/sec

001 Paper Transfer: 1st

*ENG

[0 to 30 / 0 / 2 mm/step]

002 Paper Transfer: 2nd

*ENG

Not used

[Thick 1: T-Edge Correct] DFU

Thick 1 Paper: Trailing Edge Correction
2523

Adjusts the correction coefficient to the paper transfer roller current for the paper trailing
edge in each mode. SP2502 and SP2507 are multiplied by these SP values.
Thick: 60 mm/sec
The paper trailing edge area can be adjusted with SP2524.

001 Paper Transfer: 1st

122

*ENG

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]

System SP2xxx

002 Paper Transfer: 2nd

*ENG

Not used

[Thick 1: Switch Timing: T-Edge] DFU

2524

Adjusts the bias/voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller/discharge plate at the
paper trailing edge between the erase margin area and the image area.
Thick: 60 mm/sec

001 Paper Transfer: 1st

*ENG

[0 to -100 / 0 / 2 mm/step]

002 Paper Transfer: 2nd

*ENG

Not used

003 Paper Transfer: BW: 1st

*ENG

[1 to 50 / 17 / 1 /step]

004 Paper Transfer: BW:2nd

*ENG

Not used

005 Paper Transfer: FC: 1st

*ENG

[1 to 50 / 29 / 1 /step]

006 Paper Transfer: FC:2nd

*ENG

Not used

2530

[Thick 1: Env. Correct Table] DFU

[Thick 2: Bias: BW]

2553

Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thick2 paper in black-and-white mode.
Thick: 60 mm/sec

001 Paper Transfer: 1st

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 10 / 1 A /step]

002 Paper Transfer: 2nd

*ENG

Not used

[Thick 2: Bias: FC]

2558

Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thick2 paper in full color mode.
Thick: 60 mm/sec

001 Paper Transfer: 1st

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 13 / 1 A /step]

002 Paper Transfer: 2nd

*ENG

Not used

123

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

[Thick 2: L-Edge Correct] DFU

Thick 2 Paper: Leading Edge Correction
2571

Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current at the paper leading edge in each
mode. SP2553 and SP2558 are multiplied by these SP values.
Thick: 60 mm/sec

The paper leading edge area can be adjusted with SP2572.

001 Paper Transfer: 1st

*ENG

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]

002 Paper Transfer: 2nd

*ENG

Not used

[Thick 2: Switch Timing: L-Edge] DFU

2572

Adjusts the bias/ voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller/ discharge plate at the
paper leading edge between the erase margin area and the image area.
Thick: 60 mm/sec

001 Paper Transfer: 1st

*ENG

[0 to 30 / 0 / 2mm/step]

002 Paper Transfer: 2nd

*ENG

Not used

[Thick 2: T-Edge Correction] DFU

Thick 2 Paper: Trailing Edge Correction
2573

Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current for the paper trailing edge in each
mode. SP2553 and SP2558 are multiplied by these SP values.
Thick: 60 mm/sec
The paper trailing edge area can be adjusted with SP2574.

001 Paper Transfer: 1st

*ENG

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]

002 Paper Transfer: 2nd

*ENG

Not used

[Thick2:T-Edge Correct] DFU

2574

Adjusts the bias/voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller/discharge plate at the
paper trailing edge between the erase margin area and the image area.
Thick: 60 mm/sec

124

System SP2xxx

001 Paper Transfer: 1st

*ENG

[0 to -100 / 0 / 2 mm/step]

002 Paper Transfer: 2nd

*ENG

Not used

003 Paper Transfer: BW: 1st

*ENG

[0 to 50 / 36 / 1 /step]

004 Paper Transfer: BW: 2nd

*ENG

Not used

005 Paper Transfer: FC: 1st

*ENG

[0 to 50 / 23 / 1 /step]

006 Paper Transfer: FC: 2nd

*ENG

Not used

2580

2603

[Thick 2 Env. Correct Table] DFU

[OHP: Bias: BW]

Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for OHP in black-and-white mode.

001 Paper Transfer

2608

*ENG

[0 to 200 / NA: 15, EU/AA: 13 / 1 A /step]

[OHP: Bias: FC]

Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for OHP in full color mode.

001 Paper Transfer

*ENG

[0 to 200 / NA: 24, EU/AA: 20 / 1 A /step]

[OHP: L-Edge Correct] DFU

OHP: Leading Edge Correction
2621

Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current at the paper leading edge in each
mode. SP2603 and SP2608 are multiplied by these SP values.
The paper leading edge area can be adjusted with SP2622.

001 Paper Transfer

*ENG

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]

[OHP: Switch Timing: L-Edge] DFU

2622

Adjusts the bias/ voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller/ discharge plate at the
paper leading edge between the erase margin area and the image area.

001 Paper Transfer

*ENG

[0 to 30 / 0 / 2 mm/step]

125

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

[OHP: T-Edge Correct] DFU

OHP: Trailing Edge Correction
2623

Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current for the paper trailing edge in each
mode. SP2603 and SP2608 are multiplied by these SP values.
The paper trailing edge area can be adjusted with SP2624.

001 Paper Transfer

*ENG

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]

[OHP: T-Edge Correction] DFU

2624

Adjusts the bias/voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller/discharge plate at the
paper trailing edge between the erase margin area and the image area.

001 Paper Transfer

2630

*ENG

[98 to 0 / 0 / 2 mm/step]

[OHP: Env. Correct Table]

002 Paper Transfer: BW: 1st

*ENG

[1 to 50 / NA: 39, EU/AA: 26 / 1 /step]

003 Paper Transfer: FC: 1st

*ENG

[1 to 50 / NA: 7, EU/AA: 47 / 1 /step]

[Thick 3: Bias: BW]

2651

Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thick paper 3 in black-and-white mode.
Thick: 60 mm/sec

001 Paper Transfer: 1st

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 10 / 1 A /step]

002 Paper Transfer: 2nd

*ENG

Not used

[Thick 3: Bias: FC]

2652

Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thick paper 3 in full color mode.
Thick: 60 mm/sec

126

001 Paper Transfer: 1st

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 13 / 1 A /step]

002 Paper Transfer: 2nd

*ENG

Not used

System SP2xxx

[Thick 3: L-Edge Correct] DFU

Thick 3 Paper: Leading Edge Correction
2654

Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current at the paper leading edge in each
mode. SP2651 and SP2652 are multiplied by these SP values.
Thick: 60 mm/sec
The paper leading edge area can be adjusted with SP2655.

001 Paper Transfer: 1st

*ENG

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]

003 Paper Transfer: 2nd

*ENG

Not used

[Thick 3: Switch Timing: L-Edge] DFU

2655

Adjusts the bias/ voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller/ discharge plate at the
paper leading edge between the erase margin area and the image area.
Thick: 60 mm/sec

001 Paper Transfer: 1st

*ENG

[0 to 30 / 0 / 2 mm/step]

003 Paper Transfer: 2nd

*ENG

Not used

[Thick 3: T-Edge Correct] DFU

Thick 3 Paper: Trailing Edge Correction
2656

Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current for the paper trailing edge in each
mode. SP2651 and SP2652 are multiplied by these SP values.
Thick: 60 mm/sec
The paper trailing edge area can be adjusted with SP2657.

001 Paper Transfer: 1st

*ENG

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]

002 Paper Transfer: 2nd

*ENG

Not used

[Thick 3: TrailingEdge Correction] DFU

2657

Adjusts the bias/voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller/discharge plate at the
paper trailing edge between the erase margin area and the image area.
Thick: 60 mm/sec
127

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

001 Paper Transfer: 1st

*ENG

[-98 to 0 / 0 / 2 mm/step]

002 Paper Transfer: 2nd

*ENG

Not used

[Thick 3: Env. Correct Table] DFU

2660

Thick 3 Paper: MM Environment Coefficient Adjustment

Thick: 60 mm/sec

003 Paper Transfer:BW:1st

*ENG

[1 to 50 / 36 / 1 /step]

004 Paper Transfer:BW:2nd

*ENG

Not used

005 Paper Transfer: FC: 1st

*ENG

[1 to 50 / 23 / 1 /step]

006 Paper Transfer: FC: 2nd

*ENG

Not used

[M-Thick:Bias:BW] Middle Thick: Bias: BW

2703

Normal: 120mm/sec, Low: 60mm/sec

Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for middle thick in black-and-white mode.

001 Paper Transfer:Normal:1st

*ENG

002 Paper Transfer:Normal:2nd

*ENG

003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 11 / 1 - A /step]

004 Paper Transfer: Low: 2nd

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 13 / 1 - A /step]

[0 to 200 / 20 / 1 - A /step]

[M-Thick:Bias:FC] Middle Thick: Bias: BW

2707

Normal: 120mm/sec, Low: 60mm/sec

Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for middle thick in full color mode.

128

001 Paper Transfer:Normal:1st

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 25 / 1 - A /step]

002 Paper Transfer:Normal:2nd

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 28 / 1 - A /step]

003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 11/ 1 - A /step]

004 Paper Transfer: Low: 2nd

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 14 / 1 - A /step]

System SP2xxx

[M-Thick:L-Edge Correct] DFU

Normal: 120mm/sec, Low: 60mm/sec
2721

Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current at the paper leading edge in each
mode. SP2703 and SP2707 are multiplied by these SP values.
The paper leading edge area can be adjusted with SP2722.

001 Paper Transfer:Normal:1st

*ENG

002 Paper Transfer:Normal:2nd

*ENG

003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st

*ENG

004 Paper Transfer: Low: 2nd

*ENG

3
[0 to 400 / 100 / 5 %/step]

[M-Thick:SwTiming:L-Edge] DFU
2722

Normal: 120mm/sec, Low: 60mm/sec

Adjusts the bias/ voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller/ discharge plate at the
paper leading edge between the erase margin area and the image area.

001 Paper Transfer:Normal:1st

*ENG

002 Paper Transfer:Normal:2nd

*ENG

003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st

*ENG

004 Paper Transfer: Low: 2nd

*ENG

[0 to 30 / 0 / 2 mm /step]

[M-Thick:T-Edge Correct] DFU

Normal: 120mm/sec, Low: 60mm/sec
2723

Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current for the paper trailing edge in each
mode. SP2703 and SP2707 are multiplied by these SP values.
The paper trailing edge area can be adjusted with SP2724.

129

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

001 Paper Transfer:Normal:1st

*ENG

002 Paper Transfer:Normal:2nd

*ENG

003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st

*ENG

004 Paper Transfer: Low: 2nd

*ENG

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5 %/step]

[M-Thick:SwTiming:T-Edge] DFU

2724

Normal: 120mm/sec, Low: 60mm/sec

Adjusts the bias/voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller/discharge plate at the
paper trailing edge between the erase margin area and the image area.

001 Paper Transfer:Normal:1st

*ENG

002 Paper Transfer:Normal:2nd

*ENG

003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st

*ENG

004 Paper Transfer: Low: 2nd

*ENG

2730

[0 to -100 / 0 / 2 mm/step]

[M-Thick:Env.Correct Table] DFU

Normal: 120mm/sec, Low: 60mm/sec

003 Paper Transfer:BW:Normal:1st

*ENG

[1 to 50 / 23 / 1 /step]

004 Paper Transfer:BW:Normal:2nd

*ENG

[1 to 50 / 26 / 1 /step]

005 Paper Transfer:FC:Normal:1st

*ENG

[1 to 50 / 38 / 1 /step]

006 Paper Transfer:FC:Normal:2nd

*ENG

[1 to 50 / 33 / 1 /step]

009 Paper Transfer:BW:Low:1st

*ENG

[1 to 50 / 32 / 1 /step]

010 Paper Transfer:BW:Low:2nd

*ENG

[1 to 50 / 21 / 1 /step]

011 Paper Transfer:FC:Low:1st

*ENG

[1 to 50 / 48 / 1 /step]

012 Paper Transfer:FC:Low:2nd

*ENG

[1 to 50 / 28 / 1 /step]

[SP 1: Bias: BW]

2753

Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for special paper 1 in black-and-white mode.
Normal: 120mm/sec, Low: 60mm/sec

130

System SP2xxx

001 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st

*ENG

002 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd

*ENG

003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 11 / 1 A /step]

004 Paper Transfer: Low: 2nd

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 13 / 1 A /step]

[0 to 200 / 20 / 1 A /step]

[SP 1: Bias: FC]

2757

Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for special paper 1 in full color mode.

Normal: 120mm/sec, Low: 60mm/sec

001 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 25 / 1 A /step]

002 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 28 / 1 A /step]

003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 11 / 1 A /step]

004 Paper Transfer: Low: 2nd

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 14 / 1 A /step]

[SP1,2,3-T:Size Correct:BW]
2761

Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for each paper size.
SP2753 and SP2757 are multiplied by these SP values.
Normal: 120mm/sec, Low: 60mm/sec

001 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: S1

*ENG

002 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S1

*ENG

[100 to 4000 / 100 / 5%/step]

003 Paper Transfer:Low:1st:S1

*ENG

S1 size > 290 mm (Paper width)

004 Paper Transfer:Low:2nd:S1

*ENG
[100 to 4000 / 140 / 5%/step]

005 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: S2

*ENG

290 mm > S2 size > 250 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 165 / 5%/step]

006 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S2

*ENG

290 mm > S2 size > 250 mm (Paper

width)

131

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

[100 to 4000 / 150 / 5%/step]

007 Paper Transfer:Low:1st:S2

*ENG

008 Paper Transfer:Low:2nd:S2

*ENG

290 mm > S2 size > 250 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 190 / 5%/step]

290 mm > S2 size > 250 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 175 / 5%/step]

009 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: S3

*ENG

250 mm > S2 size > 194 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 230 / 5%/step]

010 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S3

*ENG

250 mm > S2 size > 194 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 190 / 5%/step]

011 PaperTransfer:Low:1st:S3

*ENG

250 mm > S2 size > 194 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 290 / 5%/step]

012 PaperTransfer:Low:2nd:S3

*ENG

250 mm > S2 size > 194 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 190 / 5%/step]

013 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: S4

*ENG

194 mm > S4 size > 150 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 285 / 5%/step]

014 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S4

*ENG

194 mm > S4 size > 150 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 210 / 5%/step]

015 PaperTransfer:Low:1st:S4

*ENG

016 PaperTransfer:Low:2nd:S4

*ENG

017 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: S5

*ENG

194 mm > S4 size > 150 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 360 / 5%/step]

132

194 mm > S4 size > 150 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 200 / 5%/step]
150 mm > S5 size (Paper width)

System SP2xxx

018 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S5

*ENG

019 PaperTransfer:Low:1st:S5

*ENG

020 PaperTransfer:Low:2nd:S5

*ENG

[100 to 4000 / 340 / 5%/step]

150 mm > S5 size (Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 210 / 5%/step]
150 mm > S5 size (Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 420 / 5%/step]
150 mm > S5 size (Paper width)

[SP1,2,3-T:Size Correct:FC]
2762

Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for each paper size.
SP2753 and SP2757 are multiplied by these SP values.
Normal: 120 mm/sec, Low: 60 mm/sec

001 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: S1

*ENG

002 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S1

*ENG

[100 to 4000 / 100 / 5%/step]

003 Paper Transfer:Low:1st:S1

*ENG

S1 size > 290 mm (Paper width)

004 Paper Transfer:Low:2nd:S1

*ENG
[100 to 4000 / 130 / 5%/step]

005 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: S2

*ENG

290 mm > S2 size > 250 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 160 / 5%/step]

006 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S2

*ENG

290 mm > S2 size > 250 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 140 / 5%/step]

007 Paper Transfer:Low:1st:S2

*ENG

290 mm > S2 size > 250 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 215 / 5%/step]

008 Paper Transfer:Low:2nd:S2

*ENG

290 mm > S2 size > 250 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 160 / 5%/step]

009 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: S3

*ENG

250 mm > S2 size > 194 mm (Paper

width)

133

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

[100 to 4000 / 215 / 5%/step]

010 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S3

*ENG

011 PaperTransfer:Low:1st:S3

*ENG

250 mm > S2 size > 194 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 175 / 5%/step]

250 mm > S2 size > 194 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 320 / 5%/step]

012 PaperTransfer:Low:2nd:S3

*ENG

250 mm > S2 size > 194 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 190 / 5%/step]

013 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: S4

*ENG

194 mm > S4 size > 150 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 285 / 5%/step]

014 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S4

*ENG

194 mm > S4 size > 150 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 190 / 5%/step]

015 PaperTransfer:Low:1st:S4

*ENG

194 mm > S4 size > 150 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 465 / 5%/step]

134

016 PaperTransfer:Low:2nd:S4

*ENG

017 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: S5

*ENG

018 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S5

*ENG

019 PaperTransfer:Low:1st:S5

*ENG

020 PaperTransfer:Low:2nd:S5

*ENG

194 mm > S4 size > 150 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 220 / 5%/step]
150 mm > S5 size (Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 355 / 5%/step]
150 mm > S5 size (Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 230 / 5%/step]
150 mm > S5 size (Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 565 / 5%/step]
150 mm > S5 size (Paper width)

System SP2xxx

[SP1,2,3-T:Size Env.Correct:BW] DFU

2763

Adjusts the size correction coefficient table for the paper transfer roller current for each paper
size. SP2753 and SP2757 are multiplied by these SP values.
Normal: 120 mm/sec, Low: 60 mm/sec

001 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: S1

*ENG

002 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S1

*ENG

[1 to 50 / 30 / 1/step]

003 Paper Transfer:Low:1st:S1

*ENG

S1 size > 290 mm (Paper width)

004 Paper Transfer:Low:2nd:S1

*ENG

[1 to 50 / 23 / 1/step]
005 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: S2

*ENG

290 mm > S2 size > 250 mm (Paper

width)
[1 to 50 / 9 / 1/step]

006 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S2

*ENG

290 mm > S2 size > 250 mm (Paper

width)
[1 to 50 / 34 / 1/step]

007 Paper Transfer:Low:1st:S2

*ENG

290 mm > S2 size > 250 mm (Paper

width)
[1 to 50 / 26 / 1/step]

008 Paper Transfer:Low:2nd:S2

*ENG

290 mm > S2 size > 250 mm (Paper

width)
[1 to 50 / 10 / 1/step]

009 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: S3

*ENG

010 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S3

*ENG

250 mm > S2 size > 194 mm (Paper

width)
[1 to 50 / 15 / 1/step]
250 mm > S2 size > 194 mm (Paper
width)
[1 to 50 / 12 / 1/step]

011 PaperTransfer:Low:1st:S3

*ENG

250 mm > S2 size > 194 mm (Paper

width)

135

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

[1 to 50 / 13 / 1/step]
012 PaperTransfer:Low:2nd:S3

*ENG

013 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: S4

*ENG

250 mm > S2 size > 194 mm (Paper

width)
[1 to 50 / 10 / 1/step]

194 mm > S4 size > 150 mm (Paper

width)
[1 to 50 / 15 / 1/step]

014 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S4

*ENG

194 mm > S4 size > 150 mm (Paper

width)
[1 to 50 / 35 / 1/step]

015 PaperTransfer:Low:1st:S4

*ENG

194 mm > S4 size > 150 mm (Paper

width)
[1 to 50 / 13 / 1/step]

016 PaperTransfer:Low:2nd:S4

*ENG

017 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: S5

*ENG

018 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S5

*ENG

019 PaperTransfer:Low:1st:S5

*ENG

020 PaperTransfer:Low:2nd:S5

*ENG

194 mm > S4 size > 150 mm (Paper

width)
[1 to 50 / 29 / 1/step]
150 mm > S5 size (Paper width)
[1 to 50 / 15 / 1/step]
150 mm > S5 size (Paper width)
[1 to 50 / 41 / 1/step]
150 mm > S5 size (Paper width)
[1 to 50 / 13 / 1/step]
150 mm > S5 size (Paper width)

[SP1,2,3-T:Size Env.Correct:FC] DFU

2764

Adjusts the size correction coefficient table for the paper transfer roller current for each paper
size. SP2753 and SP2757 are multiplied by these SP values.
Normal: 120 mm/sec, Low: 60 mm/sec

136

System SP2xxx

001 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: S1

*ENG

002 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S1

*ENG

[1 to 50 / 30 / 1/step]

003 Paper Transfer:Low:1st:S1

*ENG

S1 size > 290 mm (Paper width)

004 Paper Transfer:Low:2nd:S1

*ENG
[1 to 50 / 37 / 1/step]

005 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: S2

*ENG

290 mm > S2 size > 250 mm (Paper

width)

[1 to 50 / 16 / 1/step]
006 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S2

*ENG

290 mm > S2 size > 250 mm (Paper

width)
[1 to 50 / 32 / 1/step]

007 Paper Transfer:Low:1st:S2

*ENG

290 mm > S2 size > 250 mm (Paper

width)
[1 to 50 / 24 / 1/step]

008 Paper Transfer:Low:2nd:S2

*ENG

290 mm > S2 size > 250 mm (Paper

width)
[1 to 50 / 36 / 1/step]

009 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: S3

*ENG

010 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S3

*ENG

250 mm > S2 size > 194 mm (Paper

width)
[1 to 50 / 9 / 1/step]
250 mm > S2 size > 194 mm (Paper
width)
[1 to 50 / 29 / 1/step]

011 PaperTransfer:Low:1st:S3

*ENG

250 mm > S2 size > 194 mm (Paper

width)
[1 to 50 / 18 / 1/step]

012 PaperTransfer:Low:2nd:S3

*ENG

250 mm > S2 size > 194 mm (Paper

width)
[1 to 50 / 29 / 1/step]

013 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: S4

*ENG

194 mm > S4 size > 150 mm (Paper

width)

137

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

[1 to 50 / 7 / 1/step]
014 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S4

*ENG

015 PaperTransfer:Low:1st:S4

*ENG

194 mm > S4 size > 150 mm (Paper

width)
[1 to 50 / 22 / 1/step]

194 mm > S4 size > 150 mm (Paper

width)
[1 to 50 / 4 / 1/step]

016 PaperTransfer:Low:2nd:S4

*ENG

017 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: S5

*ENG

018 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S5

*ENG

019 PaperTransfer:Low:1st:S5

*ENG

020 PaperTransfer:Low:2nd:S5

*ENG

194 mm > S4 size > 150 mm (Paper

width)
[1 to 50 / 12 / 1/step]
150 mm > S5 size (Paper width)
[1 to 50 / 7 / 1/step]
150 mm > S5 size (Paper width)
[1 to 50 / 27 / 1/step]
150 mm > S5 size (Paper width)
[1 to 50 / 4 / 1/step]
150 mm > S5 size (Paper width)

[SP1: L-Edge Correct] DFU

Special 1 Paper: Leading Edge Correction
2771

Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current at the paper leading edge in each
mode. SP2753 and SP2757 are multiplied by these SP values.
Normal: 120mm/sec, Low: 60mm/sec
The paper leading edge area can be adjusted with SP2772.

138

001 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st

*ENG

002 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd

*ENG

003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st

*ENG

004 Paper Transfer: Low: 2nd

*ENG

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]

System SP2xxx

[SP 1:SwTiming:L-Edge] DFU

2772

Adjusts the bias/ voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller/ discharge plate at the
paper leading edge between the erase margin area and the image area.
Normal: 120mm/sec, Low: 60mm/sec

001 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st

*ENG

002 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd

*ENG

003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st

*ENG

004 Paper Transfer: Low: 2nd

*ENG

[0 to 30 / 0 / 2 mm/step]

[SP1: T-Edge Correct] DFU

Special 1 Paper: Trailing Edge Correction
2773

Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current for the paper trailing edge in each
mode. SP2753 and SP2757 are multiplied by these SP values.
Normal: 120 mm/sec, Low: 60 mm/sec
The paper trailing edge area can be adjusted with SP2774.

001 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st

*ENG

002 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd

*ENG

003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st

*ENG

005 Paper Transfer: Low: 2nd

*ENG

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]

[SP 1:SwTiming:T-Edge] DFU

2774

Adjusts the bias/voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller/discharge plate at the
paper trailing edge between the erase margin area and the image area.
Normal: 120mm/sec, Low: 60mm/sec

001 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st

*ENG

002 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd

*ENG

003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st

*ENG

004 Paper Transfer: Low: 2nd

*ENG

[-98 to 0 / 0 / 2 mm/step]

139

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

2780

[SP 1: Env. Correct Table] DFU

Normal: 120mm/sec, Low: 60mm/sec

003 Paper Transfer:BW:Normal:1st

*ENG

[1 to 50 / 23 / 1 /step]

004 Paper Transfer:BW:Normal:2nd

*ENG

[1 to 50 / 26 / 1 /step]

005 Paper Transfer:FC:Normal:1st

*ENG

[1 to 50 / 38 / 1 /step]

006 Paper Transfer:FC:Normal:2nd

*ENG

[1 to 50 / 33 / 1 /step]

009 Paper Transfer:BW:Low:1st

*ENG

[1 to 50 / 32 / 1 /step]

010 Paper Transfer:BW:Low:2nd

*ENG

[1 to 50 / 21 / 1 /step]

011 Paper Transfer:FC:Low:1st

*ENG

[1 to 50 / 48 / 1 /step]

012 Paper Transfer:FC:Low:2nd

*ENG

[1 to 50 / 28 / 1 /step]

2783

[SP 4: Bias: BW]

Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for special paper 1 in black-and-white mode.

001 Paper Transfer

2787

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 15 / 1 A /step]

[SP 4: Bias: FC]

Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for special paper 1 in full color mode.

001 Paper Transfer

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 15 / 1 A /step]

[SP4,5,6-T:Size Correct:BW]
2791

Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for each paper size.
SP2783 and SP2787 are multiplied by these SP values.

001 Paper Transfer: S1

*ENG

005 Paper Transfer: S2

*ENG

[100 to 4000 / 100 / 5%/step]

S1 size > 290 mm (Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 125 / 5%/step]

140

290 mm > S2 size > 250 mm (Paper

width)

System SP2xxx

[100 to 4000 / 150 / 5%/step]

009 Paper Transfer: S3

*ENG

013 Paper Transfer: S4

*ENG

017 Paper Transfer: S5

*ENG

250 mm > S2 size > 194 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 275 / 5%/step]
194 mm > S4 size > 150 mm (Paper
width)
[100 to 4000 / 400 / 5%/step]
150 mm > S5 size (Paper width)

[SP4,5,6-T:Size Correct:FC]
2792

Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for each paper size.
SP2783 and SP2787 are multiplied by these SP values.

001 Paper Transfer: S1

*ENG

005 Paper Transfer: S2

*ENG

[100 to 4000 / 100 / 5%/step]

S1 size > 290 mm (Paper width)
[100 to 4000 / 110 / 5%/step]
290 mm > S2 size > 250 mm (Paper
width)
[100 to 4000 / 115 / 5%/step]

009 Paper Transfer: S3

*ENG

250 mm > S2 size > 194 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 405 / 5%/step]

013 Paper Transfer: S4

*ENG

017 Paper Transfer: S5

*ENG

194 mm > S4 size > 150 mm (Paper

width)
[100 to 4000 / 690 / 5%/step]
150 mm > S5 size (Paper width)

[SP4,5,6-T:Size Env.Correct:BW] DFU

2793

Adjusts the size correction coefficient table for the paper transfer roller current for each paper
size. SP2783 and SP2787 are multiplied by these SP values.

001 Paper Transfer: S1

*ENG

[1 to 50 / 30 / 1/step]
S1 size > 290 mm (Paper width)

141

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

[1 to 50 / 36 / 1/step]
005 Paper Transfer: S2

*ENG

009 Paper Transfer: S3

*ENG

290 mm > S2 size > 250 mm (Paper

width)
[1 to 50 / 40 / 1/step]

250 mm > S2 size > 194 mm (Paper

width)
[1 to 50 / 27 / 1/step]

013 Paper Transfer: S4

*ENG

017 Paper Transfer: S5

*ENG

194 mm > S4 size > 150 mm (Paper

width)
[1 to 50 / 20 / 1/step]
150 mm > S5 size (Paper width)

[SP4,5,6-T:Size Env.Correct:FC] DFU

2794

Adjusts the size correction coefficient table for the paper transfer roller current for each paper
size. SP2783 and SP2787 are multiplied by these SP values.

001 Paper Transfer: S1

*ENG

[1 to 50 / 30 / 1/step]
S1 size > 290 mm (Paper width)
[1 to 50 / 49 / 1/step]

005 Paper Transfer: S2

*ENG

290 mm > S2 size > 250 mm (Paper

width)
[1 to 50 / 50 / 1/step]

009 Paper Transfer: S3

*ENG

250 mm > S2 size > 194 mm (Paper

width)
[1 to 50 / 35 / 1/step]

142

013 Paper Transfer: S4

*ENG

017 Paper Transfer: S5

*ENG

194 mm > S4 size > 150 mm (Paper

width)
[1 to 50 / 6 / 1/step]
150 mm > S5 size (Paper width)

System SP2xxx

[SP4: L-Edge Correct] DFU

Special 4 Paper: Leading Edge Correction
2795

Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current at the paper leading edge in each
mode. SP2783 and SP2787 are multiplied by these SP values.
The paper leading edge area can be adjusted with SP2796.

001 Paper Transfer

*ENG

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]

[SP 4: Switch Timing: L-Edge] DFU

2796

Adjusts the bias/ voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller/ discharge plate at the
paper leading edge between the erase margin area and the image area.

001 Paper Transfer

*ENG

[0 to 30 / 0 / 2 mm/step]

[SP4: T-Edge Correct] DFU

Special 1 Paper: Trailing Edge Correction
2797

Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current for the paper trailing edge in each
mode. SP2783 and SP2787 are multiplied by these SP values.
The paper trailing edge area can be adjusted with SP2798.

001 Paper Transfer

*ENG

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]

[SP 4: Sw Timing: T-Edge] DFU

2798

Adjusts the bias/voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller/discharge plate at the
paper trailing edge between the erase margin area and the image area.

001 Paper Transfer

*ENG

[-98 to 0 / 0 / 2 mm/step]

003 Paper Transfer:BW: 1st

*ENG

[1 to 50 / 17 / 1 /step]

005 Paper Transfer:FC: 1st

*ENG

[1 to 50 / 29 / 1 /step]

2799

[SP 4: Env. Correct Table] DFU

143

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

[SP 2: Bias: BW]

2803

Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for special paper 2 in black-and-white mode.
Normal: 120mm/sec, Low: 60mm/sec

001 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st

*ENG

002 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd

*ENG

003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 11 / 1 A /step]

004 Paper Transfer: Low: 2nd

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 13 / 1 A /step]

[0 to 200 / 20 / 1 A /step]

[SP2: Bias: FC]

2807

Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for special paper 2 in full color mode.
Normal: 120mm/sec, Low: 60mm/sec

001 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 25 / 1 A /step]

002 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 28 / 1 A /step]

003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 11 / 1 A /step]

004 Paper Transfer: Low: 2nd

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 14 / 1 A /step]

[SP 2: L-Edge Correct] DFU

Special 2 Paper: Leading Edge Correction
2821

Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current at the paper leading edge in each
mode. SP2803 and SP2807 are multiplied by these SP values.
Normal: 120mm/sec, Low: 60mm/sec
The paper leading edge area can be adjusted with SP2822.

144

001 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st

*ENG

002 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd

*ENG

003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st

*ENG

004 Paper Transfer: Low: 2nd

*ENG

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]

System SP2xxx

[SP 2: SW Timing: L-Edge] DFU

2822

Adjusts the bias/ voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller/ discharge plate at the
paper leading edge between the erase margin area and the image area.
Normal: 120mm/sec, Low: 60mm/sec

001 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st

*ENG

002 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd

*ENG

003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st

*ENG

004 Paper Transfer: Low: 2nd

*ENG

[0 to 30 / 0 / 2 mm/step]

[SP 2: T-Edge Correct] DFU

Special 2 Paper: Trailing Edge Correction
2823

Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current for the paper trailing edge in each
mode. SP2803 and SP2807 are multiplied by these SP values.
Normal: 120mm/sec, Low: 60mm/sec
The paper trailing edge area can be adjusted with SP2824.

001 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st

*ENG

002 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd

*ENG

003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st

*ENG

004 Paper Transfer: Low: 2nd

*ENG

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]

[SP 2: SwTiming: T-Edge] DFU

2824

Adjusts the bias/voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller/discharge plate at the
paper trailing edge between the erase margin area and the image area.
Normal: 120mm/sec, Low: 60mm/sec

001 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st

*ENG

002 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd

*ENG

003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st

*ENG

004 Paper Transfer: Low: 2nd

*ENG

[-98 to 0 / 0 / 2 mm/step]

145

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

2830

[SP 2: Env. Correct Table] DFU

Normal: 120mm/sec, Low: 60mm/sec

003 Paper Transfer:BW:Normal:1st

*ENG

[1 to 50 / 23 / 1 /step]

004 Paper Transfer:BW:Normal:1st

*ENG

[1 to 50 / 26 / 1 /step]

005 Paper Transfer:FC:Normal:1st

*ENG

[1 to 50 / 38 / 1 /step]

006 Paper Transfer:FC:Normal:2nd

*ENG

[1 to 50 / 33 / 1 /step]

009 Paper Transfer:BW:Low:1st

*ENG

[1 to 50 / 32 / 1 /step]

010 Paper Transfer:BW:Low:2nd

*ENG

[1 to 50 / 21 / 1 /step]

011 Paper Transfer:FC:Low:1st

*ENG

[1 to 50 / 48 / 1 /step]

012 Paper Transfer:FC:Low:2nd

*ENG

[1 to 50 / 28 / 1 /step]

2833

[SP 5: Bias: BW]

Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for special paper 5 in black-and-white mode.

001 Paper Transfer

2837

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 15 / 1 A /step]

[SP 5: Bias: FC]

Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for special paper 5 in full color mode.

001 Paper Transfer

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 15 / 1 A /step]

[SP5: L-Edge Correct] DFU

Special 5Paper: Leading Edge Correction
2845

Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current at the paper leading edge in each
mode. SP2833 and SP2837 are multiplied by these SP values.
The paper leading edge area can be adjusted with SP2846.

001 Paper Transfer

146

*ENG

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]

System SP2xxx

[SP 5: SwTiming: L-Edge] DFU

2846

Adjusts the bias/ voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller/ discharge plate at the
paper leading edge between the erase margin area and the image area.

001 Paper Transfer

*ENG

[0 to 30 / 0 / 2 mm/step]

[SP5: T-Edge Correct] DFU

Special 5 Paper: Trailing Edge Correction
2847

Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current for the paper trailing edge in each
mode. SP2833 and SP2837 are multiplied by these SP values.

The paper trailing edge area can be adjusted with SP2848.

001 Paper Transfer

*ENG

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]

[SP 5: Sw Timing: T-Edge] DFU

2848

Adjusts the bias/voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller/discharge plate at the
paper trailing edge between the erase margin area and the image area.

001 Paper Transfer

*ENG

[-98 to 0 / 0 / 2 mm/step]

003 Paper Transfer:BW: 1st

*ENG

[1 to 50 / 17 / 1 /step]

005 Paper Transfer:FC: 1st

*ENG

[1 to 50 / 29 / 1 /step]

2849

[SP 5: Env. Correct Table] DFU

[SP3: Bias: BW]

2852

Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for special paper 3 in black-and-white mode.
Normal: 120mm/sec, Low: 60mm/sec

001 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st

*ENG

002 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd

*ENG

003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 11 / 1 A /step]

004 Paper Transfer: Low: 2nd

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 13 / 1 A /step]

[0 to 200 / 20 / 1 A /step]

147

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

[Special 3: Bias: FC]

2857

Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for special paper 3 in full color mode.
Normal: 120mm/sec, Low: 60mm/sec

001 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 25 / 1 A /step]

002 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 28 / 1 A /step]

003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 11 / 1 A /step]

004 Paper Transfer: Low: 2nd

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 14 / 1 A /step]

[SP 3: L-Edge Correct] DFU

Special 3 Paper: Leading Edge Correction
2871

Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current at the paper leading edge in each
mode. SP2852 and SP2857 are multiplied by these SP values.
Normal: 120mm/sec, Low: 60mm/sec
The paper leading edge area can be adjusted with SP2872.

001 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st

*ENG

002 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd

*ENG

003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st

*ENG

004 Paper Transfer: Low: 2nd

*ENG

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5% /step]

[Special 3: Sw Timing: Lead. Edge] DFU

2872

Adjusts the bias/ voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller/ discharge plate at the
paper leading edge between the erase margin area and the image area.
Normal: 120mm/sec, Low: 60mm/sec

148

001 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st

*ENG

002 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd

*ENG

003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st

*ENG

004 Paper Transfer: Low: 2nd

*ENG

[0 to 30 / 0 / 2 mm/step]

System SP2xxx

[SP 3: T-Edge Correct] DFU

Special 3 Paper: Trailing Edge Correction
2873

Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current for the paper trailing edge in each
mode. SP2852 and SP2857 are multiplied by these SP values.
Normal: 120mm/sec, Low: 60mm/sec
The paper trailing edge area can be adjusted with SP2874.

001 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st

*ENG

002 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd

*ENG

003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st

*ENG

004 Paper Transfer: Low: 2nd

*ENG

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]

[SP 3: Sw Timing: T-Edge] DFU

2874

Adjusts the bias/voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller/discharge plate at the
paper trailing edge between the erase margin area and the image area.
Normal: 120mm/sec, Low: 60mm/sec

001 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st

*ENG

002 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd

*ENG

003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st

*ENG

004 Paper Transfer: Low: 2nd

*ENG

2880

[-98 to 0 / 0 / 2 mm/step]

[SP 3: Env. Correct Table] DFU

Normal: 120mm/sec, Low: 60mm/sec

003 Paper Transfer:BW:Normal:1st

*ENG

[1 to 50 / 23 / 1 /step]

004 Paper Transfer:BW:Normal:1st

*ENG

[1 to 50 / 26 / 1 /step]

005 Paper Transfer:FC:Normal:1st

*ENG

[1 to 50 / 38 / 1 /step]

006 Paper Transfer:FC:Normal:2nd

*ENG

[1 to 50 / 33 / 1 /step]

009 Paper Transfer:BW:Low:1st

*ENG

[1 to 50 / 32 / 1 /step]

010 Paper Transfer:BW:Low:2nd

*ENG

[1 to 50 / 21 / 1 /step]
149

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

011 Paper Transfer:FC:Low:1st

*ENG

[1 to 50 / 48 / 1 /step]

012 Paper Transfer:FC:Low:2nd

*ENG

[1 to 50 / 28 / 1 /step]

2883

[SP 6: Bias: BW]

Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for special paper 6 in black-and-white mode.

001 Paper Transfer

3
2887

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 15 / 1 A /step]

[SP 6: Bias: FC]

Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for special paper 6 in full color mode.

001 Paper Transfer

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 15 / 1 A /step]

[SP6: L-Edge Correct] DFU

Special 5Paper: Leading Edge Correction
2895

Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current at the paper leading edge in each
mode. SP2883 and SP2887 are multiplied by these SP values.
The paper leading edge area can be adjusted with SP2896.

001 Paper Transfer

*ENG

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]

[SP 6: Sw Timing: L-Edge] DFU

2896

Adjusts the bias/ voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller/ discharge plate at the
paper leading edge between the erase margin area and the image area.

001 Paper Transfer

*ENG

[0 to 30 / 0 / 2 mm/step]

[SP6: T-Edge Correct] DFU

Special 5 Paper: Trailing Edge Correction
2897

Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current for the paper trailing edge in each
mode. SP2883 and SP2887 are multiplied by these SP values.
The paper trailing edge area can be adjusted with SP2898.

150

System SP2xxx

001 Paper Transfer

*ENG

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]

[SP 6: Sw Timing: T-Edge] DFU

2898

Adjusts the bias/voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller/discharge plate at the
paper trailing edge between the erase margin area and the image area.

001 Paper Transfer

2899

*ENG

[-98 to 0 / 0 / 2 mm/step]

[SP 6: Env. Correct Table] DFU

003 Paper Transfer:BW: 1st

*ENG

[1 to 50 / 17 / 1 /step]

005 Paper Transfer:FC: 1st

*ENG

[1 to 50 / 29 / 1 /step]

2900

[Drum Idling Time]

Specifies the drum idling time at job end for each line speed.

001 Normal Speed

*ENG

[0 to 60 / 5 / 1sec /step]

002 Low Speed

*ENG

[0 to 120 / 5 / 1sec /step]

[Fus.Reload:DrumIdleTimeOffset] DFU
2901

Adjusts the drum idling time for each coverage at the re-load temperature in the half speed
mode.

001 Coverage:0-6%

*ENG

[-60 to 300 / 0 / 1 sec/step]

002 Coverage:6-10%

*ENG

[-60 to 300 / 0 / 1 sec/step]

003 Coverage:10-20%

*ENG

[-60 to 300 / 0 / 1 sec/step]

004 Coverage:20-40%

*ENG

[-60 to 300 / 0 / 1 sec/step]

005 Coverage:40%over

*ENG

[-60 to 300 / 0 / 1 sec/step]

2902

[OPC Drum Rev Time] DFU

Adjusts the time for how long the drum motor reverses after job end.

001 All: BW

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 60 / 10 msec/step]

002 All: FC

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 50 / 10 msec/step]

151

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

003 DevRev: FC

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 70 / 10 msec/step]

004 DevRev: Bk

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 200 / 10 msec/step]

005 All

*ENG

[0 to 400000 / 0 / 10/step]

006 K

*ENG

007 C

*ENG

008 M

*ENG

009 Y

*ENG

[0 to 999999999 / - / 1/step]

[Brake Time] DFU

2903

001

Adjusts the time when the image transfer belt motor and drum motors reverses from normal
rotation after job end.
Bk OPC Drum & Intermediate
Transfer

*ENG

002 FC OPC Drum

*ENG

003 FC Development

*ENG

2904

[ImageTrunsferRevTime] DFU
Adjusts the time for how long the image transfer belt motor reverses after job end.

003 All
2906

[290 to 5000 / 290 / 10 msec/step]

*ENG

[Drum Stop Angle] DFU

001 Color

*ENG

002 Bk

*ENG

2908

[0 to 200 / 50 / 10 msec/step]

[0 to 359 / 0 / 1 deg/step]

[GainAdj:TransferM] DFU
Gain Adjustment of Image Transfer Belt Motor
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]

001 120 mm/sec

*ENG

0: GAIN: High speed

1: GAIN: Low speed

152

System SP2xxx

[0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step]
002 60 mm/sec

*ENG

0: GAIN: High speed

1: GAIN: Low speed

2915

[GainAdj:BkOpcDevM] DFU
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]

001 120 mm/sec

*ENG

0: GAIN: High speed

1: GAIN: Low speed

[0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step]
002 60 mm/sec

*ENG

0: GAIN: High speed

1: GAIN: Low speed

2916

[GainAdj:ColorOpcM] DFU
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]

001 120 mm/sec

*ENG

0: GAIN: High speed

1: GAIN: Low speed
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step]

002 60 mm/sec

*ENG

0: GAIN: High speed

1: GAIN: Low speed

2920

[Transfer Motor Ctrl]

DFU

001 TransferMotorCtrl

*ENG

[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: FG Control
1: ENC Control

002

SC443 Count

*ENG

[0 to 10 / 0 / 1 /step]

Displays the detection times of SC443.

153

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

[P-Transfer:Bias Limit] DFU

2930

Paper Transfer Roller Feed-back: Threshold Adjustment

Adjusts the threshold between high resistance (division 1) and low resistance (division 2) at
the paper transfer roller. This SP affects SP2931 to SP2939.

001 Bias

2931
001

003

2940

*ENG

[0 to 7000 / 6000 / 10 V/step]

*ENG

[-1000 to 1000 / 0 / 10 msec /step]

[Transfer Roller CL:Timing]

T15:Standard Speed

Specifies the timing for the transfer roller cleaning after job end in the normal speed mode.
T15:Low Speed

*ENG

[-2000 to 2000 / 0 / 10 msec /step]

Specifies the timing for the transfer roller cleaning after job end in the low speed mode.
[Charge Bias On Timing]

001 T1:Standard Speed DFU

T1:Low Speed

*ENG

[-500 to 1000 / 0 / 10 msec /step]

*ENG

[-500 to 1000 / -80 / -80 msec /step]

If a horizontal white band at 40 mm from the leading edge occurs in the low speed mode,
002 change this setting from "-80" to "-500".
[Side Effect]:
"580 msec" is added to the first copy/ print time when using the low speed mode.
2941

[Dev. Bias Down Mode] DFU

001 T5:Bk:Normal

*ENG

[-140 to 140 / 0 / 10 msec /step]

002 T7:FC:Normal

*ENG

[-140 to 140 / 0 / 10 msec /step]

003 T5:Bk:Low

*ENG

[-210 to 210 / 0 / 10 msec /step]

004 T7: FC: Low

*ENG

[-210 to 210 / 0 / 10 msec /step]

*ENG

[0 to 10 / 0 / 1 sec/step]

2960

[Process Interval] DFU

001 Additional Time

154

System SP2xxx

2971
001

003

2972

[BW Non-Image:Bias ON]

T1 BW:Bias On:Normal

*ENG

[360 to 80 / 0 / 10 msec/step]

Adjusts the timing for the non-image area bias of the image transfer roller in the normal speed.
T1 BW:Bias On:Low

*ENG

[780 to 210 / 0 / 10 msec/step]

Adjusts the timing for the non-image area bias of the image transfer roller in the low speed.

[BW Image Request Timing] DFU

001 Fwait:K:Standard Speed

*ENG

[0 to 3000 / 0 / 10 msec /step]

002 Fwait:K:Low Speed

*ENG

[0 to 3000 / 0 / 10 msec /step]

*ENG

[0 to 5000 / 0 / 1 page/step]

2973

[Forced Process Down Threshold]

-

001 Specifies the threshold pages for the forced processing stop at a continuous printing job.
0: No forced processing stop (default)
2974

[FC Image Request Timing]

001 Fwait:Y:Standard Speed

*ENG

[0 to 3000 / 0 / 10 msec/step]

003 Fwait:Y:Low Speed

*ENG

[0 to 3000 / 0 / 10 msec/step]

2990

001

[Print Duty Control]

Duty Control State

*ENG

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: No limit, 1: Limit

Limit or does not limit the duty control for a continuous printing job.
002

Duty Control Thresh Time

*ENG

[0 to 195 / 100 / 10 min./step]

Specifies the judgment time for the duty control for a continuous printing job.
Duty Control Thresh

*ENG

[0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm/step]

003 Specifies the threshold for the duty control for a continuous printing job.
0: No duty control (default)

155

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

Forced CPM Down Thresh:

004 No Duty Control

*ENG

[0 to 5000 / 0 / 1 page/step]

Specifies the threshold page for the forced processing stop without the duty limit.
Drum Stop Time: No Duty
005 Control

*ENG

[300 to 1500 / 500 / 10 msec/step]

Specifies the drum brake time without the duty limit.

ITB Stop Time: No Duty

006 Control

*ENG

[300 to 1500 / 500 / 10 msec/step]

Specifies the ITB brake time without the duty limit.

Forced CPM Down Thresh:
007 Duty Control

*ENG

[0 to 5000 / 1 / 1 page/step]

Specifies the threshold page for the forced processing stop with the duty limit.
008

009

010

Drum Stop Time: Duty Control

*ENG

[300 to 1500 / 1500 / 10 msec/step]

Specifies the drum brake time with the duty limit.

ITB Stop Time: Duty Control

*ENG

[300 to 1500 / 1500 / 10 msec/step]

Specifies the ITB brake time with the duty limit.

Duty Control: Start Time

*ENG

Displays the execution time of the duty limit control.

FC Development Stop Time:

011 No Duty Control

*ENG

[290 to 5000 / 290 / 10 msec/step]

Specifies the development stop time without the duty limit.

FC Development Stop Time:
012 Duty Control

*ENG

[290 to 5000 / 1550 / 10 msec/step]

Specifies the development stop time with the duty limit.

013

156

Duty Control Time

Specifies the duty control time.

*ENG

[0 to 300 / 30 / 1 min/step]

System SP3xxx

System SP3xxx
SP3-XXX (Process)
3011

[Process Cont. Manual Execution]

001 Normal Procon

002 Toner Density Adjst

Executes the normal process control manually

(potential control).
Check the result with SP3-325-001 after executing
this SP.

Executes the toner density adjustment manually.

Check the result with SP3-325-001 after executing
this SP.
Executes the process control that is normally done
before ACC.

003 Procon BF-ACC

004 With Full MUSIC

Executes the process control that is normally done

at the same time as MUSIC. This SP does the MUSIC
(line position adjustment) twice.

005 With Normal MUSIC

Executes the process control that is normally done

at the same time as MUSIC. This SP does the MUSIC
(line position adjustment) once.

The type of process control is selected with

SP3-041-004.

[Process Cont. Check Result] Process Control Self-check Result

Displays the result of the latest process control self-check.
3012

All colors are displayed. The results are displayed in the order "Y C M K"
e.g., 11 (Y) 99 (C) 11 (M) 11 (K): The self-check for Cyan failed but the others were
successful.
See the "Error Condition Tables" in the Process Control Error section for details.

157

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

001 History: Latest

*ENG

002 Result: Latest 1

*ENG

003 Result: Latest 2

*ENG

004 Result: Latest 3

*ENG

005 Result: Latest 4

*ENG

006 Result: Latest 5

*ENG

007 Result: Latest 6

*ENG

008 Result: Latest 7

*ENG

009 Result: Latest 8

*ENG

010 Result: Latest 9

*ENG

3013

[TD Sen Initial Setting] Developer Initialization Setting

001 Execution: ALL

002 Execution: COL

003 Execution: Bk

004 Execution: C

005 Execution: M

006 Execution: Y

3014

[1111 to 99999999 / - / 1/step]

Executes the TD sensor initialization for each

color.

[TD Sen Initial Set Result] Developer Initialization Result: Display

[0 to 9999 / - / 1 /step ]
Display: YMCK

*ENG

1: Success
2 to 9: Failure

001 Displays the developer initialization result. See the "Error Condition Tables" in the Process
Control Error section for details on the meaning of each code.
All colors are displayed. Values are displayed in the order Y M C Bk.
e.g., 1 (Y) 1 (M) 2 (C) 1 (Bk): Initialization of Cyan failed but the others succeeded.

158

System SP3xxx

3015

[Forced Toner Supply] Forced Toner Supply ([Color])

001 Execution: ALL

002 Execution: COL (MCY)

003 Execution: Bk

004 Execution: C

005 Execution: M

006 Execution: Y

3016

Specifies the manual toner supply time for each color.

*ENG

002 Supply Time: C

*ENG

003 Supply Time: M

*ENG

004 Supply Time: Y

*ENG

001005

[Forced Toner Supply Cntl] Forced Toner Supply Setting ([Color])

001 Supply Time: Bk

3020

Executes the manual toner supply to the

development unit.

[0 to 30 / 4 / 1 sec/step]

[Vt Limit Error]

DFU

001 Delta Vt Threshold

*ENG

[0 to 5 / 5 / 0.01 V/step]

002 Upper Threshold

*ENG

[0 to 5 / 4.7 / 0.01 V/step]

003 Upper Error Thresh

*ENG

[0 to 99 / 20 / 1 time/step]

004 Lower Threshold

*ENG

[0 to 5 / 0.5 / 0.01 V/step]

005 Lower Error Thresh

*ENG

[0 to 99 / 10 / 1 times/step]

159

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

006 Upper Counter: Bk

*ENG

007 Upper Counter: C

*ENG

008 Upper Counter: M

*ENG

009 Upper Counter: Y

*ENG

Displays the total times of the Vt upper or lower

limit error.

010 Lower Counter: Bk

*ENG

[0 to 99 / 0 / 1 times/step]

011 Lower Counter: C

*ENG

012 Lower Counter: M

*ENG

013 Lower Counter: Y

*ENG

3021

[TD Sensor Initial Set] Developer Initialization Setting

Specifies the developer agitation time for each color at the developer initialization.

001 Agitation Time: Bk

*ENG

002 Agitation Time: C

*ENG

003 Agitation Time: M

*ENG

004 Agitation Time: Y

*ENG

005008

[0 to 200 / 30 / 1 sec/step]

Sets the execution flag of the developer initialization for each color.

005 Execution Flag: Bk

*ENG

006 Execution Flag: C

*ENG

0: Flag OFF, 1: Flag ON

007 Execution Flag: M

*ENG

008 Execution Flag: Y

*ENG

This flag is cleared after executing TD sensor

initialization.

009 Initial Setting Off

*ENG

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]

Enables or disables developer initialization.

DFU
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0: Enable, 1: Disable

3022

160

[Toner Replenishment Mode]

Sets the toner supply flag of each color.

System SP3xxx

005 Execution Flag: Bk

*ENG

006 Execution Flag: C

*ENG

0: Flag OFF, 1: Flag ON

007 Execution Flag: M

*ENG

008 Execution Flag: Y

*ENG

This flag is cleared after executing TD sensor

initialization.

3041

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]

[Process Control Type]

[0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step ] Alphanumeric

001

Bias Control

*ENG

0: FIXED (Use the fixed values for the charge DC bias

and development DC bias set with SP2-005 and
SP2-229.)
1: CONTROL

Enables or disables the process control.

[0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step] Alphanumeric
002

LD Power Control

*ENG

0: FIXED (at the value in SP2221-xxx)

1: CONTROL (adjusted by process control)

Selects the LD power control mode.

AutoControl Prohibition
003 Set

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] Alphanumeric
*ENG

0: Permit
1: Forbid

Enables or disables the automatic process control at power-on or door opening.

[0 to 2 / 2 / 1/step]
004

Pre-ACC Process Control

*ENG

0: Not Execute
1: Process Control
2: TC Control

Selects the process control mode that is done before ACC.

[0 to 2 / 2 / 1/step]
005 P-Pattern Selection

*ENG

0: FIXED
1: INITIALIZED
2: CALCULATED

161

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

3043

[TD Adjustment Mode]

Repeat Number: Power ON

*ENG

[0 to 9 / 4 / 1 time/step]

Specifies the maximum number of repeats of the toner density adjustment at power on.
0: Disabled, 1 to 3: Repeat number,
001 4: Repeat three times (No consumption mode)
5: Repeat three times (Toner is supplied only when the toner density is too low, and toner is
consumed only when the toner density is too dark.)

6 to 9: Disabled
Repeat Number: Initial

*ENG

[0 to 9 / 3 / 1 time/step]

Specifies the maximum number of repeats of the toner density adjustment at the developer
initialization.
002

0: Disabled, 1 to 3: Repeat number,

4: Repeat three times (No consumption mode)
5: Repeat three times (Toner is supplied only when the toner density is too low, and toner is
consumed only when the toner density is too dark.)
6 to 9: Disabled
Repeat Number: Non-use

*ENG

[0 to 9 / 0 / 1 time/step]

Specifies the maximum number of repeats of the toner density adjustment in stand by mode.
0: Disabled, 1 to 3: Repeat number,
003 4: Repeat three times (No consumption mode)
5: Repeat three times (Toner is supplied only when the toner density is too low, and toner is
consumed only when the toner density is too dark.)
6 to 9: Disabled
Repeat Number: ACC

*ENG

[0 to 9 / 3 / 1 time/step]

Specifies the maximum number of repeats of the toner density adjustment at ACC.
0: Disabled, 1 to 3: Repeat number,
004 4: Repeat three times (No consumption mode)
5: Repeat three times (Toner is supplied only when the toner density is too low, and toner is
consumed only when the toner density is too dark.)
6 to 9: Disabled

162

System SP3xxx

005

Repeat Number: Recovery

*ENG

[0 to 9 / 3 / 1 time/step]

*ENG

[0 to 9 / 4 / 1 time/step]

Not used
Repeat Number: Job End

Specifies the maximum number of repeats of the toner density adjustment at job end.
0: Disabled, 1 to 3: Repeat number,
006 4: Repeat three times (No consumption mode)
5: Repeat three times (Toner is supplied only when the toner density is too low, and toner is
consumed only when the toner density is too dark.)

6 to 9: Disabled
Repeat Number:Interrupt

*ENG

[0 to 9 / 0 / 1 time/step]

007 Specifies the maximum number of repeats of the toner density adjustment during printing.
DFU
008

Toner Supply Coeff.

*ENG

[0 to 25.5 / 10 / 0.1 sec/step]

Adjusts the time for the toner supply mode when a toner density is detected to be low.
C-pattern: Bk

*ENG

[0 to 255 / 5 / 1 time/step]

009 Specifies the belt mark generating time for checking the black toner density when toner
density is detected to be low at the toner density adjustment.
C-pattern: C

*ENG

[0 to 255 / 5 / 1 time/step]

010 Specifies the belt mark generating time for checking the magenta toner density when toner
density is detected to be low at the toner density adjustment.
C-pattern: M

*ENG

[0 to 255 / 5 / 1 time/step]

011 Specifies the belt mark generating time for checking the cyan toner density when toner density
is detected to be low at the toner density adjustment.
C-pattern: Y

*ENG

[0 to 255 / 5 / 1 time/step]

012 Specifies the belt mark generating time for checking the yellow toner density when toner
density is detected to be low at the toner density adjustment.
013

T1 Bias: Bk

*ENG

[0 to 80 / 10 / 1 A/step]

Adjusts the image transfer belt bias for Black.

163

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

014

015

016

3
017

T1 Bias: C

T1 Bias: M

T1 Bias: Y

Developer Agitation Time

164

*ENG

[0 to 80 / 10 / 1 A/step]

*ENG

[0 to 250 / 10 / 1 sec/step]

Specifies the developer mixing time at the toner density adjustment.

*ENG

[0 to 15 / 15 / 1 /step]

Adjusts the LD duty for the toner consumption mode at the toner density adjustment.
In toner consumption mode, toner is discharged when the detected development gamma
values (SP3611-001) exceed the target values (SP3611-005) by more than the specified
thresholds (SP3239-009).
*ENG

[0 to 15 / 15 / 1 /step]

Adjusts the LD duty for the toner consumption mode at the toner density adjustment.
In toner consumption mode, toner is discharged when the detected development gamma
values (SP3611-002) exceed the target values (SP3611-006) by more than the specified
thresholds (SP3239-009).
*ENG

[0 to 15 / 15 / 1 /step]

Adjusts the LD duty for the toner consumption mode at the toner density adjustment.
In toner consumption mode, toner is discharged when the detected development gamma
values (SP3611-003) exceed the target values (SP3611-007) by more than the specified
thresholds (SP3239-009).
C-Pattern: LD: DUTY: Y

021

[0 to 80 / 10 / 1 A/step]

Adjusts the image transfer belt bias for Yellow.

C-Pattern: LD: DUTY: M

020

*ENG

Adjusts the image transfer belt bias for Cyan.

C-Pattern: LD: DUTY: C

019

[0 to 80 / 10 / 1 A/step]

Adjusts the image transfer belt bias for Magenta.

C-Pattern: LD: DUTY: Bk

018

*ENG

*ENG

[0 to 15 / 15 / 1 /step]

Adjusts the LD duty for the toner consumption mode at the toner density adjustment.
In toner consumption mode, toner is discharged when the detected development gamma
values (SP3611-004) exceed the target values (SP3611-008) by more than the specified
thresholds (SP3239-009).

System SP3xxx

3044

[Toner Supply Type] Toner Supply Type ([Color])

Selects the toner supply method type.

001 Bk

*ENG

002 C

*ENG

003 M

*ENG

004 Y

*ENG

3045

[0 to 4 / 4 / 1/step] Alphanumeric
0: FIXED (with the supply rates stored with SP 3401)
1: PID (Vtref_Fixed)
2: PID (Vtref_Control)
3: MBD (Vtref_Fixed)
4: MBD (Vtref_Control)

[Toner End Detection: Set]

Enables/disables the toner alert display on the LCD.
DFU

001 ON/OFF

*ENG

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0: Detect, 1: Not Detect
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]

002 NE Detection

*ENG

0: ALL (Calculation and TE sensor)

1: TE Sensor

3101

[Toner End/Near End]

Displays the amount of each color toner.
001 Toner Replenishment: Bk

*ENG

002 Toner Replenishment: C

*ENG

003 Toner Replenishment: M

*ENG

004 Toner Replenishment: Y

*ENG

[1 to 600 / 235 / 1 g/step]

005-008 Displays the consumed amount of each color toner.

005 Toner Consumption: Bk

*ENG

006 Toner Consumption: C

*ENG

007 Toner Consumption: M

*ENG

008 Toner Consumption: Y

*ENG

[0 to 3000 / 0 / 0.001 g/step]

165

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

009-012

Displays the remaining amount of each color toner. These are calculated by the operating
times of the toner supply pumps.

009 Toner Remaining: Bk

*ENG

010 Toner Remaining: C

*ENG

011 Toner Remaining: M

*ENG

012 Toner Remaining: Y

*ENG

[50000 to 600 / 0 / 0.001 g/step]

Adjusts the threshold of toner near end for each color. The toner near end message appears
on the LCD when the remaining toner amount reaches this threshold. When one of these
013-016
SPs (SP3-101-009 to 012 or -032 to -035) reaches this threshold, toner near end is
detected.
013 Near End Thresh: Bk

*ENG

014 Near End Thresh: C

*ENG

015 Near End Thresh: M

*ENG

016 Near End Thresh: Y

*ENG

Delta Vt Threshold

*ENG

[0 to 600 / 13 / 1 g/step]

[0 to 600 / 3 / 1 g/step]

[0 to 5 / 0.5 / 0.01 V/step]

021 This SP is the threshold for toner end. Delta Vt: Vt-Vtref
When both this SP and SP3-101-026 occur at same time, toner end is determined.
022-025

Displays the total delta Vt (Vt-Vtref) value for each color.These are calculated by pixel
counting.

022 Delta Vt Sum: Bk

*ENG

023 Delta Vt Sum: C

*ENG

024 Delta Vt Sum: M

*ENG

025 Delta Vt Sum: Y

*ENG

026 Delta Vt Sum Threshold

*ENG

[0 to 655 / 0 / 0.01 V/step]

[0 to 255 / 10 / 1 V/step]

028-031 Displays the consumed toner amount calculated with the pixel count for each color.

166

System SP3xxx

028 Pixel: Consumption: Bk

*ENG

029 Pixel: Consumption: C

*ENG

030 Pixel: Consumption: M

*ENG

031 Pixel: Consumption: Y

*ENG

[0 to 3000 / 0 / 0.001 g/step]

032-035 Displays the remaining toner amount for each color, using pixel count.
032 Pixel: Remaining : Bk

*ENG

033 Pixel: Remaining : C

*ENG

034 Pixel: Remaining : M

*ENG

035 Pixel: Remaining : Y

*ENG

3
[-50000 to 600 / 0 / 0.001 g/step]

040-043 Displays the pixel M/A for each color.

040 Pixel M/A: Bk

*ENG

041 Pixel M/A: C

*ENG

042 Pixel M/A: M

*ENG

043 Pixel M/A: Y

*ENG

[0 to 1 / 0.6 / 0.001 mg/cm2/step]

*ENG

Adjusts the delta Vt (Vt Vtref) of toner end

before toner near end is detected.

044 Delta Vt Thresh BF NE

[0 to 1 / 0.05 / 0.001 mg/cm2/step]

[0 to 5 / 0.5 / 0.01 V/step]

045 Delta Vt Sum Thresh BF NE

*ENG

Adjusts the total delta Vt (Vt Vtref) of toner

end before toner near end is detected.
[0 to 255 / 10 / 1 V/step]

046-049 Displays the latest mohno off time.

046 Mohno Off Time: Bk

*ENG

047 Mohno Off Time: C

*ENG

048 Mohno Off Time: M

*ENG

049 Mohno Off Time: Y

*ENG

[0 to 0 x FFFFFFFF / 0 / 1 sec/step]

050-053 Adjusts the threshold of the remaining toner for the toner near-end detection. DFU

167

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

050 TE Sn Detect Thresh:Bk

*ENG

051 TE Sn Detect Thresh:C

*ENG

052 TE Sn Detect Thresh:M

*ENG

053 TE Sn Detect Thresh:Y

*ENG

[1 to 600 / 57 / 1 g/step]

[Toner End Recovery]

3102

001 Repeat: Bk

*ENG

002 Repeat: C

*ENG

003 Repeat: M

*ENG

004 Repeat: Y

*ENG

3131

[1 to 20 / 5 / 1 time/step]

[TE Count: Display]

Display the number of toner end detections for each color.

001 Bk

*ENG

002 C

*ENG

003 M

*ENG

004 Y

*ENG

3201

168

Adjusts the number of times toner supply is attempted for each color when the TD sensor
continues to detect toner end during toner recovery.

[0 to 99 / 0 / 1 time/step]

[TD Sensor: Vt Display]

Display the current voltage of the TD sensor for each color.

001 Current: Bk

*ENG

002 Current: C

*ENG

003 Current: M

*ENG

004 Current: Y

*ENG

[0 to 5.5 / 0.01 / 0.01 V/step]

System SP3xxx

[Vt Shift: Display/Set]

3211

Adjusts the Vt correction value for each line speed.

Normal: 120 mm/sec, Low: 60 mm/sec

001 Med Speed Shift:Bk

*ENG

002 Med Speed Shift:C

*ENG

003 Med Speed Shift:M

*ENG

004 Med Speed Shift:Y

*ENG

005 Low Speed Shift:Bk

*ENG

006 Low Speed Shift:C

*ENG

007 Low Speed Shift:M

*ENG

008 Low Speed Shift:Y

*ENG

013 Low TCShift: K

*ENG

014 Low TCShift: C

*ENG

015 Low TCShift: M

*ENG

016 Low TCShift: Y

*ENG

3221

[0 to 5 / 0.28 / 0.01 V/step]

[0 to 5 / 0.31 / 0.01 V/step]

[-0.5 to 0.5 / 0 / 0.01 V/step]

Displays or adjusts the current Vtcnt value for each color.

*ENG

002 Current: C

*ENG

003 Current: M

*ENG

004 Current: Y

*ENG

008

[Vtcnt: Display/Set]

001 Current: Bk

005-

[0 to 5 / 0.29 / 0.01 V/step]

[2 to 5 / 4 / 0.01 V/step]

Displays or adjusts the Vtcnt value for each color at developer initialization.

169

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

005 Initial: Bk

*ENG

006 Initial: C

*ENG

007 Initial: M

*ENG

008 Initial: Y

*ENG

3222

Displays or adjusts the current Vtref value for each color.

*ENG

002 Current: C

*ENG

003 Current: M

*ENG

004 Current: Y

*ENG

008

*ENG

006 Initial: C

*ENG

007 Initial: M

*ENG

008 Initial: Y

*ENG

012

[0 to 5.5 / 3 / 0.01 V/step]

Displays or adjusts Vtref correction by pixel coverage for each color.

009 Pixel Correction: Bk

*ENG

010 Pixel Correction: C

*ENG

011 Pixel Correction: M

*ENG

012 Pixel Correction: Y

*ENG

3223

[0 to 5.5 / 3 / 0.01 V/step]

Displays or adjusts the Vtref value for each color at developer initialization.

005 Initial: Bk

009-

170

[Vtcnt: Display/Set]

001 Current: Bk

005-

[2 to 5 / 4 / 0.01 V/step]

[-5 to 5.5 / 0 / 0.01 V/step]

[-5 to 5 / 0 / 0.01 V/step]

[Vtref U/L-Limit Set]

Adjusts the lower or upper limit value of Vtref for each color.

System SP3xxx

001 Lower: Bk

*ENG

002 Lower: C

*ENG

003 Lower: M

*ENG

004 Lower: Y

*ENG

005 Upper: Bk

*ENG

006 Upper: C

*ENG

007 Upper: M

*ENG

008 Upper: Y

*ENG

009 Initial TC

*ENG

010 Upper: TC

*ENG

011 Lower: TC

*ENG

012 Upper Sensitivity

*ENG

013 Lower Sensitivity

*ENG

014 TD Thresh H/M

*ENG

[1 to 10 / 3.5 / 0.1 wt%/step]

015 TD Thresh M/L

*ENG

[1 to 10 / 3.5 / 0.1 wt%/step]

016 UpperTC:K

*ENG

017 UpperTC:C

*ENG

[1 to 15 / 8.5 / 0.1 wt%/step]

018 UpperTC:M

*ENG

Adjusts the upper limit of the toner concentration

for each color.

019 UpperTC:Y

*ENG

3224

[0 to 5 / 2 / 0.01 V/step]

[0 to 5 / 4 / 0.01 V/step]

Adjusts the initial toner concentration.

[1 to 15 / 7 / 0.1 wt%/step]
Adjusts the upper limit of the toner concentration.
[1 to 15 / 8.5 / 0.1 wt%/step]
Adjusts the lower limit of the toner concentration.
[1 to 15 / 4 / 0.1 wt%/step]
Adjusts the upper limit of the TD sensor sensitivity.
[0.2 to 0.5 / 0.44 / 0.001 V/wt% /step]
Adjusts the lower limit of the TD sensor sensitivity.
[0.2 to 0.5 / 0.209 / 0.001 V/wt% /step]

[Vtref Correct: Pixel]

Adjusts the coefficient of Vtref correction for each coverage and color.

171

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

001 Low Coverage Coeff. Bk

*ENG

002 Low Coverage Coeff.C

*ENG

003 Low Coverage Coeffi.M

*ENG

004 Low Coverage Coeff. Y

*ENG

005 High Coverage Coeff, Bk

*ENG

006 High Coverage Coeff, C

*ENG

007 High Coverage Coeff, M

*ENG

008 High Coverage Coeff, Y

*ENG

009 Low Coverage: Thresh

*ENG

[0 to 5 / 0.2 / 0.1 /step]

[0 to 5 / 0.3 / 0.01 V/step]

Adjusts the threshold of the low

coverage.
[0 to 20 / 3 / 0.1 %/step]

010 High Coverage: Thresh:M

*ENG

Adjusts the threshold of the high

coverage.
[0 to 100 / 60 / 1 %/step]

172

011 TC Upper Limit Correction

*ENG

[0 to 5 / 0.5 / 0.1 wt%/step]

012 TC Upper Limit:Display:Bk

*ENG

013 TC Upper Limit:Display: C

*ENG

014 TC Upper Limit:Display: M

*ENG

015 TC Upper Limit:Display: Y

*ENG

016 Process Control Threshold:M

*ENG

[0 to 255 / 50 / 1 time/step]

017 High Coverage: Threshold:H

*ENG

Adjusts the threshold of the high

coverage.

018 High Coverage: Threshold:L

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 20 / 1 %/step]

019 Process Control Thresh:H

*ENG

020 Process Control Thresh:L

*ENG

021 Initial ProCon Thresh

*ENG

[0 to 255 / 6 / 1 time/step]

022 High Coverage Thresh:LS

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 10 / 1 %/step]

[1 to 15 / 8.5 / 0.1 wt% /step]

[0 to 255 / 14 / 1 time/step]

System SP3xxx

023 Process Control Thresh:LS

3230

*ENG

[0 to 255 / 4 / 1 time/step]

[Toner Supply MBD] DFU

001 ADD:TIME

*ENG

002 ADD:K

*ENG

003 ADD:C

*ENG

004 ADD:M

*ENG

005 ADD:Y

*ENG

[0 to 2000 / 200 / 10 msec/step]

[0.01 to 2 / 1 / 0.01 /step]

007 ADD:LowSpd

*ENG

[0.01 to 5 / 1 / 0.01 /step]

008 MSEC_V

*ENG

[0 to 1 / 0.080 / 0.001/step]

009 N_Delay

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 27 / 1 /step]

030 PID:I:K

*ENG

031 PID:I:C

*ENG

032 PID:I:M

*ENG

033 PID:I:Y

*ENG

034 PID:P:K

*ENG

035 PID:P:C

*ENG

036 PID:P:M

*ENG

037 PID:P:Y

*ENG

039 PID:I:LowSpd

*ENG

041 PID:P:LowSpd

*ENG

060 AWILOW:K

*ENG

061 AWILOW:C

*ENG

062 AWILOW:M

*ENG

063 AWILOW:Y

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 0.4 / 0.01 /step]

[0 to 100 / 8 / 0.01 /step]

[0 to 5 / 0.5 / 0.01 /step]

[-1 to 1 / 0.125 / 0.0001 /step]

173

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

174

064 AWPUP:K

*ENG

065 AWPUP:C

*ENG

066 AWPUP:M

*ENG

067 AWPUP:Y

*ENG

070 AWILOW:LowSpd

*ENG

071 AWPUP:LowSpd

*ENG

090 SMITH:K

*ENG

091 SMITH:C

*ENG

092 SMITH:M

*ENG

093 SMITH:Y

*ENG

095 SMITH:LowSpd

*ENG

100 Int_conserve_I_K

*ENG

101 Int_conserve_I_C

*ENG

102 Int_conserve_I_M

*ENG

103 Int_conserve_I_Y

*ENG

110 ANC_ref_conserve_K

*ENG

111 ANC_ref_conserve_C

*ENG

112 ANC_ref_conserve_M

*ENG

113 ANC_ref_conserve_Y

*ENG

120 ANC_A3_K

*ENG

121 ANC_A3_C

*ENG

122 ANC_A3_M

*ENG

123 ANC_A3_Y

*ENG

[-1 to 1 / 1 / 0.0001 /step]

[0 to 100 / 2 / 0.01 /step]

[0 to 2 / 0.06 / 0.01 /step]

[0 to 5 / 1.5 / 0.01 /step]

[-1000 to 1000 / 0 / 0.0001 /step]

[-1000 to 1000 / 0 / 0.0001 /step]

[0 to 1 / 0.17 / 0.001 /step]

System SP3xxx

124 ANC_A4_K

*ENG

125 ANC_A4_C

*ENG

126 ANC_A4_M

*ENG

127 ANC_A4_Y

*ENG

130 ANC_A3_LowSpd

*ENG

[0 to 1 / 0.44 / 0.001 /step]

131 ANCA4T_LowSpd

*ENG

[0 to 1 / 0.4 / 0.001 /step]

150 AWPNI_K

*ENG

151 AWPNI_C

*ENG

152 AWPNI_M

*ENG

153 AWPNI_Y

*ENG

154 PID

*ENG

180 ANCLA_K

*ENG

181 ANCLA_C

*ENG

182 ANCLA_M

*ENG

183 ANCLA_Y

*ENG

184 ANCLB_K

*ENG

185 ANCLB_C

*ENG

186 ANCLB_M

*ENG

187 ANCLB_Y

*ENG

190 ANCLA_LowSpd

*ENG

[0 to 5 / 0.36 / 0.01 /step]

191 ANCLB_LowSpd

*ENG

[0 to 5 / 0.29 / 0.01 /step]

210 PIX_TBL_1

*ENG

211 PIX_TBL_2

*ENG

212 PIX_TBL_3

*ENG

213 PIX_TBL_4

*ENG

214 PIX_TBL_5

*ENG

[0 to 1 / 0.17 / 0.001 /step]

[-10 to 10 / 0.2 / 0.001 /step]

[0 to 5 / 1 / 0.01 /step]

[0 to 1 / 0.25 / 0.001 /step]

[0 to 1 / 0.31 / 0.001 /step]

[0 to 5 / 1 / 0.01 /step]

175

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

215 PIX_TBL_6

*ENG

216 PIX_TBL_7

*ENG

217 PIX_TBL_8

*ENG

218 PIX_TBL_9

*ENG

219 PIX_TBL_10

*ENG

220 PIX_TBL_11

*ENG

221 PIX_TBL_12

*ENG

222 PIX_COR_K

*ENG

223 PIX_COR_C

*ENG

224 PIX_COR_M

*ENG

225 PIX_COR_Y

*ENG

226 SEL_PIX_AVE

*ENG

[1 to 5 / 2 / 1 /step]

231 PID_I_LIM1_Std

*ENG

[0 to 1 / 0.156 / 0.001 /step]

233 PID_I_LIM1_LowSpd

*ENG

[0 to 1 / 0.078 / 0.001 /step]

234 PID_I_LIM2_Std

*ENG

[0 to 1 / 0.156 / 0.001 /step]

236 PID_I_LIM2_LowSpd

*ENG

[0 to 1 / 0. 078 / 0.001 /step]

237 PID_P_LIM1_Std

*ENG

[0 to 1 / 0.156 / 0.001 /step]

239 PID_P_LIM1_LowSpd

*ENG

[0 to 1 / 0. 078 / 0.001 /step]

240 PID_P_LIM2_Std

*ENG

[0 to 1 / 0.156 / 0.001 /step]

242 PID_P_LIM2_LowSpd

*ENG

[0 to 1 / 0. 078 / 0.001 /step]

243 PID_I_STDtoLOW

*ENG

[0 to 5 / 0.5 / 0.01 /step]

244 PID_I_LOWtoSTD

*ENG

[0 to 5 / 2 / 0.01 /step]

3231

176

[0 to 5 / 1 / 0.01 /step]

[0 to 5 / 1 / 0.01 /step]

[Toner Supply: Setting] DFU

Adjusts the coefficient of the toner supply time for each color.

System SP3xxx

001 Conversion Coeff.:Bk

*ENG

002 Conversion Coeff.:C

*ENG

003 Conversion Coeff.:M

*ENG

004 Conversion Coeff.:K

*ENG

3232

[T-Supply Coeff.: Setting] DFU

001 Vt Proportion: Bk

*ENG

002 Vt Proportion: C

*ENG

003 Vt Proportion: M

*ENG

004 Vt Proportion: Y

*ENG

005 Pixel Proportion: Bk

*ENG

006 Pixel Proportion: C

*ENG

007 Pixel Proportion: M

*ENG

008 Pixel Proportion: Y

*ENG

009 Vt Integral Control: Bk

*ENG

010 Vt Integral Control: C

*ENG

011 Vt Integral Control: M

*ENG

012 Vt Integral Control: Y

*ENG

013 Vt Sum Times: Bk

*ENG

014 Vt Sum Times: C

*ENG

015 Vt Sum Times: M

*ENG

016 Vt Sum Times: Y

*ENG

3233

[0.5 to 9.99 / 3.33 / 0.01 /step]

3
[0 to 2550 / 50 / 1 /step]

[0 to 2.55 / 0.47 / 0.01 /step]

[0 to 2550 / 500 / 1 /step]

[1 to 255 / 20 / 1 time/step]

[Pixel-Prop. Coeff.2:Set] DFU

001 Correction Coeff.:1

*ENG

[0 to 2.55 / 1 / 0.01 /step]

002 Correction Coeff.:2

*ENG

[0 to 2.55 / 0.5 / 0.01 /step]

003 Correction Coeff.:3

*ENG

[0 to 2.55 / 0 / 0.01 /step]

177

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

004 Correction Coeff.:4

*ENG

[0 to 2.55 / 0.25 / 0.01 /step]

005 Correction Coeff.:5

*ENG

[0 to 2.55 / 0.5 / 0.01 /step]

3234

001 Correction Value 1

*ENG

[-0.1 to 0 / -0.01 / 0.01 /step]

002 Correction Value 2

*ENG

[0 to 0.1 / 0.01 / 0.01 /step]

3235

[Toner Supply Coeff.: Display] DFU

001 Pixel Proportion 2: Bk

*ENG

002 Pixel Proportion 2: C

*ENG

003 Pixel Proportion 2: M

*ENG

004 Pixel Proportion 2: Y

*ENG

005 Pixel Proportion 3: Bk

*ENG

006 Pixel Proportion 3: C

*ENG

007 Pixel Proportion 3: M

*ENG

008 Pixel Proportion 3: Y

*ENG

009 Vt Integral Value: Bk

*ENG

010 Vt Integral Value: C

*ENG

011 Vt Integral Value: M

*ENG

012 Vt Integral Value: Y

*ENG

3236

178

[Pixel-Prop. Coeff.3:Set] DFU

[0 to 2.55 / 1 / 0.01 /step]

[0.7 to 1.3 / 1 / 0.01 /step]

[-255 to 255 / 0 / 0.01 /step]

[Toner Supply Consum.: Display]

Displays the toner amount of the latest toner supply for each color.

001 Latest: Bk

*ENG

002 Latest: C

*ENG

003 Latest: M

*ENG

004 Latest: Y

*ENG

[0 to 40000 / 0 / 0.1 mg/step]

System SP3xxx

3237

[Developer Agitation Setting]

Displays the toner amount of the latest toner supply for each color.

001 Agitation Time

3238

*ENG

[Vt Target: Setting]

Displays the Vt target value at developer initialization.

001 Bk

*ENG

002 C

*ENG

003 M

*ENG

004 Y

*ENG

3239

[0 to 200 / 5 / 1 sec/step]

3
[0 to 5 / 2.7 / 0.01 V/step]

[Vtref Correction: Setting]

Adjusts the parameter for Vtref correction at the process control.
001 (+)Consumption: Bk

*ENG

002 (+)Consumption: C

*ENG

003 (+)Consumption: M

*ENG

004 (+)Consumption: Y

*ENG

005 (-)Consumption: Bk

*ENG

006 (-)Consumption: C

*ENG

007 (-)Consumption: M

*ENG

008 (-)Consumption: Y

*ENG

[0 to 1 / 0.05 / 0.01 V/step]

009-012 Threshold for development gamma rank.

009 P Rank 1 Threshold

*ENG

[0 to 2 / 0.15 / 0.01 /step]

010 P Rank 2 Threshold

*ENG

[0 to 2 / 0.05 / 0.1 /step]

011 P Rank 3 Threshold

*ENG

[-2 to 0 / -0.05 / 0.1 /step]

012 P Rank 4 Threshold

*ENG

[-2 to 0 / -0.15 / 0.01 /step]

013-014 Threshold for image density rank on the image transfer belt.
179

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

3241

*ENG

[-1 to 0 / -0.2 / 0.01 V/step]

014 T Rank 2 Threshold

*ENG

[0 to 1 / 0.2 / 0.01 V/step]

[Background Potential Setting]

001 Coefficient: Bk

*ENG

002 Coefficient: C

*ENG

These are parameters for calculating the charge

bias referring to the development bias at process
control.

003 Coefficient: M

*ENG

[-1000 to 1000 / 0 / 1 /step]

004 Coefficient: Y

*ENG

DC charge bias = Development bias x (1 + 0.001

x these vales) + SP3-241-005 to -008

005 Offset: Bk

*ENG

006 Offset: C

*ENG

These are additional values for calculating the

charge bias referring to the development bias at
process control.

007 Offset: M

*ENG

[0 to 255 / 140 / 1 V/step]

008 Offset: Y

*ENG

DC charge bias = Development bias x (1 + 0.001

x SP3-241-001 to -004) + these values

3242

180

013 T Rank 1 Threshold

[LD Power Setting]

Adjusts the coefficient for LD power control value at the process control.

001 Coefficient: Bk

*ENG

002 Coefficient: C

*ENG

003 Coefficient: M

*ENG

004 Coefficient: Y

*ENG

005 Offset: Bk

*ENG

006 Offset: C

*ENG

007 Offset: M

*ENG

008 Offset: Y

*ENG

[-1000 to 1000 / 128 / 1 /step]

[-1000 to 1000 / 27 / 1 /step]

System SP3xxx

017 Low Speed Coeff.:Bk

*ENG

018 Low Speed Coeff.:C

*ENG

019 Low Speed Coeff.:M

*ENG

020 Low Speed Coeff.:Y

*ENG

021 Low Speed Offset:Bk

*ENG

022 Low Speed Offset:C

*ENG

023 Low Speed Offset:M

*ENG

024 Low Speed Offset:Y

*ENG

3243

[-1000 to 1000 / 58 / 1 /step]

[DevBias_SpdCorrectSetting]
Adjusts the coefficient or offset value for development bias correction for each speed.

009 LowSpd:Coef:Bk

*ENG

010 LowSpd:Coef:M

*ENG

011 LowSpd:Coef:C

*ENG

012 LowSpd:Coef:Y

*ENG

013 LowSpd:offset:Bk

*ENG

014 LowSpd:offset:M

*ENG

015 LowSpd:offset:C

*ENG

016 LowSpd:offset:Y

*ENG

3251

[-1000 to 1000 / 128 / 1 /step]

[0.5 to 1.5 / 1 / 0.01 /step]

[0 to 200 / 0 / 1 V/step]

[Coverage]
These (-001 to -016) are coefficients for SP3-222-009 to -012.
001 Latest: Pixcel Bk

*ENG

002 Latest: Pixcel C

*ENG

Displays the latest coverage for each color.

003 Latest: Pixcel M

*ENG

[0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 cm2/step]

004 Latest: Pixcel Y

*ENG

181

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

Displays the average coverage of each color for the Vtref correction.
005-008 "Average S" is defined when the number of developed pages does not reach the number
specified with SP3251-017.

005 Average S: Bk

*ENG

006 Average S: C

*ENG

007 Average S: M

*ENG

008 Average S: Y

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 5 / 0.01 %/step]

Displays the average coverage of each color for the Vtref correction.
009-012 "Average M" is defined when the number of developed pages does not reach the number
specified with SP3251-018.
009 Average M: Bk

*ENG

010 Average M: C

*ENG

011 Average M: M

*ENG

012 Average M: Y

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 5 / 0.01 %/step]

Displays the average coverage of each color for the Vtref correction.
013-016 "Average L" is defined when the number of developed pages does not reach the number
specified with SP3-251-019.
013 Average L: Bk

*ENG

014 Average L: C

*ENG

015 Average L: M

*ENG

016 Average L: Y

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 5 / 0.01 %/step]

017-019 Adjusts the threshold for SP3-251-005 to -016.

017 Total Page Setting: S

*ENG

[1 to 100 / 10 / 1 sheet/step]

018 Total Page Setting: M

*ENG

[1 to 500 / 10 / 1 sheet/step]

019 Total Page Setting: L

*ENG

[1 to 999 / 50 / 1 sheet/step]

020-022 Adjusts the threshold for SP3-251-024 to -027.

020 Total Page Setting: S2

182

*ENG

[1 to 100 / 20 / 1 sheet/step]

System SP3xxx

021 Total Page Setting: M2

*ENG

[1 to 500 / 10 / 1 sheet/step]

022 Total Page Setting: L2

*ENG

[1 to 999 / 50 / 1 sheet/step]

024-027 Displays the latest coverage ratio for each color.

024 Latest Coverage: Bk

*ENG

025 Latest Coverage: C

*ENG

026 Latest Coverage: M

*ENG

027 Latest Coverage: Y

*ENG

028

3311

[0 to 100 / - / 0.01 %/step]

Displays the threshold of whether to perform developer churning or not.

DevAgi. Theresh BF ProCon

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 20 / 1 %/step]

[ID Sn Detection Value]

Displays the ID sensor (regular) offset voltage for Vsg adjustments.
001 Voffset reg: Bk

*ENG

002 Voffset reg: C

*ENG

003 Voffset reg: M

*ENG

004 Voffset reg: Y

*ENG

[0 to 5 / 0 / 0.01 V/step]

[0 to 5.5 / 0 / 0.01 V/step]

005-007 Displays the ID sensor (diffusion) offset voltage for Vsg adjustments.
005 Voffset dif: C

*ENG

006 Voffset dif: M

*ENG

007 Voffset dif: Y

*ENG

[0 to 5.5 / 0 / 0.01 V/step]

008-010 Displays the ID sensor offset voltage for Vsg adjustments.

3321

008 Voffset TM (Front)

*ENG

009 Voffset TM (Center)

*ENG

010 Voffset TM (Rear)

*ENG

[0 to 5.5 / 0 / 0.01 V/step]

[ID/TM Sensor All]

183

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

010 P/TM Sensor All

3322

Execute the ID sensor initialization setting for all

sensors

[Vsg Adjust. Result: Vsg]

Displays the result value of the Vsg adjustment for each sensor.

001 Vsg reg: Bk

*ENG

002 Vsg reg: C

*ENG

003 Vsg reg: M

*ENG

004 Vsg reg: Y

*ENG

005 Vsg dif: C

*ENG

006 Vsg dif: M

*ENG

007 Vsg dif: Y

*ENG

008 Vsg TM (Front)

*ENG

009 Vsg TM (Center)

*ENG

010 Vsg TM (Rear)

*ENG

3323

[0 to 5.5 / 0 / 0.01 V/step]

[Vsg Adjust. Result: Ifsg]

001 Ifsg: Bk

*ENG

002 Ifsg: C

*ENG

003 Ifsg: M

*ENG

004 Ifsg: Y

*ENG

005 Ifsg TM (Front)

*ENG

006 Ifsg TM (Center)

*ENG

007 Ifsg TM (Rear)

*ENG

3324

[0 to 50 / 0 / 0.1 mA/step]

[0 to 50 / 0 / 0.1 mA/step]

[Vsg Adjustment: Set]

003 Vsg Error Counter

184

*ENG

[0 to 99 / 0 / 0.1 time/step]

System SP3xxx

004 Vofset Threshold

*ENG

[0 to 5 / 1 / 0.01 V/step]

005 Vsg Upper Threshold

*ENG

[0 to 5 / 4.5 / 0.01 V/step]

006 Vsg Lower Threshold

*ENG

[0 to 5 / 3.5 / 0.01 V/step]

[Vsg Adjustment Result]

3325

Displays the result of the Vsg adjustment.

The displayed numbers mean the result of each sensor (sensor for Front, sensor for Bk, sensor
for Cyan, sensor for Center, sensor for Magenta, sensor for Yellow and sensor for Rear).

001 Latest

*ENG

002 Latest 1

*ENG

003 Latest 2

*ENG

004 Latest 3

*ENG

005 Latest 4

*ENG

006 Latest 5

*ENG

007 Latest 6

*ENG

008 Latest 7

*ENG

009 Latest 8

*ENG

010 Latest 9

*ENG

3361

[111 to 999 / 999 / 1 /step]

9: Unexpected error
3: Offset voltage error
2: Vsg adjustment value error
1: O.K

[ID Sn Sensitivity: Display] DFU

003 K2C (Latest)

*ENG

[0 to 10 / 0 / 0.01 /step]

004 K5C (Latest)

*ENG

[0 to 10 / 1.2 / 0.01 /step]

003 K5: Upper

*ENG

[0 to 10 / 5 / 0.01 /step]

004 K5: Lower

*ENG

[0 to 1 / 0.5 / 0.01 /step]

005 Kn: Upper

*ENG

[0 to 1 / 0.1 / 0.01 /step]

006 Kn: Lower

*ENG

[0 to 1 / 1 / 0.01 /step]

3362

[ID Sn Sensitivity: Display] DFU

185

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

007 K5 Edit Point

*ENG

[0 to 1 / 0.15 / 0.01 /step]

008 K5 Target Voltage

*ENG

[0 to 5 / 1.63 / 0.01 V/step]

009 K5 Approximate Method

*ENG

010 K2: U/L Limit Coeff. 1

*ENG

[0 to 1 / 0 / 0.01 /step]

011 K2: Upper Limit Correction

*ENG

[0.2 to 0.4 / 0.07 / 0.01 /step]

012 K2: Lower Limit Correction

*ENG

[0.2 to 0.4 / 0.07 / 0.01 /step]

013 Diffusion Correction

*ENG

[0.75 to 1.35 / 1 / 0.01 /step]

016 K2: Check

*ENG

[0 to 1 / 0.25 / 0.001 /step]

3363

[0 to 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
0:Linear, 1: Curve

[ID Pattern Timing Setting]

001 Scan YCMBk

*ENG

Adjusts the detection timing for the process

control pattern.
[-500 to 500 / 0 / 1 mm/step]

002 Detection Delay Time

*ENG

Adjusts the timing when the paper transfer unit is

kept away from the image transfer belt.
[0 to 2500 / 400 / 1 msec/step]

003 Delay Time

*ENG

Adjusts the processing timing for the process

control pattern.
[0 to 2500 / 1335 / 1 msec/step]

004 MUSIC Delay Time

*ENG

Adjusts the processing timing for the pattern that

is used for the line position adjustment.
[-2500 to 2500 / 300 / 1 msec/step]

3371

186

[M/A Calculation] DFU

001 Correction Coeff.: Bk

*ENG

[0.5 to 2.0 / 0.99 / 0.01 /step]

002 Correction Coeff.: C

*ENG

[0.5 to 2.0 / 1 / 0.01 /step]

003 Correction Coeff.: M

*ENG

[0.5 to 2.0 / 1 / 0.01 /step]

004 Correction Coeff.: Y

*ENG

[0.5 to 2.0 / 1 / 0.01 /step]

System SP3xxx

005 Color Correct Coeff.:Bk

*ENG

[0.5 to 2.0 / 1 / 0.01 /step]

006 Color Correct Coeff.:C

*ENG

[0.5 to 2.0 / 0.95 / 0.01 /step]

007 Color Correct Coeff.:M

*ENG

[0.5 to 2.0 / 1 / 0.01 /step]

008 Color Correct Coeff.:Y

*ENG

[0.5 to 2.0 / 1.01 / 0.01 /step]

3401

[Fixed Toner Supply Mode]

Adjusts the toner supply rate in the fixed toner supply mode.

001 Fixed Rate: Bk

*ENG

002 Fixed Rate: C

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 5 / 1 %/step]

003 Fixed Rate: M

*ENG

These SPs are used only when SP3-044 is set to

"1".

004 Fixed Rate: Y

*ENG

3411

[Toner Supply Rate: Display]

Displays the current toner supply rate.

001 Latest: Bk

*ENG

002 Latest: C

*ENG

003 Latest: M

*ENG

004 Latest: Y

*ENG

3421

[0 to 100 / - / 1 %/step]

[Toner Supply Range]

001 Upper Limit: Bk

*ENG

002 Upper Limit: C

*ENG

Adjusts the toner supply rate during printing.

003 Upper Limit: M

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 100 / 1%/step]

004 Upper Limit: Y

*ENG

187

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

005 Minimum Supply Time: Bk

*ENG

006 Minimum Supply Time: C

*ENG

Adjusts the minimum toner supply time.

007 Minimum Supply Time: M

*ENG

[0 to 1000 / 0 / 1 msec/step]

008 Minimum Supply Time: Y

*ENG

3451

001 Bk

*ENG

002 C

*ENG

Displays the toner supply time carried over from

a previous toner supply mode for each color.

003 M

*ENG

[0 to 10000 / 0 / 1 msec/step]

004 Y

*ENG

3452

[T-Supply Carry Over: Display] DFU

001 Maximum: Bk

*ENG

002 Maximum: C

*ENG

Adjusts the maximum time carried over from a

previous toner supply mode.

003 Maximum: M

*ENG

[0 to 10000 / 1000 / 1 msec/step]

004 Maximum: Y

*ENG

3501

[Process Control Target M/A]

Adjusts the target M/A of the full coverage in single color printer mode.

001 Maximum M/A: Bk

*ENG

002 Maximum M/A: C

*ENG

003 Maximum M/A: M

*ENG

004 Maximum M/A: Y

*ENG

3510

188

[T-Supply Carry Over: Display]

[0 to 1 / 0.45 / 0.001 mg/cm2/step]

[0 to 1 / 0.445 / 0.001 mg/cm2/step]

[Image Adj. Counter:Display]

Displays the total page counter for each adjustment mode.

System SP3xxx

001 Process Control: BW

*ENG

002 Process Control: FC

*ENG

003 Power ON: BW

*ENG

004 Power ON: FC

*ENG

005 MUSIC: BW

*ENG

006 MUSIC: FC

*ENG

007 Vsg Adj.

*ENG

008 Charge AC Control

*ENG

009 MUSIC: Power ON: BW

*ENG

010 MUSIC: Power ON: FC

*ENG

3511

[0 to 2000 / 0 / 1 page/step]

[Execution Interval: Setting]

Adjusts the threshold for each adjustment mode.

001 Job End: Process Control: BW

*ENG

[0 to 2000 / 250 / 1 page/step]

002 Job End: Process Control: FC

*ENG

[0 to 2000 / 100 / 1 page/step]

003 Interrupt: Process Control: BW

*ENG

[0 to 2000 / 500 / 1 page/step]

004 Interrupt: Process Control: FC

*ENG

[0 to 2000 / 200 / 1 page/step]

005 Initial: Potential Control: BW

*ENG

[0 to 2000 / 250 / 1 page/step]

006 Initial: Potential Control: FC

*ENG

[0 to 2000 / 100 / 1 page/step]

007 Vsg Adj. Counter

*ENG

[0 to 2000 / 0 / 1 page/step]

008 Charge AC Control Counter

*ENG

[0 to 2000 / 500 / 1 page/step]

019 Envir.Correction:ON/OFF

*ENG

020 Gamma Correction: ON/OFF

*ENG

021 Non-use Time Correct:ON/OFF

*ENG

022 Correction Coeff. 1: JE: BW

*ENG

[0 to 1 / 0.2 / 0.01 /step]

023 Correction Coeff. 2: JE: BW

*ENG

[0 to 1 / 1 / 0.01/step]

[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: Not Correct (OFF),
1: Correct (ON)

189

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

024 Correction Coeff. 1: JE: FC

*ENG

[0 to 1 / 0.5 / 0.01/step]

025 Correction Coeff. 2: JE: FC

*ENG

[0 to 1 / 1 / 0.01/step]

026 Correction Coeff. 1: Interrupt: BW

*ENG

[0 to 1 / 0.1 / 0.01/step]

027 Correction Coeff. 2: Interrupt: BW

*ENG

[0 to 1 / 1 / 0.01/step]

028 Correction Coeff. 1: Interrupt: FC

*ENG

[0 to 1 / 0.25 / 0.01/step]

029 Correction Coeff. 2: Interrupt: FC

*ENG

[0 to 1 / 1 / 0.01/step]

030 Max. Number Correction Threshold

*ENG

[0 to 99 / 2 / 1/step]

031 Max. Number Correction Counter

*ENG

[0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]

[Image Adj.: Interval]

3512

Adjusts the timing for execution of process control and line position adjustment during printing
or copying.

001 During Job

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 5 / 1 page/step]

002 During Stand-by

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 10 / 1 minute/step]

[PCU Motor Stop Time: Bk]

3513

Displays the last time that the PCU motors stopped.

These are used for process control execution timing.

001 Year

*ENG

[0 to 99 / 0 / 1/step]

002 Month

*ENG

[1 to 12 / 1 / 1/step]

003 Date

*ENG

[1 to 31 / 1 / 1/step]

004 Hour

*ENG

[0 to 23 / 0 / 1/step]

005 Minute

*ENG

[0 to 59 / 0 / 1/step]

[Environmental Displ: Job End]

3514

Displays the environmental conditions at the last job.

These are used for process control execution timing.

001 Temperature

190

*ENG

[-1280 to 1270 / 0 / 0.1C/step]

System SP3xxx

002 Relative Humidity

*ENG

[0 to 1000 / - / 0.1%RH/step]

003 Absolute Humidity

*ENG

[0 to 1000 / - / 0.1 g/cm3/step]

[Execution Interval: Display]

3515

Displays the current interval for process control execution.

When the machine calculates the timing for process control, it uses a number of conditions.
These are the results after considering all the conditions.

001 Job End: Process Control: BW

*ENG

[0 to 2000 / 250 / 1 page/step]

002 Job End: Process Control: FC

*ENG

[0 to 2000 / 100 / 1 page/step]

003 Interrupt: Process Control: BW

*ENG

[0 to 2000 / 500 / 1 page/step]

004 Interrupt: Process Control: FC

*ENG

[0 to 2000 / 200 / 1 page/step]

[Refresh Mode]
3516

While making prints with low coverage, the developer is agitated with less toner consumption
and the toner carrier attraction tends to increase. This may cause low image density or poor
transfer (white dots). To prevent this, the coagulated toner or overcharged toner has to be
consumed by performing the refresh mode.

001 Dev. Motor Rotation: Display: Bk

*ENG

002 Dev. Motor Rotation: Display: C

*ENG

003 Dev. Motor Rotation: Display: M

*ENG

004 Dev. Motor Rotation: Display: Y

*ENG

005 Rotation Threshold

*ENG

[0 to 1000 / 0 / 0.1 m/step]

[0 to 1000 / 0.1 / 1 m/step]

191

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

192

006 Pixel Coverage Sum: Bk

*ENG

007 Pixel Coverage Sum: C

*ENG

008 Pixel Coverage Sum: M

*ENG

009 Pixel Coverage Sum: Y

*ENG

010 Required Area: Bk

*ENG

011 Required Area: C

*ENG

012 Required Area: M

*ENG

013 Required Area: Y

*ENG

014 Refresh Threshold: Bk

*ENG

015 Refresh Threshold: C

*ENG

016 Refresh Threshold: M

*ENG

017 Refresh Threshold: Y

*ENG

018 Pattern Number: Bk

*ENG

019 Pattern Number: C

*ENG

020 Pattern Number: M

*ENG

021 Pattern Number: Y

*ENG

022 Pattern Number: Upper limit

*ENG

023 Toner Consumption Pattern Area

*ENG

[10 to 2550 / 280 / 10 cm2/

step]

024 Supply Coefficient

*ENG

[0 to 2.55 / 1 / 0.01/step]

025 Job End Area Coefficient

*ENG

[0.1 to 25.5 / 1 / 0.1/step]

026 Job End Vb Coefficient

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 30 / 1%/step]

027 Job End Length

*ENG

[0 to 100 / 19 / 1mm/step]

028 Job End Supply Amt

*ENG

[0 to 1 / 0.45 / 0.001 mg/cm2/

step]

[0 to 65535 / 0 / 1 cm2/step]

[0 to 255 / 49 / 1 cm2/m/step]

[0 to 255 / 25 / 1 cm2/m/step]

[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 time/step]

System SP3xxx

029 Refresh:Page Thresh

*ENG

030 Mode Counter:Bk

*ENG

031 Mode Counter:FC

*ENG

[0 to 1000 / 0 / 1 page/step]

[Blade Damage Prevention]

3517

Adjusts the threshold temperature for preventing the cleaning blade in the transfer belt
cleaning unit from being damaged. If the temperature is above this value, toner is applied
to the transfer belt at set intervals during the job to prevent the blade from flipping over.

001 Execution Temp. Thresh

3518

*ENG

[0 to 50 / 40 / 1C/step]

[Image Adj. Execution Flag] DFU

001 Toner End Recovery: Bk

*ENG

002 Toner End Recovery: C

*ENG

003 Toner End Recovery: M

*ENG

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]

004 Toner End Recovery: Y

*ENG

0: OFF. 1: ON

005 Vsg Adjustment

*ENG

006 Developer Agitation

*ENG

007 Process Control

*ENG

008 MUSIC

*ENG

009 Drum Phase Adj.

*ENG

010 Charge AC Control

*ENG

011 Blade Damage Prevention

*ENG

[0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step]
0: OFF. 1: ON (once), 2: ON (twice)
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step]
0: OFF. 1: ON (once), 2: ON (twice)
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0: OFF. 1: ON
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
Sets "1", when the following values shows.

012 Vsg Average Error

*ENG

Vsg_reg_ave:
3.5 < Vsg_reg_ave < 4.5 or Vsg_dif_ave:
0.0 < Vsg_dif_ave < 0.5
193

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

3519

[Toner End Prohibition Setting]

Enables or disables each adjustment at toner end.

001 Process Control

*ENG

[0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step]

002 MUSIC

*ENG

0: Permit (adjustment is done even toner end

condition)

003 TC Adjustment

*ENG

1: Forbid (adjustment is not done at toner end

condition)

3
3520

[ITB Idle Rotation]

001 Temperature: High

*ENG

002 Temperature: Medium

*ENG

Specifies the idle rotation times of the ITB

after the process control.

003 Temperature: Low

*ENG

[0 or 3 / 0 / 1 revolution/step]

004 Temp.: L: Power ON

*ENG

005 to
Adjusts the threshold temperature for entering the ITB idle rotation after the process control.
011
005 Temp. Range Thresh:T2

*ENG

[20 or 30 / 30 / 1 deg/step]

006 Temp. Range Thresh:T1

*ENG

[0 or 15 / 15 / 1 deg/step]

010 Temp. Thresh:High

*ENG

[0 or 50 / 30 / 1 deg/step]

011 Temp. Thresh:Low

*ENG

[0 or 50 / 15 / 1 deg/step]

[Initial Process Control Setting]

3522

194

Adjusts the threshold for the process control at power on.

When the current condition has changed by more than the values of these SPs when
compared with the conditions at the previous operation, the process control at power on is
executed.

002 Non-use Time Setting

*ENG

[0 to 1440 / 360 / 1 minute/step]

003 Temp. Change Thresh

*ENG

[0 to 99 / 10 / 1C/step]

004 Relative Humidity Range

*ENG

[0 to 99 / 50 / 1 %RH/step]

005 Absolute Humidity Range

*ENG

[0 to 99 / 6 / 1 g/m3/step]

System SP3xxx

[Rapi Timer]
100 Time Setting

*ENG

[0 to 255 / 30 / 1 sec/step]

Adjusts the time-out time to get the Rapi timer.

[Non-use Time Process Control Setting]
3531

Adjusts the threshold for the process control at stand-by.

When the current condition has changed by more than the values of these SPs when
compared with the conditions at the previous operation, the process control at stand-by is
executed.

001 Non-use Time Setting

*ENG

[0 to 1440 / 360 / 1 minute/step]

002 Temp. Change Thresh

*ENG

[0 to 99 / 10 / 1C/step]

003 Relative Humidity Change

*ENG

[0 to 99 / 50 / 1 %RH/step]

004 Absolute Humidity Change

*ENG

[0 to 99 / 6 / 1 g/m3/step]

*ENG

Adjusts the maximum execution time for the

process control at stand-by.

005 Maximum Execution Number

[0 to 99 / 10 / 1 time/step]
3611

[Dev. Gamma: Display/Set]

001 Bk (Current)

*ENG

002 C (Current)

*ENG

003 M (Current)

*ENG

004 Y (Current)

*ENG

005 Bk (Target Display)

*ENG

006 C (Target Display)

*ENG

007 M (Target Display)

*ENG

008 Y (Target Display)

*ENG

Displays the current development gamma for Bk

[0 to 5 / 0.9 / 0.01 mg/cm2/kV /step]
Displays the current development gamma for C/
M/Y.
[0 to 5 / 0.8 / 0.01 mg/cm2/kV /step]
Displays the target development gamma for Bk.
[0 to 5 / 0.9 / 0.01 mg/cm2/kV /step]
Displays the target development gamma for C/
M/Y.
[0 to 5 / 0.8 / 0.01 mg/cm2/kV /step]

195

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

009 Bk (Standard Target Set)

*ENG

Displays the standard target development

gamma for each color.
[0 to 5 / 0.9 / 0.01 mg/cm2/kV /step]

010 C (Standard Target Set)

*ENG

011 M (Standard Target Set)

*ENG

012 Y (Standard Target Set)

*ENG

3
013 Environmental Correction

*ENG

[0 to 5 / 0.8 / 0.01 mg/cm2/kV /step]

Turns on or off the environmental correction for

target development gamma.
[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
0: Not Correct, 1: Correct

014 K (Max Correction)

*ENG

015 C (Max Correction)

*ENG

016 M (Max Correction)

*ENG

017 Y (Max Correction)

*ENG

018 K (Max Abs Hum)

*ENG

019 C (Max Abs Hum)

*ENG

020 M (Max Abs Hum)

*ENG

021 Y (Max Abs Hum)

*ENG

3612

196

[0 to 5 / 0.1 / 0.01 mg/cm2/kv/step]

[1 to 99 / 15 / 1 g/m3/step]

[Vk Display]
Displays Vk for each color.

001 Bk

*ENG

002 C

*ENG

003 M

*ENG

004 Y

*ENG

[-300 to 300 / - / 1 V/step]

System SP3xxx

[Dev. DC Control:Display]
3621

Normal: 120 mm/sec, Low: 70 mm/sec

Displays the development DC bias adjusted with the process control for each line speed and
color.

001 Normal Speed:Bk

*ENG

002 Normal Speed:C

*ENG

003 Normal Speed:M

*ENG

004 Normal Speed:Y

*ENG

009 Low Speed:Bk

*ENG

010 Low Speed:C

*ENG

011 Low Speed:M

*ENG

012 Low Speed:Y

*ENG

3622

3
[0 to 700 / 550 / 1 -V/step]

[Development DC Control] DFU

Adjusts the limit of VB.

001 VB Limit

*ENG

[0 to 500 / 50 / 1 V/step]

[Charge DC Control: Display]

3631

Normal: 120 mm/sec, Low: 60 mm/sec

Displays the charge DC voltage adjusted with the process control for each line speed and
color.

197

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

001 Normal Speed:Bk

*ENG

002 Normal Speed:C

*ENG

003 Normal Speed:M

*ENG

004 Normal Speed:Y

*ENG

009 Low Speed:Bk

*ENG

010 Low Speed:C

*ENG

011 Low Speed:M

*ENG

012 Low Speed:Y

*ENG

3641

[0 to 2000 / 690 / 1 -V/step]

[Charge DC Control: Display]

Displays the charge AC voltage adjusted with the process control for each color.

001 Normal Speed:Bk

*ENG

002 Normal Speed:C

*ENG

003 Normal Speed:M

*ENG

004 Normal Speed:Y

*ENG

[0 to 3 / 1.75 / 0.01 kV/step]

[LD Power Control: Display]

3651

Normal: 120 mm/sec, Low: 60 mm/sec

Displays the LD power adjusted for each environment.

198

001 Normal Speed:Bk

*ENG

002 Normal Speed:C

*ENG

003 Normal Speed:M

*ENG

004 Normal Speed:Y

*ENG

009 Low Speed:Bk

*ENG

010 Low Speed:C

*ENG

011 Low Speed:M

*ENG

012 Low Speed:Y

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 100 / 1 %/step]

System SP3xxx

[HST Controll Setting]

3710

TD Sensor: Toner Concentration Control Setting

Selects the toner concentration control method by HST memory, which is in the TD sensor.

001 Control Selection

3711

*ENG

[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
0: Not Use, 1: Use

[HST Control: Bk]

Displays the factory settings of the black PCU.

001 Vcnt

*ENG

[0 to 5 / 4 / 0.1 V/step]

002 Vt

*ENG

[0 to 5 / 2.5 / 0.1 V/step]

003 Sensitivity: HL

*ENG

[1.22 to 3.77 / 2.5 / 0.01 V/step]

004 Sensitivity: HM

*ENG

[0 to 2.55 / 1.3 / 0.01 V/step]

005 Sensitivity: ML

*ENG

[0 to 2.55 / 1.2 / 0.01 V/step]

006 Set Detection

*ENG

[0 to 5 / 1 / 0.1 V/step]

007 Without Developer

*ENG

[0 to 5 / 1.2 / 0.1 V/step]

008 With Developer

*ENG

[0 to 5 / 1.3 / 0.1 V/step]

009 Serial Number 1

*ENG

010 Serial Number 2

*ENG

011 Adjustment: Vt

*ENG

012 Adjustment: Vtref

*ENG

013 Adjustment: Vtcnt

*ENG

[0 to 5 / 4 / 0.01 V/step]

014 Adjustment: Gamma

*ENG

[0 to 2.55 / 0 / 0.01 mg/cm2/kV /step]

015 Adjustment: Vcnt Result

*ENG

[0 to 9 / 9 / 1 /step]

3712

[0 to 255 / - / 1 V/step]

[0 to 5 / 3 / 0.1 V/step]

[HST Control: C]
Displays the factory settings of the magenta PCU.

001 Vcnt

*ENG

[0 to 5 / 4 / 0.1 V/step]

199

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

002 Vt

*ENG

[0 to 5 / 2.5 / 0.1 V/step]

003 Sensitivity: HL

*ENG

[1.22 to 3.77 / 2.5 / 0.01 V/step]

004 Sensitivity: HM

*ENG

[0 to 2.55 / 1.3 / 0.01 V/step]

005 Sensitivity: ML

*ENG

[0 to 2.55 / 1.2 / 0.01 V/step]

006 Set Detection

*ENG

[0 to 5 / 1 / 0.1 V/step]

007 Without Developer

*ENG

[0 to 5 / 1.2 / 0.1 V/step]

008 With Developer

*ENG

[0 to 5 / 1.3 / 0.1 V/step]

009 Serial Number 1

*ENG

010 Serial Number 2

*ENG

011 Adjustment: Vt

*ENG

012 Adjustment: Vtref

*ENG

013 Adjustment: Vtcnt

*ENG

[0 to 5 / 4 / 0.01 V/step]

014 Adjustment: Gamma

*ENG

[0 to 2.55 / 0 / 0.01 mg/cm2/kV /step]

015 Adjustment: Vcnt Result

*ENG

[0 to 9 / 9 / 1 /step]

3713

200

[0 to 255 / - / 1 V/step]

[0 to 5 / 3 / 0.1 V/step]

[HST Control: M]
Displays the factory settings of the cyan PCU.

001 Vcnt

*ENG

[0 to 5 / 4 / 0.1 V/step]

002 Vt

*ENG

[0 to 5 / 2.5 / 0.1 V/step]

003 Sensitivity: HL

*ENG

[1.22 to 3.77 / 2.1 / 0.01 V/step]

004 Sensitivity: HM

*ENG

[0 to 2.55 / 1.3 / 0.01 V/step]

005 Sensitivity: ML

*ENG

[0 to 2.55 / 1.2 / 0.01 V/step]

006 Set Detection

*ENG

[0 to 5 / 1 / 0.1 V/step]

007 Without Developer

*ENG

[0 to 5 / 1.2 / 0.1 V/step]

008 With Developer

*ENG

[0 to 5 / 1.3 / 0.1 V/step]

System SP3xxx

009 Serial Number 1

*ENG

010 Serial Number 2

*ENG

011 Adjustment: Vt

*ENG

012 Adjustment: Vtref

*ENG

013 Adjustment: Vtcnt

*ENG

[0 to 5 / 4 / 0.01 V/step]

014 Adjustment: Gamma

*ENG

[0 to 2.55 / 0 / 0.01 mg/cm2/kV /step]

015 Adjustment: Vcnt Result

*ENG

[0 to 9 / 9 / 1 /step]

3714

[0 to 255 / - / 1 V/step]

[0 to 5 / 3 / 0.1 V/step]

[HST Control:Y]
Displays the factory settings of the yellow PCU.

001 Vcnt

*ENG

[0 to 5 / 4 / 0.1 V/step]

002 Vt

*ENG

[0 to 5 / 2.5 / 0.1 V/step]

003 Sensitivity: HL

*ENG

[1.22 to 3.77 / 2.5 / 0.01 V/step]

004 Sensitivity: HM

*ENG

[0 to 2.55 / 1.3 / 0.01 V/step]

005 Sensitivity: ML

*ENG

[0 to 2.55 / 1.2 / 0.01 V/step]

006 Set Detection

*ENG

[0 to 5 / 1 / 0.1 V/step]

007 Without Developer

*ENG

[0 to 5 / 1.2 / 0.1 V/step]

008 With Developer

*ENG

[0 to 5 / 1.3 / 0.1 V/step]

009 Serial Number 1

*ENG

010 Serial Number 2

*ENG

011 Adjustment: Vt

*ENG

012 Adjustment: Vtref

*ENG

013 Adjustment: Vtcnt

*ENG

[0 to 5 / 4 / 0.01 V/step]

014 Adjustment: Gamma

*ENG

[0 to 2.55 / 0 / 0.01 mg/cm2/kV /step]

015 Adjustment: Vcnt Result

*ENG

[0 to 9 / 9 / 1 /step]

[0 to 255 / - / 1 V/step]

[0 to 5 / 3 / 0.1 V/step]

201

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

3800

[Toner Collection Bttl Full]

Displays/ adjusts the PCDU toner collection bottle detection settings.
Condition

*CTL

[0 to 4 / 0 / 1 /step]

001 Displays the current condition of the PCDU toner collection bottle.
0: Factory default, 1: Before near full, 2; Near full, 3: Full, 4: Reserved

002 Detection Times

*CTL

003 Print Page AF Near Full

*CTL

004 Pixel Count AF Near Full

*CTL

Not used
[0 to 50 / - / 1 /step]
Not used
[0 to 2000 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]
Not used
[0 to 200000 / - / 1 cm2/step]
Not used

005 Pixel Count AF Replacement

*CTL

Displays the pixel counter after replacement of

toner collection bottle.
[0 to 200000 / - / 1 cm2/step]

008

Coefficient

*ENG

[0.1 to 1 / 1 / 0.1 /step]

Adjusts the toner amount between near full and full. (0.1 indicates 10%.)
Enables or disables the calling for @Remote.
Alarm Setting

*ENG

[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
0: Enable @Remote calling
1: Disable @Remote calling

011
NOTE:

If the PCDU toner collection bottle has been replaced before the machine detects used toner
near full when this setting is set to "0", the machine cannot detect toner collection bottle near
full. In that case, set SP3-902-017 to "1".
Day Thresh:NF

*ENG

[1 to 30 / 10 / 1 day/step]

012 Sets the threshold days for the near-full display. The near-full of the PCDU toner collection
bottle is displayed after the toner collection full sensor has detected the actuator in the PCDU
toner collection bottle.

202

System SP3xxx

013 Total Collected Toner

*ENG

Displays the total amount from the near full

detection.
[0 to 999999999 / 1 / 1]

014 Full Detection Date

3810

*ENG

Displays the date of the near full detection for

the PCDU toner collection bottle.

[ITB T-Collection Bttl Full]

Condition

*CTL

[0 to 4 / 0 / 1 /step]

001 Displays the current condition of the ITB toner collection bottle.
0: Factory default, 1: Before near full, 2; Near full, 3: Full, 4: Reserved
002 Detection Times

*CTL

003 Print Page AF Near Full

*CTL

004 Pixel Count AF Near Full

*CTL

Not used
[0 to 50 / - / 1 /step]
Not used
[0 to 2000 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]
Not used
[0 to 200000 / - / 1 cm2/step]
Not used

005 Pixel Count AF Replacement

*CTL

Displays the pixel counter after replacement of

toner collection bottle.
[0 to 200000 / - / 1 cm2/step]

008

Coefficient

*ENG

[0.1 to 1 / 1 / 0.1 /step]

Adjusts the toner amount between near full and full. (0.1 indicates 10%.)
Enables or disables the calling for @Remote.
Alarm Setting

*ENG

[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
0: Enable @Remote calling
1: Disable @Remote calling

011
NOTE:

If the toner collection bottle has been replaced before the machine detects used toner near
full when this setting is set to "0", the machine cannot detect toner collection bottle near full.
In that case, set SP3-902-017 to "1".

203

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

Day Thresh:NF

*ENG

[1 to 30 / 10 / 1 day/step]

012 Sets the threshold days for the near-full display. The near-full of the IT toner collection bottle
is displayed after the toner collection full sensor has detected the actuator in the ITB toner
collection bottle.

013 Total Collected Toner

*ENG

Displays the total amount from the near full

detection.
[0 to 999999999 / 1 / 1]

014 Full Detection Date

3901

*ENG

Displays the date of the near full detection fot the

ITB toner collection bottle.

[New Unit Detection]

Turns new PCU detection on or off.

001 ON/OFF Setting

*ENG

[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
0: OFF, 1: ON

[Manual New Unit Set]

3902

204

Turns the new unit detection flag for each PM unit on or off.
The use of these counters is explained in the PM section and in the relevant parts of section
3 (Replacement and Adjustment).

001 Development Unit: Bk

*ENG

002 Development Unit: C

*ENG

[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]

003 Development Unit: M

*ENG

0: OFF, 1: ON

004 Development Unit: Y

*ENG

005 Developer: Bk

*ENG

006 Developer: C

*ENG

007 Developer: M

*ENG

008 Developer: Y

*ENG

Not used
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
0: OFF, 1: ON

System SP3xxx

009 PCU: Bk

*ENG

010 PCU: C

*ENG

[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]

011 PCU: M

*ENG

0: OFF, 1: ON

012 PCU: Y

*ENG

013 ITB Unit

*ENG

014 Fusing Unit

*ENG

0: OFF, 1: ON

015 Fusing Pad

*ENG

Do not use 3902-013 if you only change the

cleaning unit.

016 Fusing Belt

*ENG

017 ITB Cleaning Unit

*ENG

3902-017: This is for the image transfer belt

cleaning unit.

018 PTR Unit

*ENG

019 PCU Toner Collection Bottle

*ENG

020 ITB Toner Collection Bottle

*ENG

3903

[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]

[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
0: OFF, 1: ON

[Last Print Counter]

Displays the rotation counter of the black development unit at five minutes interval.

205

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

001 Counter 1

*ENG

002 Counter 2

*ENG

003 Counter 3

*ENG

004 Counter 4

*ENG

005 Counter 5

*ENG

006 Counter 6

*ENG

007 Counter 7

*ENG

008 Counter 8

*ENG

009 Counter 9

*ENG

010 Counter 10

*ENG

011040

Counter 11 to 40

101 Last Fixed Date

102

206

Last PM Counter Save

Destination

[0 to 999999999 / - / 1 mm/step]

*ENG
*ENG

Displays the time of the latest stored counter.

*ENG

Displays the counter number of the latest

stored counter.

System SP4xxx

System SP4xxx
SP4-XXX (Scanner)

4008

[Sub Scan Mag. Adjustment]

Adjusts the sub-scan magnification by changing the scanner motor speed.

001 SScan Mag.Adjust

*ENG

[-1.0 to 1.0 / 0 / 0.1%/step] FA

[L-Edge Regist Adjustment]

4010

Adjusts the leading edge registration by changing the scanning start timing in the sub-scan
direction.

001 LE Regist Adjust

*ENG

[-2.0 to 2.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step] FA

[S-to-S Regist Adjustment]

4011

Adjusts the side-to-side registration by changing the scanning start timing in the main scan
direction.

001 StoS Rgst Adjust

*ENG

[-2.5 to 2.5 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ] FA

[Scanner Erase Margin: Scale] Scanner: Erase Margin: Scale

4012

Sets the blank margin at each side for erasing the original shadow caused by the gap
between the original and the scale.

001 Book: Leading Edge

002 Book: Trailing Edge
003 Book: Left

*ENG

[0 to 3.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ] FA

*ENG

[0 to 3.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ] FA

004 Book: Right

005 ADF: Leading Edge
007 ADF: Left
008 ADF: Right

207

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

[Scanner Free Run]

4013

Performs the scanner free run with the exposure lamp on or off in the following mode.
Full color mode / Full Size / A3 or DLT

001 Lamp: OFF

002 Lamp: ON

4014

*ENG

[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
0: OFF, 1: ON

[Scan]
Execute the scanner free fun with each mode.

001 HP Detection Enable

Scanner free run with HP sensor check.

002 HP Detection Disable

Scanner free run without HP sensor check.

4020

[Dust Check]
Turns the ADF scan glass dust check on/ off.

001 Detection: ON/OFF

*ENG

[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: OFF, 1: ON
Selects the detect level.

002 Dust Detection: Level

*ENG

[0 to 8 / 4 / 1 /step]
0: lowest detection level
8: highest detection level
Selects the level of the sub scan line correction
when using the ARDF.
[0 to 4 / 0 / 1 /step]

003 Correction Level

*ENG

0: Off
1: Weakest
2: Weak
3: Strong
4: Strongest

208

System SP4xxx

[APS Operation Check]

4301

Displays a code that represents the original size detected by the original sensors. (See "Input
Check Table".)

001 APS Operation Check

4303

[APS Min Size]

Specifies the result of the detection when the outputs from the original sensors are all OFF.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]

001 APS Min. Size

*ENG

0: No Original
1: A5-Lengthwise (16K SEF if 4305 is set to 3)
[0 to 3 / 0 / 1 /step]

4305

[8K/16K Detection]

*ENG

0: Normal Detection (the machine detects A4/LT

size as A4 or LT, depending on the paper size
setting)
1: A4-Sideways LT-Lengthwise
2: LT-Sideways A4-Lengthwise
3: 8K 16K

001 This program enables the machine to automatically recognize the 8K/16K size.
4308

[Scan Size Detection]

001 Detect: ON/OFF

4309

*ENG

[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: OFF, 1: ON

[Scan Size Detect Setting] DFU

001 Original Density Thresh

*ENG

[0 to 255 / 32 / 1 digit /step]

002 Detection Time

*ENG

[20 to 100 / 60 / 20 msec /step]

003 Lamp ON:Delay Time

*ENG

[0 to 200 / 40 / 20 msec /step]

4310

[Scan Size Detect Value]

Displays the scanned data for the original width detection.
209

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

001 S1:R

002 S1:G

003 S1:B

004 S2:R

005 S2:G

006 S2:B

007 S3:R

008 S3:G

009 S3:B

[Scanner Erase Margin]

4400

[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 digit /step]

[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 digit /step]

[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 digit /step]

*ENG

Set the Mask for Original.

These SPs set the area to be masked during platen (book) mode scanning.
001 Book: Leading Edge
002 Book: Trailing Edge
003 Book: Left
004 Book: Right

[0 to 3.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step]

005 ADF: Leading Edge

007 ADF: Left
008 ADF: Right

4417

[IPU Test Pattern]

Selects the IPU test pattern.

001 Test Pattern Selection

210

[0 to 24 / 0 / 1/step ]

System SP4xxx

0: Scanned image

13: Grid pattern CMYK

1: Gradation main scan A

14: Color patch CMYK

2: Gradation main scan B

15: Gray pattern (1)

3: Gradation main scan C

16: Gray pattern (2)

4: Gradation main scan D

17: Gray Pattern (3)

5: Gradation sub scan (1)

18: Shading pattern

6: Grid pattern

19: Thin line pattern

7: Slant grid pattern

20: Scanned + Grid pattern

8: Gradation RGBCMYK

21: Scanned + Gray scale

9: UCR pattern

22: Scanned + Color patch

10: Color patch 16 (1)

23: Scanned + Slant Grid C

11: Color patch 16 (2)

24: Scanned + Slant Grid D

12: Color patch 64

4429

[Illegal Copy Output]

001 Copy
002 Scanner

*ENG

[0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]

003 Fax

4440

[Saturation Adjustment]
Adjusts the level of saturation for copying.
[0 to 5 / 3 / 1 /step]
0: High
1: Lowest

001 -

*ENG

2: Lower
3: Default
4: Higher
5: Highest

4450

[Scan Image Path Selection]

211

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

001

002

Black Subtraction ON/OFF

[0 or 1 / 1 / - ] 0: OFF, 1: ON

Uses or does not use the black reduction image path.

SH ON/OFF

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step] 0: ON, 1: OFF

Uses or does not use the shading image path.

[Digital AE Set] DFU

4460

001 Lower Limit

*ENG

[0 to 1023 / 364 / 4 digit/step]

002 Background Level

*ENG

[512 to 1532 / 932 / 1 digit/step]

4501

[ACC Target Density]

Selects the ACC target.

001 Copy: Bk: Text

*ENG

002 Copy: C: Text

*ENG

003 Copy: M: Text

*ENG

004 Copy: Y: Text

*ENG

[0 to 10 / 5 / 1 /step]

005 Copy: Bk: Photo

*ENG

10: Darkest density

006 Copy: C: Photo

*ENG

007 Copy: M: Photo

*ENG

008 Copy: Y: Photo

*ENG

4505

212

Specifies the level of deleting the background in the ADS mode. You can adjust its level for
each scanning method (platen, ADF).

[ACC Correction:Bright]
Adjusts the offset correction for light areas of the ACC pattern.

System SP4xxx

001 Text:K

*ENG

002 Text:C

*ENG

003 Text:M

*ENG

004 Text:Y

*ENG

005 Photo:K

*ENG

006 Photo:C

*ENG

007 Photo:M

*ENG

008 Photo:Y

*ENG

4506

[-128 to 127 / 0 / 1 /step]

[-128 to 127 / 0 / 1 /step]

[ACC Correction: Dark]

Adjusts the offset correction for dark areas of the ACC pattern.

001 Text:K

*ENG

002 Text:C

*ENG

003 Text:M

*ENG

004 Text:Y

*ENG

005 Photo:K

*ENG

006 Photo:C

*ENG

007 Photo:M

*ENG

008 Photo:Y

*ENG

[-128 to 127 / 0 / 1 /step]

[-128 to 127 / 0 / 1 /step]

[Printer Vector Correction]

4540

This SP corrects the printer coverage of 12 hues (RY, YR, YG, etc. x 4 Colors [R, G, B,
Option]) for a total of 48 parameters.

213

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

001-004 RY Phase: Option/R/G/B

005-008 YR Phase: Option/R/G/B
009-012 YG Phase: Option/R/G/B
013-016 GY Phase: Option/R/G/B
017-020 GC Phase: Option/R/G/B

021-024 CG Phase: Option/R/G/B

025-028 CB Phase: Option/R/G/B

*ENG

Specifies the printer vector correction

value.
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]

029-032 BC Phase: Option/R/G/B

033-036 BM Phase: Option/R/G/B
037-040 MB Phase: Option/R/G/B
041-044 MR Phase: Option/R/G/B
045-048 RM Phase: Option/R/G/B
4550

[Scanner Appl.:Text/Chart] DFU

4551

[Scanner Appl.: Text] DFU

4552

[Scanner Appl.:Txt Dropout] DFU

4553

[Scanner Appl.:Text/Photo] DFU

4554

[Scanner Appl.: Photo] DFU

4565

[Scanner Appl.: GrayScale] DFU

4570

[Scan Appl.: Color: Text-Photo] DFU

4571

[Scan Appl.: Color: Glossy Photo] DFU

4572

[Scan Appl.: Color: AutoColor] DFU

MTF: 0 (Off), 1-15 (Strong)

-005

*ENG

[0 to 15 / 8 / 1 /step]
0: MTF Off

Sets the MTF level (Modulation Transfer Function) designed to improve image contrast. Set
higher for stronger effect, lower for weaker effect.

214

System SP4xxx

-006

-007

-008

Smoothing: 0 (x1), 1-7 (Strong)

*ENG

[0 to 7 / 4 / 1 /step]

Use to remove "jaggies" if they appear. Set higher for smoother images.
Brightness: 1255

*ENG

[1 to 255 / 128 / 1 /step]

*ENG

[1 to 255 / 128 / 1 /step]

Set higher for darker, set lower for lighter.

Contrast: 1255

Set higher for more contrast, set lower for less contrast.
I-Dot Erase :0 (x1) 1-7 (Strong)

*ENG

[0 to 7 / 0 / 1 /step]

-009 Sets the erasure level of Irregular Dots. Set higher for stronger effect, lower for weaker effect.
0: Not activated
4580

[FAX Appl.: Text/Chart] DFU

4582

[FAX Appl.: Text/Photo] DFU

4583

[FAX Appl.: Photo] DFU

MTF: 0 (Off), 1-15 (Strong)

*ENG

-005

[0 to 15 / 8 / 1 /step]
0: MTF Off

Sets the MTF level (Modulation Transfer Function) designed to improve image contrast. Set
higher for stronger effect, lower for weaker effect.
-006

-007

-008

Smoothing: 0 (x1), 1-7 (Strong)

*ENG

[0 to 7 / 4 / 1 /step]

Use to remove "jaggies" if they appear. Set higher for smoother images.
Brightness: 1255

*ENG

[1 to 255 / 128 / 1 /step]

*ENG

[1 to 255 / 128 / 1 /step]

Set higher for darker, set lower for lighter.

Contrast: 1255

Set higher for more contrast, set lower for less contrast.
I-Dot Erase:0 (x1), 1-7 (Strong)

*ENG

[0 to 7 / 0 / 1 /step]

-009 Selects the contrast level for B/W the Text mode. Sets the erasure level of Irregular Dots. Set
higher for stronger effect, lower for weaker effect.
0: Not activated

215

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

Texture Erase:0 (Fix), 1-2

*ENG

[0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step]

-010 Sets the erasure level of textures. Set higher for stronger effect, lower for weaker effect. This
SP (suffix "-010") only exists in SP4580, 4582 and 4583.
0: Not activated

4581

[FAX Appl.: Text] DFU

4584

[FAX Appl.: Original 1] DFU

4585

[FAX Appl.: Original 2] DFU

MTF: 0 (Off), 1-15 (Strong)

*ENG

-005

[0 to 15 / 8 / 1 /step]
0: MTF Off

Sets the MTF level (Modulation Transfer Function) designed to improve image contrast. Set
higher for stronger effect, lower for weaker effect.
-006

-007

-008

Smoothing: 0 (x1), 1-7 (Strong)

*ENG

[0 to 7 / 4 / 1 /step]

Use to remove "jaggies" if they appear. Set higher for smoother images.
Brightness: 1255

*ENG

[1 to 255 / 128 / 1 /step]

Set higher for darker, set lower for lighter.

Contrast: 1255

*ENG

[1 to 255 / 128 / 1 /step]

Set higher for more contrast, set lower for less contrast.
I-Dot Erase:0 (x1), 1-7 (Strong)

*ENG

[0 to 7 / 0 / 1 /step]

-009 Selects the contrast level for B/W the Text mode. Sets the erasure level of Irregular Dots. Set
higher for stronger effect, lower for weaker effect.
0: Not activated
4600

216

[SBU Version Display]

[0 to 0xFF / 0 / 1 /step]

001 SBU ID

002 GASBU-N ID

[0 to 0xFF / 0 / 1 /step]

003 VSP5100 ID

[0 to 0xFF / 0 / 1 /step]

Displays the ID of the SBU.

System SP4xxx

4602

[Scanner Memory Access]

-

Enables the read and write check for the SBU

registers.

001 HP Detection Enable

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] Executes the AGC.

002 HP Detection Disable

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] DFU

Opens or closes the FGATE signal. This SP

automatically returns to the default status (close)
after exiting this SP.

001 Scanner Memory Access

4603

4604

[AGC Execution]

[FGATE Open/Close] DFU

001 -

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0: OFF, 1: ON
4609

[Gray Balance Set: R] DFU

001 Book Scan

*ENG

[-512 to 511 / -46 / 1 digit/step]

002 DF Scan

*ENG

[-512 to 511 / -46 / 1 digit/step]

001 Book Scan

*ENG

[-512 to 511 / -20 / 1 digit/step]

002 DF Scan

*ENG

[-512 to 511 / -20/ 1 digit/step]

001 Book Scan

*ENG

[-512 to 511 / -28 / 1 digit/step]

002 DF Scan

*ENG

[-512 to 511 / -28 / 1 digit/step]

4610

4611

4623

[Gray Balance Set: G] DFU

[Gray Balance Set: B] DFU

[Black Level Adj. Display] DFU

RE: Red Even signal, RO: Red Odd signal

217

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

001 Latest: RE Color

Displays the black offset value (rough adjustment)

for the even red signal in the CCD circuit board
(color printing speed).
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

002 Latest: RO Color

Displays the black offset value (rough adjustment)

for the odd red signal in the CCD circuit board
(color printing speed).
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

3
4624

[Black Level Adj. Display] DFU

GE: Green Even signal, GO: Green Odd signal

001 Latest: GE Color

Displays the black offset value (rough adjustment)

for the even green signal in the CCD circuit board
(color printing speed).
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

002 Latest: GO Color

Displays the black offset value (rough adjustment)

for the odd green signal in the CCD circuit board
(color printing speed).
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

4625

[Black Level Adj. Display] DFU

BE: Blue Even signal, BO: Blue Odd signal

001 Latest: BE Color

Displays the black offset value (rough adjustment) for the

even blue signal in the CCD circuit board (color printing
speed).
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

002 Latest: BO Color

Displays the black offset value (rough adjustment) for the

odd blue signal in the CCD circuit board (color printing
speed).
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

4628

[Analog Gain Adjust] DFU

Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Red.

001 Latest: R Color

218

[0 to 7 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

System SP4xxx

4629

[Analog Gain Adjust] DFU

Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Green.

001 Latest: G Color

4630

Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Blue.
-

002 Latest: RO Color

[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

[Digital Gain Adjust] DFU

Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Green.

001 Latest: GE Color

002 Latest: GO Color

[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

[Digital Gain Adjust] DFU

Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Blue.

001 Latest: BE Color

002 Latest: BO Color

4645

Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Red.
-

4633

[0 to 7 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

[Digital Gain Adjust] DFU

001 Latest: RE Color

4632

[0 to 7 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

[Analog Gain Adjust] DFU

001 Latest: B Color

4631

[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

[Scan Adjust Error] DFU

Displays the error value of the white level or black level adjustment.

001 White Level

002 Black Level

[0 to 65535 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

219

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

4647

[Scanner Hard Error]

Displays the result of the SBU connection check.
[0 to 65535 / 0 / 1 /step]

001 Power-ON

0: OK, Other: SBU connection check failure

If the SBU connection check fails, SC144 occurs.

4654

001

[Black Level Adj. Display] DFU

RE: Red Even signal, RO: Red Odd signal

Last Correct Value: RE

Color

*ENG

Displays the black offset value (rough adjustment)

for the even red signal in the CCD circuit board
(color printing speed).
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

Last Correct Value: RO

002
Color

*ENG

Displays the black offset value (rough adjustment)

for the odd red signal in the CCD circuit board
(color printing speed).
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

4655

001

[Black Level Adj. Display] DFU

GE: Green Even signal, GO: Green Odd signal

Last Correct Value: GE

Color

*ENG

Displays the black offset value (rough adjustment)

for the even green signal in the CCD circuit board
(color printing speed).
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

002

Last Correct Value: GO

Color

*ENG

Displays the black offset value (rough adjustment)

for the odd green signal in the CCD circuit board
(color printing speed).
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

4656

220

[Black Level Adj. Display] DFU

BE: Blue Even signal, BO: Blue Odd signal

System SP4xxx

001

Last Correct Value: BE

Color

*ENG

Displays the black offset value (rough adjustment)

for the even blue signal in the CCD circuit board
(color printing speed).
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

002

Last Correct Value: BO

Color

*ENG

Displays the black offset value (rough adjustment)

for the odd blue signal in the CCD circuit board
(color printing speed).
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

4658

[Analog Gain Adjust] DFU

Displays the previous gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Red.

001 Last Correct Value: RE Color

4659

*ENG

[0 to 7 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

[Analog Gain Adjust] DFU

Displays the previous gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Blue.
*ENG

[0 to 7 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

[Digital Gain Adjust] DFU

RE: Red Even signal, RO: Red Odd signal

001 Last Correct Value: RE Color

*ENG

002 Last Correct Value: RO Color

*ENG

4662

[0 to 7 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

Displays the previous gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Green.

001 Last Correct Value: BE Color

4661

*ENG

[Analog Gain Adjust] DFU

001 Last Correct Value: GE Color

4660

[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

[Digital Gain Adjust] DFU

GE: Green Even signal, GO: Green Odd signal

001 Last Correct Value: GE Color

*ENG

002 Last Correct Value: GO Color

*ENG

[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

221

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

4663

[Digital Gain Adjust] DFU

BE: Blue Even signal, BO: Blue Odd signal

001 Last Correct Value: BE Color

*ENG

002 Last Correct Value: BO Color

*ENG

4673

[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

[Black Level Adj. Display] DFU

RE: Red Even signal, RO: Red Odd signal

001 Factory Setting: RE Color

*ENG

Displays the factory setting values of the black

level adjustment for the even red signal in the CCD
circuit board (color printing speed).
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

002 Factory Setting: RO Color

*ENG

Displays the factory setting values of the black

level adjustment (rough adjustment) for the odd
red signal in the CCD circuit board (color printing
speed).
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

4674

[Black Level Adj. Display] DFU

GE: Green Even signal, GO: Green Odd signal

001 Factory Setting: GE Color

*ENG

Displays the factory setting values of the black

level adjustment (rough adjustment) for the even
green signal in the CCD circuit board (color
printing speed).
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

002 Factory Setting: GO Color

*ENG

Displays the factory setting values of the black

level adjustment (rough adjustment) for the odd
green signal in the CCD circuit board (color
printing speed).
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

4675

222

[Black Level Adj. Display] DFU

BE: Blue Even signal, BO: Blue Odd signal

System SP4xxx

001 Factory Setting: BE Color

*ENG

Displays the factory setting values of the black

level adjustment (rough adjustment) for the even
blue signal in the CCD circuit board (color printing
speed).
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

002 Factory Setting: BO Color

*ENG

Displays the factory setting values of the black

level adjustment (rough adjustment) for the odd
blue signal in the CCD circuit board (color printing
speed).
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

4677

[Analog Gain Adjust] DFU

Displays the factory setting values of the gain adjustment for Red.

001 Factory Setting: RE Color

4678

*ENG

[0 to 7 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

[Analog Gain Adjust] DFU

Displays the factory setting values of the gain adjustment for Blue.
*ENG

[0 to 7 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

[Digital Gain Adjust] DFU

Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Red.

001 Factory Setting: RE Color

*ENG

002 Factory Setting: RO Color

*ENG

4681

[0 to 7 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

Displays the factory setting values of the gain adjustment for Green.

001 Factory Setting: BE Color

4680

*ENG

[Analog Gain Adjust] DFU

001 Factory Setting: GE Color

4679

[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

[Digital Gain Adjust] DFU

Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Green.

223

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

001 Factory Setting: GE Color

*ENG

002 Factory Setting: GO Color

*ENG

4682

[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

[Digital Gain Adjust] DFU

Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Blue.

001 Factory Setting: BE Color

*ENG

002 Factory Setting: BO Color

*ENG

[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

[DF: Density Adjustment]

4688

Adjusts the white shading parameter when scanning an image with the ARDF.
Adjusts the density level if the ID of outputs made in the DF and Platen mode is different.

001 -

4690

Displays the peak level of the white level scanning.

-

002 RO

[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

[White Level Peak Read] DFU

Displays the peak level of the white level scanning.

001 GE

002 GO

4692

[50 to 150 / 107 / 1%/ step ]

[White Level Peak Read] DFU

001 RE

4691

224

*ENG

[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

[White Level Peak Read] DFU

Displays the peak level of the white level scanning.

001 BE

002 BO

[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

System SP4xxx

4693

[Black Level Peak Read] DFU

Displays the peak level of the black level scanning.

001 RE

002 RO

4694

[Black Level Peak Read] DFU

Displays the peak level of the black level scanning.

001 GE

002 GO

4695

002 BO

[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

[DF Shading FreeRun]

001 Lamp OFF

002 Lamp ON

Executes the scanner free run of shading movement

with exposure lamp on or off.
Press "OFF" to stop this free run. Otherwise, the free
run lasts.

[Home Position Opetation]

001 4806

[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

Displays the peak level of the black level scanning.

-

4804

[Black Level Peak Read] DFU

001 BE

4802

[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

Executes the scanner HP detection.

[Carriage Move]
Moves the carriage from the scanner home position.

001 -

Dust may fall through the DF exposure glass.

Therefore, do this SP when you transport the
machine a long distance.

225

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

4807

[SBU Test Pattern Change]

-

[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]

Selects the SBU test pattern.

0: Normal output
001 1: Fixed value output
2: Main scan gradation

3: Sub scan gradation

4: Grid pattern
4808

[Factory Setting Input] DFU

002 Execution Flag

*ENG

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]

[ACC Data Display]

4902

This SP outputs the final data read at the end of ACC execution.
A zero is returned if there was an error reading the data.
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]

001 R DATA1

*ENG

Photo C Patch Level 1 (8-bit)

002 G DATA1

*ENG

Photo M Patch Level 1 (8-bit)

003 B DATA1

*ENG

Photo Y Patch Level 1 (8-bit)

004 R DATA2

*ENG

Photo C Patch Level 17 (8-bit)

005 G DATA2

*ENG

Photo M Patch Level 17(8-bit)

006 B DATA2

*ENG

Photo Y Patch Level 17 (8-bit)

4904

226

[IPU Board Test]

System SP4xxx

Bit0: TAURUS register

Bit1: ORION register
Bit2: LUPUS register
001

Test1

Bit3 to 11: Not used

Bit12: Ri20
Bit13 to 15: Not used
0: OK, 1: Error

Performs a write and read check of the ASICs on the BCU board and displays the result.

Bit0: Image path from SBU to TAURUS

Bit1: Image path from TAURUS to ORION
Bit2: Image path from ORION to TAURUS
Bit3: Image path from TAURUS to LUPUS
002

Test2

Bit4 to 11: Not used

Bit12: Image path from LUPUS to Ri20
Bit13: Image path from Ri20 to GAVD
Bit14 and 15: Not used
0: OK, 1: Error

Performs an image path check on the BCU board and displays the result.

4905

[Dither Selection] DFU

Changes the parameters for error diffusion.

001 4918

[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]

[Man Gamma Adj]

009 -

4948

*ENG

Adjusts the manual gamma for Copy/Photo or

Copy/Text with the soft keys on the operation
panel.

[ACC History:Latest]

001 YY/MM/DD

*ENG

Displays the latest ACC execution date.

002 HH/MM/SS

*ENG

Displays the latest ACC execution time.

227

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

4949

001 YY/MM/DD

*ENG

Displays the previous ACC execution date.

002 HH/MM/SS

*ENG

Displays the previous ACC execution time.

4954

[ACC History:Previous]

[Read/Restore Standard]

001 Scan New Chart

Executes new chart scanning.

002 Recall Previous Chart

Recalls the previous scanned chart.

004 Set Standard Chart

Restores a new chart data as a standard chart data.

[IPU Image Path Selection ]

4991

Selects the image path.

Enter the number to be selected using the 10-key pad.
RGB Frame Memory

[0 to 11 / 2 / 1 /step ]

0: Scanner input RGB images

1: Scanner I/F RGB images
2: RGB images done by Shading correction (Shading ON, Black offset ON)
3: Shading data
4: Inner pattern data: Gray scale
001 5: RGB images done by Line skipping correction
6: RGB images done by Digital AE
7: RGB images done by Vertical line correction
8: RGB image done by Scanner gamma correction
9: RGB image done by Filtering correction
10: RGB images done by Full color ADS
11: RGB image done by Color correction
4993

228

[High Light Correction]

System SP4xxx

Selects the Highlight correction level.

001 Sensitivity Selection

*ENG

[0 to 9 / 4 / 1 /step]
0: weakest sensitivity
9: strongest sensitivity
Selects the range level of Highlight correction.

002 Range Selection

*ENG

[0 to 9 / 4 / 1 /step]
0: weakest skew correction,
9: strongest skew correction

4994

[Text/Photo Detection Level Adj.]

Selects the definition level between Text and Photo for high compression PDF.
[0 to 2 / 1 / 1 /step]

001 High Compression PDF

*ENG

0: Text priority
1: Normal
2: Photo priority

[White Paper Detect Level]

4996

Selects the threshold level of the original background density. Increasing this threshold level
machine easily judge that an original is white.
[0 to 6 / 3 / 1 /step]

001 -

*ENG

0: lightest
6: Darkest

229

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

System SP5xxx
SP5-XXX (Mode)

5024

[mm/inch Display Selection]

Display units (mm or inch) for custom paper sizes.

001 0:mm 1:inch

*CTL

0: mm (Europe/Asia)
1: inch (USA)

[Accounting Counter]
5045

Selects the counting method.

NOTE: The counting method can be changed only once, regardless of whether the counter
value is negative or positive.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]

001 Counter Method

*CTL

0: Developments
1: Prints

5047

[Paper Display]
Turns on or off the printed paper display on the LCD.

001 Backing Paper

5051

*CTL

[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
0: OFF, 1: ON

[Toner Refill Detection Display]

Enables or disables the toner refill detection display.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ] Alphanumeric

5051 1 -

*CTL

0: ON
1: OFF

5055

230

[Display IP Address]
Display or does not display the IP address on the LCD.

System SP5xxx

001 -

5056

0: OFF 1: ON

Display or does not display the coverage counter on the LCD.

*CTL

[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
0: Not display, 1: Display

[Toner Remaining Icon Display Change]

Display or does not display the remaining toner display icon on the LCD.

001 -

5062

[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]

[Coverage Counter Display]

001 -

5061

*CTL

*CTL

[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
0: Not display, 1: Display

[Parts PM System Setting]

Display or does not display the PM part yield on the LCD.

001 PCU:Bk

*CTL

002 PCU:M

*CTL

003 PCU:C

*CTL

004 PCU:Y

*CTL

005 Development Unit:Bk

*CTL

006 Development Unit:M

*CTL

007 Development Unit:C

*CTL

008 Development Unit:Y

*CTL

009 Image Transfer Belt

*CTL

010 ITB Cleaning Unit

*CTL

011 Fusing Unit

*CTL

012 PTR Unit

*CTL

013 PCU Toner Collection Bottle

*CTL

[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
0: No Display, 1: Display

231

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

5063

001

[Small Tray]
-

*CTL

[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
0: Normal Tray, 1: Envelope Feeder

Changes the tray setting.

5066

[Parts PM Menu Display Setting] Not used

001 -

*CTL

[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
0: No Display, 1: Display

[Parts PM System Setting]

5067

Selects the service maintenance or user maintenance for each PM parts.

If the user service is selected, PM alart is displayed on the LCD.

001 PCU:Bk

*CTL

002 PCU:M

*CTL

003 PCU:C

*CTL

004 PCU:Y

*CTL

005 Development Unit:Bk

*CTL

006 Development Unit:M

*CTL

007 Development Unit:C

*CTL

008 Development Unit:Y

*CTL

009 Image Transfer Belt

*CTL

010 ITB Cleaning Unit

*CTL

011 Fusing Belt

*CTL

012 PTR Unit

*CTL

013 PCU Toner Collection Bottle

*CTL

5071

232

[Set Bypass Paper Size]

[0: Service] or [1: User]

[0: Service] or [1: User]

[0: Service] or [1: User]

System SP5xxx

001

5104

*CTL

[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: Off, 1: On

Turn on or off the paper size confirmation pop-up on the LED. This pop-up prevents
mismatching between a paper size selected by the operation panel and an actual paper
size on the by-pass tray.
[A3/DLT Double Count] SSP
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step]
PCU:Bk

*CTL

001

0: No
1: Yes
2: Yes except By-pass

Specifies whether the counter is doubled for A3/DLT. "Yes" counts except from the bypass
tray. When "Yes" is selected, A3 and DLT paper are counted twice, that is A4 x2 and LT x2
respectively.
5113

[Optional Counter Type]

This program specifies the counter type.
0: None, 1: Key card (RK 3, 4)

001

Default Optional Counter

Type

*CTL

2: Key card (down), 3: Prepaid card

4: Coin rack, 5: MF key card
8: Key counter + Vendor
9: Bar-code Printer
This program specifies the external counter type.

External Optional Counter

002
Type

0: None
*CTL

1: Expansion Device 1
2: Expansion Device 2
3: Expansion Device 3

5114

[Optional Counter I/F]

001 MF Key Card Extension

*CTL

[0: Not installed/ 1: Installed (scanning

accounting)]

233

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

5118

[Disable Copying]

*CTL

[0: Not disabled/ 1: Disabled]

*CTL

[0: Yes (removed)/ 1: Standby (installed but not

used)/ 2: No (not removed)]

001 This program disables copying.

5120
001

3
5121
001

[Mode Clear Opt. Counter

Removal]

This program updates the information on the optional counter. When you install or remove
an optional counter, check the settings.
[Counter Up Timing]

*CTL

[0: Feed/ 1: Exit]

This program specifies when the counter goes up. The settings refer to "paper feed" and
"paper exit" respectively.
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step]

5126

[F Size Original Setting]

*ENG

0: 8 1/2" x 13" (Foolscap)

1: 8 1/4" x 13" (Folio)
2: 8" x 13" (F)

001 Selects F size original setting.

5127

[APS Mode]

*CTL

[0: Not disabled/ 1: Disabled]

001 This program disables the APS.

5128

[Code Mode With Key/Card Option]

*CTL

001 DFU

5131

001

5150

234

[Paper Size Type Selection]

*ENG

DFU
[0: JP (Japan)/ 1: NA / 2: EU]

The program selects a paper size system from the following alternatives: the AB system (0),
the LT system (1), and the AF system (2).
[By-Pass Length Setting]

*CTL

[0: OFF/ 1: ON]

System SP5xxx

Determines whether the transfer sheet from the by-pass tray is used or not.
001 Normally the paper length for sub scanning paper from the by-pass tray is limited to 600
mm, but this can be extended with this SP to 1260 mm.
5162

[App. Switch Method]

*CTL

[0: Soft Key Set/ 1: Hard Key Set]

001 This program specifies the switch that selects an application program.
[Fax Printing Mode at Optional Counter Off]
5167

Enables or disables the automatic print out without an accounting device. This SP is used
when the receiving fax is accounted by an external accounting device.

Fax Printing Mode at Optional

001
*CTL
Counter Off

[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
0: Automatic printing
1: No automatic printing

[CE Login]
5169

If you will change the printer bit switches, you must log in to service mode with this SP before
you go into the printer SP mode.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]

001 -

*CTL

0: Disabled
1: Enabled

5181

[Size Adjust]
Adjusts the paper size for each tray.

001 Tray 1:1

*ENG

002 Tray 1: 2

*ENG

003 Tray 1: 3

*ENG

004 Tray 1: 4

*ENG

[0 to 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / 1 /step]

0: A4 LEF, 1: LT LEF
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
0: A3, 1: DLT
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
0: B4, 1: LG
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
0: B5 LEF, 1: Exe LEF
235

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

005 Tray 2: 1

*ENG

006 Tray 2: 2

*ENG

007 Tray 2: 3

*ENG

008 Tray 2: 4

*ENG

009 Tray 3: 1

*ENG

010 Tray 3: 2

*ENG

011 Tray 3: 3

*ENG

012 Tray 3: 4

*ENG

013 Tray 4: 1

*ENG

014 Tray 4: 2

*ENG

015 Tray 4: 3

*ENG

016 Tray 4: 4

*ENG

[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
0: A4 LEF, 1: LT LEF
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
0: A3, 1: DLT
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
0: B4, 1: LG
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
0: B5 LEF, 1: Exe LEF
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
0: A4 LEF, 1: LT LEF
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
0: A3, 1: DLT
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
0: B4, 1: LG
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
0: B5 LEF, 1: Exe LEF
[0 to 2 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
0: A4LEF, 1: LTLEF
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
0: A3, 1: DLT
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
0: B4, 1: LG
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
0: B5 LEF, 1: Exe LEF

[RK 4 Disconnect Operation]

5186

Enables or disables the prevention for RK4 (accounting device) disconnection.

If the RK4 is disconnected for 10 seconds when this SP is set to "1 (Enable)", the machine
automatically jams a sheet of paper and stops.

236

System SP5xxx

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
001 -

*ENG

0: Disable
1: Enable

5188

[Copy NV Version]
Displays the version number of the NVRAM on the controller board.

001 5195

*CTL

[Limitless SW] DFU

[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
-

*CTL

0: Productivity priority
1: Tray priority

Selects the paper feed mode.

Productivity priority:
001 This changes the feeding tray as soon as the machine detects the priority tray even the paper
still remains in the feeding tray.
Tray priority:
This changes the feeding tray after the paper in the tray where the machine has been feeding
paper has been run out of.
This SP is activated only when a customer selects the "Auto Paper Selsct".
5196

[Copier Vendor Mode]

001 90 deg. Rotation

*CTL

Not used

002 Color and Tray Selection

*CTL

Not used

5199

[Paper Exit After Staple End.]

001 -

*CTL

[ 0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: OFF, 1: ON

237

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

Enables or disables the paper feeding out from the finisher without stapling.
If this setting is "1: ON", paper is fed out without stapling at the maximum number of
the finisher stapling when the machine gets a multiple printing job (over maximum
number).
If this setting is "0: OFF", paper is fed out with stapling at the maximum number of the
finisher stapling when the machine gets a multiple printing job (over maximum number).

5212

[Page Numbering]

*CTL

This program adjusts the position of the second side page numbers.
A " value" moves the page number positions to the left edge.
A "+ value" moves the page number positions to the right edge.
003 Duplex Printout Right/Left Position
004 Duplex Printout High/Low Position

[10 to 10 / 0 / 1 mm/step]

[Set Time]
Adjusts the RTC (real time clock) time setting for the local time zone.
Examples: For Japan (+9 GMT), enter 540 (9 hours x 60 min.)
DOM: +540 (Tokyo)
5302

NA: -300 (New York)

EU: + 60 (Paris)
CH: +480 (Peking)
TW: +480 (Taipei)
AS: +480 (Hong Kong)

002 Time Difference

5307

238

[Summer Time]

*CTL#

[-1440 to 1440 / Area / 1 min./step ]

System SP5xxx

[ 0 to 1 / NA, EU, ASIA / 1 /step]

Setting
001

0: Disabled
1: Enabled
NA and EUR: 1, ASIA: 0

Enables or disables the summer time mode.

Make sure that both SP5-307-3 and -4 are correctly set. Otherwise, this SP is not
activated even if this SP is set to "1".
Rule Set (Start)

Specifies the start setting for the summer time mode.

There are 8 digits in this SP. For months 1 to 9, the "0" cannot be input in the first digit, so the
eight-digit setting for -2 or -3 becomes a seven-digit setting.
1st and 2nd digits: The month. [1 to 12]
3rd digit: The week of the month. [1 to 5]
003

4th digit: The day of the week. [0 to 6 = Sunday to Saturday]

5th and 6th digits: The hour. [00 to 23]
7th digit: The length of the advanced time. [0 to 9 / 1 hour /step]
8th digit: The length of the advanced time. [0 to 5 / 10 minutes /step]
For example: 3500010 (EU default)
The timer is advanced by 1 hour at am 0:00 on the 5th Sunday in March
The digits are counted from the left.
Make sure that SP5-307-1 is set to "1".
Rule Set (End)

Specifies the end setting for the summer time mode.

There are 8 digits in this SP.
1st and 2nd digits: The month. [1 to 12]
004

3rd digit: The week of the month. [0 to 5]

4th digit: The day of the week. [0 to 7 = Sunday to Saturday]
5th and 6th digits: The hour. [00 to 23]
The 7th and 8 digits must be set to "00".
The digits are counted from the left.
Make sure that SP5-307-1 is set to "1".
239

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

[Access Control]

5401

When installing the SDK application, SAS (VAS) adjusts the following settings. DFU
Whenever a new login user is added to the
address book in external certification mode (for
Windows, LDAP, RDH), the default document
ACL is updated according to this SP setting.

[0 to 3 / 0 / 1]
103 Default Document ACL

*CTL

0: View
1: Edit
2: Edit/Delete
3: Full control
Note: This SP setting is ignored on a machine that
is not using document server.
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 sec./step]

104

Authentication Time

*CTL

0: 60 seconds
1 to 250 seconds

Specifies the timeout of the authentication.

Selects the log out type for the extend
authentication device.
162 Extend Certification Detail

*CTL

Bit 0: Log-out without an IC card

0: Not allowed (default)
1: Allowed

240

200 SDK1 Unique ID

*CTL

201 SDK1 Certification Method

*CTL

210 SDK2 Unique ID

*CTL

211 SDK2 Certification Method

*CTL

220 SDK3 Unique ID

*CTL

221 SDK3 Certification Method

*CTL

"SDK" is the "Software Development Kit". This

data can be converted from SAS (VAS) when
installed or uninstalled. (DFU)

System SP5xxx

SDK certification device

*CTL

Bit 0: SDK authentication

0: Off (Default), 1: On (SDK authentication enabled)

230

Selects the SDK authentication setting.

Bit 2: Administrator log in setting
0: Off (Default), 1: On
Detail Option

*CTL

Enables or disables the log out confirmation option.

Bit 0: Log out confirmation option

0: Enable (default), 1: Disable

240

Selects the automatic log out time.

Bit 1 and 2: Automatic log out timer reduction
00: 60 seconds (default), 01: 10 seconds,
10: 20 seconds, 11: 30 seconds

5404

[User Code Counter Clear]

001 -

5411

*CTL

Clears all counters for users.

*CTL

Determines whether easy LDAP certification is

done.

[LDAP Certification]

004 Easy Certification

[0 to 1 / 1 / 1] 1: On, 0: Off
This SP is referenced only when SP5411-4 is set
to "1" (On).
005 Password Null Not Permit

*CTL

[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Password NULL not permitted.
1: Password NULL permitted.

006 Detail Option

*CTL

Determines whether LDAP option (anonymous

certification) is turned on or off.
Bit0
0: OFF, 1: ON

241

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

5413

[Lockout Setting]

001 Lockout On/Off

*CTL

Switches on/off the lock on the local address

book account.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Off, 1: On

002 Lockout Threshold

*CTL

Sets a limit on the frequency of lockouts for

account lockouts.
[1 to 10 / 5 / 1]
Determines whether the system waits the
prescribed time for input of a correct user ID and
password after an account lockout has occurred.

003 Cancellation On/Off

*CTL

[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Off (no wait time, lockout not cancelled)
1: On (system waits, cancels lockout if correct
user ID and password are entered.

004 Cancellation Time

*CTL

Determines the length of time that the system waits

for correct input of the user ID and password after
a lockout has occurred. This setting is used only
if SP5413-3 is set to "1" (on).
[1 to 999 / 60 / 1 min.]

005 Counter Clear Time

5414

*CTL

Not Used

[Access Mitigation]
Switches on/off masking of continuously used
IDs and passwords that are identical.
001 Mitigation On/Off

*CTL

[0 to 1 / 0 /1]
0: Off
1: On

002 Mitigation Time

*CTL

Sets the length of time for excluding continuous

access for identical user IDs and passwords.
[0 to 60 / 15 / 1 min.]

5415

242

[Password Attack]

System SP5xxx

001 Permissible Number

*CTL

Sets the number of attempts to attack the system

with random passwords to gain illegal access to
the system.
[0 to 100 / 30 / 1 attempt]

002 Detect Time

*CTL

Sets the time limit to stop a password attack once

such an attack has been detected.
[1 to 10 / 5 / 1 sec.]

5416

[Access Information]

001 Access User Max Num

*CTL

Limits the number of users used by the access

exclusion and password attack detection
functions.
[50 to 200 / 200 / 1 users]

002 Access Password Max Num

*CTL

Limits the number of passwords used by the

access exclusion and password attack detection
functions.
[50 to 200 / 200 / 1 passwords]

003 Monitor Interval

*CTL

Sets the processing time interval for referencing

user ID and password information.
[1 to 10 / 3 / 1 sec.]

5417

[Access Attack]

001 Access Permissible Number

*CTL

Sets a limit on access attempts when an excessive

number of attempts are detected for MFP
features.
[0 to 500 / 100 / 1]

002 Attack Detect Time

*CTL

Sets the length of time for monitoring the

frequency of access to MFP features.
[10 to 30 / 10 / 1 sec.]

003 Productivity Fall Wait

*CTL

Sets the wait time to slow down the speed of

certification when an excessive number of access
attempts have been detected.
[0 to 9 / 3 / 1 sec.]

243

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

004 Attack Max Num

*CTL

Sets a limit on the number of requests received

for certification in order to slow down the
certification speed when an excessive number of
access attempts have been detected.
[50 to 200 / 200 /1 attempt]

[User Authentication]

5420

These settings should be done with the System Administrator.

Note: These functions are enabled only after the user access feature has been enabled.

001 Copy

*CTL

Determines whether certification is required

before a user can use the copy applications.
[0 to 1 / 0 /1]
0: On, 1: Off

Color Security Setting

*CTL

Enables or disables the color copy limitation for each copy mode when the user
authentication is "ON".
0: Enable (default), 1: Disable
002

Bit0: B/W mode

Bit1: Mono color mode
Bit2: Two colors mode
Bit3: Full color mode
Bit4: Automatic color mode
Bit5 to 7: Reserved

011 Document Server

*CTL

Determines whether certification is required

before a user can use the document server.
[0 to 1 / 0 /1]
0: On, 1: Off

021 Fax

*CTL

Determines whether certification is required

before a user can use the fax application.
[0 to 1 / 0 /1]
0: On, 1: Off

244

System SP5xxx

031 Scanner

*CTL

Determines whether certification is required

before a user can use the scan applications.
[0 to 1 / 0 /1]
0: On, 1: Off

041 Printer

*CTL

Determines whether certification is required

before a user can use the printer applications.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: On, 1: Off

051 SDK1

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1] 0: ON. 1: OFF

061 SDK2

*CTL

071 SDK3
5430

Determines whether certification is required

before a user can use the SDK application.

[Auth Dialog Message Change]

001 Message Change On/Off

*CTL

Turns on or off the displayed message change for

the authentication.
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: Off, 1: On

002 Message Text Download

*CTL

Executes the message download for the

authentication.

003 Message Text ID

*CTL

Inputs message text for the authentication.

5431

[External Auth Preset]

010

Tag

*CTL

[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
0: Not permit, 1: Permit

Turns on or off the tag copy permission for the external authentication.

011

Entry

*CTL

[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
0: Not permit, 1: Permit

Turns on or off the copy permission of the entry information for the external authentication.

245

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

012

Group

*CTL

[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
0: Not permit, 1: Permit

Turns on or off the copy permission of the group information for the external authentication.

020

Mail

*CTL

[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
0: Not permit, 1: Permit

Turns on or off the copy permission of the mail information for the external authentication.

3
030

Fax

*CTL

[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
0: Not permit, 1: Permit

Turns on or off the copy permission of the fax information for the external authentication.
FaxSub

*CTL

031

[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
0: Not permit, 1: Permit

Turns on or off the copy permission of the fax additional information for the external
authentication.

032

Folder

*CTL

[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
0: Not permit, 1: Permit

Turns on or off the copy permission of the folder information for the external authentication.
ProtectCode

*CTL

033

[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
0: Not permit, 1: Permit

Turns on or off the copy permission of the protection code information for the external
authentication.

034

SmtpAuth

*CTL

[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
0: Not permit, 1: Permit

Turns on or off the copy permission of the SMTP information for the external authentication.

035

LdapAuth

*CTL

[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
0: Not permit, 1: Permit

Turns on or off the copy permission of the LDAP information for the external authentication.

246

System SP5xxx

Smb Ftp Auth

*CTL

036

[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
0: Not permit, 1: Permit

Turns on or off the copy permission of the SMB/FTP information for the external
authentication.
AcntAcl

*CTL

037

[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
0: Not permit, 1: Permit

Turns on or off the copy permission of the account ACL information for the external
authentication.
DocumentAcl

*CTL

038

[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
0: Not permit, 1: Permit

Turns on or off the copy permission of the document ACL information for the external
authentication.
[0 or 1 / 1 / -]

CertCrypt

0: Not permit, 1: Permit

040

Turns on or off the copy permission of the authentication information for the external
authentication.
UserLimitCount

*CTL

050

[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
0: Not permit, 1: Permit

Turns on or off the copy permission of the maximum number information for the external
authentication.

5481

[Authentication Error Code]

These SP codes determine how the authentication failures are displayed.

001 System Log Disp

*CTL

Determines whether an error code appears in the

system log after a user authentication failure
occurs.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Off, 1: On

247

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

002 Panel Disp

*CTL

Determines whether an error code appears on

the operation panel after a user authentication
failure occurs.
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
1: On, 0: Off

5490

[MF Key Card (Japan only)]

Sets up operation of the machine with a keycard.

[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
001 Job Permit Setting

*CTL

0: Disabled. Cancels operation without a user

code.
1: Enabled. Allows operation without a user
code.

002 Count Mode Setting

5501

*CTL

[PM Alarm]
[0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 / step]
001 PM Alarm Level

*CTL

0: Alarm off
1 to 9999: Alarm goes off when Value (1 to
9999) x 1000 > PM counter
[0 or 1 / 1 / -]

002 Original Count Alarm

5504

[Jam Alarm]

*CTL

*CTL

0: No alarm sounds
1: Alarm sounds after the number of originals
passing through the ARDF > 10,000
-

Sets the alarm to sound for the specified jam level (document misfeeds are not included).
[0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
001

0: Zero (Off)
1: Low (2.5K jams)
2: Medium (3K jams)
3: High (6K jams)

248

System SP5xxx

[Error Alarm]
Sets the error alarm level.
The error alarm counter counts "1" when any SC is detected. However, the error alarm
counter decreases by "1" when an SC is not detected during a set number of copied sheets
(for example, default 1500 sheets).

5505

The error alarm occurs when the SC error alarm counter reaches "5".
001 [Supply Alarm]

5507

*CTL
*CTL

[0 to 255 / 20 / 100 copies /step]

Enables or disables the notifying a supply call via the @Remote.

001 Paper Supply Alarm

0: Off, 1: On

002 Staple Supply Alarm

0: Off, 1: On

003 Toner Supply Alarm

0: Off, 1: On

080 Toner Call Timing

Changes the timing of the "Toner Supply Call" via the

@Remote, when the following conditions occur.
0: At replacement
1: At near end

128 Interval :Others

132 Interval :A3
133 Interval :A4
134 Interval :A5
141 Interval :B4
142 Interval :B5

[250 to 10000 / 1000 / 1 /step]

160 Interval :DLT

164 Interval :LG
166 Interval :LT
172 Interval :HLT
5508*

[CC Call]

*CTL

249

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

001*

002*

003*

3
011*

012*

013*

Jam Remains

0: Disable, 1: Enable

Enables/disables initiating a call for an unattended paper jam.

Continuous Jams

0: Disable, 1: Enable

Enables/disables initiating a call for consecutive paper jams.

Continuous Door Open

0: Disable, 1: Enable

Enables/disables initiating a call when the front door remains open.

Jam Detection: Time Length

[3 to 30 / 10 / 1 minute /step]

Sets the time a jam must remain before it becomes an "unattended paper jam".
Jam Detection: Continuous Count

[2 to 10 / 5 / 1 /step]

Sets the number of consecutive paper jams required to initiate a call.

Door Open: Time Length

[3 to 30 / 10 / 1 /step]

Sets the length of time the door remains open before the machine initiates a call.
[SC/Alarm Setting]

5515

With @Remote in use, these SP codes can be set to issue an SC call when an SC error
occurs. If this SP is switched off, the SC call is not issued when an SC error occurs.
001 SC Call
002 Service Parts Near End Call
003 Service Parts End Call
004 User Call

250

[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
0: Off
1: On

System SP5xxx

006 Communication Test Call

007 Machine Information Notice
008 Alarm Notice

[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]

009 Non Genuin Tonner Alarm

0: Off
1: On

010 Supply Automatic Ordering Call

011 Supply Manegement Report Call

012 Jam/Door Open Call

[Individual PM Part Alarm
Call]

5516

*CTL

With @Remote in use, these SP codes can be set to issue an PM alarm call when one of SP
parts reaches its yield.
001

Disable/Enable Setting (0: Not send, 1:

Send)

004 Percent yield for triggering PM alert

5610

[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
0: Not send, 1: Send
[1 to 255 / 75 / 1 %/step]

[Base Gamma Cntl P: Command]

004

005

006

5611

Recall Factory Setting

Recalls the factory settings of the base gamma control points.

Restore Factory Setting

Overwrites the current values onto the factory settings of the base gamma control points.
Restore Prev. Setting

Recalls the previous settings of the base gamma control points.

[Toner Color in 2C]

001

B-C

*ENG

[0 to 128 / 100 / 1 /step]

128: Darkest density

Adjusts the Cyan correction value of the blue signal in two-color mode.

251

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

002

B-M

*ENG

[0 to 128 / 100 / 1 /step]

128: Darkest density

Adjusts the Magenta correction value of the blue signal in two-color mode.

003

G-C

*ENG

[0 to 128 / 100 / 1 /step]

128: Darkest density

Adjusts the Cyan correction value of the blue signal in two-color mode.

3
004

G-Y

*ENG

[0 to 128 / 100 / 1 /step]

128: Darkest density

Adjusts the Yellow correction value of the blue signal in two-color mode.

005

R-M

*ENG

[0 to 128 / 100 / 1 /step]

128: Darkest density

Adjusts the Magenta correction value of the blue signal in two-color mode.

006

R-Y

*ENG

[0 to 128 / 100 / 1 /step]

128: Darkest density

Adjusts the Yellow correction value of the blue signal in two-color mode.
5618

[Color Mode Display Selection]

[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
001

*CTL

0: ACS, Colour, Black & White, Two Colour, Single

colour
1: ACD, Full Colour, Black & White

Selects the color selection display on the LCD.

Memory Clear (SP5-801)

The following tables list the items that are cleared. The serial number information, meter charge setting
and meter charge counters (SP8-581, 582, 583, 584, and 586) are not cleared.
5730
Extended Function Setting
5731

252

[Counter Effect] JPN only

System SP5xxx

001

5801

Change Mk1 Cnt (Paper>Combine)

*CTL

[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled

[Memory Clear]
001 All Clear

Resets all correction data for process control and all

software counters, and returns all modes and adjustments to
their default values.

002 Engine [ENG]

Clears the engine settings.

003 SCS

Initializes default system settings, SCS (System Control

Service) settings, operation display coordinates, and ROM
update information.

004 IMH Memory Clr

Initializes the IMH settings.

005 MCS

Initializes the Mcs settings.

006 Copier application

Initializes all copier application settings.

007 Fax application

Initializes the fax reset time, job login ID, all TX/RX settings,
local storage file numbers, and off-hook timer.

The following service settings:

Bit switches
Gamma settings (User & Service)
Toner Limit
008 Printer application

The following user settings:

Tray Priority
Menu Protect
System Setting except for setting of Energy Saver
I/F Setup (I/O Buffer and I/O Timeout)
PCL Menu

009 Scanner application

Initializes the scanner defaults for the scanner and all the
scanner SP modes.

010 Web Service

Deletes the network file application management files and

thumbnails, and initializes the job login ID.

253

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

011 NCS

012 R-FAX

(NCS: Network Control Service)

Initializes the job login ID, SmartDeviceMonitor for
Admin, job history, and local storage file numbers.

014 Clear DCS Setting

Initializes the DCS (Delivery Control Service) settings.

015 Clear UCS Setting

Initializes the UCS (User Information Control Service)

settings.

016 MIRS Setting

Initializes the MIRS (Machine Information Report Service)

settings.

017 CCS

Initializes the CCS (Certification and Charge-control

Service) settings.

018 SRM Memory Clr

Initializes the SRM (System Resource Manager) settings.

019 LCS

Initializes the LCS settings.

020 Web Uapli

Initializes the web user application settings.

021 ECS

Initializes the ECS settings.

5803

[Input Check]

See "Input Check Table" in this section.

5804

[Output Check]

See "Output Check Table" in this section.

5806

[RFID CONT.READING]
001

002

003

254

All setting of Network Setup (User Menu)

TIMES

[0 to 65535 / - / 1 /step]

Displays the counter for the RFID communication test.

NOT 0

[0 to 65535 / - / 1 /step]

Displays the counter for the RFID communication failure.

RET.

[0 to 65535 / - / 1 /step]

Displays the counter for the RFID communication retry.

004 EXE.ALL

Execute the RFID communication test for all colors.

005 EXE.K

Execute the RFID communication test for balck.

System SP5xxx

006 EXE.M

Execute the RFID communication test for magenta.

007 EXE.C

Execute the RFID communication test for cyan.

008 EXE.Y

Execute the RFID communication test for yellow.

[SC Reset]
5810

Resets a type A service call condition.

Turn the main switch off and on after resetting the SC code.
001 Fusing SC Reset

5811

[Machine Serial] Machine Serial Number Display

002 Display
004 BCU

*ENG
-

Displays the machine serial number.

Inputs the serial number.

005 FRAM
5812

[Service Tel. No. Setting]

Service

*CTL

001 Sets the telephone number for a service representative. This number is printed on the
Counter List, which can be printed with the users "Counter" menu.
This can be up to 20 characters (both numbers and alphabetic characters can be input).
Facsimile

*CTL

002 Sets the fax or telephone number for a service representative. This number is printed on the
Counter List.
This can be up to 20 characters (both numbers and alphabetic characters can be input).
Supply

*CTL

003 Use this to input the telephone number of your supplier for consumables. Enter the number
and press #.

255

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

Operation

*CTL

004 Use this to input the telephone number of your sales agency. Enter the number and press
#.
5816

[Remote Service]

*CTL

I/F Setting

Selects the remote service setting.

001

[0 to 2 / 2 / 1 /step]
0: Remote service off
1: CSS remote service on
2: @Remote service on
CE Call
Performs the CE Call at the start or end of the service.

002

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Start of the service
1: End of the service
NOTE: This SP is activated only when SP 5816-001 is set to "2".
Function Flag

Enables or disables the remote service function.

003 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
NOTE: This SP setting is changed to "1" after @Remote registor has been completed.
SSL Disable
Uses or does not use the RCG certification by SSL when calling the RCG.
007 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Uses the RCG certification
1: Does no use the RCG certification
RCG Connect Timeout
008 Specifies the connect timeout interval when calling the RCG.
[1 to 90 / 10 / 1 second /step]

256

System SP5xxx

RCG Write Timeout

009 Specifies the write timeout interval when calling the RCG.
[1 to 100 / 60 / 1 second /step]
RCG Read Timeout
010 Specifies the read timeout interval when calling the RCG.
[1 to 100 / 60 / 1 second /step]
Port 80 Enable
011

Enables/disables access via port 80 to the SOAP method.

[0 or 1 / 0 / ]
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
RFU (Remote Frimware Update) Timing
Selects the RFU timing.

013 [0 or 1 / 1 / ]
0: RFU is executed whenever update request is received.
1: RFU is executed only when the machine is in the sleep mode.
RCG C Registed
021

This SP displays the Embedded RC Gate installation end flag.

0: Installation not completed
1: Installation completed
RCG C Regist Detail
This SP displays the Embedded RC Gate installation status.

022 0: RCG device not registered

1: RCG device registered
2: Device registered
Connect Type (N/M)
This SP displays and selects the Embedded RC Gate connection method.
023 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step
0: Internet connection
1: Dial-up connection

257

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

061

Cert. Expire Timing DFU

Proximity of the expiration of the certification.
Use Proxy

062 This SP setting determines if the proxy server is used when the machine communicates with
the service center.
Proxy Host

3
063

This SP sets the address of the proxy server used for communication between Embedded
RC Gate-N and the gateway. Use this SP to set up or display the customer proxy server
address. The address is necessary to set up Embedded RC Gate-N.
The address display is limited to 128 characters. Characters beyond the 128
character are ignored.
This address is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report.
Proxy Port Number

This SP sets the port number of the proxy server used for communication between Embedded
064 RC Gate-N and the gateway. This setting is necessary to set up Embedded RC Gate-N.
This port number is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report.
Proxy User Name
This SP sets the HTTP proxy certification user name.
065
The length of the name is limited to 31 characters. Any character beyond the 31st
character is ignored.
This name is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report.
Proxy Password
This SP sets the HTTP proxy certification password.
066
The length of the password is limited to 31 characters. Any character beyond the 31st
character is ignored.
This name is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report.

258

System SP5xxx

067

CERT: Up State
Displays the status of the certification update.
0

The certification used by Embedded RC Gate is set correctly.

The certification request (setAuthKey) for update has been received from the GW
URL and certification is presently being updated.

The certification update is completed and the GW URL is being notified of the
successful update.

The certification update failed, and the GW URL is being notified of the failed update.

The period of the certification has expired and new request for an update is being
sent to the GW URL.

11

A rescue update for certification has been issued and a rescue certification setting
is in progress for the rescue GW connection.

12

The rescue certification setting is completed and the GW URL is being notified of the
certification update request.

13

The notification of the request for certification update has completed successfully,
and the system is waiting for the certification update request from the rescue GW
URL.

14

The notification of the certification request has been received from the rescue GW
controller, and the certification is being stored.

15

The certification has been stored, and the GW URL is being notified of the successful
completion of this event.

16

The storing of the certification has failed, and the GW URL is being notified of the
failure of this event.

17

The certification update request has been received from the GW URL, the GW URL
was notified of the results of the update after it was completed, but a certification
error has been received, and the rescue certification is being recorded.

18

The rescue certification of No. 17 has been recorded, and the GW URL is being
notified of the failure of the certification update.

CERT: Error
068 Displays a number code that describes the reason for the request for update of the
certification.

259

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

260

Normal. There is no request for certification update in progress.

Request for certification update in progress. The current certification has expired.

An SSL error notification has been issued. Issued after the certification has expired.

Notification of shift from a common authentication to an individual certification.

Notification of a common certification without ID2.

Notification that no certification was issued.

Notification that GW URL does not exist.

069 CERT: Up ID

The ID of the request for certification.

083 Firmware Up Status

Displays the status of the firmware update.

085 Firm Up User Check

This SP setting determines if the operator can confirm the

previous version of the firmware before the firmware
update execution. If the option to confirm the previous
version is selected, a notification is sent to the system
manager and the firmware update is done with the
firmware files from the URL.

086 Firmware Size

Allows the service technician to confirm the size of the

firmware data files during the firmware update execution.

087 CERT: Macro Ver.

Displays the macro version of the @Remote certification.

088 CERT: PAC Ver.

Displays the PAC version of the @Remote certification.

089 CERT: ID2 Code

Displays ID2 for the @Remote certification. Spaces are

displayed as underscores (_). Asteriskes (*) indicate that
no @Remote certification exists. "000000___________"
indicates "Common certification".

090 CERT: Subject

Displays the common name of the @Remote certification

subject. CN = the following 17 bytes. Spaces are
displayed as underscores (_). Asterisks (*) indicate that
no @Remote certification exists. "000000___________"
indicates "Common certification".

091 CERT: Serial No.

Displays serial number for the @Remote certification.

Asterisks (*) indicate that no @Remote certification exists.

System SP5xxx

092 CERT: Issuer

Displays the common name of the issuer of the @Remote

certification. CN = the following 30 bytes. Asteriskes ()
indicate that no @Remote certification exists.

093 CERT: Valid Start

Displays the start time of the period for which the current
@Remote certification is enabled.

094 CERT: Valid End

Displays the end time of the period for which the current
@Remote certification is enabled.

150

151

152

153

154

156

157

161

162

163

Selection Country

Not used
Line Type Automatic Judgment
Not used
Line Type Judgment Result
Not used
Selection Dial/Push
Not used
Outside Line/Outgoing Number
Not used
Dial Up User Name
Not used
Dial Up Password
Not used
Local Phone Number
Not used
Connection Timing Adjustment: Incoming
Not used
Access Point
Not used

261

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

164

Line Connecting
Not used

173 Modem Serial Number

174

187

Not used

Retransmission Limit
Not used
FAX TX Priority

Not used

200 Manual Polling

Not used

Regist: Status
Displays a number that indicates the status of the @Remote service device.
0: Neither the @Remote device nor Embedded RCG Gate is set.
1: The Embedded RCG Gate is being set. Only Box registration is completed. In this status,
201 @Remote device cannot communicate with this device.
2: The Embedded RCG Gate is set. In this status, the @Remote device cannot communicate
with this device.
3: The @Remote device is being set. In this status the Embedded RCG Gate cannot be set.
4: The @Remote module has not started.
202 Letter Number

Allows entry of the request number needed for the

Embedded RCG Gate.

203 Confirm Execute

Executes the confirmation request to the @Remote Gateway.

204 Confirm Result

262

System SP5xxx

Displays a number that indicates the result of the confirmation executed with SP5816-203.
0: Succeeded
1: Confirmation number error
2: Registration in progress
3: Proxy error (proxy enabled)
4: Proxy error (proxy disabled)
5: Proxy error (Illegal user name or password)
6: Communication error
7: Certification update error

8: Other error
9: Confirmation executing
Confirm Place
205 Displays the result of the notification sent to the device from the Gateway in answer to the
confirmation request. Displayed only when the result is registered at the Gateway.
206 Register Execute

Executes "Embedded RCG Registration".

Register Result
Displays a number that indicates the registration result.
0: Succeeded
2: Registration in progress
3: Proxy error (proxy enabled)
207 4: Proxy error (proxy disabled)
5: Proxy error (Illegal user name or password)
6: Communication error
7: Certification update error
8: Other error
9: Registration executing
Error Code
208 Displays a number that describes the error code that was issued when either SP5816-204
or SP5816-207 was executed.

263

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

Cause

Illegal Modem Parameter

Operation Error, Incorrect

Setting

Operation Error, Incorrect

Setting

Error Caused by Response

from GW URL

264

Code

Meaning

-11001

Chat parameter error

-11002

Chat execution error

-11003

Unexpected error

-12002

Inquiry, registration attempted without acquiring

device status.

-12003

Attempted registration without execution of an

inquiry and no previous registration.

-12004

Attempted setting with illegal entries for

certification and ID2.

-12005

@Remote communication is prohibited. The

device has an Embedded RC gate-related
problem.

-12006

A confirmation request was made after the

confirmation had been already completed.

-12007

The request number used at registration was

different from the one used at confirmation.

-12008

Update certification failed because mainframe

was in use.

-12009

ID2 mismatch between an individual

certification and NVRAM

-12010

Certification area is not initialized.

-2385

Attempted dial up overseas without the correct

international prefix for the telephone number.

-2387

Not supported at the Service Center

-2389

Database out of service

-2390

Program out of service

-2391

Two registrations for same device

-2392

Parameter error

System SP5xxx

-2393

RCG device not managed

-2394

Device not managed

-2395

Box ID for RCG device is illegal

-2396

Device ID for RCG device is illegal

-2397

Incorrect ID2 format

-2398

Incorrect request number format

Releases the machine from its Embedded RCG Gate setup.

5821

209 Instl Clear

NOTE: Turn off and on the main power switch after this
setting has been changed.

250 CommLog Print

Prints the communication log.

[Remote Service Address]

002 RCG IP Address

*CTL

Sets the IP address of the RCG (Remote

Communication Gate) destination for call
processing at the remote service center.

[NV-RAM Data Upload]

5824

Uploads the UP and SP mode data (except for counters and the serial number) from the
NVRAM to an SD card. For details, see the "NVRAM Data Upload/Download" in the
"System Maintenance Reference" of the Field Service Manual.
001 -

[NV-RAM Data Download]

5825

Downloads the UP and SP mode data from an SD card to the NVRAM. For details, see the
"NVRAM Data Upload/Download" in the "System Maintenance Reference" of the Field
Service Manual.
001 -

5828

[Network Setting]

*CTL

265

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

Enables or disables 1284 Compatibility.

050 1284 Compatibility (Centro)

[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Enables or disables ECP Compatibility.
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]

052 ECP (Centro)

0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
This SP is activated only when SP5-828-50 is set to
"1".
Enables/disables Job Spooling.

065 Job Spooling

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled

066 Job Spooling Clear: Start Time

Treatment of the job when a spooled job exists at power

on.
0: ON (Data is cleared)
1: OFF (Automatically printed)
Validates or invalidates the job spooling function for each
protocol.
0: Validates
1: Invalidates
bit0: LPR

069 Job Spooling (Protocol)

bit1: FTP
bit2: IPP
bit3: SMB
bit4: BMLinkS
bit5: DIPRINT
bit6: sftp
bit7: (Reserved)
Enables or disables the Telnet protocol.

090 TELNET (0: OFF 1: ON)

[0 or 1 / 1 / ]
0: Disable, 1: Enable

266

System SP5xxx

Enables or disables the Web operation.

091 Web (0: OFF 1: ON)

[0 or 1 / 1 / ]
0: Disable, 1: Enable
This is the IPv6 local address link referenced on the
Ethernet or wireless LAN (802.11b) in the format:

145 Active IPv6 Link Local Address "Link Local Address" + "Prefix Length"
The IPv6 address consists of a total 128 bits configured
in 8 blocks of 16 bits each.
147

Active IPv6 Stateless Address

1

149

Active IPv6 Stateless Address

2

151

Active IPv6 Stateless Address

3

Active IPv6 Stateless Address

153
4
155

These SPs are the IPv6 status addresses (1 to 5) referenced

on the Ethernet or wireless LAN (802.11b) in the format:
"Status Address" + "Prefix Length"
The IPv6 address consists of a total 128 bits configured
in 8 blocks of 16 bits each.

Active IPv6 Stateless Address

5
This SP is the IPv6 manually set address referenced on the
Ethernet or wireless LAN (802.11b) in the format:

156 IPv6 Manual Address

"Manual Set Address" + "Prefix Length"

The IPv6 address consists of a total 128 bits configured
in 8 blocks of 16 bits each.

158 IPv6 Gateway Address

This SP is the IPv6 gateway address referenced on the

Ethernet or wireless LAN (802.11b). The IPv6 address
consists of a total 128 bits configured in 8 blocks of 16
bits each.
Enables or disables the automatic setting for IPv6 stateless.

161 IPv6 Stateless Auto Setting

[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: Disable, 1: Enable

267

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

Displays or does not display the Web system items.

236 Web Item visible

[0 x 0000 to 0 x ffff / 0 x ffff] 0: Not displayed, 1:

Displayed
bit0: Net RICOH
bit1: Consumable Supplier
bit2-15: Reserved (all)

237 Web shopping link visible

Displays or does not display the link to Net RICOH on the

top page and link page of the web system.
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
0: Not display, 1:Display

238 Web supplies Link visible

Displays or does not display the link to Consumable

Supplier on the top page and link page of the web system.
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
0: Not display, 1:Display

239 Web Link1 Name

This SP confirms or changes the URL1 name on the link

page of the web system. The maximum characters for the
URL name are 31 characters.

240 Web Link1 URL

This SP confirms or changes the link to URL1 on the link

page of the web system. The maximum characters for the
URL are 127 characters.

241 Web Link1 visible

Displays or does not display the link to URL1 on the top

page of the web system.
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
0: Not display, 1:Display

5832

268

242 Web Link2 Name

Same as "-239"

243 Web Link2 URL

Same as "-240"

244 Web Link2 visible

Same as "-241"

[HDD] HDD Initialization

*CTL

System SP5xxx

001 HDD Formatting (ALL)

002 HDD Formatting (IMH)
003 HDD Formatting (Thumbnail)
004 HDD Formatting (Job Log)
005 HDD Formatting (Printer Fonts)
006 HDD Formatting (User Info)

Initializes the hard disk. Use this SP mode only

if there is a hard disk error.

007 Mail RX Data

008 Mail TX Data

009 HDD Formatting (Data for a Design)
010 HDD Formatting (Log)
011 HDD Formatting (Ridoc I/F)
5836

[Capture Settings]

*CTL

Capture Function (0:Off 1:On)

0: Disable, 1: Enable

001 With this function disabled, the settings related to the capture feature cannot be initialized,
displayed, or selected.
002

Panel Setting

0: Displayed, 1: Not displayed

Displays or does not display the capture function buttons.

5836-71 to 5836-76, Copier and Printer Document Reduction
The following 6 SP modes set the default reduction for stored documents sent to the
document management server via the MLB.
Enabled only when optional MLB (Media Link Board) is installed.

071 Reduction for Copy Color

0: 1to-1, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4

072 Reduction for Copy B&W Text

0: 1to-1, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4

073 Reduction for Copy B&W Other

0: 1to-1, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4

074 Reduction for Printer Color

0: 1to-1, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4

075 Reduction for Printer B&W

0: 1to-1, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4

269

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

076 Reduction for Printer B&W HQ

0: 1to-1, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4

077 Reduction for Printer Color 1200

1: 1/2, 3: 1/4, 4: 1/6, 5: 1/8 (2: skipped) ,

6: 2/3

078 Reduction for Printer B&W 1200

1: 1/2, 3: 1/4, 4: 1/6, 5: 1/8 (2: skipped) ,

6: 2/3

5836-81 to 5836-86, Stored document format

The following 6 SP modes set Sets the default format for stored documents sent to the document
management server via the MLB.
Enabled only when optional MLB (Media Link Board) is installed.
0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR,
081 Format for Copy Color

2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR
This SP is not used in this model.

082 Format for Copy B&W Text

083 Format for Copy B&W Other

0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR,
2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR
0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR,
2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR
0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR,

084 Format for Printer Color

2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR
This SP is not used in this model.

085 Format for Printer B&W

086 Format for Printer B&W HQ

Default for JPEG

0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR,
2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR
0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR,
2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR
[5 to 95 / 50 / 1 /step]

091 Sets the JPEG format default for documents sent to the document management server via
the MLB with JPEG selected as the format.
Enabled only when optional MLB (Media Link Board) is installed.

270

System SP5xxx

101 Primary srv IP address

Sets the IP address for the primary capture server. This is

basically adjusted by the remote system.

102 Primary srv scheme

This is basically adjusted by the remote system.

103 Primary srv port number

This is basically adjusted by the remote system.

104 Primary srv URL path

This is basically adjusted by the remote system.

111 Secondary srv IP address

Sets the IP address for the secondary capture server. This is

basically adjusted by the remote system.

112 Secondary srv scheme

This is basically adjusted by the remote system.

113 Secondary srv port number This is basically adjusted by the remote system.
114 Secondary srv URL path

This is basically adjusted by the remote system.

120 Default Reso Rate Switch

This is basically adjusted by the remote system.

Reso: Copy (Color)

[0 to 3 / 2 / 1/step]

121 Selects the resolution for color copy mode. This is basically adjusted by the remote system.
0: 600dpi/ 1: 300dpi/ 2: 150dpi/ 3: 75dpi
Reso: Copy (Mono)

[0 to 5 / 3 / 1/step]

122 Selects the resolution for BW copy mode. This is basically adjusted by the remote system.
0: 600dpi/ 1: 400dpi/ 2: 300dpi/ 3: 200dpi/ 4: 150dpi/ 5: 100dpi
Reso: Print (Color)
123

This is basically adjusted by the remote system.

[0 to 3 / 2 / 1/step]

Selects the resolution for color print mode. This is basically adjusted by the remote system.
0: 600dpi/ 1: 300dpi/ 2: 150dpi/ 3: 75dpi
Reso: Print (Mono)

124

This is basically adjusted by the remote system.

[0 to 5 / 3 / 1/step]

Selects the resolution for BW print mode. This is basically adjusted by the remote system.
0: 600dpi/ 1: 400dpi/ 2: 300dpi/ 3: 200dpi/ 4: 150dpi/ 5: 100dpi

271

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

Reso: Fax (Color)

This is basically adjusted by the remote

system.
[0 to 6 / 4 / 1/step]

125

Selects the resolution for color fax mode. This is basically adjusted by the remote system.
0: 600dpi/ 1: 400dpi/ 2: 300dpi/ 3: 200dpi/ 4: 150dpi/ 5: 100dpi/ 6: 75dpi

Reso: Fax (Mono)

This is basically adjusted by the remote

system.
[0 to 6 / 3 / 1/step]

126

Selects the resolution for BW fax mode. This is basically adjusted by the remote system.
0: 600dpi/ 1: 400dpi/ 2: 300dpi/ 3: 200dpi/ 4: 150dpi/ 5: 100dpi/ 6: 75dpi

Reso: Scan (Color)

127

This is basically adjusted by the remote

system.
[0 to 6 / 4 / 1/step]

Selects the resolution for color scanning mode. This is basically adjusted by the remote
system.
0: 600dpi/ 1: 400dpi/ 2: 300dpi/ 3: 200dpi/ 4: 150dpi/ 5: 100dpi/ 6: 75dpi

Reso: Scan (Mono)

128

This is basically adjusted by the remote

system.
[0 to 6 / 3 / 1/step]

Selects the resolution for BW scanning mode. This is basically adjusted by the remote
system.
0: 600dpi/ 1: 400dpi/ 2: 300dpi/ 3: 200dpi/ 4: 150dpi/ 5: 100dpi/ 6: 75dpi

141

All Addr Info Switch

[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
0: Off, 1: On

Turns on or off the all address information transmission for the captured resources.
Stand-by Doc Max Number

[10 to 10000 / 2000 / 1/step]

142 Selects the maximum number of captured documents to be transmitted to the document
server.
5840

272

[IEEE 802.11]

System SP5xxx

[1 to 11 or 13 / 11 or 13 / 1 /step]
Channel MAX

*CTL

Europe/Asia: 1 to 13
NA/ Asia: 1 to 11

Sets the maximum number of channels available for data transmission via the wireless LAN.
006 The number of channels available varies according to location. The default settings are set
for the maximum end of the range for each area. Adjust the upper 4 bits to set the maximum
number of channels. DFU

Do not change the setting.

[1 to 11 or 13 / 1 / 1 /step]
Channel MIN

*CTL

Europe: 1 to 13
NA/ Asia: 1 to 11

Sets the minimum number of channels available for data transmission via the wireless LAN.
007 The number of channels available varies according to location. The default settings are set
for the minimum end of the range for each area. Adjust the lower 4 bits to set the minimum
number of channels. DFU
Do not change the setting.
[0 x 00 to 0 x FF / 0 x FF to Auto / -]
0 x FF to Auto [Default]
0 x 11 55M Fix
0 x 10 48M Fix
0 x 0F 36M Fix
0 x 0E 18M Fix
0 x 0D 12M Fix
008 Transmission Speed

*CTL

0 x 0B 9M Fix
0 x 0A 6M Fix
0 x 07 11M Fix
0 x 05 5.5M Fix
0 x 08 1M Fix
0 x 13 0 x FE (reserved)
0 x 12 72M (reserved)
0 x 09 22M (reserved)
273

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

Selects the WEP key.

[00 to 11 / 00 / 1 binary]
011 WEP key Select

*CTL

00: Key #1
01: Key #2 (Reserved)
10: Key #3 (Reserved)
11: Key #4 (Reserved)
Adjusts the fragment threshold for the
IEEE802.11 card.

3
042 Fragment Thresh

*CTL

[256 to 2346 / 2346 / 1]

This SP is displayed only when the IEEE802.11
card is installed.
Determines whether the CTS self function is
turned on or off.

043 11g CTS to Self

*CTL

[0 to 1 / 1 / 1] 0: Off, 1: On
This SP is displayed only when the IEEE802.11
card is installed.

044 11g Slot Time

*CTL

Selects the slot time for IEEE802.11.

[0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 0: 20 m, 1: 9 m
Selects the debug level for WPA authentication
application.

045 WPA Debug Lvl

*CTL

[1 to 3 / 3 / 1]
1: Info, 2: warning, 3: error
This SP is displayed only when the IEEE802.11
card is installed.

5841

274

[Supply Name Setting]

System SP5xxx

001 Toner Name Setting: Black

002 Toner Name Setting: Cyan
003 Toner Name Setting: Yellow
004 Toner Name Setting: Magenta
007 OrgStamp

*CTL

011 Staple Std1

Specifies supply names. These

appear on the screen when the user
presses the Inquiry button in the user
tools screen.

012 Staple Std2

013 Staple Std3

014 Staple Std4
5842

[GWWS Analysis] DFU

001 Setting 1

*CTL

Default: 00000000 do not change

Netfiles: Jobs to be printed from the document
server using a PC and the DeskTopBinder
software
Adjusts the debug program modesetting.
Bit7: 5682 mmseg-log setting

002 Setting 2

*CTL

0: Date/Hour/Minute/Second
1: Minute/Second/Msec.
0 to 6: Not used

5844

[USB]

001

Transfer Rate

*CTL

0x01: Full speed

0x04: Auto Change

Adjusts the USB transfer rate.

002 Vendor ID

*CTL

Displays the vendor ID. DFU

003 Product ID

*CTL

Displays the product ID. DFU

004 Device Release Number

*CTL

Displays the development release version

number. DFU

275

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

006 PnP Model Name

*CTL

Inputs the model name.

007 PnP Serial Number

*CTL

Inputs the serial number.

100

Notify Unsupport

*CTL

[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
0: Disable, 1: Enable

Enables or disables the unsupported USB display.

[Delivery Server Setting]

5845

*CTL

Provides items for delivery server settings.

001

FTP Port No.

[0 to 65535 / 3670 / 1 /step]

Sets the FTP port number used when image files to the Scan Router Server.
IP Address (Primary)

Range: 000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255

002 Use this SP to set the Scan Router Server address. The IP address under the transfer tab
can be referenced by the initial system setting.
Delivery Error Display Time

[0 to 999 / 300 / 1 second /step]

006 Use this setting to determine the length of time the prompt message is displayed when a
test error occurs during document transfer with the NetFile application and an external
device.
IP Address (Secondary)

Range: 000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255

008 Specifies the IP address assigned to the computer designated to function as the secondary
delivery server of Scan Router. This SP allows only the setting of the IP address without
reference to the DNS setting.
Delivery Server Model

[0 to 4/ 0 / 1 /step]

Allows changing the model of the delivery server registered by the I/O device.
0: Unknown
009 1: SG1 Provided
2: SG1 Package
3: SG2 Provided
4: SG2 Package

276

System SP5xxx

Delivery Svr Capability

[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]

Changes the capability of the registered that the I/O device registered.
Bit7 = 1 Comment information exits
Bit6 = 1 Direct specification of mail address possible
010

Bit5 = 1 Mail RX confirmation setting possible

Bit4 = 1 Address book automatic update function exists
Bit3 = 1 Fax RX delivery function exists

Bit2 = 1 Sender password function exists

Bit1 = 1 Function to link MK-1 user and Sender exists
Bit0 = 1 Sender specification required (if set to 1, Bit6 is set to "0")
Delivery Svr Capability (Ext)

[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]

Changes the capability of the registered that the I/O device registered.
011

Bit7 = 1 Address book usage limitation (Limitation for each authorized user)
Bit6 = 1 RDH authorization link
Bit5 to 0: Not used

013

014

015

016

017

Server Scheme (Primary) DFU

This is used for the scan router program.
Server Port Number (Primary) DFU
This is used for the scan router program.
Server URL Path (Primary) DFU
This is used for the scan router program.
Server Scheme (Secondary) DFU
This is used for the scan router program.
Server Port Number (Secondary) DFU
This is used for the scan router program.

277

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

018

Server URL Path (Secondary) DFU

This is used for the scan router program.
Rapid Sending Control

022

Enables or disables the prevention function for the continuous data sending error.
[0 to 1 / 0 / -]
0: Disable, 1: Enable

5846

[UCS Settings]

*CTL

Machine ID (For Delivery Server)

Displays ID

001 Displays the unique device ID in use by the delivery server directory. The value is only
displayed and cannot be changed. This ID is created from the NIC MAC or IEEE 1394
EUI. The ID is displayed as either 6-byle or 8-byte binary.
Machine ID Clear (For Delivery Server)

Clears ID

002 Clears the unique ID of the device used as the name in the file transfer directory. Execute
this SP if the connection of the device to the delivery server is unstable. After clearing the
ID, the ID will be established again automatically by cycling the machine off and on.
Maximum Entries

[2000 to 20000/ 2000 /1 /step]

003 Changes the maximum number of entries that UCS can handle.
If a value smaller than the present value is set, the UCS managed data is cleared, and the
data (excluding user code information) is displayed.
Delivery Server Retry Timer

[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]

006 Sets the interval for retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acquire the delivery
server address book.
Delivery Server Retry Times

[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]

007 Sets the number of retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acquire the delivery server
address book.
Delivery Server Maximum Entries

[2000 to 50000 / 2000 / 1/step]

008 Sets the maximum number account entries of the delivery server user information managed
by UCS.

278

System SP5xxx

010

LDAP Search Timeout

[1 to 255 / 60 / 1 /step]

Sets the length of the timeout for the search of the LDAP server.

020 WSD Maximum Entries

021 Folder Auth Change 0: Login User, 1: Destination
022 Initial Value of Upper Limit Count 500
040

Addr Book Migration (SD => HDD)

Not used in this machine.

Fill Addr Acl Info.

This SP must be executed immediately after installation of an HDD unit in a basic machine
that previously had no HDD. The first time the machine is powered on with the new HDD
installed, the system automatically takes the address book from the NVRAM and writes it
onto the new HDD. However, the new address book on the HDD can be accessed only
by the system administrator at this stage. Executing this SP by the service technician
immediately after power on grants full address book access to all users.
041

Procedure
1. Turn the machine off.
2. Install a new HDD.
3. Turn the machine on.
4. The address book and its initial data are created on the HDD automatically.
5. However, at this point the address book can be accessed by only the system
administrator or key operator.
6. Enter the SP mode and do SP5846-041. After this SP executes successfully, any user
can access the address book.
Displays the slot number where an address book data
is in.
[0 to 30 / - /1]
0: Unconfirmed

043 Addr Book Media

1: SD Slot 1
2: SD Slot 2
4: USB Flash ROM
20: HDD
30: Nothing

279

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

047 Initialize Local Addr Book

Clears the local address book information, including the

user code.

048 Initialize Delivery Addr Book

Clears the distribution address book information,

except the user code.

049 Initialize LDAP Addr Book

Clears the LDAP address book information, except the

user code.

050 Initialize All Addr Book

Clears all directory information managed by UCS,

including all user codes.

051 Backup All Addr Book

Uploads all directory information to the SD card.

052 Restore All Addr Book

Downloads all directory information from the SD card.

Deletes the address book data from the SD card in the
service slot.
Deletes only the files that were uploaded from this
machine.

053 Clear Backup Info

This feature does not work if the card is write-protected.

After you do this SP, go out of the SP mode, and
then turn the power off.
Do not remove the SD card until the Power LED
stops flashing.

Search Option
This SP uses bit switches to set up the fuzzy search options for the UCS local address book.
Bit: Meaning
060

0: Checks both upper/lower case characters

1: Japan Only
2: Japan Only
3: Japan Only
4 to 7: Not Used

280

System SP5xxx

Complexity Option 1
Use this SP to set the conditions for password entry to access the local address book.
Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to upper case and sets the length of the
password.
062 [0 to 32 / 0 / 1 /step]
This SP does not normally require adjustment.
This SP is enabled only after the system administrator has set up a group password
policy to control access to the address book.

063 Complexity Option 2 DFU

064 Complexity Option 3 DFU
065 Complexity Option 4 DFU

091 FTP Auth Port Setting

Specifies the FTP port for getting a distribution server

address book that is used in the identification mode.
[0 to 65535 / 3671 / 1 /step]

094 Encryption Stat

[Rep Resolution Reduction]

Shows the status of the encryption function for the

address book data.
*CTL

SP5847-1 through SP5847-8 changes the default settings of image data transferred
externally by the Net File page reference function.
5847

[ 0 to 5 / 2 / 1 /step]
SP5847-21 sets the default for JPEG image quality of image files handled by NetFile.
"Net files" are jobs to be printed from the document server using a PC and the
DeskTopBinder software.
001 Rate for Copy Color

0: 1x

002 Rate for Copy B&W Text

1: 1/2x

003 Rate for Copy B&W Other

2: 1/3x
3: 1/4x

004 Rate for Printer Color

4: 1/6x

005 Rate for Printer B&W

5: 1/8x

281

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

0: 1x
1: 1/2x
2: 1/3x

006 Rate for Printer Color 1200dpi

3: 1/4x
4: 1/6x
5: 1/8x
0: 1x

1: 1/2x
2: 1/3x

007 Rate for Printer B&W 1200dpi

3: 1/4x
4: 1/6x
5: 1/8x

Network Quality Default for JPEG

021 Sets the default value for the quality of JPEG images sent as NetFile pages. This function
is available only with the MLB (Media Link Board) option installed.
[5 to 95 / 50 / 1 /step]
[Web Service]
5848

*CTL

SP5848-2 sets the 4-bit switch assignment for the access control setting. Setting of 0001
has no effect on access and delivery from Scan Router.
5848 100 sets the maximum size allowed for downloaded images. The default is equal
to 1 gigabyte.
Access Ctrl: Repository (only
002
Lower 4 bits)

282

0000: No access control

0001: Denies access to DeskTop Binder.
0010: No writing control

System SP5xxx

003

Access Ctrl: Doc. Svr. Print (Lower

4 bits)

004

Access Ctrl: user Directory (only

Lower 4 bits)

007

Access Ctrl: Comm. Log Fax

(Lower 4 bits)

009 Access Ctrl: Job Ctrl (Lower 4 bits)

Access Ctrl: Device management
011
(Lower 4 bits)

Switches access control on and off.

0000: No access control
0001: Denies access to DeskTop Binder.

021 Access Ctrl: Delivery (Lower 4 bits)

022

Access Ctrl: uadministration

(Lower 4bits)

099

Repository: Download Image

Setting

Repository: Download Image

100
Max. Size

DFU
Specifies the max size of the image data that the
machine can download.
[1 to 1024 / 1024 / 1 MB /step]

210 Setting: LogType: Job1

211 Setting: LogType: Job2
212 Setting: LogType: Access
213 Setting: Primary Srv
214 Setting: Secondary Srv

DFU

215 Setting: Start Time

216 Setting: Interval Time
217 Setting: Timing
5849

[Installation Date]

5849 1 Display

*CTL

The "Counter Clear Day" has been changed to

"Installation Date" or "Inst. Date".

283

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

Determines whether the installation date is printed on

the printout for the total counter.
5849 2 Switch to Print

[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
0: OFF (No Print)
1: ON (Print)

003 Total Counter

5850

[Address Book Function]

*CTL

Replacement of Circuit Classification Japan Only

003 The machine is sold ready to use with a G3 line. This SP allows you to switch all at once
to convert to G4 after you add a G4 line. Conversely, if for some reason the G4 line
becomes unusable, you can easily switch back to G3.
[Bluetooth Mode]
5851

Sets the operation mode for the Bluetooth Unit. Press either key.
[0:Public] [1: Private]
[Stamp Data Download]

5853

Use this SP to download the fixed stamp data stored in the firmware of the ROM and copy
it to the HDD. This SP can be executed as many times as required. This SP must be executed
after replacing or formatting the hard disks.
This SP can be executed only with the hard disks installed.
[Remote ROM Update]

5856

Allows the technician to upgrade the firmware using a local port (IEEE1284) when
updating the remote ROM.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
002 Local Port

*CTL

0: Disable
1: Enable

5857

284

[Save Debug Log]

*CTL

System SP5xxx

On/Off (1:ON 0:OFF)

0: OFF, 1: ON

001 Switches the debug log feature on and off. The debug log cannot be captured until this
feature is switched on.
Target (2: HDD 3: SD)

2: HDD, 3: SD Card

002 Selects the storage device to save debug logs information when the conditions set with
SP5-858 are satisfied.
[ 2 to 3 / 2 / 1 /step]

Save to HDD
005

006

Saves the debug log of the input SC number in memory to the HDD.
A unique file name is generated to avoid overwriting existing file names on the SD Card.
Up to 4MB can be copied to an SD Card. 4 MB segments can be copied one by one to
each SD Card.
Save to SD Card
Saves the debug log of the input SC number in memory to the SD card.

009 Copy HDD to SD Card (Latest 4 MB)

010 Copy HDD to SD Card (Latest 4 MB Any Key)
011 Erase HDD Debug Data
012 Erase SD Card Debug Data
013 Free Space on SD Card
014 Copy SD to SD (Latest 4 MB)
015 Copy SD to SD (Latest 4 MB Any Key)
016 Make HDD Debug
017 Make SD Debug
[Debug Save When]
5858

*CTL

These SPs select the content of the debugging information to be saved to the destination
selected by SP5857-002.
SP5858-3 stores one SC specified by number. Refer to Section 4 for a list of SC error codes.

285

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

001 Engine SC Error

Turns on/off the debug save for SC codes generated by

copier engine errors.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/ step]
0: OFF, 1: ON

002 Controller SC Error

Turns on/off the debug save for SC codes generated by

GW controller errors.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/ step]
0: OFF, 1: ON

003 Any SC Error

[0 to 65535 / 0 / 1 /step]
Turns on/off the debug save for jam errors.

004 Jam

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/ step]
0: OFF, 1: ON

5859

[Debug Save Key No.]

*CTL

001 Key 1
002 Key 2
003 Key 3
004 Key 4
005 Key 5
006 Key 6
007 Key 7

These SPs allow you to set up to 10 keys for log files for
functions that use common memory on the controller
board.
[9999999 to 9999999 / 0 / ]

008 Key 8
009 Key 9
010 Key 10
5860

[SMTP/POP3/IMAP4]

020 Partial Mail Receive Timeout

286

*CTL

[1 to 168 / 72 / ]

System SP5xxx

Sets the amount of time to wait before saving a mail that breaks up during reception. The
received mail is discarded if the remaining portion of the mail is not received during this
prescribed time.
021 MDN Response RFC2298 Compliance

[0 to 1 / 1 / ]

Determines whether RFC2298 compliance is switched on for MDN reply mail.

0: No
1: Yes
022 SMTP Auth. From Field Replacement

[0 to 1 / 0 / ]

Determines whether the FROM item of the mail header is switched to the validated account
after the SMTP server is validated.
0: No. "From" item not switched.
1: Yes. "From item switched.
025 SMTP Auth. Direct Setting

[0 or 1 / 0 / ]

Selects the authentication method for SMPT.

Bit switch:
Bit 0: LOGIN
Bit 1: PLAIN
Bit 2: CRAM MD5
Bit 3: DIGEST MD5
Bit 4 to 7: Not used
This SP is activated only when SMTP authorization is enabled by UP mode.
Selects the MIME header type of an E-mail sent
by S/MIME.
026

S/MIME: MIME Header

Setting

[0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
0: Microsoft Outlook Express standard
1: Internet Draft standard
2: RFC standard

5866

[E-mail Report] Not Used

287

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

Enables or disables the e-mail alert.

001 Report Validity

*CTL

[0 or 1 / 0 / ]
0: Enable, 1: Disable

005 Add Date Field

*CTL

Adds or does not add the date field to the

header of the alert mail.
[0 or 1 / 0 / ]
0: Not added, 1: Added

5870

[Common Key Info Writing]

001 Writing
Initialize

*CTL

Rewrites the common certification used for the

@Remote.

*CTL

Initializes the set certification.

003 When the GW controller board is replaced with a new one for repair, you must execute the
"Initiralize (-003)" and "Writing (-001)" just after the new board replacement.
NOTE: Turn off and on the main power switch after the "Initiralize (-003)" and "Writing
(-001)" have been done.
5873

001 Move Exec

This SP copies the application programs from the original SD card in

SD card slot 2 to an SD card in SD card slot 1.

002 Undo Exec

This SP copies back the application programs from an SD card in SD

Card Slot 2 to the original SD card in SD card slot 1. Use this menu
when you have mistakenly copied some programs by using "Move
Exec" (SP5873-1).

5875

288

[SD Card Appli Move]

[SC Auto Reboot]

System SP5xxx

Enables or disables the automatic reboot function when

an SC error occurs.
[0 or 1/ 0 / ]

001 Reboot Setting

0: The machine reboots automatically when the

machine issues an SC error and logs the SC error code.
If the same SC occurs again, the machine does not
reboot.

*CTL

1: The machine does not reboot when an SC error

occurs.
The reboot is not executed for Type A or C SC codes.

Selects the reboot method for SC.

002 Reboot Type

*CTL

[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: Manual reboot, 1: Automatic reboot

5878

[Option Setup]

001 Data Overwrite Security

Enables the Data Overwrite Security unit. Press

"EXECUTE" on the operation panel. Then turn the
machine off and on.

002 HDD Encryption

Installs the HDD Encryption unit.

*ENG

Deletes the fixed phrase.

5881

[Fixed Phrase Block Erasing]

001 -

5884

[Plain 1/2 Setting]

Select the paper type (plain 1 or plain 2) for each tray.

001 By-pass Table

*ENG

002 Tray 1

*ENG

003 Tray 2

*ENG

004 Tray 3

*ENG

005 Tray 4

*ENG

[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
0: Plain Paper 1
1: Plain Paper 2

289

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

5885

[Set WIM Function] Web Image Monitor Settings

Close or disclose the functions of web image monitor.
0: OFF, 1: ON
Bit Meaning
0: Forbid all document server access (1)
1: Forbid user mode access (1)

020 Document Server ACC Ctrl

*CTL

2: Forbid print function (1)

3: Forbid fax TX (1)
4: Forbid scan sending (1)
5: Forbid downloading (1)
6: Forbid delete (1)
7: Reserved
Selects the display type for the document box list.

050 DocSvr Format

*CTL

[0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
0: Thumbnail, 1: Icon, 2: Details

051 DocSvr Trans

*CTL

Sets the number of documents to be displayed in

the document box list.
[5 to 20 / 10 / 1]
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step]

Set Signature

*CTL

100

0: Signature for each e-mail

1: Signature for all e-mails
2: No signature

Selects whether the signature is added to the scanned documents with the WIM when they
are transmitted by an e-mail.

101 Set Encryption

*CTL

Determines whether the scanned documents with

the WIM are encrypted when they are
transmitted by an e-mail.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Not encrypted, 1:Encryption

290

200 Detect Mem Leak

*CTL

Not used

201 DocSur Timeout

*CTL

Not used

System SP5xxx

5887

[SD Get Counter]

This SP determines whether the ROM can be updated.

001 -

*CTL

This SP sends a text file to an SD card inserted in

SD card Slot 2 (lower slot). The operation stores.
The file is stored in a folder created in the root
directory of the SD card called SD_COUNTER.
The file is saved as a text file (*.txt) prefixed with
the number of the machine.
1. Insert the SD card in SD card Slot 2 (lower
slot).

2. Select SP5887 then touch [EXECUTE].

3. Touch [Execute] in the message when you
are prompted.
5888

[Personal Information Protect]

Selects the protection level for logs.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1}

001 -

*CTL

0: No authentication, No protection for logs

1: No authentication, Protected logs (only an
administrator can see the logs)

5893

[SDK Application Counter]

Displays the counter name of each SDK application.

001

SDK-1

002

SDK-2

003

SDK-3

004

SDK-4

005

SDK-5

006

SDK-6

5894

*CTL

[External Counter Setting]

291

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

001 Switch Charge Mode

5907

001

5913

*ENG

[0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step]

[Plug & Play Maker/Model Name]

Selects the brand name and the production name for Windows Plug & Play. This information
is stored in the NVRAM. If the NVRAM is defective, these names should be registered again.
After selecting, press the "Original Type" key and "#" key at the same time. When the setting
is completed, the beeper sounds five times.
[Switchover Permission Time]
Print Application Timer

*CTL

[3 to 30 / 3 / 1 second /step]

002 Sets the amount of time to elapse while the machine is in standby mode (and the operation
panel keys have not been used) before another application can gain control of the display.
5967

[Copy Server Set Function]

*CTL

0: ON, 1: OFF

Enables and disables the document server. This is a security measure that prevents image
001 data from being left in the temporary area of the HDD. After changing this setting, you must
switch the main switch off and on to enable the new setting.

5974

[Cherry Server]
Specifies which version of ScanRouter, "Lite" or "Full", is installed.

001 Cherry Server

*CTL

[0 or 1 / 0 / ]
0: Lite, 1: Full

[Device Setting]
5985

292

The NIC and USB support features are built into the GW controller. Use this SP to enable
and disable these features. In order to use the NIC and USB functions built into the controller
board, these SP codes must be set to "1".

System SP5xxx

[0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Disable, 1: Enable, 2: Function limitation
When the "Function limitation" is set, "On board NIC" is
limited only for the NRS or LDAP/NT authentication.
001 On Board NIC
Other network applications than NRS or LDAP/NT
authentication are not available when this SP is set to
"2". Even though you can change the initial settings of
those network applications, the settings do not work.
002 On Board USB

5987

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0: Disable, 1: Enable

[Mech. Counter Protection]

001 0: OFF / 1: ON

5990

This SP detects that a mechanical counter device is removed.

If it is detected, SC610 occurs.

[SP print mode]

Prints out the SMC sheets.

293

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

5997

001 All (Data List)

002 SP (Mode Data List)

003 User Program

004 Logging Data

005 Diagnostic Report

006 Non-Default

007 NIB Summary

008 Capture Log

021 Copier User Program

022 Scanner SP

023 Scanner User Program

024 SDK/J Summary

025 SDK/J Application Info

[Fusing Cont mode]

001 fast/silent

[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
0: Silent, 1: Fast

Turns on or off the fusing unit preceding mode.

The machine turns on the fusing unit first by default after power-on or recovery from the
energy save mode.
If a customer does not want the fusing unit to rotate before sending a job to the machine,
change this setting to "0". In this case, the first print time or recovery time may be little bit
longer than before.

294

System SP6xxx

System SP6xxx
SP6-XXX (Peripherals)
6006

[ADF Adjustment]
Adjusts the side-to-side and leading registration of originals with the ARDF.

001 S-to-S Registration 1st

002 S-to-S Registration 2nd

*ENG

003 Leading Edge Registration

[-3.0 to 3.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ]

[-5.0 to 5.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ]

Adjusts the amount of paper buckle to correct original skew for the front and rear sides.
005 Buckle: Duplex: 1st
006 Buckle: Duplex: 2nd

*ENG

[-5.0 to 5.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ]

Adjusts the erase margin at the original trailing edge.

007 Trailing Edge Erase

*ENG

[-5.0 to 5.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ]

[ADF INPUT Check]

6007

Displays the signals received from the sensors and switches of the ARDF. Only Bit 0 is used
for ADF input check ( p.377 "Input and Output Check Tables").
[ADF OUTPUT Check]

6008

Activates the electrical components for functional check.

It is not possible to activate more than one component at the same time (
and Output Check Tables")

6009

p.377 "Input

[ADF Free Run]

Performs a DF free run in simplex, duplex mode or stamp mode.

002 Free Run Duplex Mode

295

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

6010

[Stamp Position Adj.] Fax Stamp Position Adjustment

Adjusts the horizontal position of the stamp on the scanned originals.

001 -

*ENG

[-5.0 to 5.0 / 0 / 1 mm/step]

[Original Size Detection Priority] Original Size Detection Priority

6016

Specifies the original size for a size detected by the original sensor, since original sensors
cannot recognize all sizes.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
*ENG

0: Setting 1
1: Setting 2

001 -

NA

EU/
ASIA

6017

Setting 1

Setting 2

DLT SEF

Folio SEF 11" x 15"

LG SEF

Foolscap SEF

LT SEF

US EXE 8" x 10"

LT LEF

US EXE LEF

DLT SEF

8K 267 x 390 mm

LT SEF

16K 195 x 267 mm

LT LEF

16K 267 x 195 mm

[DF Magnification Adj.] DF Magnification Adjustment

Adjusts the magnification in the sub-scan direction for the ARDF.

001 -

*CTL

[-5.0 to 5.0 / 0 / 0.1 %/step]

[Staple Position Adjustment]

6101

Adjusts the staple position for finisher.

+ Value: Moves the staple position to the rear side.
- Value: Moves the staple position to the front side.

001 -

296

ENG

[-2 to 2 / 0 / 0.2mm/step]

System SP6xxx

6102

[Punch Position Adjustment]

Adjusts the punching position in the sub scan direction.

001 Leading Edge Adjustment

6103

[-1.5 to 1.5 / 0 / 0.1mm/step]

ENG

[-4 to 4 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step]

[Jogger Position Adjustment]

Adjusts the jogger position

001 -

6104

ENG

[Punch Position Adjustment]

Adjusts the punching position in the main scan direction.

001 Side-to-Side Adjustment

ENG

[-2.0 to 2.0 / 0 / 0.2mm/step]

[Finisher Input Check] Finisher (D429)

6120

Displays the signals received from sensors and switches of the finisher. (
Output Check Tables")

p.377 "Input and

[Finisher Output Check] Finisher (D429)

6121

6830

Displays the signals received from sensors and switches of the finisher. (
Output Check Tables")

p.377 "Input and

[Extra Staples]
Not used in this model

297

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

System SP7-xxx
SP7-XXX (Data Log)

7401

[Total SC Counter]
Displays the number of SC codes detected.

001 -

*CTL

[0 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step ]

[SC History]
7403

Logs the SC codes detected.

The 10 most recently detected SC Codes are not displayed on the screen, but can be seen
on the SMC (logging) outputs.

001 Latest
002 Latest 1
003 Latest 2
004 Latest 3
005 Latest 4
006 Latest 5

*CTL

007 Latest 6
008 Latest 7
009 Latest 8
010 Latest 9
[SC991 History]
7404

Logs the SC991 detected.

The 10 most recently detected SC991 are not displayed on the screen, but can be seen on
the SMC (logging) outputs.

298

System SP7-xxx

001 Latest
002 Latest 1
003 Latest 2
004 Latest 3
005 Latest 4

*CTL

006 Latest 5

007 Latest 6
008 Latest 7
009 Latest 8
010 Latest 9

7502

[Total Paper Jam Counter]

Displays the total number of jams detected.

001 -

7503

* CTL

[0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step ]

[Total Original Jam Counter]

Displays the total number of original jams.

001 -

*CTL

[0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 original/step ]

[Paper Jam Location]

7504

ON: On check, OFF: Off Check

Displays the number of jams according to the location where jams were detected.
NOTE: The LCT is counted as the 3rd feed station.

299

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

300

001 At Power On

*CTL

003 Tray 1: On

*CTL

004 Tray 2: On

*CTL

005 Tray 3: On

*CTL

006 Tray 4: On

*CTL

008 Bypass: On

*CTL

009 Duplex: On

*CTL

011 Vertical Transport 1: On

*CTL

012 Vertical Transport 2: On

*CTL

017 Registration: On

*CTL

018 Fusing Entrance: On

*CTL

019 Fusing Exit: On

*CTL

020 Paper Exit: On

*CTL

024 Junction Gate Sensor: On

*CTL

025 Duplex Exit: On

*CTL

027 Duplex Entrance: ON (Out)

*CTL

For details,
the "Jam Detection"
in the Main Chapters

System SP7-xxx

028 1-Bin Tray Exit Sensor: On

*CTL

029 Right Tray Exit Sensor: On

*CTL

051 Vertical Transport 1: Off

*CTL

052 Vertical Transport 2: Off

*CTL

053 Bank SEF Sensor 1: Off

*CTL

057 Registration Sensor: Off

*CTL

058 Fusing Entrance Sensor: Off

*CTL

059 Fusing Exit Sensor: Off

*CTL

060 Paper Exit: Off

*CTL

065 Duplex Exit Sensor: Off

*CTL

068 1-Bin Tray Exit: Off

*CTL

069 Right Tray Exit Sensor: Off

*CTL

230 FIN: Paper Exit Data Error

*CTL

231 FIN: Command Error

*CTL

For details,
the "Jam Detection"
in the Main Chapters

301

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

7505

240 FIN: Entrance: On

*CTL

241 FIN: Entrance: Off

*CTL

242 FIN: Feed Motor

*CTL

243 FIN: Staler Motor

*CTL

244 FIN: Jogger Motors

*CTL

245 FIN: PU Roller Contact Motor

*CTL

246 FIN: Stapler Movement Motor

*CTL

247 FIN: Output Tray Motor

*CTL

248 FIN: Belt Roller Solenoid

*CTL

249 FIN: Front Fan

*CTL

250 FIN: Punch Motor

*CTL

251 FIN: Registration Motor

*CTL

252 FIN: Stapling Error

*CTL

253 FIN: Mainframe Set Incorrect

*CTL

For details,
the "Jam Detection"
in the Main Chapters

[Original Jam Detection]

Displays the total number of original jams by location.

001 At Power On
003 Registration Sensor: On
004 Registration Sensor: On
005 Original Exit Sensor: On

*CTL

053 Registration Sensor: Off

054 Registration Sensor: Off
055 Original Exit Sensor: Off

7506

302

[Jam Count by Paper Size]

Displays the number of jams according to the paper size.

System SP7-xxx

005 A4 LEF
006 A5 LEF
014 B5 LEF
038 LT LEF
044 HLT LEF
132 A3 SEF

133 A4 SEF
134 A5 SEF

*CTL

[0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step ]

141 B4 SEF
142 B5 SEF
160 DLT SEF
164 LG SEF
166 LT SEF
172 HLT SEF
255 Others

7507

[Plotter Jam History]

Displays the 10 most recently detected paper jams.

303

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

001 Latest
002 Latest 1
003 Latest 2
004 Latest 3
005 Latest 4

006 Latest 5

*CTL

007 Latest 6
008 Latest 7
009 Latest 8
010 Latest 9

7508

[Original Jam History]

Displays the 10 most recently detected original jams.
001 Latest
002 Latest-1
003 Latest-2
004 Latest-3
005 Latest-4
006 Latest-5
007 Latest-6
008 Latest-7
009 Latest-8
010 Latest-9

7624

304

[Parts PM Use Setting]

*CTL

System SP7-xxx

7801

001 PCU:Bk

*CTL

002 PCU:M

*CTL

003 PCU:C

*CTL

004 PCU:Y

*CTL

005 Development Unit:Bk

*CTL

006 Development Unit:M

*CTL

007 Development Unit:C

*CTL

008 Development Unit:Y

*CTL

009 Image Transfer Belt

*CTL

010 ITB Cleaning Unit

*CTL

011 Fusing Unit

*CTL

012 PTR Unit

*CTL

013 PCU Toner Collection Bottle

*CTL

0: No (Not PM maintenance)

1: Yes (PM maintenance)

[ROM No./Firmware Version]

255 -

7803

[0 or 1 / 1 / -]

*CTL

Displays all versions and ROM numbers in the

machine.

[PM Counter Display]

(Page, Unit, [Color])
Displays the number of sheets printed for each current maintenance unit.
PM counters click up based on the number of A4 (LT) LEF size sheets printed. Therefore,
the A3 (DLT) Double Count is activated. The Double Count cannot be deactivated.

-001 to When a unit is replaced, the machine automatically detects that the new unit is installed.
-021 Then, the current PM counter value is automatically moved to the PM Counter - Previous
(SP7-906-1 to 21) and is reset to "0".
The total number of sheets printed with the last unit replaced can be checked with
SP7-906-1 to 21.
001 Paper

305

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

002 Page: PCU: Bk

003 Page: PCU: C
004 Page: PCU: M
005 Page: PCU: Y
006 Page: Development Unit: Bk

007 Page: Development Unit: C

008 Page: Development Unit: M
009 Page: Development Unit: Y
010 Page: Developer: Bk
011 Page: Developer: C
012 Page: Developer: M
013 Page: Developer: Y
014 Page: ITB Unit
015 Page: ITB Cleaning Unit
016 Page: Fusing Unit
017 Page:Fusing Pad
018 Page: Fusing Belt
019 Page:PTR Unit
020 Page:ITB T-Collect Bottle
021 Page:PCU T-Collect Bottle
027 Rotation: Half Speed PCU: Bk
028 Rotation: Half Speed PCU: C
029 Rotation: Half Speed PCU: M
030 Rotation: Half Speed PCU: Y

306

System SP7-xxx

Displays the number of revolutions of motors or clutches for each current maintenance unit.
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 revolution/step ]
-031 to When a unit is replaced, the machine automatically detects that the new unit is installed.
-048 Then, the current PM counter value is automatically moved to the PM Counter - Previous
(SP7-906-31 to 48) and is reset to "0". The total number of revolutions made with the last
unit replaced can be checked with SP7-906-31 to 48.
031 Rotation: PCU: Bk
032 Rotation: PCU: C

033 Rotation: PCU: M

034 Rotation: PCU: Y
035 Rotation: Development Unit: Bk
036 Rotation: Development Unit: C
037 Rotation: Development Unit: M
038 Rotation: Development Unit: Y
039 Rotation: Developer: Bk
040 Rotation: Developer: C
041 Rotation: Developer: M
042 Rotation: Developer: Y
043 Rotation:ITB Unit
044 Rotation: ITB Cleaning Unit
045 Rotation: Fusing Unit
046 Rotation: Fusing Pad
047 Rotation: Fusing Belt
048 Rotation: PTR Unit
-049 to [0 to 999999999 / - / 1 mg/step ]
-050 Displays the total amount of each toner collection bottle.
049 Amount:ITB T-Collect Bottle

307

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

050 Amount:PCU T-Collect Bottle

[0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]
Displays the value given by the following formula:

(Current revolution Target revolution) 100. This shows how much of the units expected
-061 to lifetime has been used up.
-078
The Rotation% counter is based on rotations, not prints. If the number of rotations reaches
the limit, the machine enters the end condition for that unit. If the print count lifetime is
reached first, the machine also enters the end condition, even though the R% counter is still
less than 100%.
061 Rotation (%): PCU: Bk
062 Rotation (%): PCU: C
063 Rotation (%): PCU: M
064 Rotation (%): PCU: Y
065 Rotation (%): Development Unit: Bk
066 Rotation (%): Development Unit: C
067 Rotation (%): Development Unit:M
068 Rotation (%): Development Unit: Y
069 Rotation (%): Developer: Bk
070 Rotation (%): Developer: C
071 Rotation (%): Developer: M
072 Rotation (%): Developer: Y
073 Rotation (%): ITB Unit
074 Rotation (%): ITB Cleaning Unit
075 Rotation (%): Fusing Unit
076 Rotation (%): Fusing Pad
077 Rotation (%): Fusing Belt
078 Rotation (%):PTR Unit

308

System SP7-xxx

-079 to [0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]

-080 Displays how much of the units expected lifetime has been used up.
079 Amt(%):ITB T-Collect Bottle
080 Amt(%):PCU T-Collect Bottle
Displays the value given by the following formula:
(Current printouts Target printouts) 100. This shows how much of the units expected
lifetime has been used up.

-091 to
-108 The Page% counter is based on printouts, not revolutions. If the number of printouts reaches
the limit, the machine enters the end condition for that unit. If the revolution count lifetime is
reached first, the machine also enters the end condition, even though the Page% counter
is still less than 100%.

091 Page (%): PCU: Bk

092 Page (%): PCU: C
093 Page (%): PCU: M
094 Page (%): PCU: Y
095 Page (%): Development Unit: Bk
096

*ENG

[0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]

Page (%): Development Unit: C

097 Page (%): Development Unit: M
098 Page (%): Development Unit: Y
099 Page (%): Developer: Bk

309

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

100 Page (%): Developer: C

101 Page (%): Developer: M
102 Page (%): Developer: Y
103 Page (%): ITB Unit
104 Page (%): ITB Cleaning Unit

*ENG

[0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]

105 Page (%): Fusing Unit

106 Page (%): Fusing Pad

107 Page (%): Fusing Belt
108 Page (%): PTR Unit

7804

[PM Counter Reset] PM Counter Clear

(Unit, [Color])
Clears the PM counter.
Press the Enter key after the machine asks "Execute?", which will store the PM counter value
in SP7-906 (PM Counter - Previous) and reset the value of the current PM counter
(SP7-803) to "0".
001 Paper
002 PCU: Bk
003 PCU: C
004 PCU: M
005 PCU: Y
006 PCU: All
007 Development Unit: Bk
008 Development Unit: C
009 Development Unit: M
010 Development Unit: Y
011 Development Unit: All

310

System SP7-xxx

012 Developer: Bk
013 Developer: C
014 Developer: M
015 Developer: Y
016 Developer: All
017 ITB Unit

018 ITB Cleaning Unit

019 Fusing Unit
020 Fusing Pad
021 Fusing Belt
022 PTR Unit
023 ITB T-Collect Bottle
024 PCU T-Collect Bottle
100 All

7807

[SC/Jam Counter Reset]

Clears the counters related to SC codes and paper jams.

001 -

*CTL

001 Error Total

*CTL

002 Error Staple

*CTL

7826

7827

[MF Error Counter] Japan Only

[MF Error Counter Clear] Japan Only

-

*CTL

311

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

7832

[Self-Diagnose Result Display]

Displays the result of the diagnostics.

001 7835

*CTL

[ACC Counter]

001 Copy ACC

002 Printer ACC

--

7836

Displays the ACC exectuion times for each mode.

Total Memory Size (CTL)

Displays the memory capacity of the controller system.

001 -

*CTL

[DF Glass Dust Check]

7852

7853

312

Counts the number of occurrences (0 to 65,535) when dust was detected on the scanning
glass of the ADF or resets the dust detection counter. Counting is done only if SP4-020-1
(ADF Scan Glass Dust Check) is switched on.
001 Dust Detection Counter

*CTL

002 Dust Detection Clear Counter

*CTL

[Replacement Counter]
Displays the PM parts replacement number.

[0 to 65535 / - / 1 /step]

System SP7-xxx

001 PCU: Bk

*CTL

002 PCU: C

*CTL

003 PCU: M

*CTL

004 PCU: Y

*CTL

005 Development Unit: Bk

*CTL

006 Development Unit: C

*CTL

007 Development Unit: M

*CTL

008 Development Unit: Y

*CTL

009 Developer: Bk

*CTL

010 Developer: C

*CTL

011 Developer: M

*CTL

012 Developer: Y

*CTL

013 ITB Unit

*CTL

014 ITB Cleaning Unit

*CTL

015 Fusing Unit

*CTL

016 Fusing Pad

*CTL

017 Fusing Belt

*CTL

018 PTR Unit

*CTL

019 ITB T-Collect Bottle

*CTL

020 PCU T-Collect Bottle

*CTL

3
[0 to 255 / - / 1 /step]

[0 to 255 / - / 1 /step]

313

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

[Coverage Range]
Sets the color coverage threshold.
Coverage rate = Coverage per page / A4 full coverage (dots) x 100
There are three coverage counters: Color 1, Color 2, and Color 3
5% (default) is adjustable with SP7855-001.
20% (default) is adjustable with SP7855-002.

7855
The setting value of -002 must be set larger than the value of -001.
The total numbers of printouts (BW printing plus color printing) for each coverage range
are displayed with the following SPs.
Color1 counter: SP8601-021
Color2 counter: SP8601-022
Color3 counter: SP8601-023
001 Coverage Range 1

*CTL

[1 to 200 / 5 /1]

002 Coverage Range 2

*CTL

[1 to 200 / 20 /1]

[Assert Info]
7901

Records the location where a problem is detected in the program. The data stored in this
SP is used for problem analysis. DFU
001 File Name
002 Number of Lines

*CTL

003 Location

7906

[Prev. Unit PM Counter]

(Page or Rotations, Unit, [Color]), Dev.: Development Unit

-001 to Displays the number of sheets printed with the previous maintenance units.
-020 [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 page/step ]
001 Page: PCU: Bk
002 Page: PCU: C
003 Page: PCU: M
314

*ENG

System SP7-xxx

004 Page: PCU: Y

005 Page: Development Unit: Bk
006 Page: Development Unit: C
007 Page: Development Unit: M
008 Page: Development Unit: Y
009 Page: Developer: Bk
010 Page: Developer: C

011 Page: Developer: M

012 Page: Developer: Y
013 Page: ITB Unit
014 Page: ITB Cleaning Unit
015 Page: Fusing Unit
016 Page: Fusing Pad
017 Page: Fusing Belt
018 Page: PTR Unit
019 Page:ITB T-Collect Bottle
020 Page:PCU T-Collect Bottle
027 Rotation: Half Speed PCU: Bk
028 Rotation: Half Speed PCU: C
029 Rotation: Half Speed PCU: M
030 Rotation: Half Speed PCU: Y
-031 to Displays the number of revolutions for motors or clutches in the previous maintenance units.
-050 [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 mm/step ]
031 Rotation: PCU: Bk
032 Rotation: PCU: C
033 Rotation: PCU: M

315

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

034 Rotation: PCU: Y

035 Rotation: Development Unit: Bk
036 Rotation: Development Unit: C
037 Rotation: Development Unit: M
038 Rotation: Development Unit: Y

039 Rotation: Developer: Bk

040 Rotation: Developer: C
041 Rotation: Developer: M
042 Rotation: Developer: Y
043 Rotation: ITB Unit
044 Rotation: ITB Cleaning Unit
045 Rotation: Fusing Unit
046 Rotation: Fusing Pad
047 Rotation: Fusing Belt
048 Rotation: PTR Unit
049 Rotation:ITB T-Collect Bottle
050 Rotation:PCU T-Collect Bottle
-061 to Displays the number of sheets printed with the previous maintenance unit or toner cartridge.
-080 [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %/step ]
061 Rotation %: PCU: Bk
062 Rotation %: PCU: C
063 Rotation %: PCU: M
064 Rotation %: PCU: Y
065 Rotation %: Development Unit: Bk
066 Rotation %: Development Unit: C
067 Rotation %: Development Unit: M

316

System SP7-xxx

068 Rotation %: Development Unit: Y

069 Rotation %: Developer: Bk
070 Rotation %: Developer: C
071 Rotation %: Developer: M
072 Rotation %: Developer: Y
073 Rotation %: ITB Unit
074 Rotation %: ITB Cleaning Unit

075 Rotation %: Fusing Unit

076 Rotation %: Fusing Pad
077 Rotation %: Fusing Belt
078 Rotation %: PTR Unit
079 Rotation %:ITB T-Collect Bottle
080 Rotation %:PCU T-Collect Bottle
Displays the value given by the following formula:
-091 to (Current count Yield count) x 100, where "Current count" is the current values in the counter
-108 for the part, and "Yield count" is the recommended yield.
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %/step ]
091 Page (%): PCU: Bk
092 Page (%): PCU: C
093 Page (%): PCU: M
094 Page (%): PCU: Y
095 Page (%): Development Unit: Bk
096 Page (%): Development Unit: C
097 Page (%): Development Unit: M
098 Page (%): Development Unit: Y
099 Page (%): Developer: Bk

317

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

100 Page (%): Developer: C

101 Page (%): Developer: M
102 Page (%): Developer: Y
103 Page (%): ITB Unit
104 Page (%): ITB Cleaning Unit
105 Page (%): Fusing Unit

106 Page (%): Fusing Pad

107 Page (%): Fusing Belt
108 Page (%): PTR Unit

7931

318

[Toner Bottle Bk]

Displays the toner bottle information for Bk.
001 Machine Serial ID

*ENG

002 Cartridge Ver

*EGN

003 Brand ID

*EGN

004 Area ID

*EGN

005 Product ID

*EGN

006 Color ID

*EGN

007 Maintenance ID

*EGN

008 New Product Information

*EGN

009 Recycle Counter

*EGN

010 Date

*EGN

011 Serial No.

*EGN

012 Toner Remaining

*EGN

System SP7-xxx

7932

013 EDP Code

*EGN

014 End History

*EGN

015 Refill Information

*EGN

016 Attachment: Total Counter

*EGN

017 Attachment: Color Counter

*EGN

018 End: Total Counter

*EGN

019 End: Color Counter

*EGN

020 Attachment Date

*EGN

021 End Date

*EGN

[Toner Bottle M]
Displays the toner bottle information for M.
001 Machine Serial ID

*ENG

002 Cartridge Ver

*EGN

003 Brand ID

*EGN

004 Area ID

*EGN

005 Product ID

*EGN

006 Color ID

*EGN

007 Maintenance ID

*EGN

008 New Product Information

*EGN

009 Recycle Counter

*EGN

010 Date

*EGN

011 Serial No.

*EGN

012 Toner Remaining

*EGN

319

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

013 EDP Code

*EGN

014 End History

*EGN

015 Refill Information

*EGN

016 Attachment: Total Counter

*EGN

017 Attachment: Color Counter

*EGN

018 End: Total Counter

*EGN

019 End: Color Counter

*EGN

020 Attachment Date

*EGN

021 End Date

7933

320

[Toner Bottle C]
Displays the toner bottle information for C.
001 Machine Serial ID

*ENG

002 Cartridge Ver

*EGN

003 Brand ID

*EGN

004 Area ID

*EGN

005 Product ID

*EGN

006 Color ID

*EGN

007 Maintenance ID

*EGN

008 New Product Information

*EGN

009 Recycle Counter

*EGN

010 Date

*EGN

011 Serial No.

*EGN

012 Toner Remaining

*EGN

System SP7-xxx

7934

013 EDP Code

*EGN

014 End History

*EGN

015 Refill Information

*EGN

016 Attachment: Total Counter

*EGN

017 Attachment: Color Counter

*EGN

018 End: Total Counter

*EGN

019 End: Color Counter

*EGN

020 Attachment Date

*EGN

021 End Date

*EGN

[Toner Bottle Y]
Displays the toner bottle information for Y.
001 Machine Serial ID

*ENG

002 Cartridge Ver

*EGN

003 Brand ID

*EGN

004 Area ID

*EGN

005 Product ID

*EGN

006 Color ID

*EGN

007 Maintenance ID

*EGN

008 New Product Information

*EGN

009 Recycle Counter

*EGN

010 Date

*EGN

321

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

7935

011 Serial No.

*EGN

012 Toner Remaining

*EGN

013 EDP Code

*EGN

014 End History

*EGN

015 Refill Information

*EGN

016 Attachment: Total Counter

*EGN

017 Attachment: Color Counter

*EGN

018 End: Total Counter

*EGN

019 End: Color Counter

*EGN

020 Attachment Date

*EGN

021 End Date

*EGN

[Toner Bottle Log 1: Bk]

001 Serial No.
002 Attachment Date
003 Attachment: Total Counter

*ENG

Displays the toner bottle information log

1 for Bk.

*ENG

Displays the toner bottle information log

2 for Bk.

*ENG

Displays the toner bottle information log

3 for Bk.

004 Refill Information

005 Serial No.
006 Attachment Date
007 Attachment: Total Counter
008 Refill Information
009 Serial No.
010 Attachment Date
011 Attachment: Total Counter
012 Refill Information

322

System SP7-xxx

013 Serial No.

014 Attachment Date
015 Attachment: Total Counter

*ENG

Displays the toner bottle information log

4 for Bk.

*ENG

Displays the toner bottle information log

5 for Bk.

*ENG

Displays the toner bottle information log

1 for M.

*ENG

Displays the toner bottle information log

2 for M.

*ENG

Displays the toner bottle information log

3 for M.

*ENG

Displays the toner bottle information log

4 for M.

016 Refill Information

017 Serial No.
018 Attachment Date
019 Attachment: Total Counter

020 Refill Information

7936

[Toner Bottle Log 1: M]

001 Serial No.
002 Attachment Date
003 Attachment: Total Counter
004 Refill Information
005 Serial No.
006 Attachment Date
007 Attachment: Total Counter
008 Refill Information
009 Serial No.
010 Attachment Date
011 Attachment: Total Counter
012 Refill Information
013 Serial No.
014 Attachment Date
015 Attachment: Total Counter
016 Refill Information

323

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

017 Serial No.

018 Attachment Date
019 Attachment: Total Counter

*ENG

Displays the toner bottle information log

5 for M.

*ENG

Displays the toner bottle information log

1 for C.

*ENG

Displays the toner bottle information log

2 for C.

*ENG

Displays the toner bottle information log

3 for C.

*ENG

Displays the toner bottle information log

4 for C.

*ENG

Displays the toner bottle information log

5 for C.

020 Refill Information

7937

[Toner Bottle Log 1: C]

001 Serial No.
002 Attachment Date
003 Attachment: Total Counter
004 Refill Information
005 Serial No.
006 Attachment Date
007 Attachment: Total Counter
008 Refill Information
009 Serial No.
010 Attachment Date
011 Attachment: Total Counter
012 Refill Information
013 Serial No.
014 Attachment Date
015 Attachment: Total Counter
016 Refill Information
017 Serial No.
018 Attachment Date
019 Attachment: Total Counter
020 Refill Information

324

System SP7-xxx

7938

[Toner Bottle Log 1: Y]

001 Serial No.
002 Attachment Date
003 Attachment: Total Counter

*ENG

Displays the toner bottle information log

1 for Y.

004 Refill Information

005 Serial No.
006 Attachment Date
007 Attachment: Total Counter

*ENG

Displays the toner bottle information log

2 for Y.

*ENG

Displays the toner bottle information log

3 for Y.

*ENG

Displays the toner bottle information log

4 for Y.

*ENG

Displays the toner bottle information log

5 for Y.

008 Refill Information

009 Serial No.
010 Attachment Date
011 Attachment: Total Counter
012 Refill Information
013 Serial No.
014 Attachment Date
015 Attachment: Total Counter
016 Refill Information
017 Serial No.
018 Attachment Date
019 Attachment: Total Counter
020 Refill Information

7950

[Unit Replacement Date]

Displays the replacement date of each PM unit.

325

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

001 ITB Unit

*ENG

002 ITB Cleaning Unit

*EGN

003 PTR Unit

*EGN

004 Fusing Unit

*EGN

005 Fusing Pad

*EGN

006 Fusing Belt

*EGN

013 PCU: Bk

*EGN

014 PCU: C

*EGN

015 PCU: M

*EGN

016 PCU: Y

*EGN

017 Development Unit:Bk

*EGN

018 Development Unit:C

*EGN

019 Development Unit:M

*EGN

020 Development Unit:Y

*EGN

021 Developer:Bk

*EGN

022 Developer:C

*EGN

023 Developer:M

*EGN

024 Developer:Y

*EGN

[Remaining Day Counter]

7951

Displays the remaining unit life of each PM unit.

[0 to 255 / 255 / 1 day/step]
001 Page: PCU: Bk
002 Page: PCU: C
003 Page: PCU: M
004 Page: PCU: Y

326

*ENG

System SP7-xxx

005 Page: Development Unit: Bk

006 Page: Development Unit: C
007 Page: Development Unit: M
008 Page: Development Unit: Y
009 Page: Developer: Bk
010 Page: Developer: C
011 Page: Developer: M

012 Page: Developer: Y

013 Page: ITB Unit
014 Page: ITB Cleaning Unit
015 Page: Fusing Unit
016 Page: Fusing Pad
017 Page: Fusing Belt
018 Page: PTR Unit
031 Rotation: PCU: Bk
032 Rotation: PCU: C
033 Rotation: PCU: M
034 Rotation: PCU: Y
035 Rotation: Development Unit: Bk
036 Rotation: Development Unit: C
037 Rotation: Development Unit: M
038 Rotation: Development Unit: Y
039 Rotation: Developer: Bk
040 Rotation: Developer: C
041 Rotation: Developer: M
042 Rotation: Developer: Y
327

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

043 Rotation: ITB Unit

044 Rotation: ITB Cleaning Unit
045 Rotation: Fusing Unit
046 Rotation: Fusing Pad
047 Rotation: Fusing Belt
048 Rotation:PTR Unit

049 Rotation:ITB T-Collect Bottle

050 Rotation:PCU T-Collect Bottle
[PM Yield Setting]

7952

Adjusts the unit yield of each PM unit.

001 Rotation: ITB Unit

*EGN

[0 to 999999999 / 23976000 / 1000 mm/

step]

002 Rotation: ITB Cleaning Unit

*EGN

[0 to 999999999 / 59940000 / 1 mm/step]

003 Rotation: Fusing Unit

*EGN

004 Rotation: Fusing Pad

*EGN

005 Rotation: Fusing Belt

*EGN

006 Rotation:PTR Unit

*EGN

[0 to 999999999 / 23976000 / 1000 mm/

step]

*EGN

[0 to 999999999 / 300000 / 1000 mg/step]

011 Page: ITB Unit

*EGN

[0 to 999999 / 240000 / 1000 sheet/step]

012 Page: ITB Cleaning Unit

*EGN

[0 to 999999 / 60000 / 1 sheet/step]

013 Page: Fusing Unit

*EGN

014 Page: Fusing Pad

*EGN

015 Page: Fusing Belt

*EGN

[0 to 999999999 / 17500000 / 1000 mm/

step]

007 Amount:ITB T-Collect Bottle

008

328

Amount:PCU T-Collect
Bottle

[0 to 999999 / 150000 / 1 sheet/step]

System SP7-xxx

016 Page: PTR Unit

*EGN

021 Day Threshold: PCU: Bk

*EGN

022 Day Threshold: PCU: C

*EGN

023 Day Threshold: PCU: M

*EGN

024 Day Threshold: PCU: Y

*EGN

Day Threshold:
025
Development Unit: Bk

*EGN

026

Day Threshold:
Development Unit: C

*EGN

027

Day Threshold:
Development Unit: M

*EGN

028

Day Threshold:
Development Unit: Y

*EGN

029

Day Threshold: Developer:

Bk

*EGN

030

Day Threshold: Developer:

C

*EGN

031

Day Threshold: Developer:

M

*EGN

Day Threshold: Developer:

032
Y

*EGN

033 Day Threshold: ITB Unit

*EGN

Day Threshold: ITB

Cleaning Unit

*EGN

035 Day Threshold: Fusing Unit

*EGN

036 Day Threshold: Fusing Pad

*EGN

037 Day Threshold: Fusing Belt

*EGN

034

[0 to 999999 / 240000 / 1 sheet/step]

Adjusts the threshold day of the near end for each

PM unit.
[1 to 30 / 15 / 1 day/step]

These threshold days are used for @Remote

alarms.

Adjusts the threshold day of the near end for each

PM unit.
[1 to 30 / 15 / 1 day/step]
These threshold days are used for @Remote
alarms.

329

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

038 Rotation: PCU: Bk

039 Rotation: PCU: C

*EGN
[0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm/step]

040 Rotation: PCU: M

041 Rotation: PCU: Y

042

Rotation: Development Unit:

Bk

*EGN

043

Rotation: Development Unit:

C

*EGN

Rotation: Development Unit:

044
M

*EGN

Rotation: Development Unit:

Y

*EGN

045

[0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm/step]

046 Rotation: Developer: Bk

047 Rotation: Developer: C
048 Rotation: Developer: M

*EGN

[0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm/step]

*EGN

[0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]

*EGN

[0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]

049 Rotation: Developer: Y

050 Page: PCU: Bk
051 Page: PCU: C
052 Page: PCU: M
053 Page: PCU: Y
054 Page: Development Unit: Bk
055 Page: Development Unit: C
056 Page: Development Unit: M
057 Page: Development Unit: Y

330

System SP7-xxx

058 Page: Developer: Bk

059 Page: Developer: C
060 Page: Developer: M

*EGN

[0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]

061 Page: Developer: Y

062 Day Threshold:PTR Unit
063 Day Thresh:ITB T-Collect Bttl
Day Thresh:PCU T-Collect
064
Bttl
7953

Adjusts the threshold day of the near end for each

PM unit.
*EGN

[1 to 30 / 15 / 1 day/step]
These threshold days are used for @Remote
alarms.

[Operation Env. Log: PCU: Bk]

Displays the PCU rotation distance in each specified operation environment.
T: Temperature (C), H: Relative Humidity (%)
001 T<=0
002 0<T<=5:0<=H<30
003 0<T<=5:30<=H<70
004 T<=5: 70<=H<=100
005 5<T<15: 0<=H<30
006 5<T<15: 30<=H<55

*CTL

[0 to 99999999 / - / 1 mm/step]

007 5<T<15: 55<=H<80

008 5<T<15: 80<=H<=100
009 15<=T<25: 0<=H<30
010 15<=T<25: 30<=H<55

331

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

011 15<=T<25: 55<=H<80

012 15<=T<25: 80<=H<=100
013 25<=T<30: 0<=H<30
014 25<=T<30: 30<=H<55
015 25<=T<30: 55<=H<80
016 25<=T<30: 80<=H<=100

017 30<=T: 0<=H<30

018 30<=T: 30<=H<55
019 30<=T: 55<=H<80
020 30<=T: 80<=H<=100

7954

[Operation Env. Log Clear]

Clears the operation environment log.
001 -

332

*CTL

[0 to 99999999 / - / 1 mm/step]

System SP8-xxx

System SP8-xxx
SP8-xxx: Data Log2
Many of these counters are provided for features that are currently not available, such as sending color
faxes, and so on. However, here are some Group 8 codes that when used in combination with others, can
provide useful information.
SP Numbers

What They Do

SP8 211 to SP8 216

The number of pages scanned to the document server.

SP8 401 to SP8 406

The number of pages printed from the document server

SP8 691 to SP8 696

The number of pages sent from the document server

Specifically, the following questions can be answered:

How is the document server actually being used?
What application is using the document server most frequently?
What data in the document server is being reused?
Most of the SPs in this group are prefixed with a letter that indicates the mode of operation (the mode of
operation is referred to as an "application"). Before reading the Group 8 Service Table, make sure that
you understand what these prefixes mean.
Prefixes

What it means

T:

Total: (Grand Total).

C:

Copy application.

F:

Fax application.

P:

Print application.

S:

Scan application.

Grand total of the items counted for all applications (C, F, P,

etc.).

Totals (pages, jobs, etc.) executed for each application when

the job was not stored on the document server.

333

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

L:

Local storage (document

server)

Totals (jobs, pages, etc.) for the document server. The L:

counters work differently case by case. Sometimes, they
count jobs/pages stored on the document server; this can be
in document server mode (from the document server
window), or from another mode, such as from a printer driver
or by pressing the Store File button in the Copy mode
window. Sometimes, they include occasions when the user
uses a file that is already on the document server. Each
counter will be discussed case by case.

O:

Other applications
(external network
applications, for
example)

Refers to network applications such as Web Image Monitor.

Utilities developed with the SDK (Software Development Kit)
will also be counted with this group in the future.

The Group 8 SP codes are limited to 17 characters, forced by the necessity of displaying them on the small
LCDs of printers and faxes that also use these SPs. Read over the list of abbreviations below and refer to it
again if you see the name of an SP that you do not understand.
Key for Abbreviations
Abbreviation

334

What it means

"By", e.g. "T:Jobs/Apl" = Total Jobs "by" Application

>

More (2> "2 or more", 4> "4 or more"

AddBook

Address Book

Apl

Application

B/W

Black & White

Bk

Black

Cyan

ColCr

Color Create

ColMode

Color Mode

Comb

Combine

Comp

Compression

Deliv

Delivery

System SP8-xxx

Abbreviation

What it means

DesApl

Designated Application. The application (Copy, Fax, Scan, Print) used to

store the job on the document server, for example.

Dev Counter

Development Count, no. of pages developed.

Dup, Duplex

Duplex, printing on both sides

Emul

Emulation

FC

Full Color

FIN

Post-print processing, i.e. finishing (punching, stapling, etc.)

Full Bleed

No Margins

GenCopy

Generation Copy Mode

GPC

Get Print Counter. For jobs 10 pages or less, this counter does not count
up. For jobs larger than 10 pages, this counter counts up by the number
that is in excess of 10 (e.g., for an 11-page job, the counter counts up
11-10 =1)

IFax

Internet Fax

ImgEdt

Image Edit performed on the original with the copier GUI, e.g. border
removal, adding stamps, page numbers, etc.

Black (YMCK)

LS

Local Storage. Refers to the document server.

LSize

Large (paper) Size

Mag

Magnification

MC

One color (monochrome)

NRS

New Remote Service, which allows a service center to monitor machines

remotely. "NRS" is used overseas, "CSS" is used in Japan.

Org

Original for scanning

OrgJam

Original Jam

Palm 2

Print Job Manager/Desk Top Editor: A pair of utilities that allows print jobs
to be distributed evenly among the printers on the network, and allows files
to moved around, combined, and converted to different formats.

335

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

Abbreviation

What it means

PC

Personal Computer

PGS

Pages. A page is the total scanned surface of the original. Duplex pages
count as two pages, and A3 simplex count as two pages if the A3/DLT
counter SP is switched ON.

PJob

Print Jobs

Ppr

Paper

PrtJam

Printer (plotter) Jam

PrtPGS

Print Pages

Red (Toner Remaining). Applies to the wide format model A2 only. This
machine is under development and currently not available.

Rez

Resolution

SC

Service Code (Error SC code displayed)

Scn

Scan

Sim, Simplex

Simplex, printing on 1 side.

S-to-Email

Scan-to-E-mail

SMC

SMC report printed with SP5990. All of the Group 8 counters are recorded
in the SMC report.

Svr

Server

TonEnd

Toner End

TonSave

Toner Save

TXJob

Send, Transmission

YMC

Yellow, Magenta, Cyan

YMCK

Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, Black

All of the Group 8 SPs are reset with SP5 801 1 Memory All Clear.

336

System SP8-xxx

T:Total Jobs

*CTL

8 002

C:Total Jobs

*CTL

8 003

F:Total Jobs

*CTL

8 004

P:Total Jobs

*CTL

8 005

S:Total Jobs

*CTL

8 006

L:Total Jobs

*CTL

8 001

These SPs count the number of times each application is used

to do a job.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
Note: The L: counter is the total number of times the other
applications are used to send a job to the document server,
plus the number of times a file already on the document server
is used.

These SPs reveal the number of times an application is used, not the number of pages processed.
When an application is opened for image input or output, this counts as one job.
Interrupted jobs (paper jams, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish.
Only jobs executed by the customer are counted. Jobs executed by the customer engineer using the
SP modes are not counted.
When using secure printing (when a password is required to start the print job), the job is counted at
the time when either "Delete Data" or "Specify Output" is specified.
A job is counted as a fax job when the job is stored for sending.
When a fax is received to fax memory, the F: counter increments but the L: counter does not (the
document server is not used).
A fax broadcast counts as one job for the F: counter (the fax destinations in the broadcast are not
counted separately).
A fax broadcast is counted only after all the faxes have been sent to their destinations. If one
transmission generates an error, then the broadcast will not be counted until the transmission has been
completed.
A printed fax report counts as one job for the F: counter.
The F: counter does not distinguish between fax sending or receiving.
When a copy job on the document server is printed, SP8022 also increments, and when a print job
stored on the document server is printed, SP8024 also increments.
When an original is both copied and stored on the document server, the C: and L: counters both
increment.
When a print job is stored on the document server, only the L: counter increments.
When the user presses the Document Server button to store the job on the document server, only the
L: counter increments.
When the user enters document server mode and prints data stored on the document server, only the
L: counter increments.

337

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

When an image received from Palm 2 is received and stored, the L: counter increments.
When the customer prints a report (user code list, for example), the O: counter increments. However,
for fax reports and reports executed from the fax application, the F: counter increments.

8 011

T:Jobs/LS

*CTL

8 012

C:Jobs/LS

*CTL

8 013

F:Jobs/LS

*CTL

8 014

P:Jobs/LS

*CTL

8 015

S:Jobs/LS

*CTL

8 016

L:Jobs/LS

*CTL

8 017

O:Jobs/LS

*CTL

These SPs count the number of jobs stored to the document

server by each application, to reveal how local storage is
being used for input.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
The L: counter counts the number of jobs stored from within
the document server mode screen at the operation panel.

When a scan job is sent to the document server, the S: counter increments. When you enter document
server mode and then scan an original, the L: counter increments.
When a print job is sent to the document server, the P: counter increments.
When a network application sends data to the document server, the O: counter increments.
When an image from Palm 2 is stored on the document server, the O: counter increments.
When a fax is sent to the document server, the F: counter increments.
8 021

T:Pjob/LS

*CTL

8 022

C:Pjob/LS

*CTL

8 023

F:Pjob/LS

*CTL

8 024

P:Pjob/LS

*CTL

8 025

S:Pjob/LS

*CTL

8 026

L:Pjob/LS

*CTL

8 027

O:Pjob/LS

*CTL

These SPs reveal how files printed from the document

server were stored on the document server originally.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
The L: counter counts the number of jobs stored from
within the document server mode screen at the
operation panel.

When a copy job stored on the document server is printed with another application, the C: counter
increments.
When an application like DeskTopBinder merges a copy job that was stored on the document server
with a print job that was stored on the document server, the C: and P: counters both increment.
When a job already on the document server is printed with another application, the L: counter
increments.
338

System SP8-xxx

When a scanner job stored on the document server is printed with another application, the S: counter
increments. If the original was scanned from within document server mode, then the L: counter
increments.
When images stored on the document server by a network application (including Palm 2), are printed
with another application, the O: counter increments.
When a copy job stored on the document server is printed with a network application (Web Image
Monitor, for example), the C: counter increments.
When a fax on the document server is printed, the F: counter increments.
8 031

T:Pjob/DesApl

*CTL

8 032

C:Pjob/DesApl

*CTL

8 033

F:Pjob/DesApl

*CTL

8 034

P:Pjob/DesApl

*CTL

8 035

S:Pjob/DesApl

*CTL

8 036

L:Pjob/DesApl

*CTL

8 037

O:Pjob/DesApl

*CTL

3
These SPs reveal what applications were used to
output documents from the document server.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
The L: counter counts the number of jobs printed
from within the document server mode screen at the
operation panel.

When documents already stored on the document server are printed, the count for the application
that started the print job is incremented.
When the print job is started from a network application (Desk Top Binder, Web Image Monitor, etc.)
the L: counter increments.
8 041

T:TX Jobs/LS

*CTL

8 042

C:TX Jobs/LS

*CTL

8 043

F:TX Jobs/LS

*CTL

8 044

P:TX Jobs/LS

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 045

S:TX Jobs/LS

*CTL

8 046

L:TX Jobs/LS

*CTL

Note: Jobs merged for sending are counted

separately.

8 047

O:TX Jobs/LS

*CTL

These SPs count the applications that stored files

on the document server that were later accessed
for transmission over the telephone line or over a
network (attached to an e-mail, or as a fax image
by I-Fax).

The L: counter counts the number of jobs scanned

from within the document server mode screen at
the operation panel.

When a stored copy job is sent from the document server, the C: counter increments.

339

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

When images stored on the document server by a network application or Palm2 are sent as an email, the O: counter increments.

8 051

T:TX Jobs/DesApl

*CTL

8 052

C:TX Jobs/DesApl

*CTL

8 053

F:TX Jobs/DesApl

*CTL

8 054

P:TX Jobs/DesApl

*CTL

8 055

S:TX Jobs/DesApl

*CTL

8 056

L:TX Jobs/DesApl

*CTL

8 057

O:TX Jobs/DesApl

*CTL

These SPs count the applications used to send files

from the document server over the telephone line
or over a network (attached to an e-mail, or as a
fax image by I-Fax). Jobs merged for sending are
counted separately.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
The L: counter counts the number of jobs sent from
within the document server mode screen at the
operation panel.

If the send is started from Desk Top Binder or Web Image Monitor, for example, then the O: counter
increments.
8 061

T:FIN Jobs

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs total finishing methods for copy jobs only. The finishing method is specified by
the application.
F:FIN Jobs

8 063

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs total the finishing methods. The finishing method is specified by the application.
C:FIN Jobs

8 062

*CTL

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs total finishing methods for fax jobs only. The finishing method is specified by
the application.
Note: Finishing features for fax jobs are not available at this time.
P:FIN Jobs

8 064

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs total finishing methods for print jobs only. The finishing method is specified by
the application.
S:FIN Jobs

8 065

*CTL

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs total finishing methods for scan jobs only. The finishing method is specified by
the application.
Note: Finishing features for scan jobs are not available at this time.

340

System SP8-xxx

L:FIN Jobs
8 066

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs total finishing methods for jobs output from within the document server mode
screen at the operation panel. The finishing method is specified from the print window
within document server mode.
O:FIN Jobs

8 067

*CTL

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs total finishing methods for jobs executed by an external application, over the
network. The finishing method is specified by the application.

8 06x 1 Sort

Number of jobs started in Sort mode. When a stored copy job is set for
Sort and then stored on the document server, the L: counter increments.
(See SP8 066 1)

8 06x 2 Stack

Number of jobs started out of Sort mode.

8 06x 3 Staple

Number of jobs started in Staple mode.

8 06x 4 Booklet

Number of jobs started in Booklet mode. If the machine is in staple mode,

the Staple counter also increments.

8 06x 5 Z-Fold

Number of jobs started In any mode other than the Booklet mode and set
for folding (Z-fold).

8 06x 6 Punch

Number of jobs started in Punch mode. When Punch is set for a print job,
the P: counter increments. (See SP8 064 6.)

8 06x 7 Other

Reserved. Not used.

T:Jobs/PGS
8 071

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count and calculate the number of copy jobs by size based on the number of
pages in the job.
F:Jobs/PGS

8 073

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the number of jobs broken down by the number of pages in the job,
regardless of which application was used.
C:Jobs/PGS

8 072

*CTL

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count and calculate the number of fax jobs by size based on the number of
pages in the job.

341

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

P:Jobs/PGS
8 074

*CTL

These SPs count and calculate the number of print jobs by size based on the number of
pages in the job.
S:Jobs/PGS

8 075

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count and calculate the number of jobs printed from within the document server
mode window at the operation panel, by the number of pages in the job.
O:Jobs/PGS

8 077

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count and calculate the number of scan jobs by size based on the number of
pages in the job.
L:Jobs/PGS

8 076

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count and calculate the number of "Other" application jobs (Web Image
Monitor, Palm 2, etc.) by size based on the number of pages in the job.

8 07x 1 1 Page

8 07x 8

21 to 50 Pages

8 07x 2 2 Pages

8 07x 9

51 to 100 Pages

8 07x 3 3 Pages

8 07x 10

101 to 300 Pages

8 07x 4 4 Pages

8 07x 11

301 to 500 Pages

8 07x 5 5 Pages

8 07x 12

501 to 700 Pages

8 07x 6 6 to 10 Pages

8 07x 13

701 to 1000 Pages

8 07x 7 11 to 20 Pages

8 07x 14

1001 to Pages

For example: When a copy job stored on the document server is printed in document server mode,
the appropriate L: counter (SP8076 0xx) increments.
Printing a fax report counts as a job and increments the F: counter (SP 8073).
Interrupted jobs (paper jam, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish.
If a job is paused and re-started, it counts as one job.
If the finisher runs out of staples during a print and staple job, then the job is counted at the time the
error occurs.
For copy jobs (SP 8072) and scan jobs (SP 8075), the total is calculated by multiplying the number
of sets of copies by the number of pages scanned. (One duplex page counts as 2.)
The first test print and subsequent test prints to adjust settings are added to the number of pages of the
copy job (SP 8072).

342

System SP8-xxx

When printing the first page of a job from within the document server screen, the page is counted.
T:FAX TX Jobs
8 111

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent by fax, either
directly or using a file stored on the document server, on a telephone line.
Note: Color fax sending is not available at this time.
F: FAX TX Jobs

8 113

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent by fax directly
on a telephone line.

Note: Color fax sending is not available at this time.

8 11x 1 B/W
8 11x 2 Color
These counters count jobs, not pages.
This SP counts fax jobs sent over a telephone line with a fax application, including documents stored
on the document server.
If the mode is changed during the job, the job will count with the mode set when the job started.
If the same document is faxed to both a public fax line and an I-Fax at a destination where both are
available, then this counter increments, and the I-Fax counter (8 12x) also increments.
The fax job is counted when the job is scanned for sending, not when the job is sent.
T:IFAX TX Jobs
8 121

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent, either directly
or using a file stored on the document server, as fax images using I-Fax.
Note: Color fax sending is not available at this time.
F: IFAX TX Jobs

8 123

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent (not stored on the
document server), as fax images using I-Fax.
Note: Color fax sending is not available at this time.

8 12x 1 B/W
8 12x 2 Color
These counters count jobs, not pages.

343

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

The counters for color are provided for future use; the color fax feature is not available at this time.
The fax job is counted when the job is scanned for sending, not when the job is sent.
T:S-to-Email Jobs
8 131

8 135

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned and attached
to an e-mail, regardless of whether the document server was used or not.
S: S-to-Email Jobs

*CTL

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned and attached to
e-mail, without storing the original on the document server.

8 13x 1 B/W
8 13x 2 Color
8 13x 3 ACS
These counters count jobs, not pages.
If the job is stored on the document server, after the job is stored it is determined to be color or blackand-white then counted.
If the job is cancelled during scanning, or if the job is cancelled while the document is waiting to be
sent, the job is not counted.
If the job is cancelled during sending, it may or may not be counted, depending on what stage of the
process had been reached when the job was cancelled.
If several jobs are combined for sending to the Scan Router, Scan-to-Email, or Scan-to-PC, or if one
job is sent to more than one destination. each send is counted separately. For example, if the same
document is sent by Scan-to-Email as well as Scan-to-PC, then it is counted twice (once for Scan-toEmail and once for Scan-to-PC).
T:Deliv Jobs/Svr
8 141

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned in scanner mode
and sent to a Scan Router server.

8 14x 1 B/W
8 14x 2 Color

344

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned and sent to
a Scan Router server.
S: Deliv Jobs/Svr

8 145

*CTL

System SP8-xxx

8 14x 3 ACS
These counters count jobs, not pages.
The jobs are counted even though the arrival and reception of the jobs at the Scan Router server
cannot be confirmed.
If even one color image is mixed with black-and-white images, then the job is counted as a "Color"
job.
If the job is cancelled during scanning, or if the job is cancelled while the document is waiting to be
delivered, the job is not counted.
If the job is cancelled during sending, it may or may not be counted, depending on what stage of the
process had been reached when the job was cancelled.

Even if several files are combined for sending, the transmission counts as one job.
T:Deliv Jobs/PC
8 151

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned and sent to
a folder on a PC (Scan-to-PC).
Note: At the present time, 8 151 and 8 155 perform identical counts.
S:Deliv Jobs/PC

8 155

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned and sent
with Scan-to-PC.

8 15x 1 B/W
8 15x 2 Color
8 15x 3 ACS
These counters count jobs, not pages.
If the job is cancelled during scanning, it is not counted.
If the job is cancelled while it is waiting to be sent, the job is not counted.
If the job is cancelled during sending, it may or may not be counted, depending on what stage of the
process had been reached when the job was cancelled.
Even if several files are combined for sending, the transmission counts as one job.

345

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

8 161

T:PCFAX TX Jobs

*CTL

These SPs count the number of PC Fax transmission

jobs. A job is counted from when it is registered for
sending, not when it is sent.

8 163

F:PCFAX TX Jobs

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
Note: At the present time, these counters perform
identical counts.

This counts fax jobs started from a PC using a PC fax application, and sending the data out to the
destination from the PC through the copier.
8 171

T: Deliv Jobs/WSD

*CTL

These SPs count the pages scanned by WS.

8 175

S: Dvliv Jobs/WSD

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

x 1 B/W
x 2 Color
x 3 ACS
8 181

T: Scan to Media Jobs

*CTL

These SPs count the scanned pages in a media

by the scanner application.

8 185

S: Scan to Media Jobs

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

x 1 B/W
x 2 Color
x 3 ACS
8 191

T: Total Scan PGS

*CTL

8 192

C: Total Scan PGS

*CTL

8 193

F: Total Scan PGS

*CTL

8 195

S: Total Scan PGS

*CTL

8 196

L: Total Scan PGS

These SPs count the pages scanned by each

application that uses the scanner to scan images.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

SP 8 191 to 8 196 count the number of scanned sides of pages, not the number of physical pages.
These counters do not count reading user stamp data, or reading color charts to adjust color.
Previews done with a scanner driver are not counted.

346

System SP8-xxx

A count is done only after all images of a job have been scanned.
Scans made in SP mode are not counted.
Examples
If 3 B5 pages and 1 A3 page are scanned with the scanner application but not stored, the S: count
is 4.
If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied and stored to the document server using the Store File button
in the Copy mode window, the C: count is 6 and the L: count is 6.
If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied but not stored, the C: count is 6.
If you enter document server mode then scan 6 pages, the L: count is 6.
T:LSize Scan PGS
8 201

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the total number of large pages input with the scanner for scan and copy
jobs. Large size paper (A3/DLT) scanned for fax transmission are not counted.
Note: These counters are displayed in the SMC Report, and in the User Tools display.
F: LSize Scan PGS

8 203

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the total number of large pages input with the scanner for fax transmission.
Note: These counters are displayed in the SMC Report, and in the User Tools display.
S:LSize Scan PGS

8 205

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the total number of large pages input with the scanner for scan jobs only.
Large size paper (A3/DLT) scanned for fax transmission are not counted.
Note: These counters are displayed in the SMC Report, and in the User Tools display.

8 211

T:Scan PGS/LS

*CTL

8 212

C:Scan PGS/LS

*CTL

8 213

F:Scan PGS/LS

*CTL

8 215

S:Scan PGS/LS

*CTL

8 216

L:Scan PGS/LS

*CTL

These SPs count the number of pages scanned into the

document server .
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
The L: counter counts the number of pages stored from
within the document server mode screen at the
operation panel, and with the Store File button from
within the Copy mode screen

Reading user stamp data is not counted.

If a job is cancelled, the pages output as far as the cancellation are counted.
If the scanner application scans and stores 3 B5 sheets and 1 A4 sheet, the S: count is 4.
If pages are copied but not stored on the document server, these counters do not change.

347

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied and stored to the document server, the C: count is 6 and the
L: count is 6.
If you enter document server mode then scan 6 pages, the L: count is 6.
ADF Org Feeds
8 221

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the number of pages fed through the ADF for front and back side
scanning.
Number of front sides fed for scanning:

3
8 221 1

Front

With an ADF that can scan both sides simultaneously, the Front side count is
the same as the number of pages fed for either simplex or duplex scanning.
With an ADF that cannot scan both sides simultaneously, the Front side count
is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex front side scanning. (The
front side is determined by which side the user loads face up.)
Number of rear sides fed for scanning:

8 221 2

Back

With an ADF that can scan both sides simultaneously, the Back count is the
same as the number of pages fed for duplex scanning.
With an ADF that cannot scan both sides simultaneously, the Back count is
the same as the number of pages fed for duplex rear-side scanning.

When 1 sheet is fed for duplex scanning the Front count is 1 and the Back count is 1.
If a jam occurs during the job, recovery processing is not counted to avoid double counting. Also, the
pages are not counted if the jam occurs before the first sheet is output.
Scan PGS/Mode
8 231

348

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the number of pages scanned by each ADF mode to determine the work
load on the ADF.

8 231 1 Large Volume

Selectable. Large copy jobs that cannot be loaded in the

ADF at one time.

8 231 2 SADF

Selectable. Feeding pages one by one through the ADF.

8 231 3 Mixed Size

Selectable. Select "Mixed Sizes" on the operation panel.

8 231 4 Custom Size

Selectable. Originals of non-standard size.

8 231 5 Platen

Book mode. Raising the ADF and placing the original

directly on the platen.

8 231 6 Mixed 1side/2side

Simplex and Duplex mode.

System SP8-xxx

If the scan mode is changed during the job, for example, if the user switches from ADF to Platen mode,
the count is done for the last selected mode.
The user cannot select mixed sizes or non-standard sizes with the fax application so if the originals
page sizes are mixed or non-standard, these are not counted.
If the user selects "Mixed Sizes" for copying in the platen mode, the Mixed Size count is enabled.
In the SADF mode if the user copies 1 page in platen mode and then copies 2 pages with SADF, the
Platen count is 1 and the SADF count is 3.
T:Scan PGS/Org
8 241

8 242

8 243

8 245

*CTL

These SPs count the total number of scanned pages by original type for all jobs, regardless
of which application was used.
C:Scan PGS/Org

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Copy jobs.
F:Scan PGS/Org

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Fax jobs.
S:Scan PGS/Org

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Scan jobs.
L:Scan PGS/Org

8 246

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the number of pages scanned and stored from within the document server
mode screen at the operation panel, and with the Store File button from within the Copy
mode screen
8 241

8 242

8 243

8 245

8 246

8 24x 1: Text

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

8 24x 2: Text/Photo

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

8 24x 3: Photo

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

8 24x 4: GenCopy, Pale

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

8 24x 5: Map

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

8 24x 6: Normal/Detail

Yes

No

Yes

No

No

8 24x 7: Fine/Super Fine

Yes

No

Yes

No

No

8 24x 8: Binary

Yes

No

No

Yes

No
349

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

8 24x 9: Grayscale

Yes

No

No

Yes

No

8 24x 10: Color

Yes

No

No

Yes

No

8 24x 11: Other

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

If the scan mode is changed during the job, for example, if the user switches from ADF to Platen mode,
the count is done for the last selected mode.

8 251

T:Scan PGS/ImgEdt

*CTL

8 252

C:Scan PGS/ImgEdt

*CTL

8 255

S:Scan PGS/ImgEdt

*CTL

8 256

L:Scan PGS/ImgEdt

*CTL

These SPs show how many times Image Edit features

have been selected at the operation panel for each
application. Some examples of these editing features
are:
Erase> Border
Erase> Center
Image Repeat
Centering

8 257

O:Scan PGS/ImgEdt

*CTL

Positive/Negative
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
Note: The count totals the number of times the edit
features have been used. A detailed breakdown of
exactly which features have been used is not given.

The L: counter counts the number of pages stored from within the document server mode screen at the
operation panel, and with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen.
8 261

T:Scan PGS/ColCr

*CTL

8 262

C:Scan PGS/ ColCr

*CTL

8 266

L:Scn PGS/ColCr

*CTL

8 26x 1 Color Conversion

8 26x 2 Color Erase
8 26x 3 Background
8 26x 4 Other

350

These SPs show how many times color creation features

have been selected at the operation panel.

System SP8-xxx

8 281

T:Scn PGS/TWAIN

*CTL

These SPs count the number of pages scanned using

a TWAIN driver. These counters reveal how the
TWAIN driver is used for delivery functions.

8 285

S:Scn PGS/TWAIN

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
Note: At the present time, these counters perform
identical counts.

8 291

T:Scan PGS/Stamp

*CTL

8 293

F:Scan PGS/Stamp

*CTL

These SPs count the number of pages stamped with

the stamp in the ADF unit.

8 295

S:Scan PGS/Stamp

*CTL

T:Scan PGS/Size
8 301

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Scan application. Use
these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and output page size [SP 8-445].
L:Scan PGS/Size

8 306

*CTL

These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Fax application. Use
these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and output page size [SP 8-443].
S:Scan PGS/Size

8 305

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Copy application. Use
these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and output (printing) page size [SP
8-442].
F:Scan PGS/Size

8 303

*CTL

These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by all applications. Use these
totals to compare original page size (scanning) and output (printing) page size [SP 8-441].
C:Scan PGS/Size

8 302

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
The L: counter counts the number of pages stored from
within the document server mode screen at the
operation panel, and with the Store File button from
within the Copy mode screen

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned and stored from within the
document server mode screen at the operation panel, and with the Store File button from
within the Copy mode screen. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning)
and output page size [SP 8-446].

351

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

8 30x 1 A3
8 30x 2 A4
8 30x 3 A5
8 30x 4 B4
8 30x 5 B5

8 30x 6 DLT
8 30x 7 LG

8 30x 8 LT
8 30x 9 HLT
8 30x 10 Full Bleed
8 30x
Other (Standard)
254
8 30x
Other (Custom)
255
T:Scan PGS/Rez
8 311

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by resolution setting the total number of pages scanned by applications
that can specify resolution settings.
S: Scan PGS/Rez

8 315

*CTL

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by resolution setting the total number of pages scanned by applications
that can specify resolution settings.
Note: At the present time, SP8-311 and SP8-315 perform identical counts.

8 31x 1 1200dpi <

8 31x 2 600dpi to 1199dpi
8 31x 3 400dpi to 599dpi
8 31x 4 200dpi to 399dpi
8 31x 5 < 199dpi
Copy resolution settings are fixed so they are not counted.
352

System SP8-xxx

The Fax application does not allow finely-adjusted resolution settings so no count is done for the Fax
application.
8 381

T:Total PrtPGS

*CTL

8 382

C:Total PrtPGS

*CTL

8 383

F:Total PrtPGS

*CTL

8 384

P:Total PrtPGS

*CTL

8 385

S:Total PrtPGS

*CTL

8 386

L:Total PrtPGS

*CTL

8 387

O:Total PrtPGS

*CTL

These SPs count the number of pages printed by the

customer. The counter for the application used for
storing the pages increments.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
The L: counter counts the number of pages stored from
within the document server mode screen at the
operation panel. Pages stored with the Store File
button from within the Copy mode screen go to the C:
counter.

When the A3/DLT double count function is switched on with SP5104, 1 A3/DLT page is counted as
2.
When several documents are merged for a print job, the number of pages stored are counted for the
application that stored them.
These counters are used primarily to calculate charges on use of the machine, so the following pages
are not counted as printed pages:
- Blank pages in a duplex printing job.
- Blank pages inserted as document covers, chapter title sheets, and slip sheets.
- Reports printed to confirm counts.
- All reports done in the service mode (service summaries, engine maintenance reports, etc.)
- Test prints for machine image adjustment.
- Error notification reports.
- Partially printed pages as the result of a copier jam.
LSize PrtPGS
8 391

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count pages printed on paper sizes A3/DLT and larger.
Note: In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report, these counters are also displayed
in the User Tools display on the copy machine.

353

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

8 401

T:PrtPGS/LS

*CTL

8 402

C:PrtPGS/LS

*CTL

8 403

F:PrtPGS/LS

*CTL

8 404

P:PrtPGS/LS

*CTL

8 405

S:PrtPGS/LS

*CTL

8 406

L:PrtPGS/LS

*CTL

These SPs count the number of pages printed from the

document server. The counter for the application used
to print the pages is incremented.
The L: counter counts the number of jobs stored from
within the document server mode screen at the
operation panel.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the L: count.
Fax jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the F: count.

8 411

Prints/Duplex

*CTL

This SP counts the amount of paper (front/back counted

as 1 page) used for duplex printing. Last pages printed
only on one side are not counted.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
8 421

354

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of pages
processed for printing by the printer application.
S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb

8 425

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of pages
processed for printing by the fax application.
P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb

8 424

*CTL

These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of pages
processed for printing by the copier application.
F:PrtPGS/Dup Comb

8 423

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of pages
processed for printing. This is the total for all applications.
C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb

8 422

*CTL

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of pages
processed for printing by the scanner application.

System SP8-xxx

L:PrtPGS/Dup Comb

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of pages
processed for printing from within the document server mode window at the operation
panel.

8 426

O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
8 427

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of pages
processed for printing by Other applications

8 42x 1 Simplex> Duplex

8 42x 4 Simplex Combine

8 42x 5 Duplex Combine
8 42x 6 2>

2 pages on 1 side (2-Up)

8 42x 7 4>

4 pages on 1 side (4-Up)

8 42x 9 8>

8 pages on 1 side (8-Up)

8 42x 12 Booklet
8 42x 13 Magazine
These counts (SP8 421 to SP8 427) are especially useful for customers who need to improve their
compliance with ISO standards for the reduction of paper consumption.
Pages that are only partially printed with the n-Up functions are counted as 1 page.
Here is a summary of how the counters work for Booklet and Magazine modes:
Magazine

Booklet
Original Pages

Count

Original Pages

Count

355

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

T:PrtPGS/ImgEdt
8 431

8 441

356

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features below with
Other applications.
8 43x 1 Cover/Slip Sheet

Total number of covers or slip sheets inserted. The count for a

cover printed on both sides counts 2.

8 43x 2 Series/Book

The number of pages printed in series (one side) or printed as

a book with booklet right/left pagination.

8 43x 3 User Stamp

The number of pages printed where stamps were applied,

including page numbering and date stamping.

T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by all applications.
C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size

8 442

*CTL

These SPs count the total number of pages output from within the document server mode
window at the operation panel with the three features below.
O:PrtPGS/ImgEdt

8 437

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features below with the
print application.
L:PrtPGS/ImgEdt

8 436

*CTL

These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features below with the
copy application.
P:PrtPGS/ImgEdt

8 434

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features below,
regardless of which application was used.
C:PrtPGS/ImgEdt

8 432

*CTL

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the copy
application.

System SP8-xxx

8 443

F:PrtPGS/Ppr Size

8 447

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the scanner
application.
L:PrtPGS/Ppr Size

8 446

*CTL

These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the printer
application.
S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size

8 445

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the fax application.
P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size

8 444

*CTL

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed from within the
document server mode window at the operation panel.
O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by Other applications.
8 44x 1 A3
8 44x 2 A4
8 44x 3 A5
8 44x 4 B4
8 44x 5 B5
8 44x 6 DLT
8 44x 7 LG
8 44x 8 LT
8 44x 9 HLT

8 44x 10 Full Bleed

8 44x 254 Other (Standard)
8 44x 255 Other (Custom)
These counters do not distinguish between LEF and SEF.

357

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

8 451

PrtPGS/Ppr Tray

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the number of sheets fed from each paper feed station.

8 451 1 Bypass

Bypass Tray

8 451 2 Tray 1

Copier

8 451 3 Tray 2

Copier

8 451 4 Tray 3

Paper Tray Unit (Option)

8 451 5 Tray 4

Paper Tray Unit (Option)

8 451 6 Tray 5

LCT (Option)

8 451 7 Tray 6

Currently not used.

8 451 8 Tray 7

Currently not used.

8 451 9 Tray 8

Currently not used.

8 451 10 Tray 9

Currently not used.

8 451 11 Tray 10

Currently not used.

8 451 12 Tray 11

Currently not used.

8 451 13 Tray 12

Currently not used.

8 451 14 Tray 13

Currently not used.

8 451 15 Tray 14

Currently not used.

8 451 16 Tray 15

Currently not used.

T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by all applications.
8 461

These counters are not the same as the PM counter. The PM counter is based on
feed timing to accurately measure the service life of the feed rollers. However,
these counts are based on output timing.
Blank sheets (covers, chapter covers, slip sheets) are also counted.
During duplex printing, pages printed on both sides count as 1, and a page printed
on one side counts as 1.

358

System SP8-xxx

8 462

8 463

8 464

C:PrtPGS/Ppr Type

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the copy application.
F:PrtPGS/Ppr Type

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the fax application.
P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the printer application.
L:PrtPGS/Ppr Type

8 466

*CTL

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed from within the document
server mode window at the operation panel.

8 46x 1 Normal
8 46x 2 Recycled
8 46x 3 Special
8 46x 4 Thick
8 46x 5 Normal (Back)
8 46x 6 Thick (Back)
8 46x 7 OHP
8 46x 8 Other

8 471

PrtPGS/Mag

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by magnification rate the number of pages printed.

8 471 1 < 49%

8 471 2 50% to 99%
8 471 3 100%
8 471 4 101% to 200%
8 471 5 201% <

359

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

Counts are done for magnification adjusted for pages, not only on the operation panel but performed
remotely with an external network application capable of performing magnification adjustment as
well.
Magnification adjustments done with printer drivers with PC applications such as Excel are also
counted.
Magnification adjustments done for adjustments after they have been stored on the document server
are not counted.

Magnification adjustments performed automatically during Auto Reduce/Enlarge copying are

counted.
The magnification rates of blank cover sheets, slip sheets, etc. are automatically assigned a rate of
100%.
8 481

T:PrtPGS/TonSave

*CTL

8 484

P:PrtPGS/TonSave

*CTL

These SPs count the number of pages printed with the Toner Save feature switched on.
Note: These SPs return the same results as this SP is limited to the Print application.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 491

T:PrtPGS/Col Mode

*CTL

8 492

C:PrtPGS/Col Mode

*CTL

8 493

F:PrtPGS/Col Mode

*CTL

8 496

L:PrtPGS/Col Mode

*CTL

8 497

O:PrtPGS/Col Mode

*CTL

These SPs count the number of pages printed

in the Color Mode by each application.

8 49x 1 B/W
8 49x 2 Single Color
8 49x 3 Two Color
8 49x 4 Full Color

360

8 501

T:PrtPGS/Col Mode

*CTL

8 504

P:PrtPGS/Col Mode

*CTL

8 057

O:PrtPGS/Col Mode

*CTL

These SPs count the number of pages

printed in the Color Mode by the print
application.

System SP8-xxx

8 50x 1 B/W
8 50x 2 Mono Color
8 50x 3 Full Color
8 50x 4 Single Color
8 50x 5 Two Color

8 511

8 514

T:PrtPGS/Emul

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by printer emulation mode the total number of pages printed.
P:PrtPGS/Emul

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by printer emulation mode the total number of pages printed.

8 514 1

RPCS

8 514 2

RPDL

8 514 3

PS3

8 514 4

R98

8 514 5

R16

8 514 6

GL/GL2

8 514 7

R55

8 514 8

RTIFF

8 514 9

PDF

8 514 10

PCL5e/5c

8 514 11

PCL XL

8 514 12

IPDL-C

8 514 13

BM-Links

8 514 14

Other

8 514 15

IPDS

Japan Only

SP8 511 and SP8 514 return the same results as they are both limited to the Print application.

361

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

Print jobs output to the document server are not counted.

8 521

T:PrtPGS/FIN

*CTL

[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the Copy
application.
F:PrtPGS/FIN

8 523

[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by all applications.
C:PrtPGS/FIN

8 522

*CTL

*CTL

[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the Fax
application.
NOTE: Print finishing options for received faxes are currently not available.
P:PrtPGS/FIN

8 524

8 52x 2 Stack
8 52x 3 Staple
8 52x 4 Booklet
8 52x 5 Z-Fold
8 52x 6 Punch
8 52x 7 Other
8 52x 8 Inside-Fold

362

[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

*CTL

[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed from within the
document server mode window at the operation panel.

8 52x 1 Sort

8 52x 9

*CTL

These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the Scanner
application.
L:PrtPGS/FIN

8 526

[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the Print
application.
S:PrtPGS/FIN

8 525

*CTL

System SP8-xxx

8 52x 10
8 52x 11
8 52x 12
8 52x 13
8 52x 14

If stapling is selected for finishing and the stack is too large for stapling, the unstapled pages are still
counted.

The counts for staple finishing are based on output to the staple tray, so jam recoveries are counted.
8 531

Staples

T:Counter
8 581

*CTL

This SP counts the amount of staples used by the machine.

[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
*CTL

[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

These SPs count the total output broken down by color output, regardless of the
application used. In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report, these counters are
also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine.

8 581 1 Total
8 581 2 Total: Full Color
8 581 3 B&W/Single Color
8 581 4 Development: CMY
8 581 5 Development: K
8 581 6 Copy: Color
8 581 7 Copy: B/W
8 581 8 Print: Color
8 581 9 Print: B/W
8 581 10 Total: Color
8 581 11 Total: B/W

363

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

8 581 12 Full Color: A3

8 581 13 Full Color: B4 JIS or Smaller
8 581 14 Full Color Print
8 581 15 Mono Color Print
8 581 16 Full Color GPC

8 581 17 Twin Color Mode Print

8 581 18 Full Color Print (Twin)
8 581 19 Mono Color Print (Twin)
8 581 20 Full Color Total (CV)
8 581 21 Mono Color Total (CV)
8 581 22 Full Color Print (CV)
8 582

C:Counter

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the total output of the copy application broken down by color output.
8 582 1 B/W
8 582 2 Single Color
8 582 3 Two Color
8 582 4 Full Color
8 583

F:Counter

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the total output of the fax application broken down by color output.
8 583 1 B/W
8 583 2 Single Color
8 584

P:Counter

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the total output of the print application broken down by color output.
8 584 1 B/W

364

System SP8-xxx

8 584 2 Mono Color

8 584 3 Full Color
8 584 4 Single Color
8 584 5 Two Color
8 586

L:Counter

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the total output of the local storage broken down by color output.

8 582 1 B/W
8 582 2 Single Color
8 582 3 Two Color
8 582 4 Full Color
O:Counter
8 591

*CTL

These SPs count the totals for A3/DLT paper use, number of duplex pages printed, and
the number of staples used. These totals are for Other (O:) applications only.

8 591 1 A3/DLT
8 591 2 Duplex

Coverage Counter
8 601

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the total coverage for each color and the total printout pages for each
printing mode.

8 601 1 B/W
8 601 2 Color
8 601 11 B/W Printing Pages
8 601 12 Color Printing Pages

8 601 21 Coverage Counter 1

8 601 22 Coverage Counter 2
8 601 23 Coverage Counter 3

365

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

8 617

SDK Apli Counter

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 617 1 SDK1
8 617 2 SDK2
8 617 3 SDK3
8 617 4 SDK4

These SPs count the total printout pages for each SDK
applicaion.

8 617 5 SDK5
8 617 6 SDK6

8 631

8 633

T:FAX TX PGS

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to a telephone number.
F:FAX TX PGS

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to a telephone number.

8 63x 1 B/W
8 63x 2 Color
If a document has color and black-and-white pages mixed, the pages are counted separately as B/
W or Color.
At the present time, this feature is provided for the Fax application only so SP8631 and SP8633 are
the same.
The counts include error pages.
If a document is sent to more than one destination with a Group transmission, the count is done for
each destination.
Polling transmissions are counted but polling RX are not.
Relay, memory, and confidential mailbox transmissions and are counted for each destination.
T:IFAX TX PGS
8 641

366

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to as fax images using
I-Fax.
F:IFAX TX PGS

8 643

*CTL

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by Fax as fax images using IFax.

System SP8-xxx

8 64x 1 B/W
8 64x 2 Color
If a document has color and black-and-white pages mixed, the pages are counted separately as B/
W or Color.
At the present time, this feature is provided for the Fax application only so SP8641 and SP8643 are
the same.
The counts include error pages.
If a document is sent to more than one destination with a Group transmission, the count is done for
each destination.

Polling transmissions are counted but polling RX are not.

Relay, memory, and confidential mailbox transmissions and are counted for each destination.
T:S-to-Email PGS
8 651

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages attached to an e-mail for both
the Scan and document server applications.
S-to-Email PGS

8 655

*CTL

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages attached to an e-mail for the
Scan application only.

8 65x 1 B/W
8 65x 2 Color

The count for B/W and Color pages is done after the document is stored on the HDD. If the job is
cancelled before it is stored, the pages are not counted.
If Scan-to-Email is used to send a 10-page document to 5 addresses, the count is 10 (the pages are
sent to the same SMTP server together).
If Scan-to-PC is used to send a 10-page document to 5 folders, the count is 50 (the document is sent
to each destination of the SMB/FTP server).
Due to restrictions on some devices, if Scan-to-Email is used to send a 10-page document to a large
number of destinations, the count may be divided and counted separately. For example, if a 10-page
document is sent to 200 addresses, the count is 10 for the first 100 destinations and the count is also
10 for the second 100 destinations, for a total of 20.).

367

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

T:Deliv PGS/Svr
8 661

*CTL

These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a Scan Router server
by both Scan and LS applications.
S:Deliv PGS/Svr

8 665

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a Scan Router server
by the Scan application.

8 66x 1 B/W
8 66x 2 Color

The B/W and Color counts are done after the document is stored on the HDD of the Scan Router
server.
If the job is canceled before storage on the Scan Router server finishes, the counts are not done.
The count is executed even if regardless of confirmation of the arrival at the Scan Router server.
T:Deliv PGS/PC
8 671

*CTL

These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a folder on a PC (Scanto-PC) with the Scan and LS applications.
S:Deliv PGS/PC

8 675

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent with Scan-to-PC with the
Scan application.

8 67x 1 B/W
8 67x 2 Color
8 681

T:PCFAX TXPGS

*CTL

8 683

F:PCFAX TXPGS

*CTL

These SPs count the number of pages sent by PC Fax.

These SPs are provided for the Fax application only,
so the counts for SP8 681 and SP8 683 are the same.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

This counts pages sent from a PC using a PC fax application, from the PC through the copier to the
destination.

368

System SP8-xxx

When sending the same message to more than one place using broadcasting, the pages are only
counted once. (For example, a 10-page fax is sent to location A and location B. The counter goes
up by 10, not 20.)
8 691

T:TX PGS/LS

*CTL

8 692

C:TX PGS/LS

*CTL

8 693

F:TX PGS/LS

*CTL

8 694

P:TX PGS/LS

*CTL

8 695

S:TX PGS/LS

*CTL

8 696

L:TX PGS/LS

*CTL

These SPs count the number of pages sent from the

document server. The counter for the application that
was used to store the pages is incremented.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
The L: counter counts the number of pages stored from
within the document server mode screen at the
operation panel. Pages stored with the Store File
button from within the Copy mode screen go to the C:
counter.

Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the count.
If several documents are merged for sending, the number of pages stored are counted for the
application that stored them.
When several documents are sent by a Fax broadcast, the F: count is done for the number of pages
sent to each destination.
TX PGS/Port
8 701

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the number of pages sent by the physical port used to send them. For
example, if a 3-page original is sent to 4 destinations via ISDN G4, the count for ISDN
(G3, G4) is 12.

8 701 1 PSTN-1
8 701 2 PSTN-2
8 701 3 PSTN-3
8 701 4 ISDN (G3,G4)
8 701 5 Network
8 711
8 715

T:Scan PGS/Comp

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

S:Scan PGS/Comp

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the number of pages sent by each compression mode.

8 715 1 JPEG/JPEG2000
369

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

8 715 2 TIFF(Multi/Single)
8 715 3 PDF
8 715 4 Other
8 715 5 PDF/Comp
8 721

8 725

T: Deliv PGS/WSD

*CTL

S: Deliv PGS/WSD

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the number of pages scanned by each scanner mode.
x 1 B/W
x 2 Color

8 731

8 735

T: Scan PGS/Media

*CTL

S: Scan PGS/Media

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the number of pages scanned and saved in a meia by each scanner
mode.
x 1 B/W
x 2 Color

8 741

RX PGS/Port

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the number of pages received by the physical port used to receive them.

8 741 1 PSTN-1
8 741 2 PSTN-2
8 741 3 PSTN-3
8 741 4 ISDN (G3,G4)
8 741 5 Network

370

*CTL

System SP8-xxx

Dev Counter
8 771

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the frequency of use (number of rotations of the development rollers)
for black and other color toners.

8 771 1 Total
8 771 2 K
8 771 3 Y

8 771 4 M
8 771 5 C
Toner Bottle Info.
8 781

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs display the number of already replaced toner bottles.

NOTE: Currently, the data in SP7-833-011 through 014 and the data in SP8-781-001
through 004 are the same.

8 781 1 Toner: BK

The number of black-toner bottles

8 781 2 Toner: Y

The number of yellow-toner bottles

8 781 3 Toner: M

The number of magenta-toner bottles

8 781 4 Toner: C

The number of cyan-toner bottles

8 791

LS Memory Remain

*CTL

This SP displays the percent of space available

on the document server for storing documents.
[0 to 100 / 0 / 1]

Toner Remain

8 801

*CTL

[0 to 100/ 0 / 1]

These SPs display the percent of toner remaining for each color. This SP allows the user
to check the toner supply at any time.
Note: This precise method of measuring remaining toner supply (1% steps) is better
than other machines in the market that can only measure in increments of 10 (10%
steps).

8 801 1 K
8 801 2 Y

371

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

8 801 3 M
8 801 4 C
Cov Cnt: 0-10%
8 851

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs display the number of scanned sheets on which the coverage of each color
is from 0% to 10%.

8 851 11 0 to 2%: BK

8 851 31 5 to 7%: BK

8 851 12 0 to 2%: Y

8 851 32 5 to 7%: Y

8 851 13 0 to 2%: M

8 851 33 5 to 7%: M

8 851 14 0 to 2%: C

8 851 34 5 to 7%: C

8 851 21 3 to 4%: BK

8 851 41 8 to 10%: BK

8 851 22 3 to 4%: Y

8 851 42 8 to 10%: Y

8 851 23 3 to 4%: M

8 851 43 8 to 10%: M

8 851 24 3 to 4%: C

8 851 44 8 to 10%: C

Cov Cnt: 11-20%

8 861

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs display the number of scanned sheets on which the coverage of each color
is from 11% to 20%.

8 861 1 BK
8 861 2 Y
8 861 3 M
8 861 4 C
Cov Cnt: 21-30%
8 871

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs display the number of scanned sheets on which the coverage of each color
is from 21% to 30%.

8 871 1 BK
8 871 2 Y

372

*CTL

System SP8-xxx

8 871 3 M
8 871 4 C
Cov Cnt: 31%8 881

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs display the number of scanned sheets on which the coverage of each color
is 31% or higher.

8 881 1 BK
8 881 2 Y
8 881 3 M
8 881 4 C

8 891

Page/Toner Bottle

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs display the amount of the remaining current toner for each color.

8 891 1 BK
8 891 2 Y
8 891 3 M
8 891 4 C

8 901

Page/Toner Prev1

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs display the amount of the remaining previous toner for each color.

8 901 1 BK
8 901 2 Y
8 901 3 M
8 901 4 C

8 911

Page/Toner Prev2

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs display the amount of the remaining 2nd previous toner for each color.

8 911 1 BK

373

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

8 911 2 Y
8 911 3 M
8 911 4 C

8 921

Cov Cnt: Total

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

Displays the total coverage and total printout number for each color.

8 921 1 Coverage (%): BK

8 921 2 Coverage (%): Y
8 921 3 Coverage (%): M
8 921 4 Coverage (%): C
8 921 14 Coverage/P: BK
8 921 15 Coverage/P: Y
8 921 16 Coverage/P: M
8 921 17 Coverage/P: C
Machine Status
8 941

374

*CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the amount of time the machine spends in each operation mode. These
SPs are useful for customers who need to investigate machine operation for
improvement in their compliance with ISO Standards.

8 941 1 Operation Time

Engine operation time. Does not include time while controller

is saving data to HDD (while engine is not operating).

8 941 2 Standby Time

Engine not operating. Includes time while controller saves

data to HDD. Does not include time spent in Energy Save,
Low Power, or Off modes.

8 941 3 Energy Save Time

Includes time while the machine is performing background

printing.

8 941 4 Low Power Time

Includes time in Energy Save mode with Engine on. Includes

time while machine is performing background printing.

System SP8-xxx

8 941 5 Off Mode Time

Includes time while machine is performing background

printing. Does not include time machine remains powered off
with the power switches.

8 941 6 SC

Total time when SC errors have been staying.

8 941 7 PrtJam

Total time when paper jams have been staying during

printing.

8 941 8 OrgJam

Total time when original jams have been staying during

scanning.

8 941 9 Supply PM Unit End

Total time when toner end has been staying

8 951

AddBook Register

*CTL

These SPs count the number of events when the machine manages data registration.

8 951 1 User Code/User ID

User code registrations.

8 951 2 Mail Address

Mail address registrations.

8 951 3 Fax Destination

Fax destination registrations.

8 951 4 Group

Group destination
registrations.

8 951 5 Transfer Request

Fax relay destination

registrations for relay TX.

8 951 6 F-Code

F-Code box registrations.

8 951 7 Copy Program

Copy application registrations

with the Program (job settings)
feature.

8 951 8 Fax Program

Fax application registrations

with the Program (job settings)
feature.

8 951 9 Printer Program

Printer application
registrations with the Program
(job settings) feature.

8 951 10 Scanner Program

Scanner application
registrations with the Program
(job settings) feature.

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

[0 to 255 / 0 / 255]

375

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

8 999

Adomin. Counter List

8 999 2 Copy: Full Color

8 999 3 Copy: BW
8 999 4 Copy: Single Color
8 999 5 Copy: Two Color
8 999 6 Printer Full Color
8 999 7 Printer BW
8 999 8 Printer Single Color
8 999 9 Printer Two Color
8 999 10 Fax Print: BW
8 999 11 Fax Print: Single Color
8 999 12 A3/DLT
8 999 13 Duplex
8 999 14 Coverage: Color (%)
8 999 15 Coverage: BW (%)
8 999 16 Coverage: Color Print Page (%)
8 999 17 Coverage: BW Print Page (%)
8 999 101 Transmission Total: Color
8 999 102 Transmission Total: BW
8 999 103 FAX Transmission
8 999 104 Scanner Transmission: Color
8 999 105 Scanner Transmission: BW

376

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

Displays the total coverage and total printout number for each color.

8 999 1 Total

*CTL

Input and Output Check Tables

Input and Output Check Tables

Input Check Table
When entering the Input Check mode, 8 digits display the result for a section. Each digit corresponds to a
different device as shown in the table.
Bit No.

Result

0 or 1

0 or 1

0 or 1

0 or 1

0 or 1

0 or 1

0 or 1

0 or 1

Copier

5803

Description

Reading
0

5803 1 C-Dev. Mtr:LOCK

Normal

Lock

5803 2 C-Drum Mtr:LOCK

Normal

Lock

5803 3 Bk-Drum/Dev. Mtr:LOCK

Normal

Lock

5803 4 ITB Mtr:LOCK

Normal

Lock

5803 5 Fusing/P-Exit Mtr:LOCK

Normal

Lock

5803 6 Electrical FAN:LOCK

Normal

Lock

5803 7 Fusing Fan:LOCK

Normal

Lock

5803 8 Dev. Front Fan:LOCK

Normal

Lock

5803 9 Dev. Rear Fan:LOCK

Normal

Lock

5803 10 Fusing Exit Fan:LOCK

Normal

Lock

5803 11 LD Unit FAN:LOCK

Normal

Lock

5803 12 Jun. Gate SOL Fan:LOCK

Normal

Lock

5803 13 Fusing:New Detection

New

Not new

5803 14 Fusing:Area Detection

Not detected

Detected

5803 15 Zero Cross

377

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

5803 16 Regist Sensor

Paper detected

No paper detected

5803 17 Drum Phase Sn:Bk

Actuator not detected

Actuator detected

5803 18 Drum Phase Sn:Color

Actuator not detected

Actuator detected

Inverter gate open

Inverter gate close

5803 20 Duplex Exit Sensor

Paper detected

No paper detected

5803 21 Duplex Entrance Sensor

Paper detected

No paper detected

HP

Not HP

5803 23 HVPS:CB

5803 24 HVPS:T

5803 25 Right Door Open SW

Door close

Door open

5803 26 Right Lower Cover OP SW

Cover close

Cover open

5803 27 Mechanical Counter:Bk

Not set

Set

5803 28 Mechanical Counter:FC

Not set

Set

5803 29 Key Counter Set Sensor

Set

Not set

5803 30 Key Card Set Sensor

Set

Not set

5803 31 Toner End Sensor: K

End

Not end

5803 32 Toner End Sensor: C

End

Not end

5803 33 Toner End Sensor: M

End

Not end

5803 34 Toner End Sensor: Y

End

Not end

5803 35 Fusing Entrance Sensor

Paper detected

No paper detected

5803 36 Fusing Exit Sensor

Paper detected

No paper detected

5803 37 Paper Exit Sensor

Paper detected

No paper detected

5803 19 Inverter Sensor

5803 22

ID/MUSIC Sn Shutter HP Sn
(PTR Contact Sensor)

5803 38 ITB Contact HP Sensor

5803 39 ITB T-Collect Bttl:Set SW

378

HP (Contact)
Set

Not HP
(not contact)
Not set

Input and Output Check Tables

5803 40 PCU T-Collect Bttl:Set SW

Set

Not set

5803 41 PCU T-Collect Bttl Full Sn

Full

Not full

5803 42 Vertical Transport 1 Sn

Paper detected

No paper detected

5803 43 Vertical Transport 2 Sn

Paper detected

No paper detected

5803 44 Tray1 Size Detection SW

See "Table 1" below.

5803 45 Tray2 Size Detection SW

See "Table 1" below.

5803 46 Bypass Size Detection SW

See "Table 2" below.

5803 47 Bypass Length Detection Sn

Detected

Not detect

HP

Not HP

5803 49 Tray1 Paper End Sensor

Not end

End

5803 50 Tray2 Paper End Sensor

Not end

End

5803 51 Bypass Paper End Sensor

Not end

End

5803 52 Tray1 Set SW

Set

Not set

5803 53 Tray2 Set SW

Set

Not set

5803 54 Interlock SW 1

Door close

Door open

5803 55 Interlock SW 2

Door close

Door open

5803 56 DIP SW

5803 57 BCU Version

Not set

Set

Lock

Normal

Paper detected

No paper detected

Set

Not set

5803 72 1-Bin:Transport Sensor

Paper detected

No paper detected

5803 73 1-Bin:Paper Sensor

Paper detected

No paper detected

5803 74 1-Bin Set Detection

Set

Not set

Not HP

HP

5803 48 Bypass HP Sensor

5803 58 PCU T-Collect Motor Set

5803 59 Reserve Fan:LOCK
5803 70 R-Tray Paper Exit Sensor
5803 71 R-Tray Set Sensor

5803 75 Shift Tray:Half Turn Sn

379

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

5803 76 Shift Tray Set Detection

Not set

5803 77 1T PFU:Size Sensors

See "Table 4".

5803 78 1T PFU:Paper Lift Sn

Set

Not upper limit

Upper limit

5803 79 1T PFU:Paper Height Sn

5803 80 1T PFU:Right Cover SW

Open

Close

5803 81 1T PFU:Set Detection

Not set

Set

5803 82 1T PFU:Paper End Sn

Not end

End

5803 83 2T PFU:Upper Size Sns

See "Table 4" below.

5803 84 2T PFU:Lower Size Sns

5803 85 2T PFU:Upper Paper Lift Sn

Not upper limit

Upper limit

5803 86 2T PFU:Lower Paper Lift Sn

Not upper limit

Upper limit

5803 87 2T PFU:Upper Paper Height Sn

5803 88 2T PFU:Lower Paper Height Sn

Open

Close

5803 90 2T PFU:Upper PE Sn

Not end

End

5803 91 2T PFU:Lower PE Sn

Not end

End

5803 92 2T PFU:V-Transport Sn

Paper detected

No paper detected

5803 94 LD OFF Check:Factory

5803 200 Scanner HP Sensor

Not HP

HP

5803 201 Platen Cover Sensor

Open

Close

5803 89 2T PFU:Right Cover SW

Table 1: Paper Size Switch (Tray 1/ 2)

Switch 1 is used for tray set detection.
0: Pushed, 1: Not pushed
Models
North America

380

Bit
Europe/Asia

Input and Output Check Tables

11" x 17" SEF*1

A3 SEF*1

(A3 SEF)

(11" x 17" SEF)

8.5" x 14" SEF *2

B4 SEF *2

(B4 SEF)

(8.5" x 14" SEF)

A4 SEF

A4 SEF

8.5" x 11" SEF

8.5" x 11" SEF

B5 SEF

B5 SEF

11" x 81/2" LEF*3

A4 LEF*3

(A4 LEF)

(11" x 81/2" LEF)

10.5" x 7.25" LEF*4

B5 LEF*4

(B5 LEF)

(10.5" x 7.25" LEF)

A5 LEF

A5 LEF

*1: The machine detects either 11" x 17" SEF or A3 SEF, depending on the setting of SP 5-181-002
(Tray 1) or SP 5-181-006 (Tray 2).
*2: The machine detects either 8.5" x 14" SEF or B4 SEF, depending on the setting of SP 5-181-003
(Tray 1) or SP 5-181-007 (Tray 2).
*3: The machine detects either 11" x 81/2" LEF or A4 LEF, depending on the setting of SP 5-181-001
(Tray 1) or SP 5-181-005 (Tray 2).
*4: The machine detects either B5 LEF or 10.5" x 7.25" LEF, depending on the setting of SP 5-181-004
(Tray 1) or SP 5-181-008 (Tray 2).

Table 2: Paper Size (By-pass Table)

0: ON, 1: OFF
By-pass Paper Size Sensor

Length Sensor

NA

EU/ASIA

HLT SEF

B6 SEF

HLT SEF

A5 SEF

HLT SEF

A5 SEF

LT/LG SEF*1

A4 SEF

bit3

Bit2

Bit1

Bit0

1
0

381

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

By-pass Paper Size Sensor

Length Sensor

NA

EU/ASIA

LT/LG SEF*1

A5 LEF

DLT SEF

A3 SEF

LT LEF

A4 LEF

bit3

Bit2

Bit1

Bit0

*1: The paper size (LT or LG) can be selected with SP1-007-001.

Table 3: APS Original Size Detection

Original Size

Width Sensor

Length Sensor

Metric version

Inch version

W1

W2

W3

L1

L2

SP4-301
display

A3

11" x 17"

00000011

B4

10" x 14"

00000011

F4
8.5" x 13", 8.25" x 13",
or 8" x 13"

8.5" x 14"

00000011

A4 LEF

8.5" x 11"

00000000

B5 LEF

00000000

A4 SEF

11" x 8.5"

00000010

B5 SEF

00000010

A5 LEF/ SEF

5.5" x 8.5",
8.5" x 5.5"

00000000

SP 5126 controls the size

that is detected

Table 4: Paper Size Switch (Tray 3/ 4)

"Bit 0" is used for tray set detection. 0: Set, 1: Not set
0: Not Interrupted, 1: Interrupted

382

Input and Output Check Tables

Models

Bit

North America

Europe/Asia

11" x 17" SEF*1

A3 SEF*1

(A3 SEF)

(11" x 17" SEF)

8.5" x 14" SEF *2

B4 SEF *2

(B4 SEF)

(8.5" x 14" SEF)

A4 SEF

A4 SEF

B5 SEF

B5 SEF

8.5" x 11" SEF

8.5" x 11" SEF

11" x 81/2" LEF*3

A4 LEF*3

(A4 LEF)

(11" x 81/2" LEF)

10.5" x 7.25" LEF*4

B5 LEF*4

(B5 LEF)

(10.5" x 7.25" LEF)

A5 LEF

A5 LEF

A5 SEF

A5 SEF

*1: The machine detects either 11" x 17" SEF or A3 SEF, depending on the setting of SP 5-181-010 (Tray
3) or SP 5-181-014 (Tray 4).
*2: The machine detects either 8.5" x 14" SEF or B4 SEF, depending on the setting of SP 5-181-011 (Tray
3) or SP 5-181-015 (Tray 4).
*3: The machine detects either 11" x 81/2" LEF or A4 LEF, depending on the setting of SP 5-181-009
(Tray 3) or SP 5-181-013 (Tray 4).
*4: The machine detects either B5 LEF or 10.5" x 7.25" LEF, depending on the setting of SP 5-181-012
(Tray 3) or SP 5-181-016 (Tray 4).

ARDF (D366)

6007

Description

6007 1 Original Length Sn1 (B5 Sn)

Reading
0

Paper not detected

Paper detected

383

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

6007 2 Original Length Sn2 (A4 Sn)

Paper not detected

Paper detected

6007 3 Original Length Sn3 (LG Sn)

Paper not detected

Paper detected

6007 4 Original Width Sn:S

Paper not detected

Paper detected

6007 5 Original Width Sn:M

Paper not detected

Paper detected

6007 6 Original Width Sn:L

Paper not detected

Paper detected

6007 7 Original Width Sn:LL

Paper not detected

Paper detected

6007 9 Original Set Sn

Paper not detected

Paper detected

6007 10 Trailing Edge Sn

Paper not detected

Paper detected

6007 11 Skew Correction Sn

Paper not detected

Paper detected

6007 13 Registration Sn

Paper not detected

Paper detected

6007 14 Exit Sn

Paper not detected

Paper detected

ADF cover close

ADF cover open

HP

Not HP

6007 15 Feed Cover SW

6007 16 Lift Up Sn

Internal Finisher (D429)

6120

Description

6120 1 Staple Slide HP Sensor

Not HP

HP

6120 2 Punch Slide HP Sensor

Not HP

HP

6120 3 Staple HP Sensor

Not HP

HP

6120 4 Paper T-Edge Sensor

Paper not detected

Paper detected

6120 5 Pick Roller Lift Sensor

Up

Down

Paper not detected

Paper detected

Down

Up

Paper not detected

Paper detected

6120 6 Paper Detection Sensor

6120 7 Belt Roller Lift Sensor
6120 8 Entrance Sensor

384

Reading

Input and Output Check Tables

6120 9 Rear Jogger HP Sensor

HP

Not HP

6120 10 Front Jogger HP Sensor

HP

Not HP

Normal

Lock

Close

Open

6120 11 Fan Lock Signal

6120 12 Finisher Open Switch
6120 13 Punch Unit:Area Detect2

See "Table 5" below.

6120 14 Punch Unit:Area Detect1

6120 15 Paper Stack Sensor 2

HP

Not HP

6120 16 Paper Stack Sensor 1

HP

Not HP

6120 17 Punch Position Sensor

Not HP

HP

6120 18 Paper Width Sensor:A3

Paper not detected

Paper detected

6120 19 Paper Width Sensor:LD

Paper not detected

Paper detected

6120 20 Paper Width Sensor:B4

Paper not detected

Paper detected

6120 21 Paper Width Sensor:A4

Paper not detected

Paper detected

6120 22 Paper Width Sensor:16K

Paper not detected

Paper detected

6120 23 Paper Width Sensor:B5

Paper not detected

Paper detected

Full

Not full

Upper

Not upper

Paper not detected

Paper detected

6120 27 Tray Lower Sensor

Lower

Not lower

6120 28 Jogger HP Sensor

Not HP

HP

6120 29 Punch HP Sensor

Not rear

Rear Position

6120 30 Stapler Safety Sensor

No staple

Staple detected

6120 31 Staple Empty Sensor

No staple

Staple detected

Not set

Set

6120 24 Punch Hopper Full Sensor

6120 25 Tray Upper Sensor
6120 26 Relay Sensor

6120 32 Punch Unit Sensor

385

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

Table 5: Area Display

The bit 0 of these SPs shows the punch unit type.
2: 2 Holes, 2/3: 2/3 Holes, 4 (EU): 4 Holes Europe,
4 (Scan.): 4 Holes Scandinavia
SP

2/3

4 (EU)

4 (Scan.)

6120-013

Punch Unit:Area Detect2

6120-014

Punch Unit:Area Detect2

Output Check Table

Copier
5804

386

Display

Description

5804 1 Paper Feed M1:CW:190mm/s

5804 2 Paper Feed M1:CW:120mm/s

5804 3 Paper Feed M1:CW:60mm/s

5804 4 P-Feed M1:CW:60mm/s:Thick

5804 5 Paper Feed M1:CCW:190mm/s

5804 6 Paper Feed M1:CCW:120mm/s

5804 7 Paper Feed M1:CCW:60mm/s

5804 8 P-Feed M1:CCW:60mm/s:Thick

5804 9 Paper Feed M2:CW:190mm/s

5804 10 Paper Feed M2:CW:120mm/s

5804 11 Paper Feed M2:CW:60mm/s

5804 12 P-Feed M2:CW:60mm/s:Thick

5804 13 Paper Feed M2:CCW:190mm/s

5804 14 Paper Feed M2:CCW:120mm/s

Input and Output Check Tables

5804 15 Paper Feed M2:CCW:60mm/s

5804 16 P-Feed M2:CCW:60mm/s:Thick

5804 17 Bypass M:CW:190mm/s

5804 18 Bypass M:CW:120mm/s

5804 19 Bypass M:CW:60mm/s:400mA

5804 20 Bypass M:CW:60mm/s:300mA

5804 21 Bypass M:CCW:190mm/s

5804 22 Bypass M:CCW:120mm/s

5804 23 Bypass M:CCW:60mm/s

5804 24 Registration M:120mm/s

5804 25 Registration M:60mm/s

5804 26 Regist M:60mm/s:Thick

5804 27 Inverter M:CW:280mm/s

5804 29 Inverter M:CW:120mm/s

5804 31 Inverter M:CW:60mm/s

5804 33 Inverter M:280mm/s

5804 35 Inverter M:120mm/s

5804 37 Inverter M:60mm/s

5804 39 Duplex Exit M:280mm/s

5804 40 Duplex Exit M:120mm/s

5804 41 Duplex Exit M:60mm/s

5804 42 Duplex Ent. M:280mm/s

5804 43 Duplex Ent. M:120mm/s

5804 44 Duplex Ent. M:60mm/s

5804 45 Color Dev. M:120mm/s

5804 46 Color Dev. M:60mm/s

387

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

388

5804 47 Color Drum. M:120mm/s

5804 48 Color Drum. M:60mm/s

5804 49 Bk Drum M:120mm/s

5804 50 Bk Drum M:60mm/s

5804 51 ITB Motor:120mm/s

5804 52 ITB Motor:60mm/s

5804 53 Fusing/P-Exit M:120mm/s

5804 54 Fusing/P-Exit M:60mm/s

5804 55 Electrical FAN:H

5804 56 Electrical FAN:L

5804 57 Fusing Fan:H

5804 58 Fusing Fan:L

5804 59 Dev. Front FAN:H

5804 60 Dev. Front FAN:L

5804 61 Dev. Rear FAN:H

5804 62 Dev. Rear FAN:L

5804 63 Fusing Exit Fan:H

5804 64 Fusing Exit Fan:L

5804 65 LD Unit Fan:H

5804 67 PSU Fan:H

5804 69 Junc. Gate SOL Fan:H

5804 70 Junc. Gate SOL Fan:L

5804 71 Toner Supply M:Bk

5804 72 Toner Supply M:C

5804 73 Toner Supply M:M

5804 74 Toner Supply M:Y

Input and Output Check Tables

5804 75 PCU T-Collect Motor

5804 76 ID/MUSIC Sn Shutter Motor

PTR Contact Motor

5804 77 ITB Contact Motor

5804 78 Bk Dev. Clutch

5804 79 Junction Gate SOL

5804 80 PWM:Potential Sn:Bk

5804 81 PWM:Potential Sn:C

5804 82 PWM:Potential Sn:M

5804 83 PWM:Potential Sn:Y

5804 84 HVPS:Charge AC:Bk:H

5804 85 HVPS:Charge AC:Bk:L

5804 86 HVPS:Charge AC:C:H

5804 87 HVPS:Charge AC:C:L

5804 88 HVPS:Charge AC:M:H

5804 89 HVPS:Charge AC:M:L

5804 90 HVPS:Charge AC:Y:H

5804 91 HVPS:Charge AC:Y:L

5804 92 HVPS:Charge DC:Bk

5804 93 HVPS:Charge DC:C

5804 94 HVPS:Charge DC:M

5804 95 HVPS:Charge DC:Y

5804 96 HVPS:Dev. Bias:Bk

5804 97 HVPS:Dev. Bias:C

5804 98 HVPS:Dev. Bias:M

5804 99 HVPS:Dev. Bias:Y

5804 100 HVPS:PTR Bias:- PWM

389

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

390

5804 101 HVPS:PTR Bias:+ PWM

5804 102 HVPS:ITR Bias:Bk

5804 103 HVPS:ITR Bias:Bk

5804 104 HVPS:ITR Bias:Bk

5804 105 HVPS:ITR Bias:Bk

5804 106 MUSIC Sensor:R:PWM

5804 107 MUSIC Sensor:C:PWM

5804 108 MUSIC Sensor:F:PWM

5804 109 Reserve Fan:H

5804 110 Reserve Fan:LOCK

5804 111 Toner End Sn Power

5804 120 R-Tray M:280mm/s

5804 121 R-Tray M:120mm/s

5804 122 R-Tray SOL

5804 123 Shift Motor

5804 124 1T PFU:Tray Lift M

5804 125 1T PFU:Paper Feed M

5804 126 1T PFU:Paper Feed CL

5804 127 2T PFU:Relay CL

5804 128 2T PFU:Upper Feed CL

5804 129 2T PFU:Lower Feed CL

5804 130 2T PFU:P-Feed M:190mm/s

5804 131 2T PFU:P-Feed M:120mm/s

5804 132 2T PFU:P-Feed M:60mm/s

5804 133 2T PFU:Upper Tray Lift M

5804 134 2T PFU:Lower Tray Lift M

Input and Output Check Tables

5804 192 RFID ON/OFF: Bk

5804 193 RFID ON/OFF: C

5804 194 RFID ON/OFF: M

5804 195 RFID ON/OFF: Y

5804 196 RFID COM ON: Bk

5804 197 RFID COM ON: C

5804 198 RFID COM ON: M

5804 199 RFID COM ON: Y

5804 202 Scanner Lamp

5804 210 Polygon Motor

5804 216 LD1: Bk

5804 218 LD1: M

5804 220 LD1: C

5804 222 LD1: Y

Internal Finisher (D429)

6121

Description

Description

6121 1 Transport Motor

6121 2 Front Jogger Motor

6121 3 Rear Jogger Motor

6121 4 Stapler Slide Motor

6121 5 Stuck Feed-out Motor

6121 6 Pick Roller Lift Motor

6121 7 Staple Motor

6121 8 Tray Lift Motor

391

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

6121 9 Paper Detection SOL

6121 10 Paddle Rotation SOL

6121 11 Belt Roller SOL

6121 12 Junction Gate SOL

6121 13 Fan Motor

6120 14 Punch Motor

6120 15 Punch Slide Motor

6120 16 Inverter Roller SOL

ARDF (D366)
6008

392

Display

Description

6008 3 Feed Motor: Forward

Feed Motor-Forward rotation

6008 4 Feed Motor: Reverse

Feed Motor-Reverse rotation

6008 5 Transport Motor: Forward

Transport Motor- Forward rotation

6008 6 Transport Motor: Forward

Transport Motor- Forward rotation

6008 9 Feed Clutch

6008 10 Pick-up Solenoid

6008 11 Junction Gate Solenoid

6008 12 Stamp Solenoid

Stamp Solenoid

Test Pattern Printing

Test Pattern Printing

Printing Test pattern: SP2-109
Some of these test patterns are used for copy image adjustments but most are used primarily for design
testing.
Do not operate the machine until the test pattern is printed out completely. Otherwise, an SC occurs.
1. Enter the SP mode and select SP2-109-003.
2. Enter the number for the test pattern that you want to print and press [#].

3. When you want to select the single color of Magenta, Yellow or Cyan for printing a test pattern, select
the color with SP2-109-005 (2: Magenta, 3: Yellow, 4: Cyan).
4. When you want to change the density of printing a test pattern, select the density with SP2-109-006
to -009 for each color.
If you select "0" with SP2-109-006 to -009, the color to be adjusted to "0" does not come up
on a test pattern.
5. When you are prompted to confirm your selection, touch "Yes" to select the test pattern for printing.
6. Touch "Copy Window" to open the copy window, then select the settings for the test print (paper size
etc.).
If you want to use black and white printing, touch "Black & White" on the LCD. If you want to
use color printing, touch "Full Colour" on the LCD.
7. Press the "Start" key to start the test print.
8. After checking the test pattern, touch "SP Mode" on the LCD to return to the SP mode display.
9. Reset all settings to the default values.
10. Touch "Exit" twice to exit SP mode.
No.

Pattern

No.

Pattern

None

11

Independent Pattern (1dot)

Vertical Line (1dot)

12

Independent Pattern (2dot)

Vertical Line (2dot)

13

Independent Pattern (4dot)

Horizontal Line (1dot)

14

Ttrimming Area

Horizontal Line (2dot)

16

Hound's Tooth Check (Horizontal)

393

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

394

Grid Vertical Line

17

Band (Horizontal)

Grid Horizontal Line

18

Band (Vertical)

Grid Pattern Small

19

Checkered Flag Pattern

Grid Pattern Large

20

Grayscale (Vertical Margin)

Argyle Patter Small

21

Grayscale (Horizontal Margin)

10

Argyle Patter Large

23

Full Dot Pattern

Printer Service Mode

Printer Service Mode

SP1-XXX (Service Mode)
1001

Bit Switch

001 Bit Switch 1

bit 0

DFU

bit 1

DFU

bit 2

DFU

bit 3

No I/O Timeout

0: Disable

1: Enable

Enable: The MFP I/O Timeout setting will have no effect. I/O Timeouts will never occur.
bit 4

SD Card Save Mode

0: Disable

1: Enable

Enable: Print jobs will be saved to an SD Card in the GW SD slot ( "Card Save
Function" in "System Maintenance" chapter of the Field Service Manual).
bit 5

DFU

bit 6

DFU

bit 7

[RPCS,PCL]: Printable area frame border

0: Disable

1: Enable

Enable: The machine prints all RPCS and PCL jobs with a border on the edges of the
printable area.
1001

Bit Switch

395

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

002 Bit Switch 2

bit 0

DFU

bit 1

DFU

bit 2

Applying a collation Type

Shift Collate

Normal Collate

A collation type (shift or normal) will be applied to all jobs that do not already have a
Collate Type configured.

If #5-0 is enabled, this Bit Switch has no effect.

bit 3

[PCL5e/c,PS]: PDL Auto Switching

0: Enable

1: Disable

Disable: The MFPs ability to change the PDL processor mid-job.

Some host systems submit jobs that contain both PS and PCL5e/c. If Auto PDL switching
is disabled, these jobs will not be printed properly.

1001

396

bit 4

DFU

bit 5

DFU

bit 6

DFU

bit 7

DFU

Bit Switch

Printer Service Mode

003 Bit Switch 3

bit 0

DFU

bit 1

DFU

bit 2

[PCL5e/c]: Legacy HP compatibility

0: Disable

1: Enable

Enable: Uses the same left margin as older HP models such as HP4000/HP8000.
In other words, the left margin defined in the job (usually "<ESC>*r0A") will be changed
to "<ESC>*r1A"

1001

bit 3

DFU

bit 4

DFU

bit 5

DFU

bit 6

DFU

bit 7

DFU

Bit Switch

004 Bit Switch 4 DFU

bit 0

DFU

bit 1

DFU

bit 2

DFU

bit 3

IPDS print-side reversal

0: Disable

1: Enable

If enabled, the simplex pages of IPDS jobs will be printed on the front side because of
printing on the back side of the page. This might reduce printing speed.

1001

bit 4

DFU

bit 5

DFU

bit 6

DFU

bit 7

DFU

Bit Switch

005 Bit Switch 5

397

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

Show "Collate Type", "Staple Type" and "Punch

Type" buttons on the operation panel.
bit 0

Disable

Enable

If enabled, users will be able to configure a Collate Type, Staple Type, and Punch Type
from the operation panel. The available types will depend on the device and configured
options.
After enabling the function, the settings will appear under:
"User Tools > Printer Features > System"

bit 1

Multiple copies if a paper size or type mismatch

occurs

0: Disable
(Single
copy)

1: Enable
(Multiple copy)

If a paper size or type mismatch occurs during the printing of multiple copies, only a
single copy is output by default. Using this BitSw, the device can be configured to print
all copies even if a paper mismatch occurs.
bit 2

DFU

bit 3

[PS] PS Criteria

Pattern3

Pattern1

Change the number of PS criterion used by the PS interpreter to determine whether a

job is PS data or not.
Pattern3: includes most PS commands.
Pattern1: A small number of PS tags and headers
bit 4

Increase max number of the stored jobs to 1000

jobs.

Disable
(100)

Enable (1000)

Enable: Changes the maximum number of jobs that can be stored on the HDD via Job
Type settings to 1000. The default is 100.
bit 5

Face-up output

Disable

Enable

Enable: All print jobs will be output face-up in the destination tray.
bit 6

Method for determining the image rotation for the

edge to bind on.

0: Disable

1: Enable

If enabled, the image rotation will be performed as they were in the specifications of
older models for the binding of pages of mixed orientation jobs.
The old models are below:
- PCL: Pre-04A models
- PS/PDF/RPCS:Pre-05S models

398

Printer Service Mode

bit 7

1001

Letterhead mode printing

1: Enable
(Duplex)

0: Disable

1: Enable

Bit Switch

006 Bit Switch 6 DFU

1001

0: Disable

Bit Switch

007 Bit Switch 7

Print path
bit 0

bit 1
to 7

If enabled, simplex pages (in mixed simplex/duplex PS/PCL5 jobs only) and the last
page of an odd paged duplex job (PS, PCL5, PCL6), are always routed through the
duplex unit. Not having to switch paper paths increases the print speed slightly.
-

008 Bit Switch 8

bit 0

DFU

bit 1

DFU

bit 2

DFU

bit 3

[PCL,PS]: Allow BW jobs to print without requiring

User Code

Disable

Enable

1001

DFU

Bit Switch

Enable: BW jobs submitted without a user code will be printed even if usercode
authentication is enabled.
Color jobs will not be printed without a valid user code.
bit 4

DFU

bit 5

DFU

bit 6

DFU

bit 7

DFU

399

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

1001

Bit Switch

005 Bit Switch 9

PDL Auto Detection timeout of jobs submitted via
USB or Parallel Port (IEEE 1284).
bit 0

0
"Disabled
(Immediatel
y)"

1
"Enabled
(10 seconds)"

To be used if PDL auto-detection fails. A failure of PDL autodetection doesn't necessarily

mean that the job can't be printed. This bit switch tells the device whether to time-out
immediately (default) upon failure or to wait 10 seconds.

3
bit 1

DFU

bit 2

Job Cancel

Disabled
(Not
cancelled)

Enabled
(Cancelled)

If this bit switch, all jobs will be cancelled after a jam occurs.
Note: If this bitsw is enabled, printing under the following conditions might result in
problems:
- Job submission via USB or Parallel Port
- Spool printing (WIM >Configuration > Device Settings > System)
bit 3

PCL/PS bypass tray paper rotation (SEF/LEF)

0: Disable

1: Enable

This bitsw causes the device to revert to the behavior of previous generations. It only
takes effect if "Bypass Tray Setting Priority" = "Driver/Command".
Previous spec (bitsw=1): If a standard sized paper mismatch occurred in the bypass
tray, the MFP always prompted for SEF paper.
If this bitsw=0 (default) then in the event of a standard sized paper mismatch, the MFP
will always prompt for paper of the rotation (SEF/LEF) determined by the MFP bypass
tray paper setting or by the bypass tray sensor.
Bit 4
to 7
1003
1003 1

DFU

[Clear Setting]
Initialize Printer System
Initializes settings in the "System" menu of the user mode.

1003 3 Delete Program

400

Printer Service Mode

1004
1004 1

1005
1005 1

1006

[Print Summary]
Print Summary
Prints the service summary sheet (a summary of all the controller settings).
[Display Version]
Disp. Version
Displays the version of the controller firmware.
[Sample/Locked Print]

*CTL

0: Linked, 1: On

Enables and disables the document server. When you select "0," the document server is
1006 1 enabled or disabled in accordance with Copy Service Mode SP5-967. When you select
"1," the document server is enabled regardless of Copy Service Mode SP5-967.
[Data Recall]
1101

Recalls a set of gamma settings. This can be either a) the factory setting, b) the previous
setting, or c) the current setting.

1101 1 Factory
1101 2 Previous
1101 3 Current

*CTL

1101 4 ACC

1102

1102 1

1103

[Resolution Setting]
Selects the printing mode (resolution) for the printer gamma adjustment.
2400x600 Photo, 1800x600 Photo, 600 x 600 Photo, 2400x600 Text, 1800x600, Text,
600x600 Text
[Test Page]
Prints the test page to check the color balance before and after the gamma adjustment.

1103 1 Color Gray Scale

1103 2 Color Pattern
401

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

1104

[Gamma Adjustment]
Adjusts the printer gamma for the mode selected in the "Mode Selection" menu.

1104 1 Black: Highlight

1104 2 Black: Shadow
1104 3 Black: Middle

1104 4 Black: IDmax

1104 21 Cyan: Highlight

*CTL

[0 to 30 / 15 / 1/step ]

*CTL

[0 to 30 / 15 / 1/step ]

1104 22 Cyan: Shadow

1104 23 Cyan: Middle
1104 24 Cyan: IDmax
1104 41 Magenta: Highlight
1104 42 Magenta: Shadow
1104 43 Magenta: Middle
1104 44 Magenta: IDmax
1104 61 Yellow: Highlight
1104 62 Yellow: Shadow
1104 63 Yellow: Middle
1104 64 Yellow: IDmax
[Save Tone Control Value]
1105

Stores the print gamma adjusted with the "Gamma Adj." menu item as the current setting.
Before the machine stores the new "current setting", it moves the data currently stored as the
"current setting" to the "previous setting" memory storage location.

1105 1 Save Tone Control Value

1106

402

[Toner Limit]
Adjusts the maximum toner amount for image development.

Printer Service Mode

1106 1 Toner Limit Value

*CTL

[100 to 400 / 260 / 1 %/step ]

403

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

Scanner SP Mode
SP1-xxx (System and Others)
1001

[Scan Nv Version]

1001 5 -

3
1004

*CTL

[Compression Type]
Selects the compression type for binary picture processing.

1004 1 Compression Type

*CTL

[1 to 3 / 1 / 1/step ]
1: MH, 2: MR, 3: MMR

[Erase margin]
1005

Creates an erase margin for all edges of the scanned image.

If the machine has scanned the edge of the original, create a margin. This SP is activated
only when the machine uses TWAIN scanning.

1005 1 Range from 0 to 5 mm

1009

[Remote scan disable]

*CTL

*CTL

[0 to 5 / 0 / 1 mm/step ]
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
0: enable, 1: disable

1009 1 Enable or disable remote scan.

1010

[Non Display Clear Light PDF] *CTL

[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
0: Display, 1: No display

1010 1 Enable or disable remote scan.

1011

[Org count Disp]

*CTL

[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]

Selects the original counter display.

1011 1 0: Displays remaining memory for the original scanning.
1: Displays original counter.

404

Scanner SP Mode

1012

1012 1

1013

[UserInfo release]

*CTL

[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
0: No, 1: Yes

Clear the following settings:

Address, Sender, Text / Subject, Filename

[Multimedia Function Setting]

*CTL

[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
0: OFF, 1: ON

1013 1 On or off multimedia function

SP2-XXX (Scanning-image quality)

[Compression Level (Grayscale)]
2021

Selects the compression ratio for grayscale processing mode (JPEG) for the three settings that
can be selected at the operation panel.

2021 1 Comp 1: 5-95

[5 to 95 / 20 / 1 /step ]

2021 2 Comp 2: 5-95

[5 to 95 / 40 / 1 /step ]

2021 3 Comp 3: 5-95

*CTL

[5 to 95 / 65 / 1 /step ]

2021 4 Comp 4: 5-95

[5 to 95 / 80 / 1 /step ]

2021 5 Comp 5: 5-95

[5 to 95 / 95 / 1 /step ]

[Compression ratio of ClearLight PDF]

2024

Selects the compression ratio for clearlight PDF for the two settings that can be selected at
the operation panel.

2024 1 Compression Ratio (Normal)

2024 2 Compression Ratio (High)

*CTL

[5 to 95 / 25 / 1 /step ]
[5 to 95 / 20 / 1 /step ]

405

3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

406